Ow350 R1150 PDF

Ovation I/O Reference Manual
OW350_R1150
(For use with Ovation 3.5 systems)

September 2012
Copyright Notice
Since the equipment explained in this document has a variety of uses, the user and those
responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves as to the acceptability of each
application and use of the equipment. Under no circumstances will Emerson Process
Management be responsible or liable for any damage, including indirect or consequential losses
resulting from the use, misuse, or application of this equipment.
The text, illustrations, charts, and examples included in this manual are intended solely to explain
TM
the use and application of the Ovation Unit. Due to the many variables associated with specific
uses or applications, Emerson Process Management cannot assume responsibility or liability for
actual use based upon the data provided in this manual.
No patent liability is assumed by Emerson Process Management with respect to the use of
circuits, information, equipment, or software described in this manual.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any
form or by any means, including electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise
without the prior express written permission of Emerson Process Management.
The document is the property of and contains Proprietary Information owned by Emerson Process
Management and/or its subcontractors and suppliers. It is transmitted in confidence and trust, and
the user agrees to treat this document in strict accordance with the terms and conditions of the
agreement under which it was provided.
This manual is printed in the USA and is subject to change without notice.
Ovation is the mark of Emerson Process Management. Other marks are the property of their
respective holders.
Copyright © Emerson Process Management Power & Water Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved.
Emerson Process Management
Power & Water Solutions
200 Beta Drive
Pittsburgh, PA 15238
USA
E-Mail: Technical.Communications@Emerson.com
Web site: https://www.ovationusers.com
Contents
1 Introduction to the Ovation Input/Output (I/O) Reference Manual 1

1.1 What is the purpose of Ovation I/O modules? .................................................................... 1
1.2 I/O reference terminology .................................................................................................... 1
2 Electronic Module (Emod) and Personality Module (Pmod) I/O

combinations 5
2.1 What are the I/O module types? ......................................................................................... 6
2.1.1 Analog Input modules ............................................................................................ 7
2.1.2 Analog Output modules ........................................................................................ 11
2.1.3 Digital Input modules ............................................................................................ 12
2.1.4 Digital Output modules ......................................................................................... 17
2.1.5 Bus interface modules .......................................................................................... 18
2.1.6 Specialty Modules ................................................................................................ 20
2.2 Emod - Pmod Combinations ............................................................................................. 23
3 I/O Module general information 25

3.1 Ovation I/O module features ............................................................................................. 25
3.2 Installing Ovation modules ................................................................................................ 26
3.3 Ovation Module Configuration and Status ........................................................................ 26
3.4 Ovation Module Diagnostic LEDs ..................................................................................... 27
3.5 What is involved in the Replacement of User Serviceable Fuses? .................................. 27
3.5.1 Electronics Module Fuses .................................................................................... 27
3.5.2 Personality module fuses ..................................................................................... 28
3.5.3 Ovation Cabinet Fuses ......................................................................................... 29
3.6 Personality Module Jumpers ............................................................................................. 29
3.7 I/O environmental specifications ....................................................................................... 30
3.8 Standard module components .......................................................................................... 32
3.8.1 Marshalling Base Unit .......................................................................................... 35
3.9 Relay module components ................................................................................................ 36
4 Analog Input modules 39

4.1 Analog Input module (13-Bit) - (AI-13) .............................................................................. 39
4.1.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (AI-13) .................................................................. 39
4.1.2 Personality modules and jumper settings (Pmod) - (AI-13) ................................. 40
4.1.3 Subsystems - (AI-13) ........................................................................................... 40
4.1.4 External power supply information - (AI-13)......................................................... 41
4.1.5 Terminal block wiring information - (AI-13) .......................................................... 42
4.1.6 Field connection wiring diagrams - (AI-13) .......................................................... 44
4.1.7 Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark) - (AI-13) ......................................... 45
4.1.8 Thermocouple Personality module functionality & coefficients - (AI-13) & (HSAI)
............................................................................................................................. 46
OW350_R1150 i
Table of Contents
4.1.9 Register configuration/address information - (AI-13) ........................................... 49

4.1.10 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (AI-13, AI-14 & HSAI) ........................................... 51
4.1.11 Specifications - (AI-13) ......................................................................................... 52
4.2 Analog Input module (14-Bit) - (AI-14) .............................................................................. 53
4.2.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (AI-14) .................................................................. 53
4.2.2 Personality modules (Pmod) - (AI-14) .................................................................. 54
4.2.3 Subsystems - (AI-14) ........................................................................................... 54
4.2.4 External power supplies - (AI-14) ......................................................................... 54
4.2.5 Terminal block wiring information - (AI-14) .......................................................... 55
4.2.6 Field connection wiring diagrams - (AI-14) .......................................................... 57
4.2.7 Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark) - (AI-14) ......................................... 58
4.2.8 Module block diagram - (AI-14) ............................................................................ 59
4.2.9 Register configuration/address information - (AI-14) ........................................... 59
4.2.11 Specifications - (AI-14) ......................................................................................... 62
4.3 High Speed Analog Input Module (14-Bit) - (HSAI) .......................................................... 63
4.3.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (HSAI) .................................................................. 63
4.3.2 Personality modules (Pmod) - (HSAI) .................................................................. 63
4.3.3 Subsystems - (HSAI)............................................................................................ 64
4.3.4 External power supply information - (HSAI) ......................................................... 64
4.3.5 Thermocouple Personality module functionality & coefficients - (AI-13) & (HSAI)
............................................................................................................................. 65
4.3.6 Temperature sensor Personality module (1C31116G04) - (HSAI) ...................... 68
4.3.7 Module block diagram - (HSAI) ............................................................................ 69
4.3.8 Terminal block wiring information - (HSAI) .......................................................... 70
4.3.9 Field connection diagrams - (HSAI) ..................................................................... 71
4.3.10 Field connection wiring diagrams (Pmod 1C31227) - (HSAI) .............................. 72
4.3.11 Field connection wiring diagrams (Pmod 1C31227) (CE Mark) - (HSAI) ............ 73
4.3.12 Field connection wiring diagrams (Pmod 1C31116) - (HSAI) .............................. 74
4.3.13 Field connection wiring diagrams, Pmod (Pmod 1C31116) (CE Mark) - (HSAI) . 75
4.3.14 Input address locations (Group 1) - (HSAI).......................................................... 76
4.3.18 Module register information - (HSAI) ................................................................... 84
4.3.20 Specifications - (HSAI) ......................................................................................... 85
4.4 HART Analog Input module - (HAI) ................................................................................... 86
4.4.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (HAI) .................................................................... 86
4.4.2 Personality modules (Pmod) - (HAI) .................................................................... 87
4.4.3 Subsystems - (HAI) .............................................................................................. 87
4.4.4 Module block diagram information - (HAI) ........................................................... 88
4.4.5 External power supply information - (HAI) ........................................................... 89
4.4.6 Terminal block wiring information - (HAI) ............................................................. 90
4.4.7 Field connection wiring diagrams - (HAI) ............................................................. 91
4.4.8 Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark) - (HAI) ........................................... 92
4.4.9 Field wiring cable requirements - (HAI) ................................................................ 93
4.4.10 Register configuration/address information - (HAI) .............................................. 96
4.4.11 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (HAI) ..................................................................... 97
4.4.12 Specifications - (HAI) ........................................................................................... 98
4.5 HART High Performance Analog Input module - (HHPAI) ............................................... 99
4.5.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (HHPAI) ............................................................... 99
4.5.2 Personality modules (Pmod) - (HHPAI) ............................................................. 100
4.5.3 Subsystems - (HHPAI) ....................................................................................... 100
4.5.4 Field wiring diagram - (HHPAI) .......................................................................... 101
ii OW350_R1150
Table of Contents
4.5.5 Field wiring diagram (CE Mark) - (HHPAI) ......................................................... 103

4.5.6 Power supply information - (HHPAI) .................................................................. 104
4.5.7 Terminal block wiring information - (HHPAI) ...................................................... 105
4.5.8 Field wiring cable requirements - (HHPAI) ......................................................... 106
4.5.9 Field connection wiring diagrams - (HHPAI) ...................................................... 106
4.5.10 Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark) - (HHPAI) .................................... 108
4.5.11 Personality Jumper Information - (HHPAI) ......................................................... 109
4.5.12 Register configuration/address information - (HHPAI) ....................................... 110
4.5.13 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (HHPAI) .............................................................. 113
4.5.14 Specifications - (HHPAI) .................................................................................... 113
4.6 RTD module (4 Channel) - (RTD-4) ................................................................................ 114
4.6.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (RTD-4) .............................................................. 114
4.6.2 Personality modules (Pmod) - (RTD-4).............................................................. 115
4.6.3 Subsystems - (RTD-4) ....................................................................................... 115
4.6.4 Terminal block wiring information (Pmod 1C31164G01) - (RTD-4) ................... 115
4.6.5 Terminal block wiring information (Pmod 1C31164G02) - (RTD-4) ................... 116
4.6.6 Systems using (Pmod 1C31164G01) - (RTD-4) ................................................ 118
4.6.7 Field Wiring (Pmod 1C31164G02) - (RTD-4)..................................................... 119
4.6.8 Field wiring diagrams (Pmod 1C31164G02) (CE Mark) - (RTD-4) .................... 120
4.6.9 RTD ranges - (RTD-4)........................................................................................ 121
4.6.10 Register configuration/address information - (RTD-4) ....................................... 122
4.6.11 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (RTD-4)............................................................... 123
4.6.12 Specifications - (RTD-4) ..................................................................................... 123
4.7 RTD module (8-Channel) - (RTD-8) ................................................................................ 124
4.7.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (RTD-8) .............................................................. 124
4.7.2 Personality modules (Pmod) - (RTD-8).............................................................. 124
4.7.3 Subsystems - (RTD-8) ....................................................................................... 124
4.7.4 Terminal block wiring information (Pmod 5X00121G01) - (RTD-8) ................... 125
4.7.5 Module and field connection wiring - (RTD-8).................................................... 126
4.7.6 Module and field connection wiring (CE Mark) - (RTD-8) .................................. 128
4.7.7 Ranges - (RTD-8)............................................................................................... 129
4.7.8 Register configuration/address information - (RTD-8) ....................................... 130
4.7.9 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (RTD-8)............................................................... 131
4.7.10 Specifications - (RTD-8) ..................................................................................... 132
4.8 16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input module (Windows Ovation 3.4 and above) .............. 133
4.8.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - 16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input ..................... 133
4.8.2 Personality modules (Pmod) - 16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input ..................... 134
4.8.3 Subsystems - 16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input ............................................... 134
4.8.4 Terminal block wiring information 16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input (2-Wire) .. 134
4.8.5 Terminal block wiring information - 16 Channel Analog Input 4-20mA (4-Wire) 135
4.8.6 Field connection wiring diagrams - 16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input (2-Wire) 137
4.8.7 Field connection wiring diagrams - 16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input (4-Wire) 138
4.8.8 Register configuration/status information - 16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input .. 138
4.8.9 Diagnostic LEDs - 16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input ........................................ 142
4.8.10 Specifications - 16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input ............................................ 142
5 Analog Output modules 145

5.1 Analog Output module - (AO).......................................................................................... 145
5.1.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (AO) ................................................................... 146
5.1.2 Personality modules (Pmod) - (AO) ................................................................... 146
5.1.3 Subsystems - (AO) ............................................................................................. 146
5.1.4 Terminal block wiring information - (AO) ............................................................ 147
5.1.5 Field connection wiring diagrams (1C31129G01/G02) (simplex) - (AO) ........... 148
5.1.6 Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark) - (AO) .......................................... 149
OW350_R1150 iii
Table of Contents
5.1.7 Field connection wiring diagrams (1C31129G02) (Redundant) - (AO) .............. 150
5.1.8 Cable assembly routing configuration (Redundant) - (AO) ................................ 151
5.1.9 Register configuration/address information - (AO) ............................................ 151
5.1.10 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (AO) .................................................................... 153
5.1.11 Specifications - (AO) .......................................................................................... 154
5.2 HART Analog Output module - (HAO) ............................................................................ 156
5.2.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (HAO) ................................................................. 156
5.2.2 Personality modules (Pmod) - (HAO) ................................................................ 156
5.2.3 Subsystems - (HAO) .......................................................................................... 156
5.2.4 Module block diagrams - (HAO) ......................................................................... 157
5.2.5 External power supply information - (HAO) ....................................................... 158
5.2.6 Terminal block wiring information - (HAO) ......................................................... 159
5.2.7 Field connection wiring diagrams - (HAO) ........................................................ 160
5.2.8 Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark) - (HAO) ........................................ 161
5.2.9 Field wiring cable requirements - (HAO) ............................................................ 162
5.2.10 Open loop detect register - (HAO) ..................................................................... 162
5.2.11 Register configuration/address information - (HAO) ......................................... 163
5.2.12 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (HAO) ................................................................. 165
5.2.13 Specifications - (HAO) ........................................................................................ 166
5.3 HART High Performance Analog Output module - (HHPAO) ......................................... 168
5.3.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (HHPAO) ............................................................ 168
5.3.2 Personality modules (Pmod) - (HHPAO) ........................................................... 168
5.3.3 Subsystems - (HHPAO) ..................................................................................... 168
5.3.4 Module Block Diagrams - (HHPAO) ................................................................... 169
5.3.5 Terminal block wiring information - (HHPAO) .................................................... 171
5.3.6 Field Connection wiring diagrams (Emod) - (HHPAO) ...................................... 172
5.3.7 Field Connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark) - (HHPAO) .................................. 173
5.3.8 Field Connection wiring diagrams (Pmod 5X00211G03) - (HHPAO) ................ 174
5.3.9 Field Connection wiring diagrams (Pmod 5X00211G03) (CE Mark) - (HHPAO)175
5.3.10 Field wiring cable requirements - (HHPAO) ....................................................... 176
5.3.11 Register configuration/address information - (HHPAO) ..................................... 176
5.3.12 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (HHPAO) ............................................................ 179
5.3.13 Specifications - (HHPAO)................................................................................... 180
6 Digital Input modules 181

6.1 Digital Input module - (DI) ............................................................................................... 182
6.1.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (DI) ..................................................................... 182
6.1.2 Personality modules (Pmod) - (DI) ..................................................................... 182
6.1.3 Subsystems - (DI) .............................................................................................. 182
6.1.4 External power supply information single-ended (front end) - (DI) .................... 184
6.1.5 External power supply information differential (front end) - (DI) ........................ 185
6.1.6 Terminal block wiring information - (DI) ............................................................. 186
6.1.7 Field wiring configuration considerations - (DI) .................................................. 187
6.1.8 Field connection wiring diagrams - (DI) ............................................................. 187
6.1.9 Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark) - (DI) ............................................ 188
6.1.10 Register configuration/address information - (DI) .............................................. 189
6.1.11 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (DI) ...................................................................... 190
6.1.12 Specifications - (DI) ............................................................................................ 190
6.2 Redundant Digital Input module (Windows Ovation 3.2 and above) - (RDI) .................. 192
6.2.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (RDI) .................................................................. 193
6.2.2 Personality modules (Pmod) - (RDI) .................................................................. 193
6.2.3 Subsystems - (RDI) ............................................................................................ 193
6.2.4 Terminal block wiring information - (RDI) ........................................................... 193
6.2.5 Field connection wiring diagrams - (RDI) ........................................................... 194
iv OW350_R1150
Table of Contents
6.2.6 Cable assembly routing - (RDI) .......................................................................... 195

6.2.7 Module block diagrams - (RDI) .......................................................................... 196
6.2.8 Functional block diagram - (RDI) ....................................................................... 197
6.2.9 Signal propagation delay - (RDI) ........................................................................ 199
6.2.10 Voltage-current curve - (RDI) ............................................................................. 200
6.2.11 Switching Input Voltage Current Curve - (RDI) .................................................. 201
6.2.12 Logic Card Digital Debounce Filter Propagation Delay - (RDI).......................... 202
6.2.13 Register configuration/address information - (RDI) ........................................... 202
6.2.14 Blown Fuse Detection - (RDI) ............................................................................ 204
6.2.15 Cross Cable in Place Circuit - (RDI) .................................................................. 205
6.2.16 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (RDI) ................................................................... 205
6.2.17 Specifications -(RDI) .......................................................................................... 205
6.3 Compact Digital Input module - (CompactDI) ................................................................. 207
6.3.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (CompactDI) ...................................................... 207
6.3.2 Personality modules (Pmod) - (CompactDI) ...................................................... 207
6.3.3 Subsystems - (CompactDI) ................................................................................ 208
6.3.4 External Power Supply Information - (CompactDI) ............................................ 208
6.3.5 Terminal block wiring information - (CompactDI) ............................................... 209
6.3.6 Field wiring considerations - (CompactDI) ......................................................... 210
6.3.7 Field connection wiring diagrams - (CompactDI) ............................................... 211
6.3.8 Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark) - (CompactDI) ............................. 219
6.3.9 Register configuration/address information - (CompactDI) ................................ 226
6.3.10 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (CompactDI) ....................................................... 227
6.3.11 Specifications - (CompactDI) ............................................................................. 227
6.4 Contact Digital Input module - (ContactDI) ..................................................................... 229
6.4.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (ContactDI) ........................................................ 230
6.4.2 Personality modules (Pmod) - (ContactDI) ........................................................ 230
6.4.3 Subsystems - (ContactDI) .................................................................................. 230
6.4.4 Terminal block wiring information - (ContactDI) ................................................. 230
6.4.5 Field wiring restrictions - (ContactDI) ................................................................. 231
6.4.6 Field wiring cable lengths - (ContactDI) ............................................................. 232
6.4.7 Field connection wiring diagrams (front end) - (ContactDI) ............................... 233
6.4.8 Cable impedances in field wiring - (ContactDI) .................................................. 234
6.4.9 Field connection wiring diagrams - (ContactDI) ................................................. 235
6.4.10 Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark) - (ContactDI) ............................... 236
6.4.11 Register configuration/address information - (ContactDI) & (CCDI) .................. 237
6.4.12 Power Checking (ContactDI - CCDI) ................................................................. 238
6.4.13 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (ContactDI) ......................................................... 238
6.4.14 Specifications - (ContactDI) ............................................................................... 239
6.5 Compact Contact Digital Input module - (CCDI) ............................................................. 240
6.5.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (CCDI) ................................................................ 241
6.5.2 Personality Module (Pmod) - (CCDI) ................................................................. 241
6.5.3 Subsystems - (CCDI) ......................................................................................... 241
6.5.4 Terminal block wiring information - (CCDI) ........................................................ 241
6.5.5 Field wiring restrictions - (CCDI) ........................................................................ 242
6.5.6 Field wiring cable lengths - (CCDI) .................................................................... 243
6.5.7 Cable impedances in field wiring - (CCDI) ......................................................... 244
6.5.8 Field wiring diagrams - (CCDI) ........................................................................... 245
6.5.9 Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark) - (CCDI) ....................................... 247
6.5.10 Register configuration/address information - (ContactDI) & (CCDI) .................. 249
6.5.11 Power Checking (ContactDI - CCDI) ................................................................. 250
6.5.12 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (CCDI) ................................................................ 250
6.5.13 Specifications - (CCDI) ....................................................................................... 251
6.6 Sequence of Events Digital Input module - (SEDI) ......................................................... 252
6.6.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (SEDI) ................................................................ 253
OW350_R1150 v
Table of Contents
6.6.2 Personality modules (Pmod) - (SEDI) ................................................................ 253

6.6.3 Subsystems - (SEDI).......................................................................................... 253
6.6.4 External power supply information - (SEDI) ....................................................... 253
6.6.5 Wiring information - (SEDI) ................................................................................ 253
6.6.6 Field interface - (SEDI) ....................................................................................... 254
6.6.7 Terminal block wiring information - (SEDI) ........................................................ 255
6.6.8 Field wiring configuration considerations - (SEDI) ............................................. 256
6.6.9 Field wiring diagrams configuration - (SEDI) ..................................................... 257
6.6.10 Field connection wiring diagrams - (SEDI)......................................................... 259
6.6.11 Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark) - (SEDI) ....................................... 260
6.6.12 Register configuration/address information - (SEDI) ......................................... 261
6.6.13 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (SEDI) - (SECompactDI) .................................... 262
6.6.14 Specifications - (SEDI) ....................................................................................... 262
6.7 Sequence of Events Contact Digital Input Field Interface module - (SEContactDI) ....... 264
6.7.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (SEContactDI).................................................... 264
6.7.2 Personality modules (Emod) - (SEContactDI) ................................................... 264
6.7.3 Subsystems - (SEContactDI) ............................................................................. 264
6.7.4 Field wiring restrictions - (SEContactDI) ............................................................ 265
6.7.5 Field Wiring Diagrams - (SEContactDI) ............................................................. 266
6.7.6 Field wiring cable lengths - (SEContactDI) ........................................................ 267
6.7.7 Terminal block wiring information - (SEContactDI) ............................................ 268
6.7.8 Field connection wiring diagrams - (SEContactDI) ............................................ 269
6.7.9 Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark) - (SEContactDI) ........................... 270
6.7.10 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (SEDI) - (SECompactDI) .................................... 270
6.7.11 Specifications - (SEContactDI)........................................................................... 271
6.8 Sequence of Events Compact Digital Input Field Interface module - (SECompactDI) ... 272
6.8.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (SECompactDI).................................................. 273
6.8.2 Personality modules (Pmod) - (SECompactDI) ................................................. 273
6.8.3 Subsystems - (SECompactDI) ........................................................................... 274
6.8.4 External power supply information - (SECompactDI) ........................................ 274
6.8.5 Wiring information - (SECompactDI) .................................................................. 274
6.8.6 Field wiring diagrams configuration (Front end) (G04) - (SECompactDI) .......... 275
6.8.7 Field interface - (SECompactDI) ........................................................................ 276
6.8.8 Field wiring field interface restrictions (G01-G03) - (SECompactDI) ................. 276
6.8.9 Field wiring cable lengths (G04) - (SECompactDI) ............................................ 276
6.8.10 Field Wiring Restrictions (G04) - (SECompactDI).............................................. 277
6.8.11 Terminal block wiring information - (SECompactDI) .......................................... 279
6.8.12 Field connection wiring diagrams Field Interface module (G01-3) -
(SECompactDI) .................................................................................................. 280
6.8.13 Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark) (G01-3) - (SECompactDI) ........... 287
6.8.14 Field connection wiring diagram (G04) - (SECompactDI) .................................. 294
6.8.15 Field connection wiring diagram (CE Mark) (G04) - (SECompactDI) ................ 296
6.8.16 Register configuration/address information - (SECompactDI) ........................... 298
6.8.17 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (SECompactDI) .................................................. 300
6.8.18 Specifications and ranges (G01-3) - (SECompactDI) ........................................ 301
6.8.19 Specifications and ranges (G04) - (SECompactDI) ........................................... 302
6.9 Enhanced Compact Sequence of Events Digital Input module - (ECSOEDI) ................ 304
6.9.1 Personality modules (Pmod) - (ECSOEDI) ........................................................ 305
6.9.2 Electronics modules (Emod) - (ECSOEDI) ........................................................ 305
6.9.3 One shot function - (ECSOEDI) ......................................................................... 306
6.9.4 Wire break detect function - (ECSOEDI) ........................................................... 306
6.9.5 Subsystems - (ECSOEDI) .................................................................................. 306
6.9.6 Enhanced Compact Sequence of Events Digital Input module (5X00357G01)
(FDJ) - (ECSOEDI) ............................................................................................ 307
vi OW350_R1150
Table of Contents

(FDI) - (ECSOEDI) ............................................................................................. 317
(FDI) - (ECSOEDI) ............................................................................................. 331
(FCI) - (ECSOEDI) ............................................................................................. 344
(FDW) - (ECSOEDI) ........................................................................................... 355
6.9.11 Event buffer read procedure - (ECSOEDI) ........................................................ 367
6.9.12 Register configuration/address information - (ECSOEDI) ................................. 368
6.9.13 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (ECSOEDI) ......................................................... 372
6.9.14 Environmental Specifications - (ECSOEDI) ....................................................... 374
6.10 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Input module (Windows Ovation 3.4 and above)
........................................................................................................................................ 375
6.10.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Input 375
6.10.2 Personality modules (Pmod) - 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Input 375
6.10.3 Subsystems - 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Input ......................... 375
6.10.4 Terminal block wiring information - 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital
Input ................................................................................................................... 376
6.10.5 Field connection wiring diagrams - 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital
Input ................................................................................................................... 377
6.10.6 Register configuration/status information - 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended
Digital Input ........................................................................................................ 377
6.10.7 Diagnostic LEDs - 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Input .................. 378
6.10.8 Specifications - 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Input ....................... 379
7 Digital Output modules 381

7.1 Digital Output module - (DO)........................................................................................... 382
7.1.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (DO) ................................................................... 382
7.1.2 Personality modules (Pmod) - (DO) ................................................................... 382
7.1.3 Subsystems - (DO)............................................................................................. 382
7.1.4 External power supply information - (DO) .......................................................... 383
7.1.5 Relay Panels - (DO) ........................................................................................... 383
7.1.6 Solid State Relay module for DIN Rail Layout (5A22410H01 / 5A22410H02) -
(DO).................................................................................................................... 385
7.1.7 Solid State Relay module Terminations (5A22410H01 / 5A22410H02) - (DO) . 386
7.1.8 Specifications - (LI) ............................................................................................ 387
7.1.9 G2R Style Relay module for DIN Rail Layout (5A22411H01) - (DO)................. 391
7.1.10 Blown Fuse Detection Circuit - (DO) .................................................................. 392
7.1.11 G2R Style Relay module terminations (5A22411H01) - (DO) ........................... 393
7.1.12 KUEP Style Relay module for DIN Rail Layout (5A22412G01 / 5A22412G02) -
(DO).................................................................................................................... 394
7.1.13 KUEP (2 Form C) Relay module Terminations (5A22412G01) - (DO) .............. 395
7.1.14 KUEP (Form X) Relay module terminations (5A22412G02) - (DO)................... 396
7.1.15 Terminal block wiring information - (DO) ........................................................... 397
7.1.16 Field connection wiring diagram - (DO) ............................................................. 398
7.1.17 Field connection wiring diagram (Group 1) (CE Mark) - (DO) ........................... 399
7.1.18 Wiring diagram to relay module (G2R or Solid State) locally powered - (DO) ... 400
7.1.19 Wiring diagram to relay module (G2R or Solid State) - (DO)............................. 401
7.1.20 Wiring diagram to relay module (KUEP Style) locally powered (CE Mark) - (DO)
402
7.1.21 Wiring diagram to relay module (KUEP style remotely powered (CE Mark) - (DO)
403
7.1.22 Relay panel application diagrams - (DO) ........................................................... 404
OW350_R1150 vii
Table of Contents
7.1.23 Register configuration/address information - (DO) ............................................ 407

7.1.24 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (DO) .................................................................... 408
7.1.25 Specifications - (DO) .......................................................................................... 408
7.2 High Side Digital Output (24 VDC) module (for Windows Ovation 3.0.4 and above) -
(HSDO) ............................................................................................................................ 410
7.2.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (HSDO) .............................................................. 410
7.2.2 Personality modules (Pmod) - (HSDO) .............................................................. 410
7.2.3 Subsystem - (HSDO) ......................................................................................... 410
7.2.4 Module block diagram - (HSDO) ........................................................................ 411
7.2.5 Redundant module interconnection - (HSDO) ................................................... 412
7.2.6 Field signal wiring information - (HSDO) ............................................................ 413
7.2.7 Field power wiring information for module base unit terminal blocks - (HSDO) 414
7.2.8 Module cables for High Side Digital Output 24VDC - (HSDO) .......................... 415
7.2.9 HSDO to HSDO Cable Assembly Routing Information Redundant Configuration -
(HSDO)............................................................................................................... 415
7.2.10 Module channel fault register - (HSDO) ............................................................. 416
7.2.11 Field power shutoff - (HSDO) ............................................................................. 416
7.2.12 Register configuration/address information - (HSDO) ....................................... 417
7.2.13 Diagnostics - (HSDO) ......................................................................................... 420
7.2.14 Specifications - (HSDO) ..................................................................................... 422
7.3 Relay Output - (RO) ........................................................................................................ 424
7.3.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (RO) ................................................................... 424
7.3.2 Base assemblies - (RO) ..................................................................................... 424
7.3.3 Panel kits - (RO) ................................................................................................. 425
7.3.4 External power supply information (RO) ............................................................ 425
7.3.5 Using bases (RO) ............................................................................................... 426
7.3.6 Terminal block wiring information (RO) .............................................................. 427
7.3.7 Base unit layouts - (RO) ..................................................................................... 428
7.3.8 Field connection wiring diagrams for the Relay Output module ........................ 430
7.3.9 Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark) - (RO) .......................................... 431
7.3.10 Register configuration/address information - (RO) ............................................ 432
7.3.11 Blown fuse detection circuit (RO) ....................................................................... 434
7.3.12 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs (RO) ...................................................................... 434
7.3.13 Specifications - (RO) .......................................................................................... 434
7.4 Relay Output with Contact Monitoring - (ROCM) ............................................................ 437
7.4.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (ROCM) ............................................................. 437
7.4.2 Base assemblies - (ROCM) ............................................................................... 437
7.4.3 Emod and base assembly combinations - (ROCM) ........................................... 438
7.4.4 External power supply information - (ROCM) .................................................... 438
7.4.5 Operating Temperature - (ROCM) ..................................................................... 438
7.4.6 Register configuration/address information - (ROCM) ....................................... 439
7.4.7 Base unit layouts - (ROCM) ............................................................................... 441
7.4.8 Blown fuse detection circuit - (ROCM) ............................................................... 442
7.4.9 Terminal block wiring information - (ROCM) ...................................................... 442
7.4.10 Field connection wiring diagram - (ROCM) ........................................................ 443
7.4.11 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (ROCM) .............................................................. 443
7.4.12 Specifications - (ROCM) .................................................................................... 444
7.4.13 Contact input monitoring circuits - (ROCM) ....................................................... 445
7.5 Fused Relay Output modules - (FRO) ............................................................................ 447
7.5.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (RO) ................................................................... 447
7.5.2 Base assemblies - (FRO) ................................................................................... 448
7.5.3 External power supply information - (FRO)........................................................ 448
7.5.4 Using bases - (FRO) .......................................................................................... 449
7.5.5 Terminal block wiring information - (FRO) ......................................................... 450
7.5.6 Base unit layouts - (FRO)................................................................................... 451
viii OW350_R1150
Table of Contents
7.5.7 Field connection wiring diagrams - (FRO) ......................................................... 452

7.5.8 Register configuration/address information - (FRO) .......................................... 453
7.5.9 Blown fuse detection circuit - (FRO) .................................................................. 455
7.5.10 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (FRO) .................................................................. 455
7.5.11 Specifications - (FRO) ........................................................................................ 455
7.6 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Output module (Windows Ovation 3.4 and
above) ............................................................................................................................. 458
7.6.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Output
........................................................................................................................... 458
7.6.2 Personality modules (Pmod) - 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Output
........................................................................................................................... 458
7.6.3 Subsystems - 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Output ....................... 458
7.6.4 Terminal block wiring information - 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital
Output................................................................................................................. 459
7.6.5 Field connection wiring diagram - 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital
Output................................................................................................................. 460
7.6.6 Register configuration/status information - 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended
Digital Output ..................................................................................................... 460
7.6.7 Diagnostics - 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Output........................ 463
7.6.8 Specifications - 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Output .................... 463
8 Features of the Ovation Bus modules 465

8.1 Types of the Ovation bus module ................................................................................... 465
8.2 Logic card block diagram for the Ovation bus modules .................................................. 465
8.3 DeviceNet module ........................................................................................................... 466
8.3.1 Subsystems - DeviceNet .................................................................................... 466
8.3.2 Logic card side connector pin assignments - Ovation bus modules (DP) ......... 466
8.3.3 Interface - DeviceNet ......................................................................................... 467
8.3.4 Module block - DeviceNet .................................................................................. 469
8.3.5 Terminal block pin assignments - DeviceNet ..................................................... 470
8.3.6 EMOD backplane connectors - DeviceNet ........................................................ 471
8.3.7 PMOD backplane connectors - DeviceNet ........................................................ 471
8.3.8 Diagnostic LEDs - DeviceNet ............................................................................. 472
8.3.9 Specifications - DeviceNet ................................................................................. 473
8.4 Foundation Fieldbus module ........................................................................................... 474
8.4.1 Subsystems - Foundation Fieldbus .................................................................... 474
8.4.3 Interface - Foundation Fieldbus ......................................................................... 476
8.4.4 Redundancy module - Foundation Fieldbus ...................................................... 477
8.4.5 Module block diagram - Foundation Fieldbus .................................................... 478
8.4.6 Terminal block pin assignments - Foundation Fieldbus ..................................... 478
8.4.7 EMOD backplane connectors - Foundation Fieldbus ........................................ 479
8.4.8 PMOD backplane connectors - Foundation Fieldbus ........................................ 480
8.4.9 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - Foundation Fieldbus ........................................... 481
8.4.10 Specifications - Foundation Fieldbus ................................................................. 481
8.5 Profibus DP module (DP) ................................................................................................ 482
8.5.1 Subsystems - Profibus (DP) ............................................................................... 482
8.5.3 Interface - Profibus (DP) .................................................................................... 483
8.5.4 Redundancy module - Profibus (DP) ................................................................. 484
8.5.5 Module block diagram & DP field card/personality card - Profibus (DP) ........... 485
8.5.6 Terminal block pin assignments - Profibus (DP) ................................................ 485
8.5.7 EMOD backplane connectors - Profibus (DP) ................................................... 486
OW350_R1150 ix
Table of Contents
8.5.8 PMOD backplane connectors - Profibus (DP) ................................................... 487

8.5.9 Logic card diagnostic LEDs - Profibus (DP) ....................................................... 488
8.5.10 Specifications - Profibus (DP) ............................................................................ 489
8.6 Ethernet Link Controller .................................................................................................. 489
8.6.1 Subsystems - Ethernet Link Controller .............................................................. 489
8.6.3 Interface - Ethernet Link Controller .................................................................... 490
8.6.4 Module block diagram & field card/personality card - Ethernet Link Controller . 491
8.6.5 Terminal block pin assignments - Ethernet Link Controller ............................... 492
8.6.6 EMOD backplane connectors - Ethernet Link Controller ................................... 493
8.6.7 PMOD backplane connectors - Ethernet Link Controller ................................... 494
8.6.8 Diagnostic Logic Card LEDs - Ethernet Link Controller ..................................... 495
8.6.9 Specifications - Ethernet Link Controller ............................................................ 495
9 Specialty I/O modules 497

9.1 Link Controller module - (LC) .......................................................................................... 497
9.1.1 Overview - (LC) .................................................................................................. 497
9.1.2 Electronics modules (Emod) - (LC) .................................................................... 497
9.1.3 Personality modules (Pmod) - (LC) .................................................................... 497
9.1.4 Subsystems - (LC) ............................................................................................. 498
9.2 Loop Interface module - (LI) ............................................................................................ 499
9.2.1 Overview - (LI) .................................................................................................... 499
9.2.2 Electronics modules (Emod) - (LI) ..................................................................... 499
9.2.3 Personality modules (Pmod) - (LI) ..................................................................... 499
9.2.4 Module Groups - (LI) .......................................................................................... 500
9.2.5 Subsystems - (LI) ............................................................................................... 500
9.2.6 Modes of Operation - (LI) ................................................................................... 502
9.2.7 Priority Raise and Lower - (LI) ........................................................................... 503
9.2.8 Manual station control - (LI) ............................................................................... 503
9.2.9 Normal & inverse analog output - (LI) ................................................................ 503
9.2.10 External power supply information - (LI) ............................................................ 504
9.2.11 Terminal block wiring information - (LI) .............................................................. 505
9.2.12 Field connection wiring diagram - (LI) ................................................................ 507
9.2.13 Field connection wiring (CE Mark) - (LI) ............................................................ 516
9.2.14 SLIM serial port connector - (LI) ........................................................................ 522
9.2.15 Register configuration/address information - (LI) ............................................... 523
9.2.16 Diagnostic Logic Card LEDs - (LI) ..................................................................... 526
9.3 Pulse Accumulator module - (PA) ................................................................................... 527
9.3.1 Overview - (PA) .................................................................................................. 527
9.3.2 Electronics modules (Emod) - (PA) .................................................................... 527
9.3.3 Personality modules (Pmod) - (PA) ................................................................... 528
9.3.4 Subsystems - (PA) ............................................................................................. 528
9.3.5 Terminal block wiring information - (PA) ............................................................ 530
9.3.6 Field connection wiring diagrams - (PA) ............................................................ 532
9.3.7 Medium speed count field connections - (PA) ................................................... 535
9.3.8 Active pulse source count field connections - (PA) ............................................ 536
9.3.9 Three wire sensor field connections - (PA) ........................................................ 538
9.3.10 Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark) - (PA) ........................................... 540
9.3.11 Active pulse source count field connections (CE Mark) - (PA) .......................... 542
9.3.12 Three wire sensor field connections (CE Mark) - (PA) ...................................... 544
9.3.13 Register configuration/address information - (PA) ............................................. 546
9.3.14 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (PA) .................................................................... 549
9.3.15 Specifications - (PA) ........................................................................................... 549
x OW350_R1150
Table of Contents
9.4 Servo Driver module - (SVD) .......................................................................................... 553

9.4.1 Overview - (SVD) ............................................................................................... 553
9.4.2 Electronics modules (Emod) - (SVD) ................................................................. 553
9.4.3 Personality modules (Pmod) - (SVD) ................................................................. 554
9.4.4 Subsystems - (SVD)........................................................................................... 554
9.4.5 Operation - (SVD) .............................................................................................. 555
9.4.6 AD/DA Conversion and Timing - (SVD) ............................................................. 555
9.4.7 Module modes - (SVD) ....................................................................................... 556
9.4.8 Start mode - (SVD) ............................................................................................. 556
9.4.9 Normal mode - (SVD) ......................................................................................... 557
9.4.10 Local-manual mode - (SVD)............................................................................... 557
9.4.11 Calibrate mode - (SVD) ...................................................................................... 557
9.4.12 Using the serial port for calibration and settings - (SVD) ................................... 558
9.4.13 Using the serial port for calibration connections - (SVD) ................................... 558
9.4.14 Performing calibration - (SVD) ........................................................................... 559
9.4.15 Valve position control - (SVD) ............................................................................ 563
9.4.16 Seating, backseating, and retreat - (SVD) ......................................................... 564
9.4.17 PI position control - (SVD).................................................................................. 564
9.4.18 Controller interface - (SVD) ................................................................................ 567
9.4.19 Serial bus watchdog timer - (SVD) ..................................................................... 567
9.4.20 Memory map - (SVD) ......................................................................................... 568
9.4.21 Tuning constant commands - (SVD) .................................................................. 573
9.4.22 RSR calibration diagrams - (SVD) ..................................................................... 577
9.4.23 Terminal Block Wiring Information - (SVD) ........................................................ 585
9.4.24 Field Connection Wiring Diagrams DC LVDT Channel 1 - (SVD) ..................... 587
9.4.25 Field Connection Wiring Diagrams, DC LVDT Channel 1 (CE Mark) - (SVD) ... 591
9.4.26 Severe Errors Status Register - (SVD) .............................................................. 594
9.4.27 Diagnostics - (SVD) ............................................................................................ 596
9.4.28 Register configuration/address information - (SVD) .......................................... 598
9.4.29 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (SVD) .................................................................. 601
9.4.30 Specifications - (SVD) ........................................................................................ 602
9.5 Small Loop Interface module (SLIM) .............................................................................. 603
9.5.1 Overview - SLIM ................................................................................................. 603
9.5.2 Features - SLIM ................................................................................................. 604
9.5.3 Groups and Modes - SLIM ................................................................................. 604
9.5.4 Wiring - SLIM ..................................................................................................... 608
9.5.5 Serial Port - SLIM ............................................................................................... 609
9.5.6 Assemblies - SLIM ............................................................................................. 609
9.5.7 Specifications - SLIM ......................................................................................... 609
9.6 Speed Detector module - (SD) ........................................................................................ 610
9.6.1 Overview - (SD) .................................................................................................. 610
9.6.2 Electronics modules (Emod) - (SD) ................................................................... 610
9.6.3 Personality modules (Pmod) - (SD) ................................................................... 610
9.6.4 Subsystems - (SD) ............................................................................................. 610
9.6.5 Terminal Block Wiring Information - (SD) .......................................................... 613
9.6.6 Field Connection Wiring Diagrams - (SD) .......................................................... 614
9.6.7 Field Connection Wiring Diagram (Passive Probe) (CE Mark) - (SD) ............... 616
9.6.8 Field Connection Wiring Diagram (Active Probe) (CE Mark) - (SD) .................. 616
9.6.9 Update rate and settings for G01 - (SD) ............................................................ 617
9.6.10 Speed Calculations ............................................................................................ 619
9.6.11 Acceleration Calculations ................................................................................... 620
9.6.12 Relay activation for G03 ..................................................................................... 620
9.6.13 G03 Acceleration Limit and Response ............................................................... 621
9.6.14 G03 Relay Closure Times .................................................................................. 622
9.6.15 Speed Simulation ............................................................................................... 622
OW350_R1150 xi
Table of Contents
9.6.16 Register configuration/address information for G01 - (SD) ................................ 623

9.6.17 Register configuration/address information for G03 - (SD) ................................ 623
9.6.18 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (SD) .................................................................... 625
9.6.19 Specifications - (SD) .......................................................................................... 625
9.7 Valve Positioner module - (RVP) .................................................................................... 627
9.7.1 Overview - (RVP) ............................................................................................... 627
9.7.2 Electronics modules (Emod) - (RVP) ................................................................. 627
9.7.3 Personality modules (Pmod) - (RVP) ................................................................. 628
9.7.4 Subsystems - (RVP)........................................................................................... 628
9.7.5 Guidelines (Redundant) - (RVP) ........................................................................ 630
9.7.6 Module Serial Connection - (RVP) ..................................................................... 633
9.7.7 Firmware levels - (RVP) ..................................................................................... 633
9.7.8 Primary to Backup status transition - (RVP) ...................................................... 635
9.7.9 Backup to Primary status transition - (RVP) ...................................................... 635
9.7.10 Disarm during Backup mode - (RVP) ................................................................. 636
9.7.11 LVDT and coil setup requirements - (RVP)........................................................ 636
9.7.12 Modes - (RVP) ................................................................................................... 637
9.7.13 Memory map - (RVP) ......................................................................................... 642
9.7.14 Configuration parameters - (RVP) ..................................................................... 646
9.7.15 LVDT setup requirements, redundant subsystem - (RVP) ................................ 651
9.7.16 Seating and Backseating - (RVP) ...................................................................... 653
9.7.17 PI Position Control - (RVP) ................................................................................ 653
9.7.18 Shutdown input (Priority Demand Input) - (RVP) ............................................... 654
9.7.19 Calibration - (ERVP) ........................................................................................... 654
9.7.20 Terminal block wiring information - (RVP) ......................................................... 663
9.7.21 Field connection wiring diagram - (RVP) ........................................................... 665
9.7.22 Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark) - (RVP) ........................................ 668
9.7.23 Swapping connections to affect the output - (RVP) ........................................... 671
9.7.24 SLIM serial port connector - (RVP) .................................................................... 671
9.7.25 Register configuration/address information - (RVP) .......................................... 672
9.7.26 Diagnostics - (RVP) ............................................................................................ 674
9.7.27 Troubleshooting - (RVP) .................................................................................... 676
9.7.28 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (RVP) .................................................................. 679
9.7.29 Specifications - (ERVP)...................................................................................... 680
9.8 Enhanced Valve Positioner module - (ERVP)................................................................. 682
9.8.1 Overview (ERVP) ............................................................................................... 682
9.8.2 Electronics module (Emod) - (ERVP) ................................................................ 682
9.8.3 Personality module (Pmod) - (ERVP) ................................................................ 683
9.8.4 Subsystems - (ERVP) ........................................................................................ 683
9.8.5 Guidelines (Redundant) - (ERVP) ...................................................................... 685
9.8.6 Module Serial connection - (ERVP) ................................................................... 688
9.8.7 Firmware levels - (ERVP)................................................................................... 688
9.8.8 Primary/backup status transitions - (ERVP)....................................................... 690
9.8.9 Register configuration/address information - (ERVP) ........................................ 690
9.8.10 Modes ................................................................................................................. 691
9.8.11 Channel assignments - (ERVP) ......................................................................... 697
9.8.12 I/O Channel Fields - (ERVP) .............................................................................. 698
9.8.13 I/O Bus Communication Timeout settings - (ERVP) .......................................... 699
9.8.14 Ignore Shutdown - (ERVP)................................................................................. 700
9.8.15 Feedback "A" Configuration - (ERVP) ............................................................... 700
9.8.16 Feedback "B" Configuration - (ERVP) ............................................................... 700
9.8.17 RS485 Magnetostrictive sensor - (ERVP).......................................................... 701
9.8.18 Dual Channel / Backup Feedback Enable - (ERVP) .......................................... 701
9.8.19 Module Configuration / Status Register (0xd) Configuration - (ERVP) .............. 702
9.8.20 Module Configuration / Status Register 13 Status - (ERVP) ............................. 702
9.8.21 Configuration Register 13 definitions - (ERVP).................................................. 702
xii OW350_R1150
Table of Contents
9.8.22 Status Register 13 definitions - (ERVP) ............................................................. 703

9.8.23 Status Register 14 definitions - (ERVP) ............................................................. 704
9.8.24 Status Register 1 definitions - (ERVP) ............................................................... 704
9.8.25 Register 4, 5, and 6 format (read) - (ERVP) ...................................................... 705
9.8.26 Register 7, 9, and 11 format - (ERVP) ............................................................... 705
9.8.27 Register 10 format, command register - (ERVP) ............................................... 706
9.8.28 Diagnostics - (ERVP) ......................................................................................... 707
9.9 Numalogic Fast Ethernet Remote Node (Windows Ovation 3.4 and above) .................. 708
9.9.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 708
9.9.2 Supported Numalogic modules .......................................................................... 708
9.9.3 Subsystems - Numalogic Fast Ethernet ............................................................. 709
9.9.4 Power Supply - Numalogic Fast Ethernet .......................................................... 709
9.9.5 Electronics module connectors - Numalogic Fast Ethernet ............................... 710
9.9.6 Diagnostics - Numalogic Fast Ethernet .............................................................. 710
9.9.7 Specifications - Numalogic Fast Ethernet .......................................................... 711
10 Noise minimization and causes 713

10.1 Electrical noise and causes ............................................................................................. 713
10.2 Noise Discrimination ....................................................................................................... 714
10.3 Noise energy level ........................................................................................................... 714
10.4 Noise frequency .............................................................................................................. 715
10.5 Sources (Signal and Noise) ............................................................................................ 715
10.6 Noise sources.................................................................................................................. 716
10.7 Noise classes .................................................................................................................. 716
10.8 What types of digital signal noise rejection are used? .................................................... 717
10.9 Analog Signal Noise Rejection ........................................................................................ 717
10.10 Output Signal Noise Rejection ........................................................................................ 717
10.11 Noise-Sensitive Circuit Noise Rejection .......................................................................... 718
10.11.1 Physical Circuit Separation ................................................................................ 718
10.11.2 Twisted-Pair Wiring ............................................................................................ 718
10.11.3 Proper Grounding and Shielding ........................................................................ 719
10.11.4 Surge protection ................................................................................................. 719
10.12 Analog Signal Shielding Techniques .............................................................................. 720
10.13 What are some Common Input Considerations? ............................................................ 722
11 Defining and addressing the I/O for the OCR161 and OCR400 723
11.1 What is the process for planning the I/O for your system? ............................................. 724
11.2 What are the Ovation I/O module base types? ............................................................... 725
11.2.1 What is a standard I/O module base? ................................................................ 725
11.2.2 What is a relay output module base? ................................................................. 725
11.3 What is an Ovation I/O module address? ....................................................................... 726
11.3.1 What are the guidelines for positioning I/O modules in cabinets? ..................... 726
11.3.2 What is the addressing format for I/O modules?................................................ 727
11.3.3 Examples of Controller cabinet I/O module addresses ...................................... 729
11.3.4 Examples of extended I/O cabinet module addresses ...................................... 730
11.3.5 Examples of remote node I/O cabinet module addresses ................................. 731
11.3.6 Examples of Relay Output module addresses ................................................... 732
11.3.7 Q-Line I/O module addressing ........................................................................... 733
OW350_R1150 xiii
Table of Contents
11.4 Controller interfaces, OCR400 and OCR161 .................................................................. 734

11.4.1 What are the Ovation Controller I/O interfaces? ................................................ 734
11.4.2 Controller backplane (OCR400 Controller) ........................................................ 737
11.4.3 What are the OCR161 Controller cabinet components and interfaces .............. 737
11.4.4 Controller backplane (CBO) for the OCR161..................................................... 739
11.5 Common cabinet components (Controller, remote node, and extended cabinet) .......... 740
11.5.1 Ovation Power Distribution Module (PDM) ........................................................ 740
11.5.2 Ovation Standard I/O Modules and Base Units ................................................. 741
11.5.3 Relay Output Modules and Bases ..................................................................... 742
11.5.4 I/O Dual Branch Transition Panel (ROP) ........................................................... 743
11.5.5 Ovation I/O Single Branch Transition Panels..................................................... 744
11.5.6 Remote Node Controller (RNC) ......................................................................... 745
11.5.7 Remote Node Transition Panel (TND) ............................................................... 746
11.5.8 MAU with typical fiber-optic connector pairs (OCR400 Controller) .................... 746
11.5.9 MAU with typical fiber-optic connector pairs (OCR161 Controller) .................... 747
11.6 Common cabinet configurations...................................................................................... 748
11.6.1 Controller cabinet components and cabling (local and remote I/O) (OCR400
Controller)........................................................................................................... 748
Controller)........................................................................................................... 749
11.7 Local I/O .......................................................................................................................... 750
11.7.1 Local I/O system configuration for the OCR400 ................................................ 751
11.7.2 Local I/O system configuration for the OCR161 ................................................ 752
11.8 Remote I/O ...................................................................................................................... 753
11.8.1 Remote I/O features (OCR400 Controller) ......................................................... 754
11.8.2 Controller cabinet components (Remote I/O) (OCR400 Controller) .................. 754
11.8.3 Remote I/O features (OCR161 Controller) ......................................................... 757
11.8.4 Controller cabinet components (Remote I/O) (OCR161 Controller) .................. 757
11.9 Extended I/O cabinet components .................................................................................. 759
11.10 Remote node cabinet components ................................................................................. 761
11.10.1 Typical Remote Node Cabinet ........................................................................... 763
11.10.2 Placing the MAU module .................................................................................... 764
11.10.3 Connecting the AUI Cable.................................................................................. 765
11.10.4 Remote node addressing switch ........................................................................ 766
11.10.5 Daisy-Chain Control of I/O Branches ................................................................. 766
11.10.6 Power Supply ..................................................................................................... 767
11.10.7 Example of typical MAU cable connections to Remote Nodes (OCR400
Controller)........................................................................................................... 769
11.10.8 Example of typical MAU cable connections to Remote Nodes (OCR161
Controller)........................................................................................................... 770
11.11 Selecting the I/O interface cards ..................................................................................... 771
11.12 What changes can you make to an I/O device? ............................................................. 771
11.12.1 To modify an I/O device ..................................................................................... 771
11.12.2 To modify an external Ovation networks device ................................................ 771
11.13 General requirements for I/O cable ................................................................................. 771
11.13.1 I/O communications cable (5A26141) ................................................................ 772
11.13.2 AUI Cable (5A26147) ......................................................................................... 772
11.13.3 Fiber-Optic Cable (3A98763 - Green) (3A98764 - Yellow) ................................ 772
xiv OW350_R1150
Table of Contents
11.14 Adding OCR400 Controllers to WDPF Q-Line I/O .......................................................... 773

11.15 New power distribution scheme ...................................................................................... 774
12 I/O system status and diagnostic LEDs 775

12.1 What do the OCR161 PCQL card status LEDs indicate? ............................................... 775
12.2 What do the OCR161 PCRL card status LEDs indicate? ............................................... 776
12.3 What do the OCR161 PCRR card status LEDs indicate? .............................................. 777
12.4 What are the processor module status LEDs for the OCR400 and OCR1100 Controllers?
........................................................................................................................................ 778
12.5 Diagnostic LEDs .............................................................................................................. 779
12.6 MAU Module.................................................................................................................... 780
12.7 RNC Module .................................................................................................................... 781
13 Q-Line card types 783

13.1 Analog card types ........................................................................................................... 783
13.2 Digital card types ............................................................................................................. 786
13.3 Packed point card types .................................................................................................. 788
14 CE Mark specifications 791

14.1 What is a CE Mark Certified system? ............................................................................. 792
14.2 CE Mark accuracy considerations................................................................................... 793
15 Replacing power supplies 795

15.1 Power supply replacement cautions ............................................................................... 795
15.1.1 To replace redundant power supplies ................................................................ 795
15.2 Power supply front view .................................................................................................. 797
15.3 Power supply locking mechanism ................................................................................... 798
16 Using an external power supply 799

16.1 What is an external supply? ............................................................................................ 799
16.2 To prepare for connecting an external power supply ...................................................... 800
Index 805
OW350_R1150 xv
S E C T I O N 1
1 Introduction to the Ovation Input/Output (I/O)

Reference Manual
IN THIS SECTION
What is the purpose of Ovation I/O modules? .................................................................... 1

I/O reference terminology .................................................................................................... 1
1.1 What is the purpose of Ovation I/O modules?
Ovation Distributed Control Systems provide modulating control, sequential control, and data
acquisition for a variety of system applications. Ovation systems consist of a configurable mix of
functional Input/Output (I/O) modules that communicate on the I/O bus to the Ovation Controller.
I/O modules provide an interface between the Ovation Controller and the processes in the plant.
Ovation I/O modules are a plug-in component with built-in fault tolerance and diagnostics. They
are able to operate on a wide range of signals and perform a multitude of functions.
Ovation I/O modules are seated into base units and are latched into place. These base units are
housed in the Controller cabinet where they are mounted on DIN rails and wired to the
appropriate field devices.
The standard modular components typically consist of the following:

 Electronics module (Emod)
 Personality module (Pmod)
 Base Unit (containing the field terminations)
The relay output modular components consist of the following:
 Electronics module
 Base Unit (containing the field terminations)
1.2 I/O reference terminology

TERM DESCRIPTION
AWG American wire gauge is used in the United States as a standard method of denoting wire
diameter. Increasing gauge numbers give decreasing wire diameters. Outside of North
America, wire sizes for electrical purposes are usually given as the cross sectional area in
square millimeters.
A Side Refers to the left side board-to-board connector of the base unit when the terminal block or
AUI Cable connector is facing the viewer.
Also can refer to the Controller cabinet or the "A" cabinet.
OW350_R1150 1
TERM DESCRIPTION
Attention The Ovation I/O bus cycle status when the Electronics module returns a reply requesting
attention.
B Side Refers to the right side board-to-board connector of the base unit when the terminal block or
AUI Cable connector is facing the viewer.
Also can refer to the Termination cabinet or the "B" cabinet.
Base Unit The DIN Rail mounted Ovation Base serves as the mechanical means to hold & secure the
Ovation I/O Electronics and personality modules while providing an electrical interface
between customers field connections, Ovation I/O controller & transition panels.
The Ovation Bases when connected together form the Ovation I/O bus used by the Ovation
controller to communicate with its I/O subsystem and the distribute power to the I/O
modules.
Each standard 2-slot base can house up to two sets of electronic and personality I/O
modules, while 4-slot base units can house up to four sets of I/O modules.
Base Unit, The Relay Output base unit houses one Electronics module.
Relay Output
Branch A set of two 4-slot base units or four standard 2-slot bases configured consecutively on a
DIN rail with a local Ovation I/O bus being connected to the Ovation Controller. A Maximum
of eight I/O modules is supported on a branch.
Controller Interface between the Network and the I/O. The Controller is located in the Ovation I/O
cabinet. (See Planning Your Ovation System.)
Current A digital voltage input circuit made of an input voltage protection, a serial current limiting
Sinking circuit and an output interface. Each channel circuit terminates the connection between the
Digital Input logic input and its associated high side sensor or switch. Any short circuit to the reference
potential or field wire breakages are interpreted as the “off” or “0” state.
Electronics A plastic housing with associated lenses and labeling that contains the necessary
module electronics to interface between field devices and the Ovation I/O bus. Electronics modules
are inserted directly into a base unit.
Event A digital input change of state detected by the Ovation Higher Density Digital Input
electronics module
Galvanic The principle of isolating functional sections of electronic circuits so that charge-carrying
Isolation particles cannot move from one section to another, i.e. there is no electrical current flowing
directly from one section to the next. Energy and/or information can still be exchanged
between the sections by other means, however, such as by capacitance, electromagnetic
waves, or mechanical means.
IOIC Card Generic name for the Controller PCI I/O Interface card. Options for the OCR161 Controller
are PCQL, PCRL, and PCRR. The OCR400 Controller only needs the IOIC module.
I/O Module Standard I/O modules are made up of an Electronics module and a Personality module.
These modules perform the interface between the I/O Controller and the field devices.
Compact modules and Relay Output modules do not contain a Personality module.
LSB Least significant bit.
MAU Media Attachment Unit (MAU) is an alternate name for the Attachment Unit Module and
includes the Electronics module and Personality module combined. This device interfaces
the PCRR card (via the AUI cable) to the RNC (via fiber-optic cable) in remote I/O
applications.
MSB Most significant bit.
Ovation Local area network in which Ovation drops communicate with each other through Fast
Network Ethernet media.
2 OW350_R1150
TERM DESCRIPTION
Partial A partial rotation is directly associated with sample. Samples, representing pulses and time
Rotation elapsed for those pulses, are combined each sample period into the pulse count and time
elapsed for a full rotation. Typically, a partial rotation is what is sampled.
Personality Portion of an I/O module that provides a plastic housing with associated lenses and
module labeling. It contains a printed circuit board to perform the necessary signal interconnections
required for interfacing the I/O modules to particular field devices.
Typically, the module contains only passive components, but the Media Attachment Unit
module and Remote Node Controller module contains fiber-optic transmitters, receivers,
and transceivers in their Personality modules. The Link Controller I/O module contains
optical couplers and RS-232/RS-485 transceivers in its Personality module. The module
plugs directly into the base.
Remote I/O A configuration where the I/O is located remotely from the Controller.
Remote A grouping of I/O modules that communicates with the Controller via media that can carry
Node control signals over a long distance (for example, fiber-optic).
RNC Remote Node Controller (RNC) is an alternate name for the module containing the Remote
Node Electronics module and Remote Node Personality module. The RNC interfaces the
I/O modules in the Remote Node to an MAU module at the Controller via a fiber-optic
communication link.
Rotation The time of a full rotation of the toothed wheel given in 24 MHz timer ticks. Normally the
Time rotation time is the summation of a number of sample times.
Transition Types are:
Panels
ROP - I/O transition panel.
TND - Remote Node transition panel.
RRP - Relay Base transition panel (top location).
RRB - Relay Base transition panel (bottom location).
Watchdog A timer which, if allowed to expire, will reset the microcontroller.
Timer
OW350_R1150 3
S E C T I O N 2
2 Electronic Module (Emod) and Personality Module

(Pmod) I/O combinations
IN THIS SECTION
What are the I/O module types? ......................................................................................... 6

Emod - Pmod Combinations ............................................................................................. 23
OW350_R1150 5
2.1 What are the I/O module types?
Analog Input modules (see page 7)

 Analog Input (13 bits) (Legacy product).
 Analog Input (14 bits).
 Analog High Speed Input (14 bits).
 HART Analog Input.
 HART High Performance Analog Input.
 RTD (4-Inputs).
 RTD (8-Inputs).
 16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input.
Analog Output modules (see page 11)
 Analog Output.
 HART Analog Output.
 HART High Performance Analog Output.
Digital Input modules (see page 12)
 Digital Input.
 Redundant Digital Input (Windows Ovation 3.2 and above).
 Compact Digital Input.
 Contact Digital Input.
 Compact Contact Digital Input.
 Sequence of Events Digital Input.
 Sequence of Events Contact Digital Input Field Interface.
 Sequence of Events Compact Digital Input Field Interface.
 Enhanced Compact Sequence of Events Digital Input.
 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Input
Digital Output modules (see page 17)
 Digital Output.
 High Side Digital Output (24 VDC).
 Relay Output.
 Fused Relay Output.
 32 Channel 24 VDC Single-Ended Digital Output.
Bus interface modules (see page 18)
 DeviceNet.
 Foundation Fieldbus.
 Profibus.
 Ethernet Link Controller.
Specialty modules (see page 20)
 Link Controller.
6 OW350_R1150
 Loop Interface.
 Pulse Accumulator.
 Servo Driver.
 Small Loop Interface.
 Speed Detector.
 Valve Positioner.
 Enhanced Valve Positioner
 Numalogic Fast Ethernet Remote I/O subsystem.
2.1.1 Analog Input modules
Analog Input module (13 bits) (see page 39) - (Legacy product) - provides an interface to eight
galvanically isolated analog inputs with sampling rates of approximately 10 time/sec. Several
voltage and current configurations are available including cold junction compensation for
thermocouple inputs.
1
Analog Input subsystems (13-bit)
RANGE CHNLS ELECTRONICS PERSONALITY

MODULE MODULE
± 20mV 8 1 1C31116G01
1C31113G01
± 50mV 8 1 1C31116G01
1C31113G02
± 100mV 8 1 1C31116G01
1C31113G03
± 20mV Compensated (Thermocouple) 3 1 1C31116G04
8 1C31113G01

8 1C31113G02
8 1C31113G03
± 1 VDC 8 1 1C31116G01
1C31113G04
± 5 VDC 8 1 1C31116G01
1C31113G05
± 10 VDC 8 1 1C31116G01
1C31113G06
0-20 mA Field powered 8 1, 2 1C31116G02
1C31113G05
(4-20 mA Field powered can also be selected in the I/O Builder
for Solaris applications; card is configured appropriately)
0-20 mA Locally powered 8 1, 2 1C31116G03
1C31113G05
(4-20 mA Locally powered can also be selected in the I/O Builder
for Solaris applications; card is configured appropriately)
1
This module configurations is CE Mark Certified.
3
This module configurations is CE Mark Certified (Non-EMC Cabinet).
3
A ninth logical channel (does not connect to a device) is provided when using the Analog Input module with
temperature sensor. This ninth point is needed for the CJ Compensation field of the Point Builder
Instrumentation Tab when defining the eight other thermocouple points for the AI module. (See Ovation
Developer Studio User Guide (for Windows).
OW350_R1150 7
Analog Input module (14 bits) (see page 53) - provides an interface to eight galvanically
isolated analog inputs with a minimum sampling rate of 10 time/sec. A low cost 4-20 mA current
input is available along with a 1V voltage input (legacy) configuration.
RANGE CHANNELS ELECTRONICS PERSONALITY

MODULE MODULE
1 8 1 1C31227G01
4 - 20mA, Field or Locally powered 1C31224G01
± 1 VDC 8 1 1C31227G02
1C31224G02
1
The 4-20mA Configuration is CE Mark certified.
Analog Input High Speed module (14-Bit) (see page 63) - provides an interface to eight
galvanically isolated analog inputs with sampling rates of medium speed (16/20 time/sec.) or high
speed (50/60 times/sec.). Several voltage and current input configurations are available including
cold junction compensation for thermocouple inputs.
High Speed Analog Input subsystems (14-bit )

MODULE MODULE
4 - 20mA, Field or Locally powered 8 1,2 1C31227G01

5X00070G01
± 100mV, ± 250mV, ± 1V 8 1,2 1C31227G02
5X00070G02
± 5V, ± 10V 8 1,2 1C31227G02
5X00070G03
± 1mA 2 wire local powered 8 1,2 1C31116G03
5X00070G02
± 1mA 4wire field powered 8 1,2 1C31116G02

5X00070G02
± 20mV, 50mV, 100 (Thermocouple) 8 1 1C31116G04

5X00070G04

5X00070G05
1
This module configuration is CE Mark Certified.
2
This module configuration is CE Mark Certified (Non-EMC Cabinet).
8 OW350_R1150
HART Analog Input module (see page 86) - provides an interface for eight galvanically isolated
HART field devices with 4-20 mA current loop analog inputs (common reference). In addition to
the analog inputs, digital information can be exchanged between HART compliant devices and
the Controller.
1
HART Analog Input subsystems (16-bit)

MODULE MODULE
4-20 mA loop powered (2 wire) or active source 8 1 5X00059G01

5X00058G01
(4 wire)
1
HART High Performance Analog Input module (see page 99) - provides an interface for eight
galvanically isolated HART field devices with 4-20 mA current loop analog inputs. In addition to
the analog inputs, digital information can be exchanged between HART compliant devices and
the Controller.
HART High Performance Analog Input subsystems (16-bit)

MODULE MODULE
1 8 5X00106G01 5X00109G01
4-20 mA
or
5X00109G02
(Ovation releases
3.4 and later)
2 8 5X00106G02 5X00109G01
4-20 mA (Reduced radiated emissions).
or
5X00109G02
(Ovation releases
3.4 and later)
1 8 5X00106G01 5X00170G01
4-20 mA Analog Output pin-compatible.
1
2
OW350_R1150 9
RTD module (4 Channel) (see page 114) - provides an interface to four galvanically isolated
Resistance Temperature Detectors. Several 3 and 4 wire RTD types are supported. A 50/60 Hz
filtered configuration is available for CE Mark applications.
RTD (4 Channel) module subsystems

MODULE MODULE
All 4 1C31161G01 1C31164G01

All (for 50/60 Hz filtered inputs and CE Mark certified 4 1 1
1C31161G02 1C31164G02
systems)
1
Configuration 1C3116G02 / 1C31164G02 is CE Mark Certified.
RTD module (8 Channel) (see page 124) - provides an interface to eight galvanically isolated
Resistance Temperature Detectors. Several 3 and 4 wire RTD types are supported.
1
RTD module (8-Channel) subsystems
CHANNELS ELECTRONICS MODULE PERSONALITY MODULE
8 1 5X00121G01
5X00119G01
8 2 5X00121G01
5X00119G02
1
2
This module configuration is CE Mark Certified (Non-EMC cabinet).
16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input module (see page 133) - provides an interface between the
Ovation Controller and 16 field devices that use a 4-20mA current loop. Up to 16 4-20mA (2-wire
or 4-wire) transmitters can be connected per module.
16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input subsystems
DESCRIPTION CHANNELS ELECTRONICS PERSONALITY MODULE

MODULE
16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input, 2- 16 5X00501G01 5X00502G01

wire and 4-wire
16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input, 2- 16 5X00501G01 1X00692H01
wire only
10 OW350_R1150
2.1.2 Analog Output modules
Analog Output module (see page 145) - provides an interface to four galvanically isolated
analog outputs using 12-bit digital-to-analog converters.
Analog Output subsystems

MODULE MODULE
0-5 Volts DC 4 1 1C31132G01

1C31129G01
0-10 Volts DC 4 1 1C31132G01

1C31129G02
0-20 mA with Diagnostics 4 1 1C31132G01
1C31129G03
(4-20 mA with Diagnostics can also be selected in the
I/O Builder for Solaris applications; card will be
configured appropriately).
0-20 mA without Diagnostics 4 1 1C31132G01
1C31129G04
(4-20 mA without Diagnostics can also be selected in
the I/O Builder for Solaris applications; card will be
4-20 mA with Diagnostics (For Redundant applications). 4 2 1C31132G02
1C31129G05
1
2
For Redundant applications using Windows Ovation 3.2 and above.
HART Analog Output module (see page 156) - provides an interface for eight galvanically
isolated HART field devices using 4-20 mA current loop analog outputs (common reference). In
addition to the analog outputs, digital information can be exchanged between HART compliant
devices and the Controller.
1
HART Analog Output subsystems (14 bit)
RANGE CHANNELS ELECTRONICS MODULE PERSONALITY MOD ULE
4-20 mA 8 1 5X00063G01
5X00062G01
1
This module configuration is CE Mark certified.
HART High Performance Analog Output module (see page 99) - provides an interface for four
galvanically isolated HART field devices using 4-20 mA current loop analog outputs. In addition to
the analog outputs, digital information can be exchanged between HART compliant devices and
the Controller.
1
HART High Performance Analog Output subsystems (16-bit)
RANGE CHANNELS ELECTRONICS MODULE PERSONALITY MODULE
4-20 mA 4 1 1X00188H01 (molded plastic cavity insert)

5X00167G01
OW350_R1150 11
4-20 mA 4 5X00167G01 5X00211G03 (Q-line migration)

1
2.1.3 Digital Input modules
Digital Input module (see page 182) - provides an interface for 16 current-sinking digital inputs
using a Personality module. Various input configurations are available.
1
Digital Input subsystems

MODULE MODULE
24/48 VAC/VDC Single-ended 16 1C31107G01 1C31110G01

Differential 16 1C31107G01 1C31110G02
125 VAC/VDC Single-ended 16 1C31107G02 1C31110G01

1
All module configurations listed in the table are CE Mark Certified.
Redundant Digital Input module (see page 192) – provides 16 digital channels to monitor the
states (“0” or “1”) of 16 field digital inputs. The module contains two voltage sensing circuits for
each of the 16 I/O channels located on the module. Redundant power for all 16 digital input
channels is either supplied by the Ovation auxiliary power supply or by an external 24V auxiliary
power source. In either situation, the redundant pair module shares a common 24VDC auxiliary
power source.
Redundant Digital Input subsystems

MODULE MODULE
24 V (Single Ended) Digital Input current 16 5X00411G01 5X00414G01

sinking, IEC 61131-2 Compliant Type 1
digital Inputs.
12 OW350_R1150
Compact Digital Input module (see page 207) - provides a low cost interface for 16 current-
sinking digital inputs without requiring a personality module.
Compact Digital Input subsystems
1 CHANNELS ELECTRONICS PERSONALITY

RANGE
MODULE MODULE OR CAV ITY
2
INSERT
24/48 VDC Single-ended 16 1C31232G01 1C31238H01 (molded

plastic cavity insert)
24 VAC/VDC Differential 16 1C31232G02 5X00034G01(Fused
Pmod)
48 VDC Differential
1C31238H01 (molded
125 VAC/VDC 16 1C31232G03 5X00034G01 (Fused
Single-ended Pmod)
1C31238H01(molded
1
2
This is an insert that fits into the Personality module position and provides a wiring schematic label for the
module.
Contact Digital Input module (see page 229) – provides an interface for 16 current-sourcing
digital (contact) inputs using a personality module. The following input configuration is available:
48 VDC (single-ended – channels have a common return, which is the return for the on-module
48 VDC current limited contact wetting power supply).
1
Contact Digital Input subsystems

MODULE MODULE
48 VDC On-Card Auxiliary (Legacy) 16 1C31142G01 1C31110G03

1
OW350_R1150 13
Compact Contact Digital Input module (see page 240)– provides a low cost interface for 16
current-sourcing digital (contact) inputs without requiring a personality module. The following input
configuration is available: 48 VDC (single-ended – channels have a common return, which is the
return for the on-module 48 VDC current limited contact wetting power supply).
1
Compact Contact Digital Input subsystems
RANGE CHANNELS ELECTRONICS MOLDE D PLAS TIC

MODULE 2
CAV ITY INS ERT
Compact Contact with 48 VDC On-Card 16 1C31234G01 1C31238H01

Auxiliary
1
2
This is an insert that fits into the Personality module position and provides a wiring schematic label for the
module.
Sequence of Events Digital Input module (see page 252) – provides an interface for 16 digital
inputs using a personality module. The Sequence of Events module monitors the states of the 16
digital inputs and uses digital filtering to reject state changes less than 4 msec. It performs event
tagging and chatter control for each digital input.
Sequence of Events Digital Input subsystems

MODULE MODULE
24/48 VDC Single-ended (Legacy) 16 1C31157G01 1C31110G01

Differential (Legacy) 16 1C31157G01 1C31110G02
125 VDC Single-ended (Legacy) 1C31157G02 1C31110G01
All module configurations listed in the table are CE Mark certified unless they contain a 5FDI.
Sequence of Events Contact Digital Input Field Interface module (see page 264) - provides
16 contact input current detecting channels with common returns.
Sequence of Events Contact Digital Input Field interface subsystems

MODULE MODULE
Contact Input w/ 48 VDC On-Card auxiliary 16 1C31157G03 1C31110G03

(Legacy)
14 OW350_R1150
Sequence of Events Compact Digital Input Field module (see page 272) – provides a low cost
interface for 16 digital inputs without requiring a personality module. The Compact Sequence of
Events module monitors the states of the 16 digital inputs and uses digital filtering to reject state
changes less than 4 msec. It performs event tagging and chatter control for each digital input.
1
Sequence of Events Compact Digital Input Field subsystems

MODULE MODULE OR
1
CAV ITY INS ERT
Compact 24/48 VDC SOE Single-ended 16 1C31233G01 2

1C31238H01
digital input (molded plastic
cavity insert)
Compact 24/48 VDC SOE Differential 16 1C31233G02 2
1C31238H01
cavity insert)
Compact 24/48 VDC SOE Single Ended 16 1C31233G02 5X00034G01
digital input (Fused Pmod)
Compact 125 VDC SOE Differential 16 1C31233G03 2
1C31238H01
cavity insert)
Compact 125 VDC SOE Single Ended 16 1C31233G03 5X00034G01
Compact 48 VDC SOE On-card auxiliary 16 1C31233G04 2
1C31238H01
Contact Input w/48V wetting (molded plastic
cavity insert)
1
All module configurations listed in this table are CE Mark Certified.
2
This is a cavity insert that fits into the Personality module position and provides a wiring schematic label
for the module.
Enhanced Compact Sequence of Events Digital Input module (see page 304) – provides a
low cost interface for 16 digital inputs without requiring a personality module. The Enhanced
Compact Sequence of Events module monitors the states of the 16 digital inputs and uses digital
filtering to reject state changes less than 4 msec. It performs event tagging and chatter control for
each digital input. Unlike other Ovation Sequence of Events (SOE) modules, the Enhanced
Compact Sequence of Events module also offers a field digital input state change detection
feature (SOE One Shot).
Enhanced Compact Sequence of Events Digital Input subsystems
RANGE CHANNELS ELECTRONIC PERSONALITY

MODULE MODULE OR
CAV ITY INS ERT
24/48 VDC Single-ended Digital Input - Current 16 5X00357G01 1

1C31238H01
Sinking
OW350_R1150 15

MODULE MODULE OR
CAV ITY INS ERT
24/48 VDC Differential Digital Input - Current 16 5X00357G02 1

1C31238H01
Sinking
24/48 VDC (Individually Fused Channels with 16 5X00357G02 5X00034G01
Common power supply) Single-Ended Digital
Input - Current Sinking
125 VDC Differential Digital Input - Current 16 5X00357G03 1
1C31238H01
Sinking
125 VDC (Individually Fused Channels with 16 5X00357G03 5X00034G01
Input - Current Sinking
48 VDC Single-ended Digital Input - Current 16 5X00357G04 1
1C31238H01
Sourcing (Contact input) with On-Card 48 VDC
power supply
24 VDC (Differential) Digital Input - Current 16 5X00357G05 1
1C31238H01
Sinking, IEC61131-2 Compliant Type 1 Digital
Inputs
24 VDC (Individually Fused Channels with 16 5X00357G05 5X00034G01
Input - Current Sinking, IEC61131-2 Compliant
Type 1 Digital Inputs
1
This is a plastic insert that fits into the base unit‟s Personality module cavity and provides a base unit
terminal block wiring label for the module.
32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Input module (see page 375) - monitors the state
("0" or "1") of 32 single-ended field digital inputs. The 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital
Input module is designed to meet IEC 61131-2 type 3 characteristics for 24VDC digital inputs in
industrial automation.
32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Input Subsystems

MODULE MODULE
32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Input 32 5X00499G01 1X00690H01
16 OW350_R1150
2.1.4 Digital Output modules
Digital Output module (see page 382) - provides a means to switch up to 60 VDC at moderate
currents (for example, relay coils and lamps). The Digital Output module contains 16 current
sinking transistor outputs capable of switching 60 VDC loads at up to 500mA.
1
Digital Output subsystems

DESCRIPTION
MODULE OR PANEL MODULE
KIT
5-60 VDC Single ended Direct 16 1C31122G01 1C31125G01
Relay Panel Interface:

Local Power Supply 16 1C31122G01 1C31125G02
Field Power Supply 16 1C31122G01 1C31125G03
Relay Panels: Solid State Relay Panel (AC) 16 5A22410G01
Solid State Relay Panel (DC) 16 5A22410G02
G2R Relay Panel (Low Power Electro-mechanical) 16 5A22411G01
2 16 5A22412G01 - G03
KU Relay Panel (High Power Electro-mechanical)
1
All configurations listed in the table are CE Mark certified, unless they use AC/DC solid state relay panels.
2
Two panels (8 relays each) are included in the KU Relay Panel kit 5A22412G01, G02, and G03.
High Side Digital Output (24 VDC) module (see page 410) - an intelligent microcontroller-based
digital output module. The HSDO consists of two modules, (electronics and personality), that are
inserted into an Ovation I/O module base unit. The HSDO module contains sixteen optically
isolated digital output channels. Each digital output channel is capable of sourcing up to 500 mA
of output current.
High Side Digital Output (24VDC) subsystems

MODULE MODULE
24VDC 16 5X00270G01 5X00273G01
OW350_R1150 17
Relay Output module (see page 424) - consists of an Electronics module, a base assembly, and
relays. The Relay Output module provides a means to switch high AC voltages at high currents to
field devices. There are two versions of the Relay Output base assembly which contain either 12
or 16 relays within each base.
The Relay Output base assembly does not incorporate a Personality module. For more
information on module configuration, refer to the following topics: Electronics modules (Emod)
(see page 424), Base assemblies (see page 424), and Panel kits (see page 425).
Fused Relay Output module (see page 447) - provides a means to switch high current and
voltage devices located in the field. You have a choice between a fused low power relay output
assembly and a fused high power relay output assembly for differing applications.
The Fused Relay Output base assembly does not incorporate a Personality module. For more
information on module configuration, refer to the following topics: Electronics modules (Emod)
(see page 447) and Base assemblies - (FRO) (see page 448).
32 Channel 24 VDC Single-Ended Digital Output module (see page 458) - contains 32 24-volt
single-ended digital output channels. Each digital output channel is capable of sourcing up to 500
mA of output current with a 2A maximum total output current limit per module.
32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Output subsystems
DESCRIPTION CHANNELS ELECTRONICS MODULE PERSONALITY

OR PANEL KIT MODULE
32 Channel 24V DC High-Side, Single-Ended 32 5X00500G01 1X00691H01

Digital Output
2.1.5 Bus interface modules
Foundation Fieldbus module – The Ovation Foundation Fieldbus module provides a means to
interface the Ovation system to industry standard Foundation Fieldbus devices. The interface to
the module is through the Ovation I/O bus; therefore, this module is native to Ovation as opposed
to an add-on or linking approach.
The Ovation Foundation Fieldbus module interfaces with one or two networks. The module
supports redundancy and can be installed on each network. Only one module can be the master
at any given time. Inter-module redundancy communication is handled through a private RS232
communication link between the redundant pair. The communication cable is connected to a
RJ45 jack on the Pmod.
Foundation Fieldbus subsystems
2 (non-redundant) 5X00301G01 1C31238H01 (cavity insert)

2 (redundant) 5X00301G01 5X00327G01
18 OW350_R1150
Profibus module – Profibus (Process Field Bus) DP (decentralized periphery) is an all digital,
two-way communication system that links devices (also known as slaves) and automation
systems. A decentralized periphery uses a network bus (in this instance, Profibus) between the
Controller (Ovation) and its connected I/O channels. Therefore, the I/O is decentralized as
compared to a programmable logic Controller (PLC) that has its I/O arranged centrally. At the
base level in the hierarchy of plant networks, Profibus serves as a Local Area Network (LAN) for
instruments.
Profibus subsystems
2 5X00300GO1 5X00321G01
DeviceNet module (see page 466) – The Ovation DeviceNet Module provides an interface with
one or two DeviceNet networks, respectively. The DeviceNet has an associated Personality
Module. DeviceNet offers robust, efficient data handling based on Producer/Consumer technology
that allows you to determine effectively what information is needed and when.
DeviceNet subsystems
2 5X00376G01 5X00375G01
Ethernet Link Controller – The Ethernet Link Controller provides an interface with a single
Ethernet link. This module uses a straight RJ45 connector which allows the port to be accessed
outside of the Electronics module.
Ethernet Link Controller subsystems
2 5X00419GO1 1X000569H01
OW350_R1150 19
2.1.6 Specialty Modules
Link Controller module (see page 497) – provides a serial RS232, RS422, or RS485 data
communications link to a third-party device or system. To use this module, the appropriate SLC
algorithm must reside in the Ovation Controller.
1
Link Controller subsystems

MODULE MODULE
RS232 One (1) Serial Port (Able to handle 2 1C31169G01

1C31166G01
many points) or
1C31166G02
RS485/RS422 Four One (1) Serial Port (Able to handle 2 1C31169G02
1C31166G01
wire many points) or
1C31166G02
1
All module configurations listed in the table are CE Mark Certified. 1C31166G02 pending CE Mark
Certification.
2
Not for new projects. Used for spares and replacements only.
To use this module, the appropriate SLC algorithm must reside in the Ovation Controller. (See Ovation
Algorithm Reference Manual.)
Loop Interface module (see page 499) – provides an interface to the analog and digital I/O
needed to control a single process loop (up to 2 AI, 1 AO, 2 DI, 2 DO). In addition, the loop
interface can display the process information and provide for manual control via a local operator
interface station (SLIM).
1, 4
Loop Interface subsystems
RANGE CHANNEL ELECTRONICS PERSONALITY

S MODULE MODULE
Normal (Non-electric) Drive modules

0-10V Analog Inputs/Output 6 1C31174G01 1C31177G01
2 6 1C31174G21 1C31177G01
0-10V AI/AO - user defined Digital Inputs
0-5V Analog Inputs, 0-10V Analog Output 6 1C31174G02 1C31177G01
2 6 1C31174G22 1C31177G01
0-5V AI, 0-10V AO - user defined Digital Inputs
4-20mA AI/AO Locally powered analog inputs 6 1C31174G03 1C31177G02

4-20mA AI/AO Field powered analog inputs 6 1C31174G03 1C31177G03
2 6 1C31174G23 1C31177G02
4-20mA AI/AO - user defined Digital Inputs
Locally powered analog inputs
2 6 1C31174G23 1C31177G03
Field powered analog inputs
20 OW350_R1150
Pulse Accumulator module (see page 527) – counts pulse for up to two input channels and
provides the information to the Controller. The Pulse accumulator may be used to count over a
defined time period to measure speed (frequency), count until instructed to stop, or can be used
to measure the duration of a pulse.
1
Pulse Accumulator subsystems

MODULE MODULE
Field count: +5/12V (medium speed) 2 1C31147G01 1C31150G01

+ 24/48V (medium speed)
Field controls: +24/48V
+24/48V (medium speed)
Field count: +5V (high speed) 2 1C31147G02 1C31150G01
1
+24/48V medium-speed configurations are CE Mark Certified.
Servo Driver module (see page 553) – provides an interface to an electro-hydraulic servo
actuator (servo-motor) used to control a steam turbine.
1
Servo Driver subsystems

S MODULE MODULE
±16 Volts DC to a DC LVDT 6 1C31199G01 1C31201G01

60 mA into a 60 ohm coil (CD1) or
40 mA into an 80 ohm coil (CD2) or
40 mA into a 40 ohm (CD3) coil
19 Volts AC peak-to-peak 1 KHz to an AC LVT 6 1C31199G02 1C31201G02
8 mA into two 1000 ohm coils
±16 Volts DC to a DC LVDT (Firmware) 6 1C31199G04 1C31201G01
(Firmware)
OW350_R1150 21

S MODULE MODULE

(Firmware)
Small Loop Interface module (see page 610) – contains displays and keyboard inputs needed
for an operator to monitor and control the I/O functions of the Ovation Loop Interface or Valve
Positioner module. The SLIM is located external to the Ovation I/O cabinet and connected to the
Loop Interface or Valve Positioner via cable.
For more information on module configurations, refer to Assemblies - SLIM (see page 609).
Speed Detector module (see page 610) – provides the Controller with frequency measurements
of a sinusoidal or pulse train tachometer. A 16-bit output can be updated at a rate of 5 ms for
over-speed detection, and a 32-bit output can be updated at a variable rate for speed regulation.
Speed Detector has the G01 and the G03 subsystems. For more information refer to Subsystems
- (SD) (see page 610).
Valve Positioner module (see page 627) – provides an interface to an electro-hydraulic servo
actuator. Governor valves, interceptor valves, extraction valves, and bypass valves can be
controlled. The module provides closed loop valve positioning control and also interfaces to a
local operator interface station (SLIM).
1
Valve Positioner Subsystems

MODULE MODULE
Valve Positioner Controller

17 Volts AC LVDT: 24.9 mA 8 1C31194G01 1C31197G01
17 Volts AC LVDT: 36 mA 8 1C31194G01 1C31197G04
24 Volts Fused DC LVDT: 50 mA 8 1C31194G01 1C31197G05
23.75 Volts AC LVDT: 24.9mA 8 1C31194G02 1C31197G01
23.75 Volts AC LVDT: 16.8 mA 8 1C31194G02 1C31197G02
23.75 Volts AC LVDT: 36 mA 8 1C31194G02 1C31197G04
22 OW350_R1150
2.2 Emod - Pmod Combinations
Numalogic Fast Ethernet Remote Node (see page 708) - is a remote I/O subsystem which
provides an interface to the Numalogic PC700 series Remote I/O. The NFE-RN is comprised of a
base assembly, power supplies, and redundant Numalogic Fast Ethernet Remote Node
Controllers (NFE-RNCs). The NFE-RNCs contain four Ethernet ports.
Numalogic Fast Ethernet Remote Node
PART NUMBER
Numalogic Remote I/O Kit 5X00512

Numalogic Remote Node Controller 5X00467
PWSN Power Supply Assembly 5X00522
Numalogic Remote I/O Backplane Assembly 5X00468
2.2 Emod - Pmod Combinations
There are three lists of Emod/ Pmod combinations which include:
1. Standard Ovation modules:

 Analog Input
 Analog Output
 Digital Input
 Digital Output
 Bus modules
 Specialty modules
2. Q-Line Migration modules using the new latch numbers (e.g., G01).
3. Q-Line Migration modules using the old latch numbers (e.g., G31).
Note: The Q-line Migrations modules ending with G31 are being phased out and replaced with
the new, easier to use, new latches using the same part numbers, but replacing the G31 with
G01.
OW350_R1150 23
S E C T I O N 3
3 I/O Module general information
IN THIS SECTION
Ovation I/O module features ............................................................................................. 25

Installing Ovation modules ................................................................................................ 26
Ovation Module Configuration and Status ........................................................................ 26
Ovation Module Diagnostic LEDs ..................................................................................... 27
What is involved in the Replacement of User Serviceable Fuses? .................................. 27
Personality Module Jumpers ............................................................................................. 29
I/O environmental specifications ....................................................................................... 30
Standard module components .......................................................................................... 32
Relay module components ................................................................................................ 36
3.1 Ovation I/O module features

 Ovation I/O is available in both remote and local configurations.
 Modular, plug-in components.
 Quick installation and configuration of the modules.
 DIN Rail mounting of the I/O Base Units.
 Wiring schematic labels are provided on Personality modules and cavity inserts.
 Wiring directions (Normally Closed, Normally Open, Common) are provided on the Base Unit
for Relay Output modules.
 Writable surface labels are provided on Electronics modules so that up to 16 point names can
be identified on each label.
 The labels on the Personality and Electronics modules are color-coded to match the
appropriate modules.
 Unique base unit interconnection scheme eliminates most power and communications wiring.
 Module style, group, serial number, and revision are stored electronically on each I/O module.
 Hot swapping capabilities streamline maintenance. (See Planning Your Ovation System.)
 Status indicators that display standardized diagnostic LED color codes.
 Up to 128 Local Ovation module units per Controller.
 Up to 1024 Remote Ovation module units per Controller.
 Base Unit common to all Standard I/O modules.
 Two Base Unit styles (G2R and KUEP) are available for Relay Output modules.
 Test-point/probe holder on each field terminal of standard I/O Base Units.
 Built-in spare fuse holders and wire strip gauge, located on top of the middle plastic separator
section (between the terminal strips) of a base unit.
 Most modules are CE Mark compliant.
OW350_R1150 25
3.2 Installing Ovation modules
3.2 Installing Ovation modules
DIN rails and modules are typically installed at the factory according to system requirements. If
you need to replace or add Relay Output modules to your system, see Planning Your Ovation
System.
Standard and Compact I/O Modules
The Ovation standard and compact modules are installed in base units mounted on DIN rails in
Ovation cabinets. Each base unit can contain two I/O modules, and even if you only use one I/O
module, you must still use a base unit that contains two terminal blocks.
Relay Output Modules
The Ovation Relay Output modules are installed in base units mounted on DIN rails in Ovation
cabinets. Each base unit can contain one Relay Output Electronics module and the appropriate
relays.
There are two styles of Relay Output Base Units (see page 36):
 1C31223 (16 G2R relays)
 1C31222 (12 KUEP relays)
3.3 Ovation Module Configuration and Status
An Ovation I/O module has 16 address locations, but a module might not use all 16 addresses.
There are four possible address locations in each I/O module that are reserved for special use.
Three of these addresses provide configuration (Write) and status (Read) information.
Definitions for these locations are provided for each module in the module reference pages:
 Address word 13 (D in Hex) is present for every module and is used for configuration and
status. The module status provides diagnostic information that is read by the Controller when
it is online. The status register can be read by using the Point Information window at an
Ovation Operator Station. The Bit Pattern Field can be read on the Hardware Tab of the Point
Information window (See the Ovation Operator Station User Guide.)
 Address word 14 (E in Hex) is used as a secondary or expansion configuration register and
is only used when needed.
 Address word 12 (C in Hex) is used for reporting point specific fault information and
optionally as an expansion configuration register.
 Address word 15 (F in Hex), is used for the module Electronic ID information. This location
and its use are identical for all modules.
Configuration settings for these registers for a point can be viewed in the applicable Point Builder
section of your system manuals. (See Ovation Developer Studio User Guide for the Windows
system, and Ovation Init and Admin Tools User Guide for the Solaris system.)
26 OW350_R1150
3.4 Ovation Module Diagnostic LEDs
3.4 Ovation Module Diagnostic LEDs
Every Ovation module contains diagnostic LEDs. These are used to indicate the status of the
module and to alert you to any module problems.
All I/O modules contain the following LEDs:

 P = (Green) Power OK LED is lit when the power supply to the module is good.
 C = (Green) Communications OK LED is lit when the Controller is communicating with the
module, and when the communication watchdog timer is not timed out.
 E = (Red) Optional External Error LED is lit when there is a problem external to the module,
such as a blown common auxiliary power supply fuse.
 I = (Red) Internal Fault LED is lit when a failure internal to the module has occurred. This LED
is typically an indication that the Electronics module needs to be replaced.
Note: A communication timeout also lights the Internal Fault LED and turns off the
Communications OK LED.
The other LEDs for each module vary according to the functions of the module. Definitions for
LEDs are provided for each module in their individual sections.
3.5 What is involved in the Replacement of User Serviceable Fuses?
Some Electronics modules (Emods) and Personality modules (Pmods) may contain fuses. These
fuses are typically 5 x 20 mm micro-fuses, and are conveniently located (see page 32) for easy
replacement.
3.5.1 Electronics Module Fuses
If a fuse needs to be replaced, push the fuse cap in, turn it one-quarter turn counter-clockwise,
and the fuse pops up. Replace the blown fuse with an exact replacement fuse. Fuse sizes are
indicated on the Electronics module label. Refer to the following table for descriptions of fuses
used by Ovation Electronics modules.
Note: In CE Mark Certified systems, the project drawings MUST include any fuses and their
ratings, if they are replaceable by a qualified technician.
TYPE RATING MODEL PART #
5 x 20 mm cartridge 0.50A; 250V; Compact Digital Input Emod (1C31232G01) EX06100

Fast acting Compact Sequence of Events Emod
(1C31233G01)
OW350_R1150 27
3.5 What is involved in the Replacement of User Serviceable Fuses?
3.5.2 Personality module fuses
If a 5x20 mm cartridge fuse needs to be replaced, push the fuse cap in, turn it one-quarter turn
counter-clockwise, and the fuse pops up. Replace the blown fuse with an exact replacement fuse.
Fuse sizes are indicated on the Personality module label. Refer to the following table for
descriptions of fuses used by Ovation Personality modules.
If the fuse is a micro fuse, pull the blown fuse out of its holder and plug the replacement fuse into
the vacated holder.
Note: In CE Mark Certified systems, the project drawings MUST include any fuses and their
ratings, if they are replaceable by a qualified technician.
TYPE RATING MODEL PART #

2 1 Digital Input Pmods Sequence of Events EX06100
a5 x 20 mm 0.50A; 250V
(1C31110G01)
2 0.063A; 250V Analog Input Pmods 1C31116G02 - G03 EX06102
5 x 20 mm
1 Loop Interface Pmods 1C31177G02 - G03
2 1 Pulse Accum. Pmods 1C31150G01 - G03 EX06071
5 x 20 mm 0.63A; 250V
2 1 Relay Base 16 G2R - 1C31223G01 EX06104
5 x 20 mm 1.0A; 250V
2 1 Loop Interface Pmods1C31177G01 - G03 EX06098
5 x 20 mm 1.25A; 250V
Digital Output Pmods - 1C31125G01
Valve Positioner Pmods 1C31197G01 - G04
Relay Panels (Solid State) 5A22410H01 - H02
Relay Panels (16 G2R) - 5A22411H01
2 1 Relay Panels (8 KU) - 5A22412H01 EX06105
5 x 20 mm 2.0A; 250V
Relay Base (12 KUEP) - 1C31222G01
2 1 Digital Output Pmods - 1C31125G02 EX06101
5 x 20 mm 3.15A;250V
3 1 16 Point Individually fused, 1X00030H02
Micro-Fuse 0.5A;125V
Digital Input Pmod - 5X00034G01
HART Analog Input Pmods 5X00063G01
3 0.063A;125V HART Analog Input Pmods 1X00030H01
Micro-Fuse
1 Analog Inputs - 5X00059G01
3 1 HART Analog Output Pmods 5X00063G01 1X00030H05
Micro-Fuse 0.6A;125V
1
Fast Acting
2
Cartridge
3
Plug-in
28 OW350_R1150
3.6 Personality Module Jumpers
3.5.3 Ovation Cabinet Fuses
In addition to Personality module fuses, there are other fuses that can also be serviced by users.
Refer to the following table for descriptions of fuses used in Ovation cabinets.
TYPE RATING MODEL PART # NOTES
Micro-Fuse 5.0A; 250V; CBO Backplane 4A00120H01 Auxiliary power Branch fuses
Fast acting 3A99200G01 - G02 CBO: F1 -F4
ROP Panel 4D33922G01 ROP: F1, F2, F7, F8
TND Panel 4D33924G01 TND: F1, F2, F6, F7
RRP Panel 3A99252G01 RRP: F1, F2
RRB Panel 3A99253G01 RRB: F1, F2
0001.2515 12.5A; 5x20; Power Distribution 1X00728H01L AUX Power Fuse
250VAC; Panel
Schurter 125VDC 5X00489G01 F1
Type T
3.6 Personality Module Jumpers
Most of the Ovation Personality modules do not have configurable jumpers. However, if a module
does have configurable jumpers, and the default settings need to be changed, the card must be
removed from the Personality module case in order to be configured. Use the following procedure
to open a Personality module case:
Note: Be sure to observe static electricity guidelines.
1. Use a small straight-edge screwdriver to press in one of the clips located on the side of the
module until the module cap is loosened. Remove the module cap.
2. Push both clips on the module bottom outward until the card is free to slide.
3. Slide the card out the top of the module and make the desired jumper changes.
4. Slide the card back into the module case, being sure the card is positioned in the card
channels, and the bottom clips are engaged.
OW350_R1150 29
3.7 I/O environmental specifications
5. Replace the module cap.
Module Cap
Module
Side
Clip
(press in)
Clip (push outward) Clip (push outward)
Module Bottom
Figure 1: Module Cap
3.7 I/O environmental s pecifications
The following tables provide common environmental specifications for the Ovation I/O modules.
I/O Module specifications
DESCRIPTION MINIMUM VALUE MAXIMUM VALUE
Temperature o o o o
0 C (32 F) Operating 60 C (140 F) Operating
o o o o
- 40 C (-40 F) Storage 85 C (185 F) Storage
Humidity (non-condensing) 0% Operating 95% Operating
90% Operating (CE Mark)
o
Maximum wet bulb temp 35 C
30 OW350_R1150
3.7 I/O environmental specifications
Relay Output module specifications
DESCRIPTION MINIMUM VALUE MAXIMUM VALUE

1
Temperature
o o o o
Relay Output G2R/KUEP Form X 0 C (32 F) Operating 60 C (140 F) Operating
o o o o
Relay Output KUEP Form C o o o o
0 C (32 F) Operating 45 C (113 F) Operating
o o o o
Humidity (non-condensing)
Relay Output G2R 35% Operating 85% Operating
o
Maximum wet bulb temp 35 C
Relay Output KUEP Form X/Form C N/A N/A
1
See Relay Output Module (see page 424) for additional temperature and derating information relative to
specific cabinet configuration.
OW350_R1150 31
3.8 Standard module components
Standard I/O modules combine special Personality modules with Electronics modules in order to
operate at a wide range of signals, and perform a multitude of functions.
The standard Ovation modules are illustrated below and consist of the following:
 Base Units (containing I/O bus power, signals, and field terminations).
 Electronics modules.
 Personality modules (foam inserts are used instead of Personality modules for some I/O
modules).
DIN Rail
Base-to-Base Connector Terminal Block Connections
A, B, C
C
A
"B" Side of Base Unit

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 13 14 15 16 17
Module Base Connectors
Base Unit
Spare Fuse
1
1
DIN Rail Mounting Screw Locations

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 13 14 15 16 17
Typical Fuse Locations
Status LEDs
"A" Side of Base Unit
PCEI
Module Latches
C
A
Electronics Module
Personality Module Terminal Block Connections
A, B, C
Figure 2: Ovation modules (Top View)
32 OW350_R1150
1. Base Unit
The base unit (containing two terminal blocks) mounts onto a DIN rail. Each base unit
accommodates two I/O modules.
The footprint of the base unit (containing Electronic and Personality module) is:
27.9 cm Long (11 in)
12.7 cm Wide (5 in)
16.5 cm High (6.5 in)
If you use only one I/O module, you still must use a base unit that contains two terminal
blocks.
For the Standard I/O Marshalling Base Unit, field terminations are located on the half shells
and connected to the base. See Marshaling Base Unit (see page 35) for more information.
CAUTION! For CE Mark Certified Systems:
Base units containing differential digital input modules configuration with hazardous input
voltages (>30 V RMS, 42.4 V peak, or 60 VDC) listed in the following table must include a
hazardous voltage warning label (1B30025H01) on that base unit. Hazardous voltage is
present on the individual module terminal blocks and module connector(s).
Differential digital input module configurations with hazardous input voltages
CONFIGURATION EMOD PMOD
125VAC/VDC Digital Input (Diff) 1C31107G02 1C31110G02

125VAC/VDC Compact Digital Input (Diff) 1C31232G03 1C31238H01
125VDC Sequence of Events (Diff) 1C31157G02 1C31110G02
125VDC Compact Sequence of Events (Diff) 1C31233G03 1C31238H01
125VDC Enhanced Compact Sequence of Events (Diff) 5X00357G03 1C31238H01
CAUTION! Base units containing single ended or fused digital input modules with hazardous
voltages (>30 V RMS, 42.4 V peak, or 60 VDC) listed in the following table must include a
hazardous voltage warning label (1B30025H01) on the base unit as well as ALL base units of
the branch. Hazardous voltage is present on terminal block and module connectors of bases
on an entire branch. In addition, auxiliary power fuses must be removed and a fuse cover kit
should be added (see page 799).
Base units containing single ended or fused digital input modules with hazardous voltages
CONFIGURATION EMOD PMOD
125VAC/VDC Digital Input (Sing) 1C31107G02 1C31110G01

125VAC/VDC Compact Digital Input (Fused) 1C31232G03 5X00034G01
125VDC Sequence of Events (Sing) 1C31157G02 1C31110G01
125VDC Compact Sequence of Events (Fused) 1C31233G03 5X00034G01
125VDC Enhanced Compact Sequence of Events (Fused) 5X00357G03 5X00034G01
OW350_R1150 33
CAUTION! Hazardous labels must be placed in a visible location on the base unit, preferable
above the spare fuse location. This information must be indicated in the application specific
project drawings.
2. Electronics module (Emod)

The Electronics module (configured by adding the appropriate Personality module) fits into
the base unit.
3. Personality module (Pmod)
The Personality module (configures the Electronics module) fits into the base unit beside the
appropriate Electronics module.
Note: The Personality module is installed in the base unit first. Then, the Electronics module is
installed and interlocks with the Personality module. The blue corner latches on the Electronics
module locks both modules into the base unit.
Wires from customer field devices are connected to terminal block in the base unit.
The wiring connections to the terminal block for each combination of Electronics module and
Personality module are printed on each Personality module, and are illustrated in each module
description in the following sections.
34 OW350_R1150
3.8.1 Marshalling Base Unit
Marshalling Base (5X00334G01)
Cable Connector (1X00439H01)
The Ovation Marshalling Base Unit serves as an interface between the field connections, the I/O
bus, and the Personality and Electronics Modules. The I/O bus is used by the Controller to
communicate with the I/O subsystem via the Ovation Marshalling Base Unit Backplane. Power is
also distributed to the Electronics Modules via the I/O bus.
The Ovation Marshalling Base Unit is similar to the Ovation I/O Base (1B30035) except the field
termination terminal block is replaced with 17 Pin Headers. The Headers are mated to a plug with
a screw flange and with a 17-position screw connection. This arrangement allows the use of pre-
fabricated cables for the field wiring and provides secure anchoring of the cable.
The following figure depicts the Marshalling Base Unit identifying the Aux power terminals (+) A17
and (-) B17.
Figure 3: Marshalling Base Unit
OW350_R1150 35
3.9 Relay module components
3.9 Rela y module components
The Ovation Relay module consists of two parts, refer to the following figures:
1. Base Unit
The relay base assembly consists of a backplane with connectors, a plastic housing, and a
DIN rail clamping/grounding mechanism. This unit accommodates the relays for interfacing
with field devices.
2. Relay Output Electronics module
The relay output Electronics module is an on-line replaceable module that provides the relay
output circuit board. This board contains relay coil drive interfacing as well as I/O bus and bus
power interface. This module plugs into the desired relay output base unit.
36 OW350_R1150
The wires from the customer field devices are connected to the terminal block in the base unit.
DIN Rail
Base-to-Base Connector
Fuse
"B" Side of Base Unit

TB16
TB15
R16
R15
TB14
TB13
R14
R13
TB12
TB11
R12
R11
Terminal Block
TB10
Connections
TB9
R10
DIN Rail Mounting Screw
R9
O PEN
TB8
L O CKED
TB7
R8
Base Unit
16
15
14
R7
13
12
TB6
TB5
11
R6
10
Electronics Module
9
8
R5
7
6
TB4
5
TB3
4
"A" Side of Base Unit

R4
3
2
1
R3
I
1 C31 2 1 9 G0 1
E
REL AY O UT PUT
C
TB2
P
TB1
R2
O PEN
Module Latches
R1
L O CKED
Figure 4: Relay Output Panel G2R
OW350_R1150 37
38
Fuse
Module Latches
Electronics Module
Figure 5: Relay Output KUEP

P C E I 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
O PEN O PEN
REL AY O UT PUT
L O CKED 1 C31 2 1 9 G0 1 L O CKED
R2 R4 R6 R7 R9 R11
DIN Rail
R1 R3 R5 R8 R10 R12
T T T T T T T T T T T T
B B B B B B B B B B B B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
"A" Side of Base Unit "B" Side of Base Unit

Connections
Terminal Block
Base Unit
OW350_R1150
S E C T I O N 4
4 Analog Input modules
IN THIS SECTION
Analog Input module (13-Bit) - (AI-13) .............................................................................. 39

Analog Input module (14-Bit) - (AI-14) .............................................................................. 53
High Speed Analog Input Module (14-Bit) - (HSAI) .......................................................... 63
HART Analog Input module - (HAI) ................................................................................... 86
HART High Performance Analog Input module - (HHPAI)................................................ 99
RTD module (4 Channel) - (RTD-4) ................................................................................ 114
RTD module (8-Channel) - (RTD-8) ................................................................................ 124
16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input module (Windows Ovation 3.4 and above) .............. 133
4.1 Analog Input module (13 -Bit) - (AI-13)
The Ovation Analog Input module with an associated Personality module provides signal
conditioning and analog-to-digital conversion for eight galvanically isolated analog inputs. Field
inputs are surge protected and routed by the appropriate Personality module and then sent to the
Electronics module for conversion.
The Analog Input module (13 bits) is applicable for CE Mark Certified Systems.
Note: I/O Module General Information (see page 25) contains environmental, installation, wiring,
and fuse information for I/O modules.
4.1.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (AI-13)

 1C31113G01 provides voltage input range of ± 20 mV.
 1C31113G04 provides voltage input range of ± 1 V.
OW350_R1150 39
4.1 Analog Input module (13-Bit) - (AI-13)
4.1.2 Personality modules and jumper settings (Pmod) - (AI-13)

 1C31116G01 provides voltage analog inputs.
 1C31116G02 provides field-powered current analog inputs.
 1C31116G03 provides locally powered current analog inputs.
 1C31116G04 provides voltage analog inputs with a temperature sensor for cold junction
thermocouple compensation.
Figure 6: Jumper settings for analog input personality module (1C31116G01 & 04)
Note: The circuit board must be removed from the module housing to access the jumpers (see
page 29).
4.1.3 Subsystems - (AI-13)
1

MODULE MODULE
± 20mV 8 1 1C31116G01
1C31113G01
± 50mV 8 1 1C31116G01
1C31113G02
± 100mV 8 1 1C31116G01
1C31113G03
8 1C31113G01
8 1C31113G02

8 1C31113G03
± 1 VDC 8 1 1C31116G01
1C31113G04
± 5 VDC 8 1 1C31116G01
1C31113G05
± 10 VDC 8 1 1C31116G01
1C31113G06
40 OW350_R1150

MODULE MODULE
0-20 mA Field powered 8 1, 2 1C31116G02

1C31113G05
(4-20 mA Field powered can also be selected in the I/O
Builder for Solaris applications; card is configured
appropriately)
0-20 mA Locally powered 8 1, 2 1C31116G03
1C31113G05
(4-20 mA Locally powered can also be selected in the
I/O Builder for Solaris applications; card is configured
appropriately)
1
3
This module configurations is CE Mark Certified (Non-EMC Cabinet).
3
A ninth logical channel (does not connect to a device) is provided when using the Analog Input module
with temperature sensor. This ninth point is needed for the CJ Compensation field of the Point Builder
Instrumentation Tab when defining the eight other thermocouple points for the AI module. (See Ovation Init
and AdMin User Guide (for Solaris) or Ovation Developer Studio User Guide (for Windows).
4.1.4 External power supply information - (AI-13)
Note: Module power specifications (main and auxiliary) refer to the actual power drawn by the
module from the 24VDC main power supply and from the auxiliary power supply (if required)
and NOT from the AC or DC Mains.
If the Analog Input module uses the 1C31116G03 Personality module (configured with locally
powered current analog inputs), the required voltage source may be obtained from the internal
auxiliary power supply (backplane) or it may be obtained from an external power supply.
If an external power supply is used, Using an External Power Supply (see page 799) contains
steps follow before connecting the external power supply to the Analog Input module base unit
terminal block. The Analog Input module auxiliary supply voltage level (24 VDC or 48 VDC)
depends on the external transmitter devices being interfaced to the (AI) module‟s analog inputs.
OW350_R1150 41
4.1.5 Terminal block wiring information - (AI-13)
Each Personality module has a simplified wiring diagram label on its side, which appears above
the terminal block. This diagram indicates how to connect the wiring from the field to the terminal
block in the base unit.
Note: For the Standard I/O Marshalling Base Unit, field terminations are located on the half
shells and connected to the base. See Marshaling Base Unit (see page 35) for more
information.
The diagrams for the analog input Personality modules are illustrated in the following figure. The
following table lists and defines the abbreviations used in those diagrams.
Figure 7: Terminal block connections for the Analog Input Personality modules
42 OW350_R1150
Shielded twisted-pair wire should be used for the field interface. For analog input signals; the (-)
and shield should be tied together to earth ground either locally at the cabinet or at the field
device.
Abbreviations used in diagrams
ABBREVIATION DEFINITION
Earth ground terminals
A1 - A8 Analog Input positive terminal connection

+
A1 - A8 Analog Input negative terminal connection
-
P1 - P8 Positive terminal connection for current loop power
+
PS+, PS- Auxiliary power supply terminals
RSV Reserved terminal. No connections allowed on these terminals.
SH1 - SH8 Shield terminal connection.
Note: Do not use unmarked terminal block locations.
Shield terminals (SH) are not connected in CE Mark systems.
OW350_R1150 43
4.1.6 Field connection wiring diagrams - (AI-13)
Figure 8: Field connections, Analog Input Personality module
Note: See Personality module Jumpers (see page 29) for details on accessing the jumpers.
44 OW350_R1150
4.1.7 Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark) - (AI-13)
Figure 9: Field connections for the Analog Input Personality module (CE Mark)
OW350_R1150 45
4.1.8 Thermocouple Personality module functionality & coefficients - (AI-13) &

(HSAI)
When two dissimilar metals (a thermocouple) are joined together, a voltage (the Seebeck
Voltage) is generated between them. This voltage is directly related to the temperature at the
junction of the two metals. The relationship between the voltage and the temperature can be best
described by a fifth order polynomial, determined by the two types of metals that are joined.
To measure the voltage (Vt) between the two metals, a voltmeter (in this case, an analog input
card) must be connected to each wire. Unfortunately, this produces two new junctions and
voltages (V1 and V2) between the terminals and the thermocouples. The following formula is
used to find Vt: Vt = Vm -V1 -V2.
It is not possible to measure V1 and V2 without inducing more junctions and voltages; therefore,
the analog input subsystem has a temperature sensor on the Personality module (1C31116G04)
to measure the temperature (Tj) at the terminal block of the base unit.
A conversion formula, determined from the junction metal and thermocouple metals, is used to
calculate the combined voltage of V1 and V2. This is called Cold Junction Compensation.
Figure 10: Thermocouple illustration
Use the Instrumentation tab of the Point Builder to select the Field Instrumentation Type (B or TB,
E or TE, J or TJ, K or TK, R or TR, S or TS, T or TT). The Ovation system then assigns the
default thermocouple coefficients based on the Type selected. Refer to the following table for
these coefficient definitions.
If you override the default coefficients by entering new values, the new values remain until you
select another thermocouple type. The values then return to the values for the type just selected.
Thermocouple coefficient definitions
THERM OCOUPLE TYPE STANDARD TEMPERATURE ACTUAL RANGE IN MV / TEMP BEST FIT
RANGE
B or TB 400 to 1100 Degrees C 0.000 to 13.814 (0 to 1820) 20 mv card

800 to 2000 Degrees F 0.006 to 13.814 (0 to 3308) 20 mv card
46 OW350_R1150
RANGE
Fahrenheit Centigrade
COEF_1 = 3.5164700E+02 COEF_1 = 1.7758167E+02
COEF_2 = 6.1388490E+05 COEF_2 = 3.4104717E+05
COEF_3 = – 1.5397740E+08 COEF_3 = – 8.5543000E+07
COEF_4 = 3.3593730E+10 COEF_4 = – 8.5543000E+07
COEF_5 = – 4.0518260E+12 COEF_5 = – 8.5543000E+07
COEF_6 = 2.0039330E+14 COEF_6 = 1.1132961E+14
COEF_7 = – 2.0E-06 COEF_7 = – 2.0E-06
COEF_8 = 0.0 COEF_8 = 0.0
E or TE – 18 to 286 Degrees C – 9.835 to 19.945 (– 270 to 286) 20 mv card

0 to 550 Degrees F – 9.835 to 19.945 (– 450 to 548) 20 mv card
– 18 to 661 Degrees C – 9.835 to 49.992 (– 270 to 661) 50 mv card
– 18 to 1000 Degrees C – 9.835 to 76.358 (– 270 to 1000) 100 mv
0 to 1832 Degrees F – 9.835 to 76.358 (– 450 to 1832) card
100 mv
card
COEF_1 = 3.1672830E+01 COEF_1 = – 1.8176111E-01
COEF_2 = 3.0306280E+04 COEF_2 = 1.6836822E+04
COEF_3 = – 3.3449490E+05 COEF_3 = – 1.8583050E+05
COEF_4 = 6.8495880E+06 COEF_4 = 3.8053267E+06
COEF_5 = – 6.9753490E+07 COEF_5 = – 3.8751939E+07
COEF_6 = 2.9236530E+08 COEF_6 = 1.6242517E+08
COEF_7 = – 1.0939E-03 COEF_7 = – 1.71E-05
COEF_8 = 3.365E-05 COEF_8 = 6.057E-05
J or TJ – 18 to 365 Degrees C – 8.096 to 19.971 (– 210 to 366) 20 mv card

– 140 to 700 Degrees F – 8.137 to 19.977 – 350 to 691) 20 mv card
COEF_1 = 3.112531E+01 COEF_1 = – 4.8593889E-01
COEF_2 = 3.6070270E+04 COEF_2 = 2.0039039E+04
COEF_3 = – 4.2886170E+05 COEF_3 = – 2.3825650E+05
COEF_4 = 2.2613820E+07 COEF_4 = 1.2563233E+07
COEF_5 = – 5.1743790E+08 COEF_5 = – 2.8746550E+08
COEF_6 = 3.9727830E+09 COEF_6 = 2.2071017E+09
COEF_7 = – 9.256E-04 COEF_7 = – 9.76E-06
COEF_8 = 2.862E-05 COEF_8 = 5.1516E-05
K or TK – 18 to 480 Degrees C – 6.458 to 19.959 (– 270 to 484) 20 mv card

100 mv
card
OW350_R1150 47
RANGE
COEF_1 = 3.0344730E+01 COEF_1 = – 9.1959444E-01
COEF_2 = 4.4031910E+04 COEF_2 = 2.4462172E+04
COEF_3 = 1.615839E+05 COEF_3 = 8.9768833E+04
COEF_4 = – 1.616257E+07 COEF_4 = – 8.9792056E+06
COEF_5 = 4.4011090E+08 COEF_5 = 2.4450606E+08
COEF_6 = – 3.599650E+09 COEF_6 = – 1.9998056E+09
COEF_7 = – 7.259E-04 COEF_7 = – 8.14E-06
COEF_8 = 2.243E-05 COEF_8 = 4.0374E-05
R or TR 260 to 1100 Degrees C 0.000 to 19.998 (0 to 1684) 20 mv card

COEF_1 = 8.3628480E+01 COEF_1 = 2.8682489E+01
COEF_2 = 2.2737160E+05 COEF_2 = 1.2631756E+05
COEF_3 = – 1.2482860E+07 COEF_3 = – 6.9349222E+06
COEF_4 = 1.2062540E+09 COEF_4 = 6.7014111E+08
COEF_5 = – 7.4221280E+10 COEF_5 = – 4.1234044E+10
COEF_6 = 1.89930000E+12 COEF_6 = 1.0551667E+12
COEF_7 = – 1.084E-04 COEF_7 = – 4.72E-06
COEF_8 = 3.24E-06 COEF_8 = 5.832E-06
S or TS 400 to 1100 Degrees C 0.000 to 18.698 (0 to 1768) 20 mv card

750 to 2000 Degrees F -0.092 to 18.696 (0 to 3214) 20 mv card
COEF_1 = 1.1803440E+02 COEF_1 = 4.7796889E+01
COEF_2 = 1.9859180E+05 COEF_2 = 1.1032878E+05
COEF_3 = – 1.9730960E+04 COEF_3 = – 1.0961644E+04
COEF_4 = – 5.0093290E+08 COEF_4 = – 2.7829606E+08
COEF_5 = 4.1104880E+10 COEF_5 = 2.2836044E+10
COEF_6 = – 1.1557940E+12 COEF_6 = – 6.4210778E+11
COEF_7 = – 1.0847E-04 COEF_7 = – 4.15E-06
COEF_8 = 3.26E-06 COEF_8 = 5.868E-06
T or TT -46 to 400 Degrees C -6.258 to 19.945 (-270 to 385) 20 mv card

-50 to 750 Degrees F -6.254 to 19.979 (-450 to 726) 20 mv card
COEF_1 = 3.1892240E+01 COEF_1 = – 5.9866667E-02
COEF_2 = 4.6693280E+04 COEF_2 = 2.5940711E+04
COEF_3 = – 1.3257390E+06 COEF_3 = – 7.3652167E+05
COEF_4 = 6.9620670E+07 COEF_4 = 3.8678150E+07
COEF_5 = – 2.3278080E+09 COEF_5 = – 1.2932267E+09
COEF_6 = 3.3306460E+10 COEF_6 = 1.8503589E+10
COEF_7 = – 7.3333E-04 COEF_7 = – 1.55700E-05
COEF_8 = 2.243E-05 COEF_8 = 4.0374E-05
48 OW350_R1150
4.1.9 Register configuration/address information - (AI-13)
Word address 13 (D in Hex) is used to configure the module and provide status information to the
Controller. The status register can be read by using the Point Information window at an Operator
Station (see the Bit Pattern field on the Hardware tab). (See the Ovation Operator Station User
Guide.)
Analog Input configuration/status register (address 13 or D in Hex)
BIT DATA DESCRIPTION - DATA DESCRIPTION - STATUS REGISTER (READ)

CONFIGURATION REGISTER (WRITE)
0 Configure module Module Configured (1 = configured; 0 = unconfigured)

1 Force Error Internal or forced error
(1 = forced error; 0 = no forced error)
2-6 Not Used Not Used (0)
7 Not Used EEPROM Checksum Error - Module Uncalibrated
(1 = error; 0 = no error)
8 50/60 Hz Selection (0 = 60Hz, 1 = 50Hz) 50 Hz/60 Hz System (0 = 60Hz; 1 = 50Hz)
9 Use Line Sync if Present (1 = use) Using Line Sync
10 Not Used Line Frequency Tracking Active
11 Not Used EE PROM Program Enabled
12 Not Used PSD Generator Malfunction
13 Not Used Internal Memory Error
(EPROM Checksum or Static RAM Error)
14 Not Used Temperature Sensor Failure
15 Not Used 1
Point Fault
1
Refer to Point Quality registers for descriptions of the Point Faults.
Bit 0: This bit configures the module (write) or indicates the configuration state of the module
(read). A “1” indicates that the module is configured. Note that until the module is configured,
accessing addresses 0 through 11 (B in Hex) produces an attention status.
Bit 1: This bit (write “1”) forces the module into its error state, resulting in the error LED being
lit. The read of bit 1 indicates the error state of the module, with “1” indicating that there is an
internal error in the module or the Controller has forced the module into an error state. The
state of this bit is always reflected by the module's Internal Error LED. Whenever this bit is
set, an attention status is returned to the Controller when the point data is read (that is,
accessing addresses 0 through 11).
Bits 2 - 6: These bits are “not used” values and are read as “0” under normal operation.
Bit 7: This bit is the result of a checksum test of the EEPROM. A failure of this test can
indicate a bad EEPROM, but typically indicates that the module has not been calibrated. A “0”
indicates that there is no error condition. If this error is present, the error is indicated by the
module error LED being lit and the module does not process the point information. The point
fault bit is also set as all the point data is uncalibrated. When this error is present, no other
processing takes place. The “1” state of this bit indicates an unrecoverable error condition in
the field.
OW350_R1150 49
Bit 8: This bit indicates if the on-board integrating timebase is 80 msec (4 line cycles of a 50
Hz system) or 83.3 msec (5 line cycles of a 60 Hz system). A “0” indicates that the timebase
is 83.3 msec (60 Hz line frequency) and is the default setting.
Bit 9: This bit indicates whether to use the line frequency tracking if it is present. A write of “1”
indicates to use the tracking input. A read of “1” indicates that the module is using the tracking
input. The default state is a “0.”
Note: Line frequency tracking is presently NOT supported by the Ovation I/O system.
Bit 10: This bit indicates whether the line frequency tracking signal is present and active for
greater normal and common mode rejection. A “0” indicates that the line frequency tracking
signal is NOT present.
Bit 11: This bit indicates whether the hardware EEPROM PE signal is active. A “0” indicates
that the module is in normal operating mode and calibration and ID programming commands
are not processed.
Bit 12: This bit reflects the detection of the internal 625 KHz PSD signal at module
initialization. This verifies that the multifunction FPGA and the microcontroller's timer 0 are
functioning. A “0” indicates that there is no error condition. A “1” indicates an unrecoverable
error condition in the field.
Bit 13: This bit is a basic check of program and data memory, along with the microcontroller's
data, address, and control buses. A “0” indicates that there is no error condition. A “1”
indicates an unrecoverable error condition in the field.
Bit 14: This bit indicates the fault status of the digital temperature sensor. A “0” indicates the
sensor is present and communicating properly with the microcontroller. A “1” indicates a fault
exists; either there is no sensor present, or problems exist in communicating with the sensor.
On an uncalibrated module, a sensor failure is always reported because the uncalibrated
status prevents the sensor from being checked.
Bit 15: This bit indicates the point fault status of the module. It is the logical “OR” of the eight
individual point quality statuses plus bits 1, 7, 12, and 13 of this register. A “0” indicates that
all eight points have good quality and no module errors exist. A “1” indicates that at least one
of the points has bad quality and is therefore in fault.
A subsequent read of the Point Quality status register at Address 12 (C in Hex) reveals which of
the eight points has bad quality and the cause of the bad quality condition. The Address 12 (C in
Hex) Point Quality Status Register contains data only when the module fault is due to a bad point
quality; that is, bits 7, 12, and 13 of this register or the forced error bit are not set. Note that the
Temperature Sensor (Address 8) status is treated separately and is not included in this module
point fault bit.
Word address 12 (C in Hex) serves the purpose of reporting the point quality of the eight channel
inputs. The bit definitions for this register are encoded as shown in the following table.
Point Quality register (address 12 or C in Hex)
POIN BIT DESCRIPTION

T
1-8 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14 Auto Calibration Reasonability Check Failed

1-8 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15 Overrange Input/Blown Fuse/Open Loop/Open Thermocouple
50 OW350_R1150
Auto Calibration Reasonability Check Failed - This bit is set when the auto calibration zero or
reference reading is out of tolerance (±6% of the nominal reading).
Overrange Input/Blown Fuse/Open Loop/Open Thermocouple - This bit is set under the
following conditions:
 Voltage Input Configuration (all groups) - when an overrange input of ±125% of the full
scale value is read on the input.
 Current Input Configuration (Group 5) - when an input less than 2.5mA (a blown fuse or
open loop condition) is detected or an overrange of greater than 25mA of full scale is present.
Secondary configuration/status register (address 14 or E in Hex)
BIT DATA DESCRIPTION - CURRENT/VOLTAGE DATA DESCRIPTION - CURRENT/VOLTAGE

CONFIGURATION (WRITE) STATUS (READ)
0-7 Select Point 1 - 8 Current/Voltage (1 = Current) Select Point 1 - 8 Current/Voltage (1 = Current)

8 - 15 Not Used Point 1 - 8 Current Blown Fuse (1 = Blown)
Word address 14 (E in Hex) serves the purpose of the Current/Voltage Configuration/Status

Register. The bit definitions for this register are encoded as shown in the following table.
The default state of the register under normal operation is “0” for voltage inputs. The lower 8 bits
are configuration bits which are written to and read from the module. The upper 8 bits are read-
only status bits indicating the blown fuse status only for those channels which have been
configured as current inputs.
4.1.10 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (AI-13, AI-14 & HSAI)
LED DESCRIPTION
P (green) Power OK LED. Lit when the +5V power is OK.

C (green) Communication OK LED. Lit when the Ovation Controller is communicating with the module.
E No LED.
I (Red) Internal Error LED. Lit whenever there is any type of error with the module except for a loss
of power. Possible causes are:
 Module initialization is in progress.
 I/O Bus timeout has occurred.
 Internal hardware error.
 Module reset
 Module is uncalibrated.
 Forced error has been received from the Controller.
 Communication between the Field and Logic boards failed.
1 - 8 (Red) Channel error. Lit whenever there is an error associated with a channel or channels. Possible
causes are:
 Positive overrange: Input voltage greater than +121% of full scale value (for modules
configured as voltage input).
 Negative overrange: Input voltage less than -121% of full scale value (for modules
 Current loop out of range
 Calibration readings out of range.
OW350_R1150 51
LED DESCRIPTION
9 - 16 No LED.
4.1.11 Specifications - (AI-13)
Electronics module (1C31113)

Personality module (1C31116)
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Number of channels 8
1 G 20 mv
Input range
G 50 mv
G 100 mv
G 1V
2
G 5V
G 10 V
Resolution 13-Bit (including polarity)
Data format 13-bit, two's complement, and error indicator bits
Conversion type Sigma Delta
Operating mode Self-scan
Monotonicity Yes
Non-linearity 0.003% of full scale
Repeatability Within guaranteed accuracy
Guaranteed accuracy (@25 C) Accuracy over -25% to 100% range of full scale input level:
 0.10% of upper range value 10 V 1/2LSB @99.7% confidence.
 Accuracy over -100% to -25% range of full scale input level:
 0.15% of upper range value 10 V 1/2LSB @99.7% confidence.
Temperature coefficient 0.24% of the upper range value 24 V over 0 to 60 C.
3
Input impedance:
Groups G01 through G05 10 M-ohms
Group G06 ( 10V input only) 2 M-ohms
Maximum overload G01 - G03: 10 Vdc or Vrms

G04 - G06: 120 Vdc or Vrms
Sample duration time (msec) 50 Hz configuration : 80
60 Hz configuration: 83.33
Sample repetition (msec) 50 Hz configuration : 80
60 Hz configuration: 83.33
Filtering Digital, Sinc, 3dB cutoff: 13.1 Hz for 50 Hz, 15.7 Hz for 60 Hz
Offset and gain temperature drift Automatic
compensation
52 OW350_R1150
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Diagnostics Internal module operating faults.

 Out of range detection.
 Open thermocouple detection for thermocouple inputs.
 Open loop/blown fuse detection for current inputs.
Dielectric isolation:
Channel to channel 1000 V AC/DC
Channel to logic 1000 V AC/DC
Normal mode rejection 60 dB at 50 Hz 1/2% or 60 Hz 1/2%
30 dB (typical) at 50 Hz 5% or 60 Hz 5%
Common mode rejection and 120 dB at DC, power line frequency and its harmonics 1/2% tracking.
channel to channel crosstalk 100 dB (typical) for nominal line frequency 5% and harmonics.
Module power Main: 2.5 W typical; 3.38 W Maximum
Aux: When used (1C31116G03)
Aux power supply voltage = 24 V DC
3.84 W typical (8 inputs @ 20mA each)
Operating temperature range 0 to 60 C (32 F to 140 F)
Storage temperature range -40 C to 85 C (-40 F to 185 F)
Humidity (non-condensing) 0 to 95%
1
Ranges are available through separate modules.
2
Current inputs when using Personality module 1C31116G02 or 1C31116G03 with 5V Electronics module.
The input range 0 to 20 mA is also available, but if selected, blown fuse detection will be disabled. If you select 0
to 20 mA, the software adds a suffix “A” to the Personality module identification. This “A” is not displayed, it is
only used by the database to differentiate between 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA, in order to generate correct
coefficients.
3
Only for modules used with voltage input Personality modules (1C1116G01 and 1C1116G04).
4.2 Analog Input module (14 -Bit) - (AI-14)
The combined Personality and Electronics modules form the 14 Bit Analog Input module. Eight
sets of galvanically isolated input channels are provided. The input signals are conditioned and
routed through the appropriate Personality module to the Electronics module. The Personality
module also provides surge protection to protect the input circuits of the Electronics module. The
Electronics module performs the analog to digital conversions and provides interfacing to the
Ovation Serial I/O Bus.
No thermocouple provisions are provided for this module.
4.2.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (AI-14)

 1C31224G01 provides current signals with an input range of 4 to 20 mA.
 1C31224G02 provides voltage signals with an input range of ± 1V.
OW350_R1150 53
4.2.2 Personality modules (Pmod) - (AI-14)

 1C31227G01 provides current signals with an input range of 4 to 20 mA.
 1C31227G02 provides voltage signals with an input range of ± 1V.
4.2.3 Subsystems - (AI-14)

MODULE MODULE
1 8 1 1C31227G01
4 - 20mA, Field or Locally powered 1C31224G01
± 1 VDC 8 1 1C31227G02
1C31224G02
1
The 4-20mA Configuration is CE Mark certified.
4.2.4 External power supplies - (AI-14)
If the 14-Bit Analog Input module uses the 1C31227G01 Personality module, the required voltage
source is obtained from the internal auxiliary power supply (backplane).
Also, Personality module 1C31227G01 supports field-powered configurations.
54 OW350_R1150
4.2.5 Terminal block wiring information - (AI-14)
information.
The diagrams for the Analog Input Personality modules are illustrated in the following figure. The
Figure 11: Terminal Block Connections for the Analog Input Personality Modules
Abbreviations used in wiring diagrams
Earth ground terminals.
A1 - A8 Analog Input positive terminal connection (connected to the positive terminal of the
field device).
+
A1 - A8 Analog Input negative terminal connection (voltage input group only).
-
CI1 - CI8 Current input terminals.
P-1 - P-8 Loop power output terminals (for locally powered loops).
PS+, PS- Auxiliary power supply terminals.
OW350_R1150 55

Use shielded twisted pair wire for the field wiring. Tie the Analog Input negative terminal and
shield together and to earth ground, either locally at the cabinet or at the field device. Voltage
inputs use the 1C31227G02 Personality modules. Grounding the shield and the analog input
negative terminal at the cabinet or at the field device is arranged by the proper Terminal Block
connections.
Similarly, current inputs using the 1C31227G01 Personality modules can accommodate field or
locally powered devices by using the correct terminal block connections.
The Personality modules have a field connection diagram label on top of each module to facilitate
field wiring. The figures in 14-Bit Analog Input Field Connection Wiring Diagrams (see page 57)
show the implementations of the field connections for the various Personality module and field
device combinations.
56 OW350_R1150
4.2.6 Field connection wiring diagrams - (AI-14)
Local grounding
Field grounding
Field powered
Locally powered
Caution
When using locally powered current inputs, the power distribution panel MUST be equipped with
jumper module 5A26471G01 to ensure proper grounding of the aux Bus supply.
Figure 12: Field Connections for the Input Connectors
OW350_R1150 57
4.2.7 Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark) - (AI-14)
Caution
All field wiring must be braid shielded and grounded at the entry point of the cabinet using recommended
hardware (refer to "Cable Guidelines" in the applicable Ovation installation manual for your system.
Figure 13: Field connections for Input Connectors (CE Mark)
58 OW350_R1150
4.2.8 Module block diagram - (AI-14)
The simplified block diagram for the voltage input configuration of the14-Bit Analog Input module
is shown in the following figure. The channel 1 input is grounded locally at the cabinet, and
grounding at the field device is shown for the channel 8 input.
Figure 14: Voltage input connections
4.2.9 Register configuration/address information - (AI-14)
Station (See the Ovation Operator Station User Guide).
14-Bit Analog Input configuration/status (Address 13 or D in Hex)

0 Configure module Module Configured (1 = configured; 0 = unconfigured)

1 Force Error Internal or forced error (1 = forced error; 0 = no forced
error)
2 0, (ADD4 bit during diagnostics) Not Used (0)
4 0, (ADD6 bit during diagnostics) Warming
7 0, (DIAG_SET, initiates diagnostics) Module is not calibrated
OW350_R1150 59

8 50/60 Hz Selection (0 = 60Hz, 1 = 50Hz) 50 Hz/60 Hz System (0 = 60Hz; 1 = 50Hz)

9 A/D conversion rate selection bit A/D conversion rate bit
(0 = Normal, 1 = High speed) (0 = Normal, 1 = High speed)
10 0, (SYS_CAL, initiates system calibration SYS_CAL in progress (during diagnostics)
during diagnostics)
11 SELF_CAL (initiates self calibration) SYS_CAL completed (during diagnostics)
12 Not defined SYS_CAL failed (during diagnostics)
13 Not defined Internal Memory Error
(FLASH Checksum, Register, or Static RAM Error)
14 Not defined Module in diagnostic mode (during diagnostics)
15 Not defined 1
Point Fault
1
Refer to the Point Quality Register for descriptions of the Point Faults.
Bits defined for diagnostics are used only during factory testing.
reading from addresses 0 through 11 (B in Hex) produces an attention status.
Bit 1: This bit (write “1”) forces the module into its error state, resulting in the error LED being
lit. The read of bit 1 indicates that there is an internal module error, or the Controller has
forced the module into the error state. The state of this bit is always reflected by the module's
Internal Error LED. Whenever this bit is set, an attention status is returned to the Controller
when addresses 0 through 11 (B in Hex) are read.
Bits 2-3: These bits are not used and are read as “0” under normal operation.
Bit 4: This bit (read) indicates that the module is in the “Warming” state. This state exists after
power up and terminates after 8.16 seconds. The module is in the error condition during the
warm up period.
Bit 7: This bit is the result of a checksum test of the EEPROM. A failure of this test can
indicate a bad EEPROM, but typically indicates that the module has not been calibrated. A “0”
indicates that there is no error condition. If an error is present, the error is indicated by the
module error LED being lit. The point fault bit is set as all the point data is not calibrated. The
“1” state of this bit indicates an unrecoverable error condition in the field.
Bits 8: A write to this bit configures the conversion rate of the A/C converters as follows:
CONVERSION RATE (1/SEC) BIT 8
20 (for 60Hz systems) 0

The status of these bits (read) indicate the conversion rate to which the module is set.
Bit 9: Reserved
Bit 10: This bit is not used and is read as “0” under normal operation.
60 OW350_R1150
Bit 11: This bit (write) is used to initiate self-calibration. The sampling rate during self-
calibration is 2 per second. The status (read) bit is not used and is read as “0” under normal
operation.
Bit 13: This bit (read) indicates that the module has internal memory error (FLASH,
checksum, Register, or Static RAM error). If this error is present, the module error LED is lit,
the point fault bit is also set since the condition of the module is undetermined.
individual point quality statuses plus bits 1, 7, 12, and 13 of this register. A “0” indicates that
all eight points have good quality and no module errors exist.
When bits 1, 4, 7 or 13 of the Status Register are not set, this bit (when set to “1”) indicates that at
least one of the points has bad quality.
A subsequent read of the Point Quality Register at Address 12 (C in Hex) reveals the point(s) that
have bad quality (see the following table). The Address 12 (C in Hex) Point Quality Register
contains data only when the module fault is due to a bad point quality.
inputs. The bit definitions for this register are encoded as shown in the following table.
Point quality register (Address 12 or C in Hex)
POINT BIT DESCRIPTION
1-8 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14 Communication to the Channel Failed

1-8 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15 Overrange Input/Blown Fuse/Open Loop
Communication to the Channel Failed - This bit is set when the communication to the
corresponding channel has failed.
Overrange Input/Blown Fuse/Open Loop – This bit is set as follows:

 Current Input (Group 1) – When an input current less than 2.5mA (a blown fuse or open loop
condition) is detected, or an overrange (greater than 24.6mA) of full scale is present.
 Voltage Input (Group 2) – When an overrange input of ±121% of the full scale value is read.
LED DESCRIPTION

E No LED.
OW350_R1150 61
LED DESCRIPTION
 Module reset
causes are:
9 - 16 No LED.
4.2.11 Specifications - (AI-14)

 Electronics module (1C31224)
 Personality module (1C31227)
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Input range 1 2
4 - 20 mA ±1V
Resolution Group 1:14-Bits, Group 2:13-Bits & Sign
Guaranteed accuracy (@25×C) ±0.10% of full scale value ±1/2LSB @99.7% confidence.
Temperature coefficient ±0.24% of the full scale value over 0 to 60 degrees C.
3 10 M ohms
Input impedance:
Sampling rate 20 times per second minimum when configured for 60 Hz rejection
25 times per second minimum when configured for 50Hz rejection
Self-calibration On demand by the Ovation Controller.
Diagnostics Internal module operating faults. Out of range detection.
Open loop detection for current inputs.
Normal mode rejection 60 dB @50 Hz ± 1/2% or @60 Hz ± 1/2% (when properly configured)
30 dB (typical) @50 Hz ± 5% or @60 Hz ± 5% (when properly
configured)
62 OW350_R1150
4.3 High Speed Analog Input Module (14-Bit) - (HSAI)
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Common mode rejection 120 dB @ DC or @ nominal (50/60 Hz) line frequency ± 1/2% and
harmonics.
100 dB (typical) for nominal line frequency ± 5% and harmonics.
Operating temperature range 0 to 60 degrees C (32 degrees F to 140 degrees F)
Storage temperature range -40 degrees C to 85 degrees C (-40 degrees F to 185 degrees F)
1
Current inputs when using Personality module 1C31224G01 with 1C31227G01 Electronics module.
2
Voltage inputs when using Personality module 1C31224G02 with 1C31227G02 Electronics module.
3
Only for the voltage input module (Personality module 1C31224G02 with 1C31227G02 Electronics
module).
4.3 High Speed Analog Input Module (14 -Bit) - (HS AI)
The combined Personality and Electronics modules form the High Speed Analog Input module.
Eight sets of galvanically isolated input channels provide 14-bit resolution with 50 or 60 samples
per second conversion rates. The input signals are conditioned and routed through the
appropriate Personality module to the Electronics module. The Personality module also provides
surge protection to protect the input circuits of the Electronics module. The Electronics module
performs the analog to digital conversions and provides interfacing to the Ovation Serial I/O Bus.
The 14-Bit High Speed Analog Input is applicable for CE Mark certified systems.
Note: I/O Module General Information (see page 25) contains information on for environmental,
installation, wiring, and fuse information for I/O modules.
4.3.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (HSAI)

 5X00070G01 interfaces to current signals with an input range of 4 to 20 mA.
 5X00070G02 interfaces to voltage signals with an input range of ±1V, ±250mV, ±100mV.
 5X00070G03 interfaces to voltage signals with an input range of ±5V, ±10V.
 5X00070G04 interfaces to thermocouple inputs ± 20mV, ± 50Vm, ± 100mV.
 5X00070G05 interfaces to thermocouple inputs ± 20mV, ± 50Vm, ± 100mV, (Non-EMC
Cabinet).
4.3.2 Personality modules (Pmod) - (HSAI)

 1C31227G01 interfaces to current input with an input range of 4 - 20 mA.
 1C31227G02 voltage input.
 1C31116G02 field powered current input ± 1mA.
 1C31116G03 local powered ± 1mA current only.
 1C31116G04 voltage inputs to temperature sensor.
OW350_R1150 63
4.3.3 Subsystems - (HSAI)
High Speed Analog Input subsystems (14-bit )

MODULE MODULE
4 - 20mA, Field or Locally powered 8 1,2 1C31227G01

5X00070G01
± 100mV, ± 250mV, ± 1V 8 1,2 1C31227G02
5X00070G02
± 5V, ± 10V 8 1,2 1C31227G02
5X00070G03
± 1mA 2 wire local powered 8 1,2 1C31116G03
5X00070G02
± 1mA 4wire field powered 8 1,2 1C31116G02

5X00070G02

5X00070G04

5X00070G05
1
2
4.3.4 External power supply information - (HSAI)
If the High Speed Analog Input module uses the current input 1C31227G01 or 1C31116G03
Personality modules, the required voltage source may be obtained from the internal auxiliary
power supply (backplane).
If the High Speed Analog Input module uses Pmod 1C31227G01 or 1C1116G02, field powered
current loops can be used. Note that 1C31227G01 supplies both field and local power.
64 OW350_R1150
4.3.5 Thermocouple Personality module functionality & coefficients - (AI-13) &

(HSAI)
When two dissimilar metals (a thermocouple) are joined together, a voltage (the Seebeck
Voltage) is generated between them. This voltage is directly related to the temperature at the
junction of the two metals. The relationship between the voltage and the temperature can be best
described by a fifth order polynomial, determined by the two types of metals that are joined.
To measure the voltage (Vt) between the two metals, a voltmeter (in this case, an analog input
card) must be connected to each wire. Unfortunately, this produces two new junctions and
voltages (V1 and V2) between the terminals and the thermocouples. The following formula is
used to find Vt: Vt = Vm -V1 -V2.
It is not possible to measure V1 and V2 without inducing more junctions and voltages; therefore,
the analog input subsystem has a temperature sensor on the Personality module (1C31116G04)
to measure the temperature (Tj) at the terminal block of the base unit.
A conversion formula, determined from the junction metal and thermocouple metals, is used to
calculate the combined voltage of V1 and V2. This is called Cold Junction Compensation.
Figure 15: Thermocouple illustration
Use the Instrumentation tab of the Point Builder to select the Field Instrumentation Type (B or TB,
E or TE, J or TJ, K or TK, R or TR, S or TS, T or TT). The Ovation system then assigns the
default thermocouple coefficients based on the Type selected. Refer to the following table for
these coefficient definitions.
If you override the default coefficients by entering new values, the new values remain until you
select another thermocouple type. The values then return to the values for the type just selected.
Thermocouple coefficient definitions
RANGE
B or TB 400 to 1100 Degrees C 0.000 to 13.814 (0 to 1820) 20 mv card

OW350_R1150 65
RANGE
COEF_1 = 3.5164700E+02 COEF_1 = 1.7758167E+02
COEF_2 = 6.1388490E+05 COEF_2 = 3.4104717E+05
COEF_3 = – 1.5397740E+08 COEF_3 = – 8.5543000E+07
COEF_4 = 3.3593730E+10 COEF_4 = – 8.5543000E+07
COEF_5 = – 4.0518260E+12 COEF_5 = – 8.5543000E+07
COEF_6 = 2.0039330E+14 COEF_6 = 1.1132961E+14
COEF_7 = – 2.0E-06 COEF_7 = – 2.0E-06
COEF_8 = 0.0 COEF_8 = 0.0
E or TE – 18 to 286 Degrees C – 9.835 to 19.945 (– 270 to 286) 20 mv card

100 mv
card
COEF_1 = 3.1672830E+01 COEF_1 = – 1.8176111E-01
COEF_2 = 3.0306280E+04 COEF_2 = 1.6836822E+04
COEF_3 = – 3.3449490E+05 COEF_3 = – 1.8583050E+05
COEF_4 = 6.8495880E+06 COEF_4 = 3.8053267E+06
COEF_5 = – 6.9753490E+07 COEF_5 = – 3.8751939E+07
COEF_6 = 2.9236530E+08 COEF_6 = 1.6242517E+08
COEF_7 = – 1.0939E-03 COEF_7 = – 1.71E-05
COEF_8 = 3.365E-05 COEF_8 = 6.057E-05
J or TJ – 18 to 365 Degrees C – 8.096 to 19.971 (– 210 to 366) 20 mv card

COEF_1 = 3.112531E+01 COEF_1 = – 4.8593889E-01
COEF_2 = 3.6070270E+04 COEF_2 = 2.0039039E+04
COEF_3 = – 4.2886170E+05 COEF_3 = – 2.3825650E+05
COEF_4 = 2.2613820E+07 COEF_4 = 1.2563233E+07
COEF_5 = – 5.1743790E+08 COEF_5 = – 2.8746550E+08
COEF_6 = 3.9727830E+09 COEF_6 = 2.2071017E+09
COEF_7 = – 9.256E-04 COEF_7 = – 9.76E-06
COEF_8 = 2.862E-05 COEF_8 = 5.1516E-05
K or TK – 18 to 480 Degrees C – 6.458 to 19.959 (– 270 to 484) 20 mv card

100 mv
card
66 OW350_R1150
RANGE
COEF_1 = 3.0344730E+01 COEF_1 = – 9.1959444E-01
COEF_2 = 4.4031910E+04 COEF_2 = 2.4462172E+04
COEF_3 = 1.615839E+05 COEF_3 = 8.9768833E+04
COEF_4 = – 1.616257E+07 COEF_4 = – 8.9792056E+06
COEF_5 = 4.4011090E+08 COEF_5 = 2.4450606E+08
COEF_6 = – 3.599650E+09 COEF_6 = – 1.9998056E+09
COEF_7 = – 7.259E-04 COEF_7 = – 8.14E-06
COEF_8 = 2.243E-05 COEF_8 = 4.0374E-05
R or TR 260 to 1100 Degrees C 0.000 to 19.998 (0 to 1684) 20 mv card

COEF_1 = 8.3628480E+01 COEF_1 = 2.8682489E+01
COEF_2 = 2.2737160E+05 COEF_2 = 1.2631756E+05
COEF_3 = – 1.2482860E+07 COEF_3 = – 6.9349222E+06
COEF_4 = 1.2062540E+09 COEF_4 = 6.7014111E+08
COEF_5 = – 7.4221280E+10 COEF_5 = – 4.1234044E+10
COEF_6 = 1.89930000E+12 COEF_6 = 1.0551667E+12
COEF_7 = – 1.084E-04 COEF_7 = – 4.72E-06
COEF_8 = 3.24E-06 COEF_8 = 5.832E-06
S or TS 400 to 1100 Degrees C 0.000 to 18.698 (0 to 1768) 20 mv card

750 to 2000 Degrees F -0.092 to 18.696 (0 to 3214) 20 mv card
COEF_1 = 1.1803440E+02 COEF_1 = 4.7796889E+01
COEF_2 = 1.9859180E+05 COEF_2 = 1.1032878E+05
COEF_3 = – 1.9730960E+04 COEF_3 = – 1.0961644E+04
COEF_4 = – 5.0093290E+08 COEF_4 = – 2.7829606E+08
COEF_5 = 4.1104880E+10 COEF_5 = 2.2836044E+10
COEF_6 = – 1.1557940E+12 COEF_6 = – 6.4210778E+11
COEF_7 = – 1.0847E-04 COEF_7 = – 4.15E-06
COEF_8 = 3.26E-06 COEF_8 = 5.868E-06
T or TT -46 to 400 Degrees C -6.258 to 19.945 (-270 to 385) 20 mv card

-50 to 750 Degrees F -6.254 to 19.979 (-450 to 726) 20 mv card
COEF_1 = 3.1892240E+01 COEF_1 = – 5.9866667E-02
COEF_2 = 4.6693280E+04 COEF_2 = 2.5940711E+04
COEF_3 = – 1.3257390E+06 COEF_3 = – 7.3652167E+05
COEF_4 = 6.9620670E+07 COEF_4 = 3.8678150E+07
COEF_5 = – 2.3278080E+09 COEF_5 = – 1.2932267E+09
COEF_6 = 3.3306460E+10 COEF_6 = 1.8503589E+10
COEF_7 = – 7.3333E-04 COEF_7 = – 1.55700E-05
COEF_8 = 2.243E-05 COEF_8 = 4.0374E-05
OW350_R1150 67
4.3.6 Temperature sensor Personality module (1C31116G04) - (HSAI)
Personality module 1C1116G04 of the analog input subsystem includes a temperature sensor IC.
This is used for measuring the temperature of the terminal block to provide cold junction
compensation for thermocouple inputs.
This module is used in conjunction with a terminal block cover (1C31207H01) to maintain a
uniform temperature of the terminal block and sensor area. The cover fits over an entire base;
however, the sensor only accurately measures the temperature under the half of the cover where
the temperature sensor Personality module is installed. Therefore, if both modules under the
cover require cold junction compensation, they each require the temperature sensor Personality
module.
Note: Installation instructions for the terminal block cover are provided in the Temperature
Compensation Cover Mounting Kit (1B30047G01).
The Group 4 Personality module provides a terminal block temperature measurement feature with
the following specifications:
 Sampling Rate = 600 msec, Maximum, 300 msec, typical
 Resolution = +/- 0.5 degrees C (+/- 0.9 degrees F)
 Accuracy = +/- 0.5 degrees C over a 0 degrees C to 70 degrees C range
(+/- 0.9 degrees F over a 32 degrees F to 158 degrees F range)
(See Ovation Record Types Reference Manual, Ovation Init and AdMin User Guide, and Ovation
Developer Studio User Guide.)
68 OW350_R1150
4.3.7 Module block diagram - (HSAI)
The simplified block diagram for the voltage input configuration of the High Speed Analog Input
module is shown in the following figure. The channel 1 input is grounded locally at the cabinet,
and grounding at the field device is shown for the channel 8 input.
Figure 16: Voltage input configuration using Pmod 1C31227G02
OW350_R1150 69
4.3.8 Terminal block wiring information - (HSAI)
information.
The diagrams for the analog input Personality modules are illustrated in the field connections
diagrams (see page 72). The following table lists and defines the abbreviations used in those
diagrams.
Figure 17: Terminal Block Connections for the Analog Input 1C31227 Pmods
Abbreviations used in diagrams
A1 - A8 Analog Input positive terminal connection (connected to the positive terminal of the field
+ device).
A1 - A8 Analog Input negative terminal connection (voltage input group only).
-
CI1 - CI8 Current input terminals.
P-1 - P-8 Loop power output terminals (for locally powered loops).
70 OW350_R1150

Use shielded twisted pair wire for the field wiring. Tie the Analog Input negative terminal and
shield together and to earth ground, either locally at the cabinet or at the field device. Voltage
inputs use the 1C31227G02 Personality modules. Grounding the shield and the analog input
negative terminal at the cabinet or at the field device is arranged by the proper Terminal Block
connections.
Similarly, current inputs using the 1C31227G01 Personality modules can accommodate field or
locally powered devices by using the correct terminal block connections.
The Personality modules have a field connection diagram label on top of each module to facilitate
field wiring. The following figures show the implementations of the field connections for the
various Personality module and field device combinations.
4.3.9 Field connection diagrams - (HSAI)
As is standard for analog signals, shielded twisted-pair wire should be used for the field interface.
For the analog input, the negative (-) and shield should be tied together and to earth ground,
either locally at the cabinet or at the field device.
The following four figures show how the various Personality modules require these connections or
how the options are implemented. The fifth drawing illustrates the jumper settings for the
Personality module.
OW350_R1150 71
4.3.10 Field connection wiring diagrams (Pmod 1C31227) - (HSAI)
Local grounding
Field grounding
1C31227G02
Field powered
Locally powered
1C31227G01
Caution
Figure 18: Field connections for the input connectors
72 OW350_R1150
4.3.11 Field connection wiring diagrams (Pmod 1C31227) (CE Mark) - (HSAI)
Local grounding
Field grounding
1C31227G02
Field powered
Locally powered
1C31227G01
Caution
All field wiring must be braid shielded and grounded at the entry point of the cabinet using recommended
hardware (refer to "Cable Guidelines" in the applicable Ovation installation manual for your system).
Figure 19: Field connections for the input connectors (CE Mark)
OW350_R1150 73
4.3.12 Field connection wiring diagrams (Pmod 1C31116) - (HSAI)
Figure 20: Field connections for the Analog Input Pmod
74 OW350_R1150
4.3.13 Field connection wiring diagrams, Pmod (Pmod 1C31116) (CE Mark) -
(HSAI)
Figure 21: Field connections for the Analog Input Personality module (CE Mark)
OW350_R1150 75
Figure 22: Jumper settings for Analog Input Personality module (1C31116G04)
4.3.14 Input address locations (Group 1) - (HSAI)
Controller. It varies slightly with the different groups (1-4), primarily in module calibration and
range selection. The bit information contained within these words is shown in the following table.
These status words are only updated once per input channel sampling period; therefore, any
Controller action based on changing the configuration (writing to address 13) must take this delay
into account.
Data format for the configuration/module status register for group 1

definitions for the configuration/module status register lists
BIT DESCRIPTION - CONFIGURATION REGISTER DESCRIPTION - MODULE STATUS REGISTER

(WRITE) (READ)
0 Configure module Module Configured (1 = configured)

1 Force Error Internal or forced error (1 = forced error)
2 0, (ADD4 bit During Diagnostics) (Not Used)
4 0, (ADD6 bit During Diagnostics) Warming
7 0, (DIAG_SET, Initiates Diagnostics) Module is Not Calibrated
8 50/60 Hz Selection (1 = 50Hz) 50 Hz/60 Hz System (1 = 50Hz)
9 Not Defined (Not Used)
10 0, (Initiates system calibration during Diagnostics) SYS_CAL In Progress (During Diagnostics)
11 SELF_CAL (Initiates Self Calibration) SYS_CAL Completed (During Diagnostics)
76 OW350_R1150

(WRITE) (READ)
12 Not Defined SYS_CAL Failed (During Diagnostics)

13 Not Defined Internal Memory Error
14 Not Defined Module In Diagnostic Mode (During Diagnostics)
15 Not Defined 1
Point Fault
1
Refer to the Point Quality Register for the descriptions of the Point Faults.
Bits defined for Diagnostics are only used during factory testing.
The bit definitions for this register are encoded as shown in the above table and described below:
Bit 1: This bit (write “1”) forces the module into the error state, resulting in the error LED being
lit. The read of bit “1” indicates that there is an internal module error, or the Controller has
forced the module into the error state. The state of this bit is always reflected by the module‟s
Bit 4: This bit (read) indicates that the module is in the Warming state. This state exists after
warm up period.
Bits 5-6: These bits are not used and read as “0” under normal operation.
Bit 7: This bit (read) is the result of a checksum test of the EEPROM. A failure of this test can
indicate a bad EEPROM, but it typically indicates that the module has not been calibrated. A
“0” indicates that there is no error condition. If an error is present, the module error LED is lit.
The point fault bit is also set since all the point data is not calibrated. The “1” state of this bit
Bit 8: The status of this bit (read) indicates the conversion rate of the module; write to this bit
configures the conversion rate of A/D converters as shown in the following table.
Conversion Rate (1/sec.) Bit 8

calibration is two per second. The status (read) bit is not used and is read as “0” under normal
operation
Bit 13: This bit (read) indicates that the module has internal memory error (FLASH checksum,
Register or Static RAM error). If this error is present, the module error LED is lit, the point fault
bit is also set since the condition of the module is undetermined.
OW350_R1150 77
individual point-quality status bits, plus the bits 1, 4, 7, and 13 of this register. A “0” indicates
that all eight points have good quality and no module error exists. When bits 1, 4, 7 or 13 of
the Status Register are not set, this bit (when set to “1”) indicates that at least one of the
points has bad quality. A subsequent read of the Point Quality Register (Address 12, C in
Hex) reveals the point(s) that have bad quality. The Address 12 (C in Hex) Point Quality
Register contains data only when the module fault is due to a bad point quality.
into account.

definitions for the configuration/module status register bits

(WRITE) (READ)

2 0, (ADD4 bit During Diagnostics) SYS_CAL In Progress (During Diagnostics)
3 0, (ADD5 bit During Diagnostics) Module In Diagnostic Mode (During Diagnostics)
9 250mv select (14-Bit)/Not Defined (13-Bit) 250mv select (14-Bit)/ 0 (13-Bit)
10 100mv select (14-Bit)/Not Defined(13-Bit) 100mv select(14-Bit)/0 (13-Bit)
12 0, (Initiates system calibration during SYS_CAL Failed (During Diagnostics)
Diagnostics)
13 0, Lock Calibration Gain (concurrent with the Internal Memory Error
initiation of calibration during diagnostics)
14 0, Clear Calibration (concurrent with the initiation 1
(Not Used)
of calibration during diagnostics)
15 Not Defined 1
Point Fault
1
Refer to the Point Quality Register for the descriptions of the Point Faults
78 OW350_R1150
warm up period.
Bit 8: The status of this bit (read) indicates the conversion rate of the module, write to this bit
CONVERSION RATE (1/SEC.) BIT 8

Bits 9-10: These bits are used to configure the ranges.
FULL SCALE BIT 9 BIT 10
1V 0 0
250 mv 1 0
100 mv 0 1
invalid 1 1
calibration is two per second. The status (read) bit is not used and is read as “0” under normal
operation.
bit is also set since the condition of the module is undetermined.
OW350_R1150 79
into account.

BIT DESCRIPTION - CONFIGURATION DESCRIPTION - MODULE STATUS REGISTER

REGISTER (WRITE) (READ)

9 5V select (14-Bit)/Don‟t care (13-Bit) 250mv select (14-Bit)/ 0 (13-Bit)
10 0 (14-Bit)/Don‟t care(13-Bit) 100mv select(14-Bit)/0 (13-Bit)
11 SELF_CAL (Initiates Self Calibration) SYS_CAL Completed (During Diagnostics
Diagnostics)
14 0, Clear Calibration (concurrent with the (Not Used)
15 Not Defined 1
Point Fault
1
Refer to the Point Quality Register for the descriptions of the Point Faults.
80 OW350_R1150
warm up period.

Bits 9-10: These bits are used to configure the ranges as follows for 14-Bit operation. For 13-
Bit operation, these bits have no meaning.
Full Scale Bit 9 Bit 10
10V 0 0
5V 1 0
2.5V(not supported) 0 1
invalid 1 1
calibration is two per second. The status (read) bit is not used and read as “0” under normal
operation.
bit is also set as the condition of the module is undetermined.
OW350_R1150 81
range selection. The bit information contained within these words is shown in the following tables.
into account.
Data Format for the configuration/module status register for group 4

BIT DESCRIPTION - CONFIGURATION DESCRIPTION - MODULE STATUS REGISTER

0 Configure Module Module Configured (1 = configured)

9 50mv select (14 bit)/Don‟t care (13-Bit) 50mv select (14 bit)/ 0 (13-Bit)
10 100mv select (14 bit)/Don‟t care(13-Bit) 100mv select (14 bit)/0 (13-Bit)
Diagnostics)
14 0, Clear Calibration (concurrent with the Temperature Sensor Failure
15 Not Defined 1
Point Fault
1
Refer to the Point Quality Register for the descriptions of the Point Faults
82 OW350_R1150
Bit 4: This bit (read) indicates that the module is in the “Warming” state. This state exists after
warm up period.
The point fault bit is also set as all the point data is not calibrated. The “1” state of this bit
Bit 8: The status of this bit (read) indicates the conversion rate of the input module, write to
this bit configures the conversion rate of A/D converters as shown in the following table.

Bits 9-10: These bits are used to configure the ranges as follows
FULL SCALE Bit 9 Bit 10
20 mv 0 0
50 mv 1 0
100 mv 0 1
invalid 1 1
calibration is 2 per second. The status (read) bit is not used and is read as “0” under normal
operation
bit is also set as the condition of the module is undetermined.
Bit 14: This bit, if set, indicates that the temperature sensor has failed.
OW350_R1150 83
4.3.18 Module register information - (HSAI)
Word address 14 (E in Hex) is not used and is read as “0” under normal operation.
inputs.
High Speed Analog Input point quality register (address 12 or C in Hex)
1-8 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14 Communication to the Channel Failed.

1-8 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15 Overrange Input/Blown Fuse/Open Loop.
Communication to the Channel Failed - This bit is set when the communication to the
Over-range Input/Blown Fuse/Open Loop – This bit is set as follows:

 Current Input Emods – When an input current less than 2.5mA (a blown fuse or open loop
condition) is detected, or an overrange (greater than 24.6mA) of full scale is present.
 Voltage Input Emods – When an overrange input of ±121% of the full scale value is read.
LED DESCRIPTION

E No LED.
 Module reset
84 OW350_R1150
LED DESCRIPTION
causes are:
9 - 16 No LED.
4.3.20 Specifications - (HSAI)

 Electronics module (5X00070)
 Personality modules (1C31227, 1C31116)
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Input range G01: 4-20 ma
G02: 100mv, 250mv, 1V
G03: 5V, 10V
G04-05: 20mv, 50mv, 100mv
Resolution G01: 14 bits unipolar, G02 - G05: 14 bits including polarity.
Data format G01: 14 bit binary, G02 - G05: 14 bit two's compliment.
Conversion type Sigma Delta.
Operating Mode self-scan.
Monotonicity yes
Nonlinearity 0.003% of full scale.
Guaranteed accuracy (@25 C) 0.10% of full scale value 1/2LSB @99.7% confidence.
Temperature coefficient 0.24% of the full scale value over 0 to 60 C.
Input impedance: 3.3 M ohms (G02, G04, G05) field configured; 200 M ohms (G03) field
configured; 300 M ohms @20 mA for G01 field configured.
Maximum Overload G01: 48VDC or Vrms, G02 - G04: 120VDC or Vrms.
Sample Duration time (msec) 50Hz configuration: G01 - G03: 20; G04, G05: 60.
60 Hz configuration: G01 - G03: 16.67; G04, G05: 50.
Self-calibration On demand by the Ovation Controller.
Sample Repetition (msec) 50 Hz configuration: G01 - G03: 20; G04, G05: 64.
60 Hz configuration: G01 - G03: 16.67; G04, G05: 54.
Out of range detection.
Open loop detection for current inputs.
OW350_R1150 85
4.4 HART Analog Input module - (HAI)
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Normal mode rejection 60 dB @50 Hz 1/2% or @60 Hz 1/2% (when properly configured).
30 dB (typical) @50 Hz 5% or @60 Hz 5% (when properly configured).
Common mode rejection and 120 dB @ DC or @ the nominal (50/60 Hz) line frequency 1/2% and
channel-channel crosstalk harmonics.
100 dB (typical) for nominal line frequency 5% and harmonics.
Operating temperature range 0 to 60 C (32 F to 140 F).
Storage temperature range -40 C to 85 C (-40 F to 185 F).
Filtering Digital, Sinc, 3dB cutoff: 13.1 Hz for 50Hz; 15.7 Hz for 60 Hz.
HART (Highway Addressable Remote Transducer) is a digital communication protocol designed

for industrial process measurement applications. Field measurement devices (transmitters)
interface a process control system via an analog 4-to-20 mA current loop. HART uses a low-level
frequency shift-keyed sine wave signal that is superimposed on the standard 4-to-20 mA process
measurement current loop. Since the HART sine wave signal is small and its average value is
zero, the current loop analog 4-to-20 mA signal is not significantly affected by the presence of the
HART signal. Using HART allows a field device to provide more than one measurement, which is
a feature not available when using only the 4-to-20 A analog current signal.
“Smart” field devices may be described as field devices in which the analog 4-to-20 mA signal,
digital communication, and sometimes power, co-exist on the same pair of wires. The Ovation
HART Analog Input (HAI) module is a standard form factor Ovation I/O module, which permits
Ovation to communicate with HART devices.
The HART Analog Input Module is a CE Mark certified module.
4.4.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (HAI)

 5X00058G01 interfaces to eight current loop signals with an input range of 4-20 mA.
86 OW350_R1150
4.4.2 Personality modules (Pmod) - (HAI)

 5X00059G01 contains a single printed circuit board assembly with eight fused two-wire loop-
powered or non-fused active-source (four-wire isolated current output) transmitter inputs.
Eight user serviceable fuses (one fuse for each analog input channel) are located on the
Pmod. Each fuse protects the auxiliary power supply only if the associated analog input
channel is connected to a two-wire loop powered current transmitter.
Note: Revision 02 and later Personality modules contain a ninth user serviceable fuse (1/2 A)
for the Electronics module +24 VDC auxiliary power input.
4.4.3 Subsystems - (HAI)
1
HART Analog Input subsystems (16-bit)

S MODULE MODULE
4-20 mA loop powered (2 wire) or active source (4 wire) 8 1 5X00059G01

5X00058G01
1
OW350_R1150 87
4.4.4 Module block diagram information - (HAI)
The Ovation HART Analog Input Module assembly consists of two modules: an Electronics
module containing a logic printed circuit board (LHA) and a field printed circuit board (FHI). The
simplified block diagram for the FHI field board is shown below. The Electronics module is used in
conjunction with a Personality module, which contains a single printed circuit board (PHAI).
+12VA
PS+
(+24 VDC) +5VA
PS- Voltage
Regulators VCCAUX
(24 V RETURN)
+24V_AUX AD1_CS/
AIN1 CONVERT
P1+ P1+ AIN2 CAL
AIN3 CS5509 ADC_CLK
A1+ A1+
8:1 16-BIT
A1- A1- AIN4
MUX DELTA
SIGMA ADC_DATA
ADC
DRDY/
8 Channel
ADC_MUX[2-0] AD_CLKX4
4 - 20 mA
Current DIVIDE
3 AD_CLK BY
Loop +3.0 V
+1.225 V REF 325 KHZ 4
Interface
REF
AD2_CS/
AIN5 CONVERT
AIN6 CAL
P8+ P8+
AIN7 CS5509 ADC_CLK
A8+ A8+ 8:1 16-BIT
AIN8
A8- A8- MUX DELTA
SIGMA
OPTO-
ADC
COUPLERS
+12VA
I_HART_MUX[2-0]
A1+ HART_ENA
+5VA
A2+
A3+ RXD (NRZ DATA)
8:1 HART
A4+ Clamp MUX RECEIVE
A5+ Circuits MODEM CD (CARRIER DETECT)
A6+ CIRCUIT
A7+
A8+
IRXAREF
+24V_AUX 921.6 kHz
MODAC_CLK
A1+
A2+
A3+ TXD (NRZ DATA)
ANALOG HART
A4+ Clamp SWITCHES TRANSMIT
A5+ Circuits MODEM RTS/
A6+ CIRCUIT
A7+
A8+
8
3 to 8
DECODER
88 OW350_R1150
4.4.5 External power supply information - (HAI)
module from the 24 VDC main power supply and from the +24 VDC auxiliary power supply and
NOT from the AC or DC mains.
The HART Analog Input Module utilizes the standard +24V Ovation main power supply to provide
the power required for the logic circuitry.
The HART Analog Input Module utilizes a +24 auxiliary power supply to provide the power
required for the field circuitry. This includes all 4-20 mA loop power, A/D conversion, and the
remaining output channel components.
It is recommended that the HART Analog Input module utilize the Ovation cabinet‟s Auxiliary
+24V DC power that is obtained from the standard Ovation DIN Rail power supply auxiliary
output.
However, if an external auxiliary power supply is utilized by the HART Analog Input module, the
power supply output noise cannot exceed 2.2 mVRMS Maximum for all rated loads across the
frequency range of 500 HZ to 10 KHz, see the following figure.
Figure 23: Power supply output noise requirements
steps to be undertaken before connecting the external power supply to the Ovation I/O base unit
terminal block.
In addition, all modules utilizing the auxiliary power supplies, including the HART modules, MUST
utilize shielded I/O cables in order to suppress coupled noise and transients into the HART
modules. This includes modules on the same branch utilizing the auxiliary power, or modules on
other branches utilizing the same auxiliary power. This recommendation applies regardless of the
type of power supply chosen by the user.
OW350_R1150 89
4.4.6 Terminal block wiring information - (HAI)
Each Personality module has a simplified wiring diagram label on its side which appears above
the terminal block. This diagram indicates how the wiring from the field is to be connected to the
terminal block in the base unit.
information.
Figure 24: HART Analog Input terminal block pin assignments
A1 - A8 Analog Input terminal connection (connected to the negative terminal of a loop

powered two-wire current transmitter or the positive terminal of an active-source
+ current transmitter).
A1 - A8 Analog Input negative terminal connection (active-source only).
-
P1 - P8 Loop power output terminals (for loop powered two-wire current transmitters -
connect to their positive terminal).
+
PS+, PS- External Auxiliary power supply terminals.
RSV Reserved terminal. No connections are allowed on these terminals.
90 OW350_R1150
4.4.7 Field connection wiring diagrams - (HAI)
Figure 25: HART Analog Input connections
OW350_R1150 91
4.4.8 Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark) - (HAI)
Figure 26: HART Analog Input Field Connections (CE Mark)
92 OW350_R1150
4.4.9 Field wiring cable requirements - (HAI)
Field I/O cable must be one or more single-twisted pair shielded or multiple-twisted pair with
overall shield. Single and multiple pair may be combined provided that all of the shields share a
common connection to earth ground in the Ovation cabinet.
Recommended minimum conductor size
CABLE LENGTH MIN. CONDUCTOR SIZE CABLE TYPE
Below 5,000 feet (1524 m) 24 AWG (0.51 mm dia.) Single-twisted pair shielded or multiple-twisted pair
with over-all shield.
Above 5,000 (1524 m) 20 AWG (0.81 mm dia.) Single-twisted pair shielded.
The Maximum length of cable per HART network is dependent on the characteristics of the
devices connected to the network and the characteristics of the cable to be used.
In a HART network, long cable lengths are possible when the dominant low impedance device
(the HART Analog Input module) has an input impedance of approximately 250 ohms. Low
capacitance good-quality cable is used, and the Smart transmitter (high impedance device) has a
low input capacitance (less than 5000 pF) and a high input resistance (greater than 100 K ohm).
Example: Cable Length Calculation
Single Smart Transmitter, parallel network resistance = 250 ohm (HART Analog Input module
input impedance)
Smart Transmitter Capacitance: 5000 pF
Cable Capacitance (Cx): 50 pF/ft.
Cable Resistance (Rx): 0.016 ohm/ft. (22 AWG)
Cx = Cable capacitance per unit length (feet or meters): The capacitance from one conductor
to all other conductors (including the shield if shielded). This value is usually available from
the cable manufacturer.
Rx = Cable resistance per unit length (feet or meters): This value should be available from the
cable manufacturer. The table below contains the resistance values of some common copper
wire sizes. The resistance per unit length is for a single wire but the length calculations and
charts take into account the resistance of both wires.
Copper wire resistance table
WIRE SIZE RESISTANCE PER RESISTANCE PER WIRE SIZE RESISTANCE PER
( AW G ) FT. (OHMS) METER (OHMS) (SQMM) METER (OHMS)
16 0.0040 0.013 0.5 0.0368

17 0.0050 0.016 0.75 0.0265
18 0.0064 0.021 1.0 0.0184
19 0.0080 0.026 1.5 0.0123
20 0.010 0.032 _ _
21 0.013 0.042 _ _
22 0.016 0.052 _ _
23 0.020 0.066 _ _
OW350_R1150 93
WIRE SIZE RESISTANCE PER RESISTANCE PER WIRE SIZE RESISTANCE PER
( AW G ) FT. (OHMS) METER (OHMS) (SQMM) METER (OHMS)
24 0.026 0.085 _ _
25 0.032 0.10 _ _
26 0.041 0.13 _ _
27 0.051 0.17 _ _
28 0.065 0.21 _ _
29 0.082 0.27 _ _
30 0.100 0.33 _ _
94 OW350_R1150
From the following figure, using cable capacitance (Cx) of 50 pF/unit length and resistance (Rx) of
0.016 ohm/unit length, a direct reading of the corresponding length on the y-axis is approximately
3600 feet (unit length of feet from above parameters).
Figure 27: Length graph - single device network
OW350_R1150 95
4.4.10 Register configuration/address information - (HAI)
Each of the 16 direct registers on the HART (AI) module is summarized here and shown in more
detail in the following tables. The status register can be read by using the Point Information
window at an Operator‟s Station.
HART Analog Input register map
REG DATA DESCRIPTION - DATA DESCRIPTION - STATUS REGISTER (READ)

0 Indirect Memory Index NA

1 Indirect Memory Data Indirect Memory Data.
2-9 NA Analog Input - Channel 1 - 8.
10 NA Firmware Status Flags.
11 NA HAI Firmware Revision.
12 NA Channel Error Bits.
13 Module Configuration Register Module Status Register (See table below.)
14 HART Enable NA
15 NA Module Electronic ID Data.
HART Analog Input configuration/status register (address 13 or D in Hex)
BIT DATA DESCRIPTION (WRITE) DATA DESCRIPTION (READ)
0 Configure Module Module Configured (1 = configured; 0 = unconfigured.)

2-5 Reserved NA
6 Reserved for Factory Test (must always NA
be set to 0)
7 Reserved for Factory Test (must always NA
be set to 0)
8 NA Hardware Error.
9 NA Bank 1 reference error.
10 NA Bank 2 reference error.
11 - 13 Not Used Not Used.
14 NA Field power failed.
15 Reserved Reserved.
Bit definitions for this register are encoded as shown in the above table and described below:
Bit 0: This bit configures the module (write) or indicates the configuration state of module
(read). A “1” indicates that the module is configured.
Bit 1: Forces the module into error state, illuminating the module‟s Error LED.
Bits 2 - 5: Reserved
96 OW350_R1150
Bits 6 - 7: Reserved for factory test, must always be set to 0.

Bit 8: Hardware error. Indicates one or more of the following is true:
- The FPGA did not program correctly on startup.
- The EE memory checksum is incorrect.
- The PROM checksum test has failed.
- Internal memory diagnostic has failed.
Bit 9: Reference error on first mux/AD combination.
Bits 11 - 13: Not used by the module.
Bit 10: Reference error on second mux/AD combination.
Bit 14: Field power failed.
Bit 15: Reserved.
HART Analog Input enable register (address 14 or E in Hex)
BIT DATA DESCRIPTION - CONFIGURATION DATA DESCRIPTION - STATUS REGISTER

0-7 Multivariable Channel 1 - 8 Not Used.

8 - 15 HART Enabled - Channel 1 - 8 Not Used.
Bits 0-7: These bits are set to enable multivariable messaging. Refer to the IO configuration
guide for additional information.
The HAI, HAO, and IAH modules have the ability to retrieve additional variables from a field
device. These variables are referred to as „multivariable‟ and are named PV (primary variable),
SV (secondary variable), TV (tertiary variable), and QV (quarterly variable).
If the bit is set, the module periodically retrieves whatever variables exist for the device.
The definitions of PV, SV, TV, and QV are found in the user‟s manual for the field device supplied
by the device manufacturer. The standard format of these four variables is IEEE 754, a floating-
point format.
You must configure IO point records to cause the Controller to scan the module and retrieve the
variables. (See the Init and AdMin User Guide or Developer Studio User Guide.)
Bits 8-15: In the IO configuration tool, you can set these flags on a per-channel basis to allow
HART messaging, including multivariable messaging, to flow on that channel.
You should ensure that these bits are cleared for non-HART field devices. To avoid a HART
communication error message, set each bit at “0” when connecting a non-HART output device.
4.4.11 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (HAI)
LED DESCRIPTION

OW350_R1150 97
LED DESCRIPTION
E (Red) External Error LED. Illuminated upon loss of external auxiliary (field) power, as indicated by
the loss of normal transitions of the EOC (end-of-convert) signal.
 Register, static RAM, or FLASH checksum error.
 Module reset.
1 -8 (Red) LEDs 1 through 8 are used to indicate HART communication activity.
When a HART message is sent, the LED for that particular channel is illuminated.
When the HART response is received correctly, the LED is extinguished.
When all is normal, that is, messages and responses are properly exchanged, a single LED
blink is observed on the module‟s front cap.
 If a HART message is sent and no response is received, the HART Analog Input module
exclusive-OR‟s the channel LED display with hex code 0xFF, resulting in all channel LEDs
being illuminated except for the selected channel. For example, if the HART Analog Input
module sent a HART message to device on channel 2, but the device was not connected
to channel 2, the module would first illuminate LED 2 (all seven other channel LEDs
extinguished). The module would then extinguish LED 2 and flash the other seven channel
LEDs. This status indicates that the module sent a HART message on channel 2 and did
not receive a valid response message after the initial message attempt or after any of the
subsequent message retries.
9 - 16 No LED.
4.4.12 Specifications - (HAI)

 Personality module (5X00059)
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Input range 4 to 20 mA normal operation.
0 to 23 mA with under-range and over-range levels user selected
and Controller monitored.
A/D Resolution 16 bits
Reference accuracy (@ 25 degrees +/-0.05% of span @ 99.7% confidence.
C)
Accuracy over temperature +/-0.1% of span over the full operating temperature range.
Sampling rate (per ms) Each channel is sampled every 24 ms.
Channel to channel No channel to channel isolation.
Channel to logic 1000 VAC/VDC for one minute.
98 OW350_R1150
4.5 HART High Performance Analog Input module - (HHPAI)
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Operating temperature range 0 degrees to 60 degrees C. (32 degrees F to 140 degrees F).
Humidity (non-condensing) 0% to 95%
Module power Main: 1.2W typical. 2.5W Maximum.
Aux. power supply voltage = 24 VDC -5%, +6.25%
Aux: 4.1W typical. 7.2W Maximum.
Two-wire transmitter power 13.5V minimum (Pn+ to An+) @ 20 mA.
where n = 1 to 8 (current limited to 32 mA Maximum)
The HART (Highway Addressable Remote Transducer) High Performance Analog Input module is
a standard Ovation I/O Module that provides eight galvanically isolated 4-20 mA analog inputs
with HART transceivers. Each transceivers provides optically isolated communication to a
dedicated UART (Universal Addressable Remote Transducer), thereby Maximizing HART
communication throughout. Each channel may be individually configured for field powered or local
powered transmitters via user accessible jumpers on the Personality module.
HART is a digital communication protocol designed for industrial process measurement

applications. Field measurement devices (transmitters) interface for a process control system via
an analog 4-to-20 mA current loop. HART uses a low-level frequency-shift-keyed sine wave signal
that is superimposed on the standard 4-to-20 mA process measurement current loop. Since the
HART sine wave signal is small and its average value is zero, the current loop analog 4-to-20 mA
signal is not significantly affected by the presence of the HART signal. Using HART allows a field
device to provide more than one measurement, which is a feature not available when using only
the 4-to-20mA analog current signal.
“Smart” field devices may be described as field devices in which the analog 4-to-20 mA signal,
digital communication, and sometimes power, co-exist on the same pair of wires. The Ovation
HART Fast Analog Input (IAH) module is a standard form factor Ovation I/O module, which
permits Ovation to communicate with HART devices.
4.5.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (HHPAI)

 5X00106G01 interfaces to eight current loop signals with an input range of 4-20 mA.
 5X00106G02 interfaces to eight current loop signals with an input range of 4-20 mA,
(Reduced radiated emissions).
OW350_R1150 99
4.5.2 Personality modules (Pmod) - (HHPAI)

 5X00109G01 contains eight fused input and user accessible jumpers that configure the
channels for field powered or local powered transmitters on an individual basis.
 5X00109G02 contains eight fused input and user accessible jumpers that configure the
channels for field powered or local powered transmitters on an individual basis. Has the
addition of active current limiting in the two-wire mode. Note that this module is available only
in the following releases:
 Ovation 3.4.0 and later.
 Ovation 3.3.1 with patch OVA331063 installed.
4.5.3 Subsystems - (HHPAI)
HART High Performance Analog Input subsystems (16-bit)
RANGE CHNLS ELECTRONIC PERSONALITY MODULE

S MODULE
1 8 5X00106G01 5X00109G01
4-20 mA
or
5X00109G02 (Note that this
module is available only in the
following releases:
 Ovation 3.4.0 and later.
 Ovation 3.3.1 with patch
OVA331063 installed.
2 8 5X00106G02 5X00109G01
4-20 mA (Reduced radiated emissions).
or
5X00109G02 (Note that this
module is available only in the
following releases:
 Ovation 3.4.0 and later.
 Ovation 3.3.1 with patch
OVA331063 installed.
1 8 5X00106G01 5X00170G01
4-20 mA Analot Output pin-compatible.
1
2
100 OW350_R1150
4.5.4 Field wiring diagram - (HHPAI)
OW350_R1150 101
102 OW350_R1150
4.5.5 Field wiring diagram (CE Mark) - (HHPAI)
OW350_R1150 103
4.5.6 Power supply information - (HHPAI)
The HART High Performance Analog Input module utilizes the standard +24V Ovation main
power supply to provide the power required for the logic circuitry.
When one or more loop powered two-wire current transmitters are interfaced to the HART High
Performance Analog Input module, the module utilizes a +24 auxiliary power supply to provide the
power required by the current transmitters and their current loops.
It is recommended that the High Performance Analog Input module utilize the Ovation cabinet‟s
Auxiliary +24V DC power that is obtained from the module's branch from the standard Ovation
DIN Rail power supply auxiliary output.
However, if an external auxiliary power supply is utilized by the HART High Performance Analog
Input module, the power supply output noise cannot exceed 2.2 mVRMS Maximum for all rated
loads across the frequency range of 500 HZ to 10 KHz.
All modules utilizing the auxiliary power supplies, including the HART High Performance Analog
Input modules, MUST utilize shielded I/O cables in order to suppress coupled noise and
transients into the HART High Performance Analog Input module. This requirement includes
modules on the same branch utilizing the auxiliary power, or modules on other branches utilizing
the same auxiliary power. This recommendation applies regardless of the user selected power
supply style.
104 OW350_R1150
4.5.7 Terminal block wiring information - (HHPAI)
block in the base unit. Note that there are two wiring configurations for each channel dependent
upon whether the channel is configured for Local or Field powered transmitters.
information.
Figure 29: Wiring diagram label
The diagrams for the HART High Performance Analog Input Personality modules are illustrated in
the figure above. The following table lists and defines the abbreviations used in those diagrams.
Wiring diagram label definitions
ABBREVIATION ABBREVIATION
A1 - A8 Analog Input terminal connection (connected to the negative terminal of a local

powered transmitter or the positive terminal of field powered transmitter).
+
A1 - A8 Analog Input negative terminal connection (field powered configuration only).
-
P1 - P8 Loop power output terminals (for local powered configuration only. Connected to the
positive).
+
SH1 - SH8 Shield terminal connection. (For landing shields where the shield is to be grounded at
the transmitter).
Earth ground terminals. (For landing shields where the shield is to be grounded at the
module).

RSV Reserved terminal. No connections are allowed on these terminals.
OW350_R1150 105
4.5.8 Field wiring cable requirements - (HHPAI)
Less than 5,000 feet (1524 m) 24 AWG (0.51 mm dia.) Single-twisted pair with over-all shield.
Greater than 5,000 feet, but less 20 AWG (0.81 mm dia.) Single-twisted pair with over-all shield.
than 10,000 feet (3048 meters)
Refer to the HART FSK Physical Layer Specification (HFC_SPEC-54) for additional cabling
information.
4.5.9 Field connection wiring diagrams - (HHPAI)
106 OW350_R1150
OW350_R1150 107
4.5.10 Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark) - (HHPAI)
108 OW350_R1150
4.5.11 Personality Jumper Information - (HHPAI)
Each Personality module provides a 1/20 A fuse on each channel for loop protection. Additionally,
each channel provides a pair of user accessible jumpers for configuring each channel for local
powered transmitters or field powered transmitters. This configuration is on a per channel basis.
The fuses and jumpers are accessible through the top of the module. The label, shown in the
following figure, on the top of the module indicates how to position the jumpers. Note that there
are two jumpers per channel and they must be positioned together.
Figure 30: HART High Performance Analog Input Personality module
OW350_R1150 109
Note: Jumpers are shown in the local powered configuration for all channels.
4.5.12 Register configuration/address information - (HHPAI)
The module configuration/status register is module I/O register 13 (0xD). The register bit
assignments are defined as follows:
Module configuration/status register
BIT DATA DESCRIPTION (WRITE) DATA DESCRIPTION (READ)
0 Configure Module Module Configured (1 = configured)

2 50/60 Hz selection (1=50 hz) 50/60 Hz System (1=50 Hz)
3 SELF_CAL (Initiates Self Calibration) SELF_CAL (Initiates Self Calibration)
4 Toggle Bit (80C32 to 90S8515) 0, (Not Used)
5 0, (Not Used) 0, (Not Used)
7 80C32 diagnostics 80C32 diagnostics
8 0, (Not Used) 80C32 Memory Error
9 0, (Not Used) 9058515 Internal Error
10 0, (Not Used) 9058515 Memory Error
11 0, (Not Used) Module not calibrated
13 Toggle Bit (90S8515 to 80C32) Toggle Bit (90S8515 to 80C32)
15 0, (Not Used) 1
Point Fault
1
Refer to the Channel Error Register for the descriptions of the Point Faults.
Bit 0: The Ovation Controller must set bit 0 of the Module Configuration register in order to
access module I/O registers 0 through 11 (0xB). If bit 0 is not set, reading module I/O
registers 0 through 11 (0xB) yields an Attention Status.
Bit 1: This bit (write “1”) forces the module into error state, illuminating the module‟s internal
Error LED. The read of bit “1” indicates that there is an internal module error, or the Controller
has forced the module into the error state. The state of this bit is always reflected by the
modules Internal Error LED. Whenever this bit is set, an attention status is returned to the
Controller when addresses 0 through 11 (B in Hex) are read.
Bits 2: The status of this bit (read) indicates the conversion rate of the module, write to this bit
configures the conversion rate of the A/D converters as shown in the following table.
CONVERSION RATE (1/SEC) BIT #2

110 OW350_R1150
Bit 3: This bit (write) is used to initiate self-calibration. The sample rate during self-calibration
is two per second. The status (read) bit is one as long as the configuration bit is set. If this is
set, the module imitates one self calibration cycle. For subsequent self-calibration to occur,
the bit must be cleared and reset or different configuration written to the card with this bit set.
Bit 4: Reserved for inter-module handshaking.
Bit 7: Reserved for Factory diagnosis.
Bit 8: This bit (read) indicates that the module has internal memory error. If this error is
present, the internal error LED is lit.
Bit 9: This bit is set if bit 10 or 11 is set. If this bit is set, the internal error LED is lit. The Point
Fault bit is set as the condition of the module is undetermined. Also, I/O channel registers 2-9
will be in attention.
Register or Static RAM error). Bit 9 is set as well.
Bit 11: This bit indicates that the module is not calibrated. Bit 9 is set as well.
Bit 13: Reserved for inter-module handshaking.
Bit 15: Bit indicates point fault status of the module. It is the logical “OR” of any individual
channel error status bits in register C, plus bit 9 of this register. A “0” indicates that all eight
points have good quality and no module error exists. When bit 9 of the Status Register is not
set, this bit (when set to “1”) indicates that at least one of the points has bad quality. A
subsequent read of the Channel Error Register (address C) reveals the point(s) that have bad
quality. The Channel Error Register contains data only when the module fault is due to a bad
point quality.
HART High Performance Analog Input Enable Register (Address 14 or E in Hex)

0-7 Multivariable Channel 1 - 8 Not Used

8 - 15 HART Enabled - Channel 1 - 8 Not Used
Bit 0-7: A “1” in any of these bits causes Multivariable messaging on the corresponding
channel.
Bit 8-15 A “1” in any of these bits indicate that a HART compliant device exists on the
corresponding channel.
To avoid a HART communication error message, set each bit to “0” when connecting a non-HART
output device.
The HART High Performance AI, HART High Performance AO, and IAH modules have the ability
to retrieve additional variables from a field device. These variables are referred to as
„multivariable‟ and are named PV (primary variable), SV (secondary variable), TV (tertiary
variable), and QV (quarterly variable).
The point data registers occupy locations 2-9 for analog input points 1-8 respectively. The data
format is as follows:
Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 - 0

14 bit value
Over-range Bit
OW350_R1150 111
Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 - 0

Point quality: (for good point quality (and proper card operation))
Example Values
Output Data in Hex Data Description
8CCC 4 ma input
C000 20 ma input
CZZZ + Over Range
*0000-7FFF *Card Trouble/Not Warmed Up/Bad
Quality
Each of the 16 direct registers on the HART High Performance Analog Input module is
summarized in the following tables and shown in more detail in the following tables. The module
status register 13 (D in Hex) can be read by using the Point Information window at an Operator‟s
Station. (See the Ovation Operator Station User Guide.)
HART Analog Input register map
REG DATA DESCRIPTION - CONFIG. DATA DESCRIPTION - STATUS REGISTER (READ)

REGISTER (WRITE)
0 Indirect Memory Index NA

1 Indirect Memory Data Indirect Memory Data
2-9 NA Analog Input - Channel 1 - 8
10 Calibration Register (Factory use Calibration Register (Factory use only)
only)
11 Flash down Handshaking The exchange of signals between the transmitter and
receiver to ensure synchronization before downloading a
firmware revision to the flash memory.
12 NA Channel Error Bits
13 Module Configuration Register) Module Status Register
14 HART Enable HART Enable
15 NA Module Electronic ID Data
Word address 12 (C in Hex) is used to report the channel errors on the eight input channels. The
following table is for reference only, Individual bits are not user accessible.
Channel error register output data format (read)
1-8 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14 Communication to the Channel has failed

1-8 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15 Over/under-range, Input/blown fuse/Open Loop
112 OW350_R1150
Communication to the Channel has failed - this bit is set when the communication to the
Over/under-range, Input/blown fuse/Open Loop - this bit is set when the corresponding Points
input is less than 2.5mA (open loop condition), or greater than 25mA (over-range).
4.5.13 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (HHPAI)
LED DESCRIPTION

C (green) Communication OK LED. Lit when the Ovation Controller is communicating with the
module.
E No LED.
I (Red) Internal Error LED. Illuminated whenever there is any type of error within the module
except for a loss of external auxiliary power. Possible causes are:
 The Controller sets the module‟s Force Error bit.
 Communications with the Controller is lost.
 The module is not calibrated.
 Flash memory, EE memory or RAM diagnostic failure.
1 - 8 (Red) The eight channel LEDs serve two functions. LEDs 1-8 are used to indicate the
firmware state during module startup and are then used to indicate HART
communications activity and analog input health during normal module operation.
After module configuration, the bank of eight channel LEDs (LEDs 1-8) is used to
indicate HART communications activity and the health of the analog input. If the
Analog Input for the associated analog input channel is healthy (bit 15 set in the point
data word), then the LED is on. If the analog input channel is bad, then the LED is off.
When a HART message is sent and received correctly, the LED blinks off for 100
msec if the analog input is healthy. When a HART message is sent and received
incorrectly, the LED blinks off for 400 msec if the analog input is unhealthy.
9 - 16 No LED.
4.5.14 Specifications - (HHPAI)

DESCRIPTION VALUE
Input range 2.5 to 25 mA with under-range and over-range checking.
A/D Resolution 14 bits
Data format 14 bit binary
Bit weight 0.00122 ma
Conversion type Sigma Delta
Operating Mode self-scan
Monotonicity yes
Nonlinearity 0.003% of full scale.
OW350_R1150 113
4.6 RTD module (4 Channel) - (RTD-4)
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Repeatability Within guaranteed accuracy.

Reference accuracy (@ 25oC) +/-0.1% of full scale value (20mA) @ 99.7% confidence.
Accuracy over temperature +/-0.24% of full scale value (20mA) over the full operating temperature
range.
Sample duration time (msec) 50 when configured for 60 Hz rejection.
40 when configured for 50 Hz rejection.
Sample Repetition (msec) 60 Hz 50, 50 Hz 40
Channel to channel 1000 VAC/VDC for one minute.
Channel to logic 1000 VAC/VDC for one minute.
Operating temperature range o o o o
0 to 60 C (32 F to 140 F).
Module power Drawn from Main: 4.1W typical. 4.5W Maximum.
Drawn from Aux.: 3.84W typical (20mA X 8 loops X 24V).
Dissipation in module: 5.06W typ. (Emod + Pmod).
Input Impedance 300 ohms
Maximum Overload Fused at 50 ma
Normal Mode Rejection 60 dB @50 Hz ± 1/2% or @60 Hz ± 1/2% (when properly configured)
30 dB (typical) @50 Hz ± 5% or @60 Hz ± 5% (when properly
configured).
Common mode rejection and 120 dB @ DC or @ the nominal (50/60 Hz) line frequency ± 1/2% and
channel-channel crosstalk harmonics.
100 dB (typical) for nominal line frequency ± 5% and harmonics.
Filtering 3
Digital, Sinc, 3dB cutoff: 13.1 Hz for 50 Hz; 15.7 Hz for 60 Hz.
Note: Each channel reports current from about 2.5 to 25 ma. Above and below these values,
the channel reports an error in the channel error register (4.5.10).
The RTD module is used to convert inputs from Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs) to
digital data. The digitized data is transmitted to the Controller.
The RTD Module is applicable for CE Mark Certified Systems.
4.6.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (RTD-4)

 1C31161G01 converts inputs for all ranges and is compatible only with Personality module
1C31164G01 (not applicable for CE Mark certified systems).
 1C31161G02 converts inputs for all ranges and is compatible with Personality module
1C31164G02 (applicable for CE Mark certified systems).
114 OW350_R1150
4.6.2 Personality modules (Pmod) - (RTD-4)

 1C31164G01 converts inputs for all ranges and is compatible only with Electronics module
1C31161G01 (not for new systems and is not applicable for CE Mark certified systems).
 1C31164G02 (50/60 Hz filtered) converts inputs for all ranges and is only compatible with
Electronics module 1C31161G02 (applicable for CE Mark certified systems).
4.6.3 Subsystems - (RTD-4)
RTD module subsystems

MODULE MODULE
All 4 1C31161G01 1C31164G01

All (for 50/60 Hz filtered inputs and CE Mark certified 4 1 1
1C31161G02 1C31164G02
systems)
1
Configuration 1C3116G02 / 1C31164G02 is CE Mark Certified.
4.6.4 Terminal block wiring information (Pmod 1C31164G01) - (RTD-4)
the terminal block. The following diagram indicates how to connect the wiring from the field to the
information.
Figure 31: Terminal block connections for the RTD Pmod (1C31164G01)
The following table lists and defines the abbreviations used in this diagram.
Earth ground terminal
+IN, -IN Positive and negative sense input connection.
OW350_R1150 115

RTN Return for current source connection.
SH Shield connector.
SRC Current source connection.

PS+ and PS- are not used by this module.
4.6.5 Terminal block wiring information (Pmod 1C31164G02) - (RTD-4)
the terminal block. The following diagram indicates how to connect the wiring from the field to the
information.
Figure 32: Terminal block connections for the RTD Pmod (1C31164G02)
Earth ground terminal.

SH Shield connector.
116 OW350_R1150

PS+ and PS- are not used by this module.
OW350_R1150 117
4.6.6 Systems using (Pmod 1C31164G01) - (RTD-4)
Figure 33: Field Connection for the RTD Pmod 1C31164G01
118 OW350_R1150
4.6.7 Field Wiring (Pmod 1C31164G02) - (RTD-4)
Figure 34: Field Connection for the RTD Personality Module
OW350_R1150 119
4.6.8 Field wiring diagrams (Pmod 1C31164G02) (CE Mark) - (RTD-4)
Figure 35: Field Connection for the RTD Personality Module (CE Mark)
120 OW350_R1150
4.6.9 RTD ranges - (RTD-4)
RTD ranges
EXCITATION
ACCU-RACY
ACCU-RACY
CURRENT
C
F
SCALE #
RCOLD
WIRES
±% OF
(HEX)
SPAN
(OHM)
(OHM)
± CTS
RHOT
TEMP
TEMP
TYPE
(MA)
1 3 10 Ohm PL 0 to 1200 –18 to 649 6 106.3 0.1556 9 0.22
2 3 10 Ohm CU 0 to 302 –18 to 150 8.5 16.5 1.51 13 0.32
D 3 10 Ohm CU 32 to 284 0 to 140 50 80 1.0756 11 0.27
11 3 10 Ohm CU 32 to 230 0 to 110 53 78 1.1291 12 0.30
19 3 100 Ohm PL –4 to 334 –20 to 168 92 163.67 0.5121 11 0.27
22 3 100 Ohm PL 32 to 520 0 to 271 100 200 0.4087 10 0.25
23 3 100 Ohm PL 32 to 1040 0 to 560 100 301 0.2554 10 0.25
25 3 120 Ohm NI –12 to 464 –11 to 240 109 360 0.2104 10 0.25
26 3 120 Ohm NI 32 to 150 0 to 66 120 170 0.5240 13 0.32
28 3 120 Ohm NI 32 to 252 0 to 122 120 225 0.3682 11 0.27
80 4 100 Ohm PL 32 to 544 0 to 290 100 208 0.3921 10 0.25
81 4 100 Ohm PL 356 to 446 180 to 230 168 186 0.5240 30 0.74
82 4 200 Ohm PL 32 to 698 0 to 370 200 473 0.1675 12 0.30
83 4 200 Ohm PL 514 to 648 268 to 342 402 452 0.2142 29 0.71
84 4 100 Ohm PL 32 to 124 0 to 51 100 120 0.7860 19 0.47
85 4 100 Ohm PL 32 to 217 0 to 103 100 140 0.6386 13 0.32
86 4 100 Ohm PL 32 to 412 0 to 211 100 180 0.4644 11 0.27
87 4 100 Ohm PL 32 to 714 0 to 379 100 240 0.3296 10 0.25
88 4 200 Ohm PL 511 to 662 266 to 350 200 230 0.4170 24 0.59
OW350_R1150 121
4.6.10 Register configuration/address information - (RTD-4)
Controller.
Word address 13 (D in Hex) low byte is used for module configuration.
Word address 13 (D in Hex) high byte is used to define the scale for Channel 2.
The status register can be read by using the Point Information window at an Operator Station (see
the Bit Pattern field on the Hardware tab). (See Ovation Operator Station User Guide.)
RTD configuration/status register (address 13 or D in Hex)

CONFIGURATION REGISTER
(WRITE)
0 Configure Module Module Configured (1 = configured; 0 = un-considered.)

1 Force error Internal or forced error (1 = forced error; 0 = no forced
error.)
2 Not used Point Fault bit (set when any point specific fault exists.)
3 Not used Card trouble bit (set during card failure.)
4 Not used Warming bit (set during power up or configuration.)
5 50/60 Hz select (0 = 60Hz, 1 = 50Hz) 50/60 Hz select readback (0 = 60Hz, 1 = 50Hz.)
6 Enable line frequency tracking. Status of the line frequency tracking enable signal.
7 Diagnostic bit (do not use). Sync Fault (set if SYNC is missing or the reasonability
When set in the “Diagnostics” mode, test failed while the line frequency tracking is enabled.)
Bits 0 to 6 of the configuration register
represent a word address of the Micro
Controller‟s internal memory.
8 - 15 Channel #2 scale configuration Channel #2 scale configuration read back
Note: Line frequency tracking is presently NOT supported by the Ovation I/O system.
Word address 14 (E in Hex) is used to define the scales for Channels 3 and 4.
Expansion configuration and status register (address 14 or E in Hex)
BIT DATA DESCRIPTION - CONFIGURATION DATA DESCRIPTION - STATUS (READ)

(WRITE)
0-7 Channel 3 scale configuration Channel 3 scale configuration read back.

8 - 15 Channel 4 scale configuration Channel 4 scale configuration read back.
Point status register (address 12 or C in Hex)
BIT DATA DESCRIPTION - DATA DESCRIPTION - STATUS (READ)

CONFIGURATION (WRITE)
0, 2, 4 Reserved for Point Status Channel 1 - 4 reasonability test failed (Zero or Common
mode.)
1, 3 Reserved for Point Status Channel 1 - 4 current loop reasonability test failed.
122 OW350_R1150

8 - 15 Configure Channel 1 scales Channel 1, scale configuration read back.
Note: Status bits when set (1) indicate the fault condition.
Word address 12 (C in Hex) low byte is used for point status.

Word address 12 (C in Hex) high byte is used during write to define the scales for Channels 3 and
4.
The bit definitions for this register during read are encoded.
4.6.11 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (RTD-4)
LED DESCRIPTION

module.
E No LED.
I (Red) Internal Fault LED. Lit whenever the Force Error bit (Bit 1) of the Configuration Register is
set, or when a timeout of the watchdog timer occurs when the Controller stops
communicating with the module.
Also lit when the IMOK signal is false (0) indicating failures of part or all of the logic
common to the input channels.
1 - 4 (Red) Channel #1 - 4 error. Lit whenever there is an error associated with Channel 1 - 4.
5 - 16 No LED.
4.6.12 Specifications - (RTD-4)

DESCRIPTION VALUE
Sampling rate Four per second (two per second during auto calibration.)
RTD ranges Refer to the following RTD Ranges table.
Resolution 12 bits
Guaranteed accuracy (@25 C) 0.10% [0.045 (Rcold/Rspan)]% [((Rcold + Rspan)/4096 OHM)]% [0.5
OHM/Rspan]% 10 V 1/2LSB, where: Rcold and Rspan are in Ohms.
Temperature coefficient 10ppm/ C
Input impedance 100 M OHM, 1 M OHM in power down (for input voltages 0 to 0.1 V.)
Module power 3.6 W typical; 4.2 W Maximum.
OW350_R1150 123
4.7 RTD module (8-Channel) - (RTD-8)
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Operating temperature range 0 to 60 C (32 F to 140 F.)

Storage temperature range -40 C to 85 C (-40 F to 185 F.)
4.7 RTD module (8 -Channel) - (RTD-8)
The 8-channel RTD module is used to convert inputs from Resistance Temperature Detectors
(RTDs) to digital data. The digitized data is transmitted to the Controller.
CAUTION! The following applies to channels that are subsequently wired to an RTD
after power is applied to the module.
If an RTD is wired into a live eight channel RTD module, one of the following two conditions
must be met to ensure reading of the RTD:
1. Cycle module power after the RTD is installed.
2. Configure or re-configure the particular point to which the RTD is installed.
Note that there are no considerations necessary if the RTD is installed prior to power being
applied to the module. Further, once the conditions for proper operations are met, the RTD
can be removed and subsequently re-installed at which time it is read correctly without any
further considerations.
4.7.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (RTD-8)

 5X00119G01 converts inputs for all ranges and is compatible only with Personality module
5X00121G01
 5X00119G02 converts inputs for all ranges and is compatible only with Personality module
5X00121G01 (Non-EMC cabinet).
4.7.2 Personality modules (Pmod) - (RTD-8)

 5X00121G01 converts inputs for all ranges and is compatible only with Electronics module
5X00119G01.
4.7.3 Subsystems - (RTD-8)
1
RTD module (8-Channel) subsystems
8 1 5X00121G01
5X00119G01
124 OW350_R1150
8 2 5X00121G01
5X00119G02
1
2
This module configuration is CE Mark Certified (Non-EMC cabinet).
4.7.4 Terminal block wiring information (Pmod 5X00121G01) - (RTD-8)
block in the base unit. The following table lists and defines the abbreviations used in this diagram.
information.
Abbreviation Definition
Earth ground terminal. Used for landing shields when the shield is to be grounded at the
module.

SH Shield connector. Used for landing shields when the shield is to be grounded at the RTD.
Note: PS+ and PS- are not used by this module.
OW350_R1150 125
4.7.5 Module and field connection wiring - (RTD-8)
The Ovation 8-Channel RTD module consists of two modules, an Electronics module containing a
logic printed circuit board (LIA) and a printed circuit board (FTD). The Electronics module is used
in conjunction with a Personality module, which contains a single printed circuit board (PTD). The
block diagram for the 8-channel RTD module is shown below.
Note: Shielded twisted pair wiring should be used for Maximum noise immunity. The shield may
be grounded at the module or in the field as outlined in the following diagrams
126 OW350_R1150
I/O Base Connector to Other I/O Bases and/or Controller
4 WIRE RTD
Note: this example shows the shield C B A
OW350_R1150
grounded at the module. It may be
(A)
(B)
optionally grounded at the RTD.

+ 1
-IN
PERSONALITY ELECTRONICS MODULE
X UA
U2A V
– MODULE Current
X4
SRC
Logic
s ubI/O
HT RAE
EGND (A1) Source
SH
2
ni a42mv
ni a42mv
Power
RTN
NRUT E R
SHIELD (A2) Supply
+IN
SRC
-IN
3
nr ut er ni a m
+IN (B2) I/O

RTN
SRC
input Interface
SH
4
RTN
#1
-IN (C1)
f er V
Low
+IN
Pass A/D converter, A/D
A/D
-IN
5 SRC (B1) Filter Mux power clock,
Converter Power
Input & data supply & Processor
SRC
#2 Data I/F
SH
RTN
6
+IN
RTN (C2)
-IN
7 CHANNEL 1 (Four wire field interface, local shield grounding)
SRC
SH
RTN
8
+IN
8 CHANNEL RTD
-IN
9
INPUT MODULE CHANNELS 2 - 7
SRC
FUNCTIONAL
SH
RTN
10
DIAGRAM
+IN
REI RRAB N OI T AL OSI
-IN
11
SRC
SH
RTN
12
+IN
+
3 WIRE RTD
-IN
Current
P7
13
Note: this example shows the shield EGND (A15) Source
SRC
grounded at the RTD. It may be
SHIELD (A16)
SH
optionally grounded at the module.
RTN
14
+IN
+ +IN (B16)
-IN
– 15 input
RTN #1
SRC
-IN (C15)
f er V
Low
SH
RTN
16 Pass A/D converter, A/D
A/D
+IN
SRC (B15) Filter Mux power clock,
Converter Power
Input & data supply &
PS+
17 #2 Data I/F
PS+
Jumper required for 3-wire RTDs
PS-
RTN (C16)
18
C B A CHANNEL 8 (Three wire field interface, remote shield grounding)
FIELD I/O BASE

CONNECTIONS TERMINATIONS
127
I/O Base Connector to Other I/O Bases
4.7.6 Module and field connection wiring (CE Mark) - (RTD-8)
128 OW350_R1150
4.7.7 Ranges - (RTD-8)
CURRENT (MA)
SCALE # HEX)
RCOLD (OHM)
% OF SPAN
RHOT (OHM)
EXCITATION
ACCURACY
ACCURACY
C
F
SCALE #
COUNTS
1
O
WIRES
(HEX)
TEMP
TEMP
TYPE
2
0 0 3 10 Ohm PL 0 to 1200 –18 to 649 6 106.3 1.0 9 0.22

1 1 3 10 Ohm CU 0 to 302 –18 to 150 8.5 16.5 1.0 13 0.32
2 2 3 10 Ohm CU 32 to 284 0 to 140 50 80 1.0 11 0.27
3 3 3 10 Ohm CU 32 to 230 0 to 110 53 78 1.0 12 0.30
4 4 3 100 Ohm –4 to 334 –20 to 168 92 163.67 1.0 11 0.27
PL
5 5 3 100 Ohm 32 to 520 0 to 271 100 200 1.0 10 0.25
PL
6 6 3 100 Ohm 32 to 1040 0 to 560 100 301 1.0 10 0.25
PL
7 7 3 120 Ohm NI –12 to 464 –11 to 240 109 360 1.0 10 0.25
8 8 3 120 Ohm NI 32 to 150 0 to 66 120 170 1.0 13 0.32
9 9 3 120 Ohm NI 32 to 252 0 to 122 120 225 1.0 11 0.27
0 10 4 100 Ohm 32 to 544 0 to 290 100 208 1.0 10 0.25
PL
1 11 4 100 Ohm 356 to 446 180 to 230 168 186 1.0 30 0.74
PL
2 12 4 200 Ohm 32 to 698 0 to 370 200 473 1.0 12 0.30
PL
3 13 4 200 Ohm 514 to 648 268 to 342 402 452 1.0 29 0.71
PL
4 14 4 100 Ohm 32 to 124 0 to 51 100 120 1.0 19 0.47
PL
5 15 4 100 Ohm 32 to 217 0 to 103 100 140 1.0 13 0.32
PL
6 16 4 100 Ohm 32 to 412 0 to 211 100 180 1.0 11 0.27
PL
7 17 4 100 Ohm 32 to 714 0 to 379 100 240 1.0 10 0.25
PL
8 18 4 200 Ohm 511 to 662 266 to 350 200 230 1.0 24 0.59
PL
1
For Hardware configuration.
2
For Software Purposes. This value is used in Import/Export files.
OW350_R1150 129
4.7.8 Register configuration/address information - (RTD-8)
Word addresses 12 and 14 (described in the following two tables) are used to configure the
appropriate scales for Channels 1 - 8 (refer to Column 1 in the table in Specifications (see page
132)).
Data format for the channel scale configuration register (address 12 or C in Hex)

0-3 Configure Channel #1 scale - Bit 0 - 3. Channel #1 scale configuration (read back) - Bit 0 - 3.
8 - 11 Configure Channel #3 scale - Bit 0 - 3. Channel #3 scale configuration (read back) - Bit 0 - 3.
CAUTION: Configuring any or all channel scales while the system is running causes all
channels to return attention status for up to two seconds following the reconfiguration.
Data format for the channel scale configuration register (address 14 or E in Hex)

CAUTION: Configuring any or all channel scales while the system is running causes all
channels to return attention status for up to two seconds following the reconfiguration.
Station (Bit Pattern Field on the Hardware Tab). (See the Ovation Operator Station User Guide.)
8-Channel RTD configuration/status register (address 13 or D in Hex)
Bit Data Description - Configuration Data Description - Status Register (Read)

Register (Write)
0 Configure Module. Module Configured (1 = configured; 0 = unconfigured.)
1 Force error. Internal/forced error (1 = forced error; 0 = no forced
error.)
2 50/60 Hz select (0 = 60Hz, 1 = 50Hz.) 50/60 Hz System (1 = 50Hz) (read back.)
3 SELF_CAL (Initiates Self Calibration.) Warming bit (set during power up or configuration.)
4 0 0
5 0 0
130 OW350_R1150
Bit Data Description - Configuration Data Description - Status Register (Read)

Register (Write)
6 0 Module Not Calibrated.
7 0 0
8 - 15 Channel 1 - 8 _ 3/4 Wire. Channel 1 - 8 _ 3/4 Wire - Configuration (read back.)
when address 0 through 11 (B in Hex) are read.
configures the conversion rate of A/D converters as shown below.
CONVERSION RATE BIT 2

(1/SEC.)

Bit3: Write: This bit is used to initiate self-calibration. Read: This bit indicates that the module
is in the “Warming” state. This state exists after power up and terminates after 8.16 seconds.
The module is in the error condition during the warm up period.
Bits 4 - 5: These bits are not used and read as “0” under normal operation.
“0” indicates that there is no error condition. If an error is present, the internal error LED is lit
and attention status is returned for all address offsets 0-11 (0x0 - 0xB). The “1” state of this bit
Bit 7: This bit is not used and read as “0” under normal operation.
Bits 8 - 15: These bits are used to configure channels 1 - 8 respectively for 3 or 4 wire
operation. A “0” indicates 3 wire and a “1” indicates 4 wire operation, see the tables below).
4.7.9 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (RTD-8)
LED DESCRIPTION

module.
E No LED.
OW350_R1150 131
LED DESCRIPTION
I (Red) Internal Fault LED. Lit whenever there is any type of error with the module except to a
loss of power. Possible causes are:
 I/O Bus time-out has occurred.
 Register, static RAM, or FLASH checksum error.
 Module reset.
1 - 8 (Red) Channel #1 - 8 error. Lit whenever there is an error associated with a channel or
channels. Possible causes are:
 Positive overrange.
 Negative overrange.
 Communication with the channel has failed.
9 - 16 No LED.
4.7.10 Specifications - (RTD-8)

DESCRIPTION VALUE
Number of channels. 8
Sample repetition time and 50 HZ mode: 40/sec. normally. In 3 wire mode, lead resistance
sample duration time (msec.) measurement occurs once every 6.45 sec. during which the time rises
to 333.
60 HZ mode: 20/sec. normally. In 3 wire mode, lead resistance
measurement occurs once every 6.45 sec. during which the time rises
to 500.
Self Calibration Mode: Occurs on demand only. The rate drops to 1/sec.
once during each self calibration cycle.
RTD ranges. Refer to the following RTD Ranges table.
Resolution. 12 bits + polarity.
Data format. Two's compliment.
Conversion type. Sigma Delta.
Operating Mode. Self-scan.
Monotonicity. Yes
Nonlinearity. 0.003% of full scale.
Repeatability. With guaranteed accuracy.
Guaranteed accuracy (@25×C.) 0.10% ± [0.045 (Rcold/Rspan)]% ± [((Rcold + Rspan)/4096 OHM)]% ±
[0.5 OHM/Rspan]% 10 V ± 1/2LSB where: Rcold and Rspan are in
Ohms.
Temperature coefficient. 10ppm/ oC.
132 OW350_R1150
4.8 16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input module (Windows Ovation 3.4 and above)
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Channel to channel. 200V AC/DC.
Channel to logic. 1500 V AC/DC.
Input impedance. 100 M OHM.
50 K OHM in power down.
Maximum Overload. Fused at 50 ma.
Module power. 3.6 W typical; 4.2 W Maximum.
Operating temperature range. o o o
0 to 60 C (32 F to 140 F.)
Storage temperature range. o o o o

-40 C to 85 C (-40 F to 185 F.)
Humidity (non-condensing). 0 to 95%.
Self Calibration. On Demand by Ovation Controller.
Common Mode Rejection and 120 dB @ DC and nominal power line frequency (+/- 1/2%.)
Channel Crosstalk.
Normal Mode Rejection. 100 dB @ DC and nominal power line frequency (+/- 1/2%.)
Filtering. Digital, Sinc - 3dB cutoff: 13.1 Hz for 50 Hz; 15.7 Hz for 60 Hz.
4.8 16 Channel 4 -20mA Analog Input module (Window s Ovation 3.4

and above)
The Ovation 16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input module provides an interface between the Ovation
Controller and 16 field devices that use a 4-20mA current loop. Up to 16 4-20mA (2-wire or 4-
wire) transmitters can be connected per module.
Note: The Ovation 16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input module (2-wire and 4-wire configurations)
requires the following to function properly: Ovation software release 3.4.0 or later and OCR400
Controller with G03 IOIC (5X00226G03 I/O interface controller). Also, this module is only for
local I/O branch applications.
In a 2-wire 4-20mA configuration, user input signals are routed directly to the Analog Input Emod
without the use of a Personality module (Pmod). A Pmod cavity insert is used to cover the unused
connector and provide terminal wiring information..
In a 4-wire 4-20mA configuration, a Personality Module (5X00501G01) is required to interface the

user signals to the Analog Input Emod.
Note: A 16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input module must be inserted into an Ovation 4-slot I/O
base (5X00497G01) for proper operation. The Ovation 16 Channel Analog Input module will not
function in a standard 2-slot Ovation I/O base. Refer to I/O Module General Information (see
page 25) for environmental, installation, wiring, and fuse information for I/O modules.
4.8.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - 16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input

 5X00501G01 - 16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input Electronics module.
OW350_R1150 133
4.8.2 Personality modules (Pmod) - 16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input

 5X00502G01 - 16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input Personality module for both 4-wire and 2-
wire configurations.
 1X00692H01 - 16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input Personality cavity insert for 2-wire
configurations only.
4.8.3 Subsystems - 16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input
16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input subsystems
DESCRIPTION CHANNELS ELECTRONICS PERSONALITY MODULE

MODULE
16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input, 2- 16 5X00501G01 5X00502G01

wire and 4-wire
16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input, 2- 16 5X00501G01 1X00692H01
wire only
Note: The 16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input requires the use of an Ovation 4-slot I/O Base
(5X00497G01) to provide additional wire terminations to support the 16 channels. The Ovation
16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input CANNOT be used in the standard I/O bases (1B30035H01,
1X00014H01, or 5X00334G01).
4.8.4 Terminal block wiring information 16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input (2-Wire)
The following figure and table are for the terminal block arrangement for the 2-wire 4-20mA 16
Channel Analog Input module. Row A is not used; no external connections are to be made to Row
A. Row B is Analog Input (n+). Row C is utilized to provide power to the “+” field terminals of 2-
wire loop-powered transmitter. This diagram indicates how to connect the wiring from the field to
the terminal block in the base unit. The table lists and defines the abbreviations used in those
diagrams.
Figure 36: Terminal block connections for the 2-Wire 16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input
module
134 OW350_R1150
1+ through 16+ Analog Input positive terminal connection (connect to the negative terminal of the field
device).
P1+ through P16+ Loop power output terminals (connect to the positive terminal of the field device).
PS+, PS- Auxiliary power supply terminals. No external connections required when using Ovation
+24V DC Auxiliary Power Supply. Ovation Aux Supply provided to module through
branch.
Reserved terminals. Connections should not be made on these unmarked terminals.
SH Shield terminal connections. All shield connections are tied together internally on a 4-slot
I/O base and connected to Earth ground on the module.
+24VDC Auxiliary Power enters the module through the internal branch connection or terminal block (PS+/PS-).
Power is fused on the module then individually current limited and delivered to the channel loop power output
terminal (P1+ through P16+) for connection to the field device (+) terminal. Each field device (-) terminal then
connects to the Analog Input channel positive terminal (1+ through 16+) where it is read by the module. The
negative reference for all 16 channels is PS-. All shields are tied together on the base terminal strip and
connected to Earth ground on the module.
Note: For CE Mark Certified Systems: All field wiring must be Braid Shielded and Grounded at
the entry point of the cabinet using recommended hardware. Refer to the Cable Guidelines
section of the applicable Ovation Installation manual.
When using locally powered (2-wire) Analog Input 4-20mA Inputs, the Power Distribution
Module (5X00489G01) must have the Main GND and AUX GND referenced together. Therefore,
ensure that the Main grounding bar (J10) and AUX grounding bar (J11) are installed and
referenced to earth on the Power Distribution Module.
4.8.5 Terminal block wiring information - 16 Channel Analog Input 4-20mA (4-
Wire)
The following figure and table are for the terminal block arrangement of the 4-wire 4-20mA 16
Channel Analog Input module. Row A is Analog Input (n-). Row B is Analog Input (n+). Row C is
not used in 4-wire applications; however, in 2-wire applications, Row C can be used to supply
loop power (Pn+) to circuit. This diagram indicates how to connect a single 4-wire field device to
the terminal block in the base unit. The table lists and defines the abbreviations used in those
diagrams.
Figure 37: Terminal block connections for the 4-Wire 16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input
module
OW350_R1150 135
1+ through 16+ Analog Input Positive Terminal (connect to positive terminal of 4-wire field device; connect
to negative terminal of 2-wire field device)
1- through 16- Analog Input Negative Terminal (connect to negative terminal of 4-wire field device; leave
unconnected for 2-wire field device)
PS+, PS- Auxiliary power supply input terminals. No external connections required when using
Ovation +24V DC Auxiliary Power Supply. Ovation Aux Supply provided to module
through branch.
P1+ through P16+ Loop Power Output Terminals (leave unconnected for 4-wire device; connect to positive
terminal of 2-wire device)
SH Shield terminal connection.
For 4-wire Devices: Loop Power enters from the field device. The field device output (+) terminal connects to the
Analog Input channel positive terminal (1+ through 16+) where it is read by the module. Each field device output
(-) terminal connects to the Analog Input channel negative terminal (1- through 16-). The negative reference (1-
through 16-) of all 16 analog inputs are tied together on the Pmod and tied through the Emod to Earth ground
and all shields (SH) on the terminal strip.
For 2-wire Devices: +24VDC Auxiliary Power enters through the internal branch connection or the terminal block
connections (PS+/PS-). Power is fused on the module then individually current limited and delivered to channel
Loop Output Terminals (P1+ through P16+) for connection to the 2-wire field device (+) terminal. Each 2-wire
field device (-) terminal then connects to the Analog Input channel positive terminal (1+ through 16+) where it is
read by the module. The negative reference for all 16 channels is tied together with all shields (SH) of terminal
strip and Earth ground on module.
Note: For CE Mark Certified Systems: All field wiring must be Braid Shielded and Grounded at
the entry point of the cabinet using the recommended hardware. Refer to the Cable Guidelines
section of the applicable Ovation Installation manual.
When using locally powered (2-wire) Analog Input 4-20mA Inputs, the Power Distribution
Module (5X00489G01) must have the Main GND and AUX GND referenced together. Therefore,
136 OW350_R1150
4.8.6 Field connection wiring diagrams - 16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input (2-
Wire)
Figure 38: Wiring diagram - 16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input module (2-wire configuration)
OW350_R1150 137
4.8.7 Field connection wiring diagrams - 16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input (4-
Wire)
Figure 39: Wiring diagram - 16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input module (4-wire configuration)
4.8.8 Register configuration/status information - 16 Channel 4-20mA Analog

Input
Station (See the Ovation Operator Station User Guide).
16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input - Module Configuration/Status Register (Address 13 or D

in Hex)

(WRITE)
0 Configure module 1 = configured

0 = not configured *
1 Internal or forced error 1 = forced error set by controller
0 = no forced error *
138 OW350_R1150

(WRITE)
2 Not defined 1 = Calibration in Progress

0 = Default *
3 Not defined 1 = Gain Calibration Complete
0 = Default *
4 Not defined 1 = Calibration Fault
0 = Default *
5 Not defined Not defined, 0 = Permanent Value
6 Not defined 1 = Not Calibrated
0 = Calibrated *
7 Not defined 1= Blown Fuse Detected
0= Fuse OK *
8 Not defined 0 = Permanent Value
9 Select 50/60 Hz System 1= 50 Hz *
0= 60 Hz
10 Start Gain Calibration ** 1 = Gain calibration in progress
0 = Default *
11 Start Offset Calibration ** 1= Offset Calibration in Progress
0= Default *
12 Not defined 1= Offset Calibration Complete
0 = Default *
13 Not defined 1= Un-Calibration Started
0 = Default *
14 Start Un-calibration ** 1= Un-Calibration Complete
0 = Default *
15 Not defined 1= Channel Fault detected
0 = No Channel Fault detected *
* Default value.
** These commands are used during module factory test only and are not used or performed during normal
system operation.
Bits defined for diagnostics are used only during factory testing.
Bit 0: This bit configures the module (write) and indicates the configuration state of the
module (read). A “1” indicates that the module is configured. Note that until the module is
configured, reading from addresses 0 through 11 (B in Hex) produces an attention status.
Bit 1: This bit (write “1”) forces the module into its error state. The read of bit 1 indicates that
there is an internal module error, or the Controller has forced the module into the error state.
The state of this bit is reflected in the module's Internal Error LED (I) LED (see Diagnostic
LEDs - 16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input (see page 142)). Whenever this bit is set, an
attention status is returned to the Controller when addresses 0 through 11 (B in Hex) are
read.
Bits 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14: These bits are used only for diagnostics and
calibration during factory testing and should not be modified. The default read values during
normal system operation are listed.
Bit 7: Blown fuse detection bit.
OW350_R1150 139
Bit 9: Indicates if the module is set up for a 50 or 60 Hz system.

Bit 15: Indicates a fault in at least one enabled channel was detected. Channel Status
Register (0xC) can be read to determine which channel(s) are in fault.
Channel Enable/Mask Register - 16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input
Word address 14 (E in Hex) is used to enable or disable individual analog input channels on the
module. Masking an unused channel can prevent open-loop errors from being reported to the
system if the channel is not wired.
Channel Enable/Mask Register (Address 14 or E in Hex)
BIT DESCRIPTION (WRITE) DESCRIPTION (READ)
0 1 = Enable Channel 1 1 = Channel 1 Enabled

0 = Mask Channel 1 Faults 0 = Channel 1 Faults Masked
140 OW350_R1150
Channel Status Register - 16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input
Word address 12 (C in Hex) is used to report the status of the individually enabled analog input
channels. A reported fault may indicate an open loop, over-range, under-range, or calibration fault
on an enabled channel.
Channel Status Register (Address 12 or C in Hex)
BIT DESCRIPTION (READ ONLY)
0 1 = Enabled Channel 1 Fault Exists

0 = No Fault Reported on Channel 1
OW350_R1150 141
4.8.9 Diagnostic LEDs - 16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input
Logic card LED indications
LED DESCRIPTION
P (green) Power OK LED. Lit when module main power is OK.

E (Red) External Fault LED. Lit to indicate Auxiliary 24VDC field power is not present, is below threshold,
or the module's Auxiliary 24VDC fuse is blown.
I (Red) Internal Fault LED. Lit whenever there is any type of internal module error. Possible causes
include:
 Module reset.
Note: Failure of Auxiliary 24VDC power is considered to be an external error.
1-16 (Red) A channel error LED is lit when a fault is detected on an enabled channel. Possible causes
include:
 Over-range fault: Input current >22mA
 Under-range fault: Input current <2.5mA
 Open loop fault
 Blown fuse fault (2-wire)
Note: 24V Auxiliary Fuse Rating: 1 A, 250V Fast-acting fuse 5X20 mm.
4.8.10 Specifications - 16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input
16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input module specifications
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Input types and ranges 4 - 20 mA ±1V; 2-wire or 4-wire single-ended
Valid Input Range: 2.5 to 22mA
Under Current : <2.5mA
Over Current: >22mA
(Broken) Open Loop: 0 to 2.5mA
Resolution 14-Bits, no missing code
Accuracy ±0.10% of full scale value ±1/2LSB @99.7% confidence.
Resolution conditions:
25 degrees C +/- 1 degree
50% +/- 1% RH
0V common mode
142 OW350_R1150
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Input impedance 130 Ohms +/- 0.1%

Sampling rate Data rate of 50 samples per second when configured for 50Hz rejection.
Data rate of 60 samples per second when configured for 60Hz rejection.
Refresh rate: 200 ms for 16 channels
Self-calibration Self calibration is performed only during factory test on demand over the I/O
bus. Calibration is not performed during normal module operation.
Diagnostics Internal module operating faults, Out of range detection,
Open loop detection, and Module (Auxiliary 24VDC power supply) blown
fuse
Channel to Channel is common
Normal mode rejection NMRR 50dB at 50SPS / 60 SPS
Common mode rejection CMRR 120 dB
Module power  Drawn from Main: 1.20W typical; 1.38W max.
 Drawn from Auxiliary: 0.48W typical; 0.56W max. (4-wire)
8.16W typical; 9.38W max. (2-wire)\
 Power Dissipated in Emod/Pmod: 1.69W typical; 1.94W max.
2-Wire Transmitter Power 19.18V available for current loops @ 20mA (4.82V drop on module)
16 channel @ 20mA
Each channel current limited to 26.5mA
Operating temperature range 0 to 60 degrees C (32 degrees F to 140 degrees F)
Storage temperature range -40 degrees C to 85 degrees C (-40 degrees F to 185 degrees F)
OW350_R1150 143
S E C T I O N 5
5 Analog Output modules
IN THIS SECTION
Analog Output module - (AO).......................................................................................... 145

HART Analog Output module - (HAO) ............................................................................ 156
HART High Performance Analog Output module - (HHPAO) ......................................... 168
5.1 Analog Output module - (AO)
The Analog Output Electronics module uses low-power-drain 12-bit serial digital-to-analog
converters (DACs) to provide four galvanically isolated output channels. The serial clock and data
allow the four channels to be updated every 1.5 ms. The serial interface uses opto-isolators for
high-voltage isolation.
The Analog Output module is a CE Mark Certified module.
OW350_R1150 145
5.1.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (AO)

 1C31129G01 provides voltage output range of 0 to 5 V DC.
 1C31129G02 provides voltage output range of 0 to 10 V.
 1C31129G03 provides current output range of 0 to 20 mA with diagnostics.
 1C31129G04 provides current output range of 0 to 20 mA without diagnostics.
 1C31129G05 provides current output range of 4 to 20 mA for redundant applications (with
diagnostics).
5.1.2 Personality modules (Pmod) - (AO)

 1C31132G01 routes field signals from the Electronics module to the terminal block.
 1C31132G02 For Redundant analog output module.
 5X00170G01 Analot Output pin-compatible.
5.1.3 Subsystems - (AO)
Analog Output subsystems

MODULE MODULE
0-5 Volts DC 4 1 1C31132G01

1C31129G01
0-10 Volts DC 4 1 1C31132G01
1C31129G02
0-20 mA with Diagnostics 4 1 1C31132G01
1C31129G03
(4-20 mA with Diagnostics can also be selected in the
I/O Builder for Solaris applications; card will be
0-20 mA without Diagnostics 4 1 1C31132G01
1C31129G04
(4-20 mA without Diagnostics can also be selected in
the I/O Builder for Solaris applications; card will be
4-20 mA with Diagnostics (For Redundant applications). 4 2 1C31132G02
1C31129G05
1
2
For Redundant applications using Windows Ovation 3.2 and above.
146 OW350_R1150
5.1.4 Terminal block wiring information - (AO)
block in the base unit. The diagram for the analog output Personality module is illustrated in the
following figure. The following table lists and defines the abbreviations used in this diagram.
information.
Shielded twisted pair wiring should be used for Maximum noise immunity.
Figure 40: Terminal block connections for the Analog Output Personality module
Note: 1. R is only used with the combination of 1C31129G05 and 1C31132G02.

2. Do not use unmarked terminal block locations.
3. Shield terminals (SH) are not connected in CE Mark systems.
+I Current output source terminal.

SH Shield terminal connection.
+V Voltage output source terminal connection.
- Reference for voltage and current output.

R Current return for redundant mode.
The loads can be floating or grounded. For Maximum noise immunity, it is best to reference a
floating load to local earth by placing a jumper between the SH terminal and the adjacent earth
GND terminal.
OW350_R1150 147
5.1.5 Field connection wiring diagrams (1C31129G01/G02) (simplex) - (AO)
Figure 41: Field connection for the Analog Output Pmod
148 OW350_R1150
5.1.6 Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark) - (AO)
Figure 42: Field connection for the Analog Output Personality module (CE Mark)
OW350_R1150 149
5.1.7 Field connection wiring diagrams (1C31129G02) (Redundant) - (AO)
Figure 43: Field connection for the Redundant Analog Output Personality module
150 OW350_R1150
5.1.8 Cable assembly routing configuration (Redundant) - (AO)
Note: The cable assembly end labeled Hood 1 must be installed next to the module wired to the
field.
5.1.9 Register configuration/address information - (AO)
Station (see the Bit Pattern Field on the Hardware tab). (See the Ovation Operator Station User
Guide.)
Analog Output configuration/status register (address 13 or D in Hex)

0 Configure Configured (1 = configured; 0 = unconfigured)

1 Force Error Forced Error (1 = forced error; 0 = no forced error)
2-4 1 1
Communications Timeout Setting Communications Timeout Setting
Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Timeout Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Timeout
0 0 0 16 seconds 0 0 0 16 seconds
1 0 0 500 milliseconds 1 0 0 500 milliseconds
1 1 1 62.5 milliseconds 1 1 1 62.5 milliseconds
OW350_R1150 151

3 1 1
Communication Timeout Bit Communication Timeout Bit 1
4 1 1
Communication Timeout Bit Communication Timeout Bit 2
5 Hold Output Hold Output.

6 Not used Channel error (G05 only).
7 Disable power Disable power.
15 Redundant Operation (G05 only) Redundant Operation (G05 only).
1
The tolerance on the timeout period is +/- 35%.
Bit 0: When Bit 0 is set, the module is configured. The module cannot be read and does not
operate until the configure bit is set with a write. Subsequent writes to address 13 should also
have Bit 0 set.
Bit 1: Bit 1 is the Force-Error bit. When Bit 1 is set, the Internal Error LED is turned on, and
data registers can be written, but not read.
Bits 2-4: These bits are used to select the communication timeout period.
Bit 5: This bit is Hold Output on communication timeout. If Bit 5 is set and no communication
to the module occurs for the defined time period, only the communication LED goes off, and
the Internal Error LED goes on, but the outputs hold their last value.
If Bit 5 is not set and no communication to the module occurs for the defined time period, the
outputs reset to zero and the Internal Error LED goes on.
Bit 6: Group 5 only - Set on any channel error (over-current, under-current, Power Supply
failure).
Bit 7: This bit is the disable power bit.
Bit 15: Group 5 only - Set to indicate redundant operation.
All the bits are cleared to zero on power up.
152 OW350_R1150
CAUTION! This module contains Communications Timeout Settings (Timeout Action and
Timeout Selection) that are initially configured in the Developer Studio or the DBID tool. The
default Timeout Selection is 16 seconds, with the Timeout Action set to LATCH. These
settings are normally adjusted by a Project Engineer or an Emerson Field Service Engineer
after determining the affects the setting will have on the system. Any Timeout Selection
change made while the module is in the LATCH Timeout Action, will have no effect on the
system (with the exception of the system indication a Communication Error.)
The Timeout Action must be changed to RESET, either through the DBID tool or in the
Developer Studio, before any new Timeout Selection has an effect on the system. It is
recommended that before you make any changes to the Timeout Selection, you conduct a
thorough evaluation of any affect that change may have on the system. Under some
conditions a different timeout may cause the module to go into its respective fail-safe mode.
The register at address 12 (C in Hex) is for diagnostics and is a read-only register. The
overcurrent and undercurrent status bits may be read from this register. The following table shows
the overcurrent and undercurrent bits for each channel. The overcurrent bits are used for both the
voltage groups and current groups. The undercurrent bits only have meaning for the current
group. The voltage output groups do not implement the undercurrent bit.
The simultaneous setting of a channel's overcurrent and undercurrent bits indicates a loss of Field
Card power supply for that channel. Overcurrent and undercurrent bits indicate the output current
status of this module and not the loop current.
Note: Group 4 current output Field Cards do not have these diagnostic capabilities and the
overcurrent and undercurrent bits are strapped in the logical zero state. Since the Group 4
modules do not have diagnostics, the information is not available to the Ovation Controller to
support redundancy logic calculations. Groups 1 and 2 do not have undercurrent indication.
Output Current Status register address location information (address 12 or C in Hex)
BIT DESCRIPTION
0, 2, 4, 6 Channel 1 - 4 Overcurrent
1, 3, 5, 7 Channel 1 - 4 Undercurrent
5.1.10 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (AO)
LED DESCRIPTION

module.
E No LED.
set.
Also lit when a timeout of the watchdog timer occurs when Controller stops
communicating with module.
OW350_R1150 153
LED DESCRIPTION
1 - 4 (Red) Channel 1 - 4 error. Over-current or undercurrent indication.

 On groups 1, 2, 3, and 5, the LEDs are ON after power up until the module is
configured.
 On groups 1 and 2, the LED is ON for over-current output or loss of output D/A power.
 On group 3, and 5, the LED is ON for over-current/undercurrent output or loss of output
D/A power.
 Group 4 does not have diagnostic LEDs.
5 - 16 No LED.
5.1.11 Specifications - (AO)

DESCRIPTION VALUE
Maximum update time 2 msec
Output range 1 1 2
V , 0 -10 V , 0 - 20 mA
Resolution 12 bits
Data Format Binary
Bit Weight Current Output: 0.005 ma - Voltage output: 2.5 mv.
Setting time (full scale change) to 1% of range Current Output: 660 usec
Overshoot None
Inductive Loads (current outputs) 10 mH
Power up/down The outputs power up at 0 mA (G03, G04), 4mA (G05) or
0 V (G01, G02).
Monotonicity Yes
Crosstalk between channels >60dB
Nonlinearity 1/2 LSB
Repeatability <1 LSB
Output noise 5 mv Max
Guaranteed accuracy (@25 C) of full scale.
Temperature coefficient 30 ppm/ C.
User loop voltage Power for current loop output is supplied by module.
Channel to channel - Channel to logic 1000 V AC/DC - 1000 V AC/DC.
Output loading:
Current 0 Ohms minimum; 750 Ohms Maximum.
Voltage 10 mA Maximum.
154 OW350_R1150
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Module power
Current output 4 W typical; 6 W Maximum.
Voltage output 2 W typical; 3 W Maximum.
Operating temperature range 0 to 60 C (32 F to 140 F).
Storage temperature range -40 C to 85 C (-40 F to 185 F).

1
Overcurrent load indications.
2
Module supplied loop voltage, overcurrent and undercurrent diagnostic indication. Provides the ability to
measure current without disconnecting loop.
OW350_R1150 155
5.2 HART Analog Output module - (HAO)
The Ovation HART (Highway Addressable Remote Transducer) Analog Output Module consists
of an Electronics module and a personality mode. The Ovation HART Analog Output Module is
designed to interface with eight HART compliant output devices utilizing a 4-20 mA control loop
signal. A HART compliant output device exchanges digital information with the Ovation control
system in addition to the standard 4-20 mA control loop signal. The digital information is imposed
on the 4-20 mA signal according to the guidelines of the HART Protocol Specification. HART uses
a low-level frequency shift-keyed sine-wave signal that is superimposed on the 4-20 mA signal.
The average value of the HART signal is zero. Therefore, the HART signal does not interfere with
the 4-20 mA control signal.
The HART Analog Output module is a CE Mark certified module.
5.2.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (HAO)

 5X00062G01 contains eight multiplexed, 4-20 mA output channels that interface with eight
HART output devices.
5.2.2 Personality modules (Pmod) - (HAO)

 5X00063G01 contains passive circuitry for each of the eight channels. There is a user-
serviceable fuse located on the Personality module. This fuses the auxiliary power supplying
the field side circuitry of the eight output channels.
5.2.3 Subsystems - (HAO)
1
HART Analog Output subsystems (14 bit)
4-20 mA 8 1 5X00063G01
5X00062G01
1
156 OW350_R1150
5.2.4 Module block diagrams - (HAO)
The Ovation HART analog output module assembly consists of two modules inserted into an
Ovation base unit. The Electronics module contains a logic printed circuit board (LHA) and a field
printed circuit board (FHO). The simplified block diagram for the HART analog output Electronics
modules FHO board is shown in the following figure. The Electronics module is used in
conjunction with a Personality module, which contains a single printed circuit board (PHAO).
1 of 8 Channels
2.5V
Reference Output
+22VA Device
Opto-
#1
ANSEL1/ couplers 8 Channel 1 Low Pass 4 -20mA
DAC_SELECT/ CHAN1OUT
14 Bit D/A Sample & Filter Current

SDO SERIAL_DATA
Convertor Hold Output
SCLK/ SERIAL_CLOCK
8
ANA_MUX0
ANA_MUX1
4 CHAN1RTN
ANALOGMUX00-02 &
ANA_MUX2 SAMPL_ENA/
ANA_MUX3
+24VA
(ADDR IN) 1
8 Bit A/D Current to
ANSEL2/ ADC_SELECT/ Convertor Voltage
SDI A/D_SDI Convertor
AD_CNV_STATUS AD_STAT 8
HART_MUX1 HART_MUX00-02 3
1
HART_MUX2 8:1
(HART_DCD) HART02 HART
HART_MUX3 Multiplexor
HART00 Receive
HART_DCD
Modem 8
HART_RXD HART_RXD/ Circuit
HART_ENA/ HART_ENA_OUT
HART_RTS/ (HART-RTS) HART03
HART_TXD/ (HART-TXD) HART01

1
8 Analog
ENA_OUTPUTS HART Switches
ENA_OUTPUTS/
Transmit
VCCOK
Modem 8
Circuit
3
+12VA
3 to 8
+24_AUXF Voltage +5VA1 Decoder
Regulators +5VA2
+22VA
Channels
1-8 Power +24VA
Supply
Figure 44: HART Analog Output field board block diagram
OW350_R1150 157
5.2.5 External power supply information - (HAO)
The HART Analog Output Module utilizes the standard +24V Ovation main power supply to
provide the power required for the logic circuitry.
The HART Analog Output Module utilizes a +24 auxiliary power supply to provide the power
required for the field circuitry. This includes all 4-20 mA loop power, D/A conversion, and the
remaining output channel components.
It is recommended that the HART Analog Output module utilize the Ovation cabinet‟s Auxiliary
+24V DC power that is obtained from the standard Ovation DIN Rail power supply auxiliary
output.
However, if an external auxiliary power supply is utilized by the HART Analog Input module, the
power supply output noise cannot exceed 2.2 mVRMS Maximum for all rated loads across the
frequency range of 500 HZ to 10 KHz .
steps to be undertaken before connecting the external power supply to the Ovation I/O base unit
terminal block.
In addition, all modules utilizing the auxiliary power supplies, including the HART modules, MUST
utilize shielded I/O cables in order to suppress coupled noise and transients into the HART
modules. This includes modules on the same branch utilizing the auxiliary power, or modules on
other branches utilizing the same auxiliary power. This recommendation applies regardless of the
type of power supply chosen by the user.
158 OW350_R1150
5.2.6 Terminal block wiring information - (HAO)
block in the base unit. The diagrams for the HART Analog Output Personality modules are
illustrated in the following figure. The following table lists and defines the abbreviations used in
those diagrams.
information.
Figure 46: HART Analog Output terminal block pin assignments
A1 - A8 Analog Output positive terminal connection (connected to the positive terminal of a

HART analog output device).
+
A1 - A8 Analog Output negative terminal connection (connected to the negative terminal of a
HART analog output device.)
-
OW350_R1150 159
5.2.7 Field connection wiring diagrams - (HAO)
Figure 47: Field wiring (non-CE Mark) (2 of 8 channels depicted)
160 OW350_R1150
5.2.8 Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark) - (HAO)
Figure 48: Field wiring (CE Mark) (2 of 8 channels depicted)
OW350_R1150 161
5.2.9 Field wiring cable requirements - (HAO)
overall shield. Single and multiple-pair may be combined provided that all of the shields share a
Below 5,000 feet (1524 m) 24 AWG (0.51 mm dia.) Single-twisted pair shielded or multiple-twisted
pair with over-all shield.
In a HART network, long cable lengths are possible when the dominant low impedance device
(the HART field device) has an input impedance of approximately 250 ohms and the signal cable
is good quality having low capacitance (Cx) and resistance (Rx) per unit length.
Cx = Cable capacitance per unit length (feet or meters): The capacitance from one conductor to
all other conductors (including the shield if shielded). This value is usually available from the cable
manufacturer.
Rx = Cable resistance per unit length (feet or meters): This value should be available from the
cable manufacturer. Filed Wiring Requirements (see page 93) for the HART Analog Input Module
contains the resistance values of some common copper wire sizes. The resistance per unit length
is for a single wire but the length calculations and charts take into account the resistance of both
wires.
Refer to field device manufacturer‟s literature for more information on cabling lengths since device
impedances may vary among field devices. In addition, refer to the HART FSK Physical Layer
Specification (HCF_SPEC - 54) for additional information.
5.2.10 Open loop detect register - (HAO)
If one of these bits is set, the channel readback diagnostic indicates the difference between the
desired value and the actual value that exceeds the accepted deadband. This bit signifies an
open loop condition.
Pass/Fail per channel register (address 12 or C in Hex)

0-7 NA Channel 1 - 8 bad

8 - 16 Not Used Not Used
162 OW350_R1150
5.2.11 Register configuration/address information - (HAO)
Guide.)
HART Analog Output register map
REG DATA DESCRIPTION - DATA DESCRIPTION - STATUS REGISTER

CONFIGURATION REGISTER (WRITE) (READ)
0 Indirect Memory Index. NA

1 Indirect Memory Data. Indirect Memory Data.
2-9 Analog Output - Channel 1 - 8 NA
10 Calibration Register (Factory use only). Calibration Register (Factory use only.)
11 NA HAI Firmware Revision.
12 NA Channel Error Bits.
13 Module Configuration Register. Module Status Register.
14 NA HART Enable (See the table below.)
15 Module Electronic ID Data. NA
HART HAO Configuration/Status Register (address 13 or D in Hex)
BIT DATA DESCRIPTION - (WRITE) DATA DESCRIPTION - (READ)
0 Configure module Module Configured.

(1 = configured; 0 = unconfigured.)
(1 = forced error; 0 = no forced error.)
2-4 1 1
BIT 4 BIT 3 BIT 2 TIMEOUT BIT BIT BIT 2 TIMEOUT

4 3
0 0 0 16 seconds
0 0 0 16 seconds
0 0 1 4 seconds
0 0 1 4 seconds
0 1 0 2 seconds
0 1 0 2 seconds
0 1 1 1 seconds
0 1 1 1 seconds
1 0 0 500 milliseconds
1 1 1 62.5 milliseconds
1 1 1 62.5 milliseconds
5 Timeout Action NA
6 Reserved for Factory Test (must be set to 0.) NA
7 Reserved for Factory Test (must be set to 0.) NA
OW350_R1150 163
8 NA Hardware Error.
9 - 13 Not Used. Not Used.
14 NA Field Power Failed.
15 Reserved Reserved.
1
Bit definitions for this register are encoded as shown above and described below:
Bit 0: Configures the module (write) or indicates the configuration state of the module (read).
A “1” indicates that the module is configured. Until the module is configured, addresses 0
through 11 produce an attention status.
Bit 1: This bit (write “1”) forces the module into its error state causing the Internal Error LED
to light.
Bits 2-4: These bits are used to select the Controller communications timeout period.
Bit 5: If this bit is set and the Controller times out, the module continues to output the last
value received. If the bit is cleared and the Controller times out, the module outputs zero to
the DAC for each channel, yielding 0 mA on the outputs after the time out period defined by
bits 2-4.
Bits 6-7: Reserved for use by the Factory Test. These bits must always be set to 0.
Bit 8: When set, this indicates one or more of the following conditions are true:
- The FPGA did not program correctly upon startup.
- The EE memory checksum is incorrect.
- The PROM checksum test has failed.
- Internal memory diagnostic has failed.
Bits 9-13: Not Used.
Bit 14: Field power failed.
Bit 15: Reserved.
164 OW350_R1150
HART Analog Output Enable Register (Address 14 or E in Hex)
BIT DATA DESCRIPTION - CONFIGURATION DATA DESCRIPTION - STATUS

REGISTER (WRITE) REGIS TE R (RE AD )
0-7 Multi-variable Enabled. NA

8 - 15 HART Enabled - Channel 1 - 8. NA
Bits 0-7: These bits are set to enable multivariable messaging.
The HAI, HAO, HART High Performance AI and HART High Performance AO modules have
the ability to retrieve additional variables from a field device. These variables are referred to
as „multivariables‟ and are named PV (primary variable), SV (secondary variable), TV (tertiary
The definitions of PV, SV, TV, and QV are found in the user manual for the field device
supplied by the device manufacturer. The standard format of these four variables is IEEE 754,
a floating-point format.
You must configure IO point records to cause the Controller to scan the module and retrieve
the variables. (See Ovation Init and AdMin for Solaris systems or the Ovation Developer
Studio User Guide for Windows-based systems).
Bits 8-15: In the IO configuration tool, you can set these flags on a per-channel basis to
allow HART messaging, including Multivariable messaging, to flow on that channel.
If one of these bits is set, the channel readback diagnostic indicates the difference between the
desired value and the actual value that exceeds the accepted deadband. This bit signifies an
open loop condition.
5.2.12 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (HAO)
LED DESCRIPTION

module.
E (Red) External Error LED. Illuminated upon loss of external auxiliary (field) power, as indicated by
the loss of normal transitions of the EOC (end-of-convert) signal.
OW350_R1150 165
LED DESCRIPTION
 EPROM, EE memory or RAM diagnostic failure.
1 - 8 (Green) After module configuration, the bank of eight channel LEDs (LEDs 1 through 8) is used to
indicate HART communication activity. When a HART message is sent, the LED for that
particular channel is illuminated. When the HART response is received correctly, the LED
is extinguished. Therefore, when all is normal, that is, messages and responses are
properly exchanged, a single LED blink is observed on the module‟s front cap.
If a HART message is sent and no response is received, the HART Analog Output module
exclusive-OR‟s the channel LED display with hex code 0xFF. This results in all channel
LEDs being illuminated except for the selected channel. For example, if the HART Analog
Output module sent a HART message to a device on channel 2, but the device was not
connected to channel 2, the module would first illuminate LED 2 (all seven other channel
LEDs extinguished). The module would then extinguish LED 2 and flash the other seven
channel LEDs. This status indicates that the module sent a HART message on channel 2
and did not receive a valid response message after the initial message attempt or after any
of the subsequent message retries.
9 - 16 No LED.
5.2.13 Specifications - (HAO)

DESCRIPTION VALUE
Channel Update Rate 24 mS (Each channel is updated once every 24 mS by the on-board
microcontroller, 14 Bit resolution typ.)
Output Range 4 to 20 mA
D/A Resolution 14 Bits
Accuracy over Temperature Range 0.25% of Span
User Loop Voltage Power for loop current is supplied through the module by an auxiliary
power supply.
Diagnostics Open loop feedback detection. 8 Pass/Fail bits are stored in data
register 0xC in Hex.
Channel to Channel None
Channel to logic 1000 VAC/VDC for 1 minute.
Output Loading 4-20 mA into 700 ohm load Maximum (230 ohm minimum to 600
1
ohm Maximum).
Output Compliance 20 mA@21.6 VDC Supply into 700 ohm load.
Operating Temperature Range o o
0 to 60 C
166 OW350_R1150
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Module Power Main: 24 VDC, 1.2 W typical, 2.5W Maximum

Aux: 24 VDC (-5%,+6.25%), 6W typical, 7.2W Maximum
1
Per the HART Physical Layer Specification (HCF_SPEC - 54).
OW350_R1150 167
5.3 HART High Performance Analog Output module - (HHPAO)
The Ovation HART High Performance Analog Output module consists of an Electronics module
and a personality mode cavity insert. The Ovation HART High Performance Analog Output
module is designed to interface with four HART compliant output devices utilizing a 4-20 mA
control loop signal. A HART compliant output device exchanges digital information with the
Ovation control system in addition to the standard 4-20 mA control loop signal. The digital
information is imposed on the 4-20 mA signal according to the guidelines of the HART Protocol
Specification. HART uses a low-level frequency shift-keyed sine-wave signal that is superimposed
on the 4-20 mA signal. The average value of the HART signal is zero. Therefore, the HART signal
does not interfere with the 4-20 mA control signal.
5.3.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (HHPAO)

 5X00167G01 contains four independent self-powered, 4-20 mA output channels that interface
with 4 HART output devices.
 5X00167G31 contains four independent self-powered, 4-20 mA output channels that interface
with 4 HART output devices (Q-line migration).
5.3.2 Personality modules (Pmod) - (HHPAO)

 1X00188H01 (molded plastic cavity insert)
 5X00211G03 (Q-line migration)
5.3.3 Subsystems - (HHPAO)
1
HART High Performance Analog Output subsystems (16-bit)
4-20 mA 4 1 1X00188H01 (molded plastic cavity insert)

5X00167G01
4-20 mA 4 5X00167G31 5X00211G03 (Q-line migration)
1
A Personality module is not required in order to use the HART High Performance Analog Output
module. However, there may be requirements to use the Ovation Analog Output module base unit
terminal assignments for the actuator interface field wiring. In those cases, you must use the
5X00170G01 HART High Performance Analog Output Personality module.
168 OW350_R1150
5.3.4 Module Block Diagrams - (HHPAO)
The Ovation HART High Performance Analog Output module assembly consists of one module
inserted into an Ovation base unit. The Electronics module contains a logic printed circuit board
(LOH) and a field printed circuit board (FOH). The simplified block diagram for the HART High
Performance Analog Output Electronics modules FOH board is shown in the following two figures.
The Electronics module is used in conjunction with a Personality module cavity insert which plugs
into the base unit cavity normally occupied by a Personality module.
Figure 49: HART High Performance Analog Output Field Board Block Diagram (with
1X00188H01 Personality Module Cavity Insert Present)
OW350_R1150 169
Figure 50: HART High Performance Analog Output Field Board Block Diagram
(5X00170G01 Personality Module Present)
170 OW350_R1150
5.3.5 Terminal block wiring information - (HHPAO)
Each Personality module cavity insert has a simplified wiring diagram label on its top which
appears above the terminal block. This diagram indicates how to connect the wiring from the field
to the terminal block in the base unit. The wiring diagrams for the HART High Performance
Analog Output Personality modules are illustrated in HART Analog Output Field Connection
Wiring Diagrams.
information.
+I Analog Output positive terminal connection (connected to the positive terminal of a

HART analog output device).
-I Analog Output negative terminal connection (connected to the negative terminal of a
HART analog output device)
PS+, PS- External Auxiliary power supply terminals (Not Used)
Note: All unused channels must have a wired jumper installed across the channel output
terminals in order to prevent channel Under current alarms. Starting with Ovation 3.4 systems, a
resistor or wired jumper is not necessary because the Ovation Developer Studio will mask off
module alarms for an unused channel and eliminate the nuisance alarm.
OW350_R1150 171
5.3.6 Field Connection wiring diagrams (Emod) - (HHPAO)
Figure 51: Field wiring with cavity insert
172 OW350_R1150
5.3.7 Field Connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark) - (HHPAO)
Figure 52: Field wiring with cavity insert (CE Mark)
OW350_R1150 173
5.3.8 Field Connection wiring diagrams (Pmod 5X00211G03) - (HHPAO)
Figure 53: Field wiring with cavity insert
174 OW350_R1150
5.3.9 Field Connection wiring diagrams (Pmod 5X00211G03) (CE Mark) - (HHPAO)
Figure 54: Field wiring with Pmod (CE Mark)
OW350_R1150 175
5.3.10 Field wiring cable requirements - (HHPAO)
overall shield. Single and multiple-pair may be combined provided that all of the shields share a
Below 5,000 feet (1524 m) 24 AWG (0.51 mm dia.) Single-twisted pair shielded or multiple-twisted
pair with over-all shield.
5.3.11 Register configuration/address information - (HHPAO)
Word address 13 (D in Hex) is used to write to the Module Configuration Register and to read the
Module Status Register.
The status register information is copied to the A2 field of the module's RM record. The A2 field
can be viewed by using the Point Information window at an Operator Station to display the RM
record and then clicking the Value tab. (See Ovation Operator Station User Guide for more
information on the Point Information window.)
Prior to the Ovation 3.4 release, a module alarm would be generated when any of the module's
channels were unused. Starting with Ovation 3.4, unused channels will not cause an alarm to be
reported.
Configuration/status register (address 13 or D in Hex)
0 Configure module Module Configured

(1 = configured; 0 = unconfigured)
176 OW350_R1150
2-4 1 1
BIT BIT 3 BIT TIMEOUT BIT BIT BIT 2 TIMEOUT

4 2 4 3
1 1 1 62.5 milliseconds 1 1 1 62.5 milliseconds
5 Timeout Action NA
6 Factory Test Not Used
7 Reserved Reserved
8 - 11 NA Channel 1 - 4, over-under
12 - Not Used Not Used
15
1
Bit 0: Configures the module (write) or indicates the configuration state of the module (read).
“1” indicates that the module is configured. Until module is configured, addresses 0 through
11 produces an attention status.
Bit 1: This bit (write “1”) forces the module into its error state causing the Internal Error LED
to light.
Bits 2-4: These bits are used to select the Controller communications timeout period.
Bit 5: If this bit is set and the Controller times out, the module continues to output the last
value received. If the bit is cleared and the Controller times out, the module outputs data to
the DAC for each channel, that yields 4mA on the outputs after the time-out period defined by
bits 2-4.
Bit 6: This bit is only used in the manufacturing test. When the bit is set and PE is active, the
module enters a factory test mode.
Bits 7: Reserved.
Bit 8: 1=Channel 1 output current is overrange or underrange.
Bits 12-15: Not Used.
OW350_R1150 177
Output Communication Timeout Settings
TIMEOUT BIT 2 TIMEOUT BIT 1 TIMEOUT BIT 0 TIMEOUT PERIOD
0 0 0 16 seconds
0 0 1 4 seconds
0 1 0 2 seconds
0 1 1 1 second
Time-outs have a tolerance of +/- 35%. The default after a power-up is 16 seconds.
The following table is for reference only, Individual bits are not user accessible.
Over/Under current limit register (address 12 or C in Hex)

0-3 NA Channel 1 - 4 Under Current

4-7 NA Channel 1 - 4 Over Current
8 - 15 Not Used Not Used
Enable Register (Address 14 or E in Hex)

0-3 Multi-variable Enabled - Channel 1 - 4 NA

4-7 Not Used Not Used
8 - 11 HART Enabled - Channel 1 - 4 NA
178 OW350_R1150

12 - Not Used Not Used

15
Bits 0-3: These bits are set to enable multivariable messaging. Refer to the IO configuration
guide for additional information.
The HAI, HAO, HART High Performance AI, HART High Performance AO modules have the
ability to retrieve additional variables from a field device. These variables are referred to as
„multivariables‟ and are named PV (primary variable), SV (secondary variable), TV (tertiary
The definitions of PV, SV, TV, and QV are found in the user‟s manual for the field device
supplied by the device manufacturer. The standard format of these four variables is IEEE 754,
a floating-point format.
You must configure IO point records to cause the Controller to scan the module and retrieve
the variables. (See Ovation Init and AdMin for Solaris systems or the Ovation Developer
Studio User Guide for Windows-based systems).
Bits 8-11: In the IO configuration tool, you can set these flags on a per-channel basis to
allow HART messaging, including Multivariable messaging, to flow on that channel.
You should ensure that these bits are cleared for non-HART field devices. To avoid a HART
communication error message, set each bit at “0” when connecting a non-HART output
device.
5.3.12 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (HHPAO)
LED DESCRIPTION

module.
E No LED.
 EPROM, EE memory or RAM diagnostic failure.
1 - 4 (Green) After module configuration, the bank of four channel LEDs (LEDs 1 through 4) is used
to indicate HART communication activity and the health of the analog outputs. If the
analog output for the associated analog output channel is healthy (no overcurrent or
undercurrent condition), then the channel LED will be ON. If the analog output channel
is bad (an overcurrent or undercurrent is present), then the channel LED will be off.
When a HART message is sent and received correctly, the channel LED blinks off for
100 msec if the analog output is healthy. When a HART message is sent and received
incorrectly, the channel LED blinks off for 400 msec if the analog output is healthy.
5 - 16 No LED.
OW350_R1150 179
5.3.13 Specifications - (HHPAO)
DESCRIPTION
VALUE
Sample duration time (msec) 33 mSec (Maximum)
Output range 4 to 20 mA nominal signal voltage (Span) 0 to 23.5 mA (full signal
range)
D/A resolution 16 bits
Bit weight 0.000305 mA
Data format 16-bit binary output
Conversion type Sigma Delta DAC
Operating mode Self scan
Monotonicity Yes
Non-linearity DNL: <1 LSB full scale, INL: <0.1 LSB full scale
Power up/Power down Power up and power down to 4mA
Type of loads HART compatible devices
Maximum inductive load Per the HART physical layer specification
Settling time Per the HART physical layer specification
Overshoot Per the HART physical layer specification
Crosstalk Per the HART physical layer specification
Output ripple Per the HART physical layer specification
Sample repetition (msec) 33 msec Maximum
Filtering 2-pole low pass filter at 10 Hz
Reference Accuracy 0.10% of full scale (20mA) @25º C
Temperature Range
Temperature Coefficient 25ppm of full scale / º C
Current Loop Power For each channel, power for loop current is supplied by the module
Diagnostics Loop Current Overrange/Underrange detection. Eight Error bits are
stored in data register 0xC in Hex (Address 12)
Channel to Channel/logic 1000 VAC/VDC for 1 minute/1000 VAC/VDC for 1 minute
Output Loading 4-20 mA (0 ohm minimum to 600 ohm Maximum)
Operating Temperature Range 0º to 60º C (32º to 140º F)
Storage Temperature Range -40º to 85º C (-40º to 185º F)
Module Power Main: 24 VDC, 4.56W nominal, 6.75W Max, Aux: 24 VDC, Not Used.
180 OW350_R1150
S E C T I O N 6
6 Digital Input modules
IN THIS SECTION
Digital Input module - (DI) ............................................................................................... 182

Redundant Digital Input module (Windows Ovation 3.2 and above) - (RDI) .................. 192
Compact Digital Input module - (CompactDI) ................................................................. 207
Contact Digital Input module - (ContactDI) ..................................................................... 229
Compact Contact Digital Input module - (CCDI) ............................................................. 240
Sequence of Events Digital Input module - (SEDI) ......................................................... 252
Sequence of Events Contact Digital Input Field Interface module - (SEContactDI) ....... 264
Sequence of Events Compact Digital Input Field Interface module - (SECompactDI) ... 272
Enhanced Compact Sequence of Events Digital Input module - (ECSOEDI) ................ 304
32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Input module (Windows Ovation 3.4 and above)
......................................................................................................................................... 375
OW350_R1150 181
6.1 Digital Input module - (DI)
The Digital Input module contains 16 channels where each channel has voltage level sensing
circuitry used to detect whether an input is on or off. The module is available with 16 galvanically
isolated differential inputs, or 16 single-ended (common return) digital inputs with on-card blown
fuse detection for the auxiliary power supply. The selection of the Personality module determines
if the inputs are differential or single-ended. The input voltage level monitored by the module is
determined by the particular card group in the module.
The field side circuitry for the single ended configuration (see page 184), and for the differential
configuration (see page 185) are described in their respective sections. An input resistor provides
the normal mode surge protection and limits the current during normal operation. An opto-isolator
provides high dielectric isolation between the field side and the logic or I/O bus side.
The Single-Ended Digital Input configuration has a circuit used to monitor the presence of the
auxiliary supply. Two cases cause this monitor circuitry to report a blown fuse status and issue an
attention status to the Ovation Controller:
 Fuse is blown on the Personality module.
 Auxiliary supply level is lower than minimum On Input Voltage.
6.1.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (DI)

 1C31107G01 provides for 24/48 VAC/VDC single-ended or differential inputs.
 1C31107G02 provides for 125 VAC/VDC single-ended or differential inputs.
6.1.2 Personality modules (Pmod) - (DI)

 1C31110G01 provides for single-ended inputs.
 1C31110G02 provides for differential inputs.
6.1.3 Subsystems - (DI)
1
Digital Input subsystems
24/48 VAC/VDC Single-ended 16 1C31107G01 1C31110G01

125 VAC/VDC Single-ended 16 1C31107G02 1C31110G01

1
182 OW350_R1150
When the 125VAC/VDC Digital Input Emod (1C31107G02) is used in applications with the un-
fused Differential Pmod (1C31110G02), external fusing or other current limiting devices are
recommended on the hazardous inputs to provide protection to the external wiring and power
source.
CAUTION! For CE Mark certified systems, any base unit that contains a 125VAC/DC Digital
Input Electronics module (1C31107G02) with a Differential Digital Input Personality module
(1C31110G02) and interfaces to hazardous voltage (>30 V RMS, 42.4 V peak, or 60 VDC)
must include a hazardous voltage warning label (1B30025H01) on that base unit.
Any base unit that contains a 125VAC/DC Digital Input Electronics module (1C31107G02) with
a Single-ended Digital Input Personality module (1C31110G01) and interfaces to hazardous
voltage (>30 V RMS, 42.4 V peak, or 60 VDC) must include a hazardous voltage warning label
(1B30025H01) on ALL base units on the branch.
Place this label in a visible location on the base unit, preferably above the spare fuse location.
The project drawings must indicate this.
OW350_R1150 183
6.1.4 External power supply information single-ended (front end) - (DI)
If the Digital Input subsystem uses the 1C31110G01 Personality module (configured for 16 single-
ended inputs), the required voltage source may be obtained from the internal auxiliary power
supply (backplane) or it may be obtained from an external power supply.
If an external power supply is used, refer to Using an External Power Supply (see page 799) this
section contains steps to follow before connecting the external power supply to the Digital Input
module base unit terminal block.
(TO OTHER BASE UNITS)

A1
FIELD B1
CONTACT
C1
CHANNEL 1
current
limiter
OPTO-
CHANNEL 1 ISOLATOR
A2
FIELD B2
CONTACT
C2
CHANNEL 2
current
limiter
OPTO-
CHANNEL 2 ISOLATOR
CHANNELS 3 - 16
current
limiter
OPTO-
BLOWN FUSE MONITOR ISOLATOR
FUSE
WETTING VOLTAGE +
WETTING VOLTAGE -
AUXILIARY
AUXILIARY
Figure 55: Single-Ended Digital Input front end
184 OW350_R1150
6.1.5 External power supply information differential (front end) - (DI)
If the Digital Input subsystem uses the 1C31110G01 Personality module (configured for 16 single-
ended inputs), the required voltage source may be obtained from the internal auxiliary power
supply (backplane) or it may be obtained from an external power supply.
steps to be undertaken before connecting the external power supply to the Digital Input module
base unit terminal block.
DC
A1
FIELD B1
CONTACT
C1
CHANNEL 1 current
limiter
OPTO-
CHANNEL 1 ISOLATOR
DC
A2
FIELD B2
CONTACT
C2
CHANNEL 2 current
limiter
OPTO-
CHANNEL 2 ISOLATOR
CHANNELS 3 - 16
Figure 56: Differential Digital Input front end
OW350_R1150 185
6.1.6 Terminal block wiring information - (DI)
information.
The diagrams for the digital input Personality modules are illustrated in the following figure. The
Figure 57: Terminal block connections for Digital Voltage Input Pmods
1+ through 16+ Digital input positive terminal connection

1- through 16- Digital input negative terminal connection
PS+, PS- Auxiliary Power Supply terminals
RSV Reserved terminal. No connection allowed on these terminals
186 OW350_R1150
Do not use terminal block locations marked RSV.
6.1.7 Field wiring configuration considerations - (DI)
The following minimum leakage resistances of the cable and the interface devices apply:
 24/48VDC - 175 K ohms
 24 VAC - 50 K ohms
 125 VDC - 250 K ohms
 125 VAC - 50 K ohms
6.1.8 Field connection wiring diagrams - (DI)
Figure 58: Field connections for the Digital Input Personality module (non-CE Mark)
OW350_R1150 187
6.1.9 Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark) - (DI)

Single-Ended Digital Voltage Inputs
1-
In1
Rtn1
Channel
Rtn16
In11
1+
Field 16
Contacts
16-
In16
Rtn16
Channel
16+ 16
Rtn16
In16
See Note 1
0.5A
Power
Power
Auxiliary PS+ Monitor
Monitor
Voltage Surge
Supply Protection
Rtn
Rtn
PS-
Personality Module Electronics
1C31110G01 Module
Differential Digital Voltage Inputs

1+
In1
Rtn1
Channel
Rtn1
1
In1
1-
Field 16
Devices
16+
In16
Rtn16
Channel
16
Rtn16
In16
16-
Auxiliary
Voltage
Supplies Personality Module Electronics
1C31110G02 Module
Note
All field wiring must be braid-shielded and grounded at the entry point of the cabinet using
the recommended hardware (refer to the applicable "Cable Guidelines" information for your system).
Figure 59: Field connection for the Digital Input Personality module (CE Mark)
188 OW350_R1150
6.1.10 Register configuration/address information - (DI)
Guide.)


(1 = configure; 0 = unconfigure, causing an (1 = configured; 0 = unconfigured)
attention status)
1 Force Error Forced error
(1 = force an attention status to be read by (1 = forced error set by Controller;
Controller; 0 = no forced error)
0 = no forced error)
2-5 Not defined Not defined
6 1 Blown fuse enable
Blown fuse enable
(1 = enable blown fuse detection; (1 = blown fuse detection is enabled;
0 = disable blown fuse detection) 0 = blown fuse detection is disabled)
7 Not defined Blown fuse

(1 = fuse blown or auxiliary voltage not
present;
0 = fuse OK and auxiliary voltage present)
8 Not defined Reserved
9 Reserved Reserved
11 - Not defined Not defined
15
1
Blown Fuse Enable should always be set to “0” on the differential modules (1C31232G02 and
1C31232G03).
Bit definitions for this register are encoded as shown in the table above and described below:
Bit 0: After the Compact Digital Input module power is cycled, this bit is “0.” A “1” must be
written to this bit. If the module is not configured in this manner, an attention status is sent to
the Controller upon an attempt to read the point data.
Bit 1: This bit is “0” after the Compact Digital Input module power is cycled. If the Controller
sets this bit, an attention status is issued.
Bits 2-5 Not Defined
Bit 6: The Blown Fuse Enable bit is “0” after the Digital Input module power is cycled. This bit
must be set by the Controller for Compact Digital Input modules, using the single-ended
personality module, to detect a blown auxiliary power supply fuse when it reads the Status
Register. Blown Fuse Enable should always be set to “0”on the differential modules
(1C31232G02 and 1C31232G03). The bit may be read back through the Module Status
Register.
Bit 7: This bit is set in the Status Register only if the Blown Fuse Enable bit (6) is set and the
single-ended on-board auxiliary supply fuse has blown or the auxiliary voltage is not present.
This bit is not defined in the Configuration Register.
OW350_R1150 189
Bit 8: These bits are reserved in the Status Register. These bits are not defined in the
Configuration Register.
Bit 9: This bit is reserved.
Bit 10: Reserved
Bits 11-15: These bits are not defined in the Configuration register and are read as high in
the Status register.
6.1.11 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (DI)
LED
DESCRIPTION

module.
E No LED.
I (Red) External Fault LED. Lit when the Blown Fuse bit (Bit 7) of the Status Register is set. This
indicates the field supply fuse is blown or the auxiliary power supply is not present. This
LED should never light if the Digital Input module is installed since the Blown Fuse Enable
bit (Bit 6) of the Status Register should be set to the inactive state by the Controller.
1 - 16 Point Status LED. Lit when the input voltage of the LED‟s corresponding channel is greater
(Green) than the channel‟s minimum On Input Voltage.
6.1.12 Specifications - (DI)

DESCRIPTION VALUE
Input range (single-ended or differential) Refer to the following table.
Debounce Filter Propagation delay
Field card output to Point Data Register: 3.75 msec. Min.
4.0 msec. typ.
4.25 msec. Max.
Digital Debounce Circuit Delay Time: 4.0 msec. typ.
Cable length (quality is 50pF/ft or better) 1000 feet Maximum @ 50pF/ft or better
3
Blown fuse detection.
Channel to channel No Isolation
Channel to logic 1000V AC/DC
Module power (drawn from logic supply) Main: 1.1 W typical, 1.5 W Maximum
190 OW350_R1150
DESCRIPTION VALUE

1
Blown fuse detection applies to single-ended channel configuration only, where an on-board fuse is
provided for the auxiliary power supply.
Digital Input ranges
INPUT ON INPUT OFF INPUT ON INPUT OFF INPUT POWER IN

LEVEL VOLTAGE VOLTAGE (VDC CURRENT CURRENT FRONT END
(VDC OR VAC OR VAC RMS) ( M A) (MA (WATTS)
RMS)
MIN MAX MAX MIN MAX MAX TYPICAL
24 VDC 18 60 9 0.6 2.6 0.33 0.75

24 VAC 22 30 7 2.8 5.5 0.6 0.80
48 VDC 18 60 9 0.6 2.6 0.33 1.50
125 VDC 75 132 55 0.65 2.0 0.37 2.80
125 VAC 85 132 40 8.2 13.5 1.9 3.30
OW350_R1150 191
6.2 Redundant Digital Input module (Windows Ovation 3.2 and above) - (RDI)
6.2 Redundant Digital Input module (Window s Ovation 3.2 and

above) - (RDI)
The Ovation Redundant Digital Input module provides sixteen digital channels to monitor the
states (“0” or “1”) of sixteen field digital inputs. The module contains two voltage sensing circuits
for each of the 16 I/O channels located on the module. These channels are compared for
agreement on each of the respective channels located on the module. This comparison provides
a channel mismatch indication to the Controller via a comparison register when one of the
channels on the module is faulty. Additionally, this mismatch presents a module attention status to
the Controller. If all 16 channels are in agreement, the module comparison register indicates the
module is functional. Therefore, each module within the redundant pair is checked for functionality
and the Controller determines which module is giving a correct indication for control usage.
Redundant power for all sixteen digital input channels is either supplied by the Ovation auxiliary
power supply or by an external 24V auxiliary power source. In either situation, the redundant pair
module shares a common 24VDC auxiliary power source. The module provides an isolation diode
on the contact power feed in order to prevent a single point of failure from the surge components
located on the module. Additionally, the personality modules in the redundant pair accept
individual power feeds from their respective branches; thereby eliminating a single point of failure
due to auxiliary power branch fusing.
The Redundant Ovation Digital Input module operates in redundant mode when a cable assembly
is placed between the personality module of two Redundant Digital Input modules. With the
redundant cable installed, the field signal wiring needs to be connected to one base unit terminal
block. Alternatively, without the redundancy cable installed, the Redundant Digital Input module
will function as a standalone input module. The customer field wiring must connect to each
respective base in that situation.
Note: If an external power is used, individual wires must be routed from the supply to each I/O
base forming the redundant pair.
The Redundant Digital Input Module assembly consists of two modules inserted into an Ovation
base unit. The electronics module contains a logic printed circuit card (LSW) and a field printed
circuit card (FDR). The electronics module is used in conjunction with a personality module. The
logic card uses its electronics module logic side connector located at one end of the logic card, to
interface to the Ovation base unit backplane. Through the backplane, the LSW logic card
accesses the Ovation I/O bus, the module base address setting, and the redundant +24VDC I/O
module main power supplies. The LSW logic card connects to the FDR field card via an inter-card
connector that is located at the opposite end of the logic card. The FDR field card interfaces the
base unit backplane via the FDR card‟s electronics module field side connector. The base unit
backplane allows the FDR field card to interface the personality module's PDR personality printed
circuit card and the base unit backplane's termination block.
Features
 1000V dielectric withstand isolation between field ground and logic ground.
 16 single-ended digital inputs.
 24VDC input level support.
 Optical isolation provided for the field inputs to logic.
 Standard Ovation I/O bus interface circuitry.
 On-board wetting voltage fusing and a blown fuse detection monitor for the external wetting
voltage power supply for single-ended digital inputs field circuitry.
 Individual channel fusing to eliminate a single point of failure at each input sensing circuit.
192 OW350_R1150
 Isolation diode at contact power feed to eliminate a single point of failure within the
personality module circuitry.
 Electronic ID, identifying module type, group, serial number, and revision.
 Hot-swapping capability.
 Modules operate in pairs (redundant mode). Pairs of modules used in redundant mode must
be located in two independent branches at the same height offset.
 Field termination at one set of I/O terminal blocks per redundant pair.
 LEDs indicate the status of each input contact state.
 Electronic ID information stored in logic card EEPROM.
 The I/O base unit provides the electronics module with redundant +24 VDC power supply
feeds.
6.2.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (RDI)

 5X00411G01 Provides 16 redundant 24VDC IEC 61131-2 Compliant, Type 1 differential
current sinking inputs with individual channel fusing (non-user serviceable).
6.2.2 Personality modules (Pmod) - (RDI)

 5X00414G01 Front end connections, auxiliary power surge protection, and module fuse
protection for the 24V common power.
6.2.3 Subsystems - (RDI)
Redundant Digital Input subsystems

MODULE MODULE
24 V (Single Ended) Digital Input current 16 5X00411G01 5X00414G01

sinking, IEC 61131-2 Compliant Type 1 digital
Inputs.
6.2.4 Terminal block wiring information - (RDI)

Earth ground terminal

RSV Reserved terminal.
OW350_R1150 193
Figure 60: 5X00411 Terminal_Block
<notes> No external connections are to be made to any base unit terminal labeled RSV.
For DI module redundancy, field wiring is only connected to the base unit terminals of one DI
module in the redundant pair.
Unlike the DI module field signal terminations, DI module auxiliary voltage connections must be
made to both redundant DI modules’ base unit terminal blocks either through the normal
auxiliary branch traces or via external power supply connections through terminals A17 and
A18.
For the Standard I/O Marshalling Base Unit, field terminations are located on the half shells and
connected to the base. See Marshaling Base Unit (see page 35) for more information.
6.2.5 Field connection wiring diagrams - (RDI)
Figure 61: Redundant Current-Sinking Single-Ended Digital Inputs
194 OW350_R1150
The “+” inputs are actually the module field card‟s fused Auxiliary power supply positive rail.
Channel 4 through 15 input terminals not shown for clarity purposes.
The auxiliary power supply voltage may be derived either from the base unit backplane‟s printed
circuit card auxiliary voltage traces or from an optional external auxiliary power supply.
1. To use the base unit backplane‟s printed circuit backplane Auxiliary voltage, do not connect
an external power supply to the base unit termination block PS+ and PS- terminals since the
base unit backplane‟s Auxiliary voltage automatically appears at these terminals.
The two plug-in branch Aux. fuses must be installed into their sockets located on the
Controller backplane or on the transition panel to which the module‟s base unit branch
interfaces.
2. To use an external 24 VDC auxiliary power supply, connect the power supply “+” and “-”
terminals to the base unit PS+ and PS- terminals as shown. This connection will force all
modules on this branch to use the external auxiliary power supply voltage.
The two plug-in branch Aux. fuses must be removed from their sockets located on the
interfaces.
Note: No other external power supplies may be connected to other base unit termination block
PS+ or PS- terminals located in the same branch. A common external power supply must
include discrete wiring from the power supply to each t/o base for the Redundant Digital Input
pair.
6.2.6 Cable assembly routing - (RDI)
Figure 62: Redundant Interface Cable
OW350_R1150 195
The FDR also includes a cross cable in place circuit to detect the presence of the redundancy
cable when utilized in a redundant configuration. This circuit accepts the cross cable power signal
from the redundant module and sinks this to ground through the front end of an opto-coupler
circuit. The circuit is a duplicate schematic of the blown fuse detection circuit described above
with differing connection signals “Cross Cable Power In” and “Cross Cable In Place”. If the
module is configured for redundancy and the cross cable is not in place, this will generate an
attention status to the Controller from the module which does not have field wiring attached.
6.2.7 Module block diagrams - (RDI)
The Redundant Digital Input Electronics Module consists of a LSW logic card and a FDR field
Card. The LSW logic card interfaces to the I/O bus through the Ovation base unit backplane from
which it accesses the Ovation serial I/O data bus (serial data and clock signals), base address,
and redundant +24 VDC power supplies. The LSW logic card connects to the field card through a
pair of inter-card connectors.
Figure 63: 5X00411 Block Diagram
196 OW350_R1150
6.2.8 Functional block diagram - (RDI)
The FDR contains 16 channels where each channel has duplicate voltage level sensing circuitry
used to detect whether an input is on “1” or off “0”. Individual redundant module channels include
surface mount fusing for fault isolation in the event of an individual channel failure. The LSW
contains the communications circuitry needed to send the input status information back to the
Controller and allow channel comparison for sensing a mismatch situation and issue a module
attention status to the Controller.
The Redundant Digital Personality Module provides front-end signal connections along with
module fuse protection for overall module powering. Additionally, this board provides auxiliary
power surge protection. The PDR configures the FDR to handle 16 single-ended digital inputs. It
also provides a 37 position D-shell connector for redundancy purposes. The D-shell connector is
used to terminate a cable assembly in redundant module configurations linking two Redundant
Digital Input modules personality cards together. Both modules access a common group of
sixteen input channels via the cable assembly with one set of field terminations landed at one
base assembly.
OW350_R1150 197
198 OW350_R1150
6.2.9 Signal propagation delay - (RDI)
FDR card signal propagation delay.
This is the typical time elapsed from the time that a field contact opens or closes until the time that
associated channel‟s output signal (INn/ where n = 1 to 16) changes states. Assumes a 1 foot
(0.305 m) long test cable.
INPUT DELAY TIME FOR DELAY TIME FOR
voltage level contact opening contact closing

24 VDC 0.03 msec. typ. 0.1 msec. typ.
There is an additional propagation delay due to field cable capacitance charging when the field
contact opens. This delay is per 1,000 feet of field cable and assumes a 30 pF/foot cable
capacitance.
Note: There is no additional propagation delay to consider when the field contact closes.
INPUT ADDITIONAL DELAY TIME FOR
voltage level contact opening

24 VDC 0.06 msec. typ.
The minimum allowed sum of the combined field cable resistance plus the field contact leakage
resistance assumes that the Auxiliary power supply voltage is its Maximum allowable value (30
VDC for 24 VDC inputs).
INPUT MINIMUM FIELD CABLE RESISTANCE PLUS THE FIELD CONTACT LEAKAGE
RESISTANCE VOLTAGE LEVEL
24 VDC 100 Kohm
Figure 64: Redundant DI Field Cable Resistance
If a channel‟s field cable resistance plus the contact leakage resistance is less than the value
specified above, the channel may report that its field contact state is closed even though the field
contact is actually open.
OW350_R1150 199
6.2.10 Voltage-current curve - (RDI)
Figure 65: (FDR) Current-sinking Digital Input Voltage/Current Curve
200 OW350_R1150
6.2.11 Switching Input Voltage Current Curve - (RDI)
Figure 66: Switching Input Voltage Current Curve (Redundant Mode)
OW350_R1150 201
6.2.12 Logic Card Digital Debounce Filter Propagation Delay - (RDI)
LSW Card Propagation Delay – Field card output to Point Data Register:
3.75 msec. Min.

4.0 msec. typ.
4.25 msec. Max.
LSW Card Digital Debounce Circuit Delay Time:
4.0 msec. typ.
Any module digital input state change time that is less than the LSW card Digital Debounce time
will be rejected by the module and will not appear in the Point Data Register.
Module Channel Mismatch Digital Debounce
Channel mismatch digital debounce between redundant I/O channels on the module (Channel A
and Channel B) to comparison register C.
Total Module Response Time
The following chart lists the typical time that a digital input state change takes to propagate
through the field card and the logic card to the module‟s Point Data Register. A 1 foot (0.305 M)
long field cable is assumed.
MODULE ASSEMBLY GROUP “1” – CLOSED TO “0” – OPEN TO

"0" – OPENED “1” – CLOSED TRANSITION
TRANSITION
Group 1 – 24 VDC Digital Inputs 4.1 msec. typ. 4.03 msec. typ.
6.2.13 Register configuration/address information - (RDI)
The Module Configuration Register is module I/O register 13 (0xD) and is a write register. The
register bit assignments are defined in the Table below.
BIT FUNCTION
0 1 = Configure.
0 = Unconfigure, causing an attention status.
1 1 = Force an attention status to be read by the controller.
0 = No Forced Error.
2-5 Not defined.
6 Allow asserted field card BLOWN FUSE signal to illuminate the module E LED and to force
a module attention status.
1 = Enable Blown Fuse detection.
0 = Disable field detection circuitry.
7 - 12 Not defined.
13 1= Field Cabling Attached to this module.
14 Not defined.
202 OW350_R1150
BIT FUNCTION
15 1 = Set as a Redundant Module.

0 = Set as a Non-Redundant Module.
The Redundant Digital Input module will not store point data until configured. The point data
registers are valid and available as soon as the module is configured.
Electronics modules should have the Module Configuration register bits 6 & 15 set as appropriate
and desired during module configuration:
The Module Status Register is module I/O register 13 (0xD) and is a read register. The register bit
assignments are defined in the Table below
BIT FUNCTION
0 1 = configured.
0 = not configured.
1 1 = Forced error set by controller.
0 = No forced error.
2-5 Not defined. 1 = permanent value.
6 1 = Blown fuse detection is enabled.
0 = Blown fuse detection is disabled.
7 1
1 = Fuse blown .
0 = Fuse OK .
8 0 = permanent value.
9 2
Cross Cable Absent = 1, Set to 0 when Non-redundant Module
10 0 = permanent value.
11 - 12 Not defined. 1 = permanent value.
13 4
1 = Field Cable Attached to this module selected. .
14 3
Channel Comparison Fault .
15 5
1= Redundant Module Selected 0 = Non-Redundant Module Selected .
1
when configured for blown fuse detection and true this will cause an attention status to the Controller.
2
When the module is not configured for redundancy this bit is set to a permanent value of 0. When the
module is configured for redundancy and the cross cable is not in place, this will cause an attention status to
the Controller.
3
These bits indicate that one of the on-board redundant channels A & B do not match one another. Each bit
corresponds to one of 16 board channels respectively. When configured for the redundant mode a channel
comparison fault will produce an attention status. When configured for non-redundant mode a channel
comparison fault will NOT produce an attention status.
4 This bit indicates a read back of the configuration setting at offset 13 reg D. It indicates that the field
cabling will be attached to this module. When this bit is set , removal of the cross connect cable will not
produce attention status and the module will allow controller access of the channel registers. If this bit is not
set, indicating field cabling is not connected, then any module read will produce attention status when the
cross connect cable is removed.
5
If the bit is set and one of the on board redundant channels A & B do not match one another, then any
module read will produce attention status.
Bits 9 and 13 are irrelevant when the module is configured for non-redundant applications.
OW350_R1150 203
The Comparison Register is module I/O register C and is a read register. The register bit
assignments are defined in the Table below.
Note: This is the resultant comparison when examining channel register A & B respectively on
this module.
BIT FUNCTION
0 - 15 1 = Channel 1 - 15 of Group A and Group B are different.

0 = Channel 1 - 15 of Group A and Group B are the same.
The watchdog timer illuminates the internal fault LED if the I/O Controller fails to access the
Redundant Digital Input Module within the timeout period listed below.
MINIMUM TIMEOUT PERIOD NOMINAL TIMEOUT PERIOD MAXIMUM TIMEOUT PERIOD
1.1 sec. 1.6 sec. 2.1 sec.
The Point Data for Channel Group A Register is module I/O register 0 and is a read register. The
register bit assignments for a current-sinking digital input field card are defined in the table below.
Note: This is the first of the pair of channels located on this module.
BIT FUNCTION
0 - 15 Channel 1 - 15 of Group A field contact is closed
The Point Data for Channel Group B Register is module I/O register 1 and is a read register. The
register bit assignments for a current-sinking digital input field card are defined in the table below.
Note: This is the second of the pair of channels located on this module.
BIT FUNCTION
0 - 15 Channel 1 - 15 of Group B field contact is closed
6.2.14 Blown Fuse Detection - (RDI)
The FDR has a 17th channel used to monitor the presence of the wetting supply for single ended
digital inputs as shown in Module block diagrams for the Redundant Digital Input module (see
page 196). It is identical to a typical digital input channel except that the normal mode surge
suppression components are located on the personality module PDR and no output voltage
comparator is employed and capacitor C3 is added to the circuit output. C3 acts as a noise filter
because the auxiliary voltage monitor circuit output does not provide an input to a four millisecond
digital filter as do the outputs of the sixteen digital input channels. Two cases cause this monitor
circuitry to report a blown fuse status and issue an attention status to the Controller:
 Fuse is blown on PDR.
 Wetting supply level is lower than minimum On Input Voltage for the FDR.
204 OW350_R1150
6.2.15 Cross Cable in Place Circuit - (RDI)
The FDR also includes a cross cable in place circuit to detect the presence of the redundancy
cable when utilized in a redundant configuration. This circuit accepts the cross cable power signal
from the redundant module and sinks this to ground through the front end of an opto-coupler
circuit. The circuit is a duplicate schematic of the blown fuse detection circuit described above
with differing connection signals “Cross Cable Power In” and “Cross Cable In Place”. If the
module is configured for redundancy and the cross cable is not in place, this will generate an
attention status to the Controller from the module which does not have field wiring attached.
6.2.16 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (RDI)
LED DESCRIPTION

module.
E (Red) External Fault LED is Lit when:
 The Blown Fuse bit (Bit-7) of the Module Status Register is set. This indicates that the
external wetting supply fuse on the FDR has blown or the wetting supply is not present
or below its acceptable threshold.
 The Cross cable is not in place when configured for redundant configurations (Status
Register Bit 9).
I (Red) The Internal Fault LED (LE17) is lit under the following conditions:
 The Force Error bit (Bit-1) of the Configuration Register is set.
 The Ovation Controller is not communicating with the Ovation Redundant Digital Input
electronics module.
 One of the 16 channels in comparison register do not match one another. This is
derived from the comparison register (CH).
1 - 16 (Green) Each of the sixteen channel LEDS (LE16- LE1) is guaranteed to light when the input
voltage of the LED's corresponding channel is greater than the channel's minimum On
Input Voltage. Reference in Specifications -(RDI) (see page 205) for voltage levels.
6.2.17 Specifications -(RDI)

 Electronics module (5X00411G01)
 Personality module (5X00414G01)
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Voltage Category: 24 VDC.

Reverse Polarity Protection Yes, each channel incorporates a front-end diode bridge.
Operating Voltage: 15 to 30 VDC.
Input Voltage
For “1” Signal 15 to 30 VDC.
For “0” Signal -3 to 5 VDC.
Input Current: For “1” Signal 4 mA typ. per Channel – (Includes Channel A & B per Channel).
5.2 mA Max per Channel – (Includes Channel A & B per Channel).
OW350_R1150 205
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Input Current Fuse Monitor: 2 mA typ

Aux present 2.6mA Max.
Input Current Cross Cable: 2 mA typ.
Cable Present 2.6mA Max.
Input Characteristic: IEC 61131-2, Type 1.
Number of Input Channels: 16
Channels per Common: 16
Galvanic isolation:
Between channels and I/O Bus Yes.
Between channels No, Single-ended PMOD.
Current drawn:
From I/O Bus Base Unit 45 mA typ. for all inputs off – Channels A & B.
24 V Main Power 75 mA typ. for all inputs on.
Power dissipation of module:
(sum of 24 V Main Power and 24 V 1.08 W typ. for all inputs off.
field channel power) 3.43 W typ. for all inputs on.
Status Display Green LED per channel. LEDs located in non-galvanically isolated
logic card circuit.
Diagnostic Function Blown fuse detection monitor circuit for auxiliary contact power status
located on FDR board.
Environmental Specifications
TYPE DESCRIPTION
Ambient Air The operating ambient air temperature range is from 0° C to 60° C. The temperature is
Temperature measured approximately 0.5 inches from any point on the module while it is mounted
in its normal vertical or horizontal position, and while subject to the air movements
which result from natural convection only (that is, no forced air movement).
Humidity (non- The humidity range is from 0% to 95% relative humidity, non-condensing, through an
condensing) ambient air temperature range of 0°C through 60°C, but with a Maximum wet bulb
temperature not over 35°C (95°F).
Vibration The module shall remain operational while subject to testing defined in IEC 68-2-6
over the following curve: 0.15mm displacement from 10 to 57 Hz and 2G's from 57 to
500 Hz, when attached to a properly mounted DIN rail.
Shock The module will remain operational and reliable after being subjected to testing
defined in IEC 68-2-27 over the following curve: 15 G's for 11 milliseconds and 1/2
sine wave.
Power Supply Minimum Nominal Maximum
Voltage
Main Primary Voltage: 21.0 V 24.0 V 25.0 V
Main Secondary Voltage: 21.0 V 24.0 V 25.0 V
The two main supply voltages are the redundant power feeds to the electronics
module and are diode auctioneered on the electronics module's logic card.
206 OW350_R1150
6.3 Compact Digital Input module - (CompactDI)
The Compact Digital Input module contains 16 channels where each channel has voltage level
sensing circuitry used to detect whether an input is on or off. The input voltage level sensed by
the module is determined by the particular card group of the module.
The module is available for three options:

 16 galvanically isolated differential inputs (unfused) (24/48 VAC/VDC or 125 VAC/VDC).
 16 single-ended (common return) digital inputs with a common fuse and on-card blown fuse
detection for the auxiliary power supply (24/48 VDC).
 16 individually fused digital inputs using a common power supply. Blown fuse detection is not
available with this option (24/48 VDC or 24 VAC or 125 VAC/VDC).
Refer to the following cross references for information concerning:
 Field side circuitry for the single-ended configuration (see page 210).
 Circuitry information for the differential configuration.
 Field side circuitry for the 16 individually fused configuration.
An input resistor provides the normal mode surge protection and limits the current during normal
operation. An opto-isolator provides high dielectric isolation between the field side and the logic or
I/O bus side.
The Single-Ended Digital Input configuration has a circuit used to monitor the presence of the
auxiliary supply (blown fuse detection). Two events cause this monitor circuitry to report a blown
fuse status and issue an attention status to the Ovation Controller:
 Fuse is blown on the Electronics module.
In addition, a cavity insert that includes a wiring diagram is available for placement in the
Personality module cavity in the Base Unit in all configurations except the 16 point individually
fused option which requires a personality module (5X00034). The Compact Digital Input module is
a CE Mark certified module.
6.3.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (CompactDI)

 1C31232G01 provides for 24/48 VDC single-ended inputs.
 1C31232G02 provides for 24/48 VDC or 24 VAC differential inputs and supports the 16 point
individually fused option.
 1C31232G03 provides for 125 VAC/VDC differential inputs and supports the 16 point
individually fused option.
6.3.2 Personality modules (Pmod) - (CompactDI)

 5X00034G01 provides for 16 point individual fusing with a common supply.
This is an optional Personality module that is available for use with the differential input
Electronics modules (1C31232G02, 1C31232G03) for applications requiring individual point
fusing with a common supply.
OW350_R1150 207
Note: This Personality module is not available for use with the Single-Ended Compact Digital
Input electronics module 1C31232G01. In the event that individual fusing is not required, a
cavity insert (1C31238H01) is available that fits into the Personality module cavity in the Base
Unit and provides wiring information.
6.3.3 Subsystems - (CompactDI)
Compact Digital Input subsystems
1 CHANNELS ELECTRONIC PERSONALITY MODU LE OR CAV ITY

RANGE
S MODULE 2
INSERT
24/48 VDC Single-ended 16 1C31232G01 1C31238H01 (molded plastic cavity insert)

24 VAC/VDC Differential 16 1C31232G02 5X00034G01(Fused Pmod)
48 VDC Differential 1C31238H01 (molded plastic cavity insert)
125 VAC/VDC 16 1C31232G03 5X00034G01 (Fused Pmod)
Differential
1C31238H01(molded plastic cavity insert)
1
2
This is an insert that fits into the Personality module position and provides a wiring schematic label for
the module.
When the 125VAC/VDC Compact Digital Input Emod (1C31232G03) is used in applications
without the Fused Pmod (5X00034G01), additional external fusing or other current limiting
devices are recommended on the hazardous inputs to provide additional protection to the external
wiring and power source.
6.3.4 External Power Supply Information - (CompactDI)
The required voltage source may be obtained from the internal auxiliary power supply (backplane)
or it may be obtained from an external power supply when using the following modules:
 1C31232G01 single-ended Electronics module (configured for 16 single-ended inputs).
 1C31232G02 or 1C31232G03 16 point individually fused configuration Electronics modules
with 5X00034 Personality module.
If an external power supply is used, refer to Using an External Power Supply (see page 799)
which contains steps to be undertaken before connecting the external power supply to the
Compact Digital Input module base unit terminal block.
208 OW350_R1150
6.3.5 Terminal block wiring information - (CompactDI)
The available cavity insert or Personality module has a simplified wiring diagram label on top,
which appears above the terminal block. This diagram indicates how to connect the wiring from
the field to the terminal block in the base unit.
information.
The following table lists and defines the abbreviations used in the diagram.
Figure 67: Terminal Block Connections for the Compact Digital Input Module

RSV Reserved terminal. Do not use, except where indicated.
OW350_R1150 209
6.3.6 Field wiring considerations - (CompactDI)
 24/48VDC - 175 K ohms
 125 VDC - 225 K ohms
 125 VAC - 50 K ohms
CAUTION! For CE Mark certified systems: Any base unit that contains a 125VAC/DC
Compact Digital Input Electronics module (1C31232G03) with cavity insert (1C31238H01) and
interfaces to hazardous voltage (>30 V RMS, 42.4 V peak, or 60 VDC) must include a
hazardous voltage warning label (1B30025H01) on that base unit.
Any base unit that contains a 125VAC/DC Compact Digital Input Electronics module
(1C31232G03) with the individually fused Personality module (5X00034G01) and interfaces to
hazardous voltage (>30 V RMS, 42.4 V peak, or 60 VDC) must include a hazardous voltage
warning label (1B30025H01) on ALL base units on the branch.
210 OW350_R1150
6.3.7 Field connection wiring diagrams - (CompactDI)
 24/48VDC - 175 K ohms
 125 VDC - 225 K ohms
 125 VAC - 50 K ohms
CAUTION! For CE Mark certified systems: Any base unit that contains a 125VAC/DC
Compact Digital Input Electronics module (1C31232G03) with cavity insert (1C31238H01) and
interfaces to hazardous voltage (>30 V RMS, 42.4 V peak, or 60 VDC) must include a
hazardous voltage warning label (1B30025H01) on that base unit.
Any base unit that contains a 125VAC/DC Compact Digital Input Electronics module
(1C31232G03) with the individually fused Personality module (5X00034G01) and interfaces to
hazardous voltage (>30 V RMS, 42.4 V peak, or 60 VDC) must include a hazardous voltage
warning label (1B30025H01) on ALL base units on the branch.
OW350_R1150 211
212 OW350_R1150
OW350_R1150 213
214 OW350_R1150
OW350_R1150 215
216 OW350_R1150
OW350_R1150 217
218 OW350_R1150
6.3.8 Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark) - (CompactDI)
OW350_R1150 219
220 OW350_R1150
OW350_R1150 221
222 OW350_R1150
OW350_R1150 223
224 OW350_R1150
OW350_R1150 225
6.3.9 Register configuration/address information - (CompactDI)
Guide.)


(1 = configure; 0 = unconfigure, causing an (1 = configured; 0 = unconfigured)
attention status)
(1 = force an attention status to be read by (1 = forced error set by Controller;
Controller; 0 = no forced error) 0 = no forced error)
6 1 Blown fuse enable
Blown fuse enable
(1 = enable blown fuse detection; (1 = blown fuse detection is enabled;
0 = disable blown fuse detection) 0 = blown fuse detection is disabled)
7 Not defined Blown fuse

(1 = fuse blown or auxiliary voltage not
present;
0 = fuse OK and auxiliary voltage present)
9 Reserved Reserved
11 - Not defined Not defined
15
1
Blown Fuse Enable should always be set to “0” on the differential modules (1C31232G02 and
1C31232G03).
Bit definitions for this register are encoded as shown in the table above and described below:
Bit 0: After the Compact Digital Input module power is cycled, this bit is “0.” A “1” must be
written to this bit. If the module is not configured in this manner, an attention status is sent to
the Controller upon an attempt to read the point data.
Bit 1: This bit is “0” after the Compact Digital Input module power is cycled. If the Controller
sets this bit, an attention status is issued.
Bits 2-5 Not Defined
Bit 6: The Blown Fuse Enable bit is “0” after the Digital Input module power is cycled. This bit
must be set by the Controller for Compact Digital Input modules, using the single-ended
personality module, to detect a blown auxiliary power supply fuse when it reads the Status
Register. Blown Fuse Enable should always be set to “0”on the differential modules
(1C31232G02 and 1C31232G03). The bit may be read back through the Module Status
Register.
Bit 7: This bit is set in the Status Register only if the Blown Fuse Enable bit (6) is set and the
single-ended on-board auxiliary supply fuse has blown or the auxiliary voltage is not present.
This bit is not defined in the Configuration Register.
226 OW350_R1150
Bit 8: These bits are reserved in the Status Register. These bits are not defined in the
Configuration Register.
Bit 9: This bit is reserved.
Bit 10: Reserved
the Status register.
6.3.10 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (CompactDI)
LED DESCRIPTION

module.
E (Red) External Fault LED is Lit when:
 The Blown Fuse bit (Bit-7) of the Module Status Register (see Register
configuration/address information - (Compact DI) (see page 226)) is set. This
indicates that the auxiliary supply fuse has blown or the auxiliary supply is not present
or below its acceptable threshold.
I (Red) Internal Fault LED. Lit whenever the Force Error bit (Bit 1) of the (see Register
configuration/address information - (Compact DI) (see page 226)) is active or when a
timeout of the watchdog timer occurs when the Controller stops communicating with the
module.
1 - 16 (Green) Point Status LEDs 1-16. Lit when the input voltage of the LED‟s corresponding channel
is greater than the channel‟s minimum On Input Voltage.
6.3.11 Specifications - (CompactDI)

 Electronics module (1C31232G01, 1C31232G02, 1C31232G03)
 Personality module (5X00034G01)
DESCRIPTION VALUE
1 Refer to the table below.
Input range (single-ended or differential)
Propagation delay time for contact closing
24V/48VDC 3.5 mSec maximum
24VAC 3.5 mSec maximum
125VDC 4.0 mSec maximum
2
Propagation delay time for contact opening
24V/48VDC 16.0 mSec maximum
125VDC 20.0 mSec maximum
OW350_R1150 227
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Additional delay time for contact opening due

to
cable capacitance (1,000 foot cable assumed) 1.0 mSec maximum
25 pF/ft cable – 24V/48VDC 1.0 mSec maximum
25 pF/ft cable – 24VAC 1.0 mSec maximum
25 pF/ft cable – 125VDC 2.0 mSec maximum
50 pF/ft cable – 24V/48VDC 2.0 mSec maximum
50 pF/ft cable – 125VDC 4.0 mSec maximum
50 pF/ft cable – 125VAC
Cable length 1,000 ft maximum (50 pF/ft quality or better)
Cable capacitance 50,000 pF maximum
Diagnostics 3
Internal module operating faults, Ground Fault Detection
4 1000 VAC
Channel to Channel
Channel to logic 2,000 VAC (differential inputs); 1,000 VAC (single-ended
inputs)
Module Main +24V Power drawn 1.1 W typical, 1.5 W maximum
1
Input range level is dependent on module group.
2
Does not include the effects of field cable capacitance.
3
Blown fuse detection applies to single-ended channel configuration only (Group 1), where an on-board
fuse is provided for the auxiliary power supply.
4
Channel to channel isolation applies to differential channel configuration only.
Compact Digital Input Ranges
GROUP INPUT ON INPUT OFF INPUT ON INPUT OFF INPUT

LEVEL VOLTAGE (VDC VOLTAGE CURRENT INPUT POWER
OR VAC RMS) (VDC OR VAC ( M A) CURRENT (WATTS)
RMS) ( M A)
Min Max Max Miin Max Max Typical

1 24 VDC 20 60 9 1.3 2.6 0.33 0.65
1 48 VDC 20 60 9 1.3 2.6 0.33 1.70
2 24 VDC 20 60 9 1.3 2.6 0.33 0.69
2 24 VAC 22 30 7 2.8 5.5 0.60 0.80
2 48 VDC 18 60 9 1.3 2.6 0.33 1.75
3 125 VDC 80 140 55 1.3 2.8 0.33 4.26
3 125 VAC 85 132 40 2.8 14.0 3.00 5.10
228 OW350_R1150
6.4 Contact Digital Input module - (ContactDI)
The Contact Input module, comprised of an Electronics module and Personality module, provides
16 contact input current detecting channels with common returns. The field side circuitry and
terminal connections (see page 233) for three of these channels are shown (see page 231).
A +48V on-board power supply provides current limited contact wetting voltage if the contact is
open. If the contact closes, current is drawn from the +10V supply which turns on the associated
opto-isolator; thereby, relaying a closed contact state to the I/O bus. The opto-isolators and the
isolation provided by the 10V and 48 Volt power supply provide high dielectric isolation between
the field side and the logic or I/O bus side.
On-Board power supply checking
If the +10V on-board power supply were to fail, all points associated with module input channels
would have a zero (false) value. One of the sixteen module input channels may be employed to
verify the availability of the +10V on-board power supply output voltage. The selected module
input channel has a wire jumper hard wired between the channel's positive (+) input terminal and
the channel's negative (-) or common input terminal. This hard wired input channel should always
be a one (true) if the +10V on-board power supply output voltage is present.
To implement this on-board power supply checking feature when building points for the module's
input channels, select power check enable in the Config tab. Also specify the module channel
used for the power check feature (1-16). When the module input channels are scanned, the hard
wired module input channel is also scanned to verify that it has a value of one. If not, the module
input channels will be tagged with "bad quality".
If desired, a point may be built for the hard wired module input channel and be set to alarm on a
value of zero.
There are two methods of wiring field devices to the Contact Input module termination block (see
page 233). Each field contact may have a separate input and return line as shown for channel 1.
Alternatively, field contacts wired to the same Contact Input module may share a return line as
shown for channels 2 and 3. For either wiring method, do not tie the contact return line to earth
ground or a ground fault condition occurs as well as a degradation of the common mode surge
protection.
Debouncing of a contact input signal is done by an RC filter and digital debouncer on the logic
side. If a contact changes state for less than 3 msec, the change of state is always is rejected. If
the Contact changes state for more than 7 msec, the change of state always accepted.
Ground fault detection circuitry on a Contact Input module activates when an input or return line
for any channel finds a low impedance (<5 K ohms) path to earth ground. A single ground fault
wire does not cause an error in the point data, but multiple ground faults (if they include input and
return lines) could cause faulty data (that is, channels appearing as if contacts are closed when
they are really open).
When a ground fault occurs, the external error LED lights, and the GND Fault bit in the Status
Register (see page 237) is set. If the GND Fault (see page 233) Attention Enable bit is set in the
Configuration Register (see page 237), a ground fault is seen as a catastrophic error causing an
attention status to be sent back to the Controller. The Contact Input module is a CE Mark certified
module.
OW350_R1150 229
6.4.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (ContactDI)

 1C31142G01 provides 48 VDC on-card auxiliary power for 16 contact inputs with common
return.
6.4.2 Personality modules (Pmod) - (ContactDI)

 1C31110G03 contains surge-protection components for 16 inputs.
6.4.3 Subsystems - (ContactDI)
1
Contact Digital Input subsystems

MODULE MODULE
48 VDC On-Card Auxiliary (Legacy) 16 1C31142G01 1C31110G03

1
6.4.4 Terminal block wiring information - (ContactDI)
block in the base unit. The diagram for the contact input Personality module (also known as digital
input) is illustrated in the following figure.
information.
Figure 68: Terminal Block Connections for the Contact Input Personality Modules
230 OW350_R1150
1+ through 16+ Contact input positive terminal connection

1- through 16- Contact input negative terminal connection
Note: Do not use terminal block locations marked RSV.
6.4.5 Field wiring restrictions - (ContactDI)
The following definitions apply to the restrictions listed below:

 Rshunt = contact shunt resistance
 Rcontact = resistance associated with a closed contact
 Rreturn = resistance of the common return line
 Rline = resistance of the non-common cable length to and from the contact
 Rwiring = Rcontact + Rline + 16Rreturn
 Rfault = resistance from either line to ground which causes a ground fault
Cable resistances (see page 234) that affect contact input performance. The following restrictions
apply:
 Under no-ground-fault conditions or if the channel return (low) line has a ground fault:
 Rshunt across contact must be 10k ohms to always recognize an open contact as
open.
 Rshunt across contact must be 50k ohms to maintain the high level contact-wetting
voltage.
 If the input connection from a channel has a ground fault with the contact open:
 Rshunt across contact must be 150k ohms to guarantee ground fault is detected.
 For a ground fault on the input or return connection to a channel:
 Rfault from either line to ground must be 5K ohms to guarantee detection of the ground
fault.
 With or without ground fault conditions:
 Rwiring through field wiring to contact must be < 100 ohms to always recognize a closed
contact as closed.
OW350_R1150 231
6.4.6 Field wiring cable lengths - (ContactDI)
The following two tables list the Maximum cable lengths for field wiring to the contacts. For both,
assume Rcontact is 0 ohms.
The following table applies when there are individual common return lines brought to the card
edge. This implies that Rreturn is 0 ohms.
Maximum cable length for 16 individual common returns
WIRE OHMS PER THOUSAND FEET - MAXIMUM CABLE LENGTH - (THOUSANDS

GAUGE (SOLID COPPER WIRE) OF FEET)
18 6.64 7.5
20 10.2 4.9
22 16.2 3.0
The following table applies when all 16 channels share a common return line. In both tables, the
Maximum Cable Length is the length of the cables from the termination block to the contacts in
the field.
Maximum cable length for a single common return for all 16 inputs
WIRE OHMS PER THOUSAND FEET - MAXIMUM CABLE LENGTH - (THOUSANDS

GAUGE (SOLID COPPER WIRE) OF FEET)
12 1.66 3.54
14 2.27 2.59
16 4.18 1.40
18 6.64 0.89
232 OW350_R1150
6.4.7 Field connection wiring diagrams (front end) - (ContactDI)
Figure 69: Contact Input module front end
OW350_R1150 233
6.4.8 Cable impedances in field wiring - (ContactDI)
Figure 70: Cable impedances in field wiring
234 OW350_R1150
6.4.9 Field connection wiring diagrams - (ContactDI)
Figure 71: Field connection for the Contact Input Personality module
OW350_R1150 235
6.4.10 Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark) - (ContactDI)
Figure 72: Field connection for the Contact Input Personality module (CE Mark)
Note: All field wiring MUST be braid-shielded and grounded at the entry point of the cabinet
using the recommended hardware.
236 OW350_R1150
6.4.11 Register configuration/address information - (ContactDI) & (CCDI)
Guide.)
Contact (and Compact Contact) Input configuration/status register (address 13 or D in Hex)


1 = configure 1 = configured
0 = unconfigure, causing an attention status 0 = unconfigured
1 = force an attention status to be read by 1 = forced error set by Controller
Controller 0 = no forced error
0 = no forced error
6-7 Reserved Reserved
8 Not defined Wetting Voltage Failure
1 = +48V wetting Voltage Failed
0 = +48V wetting Voltage OK.
9 Ground Fault Attention Enable Ground Fault Attention Enable
1 = configure GND fault to cause an attention 1 = GND fault causes attention status
status 0 = GND fault does not cause an attention
0 = configure GND fault to not cause an status
attention status
10 Not defined Ground Fault
1 = field wiring has a ground fault
0 = field wiring does not have a ground fault
Bit 0: After the Contact Input module power is cycled, this bit is “0.” A “1” must be written to
the Configure module bit. If the module is not configured in this manner, an attention status is
sent to the Controller upon an attempt to read the point data. The bit may be read back
through the Status Register.
Bit 1: The Force Error bit is “0” after the Contact Input module power is cycled. If the
Controller sets the Force Error bit, an attention status is issued. The bit may be read back
Bits 2-5: These bits are not defined.
Bit 6 & 7: These bits are reserved in the Status Register.
Bit 8: This bit is set in the Status Register if the +48V supply on the FCI board fails.
OW350_R1150 237
Bit 9: The GND Fault Attention Enable bit is “0” after the Contact Input module power is
cycled. This bit must be set by the Controller if a ground fault is to be treated as a
catastrophic failure. If Bit 9 is set, a ground fault causes an attention status to be returned to
the Controller upon accessing the module, and no point data can be read. If the bit is not set,
a ground fault does not inhibit the Controller from reading point data. In the latter case, if more
than one ground fault occurs on the field wiring to a Contact Input module, false point data
may possibly be read on channels with open contacts.
Bit 10: This bit is set in the Status Register if a ground fault occurs in the field wiring. This bit
is not defined in Configuration Register.
the Status register. These bits cannot be accessed by the Controller during a write to the
module.
6.4.12 Power Checking (ContactDI - CCDI)
The module has an internal 48 transistor voltage supply and is capable of looking at 16 different
contact inputs. Each input that is connected to a dry contact requires a digital point name or
packed group point name with bit position. A closed contact will produce a one (true) value for the
associated point whereas an open contact produces a zero (false) value. If the power supply were
to fail, all points would have a zero (false) value.
Power on checking uses one of the sixteen inputs to verify that the 48 volt supply has not failed.
The selected point is hard wired to simulate a closed contact, and should therefore always be a
one (true) statement.
To implement the feature, when building the points for the field inputs, within the point config tab,
the power on checking is enabled, and the channel is used (hardwired) is declared. When the
field inputs are scanned, the hard wired channel is also scanned to verify that it has a value of
one. If not, the field inputs will be tagged with “bad quality”.
If desired, a point may be built for the hard wired channel and be set to alarm on zero.
Note: The terminal wiring for the Contact Digital Input and Compact Contact Digital Input
modules is different.
6.4.13 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (ContactDI)
LED DESCRIPTION

module.
E (Red) External Fault LED. Lit when GND Fault bit (Bit 10) of the Status Register (see page 237) is
set. This indicates that a ground fault has occurred in the field wiring. An attention status is
generated when the External Fault LED is lit only if the GND Fault Attention Enable bit (Bit
9) is set.
set or when the on-board +48V/+10/V wetting power supply fails.
Also lit when a timeout of the watchdog timer occurs when Controller stops communicating
with module.
An attention status is always generated when the LED is lit.
1 (Green) Point Status LEDs 1-16. Lit when the input contact of the LED‟s corresponding channel is
closed.
238 OW350_R1150
6.4.14 Specifications - (ContactDI)

DESCRIPTION VALUE
On board auxiliary power supply 42 V minimum
55 V Maximum
Propagation delay 7 mSec Maximum
Contact bounce rejection
Always rejects contact change of state < 3 mSec
Always accepts contact change of state > 7 mSec
Closed contact output current 4 mA minimum

8 mA Maximum
Diagnostics Internal module operating faults. Ground Fault Detection
Module power 4.56 W typical
4.75 W Maximum
OW350_R1150 239
6.5 Compact Contact Digital Input module - (CCDI)
The Compact Contact Input module, comprised of an Electronics module, provides 16

contact input current detecting channels with common returns.
Additionally, a cavity insert that includes a wiring diagram is available for placement in the
Personality module cavity in the base unit.
value of zero.
There are two methods of wiring field devices to the Compact Contact Input module termination
block. Each field contact may have a separate input and return line. Alternatively, field contacts
wired to the same Contact Input module may share a return line. For either wiring method, do not
tie the contact return line to earth ground or a ground fault condition occurs as well as a
degradation of the common mode surge protection.
Debouncing of a contact input signal is done by an RC filter and digital debouncer on the logic
side. If a contact changes state for less than three msec, the change of state always is rejected. If
the Contact changes state for more than seven msec, the change of state always is accepted.
Ground fault detection circuitry on the Compact Contact Input module activates when the input or
return line for any channel finds a low impedance (<5K ohms) path to earth ground. A single wire
with a ground fault does not cause an error in the point data, but multiple ground faults, if they
include input and return lines, could cause faulty data (that is, channels appearing as if their
contacts are closed when they are really open).
When a ground fault occurs, the external error LED lights, and the GND Fault bit in the Status
Register is set. If the GND Fault Attention Enable bit is set in the Configuration Register, a ground
fault is seen as a catastrophic error causing an attention status to be sent back to the Controller.
The Compact Contact Input module is applicable for CE Mark certified systems.
240 OW350_R1150
6.5.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (CCDI)

 1C31234G01 provides 48 VDC on-card auxiliary power for 16 contact inputs with common
return.
6.5.2 Personality Module (Pmod) - (CCDI)
A cavity insert is available that fits into the Personality module cavity in the Base Unit and
provides wiring information.
 1C31238H01 Personality Module Cavity Plastic insert
6.5.3 Subsystems - (CCDI)
1
Compact Contact Digital Input subsystems
RANGE CHANNELS ELECTRONIC MOLDE D PLAS TIC

S MODULE 2
CAV ITY INS ERT
Compact Contact with 48 VDC On-Card 16 1C31234G01 1C31238H01

Auxiliary
1
2
This is an insert that fits into the Personality module position and provides a wiring schematic label for
the module.
6.5.4 Terminal block wiring information - (CCDI)
The available cavity insert has a simplified wiring diagram label on its top, which appears above
block in the base unit. The diagram for the Compact Contact Input module is illustrated in the
following figure. The following table lists and defines the abbreviations used in this diagram.
information.
Figure 73: Terminal block connections for the Compact Contact Input modules
OW350_R1150 241
1+ through 16+ Contact input positive terminal connection

1- through 16- Contact input negative terminal connection
RSV Reserved terminal. No internal connection
6.5.5 Field wiring restrictions - (CCDI)

Cable resistances (see page 244) that affect contact input performance. The following restrictions
apply:
 Rshunt across contact must be 10k ohms to always recognize an open contact as open.
 Rshunt across contact must be 50k ohms to maintain the high level contact-wetting
voltage.
 Rshunt across contact must be 150k ohms to guarantee ground fault is detected.
 Rfault from either line to ground must be 5K ohms to guarantee detection of the ground
fault.
contact as closed.
242 OW350_R1150
6.5.6 Field wiring cable lengths - (CCDI)
The following two tables list the Maximum cable lengths for field wiring to the contacts. For both
tables, assume Rcontact is 0 ohms.
The following table applies when there are individual common return lines brought to the card
edge. This implies that Rreturn is 0 ohms.
WIRE OHMS PER THOUSAND FEET - (SOLID MAXIMUM CABLE LENGTH - (THOUSANDS
GAUGE COPPER WIRE) OF FEET)
18 6.64 7.5
20 10.2 4.9
22 16.2 3.0
The following table applies when all 16 channels share a common return line. In both tables, the
the field.
WIRE OHMS PER THOUSAND FEET - (SOLID MAXIMUM CABLE LENGTH - (THOUSANDS
GAUGE COPPER WIRE) OF FEET)
12 1.66 3.54
14 2.27 2.59
16 4.18 1.40
18 6.64 0.89
OW350_R1150 243
6.5.7 Cable impedances in field wiring - (CCDI)
244 OW350_R1150
6.5.8 Field wiring diagrams - (CCDI)
OW350_R1150 245
246 OW350_R1150
6.5.9 Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark) - (CCDI)
OW350_R1150 247
248 OW350_R1150
6.5.10 Register configuration/address information - (ContactDI) & (CCDI)
Guide.)
Contact (and Compact Contact) Input configuration/status register (address 13 or D in Hex)


1 = configure 1 = configured
0 = unconfigure, causing an attention status 0 = unconfigured
1 = force an attention status to be read by 1 = forced error set by Controller
Controller 0 = no forced error
0 = no forced error
6-7 Reserved Reserved
8 Not defined Wetting Voltage Failure
1 = +48V wetting Voltage Failed
0 = +48V wetting Voltage OK.
9 Ground Fault Attention Enable Ground Fault Attention Enable
1 = configure GND fault to cause an attention 1 = GND fault causes attention status
status 0 = GND fault does not cause an attention
0 = configure GND fault to not cause an status
attention status
10 Not defined Ground Fault
1 = field wiring has a ground fault
0 = field wiring does not have a ground fault
Bit 0: After the Contact Input module power is cycled, this bit is “0.” A “1” must be written to
the Configure module bit. If the module is not configured in this manner, an attention status is
sent to the Controller upon an attempt to read the point data. The bit may be read back
Bit 1: The Force Error bit is “0” after the Contact Input module power is cycled. If the
Controller sets the Force Error bit, an attention status is issued. The bit may be read back
Bits 2-5: These bits are not defined.
Bit 6 & 7: These bits are reserved in the Status Register.
Bit 8: This bit is set in the Status Register if the +48V supply on the FCI board fails.
OW350_R1150 249
Bit 9: The GND Fault Attention Enable bit is “0” after the Contact Input module power is
cycled. This bit must be set by the Controller if a ground fault is to be treated as a
catastrophic failure. If Bit 9 is set, a ground fault causes an attention status to be returned to
the Controller upon accessing the module, and no point data can be read. If the bit is not set,
a ground fault does not inhibit the Controller from reading point data. In the latter case, if more
than one ground fault occurs on the field wiring to a Contact Input module, false point data
may possibly be read on channels with open contacts.
Bit 10: This bit is set in the Status Register if a ground fault occurs in the field wiring. This bit
is not defined in Configuration Register.
the Status register. These bits cannot be accessed by the Controller during a write to the
module.
6.5.11 Power Checking (ContactDI - CCDI)
The module has an internal 48 transistor voltage supply and is capable of looking at 16 different
contact inputs. Each input that is connected to a dry contact requires a digital point name or
packed group point name with bit position. A closed contact will produce a one (true) value for the
associated point whereas an open contact produces a zero (false) value. If the power supply were
to fail, all points would have a zero (false) value.
Power on checking uses one of the sixteen inputs to verify that the 48 volt supply has not failed.
The selected point is hard wired to simulate a closed contact, and should therefore always be a
one (true) statement.
To implement the feature, when building the points for the field inputs, within the point config tab,
the power on checking is enabled, and the channel is used (hardwired) is declared. When the
field inputs are scanned, the hard wired channel is also scanned to verify that it has a value of
one. If not, the field inputs will be tagged with “bad quality”.
If desired, a point may be built for the hard wired channel and be set to alarm on zero.
Note: The terminal wiring for the Contact Digital Input and Compact Contact Digital Input
modules is different.
6.5.12 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (CCDI)
LED DESCRIPTION

module.
E (Red) External Fault LED. Lit when GND Fault bit (Bit 10) of the Status Register is set. This
indicates that a ground fault has occurred in the field wiring. An attention status is
generated when the External Fault LED is lit only if the GND Fault Attention Enable bit (Bit
9) is set.
set or when the on-board +48V/+10/V wetting power supply fails. Also lit when a timeout
of the watchdog timer occurs when Controller stops communicating with module. An
attention status is always generated when the LED is lit.
1 - 16 (Green) Point Status LEDs 1-16. Lit when the input contact of the LED‟s corresponding channel is
closed.
250 OW350_R1150
6.5.13 Specifications - (CCDI)
DESCRIPTION VALUE
55 V Maximum
Propagation delay 7 mSec Maximum
Contact bounce rejection
Always rejects contact change of state < 3 mSec
Always accepts contact change of state > 7 mSec
Closed contact output current 4 mA minimum
8 mA Maximum
Diagnostics Internal module operating faults, Ground Fault Detection
Module power 4.56 W typical
4.75 W Maximum
OW350_R1150 251
6.6 Sequence of Events Digital Input module - (SEDI)
The Sequence of Events (SOE) module provides 16 digital channels to monitor the open or
closed state of digital inputs or contacts in the field. The module provides a filter to reject changes
of state less than four milliseconds. The Sequence of Events module can also perform event
tagging and chatter control for each input channel.
The Ovation Controller writes a channel event tagging mask to the Electronics module to enable
event tagging for specific input channels. It has a chatter control flag for each channel to indicate
that an input channel has changed state too many times in a period of time or is changing state at
too fast a rate. It also has a channel ID to indicate which channel changed state.
Each channel is checked every 125 microseconds. If the channel event tagging mask bit is zero,
that channel is not checked. Time synchronization is accomplished by the Ovation Controller
writing a time reference simultaneously to all Sequence of Events modules with a one millisecond
resolution.
and fuse information for I/O modules. All SOE modules in a Controller MUST be connected to
the IOIC card that is configured as the Time Keeper.
A control bit written by the Ovation Controller provides two options for handling input chatter:
 The first option sets the chatter control flag if the rate of change for an input is greater than 1
per 100 milliseconds.
 The second option sets the chatter control flag if four or more state changes occur on an input
between reads of the event buffer.
There are two 32 event buffers. This allows the event tagging and chatter control function to be
writing into one event buffer while the Ovation Controller is reading the other event buffer. The
Ovation Controller only reads each module a small portion of the loop time. This allows both event
buffers to be available the rest of the loop time.
Each event buffer contains 64 words with up to 32 Channel-IDs and 32 Event-Times. The event
buffers are memories. The memory control circuit controls which event buffer to write into and
which event buffer to read from. Before reading the event buffer, the buffer status register must be
read to determine the number of words to read.
The Sequence of Events module is a CE Mark certified module.
CAUTION! (For CE Mark certified systems) Any base unit that contains a 125VDC Sequence
of Events Electronics module (1C31157G02) with differential Digital Input Personality module
(1C31110G02) and interfaces to hazardous voltage (>60 VDC) must include a hazardous
voltage warning label (1B30025H01) on that base unit.
Any base unit that contains a 125VDC Sequence of Events Electronics module (1C31157G02)
with single-ended Digital Input Personality module (1C31110G01) and interfaces to hazardous
voltage (>60 VDC) must include a hazardous voltage warning label (1B30025H01) on ALL
base units on the branch.
252 OW350_R1150
6.6.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (SEDI)

 1C31157G01 provides for 24/48 VDC single-ended or differential inputs.
 1C31157G02 provides for 125 VDC single-ended or differential inputs.
6.6.2 Personality modules (Pmod) - (SEDI)

 1C31110G01 (single-ended inputs) and 1C31110G02 (differential input) are used for digital
input (see page 254).
6.6.3 Subsystems - (SEDI)
Sequence of Events Digital Input subsystems

MODULE MODULE
24/48 VDC Single-ended (Legacy) 16 1C31157G01 1C31110G01

125 VDC Single-ended (Legacy) 1C31157G02 1C31110G01
When the 125VDC Sequence of Events Digital Input Emod (1C31157G02) is used in applications
without the un-fused Differential Pmod (1C31110G02), external fusing or other current limiting
devices are recommended on the hazardous inputs to provide protection to the external wiring
and power source.
6.6.4 External power supply information - (SEDI)
If the Sequence of Events Digital Input module uses the 1C31110G01 Personality module
(configured for 16 single-ended inputs), the required voltage source may be obtained from the
internal auxiliary power supply (backplane) or it may be obtained from an external power supply.
steps to be undertaken before connecting the external power supply to the Sequence of Events
Digital Input module base unit terminal block.
6.6.5 Wiring information - (SEDI)
The Sequence of Events modules can be divided into two types depending on their front end
connections. The digital Input field Interface modules can be broken down further into Single-
Ended and Differential as well as low and high voltage.
The following wiring section topics are divided to show the wiring of the Sequence of Events
Digital Input Field Interface modules and then the Sequence of Events Contact Field Interface
modules.
OW350_R1150 253
6.6.6 Field interface - (SEDI)
The Digital Input configuration contains 16 channels, where each channel has voltage level
sensing circuitry used to detect whether an input is on or off. The Sequence of Events module has
16 galvanically isolated differential inputs to accommodate separate external auxiliary supplies, or
16 single-ended (common return) digital inputs with an on-card blown fuse detector to
accommodate a common external auxiliary supply for all channels. The selection of the
Personality module determines if the inputs are differential or single-ended. The input voltage
level monitored by the module is determined by the particular card group in the module.
The field side circuitry for the single-ended configuration and the differential configuration is
shown under Field Wiring Considerations for the Digital Input Configuration (see page 256). An
input resistor provides the normal mode surge protection and limits the current during normal
I/O bus side. The Single-Ended Digital Input configuration has a circuit used to monitor the
presence of the wetting supply. Two cases cause this monitor circuitry to report a blown fuse
status and issue an attention status to the Ovation Controller:
 Fuse is blown on the PDIA.
254 OW350_R1150
6.6.7 Terminal block wiring information - (SEDI)
block in the base unit. The diagrams for the Sequence of Events digital input Personality modules
are illustrated below.
information.
Figure 75: Terminal block connections for the Sequence of Events Digital Input Pmods
The following table lists the abbreviations used in the terminal block diagrams.

OW350_R1150 255
6.6.8 Field wiring configuration considerations - (SEDI)
24 VDC - 100 K ohms

48 VDC - 150 K ohms
125 VDC - 250 K ohms
256 OW350_R1150
6.6.9 Field wiring diagrams configuration - (SEDI)
Figure 76: Sequence of Events module single-ended Digital Input front end
OW350_R1150 257
Figure 77: Sequence of Events module differential Digital Input front end
258 OW350_R1150
6.6.10 Field connection wiring diagrams - (SEDI)
Figure 78: Field connections for the SOE Digital Input Pmod
OW350_R1150 259
6.6.11 Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark) - (SEDI)
Figure 79: Field connections for the SOE Digital Input Pmod (CE Mark)
260 OW350_R1150
6.6.12 Register configuration/address information - (SEDI)
Guide.)
Sequence of Events Digital Input configuration/Status Register (address 13 or D in Hex)

0 Configure module Module configured

(1 = configured; 0=not configured)
1 Force internal error Internal error
(1 = forced error; 0=no forced error)
2-5 Not used. Should be set to zero (0). Not used
6 Enable digital input blown fuse signal and Status of enable digital input blown fuse signal
module attention for blown fuse and module attention for blown fuse
7 Not used. Should be set to zero (0). Blown fuse for digital input
8 Contact input field card (enable contact Status of contact input field card (enable contact
input auxiliary voltage failure signal and input auxiliary voltage failure signal and module
module attention for auxiliary voltage failure attention for auxiliary voltage failure and ground
and ground fault detection) fault detection circuitry)
9 Not used. Should be set to zero (0). Auxiliary voltage failure for contact input
10 Enable module attention for a GND fault. Status of Enable module attention for a GND fault.
11 Not used. Should be set to zero (0). GND fault
12 Disable chatter control Disable chatter control
13 Chatter control option. Status of chatter control option.
14 Not used. Should be set to zero (0). Clock synchronized.
15 Not used. Should be set to zero (0). Not used.
Bit 0: Module does not operate until this bit is set with a write.
Bit 1: When this bit is set, the internal error LED is turned on, and only the status registers
can be read.
Bit 6: This bit should be set for a single-ended input and cleared for a differential input.
Bits 8 - 10: These bits should be cleared to zero (0).
Bit 12: When this bit is set and an input channel is not masked off, that input can chatter and
each event is recorded until the event buffer overflows. Default state is “0” and enables the
chatter control function.
Bit 13: When this bit is set, chatter is flagged when an input changes state four or more times
between event buffer reads. When cleared, chatter is flagged for state changes greater than 1
per 100 milliseconds.
Bits 14 - 15: Not used in the Configuration Register. Bit 14 is clock synchronized in the Status
Register.
OW350_R1150 261
Word address 14 (E in Hex) is used to enable or disable the channel event tagging mask.
Secondary/expansion configuration/status register (address 14 or E in Hex)
BIT DATA DESCRIPTION - CONFIGURATION DATA DESCRIPTION - STATUS (READ)

(WRITE)
0 - 15 Channel Event Tagging mask Channel Event Tagging mask
6.6.13 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (SEDI) - (SECompactDI)
LED
DESCRIPTION

module.
E (Red) For Single-ended Digital Input: Lit when fuse blows or there is a loss of the auxiliary
power supply (only when Bit 6 of Configuration register is set; then Bit 7 of the Status
register is set).
For Differential Digital Input: Not lit since the configuration bit is not set, and the blown
fuse signal from the field card is ignored.
I (Red) Internal Fault LED. Lit whenever the Force Error bit (Bit 1) of the Configuration Register
is set, or when a timeout of the watchdog timer occurs when the Controller stops
Also lit when Controller stops communicating with the module.
1 - 16 (Green) Lit when the input voltage of the LED‟s corresponding channel is greater than the
channel‟s minimum “On Input Voltage.”
6.6.14 Specifications - (SEDI)

 Electronics module (1C31157G01 and 1C31157G02)
 Personality module (1C31110G01 and 1C31110G02)
DESCRIPTION VALUE
1 Refer to the table below
Propagation delay of contact change of state

2
24V/48V DC 3.75 mSec minimum; 4.25 mSec Maximum
125VDC 3.75 mSec minimum; 4.45 mSec Maximum
Signal rejection
Always rejects change of state < 3.87 mSec
Always accepts change of state > 4.13 mSec
Cable length (quality is 50pF/ft or better) 1000 feet Maximum
Diagnostics 3
Internal module operating faults and Blown fuse detection.
262 OW350_R1150
DESCRIPTION VALUE
4 1000 V DC 500 V AC
Channel to channel
Module power from logic supply Main: 1.44 W typical, 1.8 W Maximum
Operating temperature range 0 to 60×C (32×F to 140×F)

Storage temperature range -40×C to 85×C (-40×F to 185×F)
1
2
Does not include cable capacitance.
3
Blown fuse detection applies to single-ended channel configuration only, where an on-board fuse is
4
Sequence of Events Digital Input ranges
INPUT ON INPUT VOLTAGE OFF INPUT ON INPUT OFF INPUT

LEVEL (VDC) VOLTAGE CURRENT (MA) INPUT POWER
(VDC) (WATTS) TYPICAL
Min Max Min Min Max Max

24 VDC 18 60 9 0.9 2.6 0.3 1.1
48 VDC 18 60 9 0.9 2.6 0.3 2.2
125 VDC 80 140 55 0.6 1.5 0.3 3.3
OW350_R1150 263
6.7 Sequence of Events Contact Digital Input Field Interface module - (SEContactDI)
6.7 Sequence of Events Contact Digital Input Field Interfac e module

- (SEContactDI)
The Contact Input configuration provides 16 contact input current detecting channels with
common returns. The field side circuitry and terminal connections for three of these channels are
shown in Field Wiring Diagrams for the Contact Input Configuration (see page 266).
isolation provided by the 10V and 48 V power supply provide high dielectric isolation between the
field side and the logic or I/O bus side.
There are two methods of wiring field devices to the termination block. Each field contact may
have a separate input and return line as shown for channel 1. Alternatively, field contacts wired to
the same module may share a return line as shown for channels 2 and 3. For either wiring
method, do not tie the contact return line to earth ground or a ground fault condition occurs as
well as a degradation of the common mode surge protection.
Ground fault detection circuitry on the Sequence of Events module with Contact Inputs activates
when the input or return line for any channel finds a low impedance (<10K ohms) path to earth
ground. A single wire with a ground fault does not cause an error in the point data, but multiple
ground faults (if they include input and return lines) could cause faulty data (that is, channels
appearing as if their contacts are closed when they are really open).
When a ground fault occurs, the external error LED lights, and the GND Fault bit 11 in the Status
Register is set. If the GND Fault Attention Enable bit 8 is set in the Configuration Register, a
ground fault is seen as a catastrophic error causing an attention status to be sent back to the
Controller. See Field Wiring Diagrams for the Contact Input Configuration (see page 266) for
ground fault detection circuitry.
6.7.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (SEContactDI)
1C31157G03 (Contact Input) provides for 48 VDC on-card auxiliary power.
6.7.2 Personality modules (Emod) - (SEContactDI)
1C31110G03 (Contact Input) provides for 48 VDC on-card auxiliary power.
6.7.3 Subsystems - (SEContactDI)
Sequence of Events Contact Digital Input Field interface subsystems

S MODULE MODULE
Contact Input w/ 48 VDC On-Card auxiliary 16 1C31157G03 1C31110G03

(Legacy)
264 OW350_R1150
6.7.4 Field wiring restrictions - (SEContactDI)

Field Wiring Diagrams for the Contact Input Configuration (see page 266) shows possible cable
resistances that affect contact input performance. The following restrictions apply:
 Rshunt across contact must be greater than or equal to 10k ohms to always recognize an
open contact as open.
 Rshunt across contact must be greater than or equal to 50k ohms to maintain the high
level contact-wetting voltage.
 Rshunt across contact must be greater than or equal to 150k ohms to guarantee ground
fault is detected.
 Rfault from either line to ground must be less than or equal to 5K ohms to guarantee
detection of the ground fault.
 Rwiring through field wiring to contact must be less than 100 ohms to always recognize a
closed contact as closed.
OW350_R1150 265
6.7.5 Field Wiring Diagrams - (SEContactDI)
48 VDC CONTACT WETTING POWER ISOLATED

POWER
10 VDC OPTO POWER SUPPLY
CURRENT
LIMITING
A1 OPTO-
FIELD B1 ISOLATOR
CONTACT
C1 RETURN
CHANNEL 1
CURRENT
LIMITING
A2 OPTO-
FIELD B2 ISOLATOR
CONTACT
C2
CHANNEL 2
CURRENT
LIMITING
A3 OPTO-
FIELD B3 ISOLATOR
CONTACT GROUND FAULT
C3 DETECTION CIRCUIT
CHANNEL 3
R
OPTO-
ISOLATOR
R
CHANNELS 4 - 16
Figure 80: Sequence of Events Module Contact Input Front End
266 OW350_R1150
1 of 16
inputs
Rfault
field
contact
Rshunt
Rcontact
Rline Rreturn common return

on FCI board
from other
Rfault Rfault
contacts
Figure 81: Cable Impedances in Field Wiring
6.7.6 Field wiring cable lengths - (SEContactDI)
The table below applies when there are individual common return lines brought to the card edge.
This implies that Rreturn is 0 ohms.
WIRE GAUGE OHMS PER THOUSAND FEET MAXIMUM CABLE LENGTH

(SOLID COPPER WIRE) (THOUSANDS OF FEET)
18 6.64 7.5
20 10.2 4.9
22 16.2 3.0
The table below applies when all 16 channels share a common return line. In both tables, the
the field.

12 1.66 3.54
14 2.27 2.59
16 4.18 1.40
18 6.64 0.89
OW350_R1150 267
6.7.7 Terminal block wiring information - (SEContactDI)
The diagram for the Sequence of Events contact input Personality module is illustrated in the
figure below.
information.
Figure 82: Terminal block connections for the Sequence of Events Contact Input
Personality modules
1+ through 16+ Contact input positive terminal connection.

1- through 16- Contact input negative terminal connection.
PS+, PS- Auxiliary Power Supply terminals.
RSV Reserved terminal. No connection allowed on these terminals.
Note: Do not use terminal block locations marked RSV.
268 OW350_R1150
6.7.8 Field connection wiring diagrams - (SEContactDI)
Electronics
1C31110G03 Module
Electronics
1C31110G03 Module
Figure 83: Field connections for the SOE Contact Input Pmod
OW350_R1150 269
6.7.9 Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark) - (SEContactDI)
1+
In1
1-
Field 16
Contacts
16+
In16
16- Channel
Rtn
See Note 1
Personality Module Electronics
1C31110G03 Module
1+
In1
Field 16
Contacts
16+
In16
x- Channel
Rtn
x- = one input from
the set {1-,...16-} Personality Module Electronics
1C31110G03 Module
Note
All field wiring must be braid-shielded and grounded at the entry point of the cabinet using
the recommended hardware (refer to "Cable Guidelines" in the applicable Ovation system
installation manual).
Figure 84: Field connection for the SOE Contact Input Pmod (CE Mark)
6.7.10 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (SEDI) - (SECompactDI)
LED
DESCRIPTION

module.
E (Red) For Single-ended Digital Input: Lit when fuse blows or there is a loss of the auxiliary
power supply (only when Bit 6 of Configuration register is set; then Bit 7 of the Status
register is set).
270 OW350_R1150
LED
DESCRIPTION
I (Red) Internal Fault LED. Lit whenever the Force Error bit (Bit 1) of the Configuration Register
is set, or when a timeout of the watchdog timer occurs when the Controller stops
6.7.11 Specifications - (SEContactDI)
DESCRIPTION VALUE
55 V Maximum
Signal rejection
Always rejects contact change of state. < 3.87 mSec
Always accepts contact change of state > 4.13 mSec
1 3.75 mSec minimum; 4.4 mSec Maximum
Closed contact output current 4 mA minimum, 8 mA Maximum
Diagnostics Internal module operating faults, Ground Fault Detection
Module power from logic supply 4.56 W typical (all inputs on), 5.0 W Maximum
1
OW350_R1150 271
6.8 Sequence of Events Compact Digital Input Field Interface module - (SECompactDI)
6.8 Sequence of Events Compact Digital Input Field Interface

module - (SECompactDI)
The Compact Sequence of Events (SOE) module provides 16 digital channels to monitor the
open or closed state of digital inputs or contacts in the field. The module provides a filter to reject
changes of state less than four milliseconds. The Compact Sequence of Events module can also
perform event tagging and chatter control for each input channel.
The Ovation Controller writes a channel event tagging mask to the Electronics module to enable
event tagging for specific input channels. It has a chatter control flag for each channel to indicate
that the input channel has changed state too many times in a period of time, or is changing state
at too fast a rate. It also has a channel ID to indicate which channel changed state. Each channel
is checked every 125 micro-seconds. If the channel event tagging mask bit is zero, that channel is
not checked.
If there is an input channel state change, the change is recorded in the SOE module‟s Event
Buffer and the input channel‟s Chatter counter is incremented. When the input channel‟s Chatter
counter value reaches four, any additional state changes are not recorded for that input channel.
The recording of additional state changes for that input channel is inhibited until the input channel
Chatter counter is reset to a zero value.
A control bit written by the Ovation Controller provides two options for resetting an input channel‟s
Chatter counter:
 Each input channel‟s Chatter counter is reset after the Ovation Controller reads the SOE
module‟s Event Buffer. With this option selected, the SOE module identifies up to four state
changes for each of its input channels between successive Ovation Controller Event Buffer
read operations.
 Each input channel‟s Chatter counter is checked every 100 milliseconds and is decremented
if its value is greater than zero. When the input channel‟s Chatter counter value reaches zero,
future input channel state changes may be entered into the Event Buffer. With this option
selected, an input state change rate greater than 1 per 100 milliseconds results in no new
Event Buffer entries for that input channel while a lower input state change rate allows new
Event Buffer entries for that input channel.
The Compact Sequence of Events module is a CE Mark certified module.
There are two 32 event buffers which allow the event tagging and chatter control function to be
writing into one event buffer while the Ovation Controller is reading the other event buffer. The
Ovation Controller only reads each module a small portion of the loop time. This allows both event
buffers to be available the rest of the loop time.
Each event buffer contains 64 words with up to 32 Channel-IDs and 32 Event-Times. The event
buffers are memories. The memory control circuit controls which event buffer to write into and
which event buffer to read from. Before reading the event buffer, the buffer status register must be
read to determine the number of words to read.
Time synchronization is accomplished by the Ovation Controller writing a time reference

simultaneously to all Sequence of Events modules with a 1 millisecond resolution. The Compact
Sequence of Event module is CE Mark applicable.
272 OW350_R1150
All SOE modules in a Controller MUST be connected to the IOIC card that is configured as the
Time Keeper.
CAUTION! Do NOT mix the Compact Sequence of Events module (1C31233) with the
Sequence of Events module (1C31157) in the same system.
CAUTION! CE Mark certified systems: Any base unit that contains a 125VDC Compact
Sequence of Events Electronics module (1C31233G03) with cavity insert (1C31238H01) and
interfaces to hazardous voltage (>60 VDC) must include a hazardous voltage warning label
(1B30025H01) on that base unit.
Any base unit containing a 125VDC Compact Sequence of Events Electronics module
(1C31233G03) with Fused Digital Input Personality module (5X00034G01) and interfaces to
hazardous voltage (>60 VDC) must include a hazardous voltage warning label (1B30025H01)
on ALL base units on the branch.
The Compact Sequence of Events module comes in five combinations of Electronics and
Personality modules:
 24/48 VDC single-ended digital input.
 24/48 VDC differential input.
 125 VDC single-ended digital input.
 125 VDC differential input.
 48 VDC contact input with on card auxiliary supply.
6.8.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (SECompactDI)

 1C31233G01 provides for 24/48 VDC single-ended inputs.
 1C31233G02 provides for 24/48 VDC differential inputs and supports the 16 point individually
fused option.
 1C31233G03 provides for 125 VDC differential inputs and supports the 16 point individually
fused option.
 1C31233G04 (Contact Input) provides for 48 VDC on-card auxiliary power.
6.8.2 Personality modules (Pmod) - (SECompactDI)
A cavity insert is available that fits into the Personality module cavity in the Base Unit and
provides wiring information.
 1C31238H01 Personality Module Cavity Plastic insert
 5X00034G01 provides for 16 point individual fusing with a common supply.
This is an optional Personality module that is available for use with the differential input
Electronics modules (1C31233G02, 1C31233G03) for applications requiring individual point
fusing with a common supply.
OW350_R1150 273
6.8.3 Subsystems - (SECompactDI)
1
Sequence of Events Compact Digital Input Field subsystems
RANGE CHANNELS ELECTRONIC PERSONALITY MODULE OR

S MODULE 1
CAV ITY INS ERT
Compact 24/48 VDC SOE Single-ended 16 1C31233G01 2

1C31238H01
digital input (molded plastic cavity insert)
Compact 24/48 VDC SOE Differential 16 1C31233G02 2
1C31238H01
Compact 24/48 VDC SOE Single Ended 16 1C31233G02 5X00034G01
Compact 125 VDC SOE Differential 16 1C31233G03 2
1C31238H01
Compact 125 VDC SOE Single Ended 16 1C31233G03 5X00034G01
Compact 48 VDC SOE On-card auxiliary 16 1C31233G04 2
1C31238H01
Contact Input w/48V wetting (molded plastic cavity insert)
1
All module configurations listed in this table are CE Mark Certified.
2
This is a cavity insert that fits into the Personality module position and provides a wiring schematic label
for the module.
When the 125VDC Compact Digital Input Emod (1C31233G03) is used in applications without the
Fused Pmod (5X00034G01), additional external fusing or other current limiting devices are
recommended on the hazardous inputs to provide additional protection to the external wiring and
power source.
6.8.4 External power supply information - (SECompactDI)
When using the 1C31233G01 single-ended module, or 1C31233G02/G03 with Personality

module 5X00034G01, the required voltage source may be obtained from the internal auxiliary
power supply (Controller backplane) or it may be obtained from an external power supply.
steps to be undertaken before connecting the external power supply to the Compact Sequence of
Events Digital Input module base unit terminal block.
6.8.5 Wiring information - (SECompactDI)
The Compact Sequence of Events modules can be divided into two types depending on their front
end connections. The digital Input field Interface modules can be broken down further into Single-
Ended and Differential as well as low and high voltage.
The following wiring section topics are divided to show the wiring of the Compact Sequence of
Events Digital Input Field Interface modules and then the Compact Sequence of Events Contact
Field Interface modules.
274 OW350_R1150
6.8.6 Field wiring diagrams configuration (Front end) (G04) - (SECompactDI)
The Contact Input configuration (1C31233G04) provides 16 contact input current detecting
channels with common returns.
value of zero.
There are two methods of wiring field devices to the termination block. Each field contact may
have a separate input and return line. Alternatively, field contacts wired to the same module may
share a return line. For either wiring method, do not tie the contact return line to earth ground or a
ground fault condition occurs, as well as a degradation of the common mode surge protection.
Ground fault detection circuitry on the Sequence of Events module with Contact Inputs activates
when the input or return line for any channel finds a low impedance (<5 K ohms) path to earth
ground. A single wire with a ground fault does not cause an error in the point data, but multiple
ground faults, if they include input and return lines, could cause faulty data (that is, channels
appearing as if their contacts are closed when they are really open).
When a ground fault occurs, the external error LED lights, and the GND Fault bit 11 in the Status
Register is set. If the GND Fault Attention Enable bit 8 is set in the Configuration Register, a
ground fault is seen as a catastrophic error causing an attention status to be sent back to the
Controller. See the following figure below for ground fault detection circuitry.
OW350_R1150 275
6.8.7 Field interface - (SECompactDI)
The Digital Input configuration contains 16 channels, where each channel has voltage level
sensing circuitry used to detect whether an input is on or off. Style 1C31233G02/G03 has 16
galvanically isolated differential inputs to accommodate separate external auxiliary supplies. Style
1C31233G01 has 16 single-ended (common return) digital inputs with an on-card blown fuse
detect to accommodate a common external auxiliary supply for all channels. The input voltage
level monitored by the module is determined by the particular card group in the module.
Also, Style 1C31233G02/G03 can be used with the individually fused Personality module
5X00034G01 for applications requiring individual point fusing with a common supply.
An input resistor provides the normal mode surge protection and limits the current during normal
I/O bus side. The Single-Ended Digital Input configuration has a circuit used to monitor the
presence of the wetting supply. Two cases cause this monitor circuitry to report a blown fuse
status and issue an attention status to the Ovation Controller:
 Fuse is blown on the module.
6.8.8 Field wiring field interface restrictions (G01-G03) - (SECompactDI)
24 VDC - 100 K ohms; 48 VDC - 150 K ohms; 125 VDC 250 K ohms
6.8.9 Field wiring cable lengths (G04) - (SECompactDI)
The table below applies when there are individual common return lines brought to the card edge.
This implies that Rreturn is 0 ohms.
WIRE GAUGE OHMS PER THOUSAND FEET MAXIMUM CABLE

(SOLID COPPER WIRE) LENGTH(THOUSANDS OF FEET)
18 6.64 7.5
20 10.2 4.9
22 16.2 3.0
276 OW350_R1150
The table below applies when all 16 channels share a common return line. In both tables, the
Maximum cable length is the length of the cables from the termination block to the contacts in the
field.

12 1.66 3.54
14 2.27 2.59
16 4.18 1.40
18 6.64 0.89
6.8.10 Field Wiring Restrictions (G04) - (SECompactDI)

The figure below shows possible cable resistances that affect contact input performance. The
following restrictions apply:
 Rshunt across contact must be greater than or equal to 10k ohms to always recognize
an open contact as open.
 Rshunt across contact must be greater than or equal to 50k ohms to maintain the high-
level contact-wetting voltage.
 Rshunt across contact must be greater than or equal to 150k ohms to guarantee ground
fault is detected.
 Rfault from either line to ground must be less than or equal to 5K ohms to guarantee
detection of the ground fault.
OW350_R1150 277

contact as closed.
1 of 16
inputs
Rfault
field
contact
Rshunt
Rcontact
Rline Rreturn common return

on FCI board
from other
Rfault Rfault
contacts
278 OW350_R1150
6.8.11 Terminal block wiring information - (SECompactDI)
The available cavity insert has a simplified wiring diagram label on top, which appears above the
terminal block. This diagram indicates how to connect the wiring from the field to the terminal
block in the base unit. The diagrams for the Compact Sequence of Events Digital Input module
are illustrated below.
information.
Figure 86: Terminal Block Connections for the Compact Sequence of Events Digital Input
Module (1C31233G01-G04)
1+ through 16+ Digital (Contact) input positive terminal connection.

1- through 16- Digital (Contact) input negative terminal connection.
PS+, PS- Auxiliary Power Supply terminals.
RSV Reserved terminal. No internal connection, except where
indicated.
OW350_R1150 279
6.8.12 Field connection wiring diagrams Field Interface module (G01-3) -

(SECompactDI)
280 OW350_R1150
OW350_R1150 281
282 OW350_R1150
OW350_R1150 283
284 OW350_R1150
OW350_R1150 285
286 OW350_R1150
6.8.13 Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark) (G01-3) - (SECompactDI)
OW350_R1150 287
288 OW350_R1150
OW350_R1150 289
290 OW350_R1150
OW350_R1150 291
292 OW350_R1150
OW350_R1150 293
6.8.14 Field connection wiring diagram (G04) - (SECompactDI)
294 OW350_R1150
OW350_R1150 295
6.8.15 Field connection wiring diagram (CE Mark) (G04) - (SECompactDI)
296 OW350_R1150
OW350_R1150 297
6.8.16 Register configuration/address information - (SECompactDI)
Register configuration/address information (1C31233G01 - G03)
Station (see the Bit Pattern Field on the Hardware Tab). Refer to the applicable Ovation Operator
Station User Guide for information about the Point Information window.
Compact Sequence of Events Digital Input Configuration/Status Register (Address 13 or D

in Hex)

0 Configure module. Module configured

(1 = configured; 0 = not configured)
1 Force internal error. Internal error
2-5 Not used. Should be set to zero (0). Not used.
6 Enable digital input blown fuse signal and Status of enable digital input blown fuse signal and
module attention for blown fuse. module attention for blown fuse.
7 Not used. Should be set to zero (0). Blown fuse for digital input.
8 Contact input field card (enable contact Status of contact input field card (enable contact input
input auxiliary voltage failure signal and auxiliary voltage failure signal and module attention
module attention for auxiliary voltage failure for auxiliary voltage failure and ground fault detection
and ground fault detection circuitry). circuitry).
9 Not used. Should be set to zero (0). Auxiliary voltage failure for contact input
12 Disable chatter control. Disable chatter control.
13 Chatter control option. Status of chatter control option.
Applicable for configuration of the Digital Input module (1C31233G01 - G03).
can be read.
Bits 2 - 5 Not used.
Bit 6: This bit should be set for a single-ended digital input (1C31233G01) and cleared for the
others.
Bit 7: Not used.
Bit 8: This bit is set to enable contact input auxiliary voltage failure signal and module
attention for auxiliary voltage failure and ground fault detection circuitry.
298 OW350_R1150
Bit 9: Not used.

Bit 10: This bit is set to enable module GND fault attention status.
Bit 11: Not used.
Bit 13: When this bit is set, chatter will be flagged when an input changes state four or more
times between event buffer reads. When cleared, chatter is flagged for state changes greater
than 1 per 100 milliseconds.
Bits 14 - 15: Not used
Register configuration/address information (1C31233G04)
Station (see the Bit Pattern Field on the Hardware Tab). (See the Ovation Operator Station User
Guide.)
1
Compact Sequence of Events Contact Input Configuration/Status Register (address 13 or
D in Hex)
BIT DATA DESCRIPTION - DATA DESCRIPTION -

CONFIGURATION REGISTER STATUS REGIS TE R (RE AD )
0 Configure module. Module configured

(1=configured; 0=unconfigured)
1 Force internal error. Internal error
(1=forced error; 0=no forced error)
2-5 Not used. Should be set to zero (0). Not used.
6 Enable digital input blown fuse signal and Status of enable digital input blown fuse signal
module attention for blown fuse. and module attention for blown fuse.
7 Not used. Should be set to zero (0). Blown fuse for digital input.
8 Contact input field card (enable contact input Status of contact input field card (enable contact
auxiliary voltage failure signal and module input auxiliary voltage failure signal and module
attention for auxiliary voltage failure and attention for auxiliary voltage failure and ground
ground fault detection circuitry). fault detection circuitry).
9 Not used. Should be set to zero (0). Auxiliary voltage failure for contact input.
11 Not used. Should be set to zero (0). GND fault.
12 Disable chatter control. Disable chatter control.
13 Reset chatter control counters on buffer Status of reset chatter control counters on buffer
unfreeze (instead of decrementing every 100 unfreeze (instead of decrementing every 100
milliseconds). milliseconds).
14 Not used. Should be set to zero (0). Clock synchronized.
1
Applicable for configuration of the Contact Input module (1C31233G04).
OW350_R1150 299
can be read.
Bits 2 - 5: Not used.
Bit 6: This bit should be cleared to zero (0).
Bit 7: Not used.
Bit 8: This bit should be set.
Bit 9: Not used.
Bit 10: This bit should be set according to application need.
Bit 11: Not used.
Bit 13: When this bit is set, the chatter control counter for each channel is reset each time an
event buffer is unfrozen instead of being decremented each 100 milliseconds. Default state is
“0” and has the chatter control counter being decremented every 100 milliseconds.
Secondary/Expansion configuration/Status Register
Word address 14 (E in Hex) is used to enable or disable the channel event tagging mask.
Secondary/Expansion configuration/Status Register (address 14 or E in Hex)
BIT DATA DESCRIPTION CONFIGURATION DATA DESCRIPTION STATUS

(WRITE) (READ)
0 - 15 Channel Event Tagging mask Channel Event Tagging mask
6.8.17 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (SECompactDI)
LED DESCRIPTION

module.
E (Red) For Single-ended Digital Input: Lit when fuse blows or there is a loss of the auxiliary power
supply (Only when Bit 6 of Configuration register is set. Then Bit 7 of the Status register is
set.)
set, or when a timeout of the watchdog timer occurs when the Controller stops
300 OW350_R1150
LED DESCRIPTION
6.8.18 Specifications and ranges (G01-3) - (SECompactDI)
DESCRIPTION VALUE
1 Refer to the table below.
2
24V/48V DC 3.75 mSec minimum; 4.25 mSec Maximum
125VDC 3.75 mSec minimum; 4.45 mSec Maximum
Signal rejection
Always rejects change of state < 3.87 mSec
Always accepts change of state > 4.13 mSec
Cable length (quality is 50pF/ft or better) 1000 feet Maximum
Diagnostics Internal module operating faults and Blown fuse
3
detection.
4 1000 VAC
Channel to channel
Channel to logic 2000 VAC differential; 1000 VAC others
Module power from logic supply Main: 1.44 W typical, 1.8 W Maximum
1
2
3
Blown fuse detection applies to single-ended channel configuration only, when an on-board fuse is
4
Compact Sequence of Events Digital Input Ranges
INPUT ON INPUT OFF INPUT ON INPUT OFF INPUT POWER

LEVEL VOLTAGE VOLTAGE CURRENT (MA) INPUT TYPICAL
(VDC) (VDC) (WATTS)
Min Max Max Min Max Max

24 VDC 20 60 9 1.3 2.6 0.33 0.65
OW350_R1150 301
INPUT ON INPUT OFF INPUT ON INPUT OFF INPUT POWER

LEVEL VOLTAGE VOLTAGE CURRENT (MA) INPUT TYPICAL
(VDC) (VDC) (WATTS)
48 VDC 20 60 9 1.3 2.6 0.33 1.7

125 VDC 80 140 55 1.3 2.8 0.33 4.26
6.8.19 Specifications and ranges (G04) - (SECompactDI)
DESCRIPTION
VALUE
Channels per common 16
Voltage Category 48 VDC - nominal open contact wetting voltage.
Open contact voltage For "0" signal = 42 V min. 55 V max.
Closed contact Input current For "1" signal = 4 mA min. 8 mA max.
Galvanic isolation Between channels and I/O bus = Yes, 1,000 VAC.
Between channels = No.
Current draw, from I/O base unit, 62 mA typical for all inputs off.
24 V main power 190 mA typical for all inputs on.
Power dissipation of module, 1.5 watts typical for all inputs off.
24 V main power 4.5 watts typical for all inputs on.
Total module response time, "0" Open to "1" Close = 4.125 msec typ.
(1 foot (0.305 M) long test cable) "1" Close to "0" Open = 4.125 msec typ.
Resolution 1/8 msec resolution for time tagging an event.
Accuracy (time tagged) 1 msec relative to clock from the I/O bus.
1/8 msec relative to other module channels.
Propagation delay through logic card to 3.75 msec Min.
Present State register (field card output to 4.25 msec Max.
Present State register)
Logic card digital debounce time 3.75 msec Min.
4.00 typical.
4.25 msec Max.
Field card signal propagation delay. 0.13 msec typ delay time for contact opening.
(1 foot (0.305 M) long test cable) 0.09 msec typ delay time for contact closing.
Additional propagation delay due to field cable 0.04 msec typ per 1,000 foot of cable (30 pF/ft.)
capacitance - field contact opening.
Status display Green LED per channel. LEDs located in logic card circuit.
Cable limitations: Must be greater than 50 Kohms to maintain high level
Contact shunt resistance open contact wetting voltage.
Must be greater than 10 Kohms to allow open contact to
be recognized as an open contact.
Wiring resistance Must be less than 100 ohms to allow closed cotact to be
recognized as a closed circuit.
302 OW350_R1150
DESCRIPTION
VALUE

OW350_R1150 303
6.9 Enhanced Compact Sequence of Events Digital Input module - (ECSOEDI)
6.9 Enhanced Compact Sequence of Events Digital Input module -

(ECSOEDI)
The Ovation Enhanced Compact Sequence of Events module provides field wire break detection
(Group 5 only) and field digital input state change detection (SOE One Shot).
The SOE one shot feature describes a feature that will enable SOE event detections that happen
asynchronously to Controller tasks that read the present input state and event buffers. There are
two types of events that are defined.
 A high to low transition of the input.
 A low to high transition of the input.
The two types of events are mutually exclusive of each other. Events registered on various points
are also mutually exclusive of each other. SOE on shot events are only recorded if the input state
transition is followed by a 4 millisecond minimum steady state time. Otherwise the one shot event
is ignored.
The Module performs a sequence of events function for the Ovation distributed control system. It
provides sixteen digital channels to monitor the states ("0" or "1") of sixteen field digital inputs. No
personality module is required if the sixteen digital channels are used as differential inputs. The
Ovation Enhanced Compact Sequence of Events Electronics Module plugs into a standard
Ovation Base Unit's electronics module cavity.
The Enhanced Compact Sequence of Events electronics Module consists of an LSW logic card
and a field Card (FDJ, FDI, FCI or FDW). The LSW logic card Interfaces to the I/O bus through
the Ovation base unit backplane from which it accesses the Ovation serial I/O data bus (serial
data and clock signals), base address, and redundant +24 VDC power supplies. The LSW logic
card connects to the field card through a pair of inter-card connectors.
If the 5X00034G01 16-Point Individually Fused Channel Personality module is not employed, the
Enhanced Compact Sequence of Events electronics module's the field card directly interfaces to
the base unit termination block via the base unit backplane.
For the Enhanced Compact Sequence of Events module's 16-point individually fused channel
option, the 5X00034G01 personality module is used. The Enhanced Compact Sequence of
Events Electronics module FDI or FDW field card interfaces to the base unit terminal block via the
5X00034G01 Personality module's PDIC personality card.
Features
The Enhanced Compact Sequence of Events Electronics Module has 16 field inputs of the levels
defined in Electronics module (Emod) for the Enhanced Compact Sequence of Events module
(see page 305). The module performs a digital de-bounce on these 16 field input signals in order
to obtain the present input state data. The present input state data will be placed in the module's
I/O bus Present Input State register. Using the present input state data, the module calculates the
event change of state information and status information for the I/O bus.
 1,000 V dielectric isolation between the field circuits and the Ovation I/O bus common.
 I/O Bus Watchdog Timer
 Module Electronic ID information stored in the logic card EEPROM.
 The I/O module base address is established by the base unit location.
 The base unit provides the electronics module with redundant +24 VDC power supply feeds.
 Module hot swap capability
304 OW350_R1150
 Sixteen digital inputs whose present states can be read directly

 Positive Transition Latched register and Negative Transition Latched registers are provided to
permit the Controller to directly detect captured low to high and high to low event transitions.
 Field contact wire break detection (Group 5 only)
 4 millisecond contact de-bounce time.
 1/8 millisecond resolution event (input change of state) recording.
 1 millisecond event recording with reference to the time tag clock time sent to the module by
the Controller.
 Module can time tag events for 65 seconds before the internal module clock rolls over.
 Internal module time tag clock can be resynchronized by the Controller
 Contains two 32-event buffers
 The module can be configured to mask off specific input channels that will not be checked by
the module's event tagging and chatter control logic.
 The module can be configured to enable or disable chatter control for all sixteen input
channels. The chatter control counter, if enabled, may be configured to decrement at a
defined rate or to be reset when the module event buffers are switched.
6.9.1 Personality modules (Pmod) - (ECSOEDI)
5X00034G01 provides for individual fusing for each of the sixteen digital input channels using a
common power supply. This is an optional personality module that available for use for
applications requiring individual point fusing with a common power supply.
Note: The use of the 5X00034G01 personality module converts differential current sinking
digital inputs into single-ended current sinking digital inputs. The 5X00034G01 personality
module taps the base unit's internal auxiliary voltage and distributes this voltage to all sixteen
module digital input channels.
6.9.2 Electronics modules (Emod) - (ECSOEDI)

 5X00357G01 Sixteen 24/48 VDC single-ended current-sinking digital inputs (FDJ field card)
 5X00357G02 Sixteen 24/48 VDC differential current-sinking digital inputs (FDI field card) -
supports 16-point individually fused channel option
 5X00357G03 Sixteen 125 VDC differential current-sinking digital inputs (FDI field card) -
supports 16-point individually fused channel option
 5X00357G04 Sixteen 48 VDC single-ended current-sourcing digital inputs (contact inputs)
using on-card power supply (FCI field card)
 5X00357G05 Sixteen 24 VDC IEC 61131-2 compliant Type 1 differential current-sinking
digital inputs with wire break detection capability (FDW field card) – supports 16-point
individually fused channel option
OW350_R1150 305
6.9.3 One shot function - (ECSOEDI)
The Enhanced Sequence of Events module contains a one-shot function which is accessible
through two 16 bits registers that capture two types of events. The digital de-bounce circuit
samples each field input channel once every 125 microseconds. If a field input channel's state
change remains present for 32 consecutive samples, the event is stored on the corresponding set
of latches depending on which type of event occurred. The first type of event is a 16 bit register
for low to high transition of each digital input. This is known as Positive Transition Latched
Register. The second is a 16 bit register for high to low transition of each digital input. This is
known as Negative Transition Latched Register. These are mutually exclusive of each other.
Events registered on every channel are also mutually exclusive of each other. Each event will set
and latch the corresponding bit in the appropriate event register and it will remain in logic '1'
value, even if several valid transitions occur. The reset of the entire latched register will only
follow if a read of the event register is performed.
A watchdog timer for one-shot registers would clear the one-shot registers if no reads occur to
Positive Transition Latched Register or Negative Transition Latched Register within a period of 5
seconds. After a timeout, the collection of one shot information is prevented until the Controller
resumes reading either Positive Transition Latched Register or Negative Transition Latched
Register. The first read would be a throw away which would re-activate the watchdog timer. The
second read would yield valid register data.
6.9.4 Wire break detect function - (ECSOEDI)
The 5X00358 LSW printed circuit card assembly groups available for enhanced compact
sequence of events application are Group Two - with one shot function, and Group Three - with
one shot function and wire break detection capability. Group Two LSW logic cards will interface to
electronic module assembly groups one to four (G01-G04). Group Three LSW logic cards will
interface to electronic module assembly group five (G05).
The wire break detect function has a 16 bit mask register stored in latches. If the wire break mask
bit is set for a particular input channel, the condition of field wiring will be detected for that
channel.
The digital de-bounce circuit samples each field wiring channel once every 125 microseconds. If a
field wiring channel's state change remains present for 32 consecutive samples, the module's
Channel Wire Break Detect Register is updated with the new status of field wiring channel.
Sampling the field wiring channel states for 32 consecutive times yields a nominal 4 millisecond
digital de-bounce time period. Any field wiring change that is less than the digital de-bounce time
will be rejected by the module.
6.9.5 Subsystems - (ECSOEDI)
Enhanced Compact Sequence of Events Digital Input subsystems
RANGE CHANNELS ELECTRONI PERSONALITY

C MODULE MODULE OR
CAV ITY
INSERT
24/48 VDC Single-ended Digital Input - Current Sinking 16 5X00357G01 1

1C31238H01
24/48 VDC Differential Digital Input - Current Sinking 16 5X00357G02 1
1C31238H01
306 OW350_R1150
RANGE CHANNELS ELECTRONI PERSONALITY

C MODULE MODULE OR
CAV ITY
INSERT
24/48 VDC (Individually Fused Channels with Common 16 5X00357G02 5X00034G01

power supply) Single-Ended Digital Input - Current
Sinking
125 VDC Differential Digital Input - Current Sinking 16 5X00357G03 1
1C31238H01
125 VDC (Individually Fused Channels with Common 16 5X00357G03 5X00034G01

Sinking
48 VDC Single-ended Digital Input - Current Sourcing 16 5X00357G04 1
1C31238H01
(Contact input) with On-Card 48 VDC power supply
24 VDC (Differential) Digital Input - Current Sinking, 16 5X00357G05 1
1C31238H01
IEC61131-2 Compliant Type 1 Digital Inputs
24 VDC (Individually Fused Channels with Common 16 5X00357G05 5X00034G01
Sinking, IEC61131-2 Compliant Type 1 Digital Inputs
1
This is a plastic insert that fits into the base unit‟s Personality module cavity and provides a base unit
terminal block wiring label for the module.

(FDJ) - (ECSOEDI)
Style 5X00357G01 has 16 single-ended (common return) current sinking digital inputs with a field
card auxiliary power supply fuse and accommodates a common auxiliary 24 VDC or 48 VDC
power supply used by all channels. The required auxiliary power supply voltage source may be
obtained from the cabinet's internal auxiliary power supply or it may be obtained from an external
power supply. The module's field card contains circuit used to monitor the presence of the
auxiliary power supply voltage. Two cases cause this field card monitor circuitry to report a blown
fuse status:
 Module field card auxiliary power supply fuse is open circuited
 Auxiliary power supply voltage level is below the monitor circuit's On input voltage threshold
Each channel contains an input resistor to provide normal mode surge protection and a current
regulator circuit to limit input current during normal operation. Each channel contains an
optocoupler to provide galvanic isolation between the field digital input circuit and module's logic
or I/O bus side.
OW350_R1150 307
Module-base unit interconnection diagram (5X00357G01) - (ECSOEDI)
information.
308 OW350_R1150
Field wiring (5X00357G01) - (ECSOEDI)
The minimum combined field cable resistance plus field contact leakage resistance value
assumes that the Auxiliary power supply voltage is its Maximum allowable value (30 VDC for 24
VDC inputs and 60 VDC for 48 VDC inputs).
Input Minimum field cable resistance

voltage level plus field contact leakage resistance
24 VDC 100 Kohm
48 VDC 150 Kohm
If a channel's combined field cable resistance and contact leakage resistance is less than the
values specified above, the channel may report that its field contact state is closed even though
the field contact is actually open.
OW350_R1150 309
Field connection wiring - 5X00357G01
310 OW350_R1150
OW350_R1150 311
312 OW350_R1150
OW350_R1150 313
The "+" inputs are actually the module field card's fused Auxiliary power supply positive rail.
The auxiliary power supply voltage may be derived either from the base unit backplane's printed
circuit card auxiliary voltage traces or from an optional external auxiliary power supply
1. To use the base unit backplane's printed circuit backplane Auxiliary voltage, do not connect
base unit backplane's Auxiliary voltage automatically appears at these terminals
Controller backplane or on the transition panel to which the module's base unit branch
interfaces.
2. To use an external 24 VDC or 48 VDC auxiliary power supply, connect the power supply "+"
and "-" terminals to the base unit PS+ and PS- terminals as shown. This connection will force
all modules on this branch to use the external auxiliary power supply voltage.
Controller backplane or on the transition panel to which the module's base unit branch
interfaces.
No other external power supplies may be connected to other base unit termination block PS+ or
PS- terminals located in the same branch.
External power supply information (5X00357G01 - G05) - (ECSOEDIG01, G02, G03, G05)
When using the Enhanced Compact Sequence of Events module, the required voltage source
may be obtained from the internal auxiliary power supply (Controller backplane) or it may be
obtained from an external power supply.
If an external power supply is used, there are steps to be undertaken before connecting the
external power supply to the Enhanced Compact Sequence of Events Digital Input module base
unit terminal block, Refer to Using an External Power Supply (see page 799).
314 OW350_R1150
Voltage-current curve (5X00357G01) - (ECSOEDI)
Specifications (5X00357G01) - (ECSOEDI)
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Voltage category 24 VDC or 48 VDC

Reverse polarity protection Yes, each channel incorporates a diode in series with
the optocoupler.
Operating voltage 20-60 VDC.
OW350_R1150 315
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Input voltage For "1" signal = 20-60 VDC.

For "0" signal = 0-9 VDC.
Input current For "1" signal = 1.3 mA Min - 2.6 mA Max.
Galvanic isolation Between channels and I/O bus = Yes.
Current draw, from I/O bus base unit, 44 mA typical for all inputs off.
Power dissipation of module
Sum of 24V main power and 24V field channel 1.1 W typical for all inputs off.
power
2.54 W typical for all inputs on.
Sum of 24V main power and 48V field channel 1.1 W typical for all inputs off.
power
Total module response time "0" Open to "1" Close = 4.02 msec typ
(1 foot (0.305 M) long field cable is assumed) "1" Close to "0" Open = 4.13 msec typ
Resolution 1/8 msec for time tagging an event.
Accuracy (time tagged) 1 msec relative to clock from I/O bus.
LSW card Propagation delay - field card output to 3.75 mesc. Min.
present input state register 4.0 msec. typ.
4.25 msec. Max.
LSW card digital debounce circuit delay time 4.0 msec. typ.
Status Display Green LED per channel. LEDs located in logic card
circuit.
316 OW350_R1150
Note: Any module digital input state change time that is less than the LSW card digital
debounce time will be rejected by the module and will not appear in the present input state
register.
FDJ card signal propagation delay. This is the typical time elapsed from the time that a field
contact opens or closes until the time that associated channel's output signal (INn/ where n = 1 to
16) changes states. Assumes a 1 foot (0.305 m) long test cable.
Input Delay time for Delay time for

capacitance.
Input Additional delay time for


(FDI) - (ECSOEDI)
Style 5X00357G02 has 16 differential (galvanically isolated) current sinking digital inputs that can
accommodate a separate 24 VDC or 48 VDC auxiliary power supply for each channel. Style
5X00357G02 can be used with the 5X00034G01 Individually Fused 16 Point personality module
for applications requiring individual channel fusing of a common 24 VDC or 48 VDC auxiliary
power supply. The required auxiliary power supply voltage source may be obtained from the
cabinet's internal auxiliary power supply or it may be obtained from an external power supply or
multiple external power supplies. Each channel contains an input resistor to provide normal mode
surge protection and a current regulator circuit to limit input current during normal operation. A
diode bridge allows input voltages of either polarity to be applied. Each channel contains an
optocoupler to provide galvanic isolation between the field digital input circuit and module's logic
or I/O bus side.
module taps the base unit's internal auxiliary voltage and distributes this voltage to all 16 module
digital input channels.
OW350_R1150 317
Module-base unit interconnection (5X00357G02) - (ECSOEDI)
information.
318 OW350_R1150
Module-base unit interconnection (Individually Fused) (5X00357G02) - (ECSOEDI)
information.
OW350_R1150 319

24 VDC 100 Kohm
48 VDC 150 Kohm
320 OW350_R1150
Field connection wiring (5X00357G02) - (ECSOEDI)
OW350_R1150 321
322 OW350_R1150
Note: Channel 4 through 15 input terminals not shown for clarity purposes.
OW350_R1150 323
Field connection wiring Individually Fused (5X00357G02) - (ECSOEDI)
324 OW350_R1150
OW350_R1150 325
326 OW350_R1150
OW350_R1150 327
The “+” inputs are actually the 5X00034G01 personality module PDIC personality card‟s fused
Auxiliary power supply positive rail. The “-” inputs are the field card‟s channel VIN inputs. The
PDIC personality card connects the sixteen field card channel RTN inputs to the auxiliary power
supply return.
For 5X00357G02/5X00034G01 module combinations, the auxiliary power supply voltage may be
derived either from the base unit backplane‟s printed circuit card auxiliary voltage traces or from
an optional external auxiliary power supply.
1. To use the base unit backplane‟s printed circuit backplane Auxiliary voltage, do not connect
base unit backplane‟s Auxiliary voltage automatically appears at these terminals.
interfaces.
2. To use an external 24 VDC (5X00357G02) or 48 VDC (5X00357G02) auxiliary power supply,
connect the power supply “+” and “-” terminals to the base unit PS+ and PS- terminals as
shown. This connection will force all modules on this branch to use the external auxiliary
power supply voltage.
interfaces.
328 OW350_R1150
OW350_R1150 329
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Voltage category 24 VDC or 48 VDC

Reverse polarity protection Yes, each channel incorporates a front-end diode
bridge
Operating voltage 20-60 VDC
Input voltage For "1" signal = 20-60 VDC
For "0" signal = 0-9 VDC
Input current For "1" signal = 1.3 mA Min - 2.6 mA Max
Channels per common 1,5X00357G02/1C31238H01
16, 5X00357G02/5X00034G01
Galvanic isolation Between channels and I/O bus = Yes
Between channels =
Yes, 5X00357G02/1C31238H01
No, 5X00357G02/5X00034G01
Current draw, from I/O bus base unit, 44 mA typical for all inputs off
24 V main power 63 mA typical for all inputs on
Sum of 24V main power and 24V field channel power. 1.06 W typical for all inputs off
2.16 W typical for all inputs on
Sum of 24V main power and 48V field channel power 1.06 W typical for all inputs off
Resolution 1/8 msec for time tagging an event
Accuracy (time tagged) 1 msec relative to clock from I/O bus
1/8 msec relative to other module channels
4.25 msec. Max.
Status Display Green LED per channel. LEDs located in isolated
logic card circuit
330 OW350_R1150
debounce time is rejected by the module and does not appear in the present input state register.
FDI card signal propagation delay, is the typical time elapsed from the time that a field contact
opens or closes until the time that associated channel's output signal (INn/ where n = 1 to 16)
changes states. Assumes a 1 foot (0.305 m) long test cable.

capacitance.


(FDI) - (ECSOEDI)
Style 5X00357G03 has 16 differential (galvanically isolated) current sinking digital inputs that can
accommodate a separate 125 VDC auxiliary power supply for each channel. Style 5X00357G03
can be used with the 5X00034G01 Individually Fused 16 Point personality module for applications
requiring individual channel fusing of a common 125 VDC auxiliary power supply. The required
125 VDC auxiliary power supply voltage source may be obtained from the module base unit
backplane (both module I/O branch plug-in fuses removed and external 125 VDC power supply
connected to module base unit PS+ and PS- terminals) or it may be obtained from an external
power supply or multiple external power supplies.
When the 5X00357G03 Enhanced Compact Sequence of Events electronics module is used
without the 5X00034G01 Individually Fused 16 Point personality module, additional external
fusing or other current limiting devices are recommended on the hazardous inputs to provide
additional protection to the external wiring and 125 VDC power supply.
Each channel contains an input resistor to provide normal mode surge protection and a current
regulator circuit to limit input current during normal operation. A diode bridge allows input voltages
of either polarity to be applied. Each channel contains an optocoupler to provide galvanic isolation
between the field digital input circuit and module's logic or I/O bus side.
OW350_R1150 331
information.
332 OW350_R1150
Module-base unit interconnection individually Fused (5X00357G03) - (ECSOEDI)
information.
OW350_R1150 333
assumes that the Auxiliary power supply voltage is its Maximum allowable value (140 VDC for
125 VDC inputs).

125 VDC 250 Kohm
334 OW350_R1150
OW350_R1150 335
336 OW350_R1150
Channel 4 through 15 input terminals not shown for clarity purposes.
OW350_R1150 337
Field connection wiring Individually Fused (5X00357G03) - (ECSOEDI)
338 OW350_R1150
OW350_R1150 339
supply return.
For 5X00357G03 module combinations, the +125 VDC auxiliary power supply voltage must be
obtained from an external auxiliary power supply.
To use an external 125 VDC (5X00357G03) auxiliary power supply, connect the power supply “+”
and “-” terminals to the base unit PS+ and PS- terminals as shown. This connection will force all
The two plug-in branch Aux. fuses must be removed from their sockets located on the Controller
backplane or on the transition panel to which the module‟s base unit branch interfaces.
340 OW350_R1150
OW350_R1150 341
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Voltage category 125 VDC

Reverse polarity protection Yes, each channel incorporates a front-end diode bridge
Input voltage For "1" signal = 80-140 VDC
For "0" signal = 0-55 VDC
Input current For "1" signal = 0.8 mA Min - 2.8 mA Max
16, 5X00357G03/5X00034G01
Between channels =
Yes, 5X00357G03/1C31238H01
No, 5X00357G03/5X00034G01
Sum of 24V main power and 125V field channel 1.06 W typical for all inputs off
power
LSW card Propagation delay - field card output 3.75 msec. Min.
to present input state register 4.0 msec. typ.
4.25 msec. Max.
circuit
342 OW350_R1150
FDI card signal propagation delay is the typical time elapsed from the time that a field contact

capacitance.

OW350_R1150 343

(FCI) - (ECSOEDI)
Style 5X00357G04 has 16 single-ended current sourcing digital inputs (contact inputs) that share
a common return and that all use the module's internal 48 VDC power supply voltage. No power
supply is required. The internal +48 V on-card power supply provides a current limited contact
wetting voltage if a channel's field contact is open. When the contact closes, current is drawn from
the +10 V on-card power supply and turns on the channel's associated optocoupler, which relays
a closed contact state "1" to the I/O bus. The sixteen channel optocouplers and the on-card power
supply transformer provide galvanic isolation between the field digital inputs (contact inputs)
circuit and the module's logic or I/O bus side.
value of zero.
Each field contact may have a separate input and return wire conductor to the module's base unit
terminals. Alternatively, field contacts wired to the same module may share a common return wire
conductor. A Ground fault detection circuit is provided to determine if an input or return wire for
any channel find a low impedance path to earth ground. A single wire with a ground fault will not
cause an error in point data. However, multiple wire ground faults that include input and return
wires, could cause faulty point data (that is, channels appearing as if their field contacts are
closed when the contacts are really open).
344 OW350_R1150
information.
OW350_R1150 345
Time required for channel wetting voltage level to exceed 40 V following field contact opening: 6
msec. Max.
Cabling Limitations
RWiring for closed contact recognition 100 ohms Max.
Rshunt for open contact recognition 10,000 ohms Min.
Rshunt for high-level voltage (> 40V) open contact recognition 50,000 ohms Min.
Rshunt for ground fault detection with open contact and "+"
input line ground fault 150,000 ohms Min.
Rfault from either "+" or "-"input line to ground for

ground fault detection 5,000 ohms Max.
346 OW350_R1150
Field wiring (5X00357G04) (contact) - (ECSOEDI)
The figure below shows possible field cable resistances that affect input channel performance.
The following definitions apply:
RContact = resistance associated with a closed contact
Rshunt = open contact shunt resistance
RLine1 = resistance of the wire routed from the contact to the FCI "+" input.
RLine2 = resistance of the non-common wire routed from the contact to the FCI "-" or RTN input
RCommon = resistance of the common wire routed from multiple contacts to the FCI "+" input
RCommon = 0 if each field contact has its own pair of "+" and "-" field wires
RWiring = RContact + RLine1 + RLine2 + 16 RCommon
The following constraints are generated from the above figure:
1. No field wire ground faults or a "-"or RTN field wire ground fault:
Rshunt must be > 10Kohms for the input channel to recognize the field contact state as open.
Rshunt must be > 50Kohms for the input channel to maintain a high level open contact
wetting voltage.
2. "+" field wire ground fault:
Rshunt must be > 20Kohms for the input channel to recognize the field contact state as open.
Rshunt must be > 100Kohms for the input channel to maintain at least a 20 V open contact
wetting voltage.
3. With or without a field wire ground fault condition:
RWiring through the field wiring to the field contact must be < 100 ohms for the input channel
to recognize a closed contact.
OW350_R1150 347
The table below lists the Maximum field wiring cable lengths between field contacts and the
module base unit termination block when each field contact has its own wire routed between it
and the module base unit termination block (RCommon = 0 ohms). It is assumed that
RContact = 0 ohms.
RWiring = RLine1 + RLine2
RWiring = 100 ohms Max.
Assume that RLine1 = RLine2 since both the field contact "+" and "-" wires should be the
same length.
2 RLine1 = 100 ohms Max.
RLine1 = 50 ohms Max.
WIRE GAUGE OHMS PER 1000 FEET @ 20 DEGREES C MAXIMUM CABLE LENGTH
(68 DEGREES F) FOR SOLID COPPER WIRE (THOUSAND FEET)
18 AWG 6.385 7.5

20 AWG 10.15 4.9
22 AWG 16.14 3.0
24 AWG 25.67 1.9
26 AWG 40.81 1.2
The table below lists the Maximum field wiring cable lengths between field contacts and the
module base unit termination block when all module field contacts share a common return wire
routed between the field contacts and one of the module base unit termination block "-" terminals.
It is assumed that RContact = 0 ohms. To simplify calculations, it is assumed that RLine2 = 0
ohms and that that RLine1 = RCommon
RWiring = RLine1 + 16 RCommon
RWiring = 17 RLine1
RWiring = 100 ohms Max.
RLine1 = 5.88 ohms Max.
WIRE GAUGE OHMS PER 1000 FEET @ 20 DEGREES C MAXIMUM CABLE LENGTH
(68 DEGREES F) FOR SOLID COPPER WIRE (THOUSAND FEET)
12 AWG 1.588 3.54

14 AWG 2.525 2.3
16 AWG 4.016 1.4
18 AWG 6.385 0.89
20 AWG 10.15 0.57
348 OW350_R1150
OW350_R1150 349
350 OW350_R1150
Each field contact has a separate input "+" and return "-" line.
The sixteen "-" inputs are tied together on the FCI field card and are connected to the galvanically
isolated wetting power supply common return for all sixteen channels.
Note: Do not tie any of the "+" or "-" inputs to earth ground. A ground fault condition will occur
as well as degradation of the field card's common mode surge protection.
OW350_R1150 351
352 OW350_R1150
OW350_R1150 353
Each field contact has a separate input "+", but shares a common return line connection to a
single channel's Return "-" input terminal.
The sixteen "-" inputs are tied together on the FCI field card and are connected to the galvanically
isolated wetting power supply common return for all sixteen channels.
Note: Do not tie any of the "+" or "-" inputs to earth ground. A ground fault condition will occur
as well as degradation of the field card's common mode surge protection.
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Voltage category 48 VDC – nominal open contact wetting voltage.

Reverse polarity protection Not applicable, field inputs are dry contacts with power
supplied by field card circuit.
Open contact voltage For "0" signal = 42 V Min. - 55 V Max.
Closed contact Input current For "1" signal = 4 mA Min. - 8 mA Max.
Galvanic isolation Between channels and I/O bus = Yes.
Current draw, from I/O bus base unit, 62 mA typical for all inputs off.
Power dissipation of module 24V main power 1.49 W typical for all inputs off.
Accuracy (time tagged) 1 msec relative to clock from I/O bus.
LSW card Propagation delay - field card output 3.75 mesc. Min.
to present input state register 4.0 msec. typ.
4.25 msec. Max.
circuit.
354 OW350_R1150
FCI card signal propagation delay is the typical time elapsed from the time that a field contact

capacitance.


(FDW) - (ECSOEDI)
Style 5X00357G05 has 16 differential (galvanically isolated) IEC 61131-2 compliant Type 1 24
VDC current sinking digital inputs that can accommodate a separate 24 VDC auxiliary power
supply for each channel. Style 5X00357G05 can be used with the 5X00034G01 Individually
Fused 16 Point personality module for applications requiring individual channel fusing of a
common 24 VDC auxiliary power supply. The required auxiliary power supply voltage source may
be obtained from the cabinet's internal auxiliary power supply or it may be obtained from an
external power supply or multiple external power supplies. Each channel contains an input
resistor to provide normal mode surge protection and a current regulator circuit to limit input
current during normal operation. A diode bridge allows input voltages of either polarity to be
applied. Each channel contains two optocouplers to provide galvanic isolation between the field
digital input circuit and module's logic or I/O bus side. One optocoupler provides the input state
status. The second optocoupler provides the field contact wire break status. This wire break
status is only valid if a 10 Kohm resistor is installed directly across the field contact.
OW350_R1150 355
information.
356 OW350_R1150
Module-base unit interconnection (5X00357G05) (individually fused) - (ECSOEDI)
information.
OW350_R1150 357

24 VDC 10 Kohm
358 OW350_R1150
OW350_R1150 359
360 OW350_R1150
OW350_R1150 361
362 OW350_R1150
OW350_R1150 363
supply return.
For 5X00357G05 module combinations, the 24 VDC auxiliary power supply voltage may be
derived either from the base unit backplane‟s printed circuit card auxiliary voltage traces or from
an optional external auxiliary power supply.
1. To use the base unit backplane‟s printed circuit backplane 24 VDC auxiliary voltage, do not
connect an external power supply to the base unit termination block PS+ and PS- terminals
since the base unit backplane‟s Auxiliary voltage automatically appears at these terminals.
interfaces.
2. To use an external 24 VDC auxiliary power supply, connect the power supply “+” and “-”
terminals to the base unit PS+ and PS- terminals as shown. This connection will force all
interfaces.
364 OW350_R1150
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Voltage category 24 VDC

Reverse polarity protection Yes, each channel incorporates a front-end diode
bridge
Input voltage For "1" signal = 15 to 30 VDC
For "0" signal = -3 to 5 VDC
OW350_R1150 365
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Input current For "1" signal = 6mA typ., 8.5 mA Max

For wire-break detect = 0.2 mA
guaranteed to assert a wire break detected state
For "0" signal = 0.5 mA Max
Field Contact Shunt Resistance 10,000 ohms +/- 5%
(used only for wire break detect)
Input Characteristic IEC 61131-2, Type 1
16, 5X00357G05/5X00034G01
Between channels =
Yes, 5X00357G05/1C31238H01
No, 5X00357G05/5X00034G01
Power dissipation of module 1.08 W typical for all inputs off
Sum of 24V main power and 24V field channel 3.94 W typical for all inputs on
power
circuit
4.25 msec. Max.
Diagnostic Function Field wire break detect. A 10 Kohm resistor must be
installed across each field contact.
366 OW350_R1150
debounce time will be rejected by the module and will not appear in the present input state
register.
FDW card signal propagation delay. This is the typical time elapsed from the time that a field
contact opens or closes until the time that associated channel's output signal (INn/ where n = 1 to
16) changes states. Assumes a 1 foot (0.305 m) long test cable.

capacitance.

6.9.11 Event buffer read procedure - (ECSOEDI)
The Event Buffer read procedure consists of the following steps. An I/O bus error is defined as
any of the following bus cycles:
 An unsuccessful cycle.
 A module needs Attention cycle
 A module is unconfigured cycle
 A no response cycle
1. Read the module's Buffer Status register at I/O address 0 to determine if the module Event
buffer should be read.
2. Write to the module's Buffer Control register at I/O address 0 to set the register's Freeze bit
and to specify the event buffer address of the next word to be read. The event buffer address
will be called N. The event buffer address should always be written as zero unless there is an
error retry. This starts the read address at zero. If the Buffer Status register's Buffer Over-flow
bit is set, then set the Buffer Control register's Clear Buffer Over-flow bit.
3. Read the module's Buffer Status register at I/O address 0 to determine the number of words
to be read. This number should always be an even number. If there is an I/O bus error during
this read operation, the Buffer Status register should be read again before reading any event
buffer event data
4. Read the module Event Buffer register at I/O address 1 to obtain the data from event buffer
address N. The I/O module counter which indicates the number of event buffer words to be
read is reset during the first Event Buffer register read operation and cannot be read again.
address N+1.
address N+2.
OW350_R1150 367
address N+3.
8. Continue reading the module's Event buffer register until all of the available event buffer data
has been read. After all the event buffer data has been read, perform the following steps.
9. Write to the module Buffer Control register at I/O address 0 in order to clear the register's
Freeze bit. At the same time set the register's event buffer address bits to 0. The register's
Clear Buffer Over-flow bit should also be cleared.
10. Read the module's Buffer Status register at I/O address 0 in order to determine if the other
event buffer contents should be read. If there is data available in the other event buffer, then
repeat steps 2 - 9 for the other event buffer.
The following defines the response to an I/O bus error during the event buffer reading procedure.
If there is an I/O bus error during a write operation, the write operation should be repeated. If
there is an I/O bus error during a read of the module's Buffer Status register located at I/O
address 0, read the Buffer Status register again.
If there is an I/O bus error during a read of the module's Event Buffer register located at I/O
address 1, the instructions described in Step 2 of the previously documented procedure should be
repeated using the event buffer address of the missed data. Next read the module's Event Buffer
register location to get the missed data before continuing reading the event buffer until done.
If the Ovation Controller attempts to read the module's Event Buffer register located at I/O
address 1 before setting the Buffer Control register's Freeze bit, the reply will be invalid.
If the Ovation Controller reads more than the specified number of event buffer words, the extra
words read will be invalid data.
To dump (to clear) the contents of the next event buffer to be read, perform the following actions:
1. Set the Buffer Control register's Freeze bit.

2. Read one word from the Event Buffer register to reset the counter.
3. Clear the Buffer Control register's Freeze bit.
6.9.12 Register configuration/address information - (ECSOEDI)
Register configuration/address information Register (D)
The Module Configuration Register is module I/O register 13 (0xD) and is a write register. The
register bit assignments are defined in the following table.
BIT FUNCTION
0 1 = Configure module. Module will not operate until this bit is set to a logic 1.
1 1 = Force Internal Error – LSW card Int. Error LED is illuminated. Only module registers 0xC,
0xD, 0xE and 0xF may be read.
2, 3, 4, 7, 9, Not used – force to logic 0
11. 14, 15
6 1 = Allow asserted field card BLOWN FUSE signal to illuminate module E (External error)
LED and to force a module Attention Status (bit set only for Group 1 modules)
0 = Ignore field card BLOWN FUSE signal
368 OW350_R1150
BIT FUNCTION
8 1 = Allow asserted field card WETVOLTOK/ signal (field card wetting voltage power supply
status) to illuminate the module I (Internal Error) LED and to force a module Attention Status.
Allow asserted field card GND FAULT/ signal (field card input ground fault status) to
illuminate the module E (external Error) LED (bit set only for Group 4 modules)
0 = Ignore field card WETVOLTOK/ signal. Ignore field card GND FAULT/ signal in regards to
controlling the module E LED state
10 1 = Allow asserted field card GND FAULT/ signal (field card input ground fault status) to force
a module Attention Status. (bit may be set only for Group 4 modules)
0 = Ignore field card GND FAULT/ signal in regards to controlling the module Attention Status
state.
12 Disable Chatter
1 = disable chatter control – input can chatter and each event will be recorded in the event
buffer until the event buffer overflows (if input channel not masked off)
0 = enable chatter control (default state)
13 Chatter Control Flag Reset Option Select
1 = reset chatter control counter for each channel upon event buffer unfreeze
0 = decrement chatter counter for each channel every 100 milliseconds (default state)
For Group 1 modules, set bit 6 and clear bits 8 and 10.
For Group 2, 3 and 5 modules, clear bits 6, 8 and 10

For Group 4 modules, clear bit 6 and set bit 8. Bit 10 is set depending on application
requirements.
Bits 12 and 13 are set/cleared depending on application requirements.
Module status (read) register
The Module Status Register is module I/O register 13 (0xD) and is a read register. The register bit
assignments are defined below.
BIT FUNCTION
0 1 = module configured
0 = module unconfigured, I/O addresses below 12 (0xC) cannot be read.
1 State of Module Configuration register bit 1
1 = Internal Error forced
0 = Internal Error not forced
2-4 not used - should be logic 0
1 = Allow asserted field card BLOWN FUSE signal to illuminate module E (External error) LED
and to force a module Attention Status (bit set only for Group 1 modules)
0 = Ignore field card BLOWN FUSE signal
7 1 = Blown field card Auxiliary power supply fuse or low Auxiliary power supply voltage (asserted
only for Group 1 modules only if Module Configuration register bit 6 is set and the field card
BLOWN FUSE signal is active)
1 = Allow asserted field card WETVOLTOK/ signal (field card wetting voltage power supply status)
to illuminate the module I (Internal Error) LED and to force a module Attention Status. Allow
asserted field card GND FAULT/ signal (field card input ground fault status) to illuminate the
module E (external Error) LED (bit set only for Group 4 modules)
0 = Ignore field card WETVOLTOK/ signal. Ignore field card GND FAULT/ signal in regards to
controlling the module E LED state
OW350_R1150 369
BIT FUNCTION
9 1 = Contact wetting voltage power supply failure (asserted only for Group 4 modules if Module
Configuration register bit 8 is set and the field card WETVOLTOK/ signal is asserted)
1 = Allow asserted field card GND FAULT/ signal (field card input ground fault status) to force a
module Attention Status. (bit may be set only for Group 4 modules)
0 = Ignore field card GND FAULT/ signal in regards to controlling the module Attention Status
state.
11 1 = Ground Fault (asserted only for Group 4 modules if Module Configuration register bit 8 is set
and the field card GND FAULT/ signal is asserted). Bit 11's state is independent of the Module
Configuration register bit 10 state.
12 State of Module Configuration register bit 12, Disable Chatter Read Back
1 = disable chatter control - input can chatter and each event will be recorded in the event buffer
until the event buffer overflows (if input channel not masked off)
0 = enable chatter control (default state)
13 State of Module Configuration register bit 13, Chatter Control Flag Reset Option Select Read
Back
1 = reset chatter control counter for each channel upon event buffer unfreeze
0 = decrement chatter counter for each channel every 100 milliseconds (default state)
14 1 = Clock synchronized
15 1 = Field wiring not intact on one or more input channels if wire break detection is enabled for
those channels (Group 5 only)
0 = Field wiring intact on all channels or wire break detection is not enabled for any channel.
Bit 15 is the logical OR of the sixteen inverted Channel Wire Break Detect Register bits.
Registers 2, 3, 4, B, C & E - (ECSOEDI)
Present Input State Register (2)
The Present Input State Register is module I/O register 2 and is a read register. The register bit
assignments for a current-sinking digital input field card are defined below.
BITS FUNCTION
0 - 15 1 = Channel (1 - 16) field input voltage above minimum "1" threshold.

0 = Channel (1 - 16) field input voltage below Maximum "0" threshold.
Positive Transition Latched Register (3)
The Positive Transition Latched Register is module I/O register 3 and is a read register. The
register bit assignments are defined below.
BITS FUNCTION
0 - 15 1 = A low to high event transition in Channel (1 - 16) was detected.

0 = No detected low to high event transition in Channel (1 - 16)
370 OW350_R1150
Negative Transition Latched Register (4)
The Negative Transition Latched Register is module I/O register 4 and is a read register. The
register bit assignments are defined below.
BITS FUNCTION
0 - 15 1 = A high to low event transition in Channel (1 - 16) was detected.

0 = No detected high to low event transition in Channel (1 - 16)
Channel Wire Break Detect Register (B)
The Channel Wire Break Detect Register is module I/O register 11 (0xB) and is a read only
register. The register bit assignments are defined below.
BITS FUNCTION
0 - 15 1 = Channel (1 - 16) field wiring intact or Channel (1 - 16) wire break detect not enabled
0 = Channel (1 - 16) field wiring not intact.
Channel Wire Break Detect Mask write Register (C)
The Channel Wire Break Detect Mask Register is module I/O register 12 (0xC) and is a write
register. The contents may be read back by the Ovation Controller. Upon module power up, all
register bits are cleared to logic 0. The register bit assignments are defined below.
BITS FUNCTION
0 - 15 1 = Channel (1 - 16) field input wire break detection enabled.

0 = Channel (1 - 16) field input wire break detection disabled.
Channel Wire Break Detect Mask read Register (C)
The Channel Wire Break Detect Register is module I/O register 12 (0xC) and is a read register.
Upon module power up, all register bits are cleared to a logic 0 value. The register bit
assignments are defined below.
BITS FUNCTION
0 - 15 1 = Channel (1 - 16) wire break detect is enabled.

0 = Channel (1 - 16) wire break detect is disabled.
Channel Event Tagging Mask write Register (E)
The Channel Event Tagging Mask Register is module I/O register 14 (0xE) and is a write register
whose contents may be read back by the Ovation Controller. Upon module power up, all register
bits are cleared to a logic 0 value. The register bit assignments are defined below.
BITS FUNCTION
0 - 15 1 = Channel (1 - 16) field input checked for change of state every 1/8 milliseconds
0 = Channel (1 - 16) field input change of state monitoring disabled. Channel (1 - 16) chatter
counter and Channel (1 - 16) Chatter Control flag are reset.
OW350_R1150 371
Channel Event Tagging Mask read Register (E)
The Channel Event Tagging Mask Register is module I/O register 14 (0xE) and is a read register.
This registers equal the contents of the Channel Event Tagging Mask Register. Upon module
power up, all register bits are cleared to a logic 0 value. The register bit assignments are defined
below.
BITS FUNCTION
0 - 15 1 = Channel (1 - 16) field input checked for change of state every 1/8 milliseconds
0 = Channel (1 - 16) field input change of state monitoring disabled. Channel (1 - 16) chatter
counter and Channel (1 - 16) Chatter Control flag are reset.
6.9.13 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (ECSOEDI)
LED DESCRIPTION

module.
E (Red) The External Error LED is illuminated when faults external to the module are present.
 For Group 1 modules, the External Error LED is illuminated only when the field card
Auxiliary power supply fuse opens or the Auxiliary power supply voltage level is low
(BLOWN FUSE = 1) and the Module Configuration register bit 6 is set. Module
Configuration bit 6 must be cleared for all other module groups.
 For Group 2, 3 or 5 modules, the External Error LED should not be illuminated. The
Module Configuration register bit 6 should be cleared and the field card BLOWN
FUSE signal is ignored. The Module Configuration register bit 8 should also be
cleared.
 For Group 4 modules (contact input), the External Error LED is illuminated only when
the field card detects a ground fault in the field wiring (GND FAULT/ = 0) and the
Module Configuration register bit 8 is set.
I (Red) The Internal Error LED is illuminated to indicate internal electronics module faults.
 The Internal Error LED is illuminated when Module Configuration Register bit 1 (Force
Error) is set.
 The Internal Error LED is illuminated for Group 4 electronics modules when the field
card's internal 48V/10V contact wetting voltage power supply fails (WETVOLTOK/ =
1) and the Module Configuration Register bit 8 has been set. Module Configuration bit
8 must be cleared for all other module groups.
 The Internal Error LED is illuminated when the I/O Bus Controller has not accessed
the electronics module for at least a period of 2 seconds.
372 OW350_R1150
LED DESCRIPTION
1 - 16 (Green) Digital Input Channel State LEDs

 For any Group 1, 2, 3 or 5 electronics module current-sinking digital input channel, the
channel's digital input state LED is guaranteed to illuminate when the digital input
channel's input voltage exceeds the minimum required input voltage for a "1" signal.
For any Group 4 electronics module, the channel's digital input state LED is
guaranteed to illuminate when the channel's field contact is closed, the sum of the
field wiring resistance and contact resistance is less than 100 ohms and the field
card's internal 48V/10V wetting power supply is functioning correctly.
 Each digital input channel state LED is located on the LSW logic card. The field card's
opto-coupler output transistor interfaces a voltage comparator via a pull-up resistor
connected to the logic card's VCC voltage bus through a series pull-up resistor. The
voltage comparator compares the opto-coupler's output voltage to a fixed reference
voltage in order to determine the digital input channel's state. The voltage comparator
output transistor's uncommitted collector terminal is routed to the LSW logic card
where it is connected to the logic card VCC voltage bus via a pull-up resistor and the
digital input channel state LED.
Note: The logic card's I/O Bus communications watchdog timer turns off the Communications
OK LED and illuminates the module I LED if the I/O Controller fails to access the Enhanced
Compact Sequence of Events Module within 2 seconds.
Upon a timeout, the watchdog timer will clear the Event Mask register, clear the event buffers
and clear Module Configuration Register.
A watchdog timer for one shot registers would clear the one shot registers if no reads occur to
Positive Transition Latched Register or Negative Transition Latched Register within a period of 5
seconds. After a timeout, the collection of one shot information is prevented until the Controller
resumes reading either Positive Transition Latched Register or Negative Transition Latched
Register. The first read would be a throw away which would re-activate the watchdog timer. The
second read would yield valid register data.
OW350_R1150 373
6.9.14 Environmental Specifications - (ECSOEDI)
AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURES
The operating ambient air temperature range is from 0 C to 60 C. The temperature is measured
approximately 0.5 inches from any point on the module while it is mounted in its normal vertical or
horizontal position, and while subject to the air movements which result from natural convection
only (that is, no forced air movement).
HUMIDITY (non-condensing)
The humidity range is from 0% to 95% relative humidity, non-condensing, through an ambient air
temperature range of 0 C through 60 C, but with a Maximum wet bulb temperature not over 35 C
(95 F).
VIBRATION
The module shall remain operational while subject to testing defined in IEC 68-2-6 over the
following curve: 0.15mm displacement from 10 to 57 Hz and 2G's from 57 to 500 Hz, when
attached to a properly mounted DIN rail.
SHOCK
The module will remain operational and reliable after being subjected to testing defined in IEC 68-
2-27 over the following curve: 15 G's for 11 milliseconds and 1/2 sine wave.
POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE
Minimum Nominal Maximum

Main Primary Voltage: 21.0 V 24.0 V 25.0 V
Main Secondary Voltage: 21.0 V 24.0 V 25.0 V
The two main supply voltages are the redundant power feeds to the electronics module and are
diode auctioneered on the electronics module's logic card.
374 OW350_R1150
6.10 32 Channel 24V DC Single -Ended Digital Input module (Window s

Ovation 3.4 and above)
The Ovation 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Input module monitors the state ("0" or "1")
of 32 single-ended field digital inputs. The 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Input module
is designed to meet IEC 61131-2 type 3 characteristics for 24VDC digital inputs in industrial
automation.
Note: The Ovation 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Input module is only available for
Ovation software releases 3.4 and later.
Power for all 32 field contacts is supplied by the Ovation 24VDC Auxiliary cabinet power supply.
The 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Input module consists of an Electronics module
(Emod) and a Personality cavity insert. A Personality module (Pmod) is not required.
Note: The 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Input requires the use of an Ovation 4-slot
I/O base (5X00497G01) which provides additional wire terminations to support the 32 channels.
The 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Input cannot be used with the standard I/O Bases
(1B30035H01, 1X00014H01, or 5X00334G01).
The I/O Module General Information (see page 25) section contains environmental, installation,
wiring, and fuse information for I/O modules.
6.10.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital

Input
 5X00499G01 - 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Output Electronics module
6.10.2 Personality modules (Pmod) - 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital

Input
 1X00690H01 - The 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Input does not require a Pmod
for any electrical connections. A cavity insert is used in the Pmod location to cover the unused
Pmod connector and provide terminal wiring information.
6.10.3 Subsystems - 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Input
32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Input Subsystems
32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended 32 5X00499G01 1X00690H01

Digital Input
Note: The 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Input requires the use of an Ovation 4-slot
I/O base (5X00497) to provide additional wire terminations to support the 32 channels.
OW350_R1150 375
6.10.4 Terminal block wiring information - 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended

Digital Input
Wiring for the 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Input is illustrated in the following figure.
The following table lits and defines the abbreviations used in the diagram.
Figure 87: Terminal block connections for the 32 Channel Single-Ended Digital Input
module
-1 through -32 Digital Input Negative terminals (connect to field device contact negative
side)
FP+ Fused Power Terminal Connection (connect to field device contact
positive side)
All FP+ terminals are tied together on module
Note: Sixteen (16) screws are supplied for terminations. Two (2) wires
per screw terminal are used to achieve termination points for all 32
channels.
PS+, PS- Auxiliary Power Supply terminals. No external connections required when
using Ovation +24V DC Auxiliary Power Supply. Ovation Aux. Supply
provided to module through branch.
Reserved terminal. No connection allowed on these unmarked terminals.
+24V DC Auxiliary power is supplied through an internal branch or through terminal block
connections (PS+/PS-). Power is fused on the Emod, then supplied to all FP+ connection
terminals for connection to the positive side of the field device contact. The negative side of the
field device is connected through a digital input negative terminal (-1 through -32) to the module
where its status is monitored.
376 OW350_R1150
6.10.5 Field connection wiring diagrams - 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital

Input
Figure 88: Wiring diagram - 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Input module
6.10.6 Register configuration/status information - 32 Channel 24V DC Single-

Ended Digital Input
Controller. The status register can be read by using the Point Information window (Bit Pattern field
on the Hardware tab) at an Operator Station sSee the Ovation Operator Station User Guide).
32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Input Configuration/Status (address 13 or D in

Hex)


1 = configure 1 = configured*
0 = not configured, causing an attention status 0 = not configured
OW350_R1150 377


1 = force an attention status 1 = forced error set
0 = no forced error* 0 = no forced error*
2-6 Not defined Not defined, 0 = Permanent Value
7 Not defined Fuse status
1 = Blown fuse detected
0 = Fuse OK*
8 Not defined Ch1 - Ch4 Status
1 = Fault detected on Ch1 - Ch4
0 = No fault detected on Ch1 - Ch4*
12-15 Not defined Not defined, 0 = Permanent Value
* Default value
6.10.7 Diagnostic LEDs - 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Input
LED DESCRIPTION
P (green) Power OK LED. Lit when module main power is OK.

E (Red) External Fault LED. Lit to indicate the Auxiliary 24V DC field power is not present, is below
threshold, or Auxiliary 24V DC fuse is blown.
I (Red) Internal Fault LED. Lit when:
 The Ovation Controller is not communicating with the module.
 A channel fault exits.
1 - 32 Point Status LED. Each of the 32 channel LEDS will light when the input voltage of the
(Green) corresponding channel is greater than the minimum On Input Voltage.
Note: Fuse Rating: 0.5A, 250V Fast-acting Fuse 5X20 mm
378 OW350_R1150
6.10.8 Specifications - 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Input
32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Input Specifications
DESCRIPTION VALUE
(IEC 61131-2, Type 3)
Input Voltage category 24 VDC
Input Operating Voltage 0 to 30 VDC
Channels per Common 32
Input range (single-ended Refer to the following Digital Input Range table.
or differential)
Digital Filter Contact Debounce 3ms +/- 5%
Cable length 1000 feet maximum @ 50pF/ft or better
Diagnostics
Internal module operating Blown fuse detection, 10.0 VDC threshold
faults.
Galvanic isolation:
Between channels and I/O Bus Yes, 1000 VDC/Vrms
Between channels No
Module power  Drawn from Main: 0.70W typ; 0.81W max. with all inputs off
1.49W typ; 1.71W max. with all inputs on
 Drawn from Auxiliary: 0.96W typ; 1.13W max with all inputs off
2.88 typ; 3.31W max with all inputs on
 Power Dissipation in Emod/Pmod: 1.66W typ; 1.94W max. with all inputs
off
4.37W typ; 5.03W max with all
inputs on
Digital Input ranges
INPUT ON INPUT OFF INPUT ON INPUT CURRENT

LEVEL VOLTAGE VOLTAGE I H ( M A)
UH (VDC) UL (VDC)
MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX
24 VDC 8.2 30 0 7.2 2.43 2.6

Field input voltages equal to or greater than the minimum ON voltage (UH) and field input
currents equal to or less than the maximum ON input current (IH) will guarantee a logic
one be read by the digital input module.
OW350_R1150 379
S E C T I O N 7
7 Digital Output modules
IN THIS SECTION
Digital Output module - (DO) ........................................................................................... 382

High Side Digital Output (24 VDC) module (for Windows Ovation 3.0.4 and above) - (HSDO)
......................................................................................................................................... 410
Relay Output - (RO) ........................................................................................................ 424
Relay Output with Contact Monitoring - (ROCM) ............................................................ 437
Fused Relay Output modules - (FRO) ............................................................................ 447
32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Output module (Windows Ovation 3.4 and above)
......................................................................................................................................... 458
OW350_R1150 381
7.1 Digital Output module - (DO)
The Ovation Digital Output module provides a means to switch up to 60 VDC at moderate
currents (for example, relay coils and lamps). The Digital Output module contains 16 current
sinking transistor outputs capable of switching 60 VDC loads at up to 500mA.
The Digital Output module provides configurable communication timeout periods and LEDs to
indicate the status of each output.
The Digital Output module is a CE Mark certified module.
7.1.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (DO)

 1C31122G01 provides for switching 60 VDC loads.
7.1.2 Personality modules (Pmod) - (DO)

 1C31125G01 is used to interface the digital output module to the field through the terminal
blocks.
 1C31125G02 is used to interface the digital output module to the relay modules when power
is supplied locally (from the I/O backplane auxiliary power supply). It can also be used to
interface the digital output module to the field through the terminal blocks.
 1C31125G03 is used to interface the digital output module to the relay modules when power
is supplied remotely (from the relay modules). It can also be used to interface the digital
output module to the field through the terminal blocks.
CAUTION: When 1C31125G03 is used, the returns for the remote power supply and the local
power supply are connected together. Therefore, to avoid problems with differences in earth
ground potentials, ensure that the power supply return lines are earth grounded at only ONE
point.
7.1.3 Subsystems - (DO)
1
Digital Output subsystems

DESCRIPTION
KIT
5-60 VDC Single ended Direct 16 1C31122G01 1C31125G01
Relay Panel Interface:

Local Power Supply 16 1C31122G01 1C31125G02
Field Power Supply 16 1C31122G01 1C31125G03
Relay Panels: Solid State Relay Panel (AC) 16 5A22410G01
Solid State Relay Panel (DC) 16 5A22410G02
G2R Relay Panel (Low Power Electro-mechanical) 16 5A22411G01
382 OW350_R1150

DESCRIPTION
KIT
2 16 5A22412G01 - G03
KU Relay Panel (High Power Electro-mechanical)
1
All configurations listed in the table are CE Mark certified, unless they use AC/DC solid state relay panels.
2
Two panels (8 relays each) are included in the KU Relay Panel kit 5A22412G01, G02, and G03.
7.1.4 External power supply information - (DO)
The Digital Output module may obtain voltage from the internal auxiliary power supply
(backplane) or from an external power supply.
steps to be undertaken before connecting the external power supply to the Digital Output module
base unit terminal block. The external power supply DC output voltage level depends on the
Digital Output module application.
7.1.5 Relay Panels - (DO)
Relay panels are used to switch high currents and high voltages as required by various field
devices. The Digital Output module interfaces to the relay modules through Groups 2 and 3 of the
Personality modules and a standard cable.
The following table provides information about the three standard relay modules.
Relay contact ratings must be adhered to when utilizing the Digital Output Relay Panel
assemblies. The application must include external current limiting protection for the Digital Output
Relay Panel assemblies.
Digital Output relay panels

CHANNELS
CONNECT
CONTACT
CONTACT
MODULE
RATING
POWER
CE MK
CABLE
RELAY
INPUT
TYPE
SIZE
5A22410G01 No 35.86 cm L 16 Solid State 3.5 amps @250 246mA typ 5A26148
(14.12 in) VAC at 25 C
Solid State 7.75 cm W (1 normally 310mA Max
(3.05 in) open) 1.65 amps
@26.4V
10.46 cm H @250 VAC at
(4.12 in) 60 C
5A22410G02 No 35.86 cm L 16 Solid State 1.0 amps @200 246mA typ 5A26148
(14.12 in) VDC at 60 C
Solid State 7.75 cm W (1 normally 310mA Max
(3.05 in) open)
@26.4V
10.46 cm H
(4.12 in)
OW350_R1150 383
CHANNELS
CONNECT
CONTACT
CONTACT
MODULE
RATING
POWER
CE MK
CABLE
RELAY
INPUT
TYPE
SIZE
5A22411G01 Yes 45.09 cm L 16 Mechanical 10 amps @250 453mA typ 5A26148
(17.75 in) VAC
G2R Style 7.75 cm W (1 Form C) 610mA Max
(Low Power (3.05 in)
Electro- @26.4V
6.05 cm H 10 amps @30
mechanical) (2.38 in) VDC
1 Yes 49.5 cm L 16 Mechanical 10 amps @250 1.32A typ 5A26149
5A22412G01
KUEP Style (19.5 in) VAC
7.75 cm W (using (2 Form C) 1.8A Max
(High Power two
Electro- (3.05 in) @26.4V
9.53 cm H panels)
mechanical) 3 amps @150
(3.75 in) VDC (for 2 relay
2
Contains two panels)
5A22412H01
panels and 16
4960A71H16
relays.
1 Yes 49.5 cm L 16 Mechanical 10 amps @250 940mA typ 5A26149
5A22412G02
VAC
KUEP Style (19.5 in) (using (Form X) 1.27A Max
two
(High Power 7.75 cm W panels) @26.4V
Electro- 10 amps @150
(3.05 in) VDC (for 2 relay
mechanical) 2
9.53 cm H panels)
Contains two
(3.75 in)
5A22412H01
panels and 16
4960A71H05
relays.
1 Yes 49.5 cm L 16 Project Project Specific Project 5A26149
5A22412G03
Specific Specific
KUEP Style (19.5 in) (using
two
(High Power 7.75 cm W panels)
Electro- (3.05 in)
mechanical)
9.53 cm H
Contains two
(3.75 in)
5A22412H01
panels and up to
16 project
specific relays.
1
Two panels required for 16 outputs.
2
If one panel is used, half the power is needed.
384 OW350_R1150
7.1.6 Solid State Relay module for DIN Rail Layout (5A22410H01 / 5A22410H02) -
(DO)
24 VDC Power
NC N0 C
Connector 24 VDC Power Fuse
LED for 24VDC 24 VDC
R16
1
Power Failure Alarm Relay
2
R15
1
Field Wiring
2
Relay Terminal
Blocks
R14
1
2
R13
Retainer Screw
1
2
R12
1
2
Contact Fuse
R11
1
2
R10
1
2
Contact Status
LED
1
R9
2
1
R8
2
1
R7
2
1
R6
2
1
R5
2
1
R4
2
1
R3
2
1
R2
2
1
R1
25 Pin "D"
2
Connector
OW350_R1150 385
7.1.7 Solid State Relay module Terminations (5A22410H01 / 5A22410H02) - (DO)
NO
24VDC
+
- 1. 25A AR COM
1 NC
18
5 4 3 2 1
17
5 4 3 2 1
1 (+)
2 (-) } R16
16
5 4 3 2 1
1 (+)
2 (-) } R15
15
5 4 3 2 1
1 (+)
2 (-) } R14
14
5 4 3 2 1
1 (+)
2 (-) } R13
25 Pin
"D"
13
5 4 3 2 1
1 (+)
2 (-) } R12
Connector 12
5 4 3 2 1
1 (+)
2 (-) } R11
11
5 4 3 2 1
1 (+)
2 (-) } R10
10
5 4 3 2 1
1 (+)
2 (-) } R9
9
5 4 3 2 1
1 (+)
2 (-) } R8
5 4 3 2 1
1 (+)
2 (-) } R7
7
5 4 3 2 1
1 (+)
2 (-) } R6
5 4 3 2 1
1 (+)
2 (-) } R5
5 4 3 2 1
1 (+)
2 (-) } R4
5 4 3 2 1
1 (+)
2 (-) } R3
5 4 3 2 1
1 (+)
2 (-) } R2
2
1 (+)
2 (-) } R1
386 OW350_R1150
7.1.8 Specifications - (LI)

The following tables provide specifications for the Loop Interface module:
 General Specifications
 Analog input
 Analog output
 Digital input
 Digital output.
Loop Interface General Specifications
DESCRIPTION VALUE

Aux (when used):
Digital Inputs:
0.13W (24V) typical
0.27 W (48V) typical
Digital Outputs:
(power-dependent on loads for 2 outputs @ 100mA each)
4.8 W (24V) typical
9.6 W (48V) typical
Analog Inputs:
(2 inputs @ 20mA each)
Loop Interface Analog Input module Specifications
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Number of analog input points 2

Input range 0 to +10 V (G01)
0 to +5 V (G02)
4 to 20 mA (G03 - G04)
AI1 and AI2 current inputs must be terminated (even if not used) to
prevent point fault generation.
Resolution 13-Bits (including polarity)
1 0.10% of upper range value 10 V 1/2LSB @99.7% confidence
Guaranteed accuracy (@25 C)
Temperature coefficient 0.24% of the upper range value 24 V over 0 to 60 C.
OW350_R1150 387
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Input impedance:
0 to 10V groups 2 M ohm
0 to 5V groups, and 4 to 20mA 1 M OHM
groups
Sampling rate 10 samples per second under normal conditions.
8 samples per second during auto calibration.
Offset and gain temperature drift Automatic
compensation
Out of range detection.
Open loop/blown fuse detection for current loops.
Normal mode rejection 60 dB at 50 Hz 1/2% or 60 Hz 1/2%
30 dB (typical) at 50 Hz 5% or 60 Hz 5%
Common mode rejection 120 dB at DC; power line frequency and its harmonics 1/2%
without line frequency tracking.
100 dB (typical) for nominal line frequency 5% and harmonics
without line frequency tracking.
1
See additional information for CE Mark certified systems.
Loop Interface Analog Output module Specifications
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Number of points 1 - Analog output is not present for Group 4 (electric drive) modules.
AO current outputs in G03 - G04 must be terminated (even if not used)
to prevent point fault generation.
Maximum update time 2 mSec
Output range 0 - 10 V@ minimum 1 K ohms load impedance (10mA Maximum load)
(G01 - G02)
4 - 20 mA @ Maximum 750 Ohms load impedance (0 Ohms minimum)
(G03)
Resolution 12 bits
Guaranteed accuracy (@25 C ±0.10% of span
1
1 C)
Temperature coefficient 0 to 10 V groups: 30 ppm/ C
4 to 20mA groups: 45 ppm/ C
User loop voltage Power for current loop output is supplied by module.
Diagnostics Internal module operating faults
 Overcurrent
 Undercurrent
Channel ground to channel Maximum 1000 V AC/DC
ground
Channel ground to logic ground Maximum 1000 V AC/DC
388 OW350_R1150
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Output loading 0 - 10 V@ minimum 1 K ohms load impedance (10mA Maximum load)

4 - 20 mA @ Maximum 750 ohms load impedance (0 ohms minimum)
1
See additional information for CE Mark certified systems (see page 791).
Loop Interface Digital Input module Specifications
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Number of points Two digital inputs dedicated as priority raise and lower inputs. If
priority raise and lower inputs are not desired, shorting wires
should be placed across the inputs (+1 to -1 and +2 to -2) to
eliminate possible false turn on from noise.
Input range 24V or 48V typ 18 -60 VDC
Propagation delay of contact change 1.9 mSec minimum; 35.0 mSec Maximum
of state
Cable length (quality is 50pF/ft or 1000 feet Maximum
better)
Diagnostics Internal module operating faults
 Auxiliary power supply blown fuse detection (enabled/disabled)
 Priority raise and lower error, also referred to as runbacks,
(both raise and lower active)
Channel ground to channel ground Maximum 1000V AC/DC
Channel ground to logic ground Maximum 1000V AC/DC
External (auxiliary) power supply If desired, the digital input auxiliary supply voltage may be the
same voltage as that used for the digital outputs. This voltage is
provided as an output between terminals Vf+ and V-. This fused
voltage (Vf+) is monitored as an additional digital input. Input
characteristics are identical to the other two digital inputs.
Loop Interface Digital Output module Specifications
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Number of points 2
Output voltage
Off voltage (Maximum) 5 VDC minimum, 60 VDC maximum (auxiliary power
supply)
On voltage (Maximum) 1.0 VDC @ 500mA
Output current
Off current (Maximum) 25 A @ Tamb = 25 C, VDS=60 VDC
On current for individual output (Maximum) 250 A @ Tamb = 60 C, VDS=60 VDC
On current for two outputs combined 500 mA
(Maximum) 880 mA limited by fuse rating
OW350_R1150 389
DESCRIPTION VALUE
External (auxiliary) supply voltage Voltage = 5 VDC minimum, 60 VDC Maximum

The return line and auxiliary power supply voltage is
common to both points but is galvanically isolated from
logic ground. This auxiliary supply voltage originates from
the terminal block
(on inputs V+ and V-) and is fused on the personality
module.
The fused voltage is distributed back out to the terminal
blocks as +1, +2 for the digital outputs and Vf+ for the
digital inputs. Each digital output is diode clamped to this
fused auxiliary supply voltage to prevent damage from
inductive load surges.
The fused auxiliary supply voltage is monitored as an
additional digital input. Input characteristics are identical to
the digital inputs.
Diagnostics Internal module operation faults
Auxiliary supply blown fuse detection (enabled/disabled)
Maximum propagation time 14.5 mSec for Rload=500W

This time is comprised of the microprocessor firmware
digital output update rate, which is once per loop, or
approximately every 12 ms, plus the delay time for the
output, which is 2.5 ms Max at Rload = 500 W.
Channel ground to logic ground Maximum ±1000V AC/DC
390 OW350_R1150
7.1.9 G2R Style Relay module for DIN Rail Layout (5A22411H01) - (DO)
24 VDC Power
NC N0 C NC N0 C NC N0 C NC N0 C NC N0 C NC N0 C NC N0 C NC N0 C NC N0 C NC N0 C NC N0 C NC N0 C NC N0 C NC N0 C NC N0 C NC N0 C NC N0 C
Connector 24 VDC Power Fuse
LED for 24VDC

Power Failure 24 VDC
Alarm Relay
R16
R15
R14
Relay
R13
Field Wiring
Terminal Blocks
R12
R11
Relay Status Contact Diagram

LED
R10
R9
Relay Retainer
Clip
R8
R7
R6
R5
R4
R3
R2
R1
25 Pin "D"
Connector
OW350_R1150 391
7.1.10 Blown Fuse Detection Circuit - (DO)
Bit 6 in the status register enables the Controller to monitor the status of the field supply fuse, and
it also gives a visual indication of the status via the “EXTERNAL ERROR” LED.
The Controller enables this feature by writing a “1” to Bit 7 of the configuration register. If enabled
and the field supply voltage is between 15VDC and 60VDC, the circuit indicates that the field
supply fuse is OK by turning OFF the “EXTERNAL ERROR” LED and clearing Bit 6 of the module
status register. If enabled and the field supply voltage is less than 0.4VDC, the circuit indicates
that the field supply fuse is blown by turning ON the “EXTERNAL ERROR” LED and setting Bit 6
of the module status register.
If the card is operated with a field supply voltage less than 15V, the output circuit continues to
operate properly. However, the blown fuse detection may not give an accurate indication of the
fuse state. In this case, the Controller has the capability to disable the detection circuit by writing a
“0” to Bit 7 of the configuration register. When Bit 7 is a “0” the “EXTERNAL ERROR” LED is
turned OFF and the blown fuse status bit (Bit 6 of the status register) is cleared which indicates
the fuse is OK.
In summary, this feature is specified to operate as follows:

 15VDC < Field supply voltage < 60VDC => Fuse is OK
 0.4VDC < Field supply voltage < 15VDC => UNDEFINED
 Field supply voltage < 0.4VDC => Fuse is blown
 After a power-on reset the blown fuse detection circuit is disabled.
392 OW350_R1150
7.1.11 G2R Style Relay module terminations (5A22411H01) - (DO)
12K
NO
Alarm
24VDC
+ COM Relay
1. 25A AR
-
NC
1
NO
18 4.7K
R16 COM
17 NC
NO
4.7K
R15 COM
NC
16 NO
4.7K
R14 COM
NC
15 NO
4.7K
R13 COM
14 NC
NO
4.7K
R12 COM
13 NC
25 Pin NO
4.7K
"D" R11 COM
Connector 12 NC
NO
4.7K
R10 COM
11 NC
NO
4.7K
R9 COM
10 NC
NO
4.7K
R8 COM
9 NC
NO
4.7K
R7 COM
8 NC
NO
4.7K
R6 COM
7 NC
NO
4.7K
R5 COM
6 NC
NO
4.7K
R4 COM
5
NC
4.7K NO
R3 COM
4
NC
NO
4.7K
R2 COM
3
NC
NO
4.7K
R1 COM
2 NC
OW350_R1150 393
7.1.12 KUEP Style Relay module for DIN Rail Layout (5A22412G01 / 5A22412G02) -
(DO)
NC N0 C
LED for 24VDC 24VDC Power Fuse
Power Failure
2NC 2NO 2C
24VDC Power
Connector 24VDC Alarm
Contacts
2NC 2NO 2C IC IN0 INC

R8
24 VDC
Alarm Relay
Field Wiring
R7
Terminal
Blocks
1C 1N0 1NC 2NC 2NO 2C 1C 1N0 1NC 2NC 2NO 2C 1C 1N0 1NC2NC 2NO 2C 1C 1N0 1NC 2NC 2NO 2C 1C 1N0 1NC 2NC 2NO 2C 1C 1N0 1NC 2NC 2NO 2C IC IN0 INC
Relay Status
R6
Contact
LED Diagram
R5
KUEP
Relay
R4
Relay Hold
Down Spring
R3
R2
R1
25 Pin "D"
Connector
394 OW350_R1150
7.1.13 KUEP (2 Form C) Relay module Terminations (5A22412G01) - (DO)
12K
NO
24VDC
+ COM
F11 2A AR
-
NC
1
2NO
18 4.7K
R8 2C
9 2NC
1NO
1C
1NC
2NO
4.7K 2C
R7
2NC
8 1NO
1C
1NC
2NO
4.7K
R6 2C
25 Pin 7 2NC
1NO
"D" 1C
Connector 1NC
2NO
4.7K
R5 2C
6 2NC
1NO
1C
1NC
2NO
4.7K
R4 2C
5 2NC
1NO
1C
1NC
2NO
4.7K
R3 2C
4 2NC
1NO
1C
1NC
2NO
4.7K
Note: R2 2C
3
Only the first 2NC
1NO
eight relays of
1C
the first relay
1NC
panel are shown. 4.7K
2NO
R1 2C
2 2NC
1NO
1C
1NC
OW350_R1150 395
7.1.14 KUEP (Form X) Relay module terminations (5A22412G02) - (DO)
12K
NO
24VDC
+ COM
F11 2A AR
-
NC
1
2NO
18 4.7K
R8
9 1NO
2NO
4.7K
R7
1NO
8
2NO
4.7K
R6
7 1NO
25 Pin
"D"
Connector
2NO
4.7K
R5
1NO
6
2NO
4.7K
R4
5 1NO
2NO
4.7K
R3
4 1NO
2NO
4.7K
R2
3 1NO
Note:
Only the first
eight relays of the 2NO
first relay panel 4.7K
R1
are shown.
2 1NO
396 OW350_R1150
7.1.15 Terminal block wiring information - (DO)
block in the base unit. The diagram for the Digital Output personality module is shown in the
following figure. The following table lists and defines the abbreviations used in that diagram.
information.
Figure 89: Terminal Block Connections for the Digital Output Personality Modules
Abbreviations Used in Wiring Diagrams
Earth Ground terminals.
+ Digital output positive terminal connections.

- Digital output negative terminal connections.
SH Shield.

You should always adhere to channel specifications and polarity when connecting load devices to
the digital output module. This ensures proper operation of the digital output module and avoids
potential damage to either the digital output module or load device.
OW350_R1150 397
7.1.16 Field connection wiring diagram - (DO)
Group 1
Electronics Module Personality Module
1.25 A
PS+
Load
-
1 of 16
SH
1 of 16
PS-
- +
V (Local)
Notes
1. V (Local) is the I/O backplane auxiliary power supply.
2. Shielded cables are required for IEC 801-5 compliance.
Figure 90: Field Connection for the Digital Output Personality Module (Group 1) (Non-CE
Mark Certified Systems)
398 OW350_R1150
7.1.17 Field connection wiring diagram (Group 1) (CE Mark) - (DO)
Group 1
Electronics Module Personality Module
1.25 A
PS+
Load
-
See 1 of 16
note 3
1 of 16
PS-
- +
V (Local)
Notes
3. All field wiring must be braid shielded and grounded at the entry point of the cabinet using the
recommended hardware (see the appropriate "Cable Guidelines" information for your system).
Figure 91: Field Connection for the Digital Output Personality Module (Group 1) (CE Mark
Certified System)
OW350_R1150 399
7.1.18 Wiring diagram to relay module (G2R or Solid State) locally powered - (DO)
Electronics Group 2
Module Personality Module Signals through 25 Pin D Connector
3.15 A
Relay Module
(G2R or Solid State)
1 of 16
Relay Relay
17
See
1 of 16 note 4 Cable
5A26148
Signals through 37 Pin D Connector
- +
V (Local)
Notes
3. Relay 17 is used to indicate the status of the power supply.
4. For CE Mark certified systems where cable 5A26148 exits the cabinet or a suited set
of EMC cabinets: The cable shield must be grounded at the entry point of the cabinet
using the recommended hardware(see the appropriate "Cable Guidelines" information
for your system).
5. Solid State Relay Configurations not CE Mark Certified.
Figure 92: Digital Output Module to Relay Module (G2R or Solid State) Locally Powered
400 OW350_R1150
7.1.19 Wiring diagram to relay module (G2R or Solid State) - (DO)
Group 3
Electronics Module Personality Module Signals through 25 Pin D Connector V (Remote)
Relay Module
(G2R or Solid State)
1 of 16
+
Relay Relay
17 -
See
note 4 Cable
1 of 16 5A26148
Notes
1. V (Remote) is a supply provided via the relay module.
using the recommended hardware (see the appropriate "Cable Guidelines" information
for your system).
5. Solid
. State Relay Configurations not CE Mark Certified.
Figure 93: Digital Output Module to Relay Module (G2R or Solid State)
OW350_R1150 401
7.1.20 Wiring diagram to relay module (KUEP Style) locally powered (CE Mark) -
(DO)
Group 2
Electronics Module Personality Module Signals through 25 Pin D Connector
3.15 A
Relay Module
(KUEP Style)
1 of 8
Relay Relay
9
See
1 of 8 note 4 Cable
5A26149
Relay Module
(KUEP Style)
1 of 8
Relay Relay
9
See
note 4 Cable
1 of 8 5A26149
- +
V (Local)
Notes

for your system).
Figure 94: Digital Output Module to Relay Module (KUEP Style) Locally Powered (Non-CE
and CE Mark)
402 OW350_R1150
7.1.21 Wiring diagram to relay module (KUEP style remotely powered (CE Mark) -
(DO)
Electronics Group 3
Module Personality Module Signals through 25 Pin D Connector
V (Remote)
Relay Module
(KUEP Style)
1 of 8
+
Relay Relay
9 -
See
1 of 8 note 4 Cable
5A26149
Relay Module
(KUEP Style)
1 of 8
Relay Relay
9
See
note 5 Cable
1 of 8 5A26149
Notes
1. V (Remote) is a supply provided via the relay module.

for your system).
Figure 95: Digital Output Module to Relay Module (KUEP Style) Remotely Powered (Non-CE
and CE Mark)
OW350_R1150 403
7.1.22 Relay panel application diagrams - (DO)
The following figures illustrate three types of applications for relay panels.
Notes
1. 5A22412G01 includes two 8 position relay panels
containing two form C relays.
2. 5A22412G02 includes two 8 position relay panels
containing one form X relays.
Hood 3. 5A22412G03 includes two 8 position relay panels
QBO Hood with
1 no relays installed. This is a project specific
Card * 1 relay panel assembly in which the project determines
the mix and location of two form C and one form X
relays on the relay panel.
4. This relay panel application is not applicable for use
in CE Mark Certified systems.
R8
Relay
Panel
R7
1
R6
5A22412.
R5
Relays for points 1 - 8
R4
R3
R2
R1
Cable 5A22254
Hood 2
R8
Relay
Panel
R7
2
R6
5A22412.
R5

R4
R3
R2
R1
* Ovation Controller
Interface to Q-Line I/O
Hood 3
Figure 96: Relay Panels to Q-Line (QBO Card)
404 OW350_R1150
Ovation I/O Base Notes

Terminal
Blocks Digital Output 1. 5A22412G01 includes two 8 position
relay panels containing two form C relays.
2. 5A22412G02 includes two 8 position
relay panels containing two form X relays.
3. 5A22412G03 includes one 8 position
Electronic Module relay panels with no relays installed.
1C31122G01 This is a project specific relay panel
assembly in which the project
Relay Panel
determines the mix and location of two
5A22412
form C and one form X relays on the
relay panel.
Relay
R8
Panel
R7
Personality Module 1
1C31125G02
R6
or
R5
1C31125G03 Relays for points 1 - 8
R4
R3
R2
R1
Cable 5A26149
Hood 2
5A22412
R8
Relay
Panel
R7
2
R6
R5

R4
R3
R2
R1
Hood 3
Figure 97: KUEP Relay Panels to Ovation I/O Base
OW350_R1150 405
Notes:
Terminal Ovation I/O Base 1. 5A22410G01 includes one 16 position

Blocks Digital Output relay panel containing solid state AC relays.
relay panel containing solid state DC relays.
relay panel containing one from C relays.
Electronic Module 4. Solid State Relay Configurations not CE
1C31122G01 Mark Certified.
Relay Panel
5A22410 or 5A22411
R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 R10 R11 R12 R13 R14 R15 R16

Relay
Panel
Personality Module
1C31125G02
or
1C31125G03 Relays for points 1 - 16
Cable 5A26148
Hood 2
Figure 98: Solid State or G2R Relay Panels to Ovation I/O Base
406 OW350_R1150
7.1.23 Register configuration/address information - (DO)
Guide.)
Digital Output Configuration/Status Register (Address 13 or D in Hex)
BIT DATA DESCRIPTION - CONFIGURATION REGISTER DATA DESCRIPTION - STATUS REGISTER

(WRITE) (READ)
0 Configured (active high) Configured (active high)

(1=configured; 0=unconfigured)
1 Forced Error (active high) Forced Error (active high)
(1=forced error; 0=no forced error)
2- 4 1 1
BIT 4 BIT 3 BIT 2 TIMEOUT BIT 4 BIT 3 BIT 2 TIMEOUT
1 0 0 500 millisecs 1 0 0 500 millisecs
1 1 1 62.5 millisecs 1 1 1 62.5 millisecs
5 Outputs hold their state on communications timeout Outputs hold their state on communications
(active high) timeout (active high)
6 Not used Indicates the status of the blown fuse detection
circuit (high = field supply fuse is blown)
7 Enable blown detection circuit (active high) Enable blown detection circuit (active high)
1
Bit 0: When Bit 0 is set, the module is configured. The Controller configures the module by
writing a “1” to bit 0 of the configuration register. Once configured, it remains configured until
a power up/down reset is generated. After a power-up condition, the configuration register is
cleared.
Bit 1: When Bit 1 is set, the internal error LED is turned on and data registers can be written
but not read.
Bit 5: When Bit 5 is set, the digital outputs hold their last state on a communications
watchdog timeout. When Bit 5 is cleared, the digital outputs are cleared (output transistor is
shut off) on a communications watchdog timeout.
OW350_R1150 407
Bit 6: This bit indicates the status of the blown fuse detection circuit (see page 392). When Bit
6 of the status register is set, the field supply fuse is blown.
Bit 7: When Bit 7 is set, the blown fuse detection circuit is enabled.
CAUTION: This module contains Communications Timeout Settings (Timeout Action and
7.1.24 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (DO)
LED DESCRIPTION

module.
E (Red) External Fault LED. Lit when the field supply fuse is blown and the blown fuse detection
circuit is enabled. Blown Fuse bit (Bit 7) of the Configuration Register (see page 407)
enables or disables the fuse detection circuit (high enabled).
I (Red) Internal Fault LED. Lit whenever the Force Error bit (Bit 1 of the Configuration Register
(see page 407)) is active, or the Controller stops communicating with the module.
1 - 16 (Green) If the LED is lit, this indicates that the output is in the ON state.
If the LED is not lit, this indicates that the output is in the OFF state.
7.1.25 Specifications - (DO)

DESCRIPTION VALUE
Output voltage
Off voltage (Maximum) 60 VDC
On voltage (Maximum) 1.0 V @ 500mA
0.2 V @ 100mA
Output current
Off Current (Maximum) 25 A @ TA = 25 C, VDS = 60 VDC
250 A @ TA = 60 C, VDS = 60 VDC
On current for all 16 outputs Limited by fuse rating
combined (Max)
408 OW350_R1150
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Personality module Group 1 890mA Maximum for all 16 outputs

1 2.2A Maximum for all 16 outputs
Personality module Group 2
1 Limited by the fuse located on the relay module
Personality module Group 3
On current for individual output (Max) 500 mA
2
Blown fuse detection
Operating voltage range 15V field supply voltage 60V
Maximum propagation time 2.5 mSec for Rload=500

3
Module power Main: 2.2 W typical, 3.3 W Maximum

Aux used with no relay panels:
8 outputs on @ 100mA each
Aux used with the following relay panels:
Solid State panel with 16 relays: 5.9 W (24V) typical
G2R panel with 16 relays: 10.87 W (24V) typical
KUEP panel with 8 Form C relays: 15.84 W (24V) typical
2 KUEP panels with 16 Form C relays: 31.68 W (24V) typical
KUEP panel with 8 Form X relays: 11.28 W (24V) typical
2 KUEP panels with 16 Form X relays: 22.56 W (24V) typical
Inductive Kick Protection method 4
Diode
1
The personality module Groups 2 and 3 are used to interface with the relay modules (see page 383).
2
You can configure the card to disable the blown fuse detection function.
3
All 16 channels have a common return which is galvanically isolated from the logic ground.
4
Inductive kick diode located on the personality module. Diode is specified to protect the MOSFET when
connected to loads within the digital output channel specifications (Off voltage = 60VDC and On current =
500mA).
Note: The output channels maintain proper operation when subjected to IEC 61131-2, second
edition, 2003-02 Section 9.12 Voltage Drops and Interruptions Immunity testing (condition tested
with the standard Ovation power supply providing both the main and auxiliary power to the
Digital Output Module).
OW350_R1150 409
7.2 High Side Digital Output (24 VDC) module (for Windows Ovation 3.0.4 and above) - (HSDO)
7.2 High Side Digital Output (24 VDC) module (for Windows Ovation
3.0.4 and above) - (HSDO)
The Ovation High Side Digital Output 24VDC (HSDO) module is an intelligent microcontroller-
based digital output module. The HSDO consists of two modules, (electronics and personality),
that are inserted into an Ovation I/O module base unit. The HSDO module contains sixteen
optically isolated digital output channels. Each digital output channel is capable of sourcing up to
500 mA of output current.
These sixteen optically isolated digital output channels share a common 24VDC power source.
Power for all sixteen digital output channels is supplied from either of the following power sources:
 Ovation power supply AUX output. (Maximum total output current limited to 2A per module
when 24V Aux. power is used.)
OR
 External 24VDC power source. (Maximum total output current limited to 4A per module.)
Each digital output channel has an intelligent power switch which contains a high-side power
MOSFET switch used to switch 24VDC power to an external load.
Series isolation diodes are located between each intelligent power switch output pin and the
output terminals of all sixteen digital output channels. The presence of these isolation diodes
permit the 24VDC HSDO module to operate in either of the following two modes:
 Single/simplex mode (independent of any other module).
OR
 Redundant mode (connected in parallel with another 24VDC HSDO module).
When the 24VDC HSDO module operates in redundant mode, a cable assembly is necessary to
link together the personality modules of the two redundant 24VDC HSDO modules. Refer to the
HSDO to HSDO Cable Assembly Routing Information - Redundant Configuration (see page 415).
Note: When this cable assembly is installed, customer field signal wiring only needs to be
connected to one base unit terminal block.
7.2.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (HSDO)

 5X00270G01 provides 24VDC 500 mA output switching capability.
7.2.2 Personality modules (Pmod) - (HSDO)

 5X00273G01 provides voltage suppression networks for each digital output channel, 24VDC
field power filtering and connectors to permit redundant mode operation.
7.2.3 Subsystem - (HSDO)
High Side Digital Output (24VDC) subsystems

MODULE MODULE
24VDC 16 5X00270G01 5X00273G01
410 OW350_R1150
7.2.4 Module block diagram - (HSDO)
Figure 99: 24 VDC High Side Digital Output Module Block Diagram
OW350_R1150 411
7.2.5 Redundant module interconnection - (HSDO)
Figure 100: Redundant Module Interconnection for the 24VDC HSDO Module
412 OW350_R1150
7.2.6 Field signal wiring information - (HSDO)
Each Personality module has a simplified wiring diagram label affixed to its side; this label
appears above the base unit terminal block. This diagram indicates how the wiring from external
field loads is to be connected to the HSDO module's base unit terminal block.
information.
Figure 101: Field Signal Terminal Connections for the HSDO Module Base Unit
Abbreviations used in diagram
ABBREVIATION/SYMBOL DEFINITION
+ Digital output positive terminal connection.

- Digital output negative terminal connection.
EX+, EX- 24VDC Field Power input terminals.
PS+, PS- Cabinet Auxiliary 24VDC power source terminals.
Note: Do not make connections to any base unit terminal labeled RSV.
 When HSDO modules are operated in redundant pairs, field wiring is only connected to the
base unit terminals of one HSDO module in the redundant pair.
OW350_R1150 413
7.2.7 Field power wiring information for module base unit terminal blocks -
(HSDO)
Figure 102: Field Power Terminal Connections for the HSDO Module Base Unit
Note: HSDO module field power connections must be made to both redundant HSDO modules’
base unit terminal blocks.
Using an external 24VDC field power source:

 Connect the external 24VDC field power source positive to all four of the base unit EX+
terminals. The external 24VDC field power source positive connection must be fused.
 Connect the external 24VDC field power source return to all four of the base unit EX-
terminals.
Using the cabinet Auxiliary 24VDC power source:
 Connect one of the two base unit PS+ terminals to all four base unit EX+ terminals. This
connection must be fused using a 2A IEC 60127-2 quick-acting fuse.
 Connect the base unit PS- terminal to all four base unit EX- terminals.
Note: For the cabinet Auxiliary 24 VDC field power scheme, the Maximum HSDO module digital
output current is limited to a Maximum of 2A due to current capacity limitations of the Ovation
Base Unit block terminals.
414 OW350_R1150
7.2.8 Module cables for High Side Digital Output 24VDC - (HSDO)
The following power cable/wire assemblies are used for the 24VDC HSDO module.
PART NUMBE R DESCRIPTION
1X00392G01 HSDO to HSDO interface cable assembly (used only for redundant mode operations).
1X00395G01 HSDO field power wire assembly - 24VDC Return.
1X00395G02 HSDO field power wire assembly - 24VDC.
7.2.9 HSDO to HSDO Cable Assembly Routing Information Redundant

Configuration - (HSDO)
An HSDO to HSDO cable assembly (1X00392G01), is required for redundant HSDO module
configurations. The diagram below illustrates redundant HSDO module placement and the routing
configuration of the HSDO to HSDO cable assembly.
Figure 103: HSDO to HSDO Cable Assembly Routing - Redundant Configuration
Note: The 1X00392G01 cable assembly is not required for HSDO modules operating in
single/simplex mode configurations.
OW350_R1150 415
7.2.10 Module channel fault register - (HSDO)
The Module Channel Fault Register is module I/O register 12 (0xC in Hex). Word address 12
(0xC in Hex) serves as a channel fault register. Each module digital output channel is assigned a
bit in this register. Each channel's fault bit is cleared if no digital output faults have been detected
for that channel. If the module's microcontroller detects a channel digital output fault, then a
register fault bit is set for that channel.
The Module Status register Bit 14, Digital Output fault, is the logical OR of all sixteen Module
Channel fault register fault bits.
Module channel fault register bit assignments (address 12 or 0xC).
BIT READ DEFINITION
0 - 15 Channel 1 - 16 Digital Output Fault
7.2.11 Field power shutoff - (HSDO)
An HSDO module shuts off its field power for one of the two following scenarios:
All the following conditions must be true:
 Module detects a power switch output short circuit to +24V fault.

 Module is configured for redundant mode operation.
 Module observes that its partner HSDO module is alive.
 Module observes that the partner HSDO module is healthy.
OR WHEN
All of the following conditions must be true:
 The HSDO module was configured with redundant operation enabled, but then becomes
unconfigured for at least three seconds.
 Module observes that its partner HSDO module is alive.
 Module observes that the partner HSDO module is healthy.
416 OW350_R1150
7.2.12 Register configuration/address information - (HSDO)
The Module Configuration/Module Status register is module I/O register 13 (0xD). Word address
13 (0xD in Hex) is used to configure the HSDO module and to provide status information to the
Controller. The Module Status register can be read by using the Point Information window at an
Operator Station (see the Bit Pattern Field on the Hardware Tab). (Refer to the Ovation Operator
Station User Guide.) The Module Configuration/Module Status register assignments are defined
in the following table:
Module configuration/module status register low byte bit assignments (address 13 or 0xD
in Hex)

CONFIGURATION REGISTER (WRITE STATUS REGIS TE R (RE AD DE FINITION)
DEFINITION)
0 Configure module - (1 = configure). Module Configured (1 = configured).

(0 = unconfigured).
1 Force Error (1 = force internal error). Forced Error (1 = forced error).
(0 = no forced error).
2 I/O Bus Communications Timeout Bit 0. I/O Bus Communications Timeout Bit 0.
Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Timeout period Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Timeout period
0 0 0 16.777 seconds 0 0 0 16.777 seconds
0 0 1 4.194 seconds 0 0 1 4.194 seconds
0 1 0 2.097 seconds 0 1 0 2.097 seconds
0 1 1 1.049 seconds 0 1 1 1.049 seconds
5 I/O Bus Communications Timeout Action. I/O Bus Communications Timeout Action selection.
1 = Digital Outputs hold their state upon an I/O
Bus Communications timeout.
I/O Bus Communications Timeout.
0 = Digital Outputs reset upon an I/O Bus
Communications Timeout.
6 Not Used. Not Used.
7 Field card power status handling. Field card power status handling section.
1 = Module External Error if no 24 VDC field
power present.
Bit definitions for this registers low byte are encoded as shown in the previous table and
described below:
Bit 0: When Bit 0 is set, the module is configured. The module digital outputs cannot be
controlled until the Controller has set Module Configuration register bit 0.
OW350_R1150 417
Bit 1: Bit 1 is the Force-Error Bit. When Bit 1 is set, the modules Internal Error LED is
illuminated. The module goes into Attention status.
Bits 2 - 4: These three Bits select the I/O Bus Communication Timeout period.
Bit 5: I/O Bus Communications Timeout Action Bit.
Bit 5 is set: When no communications between the Controller and the HSDO module
occur during a time period specified by bits by Bits 4, 3, and 2, the following happens:
 Module digital outputs hold their last value.
 Communications OK LED is off and the Internal Error LED is illuminated.
Bit 5 is cleared: When no communications between the Controller and module takes
place during a time period defined by Bits 4, 3, and 2, the following happens:
 Module digital outputs are turned off.
 Communications OK LED is off and the Internal Error LED is illuminated.
Bit 6: This bit is not used.
Bit 7: This bit is the Field Card Power Status Handling Bit.
Bit 7 is set: If the module's external 24VDC power supply voltage is not present, the
following happens:
 External Error LED is illuminated.
 Module goes into Attention status.
Bit 7 is cleared: If the module's external 24VDC power supply voltage is not present, the
following happens:
 External LED is not illuminated.
 Module does not go into Attention status. With no field power present, the module
digital outputs do not function.
Module Configuration/Module Status Register High Byte Bit Assignments (Address 13 or

0xD in Hex)

DEFINITION)
8 Dynamic Digital Output Test Time Interval Bit 0. Field_Cable_Absent

Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Dynamic Digital 1 = Field interface cable absent in redundant mode.
Output Test
0 = Field interface cable present or single mode
Interval
operation.
0 0 0 24 hours
0 0 1 12 hours
0 1 0 8 hours
0 1 1 4 hours
1 0 0 2 hours
1 0 1 1 hour
1 1 0 30 minutes
1 1 1 15 minutes
418 OW350_R1150

DEFINITION)
9 Dynamic Digital Output Test Time Interval Bit 1. Cross_Cable_Absent

1 = Cross connect cable absent in redundant mode.
0 = Cross connect cable present or single mode
operation.
10 Dynamic Digital Output Test Time Interval Bit 2. Partner Not Responding Absent
1 = Partner not responding in redundant mode.
0 = Partner responding or single mode operation.
11 Not Used. Application Code Invalid
1 = Application code stored in internal module memory
is not valid.
12 Not Used. Internal Logic Card fault.
13 Not Used. No Field Power
14 Digital Output Fault Handling Method Selection: Digital Output fault.
1 = Alarm only upon Digital Output fault.
0 = Alarm and shut off field power upon Digital
Output fault.
15 Redundant/Single operation mode selection: Redundant/Single operating mode selection:
1 = Select Redundant mode operation. 1 = Redundant mode operation selected.
0 = Select Single mode operation. 0 = Single mode operation selected.
Bit definitions for this registers high byte are encoded as shown in the above table and described
below:
Bits 8 - 10: These three Configuration Register Bits select the Dynamic Digital Output Test
Time Interval.
Bit 11: When Status Register Bit 11 is set, the module microcontroller application firmware
stored in internal memory is not valid.
Bit 12: When Status Register Bit 12 is set, at least one of three internal logic card faults are
detected by the modules internal microcontroller's self tests: Microcontroller Register fault,
Microcontroller RAM Fault, Boot Loader Firmware Code Checksum error.
Bit 13: When Status Register Bit 13 is set, there is no 24VDC field power present to power
the modules intelligent power switches.
Bit 14: Bit 14 is the Digital Output fault Handling Bit.
Bit 14 is set: The module never shuts off its power in the event of a digital output fault.
Bit 14 is cleared: Module field power shuts off for a digital output fault if all of the
following conditions are true:
 Digital Output is a power switch short circuit to 24V.
 Module is operating in redundant mode.
 Partner HSDO module is alive.
 Partner HSDO module is healthy.
Bit 14 Digital Output Fault - This Status Register bit is set for one of the following
conditions:
 Digital output fault.
 Internal logic fault.
OW350_R1150 419
 Application code invalid.

Bit 15: Single or Redundant mode selection bit.
7.2.13 Diagnostics - (HSDO)
For both stand-alone and redundant High Side Digital Output module configurations, power switch
diagnostic bits are accessed every 25 milliseconds. If a digital output fault is detected on a
channel, the corresponding Module Channel Fault register fault bit is set. When any bit in the
Module Channel Fault register is set, the Module Status register (register 0xD) Digital Output fault
bit (Bit 14) is also set.
These digital output fault conditions can be detected and reported:

 Power switch output short circuit to ground.
 Power switch output short circuit to +24V (switch cannot be turned off).
 Power switch power supply under-voltage.
 Power switch open circuit (switch cannot be turned on).
When HSDO modules operate in a redundant module configuration, a dynamic power switch turn-
off test is performed periodically. By communicating over the cross-connect cable serial link, the
two HSDO modules coordinate their dynamic power switch turn-off testing so that both modules
do not shut off their power switch outputs at the same time.
Upon module insertion, after communication between modules is established, and after 12
additional seconds have elapsed, the HSDO module performs the dynamic power switch turn-off
test. The HSDO module will then performs test periodically at a time interval ranging from 15
minutes to 24 hours. This time interval is selected by the values of Module Configuration register
bits 10, 9 and 8.
The Ovation 24VDC High Side Digital Output LDH logic card contains 20 LEDs to display module
status. The following figure illustrates the LED array:
Figure 104: LED Configuration for the24VDC High Side Digital Output Electronics Module
420 OW350_R1150
The following table lists the module LEDs and describes what each indicates.
24VDC High Side Digital Output
LED DESCRIPTION
P - (green ) Power OK LED. This LED is lit when the Electronics module card 5VDC power is okay.
C - (green) Communications OK LED, which is lit when the Controller is communicating with the
module.
E - (red) External Error LED - This LED is lit when both of the following conditions are true:
Field power is absent
 Module Configuration register Bit 7 is set.
I - (red) Internal Error LED - This LED is lit when one or more of the following conditions are true:
Controller is not communicating with the module.
Internal microcontroller sets its internal error bit.
 Module Configuration Error Bit 1 is set.
1 - 16 (green) Channel 1 - 16 Status - Lit when the Channel 1 power switch is turned on and not lit when
the Channel 1 - 16 power switch is turned off.
Note: All switches are turned off when dynamic testing occurs. The LEDs which were on,
indicate that the output switch is active, and blink off for 25 mSec, or 50 mSec during the test.
OW350_R1150 421
7.2.14 Specifications - (HSDO)

DESCRIPTION VALUE
Number of Digital Output Channels. 16

Output Voltage
On Voltage (Minimum) 22.5VDC @ 500mA (VS = 24VDC)
Off Voltage (Maximum) 0.6VDC
Output Current
On current for individual output (Maximum). 500 mA
On current for individual output (Minimum). 6 mA (minimum load current required for proper diagnostic
operation).
Off current for individual output (Maximum). 100 uA
On current for all 16 outputs combined 4 A (2A if field power source equals auxiliary power).
(Maximum).
Output Short Circuit to Supply Common
Minimum current limit 750 mA
Maximum current limit 1.5 A
Note: After a channel output short circuit to supply common short

circuit fault is cleared, the channel resumes normal operation.
Multiple digital output channels can handle output short circuit to
supply common faults until the total module field supply current
exceeds 4A, which is the rating of the Electronics module’s 4A
quick acting IEC 60127-2 fuse.
Field Power Operating Voltage Range:

Minimum: 21.6 VDC
Maximum: 26.4 VDC
Field Circuit Current 4 A Max. (2 A Max. if 24 VDC Aux. power is used)
Actual field current is dependent on the number of ON digital output
channels and the external load impedances.
Output State Transition Time
(I/O Bus access to Output state change)
OFF to ON, nominal 100 microseconds
ON to OFF, nominal 200 microseconds
Dielectric Isolation 1,000 VDC for one minute, field to logic
500 VAC RMS for one minute, field to logic
Module Main Power
(Nominal) 2.16 W
(Maximum) 3W
Module Field Power 48 W (VS=24V, 8 Channels on @ 250mA / channel) typical
105.6W (VS = 26.4V) Maximum
Operating Temperature Range 0º to 60º C (32º to 140º F)
Storage Temperature Range -40º to 85º C (-40º to 185º F)
Humidity (non-condensing) 0 to 95% relative humidity non-condensing
422 OW350_R1150
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Note: All 16 digital output channels have a common return which is the field power supply common.
OW350_R1150 423
7.3 Relay Output - (RO)
7.3 Rela y Output - (RO)
An Ovation Relay Output module consists of an Electronics module, a base assembly, and relays.
The Relay Output module provides a means to switch high AC voltages at high currents to field
devices. There are two versions of the Relay Output base assembly which contain either 12 or 16
relays within each base. The 12 Relay Output base assembly provides the additional advantage
of being able to switch larger DC voltages at high currents.
Each Relay Output base assembly incorporates an integral Relay Output Electronics module to
interface between the relays and the Ovation I/O Controller. The Relay Output Electronics module
provides configurable communication timeout periods and LEDs to indicate the status of each
output.
The Relay Output module is a CE Mark certified module.
7.3.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (RO)

 1C31219G01 provides an interface between the Ovation Controller and the mechanical relays
that are used to switch high AC voltages at high currents. This module plugs into the Relay
Output base assembly.
Note: The Relay Output base assembly does not incorporate a Personality module.
7.3.2 Base assemblies - (RO)
There are two different styles of Relay Output with Contact Monitoring base assemblies:
 5X00564G01 is configured with 16 Form C (G2R style) relays which switch high AC voltages
at high currents. Each relay contains one Form C contact arrangement which is brought to
terminal blocks for user connections.
 5X00564G02 is configured at the project level with either 12 Form C (KUEP style) or 12 Form
X (KUEP style) relays which switch high AC and DC voltages at high currents.
In the case of the Form C relay, only one of the contact pairs within the relay is available at
the terminal blocks for user connection. The KUEP style relay bases (1C31222G01) have the
advantage of being able to switch larger DC voltages at higher currents than the G2R style
relay bases (1C31223G01).
Relay contact ratings must be adhered to when utilizing the Relay Output module Assemblies.
The application must include external current limiting protection for the Relay Output module
Assemblies.
424 OW350_R1150
7.3.3 Panel kits - (RO)
There are several different styles of Relay Output panel kits:

 5A26457G01 contains a Relay Output Electronics module a relay output base assembly, and
16 Form C relays (G2R style).
 5A26458G01 contains a Relay Output Electronics module, a relay output base assembly, and
12 Form C relays (KUEP style).
12 Form X relays (KUEP style).
 5A26458G03 contains a Relay Output Electronics module, and a relay output base assembly.
This is a project-specific base assembly in which the project determines the mix of the Form
C and Form X relays on a panel. The KUEP Form C relay is 4960A71H16 and the KUEP
Form X relay is 4960A71H05.
12 Form C relays (KUEP style) and labeled with the country of assembly.
12 Form X relays (KUEP style) and labeled with the country of assembly.
CAUTION! When using the Relay Output Base Assemblies, the Power Distribution Module
(5X00489G01) must have the Main GND and AUX GND referenced together. Therefore,
Relay Output bases must be installed only on I/O branches containing +24V typical Aux power
(before auctioneering diode drop within Ovation auxiliary power supply).
Do NOT install Relay Output modules/bases on the same branch with Ovation bases with
different voltage wired as Aux power (for example, DI modules using 125V AC).
7.3.4 External power supply information (RO)
It is recommended that the Relay Output base assembly obtain relay coil voltage from the internal
Ovation auxiliary power supplies. These supplies distribute power through the Controller
backplane and ROP panel to base assemblies. Use of external power supplies for relay coil
power is NOT recommended.
OW350_R1150 425
7.3.5 Using bases (RO)
Proper relay operation is temperature dependent and is determined by the following:

 Temperature rise of the coil after being energized for extended periods.
 Temperature rise of the coil due to large relay contact currents.
 Ambient temperature.
The following table provides general user guidelines which can be referenced when configuring
cabinets with Relay Output bases.
Operating Temperature Summary for Relay Output Bases
CABINE T TYPE AM BIEN T CAB INE T OPER AT IN G T EMPE R ATU RE RELAY BASE STYLE
Controller 0 to 50 C (32 to 122 F) G2R

Extended I/O 0 to 60 C (32 to 140 F) G2R
Remote I/O (Ventilated) 0 to 60 C (32 to 140 F) G2R
Remote I/O (Sealed) 0 to 50 C (32 to 122 F) @ 175 W Maximum G2R
Controller 0 to 50 C (32 to 122 F) KUEP Form X

Extended I/O 0 to 60 C (32 to 140 F) KUEP Form X
Remote I/O (Ventilated) 0 to 60 C (32 to 140 F) KUEP Form X
Remote I/O (Sealed) 0 to 50 C (32 to 122 F) @ 175 W Maximum KUEP Form X
Controller 0 to 40 C (32 to 104 F) KUEP Form C

Extended I/O 0 to 45 C (32 to 113 F) KUEP Form C
Remote I/O (Ventilated) 0 to 45 C (32 to 113 F) KUEP Form C
Remote I/O (Sealed) 0 to 35 C (32 to 95 F) @ 175 W Maximum KUEP Form C
426 OW350_R1150
7.3.6 Terminal block wiring information (RO)
Each relay base assembly employs terminal blocks which are permanently marked with
appropriate relay contact designations at each position. The terminal block marking indicates how
field wiring is connected to each terminal block position in the respective relay base assemblies.
information.
The terminal block markings for the G2R style Relay Output base assembly and for the KUEP
style Relay Output base assemblies are illustrated below. The following table lists and defines the
abbreviations used in those diagrams.
N N C T N N C T N N C T N N C T N N C T N N C T N N C T N N C T
C O B C O B C O B C O B C O B C O B C O B C O B
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
N N C T N N C T N N C T N N C T N N C T N N C T N N C T N N C T
C O B C O B C O B C O B C O B C O B C O B C O B
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Figure 105: Terminal Block Connections for the G2R Relay Output Base Assembly
N N C T N N C T N N C T N N C T N N C T N N C T N N C T N N C T N N C T N N C T N N C T N N C T
O C B O C B O C B O C B O C B O C B O C B O C B O C B O C B O C B O C B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Form C Relays Installed

N T T T T T T T T T T T T
C B N C B N C B N C B N C B N C B N C B N C B N C B N C B N C B N C B
O O O O O O O O O O O O
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Form X Relays Installed
Figure 106: Terminal Block Connections for the KUEP Relay Output Base Assembly
ABBREVIATIO DEFINITION
N
1 Normally Closed contact connection

NC
NO Normally Open contact connection

C Common contact connection
1
Do NOT use the NC terminal position when using the KUEP style base assembly with a Form
X style relay inserted. The terminal position should remain unconnected.
OW350_R1150 427
428
Fuse
Module Latches
Electronics Module
7.3.7 Base unit layouts - (RO)
P C E I 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
O PEN O PEN
REL AY O UT PUT
Figure 107: Relay Output Panel G2R

R2 R4 R6 R8 R9 R11 R13 R15
R1 R3 R5 R7 R10 R12 R14 R16

DIN Rail
TB1 TB3 TB5 TB7 TB9 TB11 TB13 TB15
TB2 TB4 TB6 TB8 TB10 TB12 TB14 TB16

Connections
Terminal Block
Base Unit
OW350_R1150
OW350_R1150
Fuse
Module Latches
Electronics Module
Figure 108: Relay Output KUEP

P C E I 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
O PEN O PEN
REL AY O UT PUT
R2 R4 R6 R7 R9 R11
DIN Rail
R1 R3 R5 R8 R10 R12
T T T T T T T T T T T T
B B B B B B B B B B B B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Connections
Terminal Block
Base Unit
429
7.3.8 Field connection wiring diagrams for the Relay Output module
Relay Output
Electronics Relay Base Low
G2R Power
Style
(ROE) Module Assembly (RBL)
FUSEDWET+ Fuse
1A Auxiliary +25V
Auxilliary
Relay 1 Type F Power Supply
Common (Supplied by the
Base Assembly)
Normally Open
Normally Closed
Form C Relay
RLY -
RLY1- 1 of 16
D
G
A1 Ground A1 Ground
Auxiliary +25V Power
(Auxilliary
Supply Ground)
Figure 109: Relay Base G2R Style Assembly Field Wiring
Relay Output
Electronics KUEPPower
Relay Base KUEP
High Style
Style
(ROE) Module Assembly (RBH)
FUSEDWET+ Fuse
2A Auxiliary
Auxilliary +25V
Relay 1 Type F Power Supply
Common (Supplied by the
Base Assembly)
Normally Closed
Normally Open
Form C Relay *
RLY -
RLY1-
(OR)
D
Relay 1
G Common
S
Normally Open
Form X Relay *
A1 Ground A1 Ground
Auxiliary +25V Power
(Auxilliary 1 of 12
Supply Ground) * NOTE: The application
decides which style of
relay is installed per Kit
Drawing
Drwaing5A26458
5Axxxx
Figure 110: Relay Base KUEP Style Assembly Field Wiring
430 OW350_R1150
7.3.9 Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark) - (RO)
in the applicable "Planning Your Ovation System" manual.
Figure 111: Relay Base G2R Style Assembly Field Wiring (CE Mark)
5A26458
in the applicable "Planning Your Ovation System" manual).
Figure 112: Relay Base KUEP Style Assembly Field Wiring (CE Mark)
OW350_R1150 431
7.3.10 Register configuration/address information - (RO)
Station (see the Bit Pattern field on the Hardware tab). Refer to the (Ovation Operator Station
User Guide.)
Relay Output configuration/status register (address 13 or D in Hex)


2-4 1 1
1 0 0 500 1 0 0 500
milliseconds milliseconds
1 0 1 250 1 0 1 250
1 1 0 125 1 1 0 125
1 1 1 62.5 1 1 1 62.5
5 Outputs hold their state on communications Outputs hold their state on communications
timeout (active high) timeout (active high)
7 Enable blown fuse detection circuit (active high) Enable blown fuse detection circuit (active high)
8 Not used 2
Base ID0 Bit (Set by the Base Assembly)
9 Not used 2
10 Not used 2
11 - 15 Not used Not used
1
2
Refer to the following table for Base ID values.
writing a “1” to Bit 0 of the configuration register. Once configured, it remains configured until
a power-up/down reset is generated. After a power-up condition, the configuration register
clears.
432 OW350_R1150
but not read.
Bit 6: This bit indicates the status of the blown fuse detection circuit. When Bit 6 of the status
register is set, the field supply fuse is blown.
Bits 8-10: The Base Assembly (KUEP or G2R style) straps three bits in hardware which
identify which type of base the ROE is plugged into. The type of base can therefore be
determined from reading these bits.
Bits 11-15: Not used.
Relay Output Base ID Bits
BIT 10 (BAS E ID2) BIT 9 (BASE ID1) BIT 8 (BASE BASE TYPE
ID0)
0 0 0 KUEP Style
0 0 1 G2R Style
All others All others All others Reserved for Future Use
OW350_R1150 433
7.3.11 Blown fuse detection circuit (RO)
it gives a visual indication of the status via the EXTERNAL ERROR LED.
and the field supply voltage is between 18VDC and 25.5VDC, the circuit indicates the field supply
fuse is OK by turning OFF the “EXTERNAL ERROR” LED and clearing Bit 6 of the module status
register. If enabled and the field supply voltage is less than 0.4VDC, the circuit indicates the field
supply fuse is blown by turning ON the “EXTERNAL ERROR” LED and setting Bit 6 of the module
status register.

 18 VDC < Field supply voltage < 25.5VDC => Fuse is OK
 0.4 VDC < Field supply voltage < 18VDC => UNDEFINED
Note: After a powering reset, the blown fuse detection circuit is disabled. System level
configuration software must set the respective configuration bit if blown fuse detection is
desired.
7.3.12 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs (RO)
LED
DESCRIPTION

E (Red) External Fault LED. Lit when the field supply fuse is blown and the blown fuse detection circuit
is enabled. Blown Fuse bit (Bit 7) of the Configuration Register (see page 432) enables or
disables the fuse detection circuit (high enabled).
I (Red) Internal Fault LED. Lit whenever the Force Error bit (Bit 1 of the Configuration Register (see
page 432)) is active or the Controller stops communicating with the module.
7.3.13 Specifications - (RO)

 Electronics module (1C31219G01)
 Base Assembly (1C31223G01, 1C31222G01)
Relay Output Electronics module specifications (1C31219G01)
DESCRIPTION VALUE
1
Operating voltage range 18V auxiliary supply voltage 25.5V
434 OW350_R1150
DESCRIPTION VALUE

Auxiliary: 0.3 W typical, 0.35 W Maximum

1
You can configure the module to enable/disable the blown fuse detection function.
Relay Output Base Specifications (1C31223G01, G2R Style)
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Number of relays 16
Relay Type G2R electromechanical style with 1 Form C contact style
3 10 amps @250 VAC, PF=1
Relay contact ratings
10 amps @30 VDC
Maximum propagation time Operate time: 15 mSec, bounce approximately = 3 mSec
Release time: 10 mSec, bounce approximately = 8 mSec
Channel to Channel 2300 VAC
Relay contacts to logic 2200 VAC
Relay base power Auxiliary power: 9.1 W typical, 11.68 W Maximum
1 25V typical (before output auctioneering diode drop within Ovation
Auxiliary power supply
auxiliary power supply) 25.5V Maximum@60 C
2 0 to 60 C (32 F to 140 F)
Operating temperature range
Storage temperature range -40 to 70 C (-40 F to 158 F)

Humidity (non-condensing) 35 - 85%
1
Use of the internal Ovation auxiliary power supply is recommended for relay output modules.
2
See additional application derating (see page 449) information.
3
1A @240 VAC 300,000 operations IEC 61131-2 applications. No DC ratings considered.
Relay Output Base Assembly Specifications (1C31222G01, KUEP Style)
DESCRIPTION VALUE
OW350_R1150 435
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Relay Type KUEP electromechanical style:

5A26458G01 Kit - 1 Form C contact type
5A26458G02 Kit - 1 Form X contact type
5A26458G03 Kit - Project specific
3 Form C relays:
Relay contact ratings
10 amps @240 VAC, PF=0.8
3 amps @150 VDC
Form X relays:
10 amps @240 VAC, PF=0.8
10 amps @150 VDC
Typical propagation time Operate time: 15 mSec, excluding bounce
Release time: 10 mSec, excluding bounce
Channel to Channel 2300V AC
Relay base power Auxiliary power:
23.45 W typical, 30.1 W Maximum (5A26458G01 Kit - Form C relays)
15.9 W typical, 20.41 W Maximum (5A26458G02 Kit - Form X relays)
auxiliary power supply)
25.5V Maximum @42 C (108 F) (Form C relays)
25.5V Maximum @60 C (140 F) (Form X relays)
2 0 to 45 C (32 F to 113 F) (5A26458G01 Kit - Form C relays)
0 to 60 C (32 F to 140 F) (5A26458G02 Kit - Form X relays)
Storage temperature range KUEP X: -40 to 70 C (-40 F to 158 F)
KUEP C: -40 to 50 C (-40 F to 122 F)
1
Use of internal Ovation auxiliary power supply is recommended for Relay Output modules.
2
See additional application derating information contained in Using Relay Output Bases (see page 449).
3
1A @240 VAC 100,000 operations IEC 61131-2 applications. No DC ratings considered.
436 OW350_R1150
7.4 Relay Output with Contact Monitoring - (ROCM)
7.4 Rela y Output w ith Contact Monitoring - (ROCM)
An Ovation Relay Output with contact Monitoring module consists of an Electronics module, a
base assembly, and relays. The Relay Output module provides a means to switch high AC
voltages at high currents to field devices. It provides a single FORM X relay contact to drive the
field devices. In addition, the module has two monitoring circuits per channel, which provide a
feedback to the standard Ovation Contact Input module or Digital Input Module to indicate the
contact state of the relay.
Each Relay Output with Contact Monitoring base assembly incorporates an integral Relay Output
Electronics module to interface between the relays and the Ovation I/O Controller. The Relay
Output Electronics module provides configurable communication timeout periods and LEDs to
indicate the status of each output.
The Relay Output with Contact Monitoring contains shorting jumpers to enable or disable both
contact monitoring circuits on a per channel basis. The Relay Output with Contact Monitoring
contains the field terminal headers, which accept pluggable terminal blocks in either right angle
screw compression or vertical crimp pin styles. In addition, the Relay Output with Contact
Monitoring Base contains the contact monitoring terminal headers, which accept pluggable
terminal blocks. The pluggable terminal blocks contain a screw hold down to the terminal header
for mechanical stability.
7.4.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (ROCM)

7.4.2 Base assemblies - (ROCM)
There are two different styles of Relay Output with Contact Monitoring base assemblies:
 5X00564G01 contains eight (8) high power relays that are pre-installed with Form X relays in
the base assembly. The G01 does not have Field output or Contact monitoring output
terminal blocks installed. This group is used for marshalling configurations with pre-terminated
pluggable cable assemblies.
 5X00564G02 accommodates eight (8) high power relays that are pre-installed with Form X
relays in the base assembly. The G02 has Field output and Contact Monitoring terminal
blocks installed. This group is used for direct customer terminations.
You must adhere to relay contact ratings when utilizing the Relay Output with Contact Monitoring
module assemblies. The application must include external current limiting protection for the Relay
Output with Contact Monitoring module assemblies.
OW350_R1150 437
7.4.3 Emod and base assembly combinations - (ROCM)
The following table depicts a clear definition of the valid electronics module and the base module:
MODULE DESCRIPTION EMOD STYLE BASE M ODULE

STYLE
Relay Output with Contact 1C31219G01 5X00564G01

Monitoring Assembly, KUEP
Form X, Marshalling (No
terminal blocks installed)
Relay Output with Contact 1C31219G01 5X00564G02
Monitoring Assembly, KUEP
Form X, Customer
Termination( Terminal blocks
installed
7.4.4 External power supply information - (ROCM)
Emerson recommends that the Relay Output with Contact Monitoring base assembly obtain relay
coil voltage from the internal Ovation auxiliary power supplies. These supplies distribute power
through the Controller backplane and ROP panel to base assemblies. Use of external power
supplies for relay coil power is NOT recommended.
7.4.5 Operating Temperature - (ROCM)

cabinets with High Power Relay Output with Contact Monitoring bases:
Controller 0 to 50 C (32 to 122 F) Relay Output with

Contact Monitoring
Extended I/O 0 to 60 C (32 to 140 F) Relay Output with
Contact Monitoring
Remote I/O (Ventilated) 0 to 60 C (32 to 140 F) Relay Output with
Contact Monitoring
Remote I/O (Sealed) 0 to 50 C (32 to 122 F) @ 175 W Maximum Relay Output with
Contact Monitoring
Remote I/O (Sealed) 0 to 40 C (32 to 104 F) @ 225 W Maximum Relay Output with
Contact Monitoring
438 OW350_R1150
7.4.6 Register configuration/address information - (ROCM)
User Guide.)


2-4 1 1
1 0 0 500 1 0 0 500
1 0 1 250 1 0 1 250
1 1 0 125 1 1 0 125
1 1 1 62.5 1 1 1 62.5
8 Not used 2
9 Not used 2
10 Not used 2
1
2
clears.
OW350_R1150 439
but not read.
Bits 8-10: The Base Assembly (RBHI) straps three bits in hardware which identify which type
of base the ROE is plugged into. The type of base can therefore be determined from reading
these bits.
system (with the exception of the system indicating a Communication Error.)
thorough evaluation of any effect that change may have on the system. Under some
conditions, a different timeout may cause the module to go into its respective fail-safe mode.
Relay Output Base ID Bits
ID0)
1 0 0 RBHI
440 OW350_R1150
7.4.7 Base unit layouts - (ROCM)
Figure 113: Relay Output with Contact Monitoring Panel
OW350_R1150 441
7.4.8 Blown fuse detection circuit - (ROCM)
it gives a visual indication of the status through the EXTERNAL ERROR LED (see page 443).
status register.

desired.
7.4.9 Terminal block wiring information - (ROCM)
The terminal block markings for the Relay Output with Contact Monitoring base assembly are
illustrated below. The following tables list and define the abbreviations used in those diagrams.
Figure 114: Terminal Block Connection for the Form X Relay Output with Contact
Monitoring
PWR Equipment Power

CMD Equipment Command
RTN Equipment Power Return
442 OW350_R1150
Figure 115: Terminal Block Connection for the Form A Relay Output with Contact
Monitoring
EQPF (+) Equipment Power Fail signal ( ON = Power Ok, OFF = Power Fail)
CMON (+) Contact Monitor signal ( ON = Form X Contact Open, OFF = Form X
Contact Closed)
(-) Return
7.4.10 Field connection wiring diagram - (ROCM)
Figure 116: Relay Output with Contact Monitoring with Field Wiring
7.4.11 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (ROCM)
LED
DESCRIPTION
OW350_R1150 443
LED
DESCRIPTION
7.4.12 Specifications - (ROCM)

 Base Assembly (5X00564G01, 5X00564G02)
DESCRIPTION VALUE
1


1
Relay Output Base Specifications (5X00564G01/5X00564G02)
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Number of relays 8
Relay Type KUEP Form X
Channel to Channel 1350 VAC
Relay base power Auxiliary power: 10.2 W typical, 13.5 W Maximum
444 OW350_R1150
DESCRIPTION VALUE
2 0 to 60 C (32 F to 140 F)
1
Use of the internal Ovation auxiliary power supply is recommended for relay output with contact monitoring
module.
2
7.4.13 Contact input monitoring circuits - (ROCM)
The High Power Relay Output with Contact Monitoring contains two monitor circuits that allow the
Ovation system to detect the actual state of the relay output contact utilized to drive the
connected field device. The two monitoring circuits are:
 Equipment Power Fail (EQPF): contains a 1 FORM A (NO) relay, which is closed when
equipment power for that channel is present.
 Field Contact Monitor (CMON): contains a 1 FORM A (NO) relay, which is closed when the
field circuit is open.
Both the EQPF and CMON circuits contain common mode surge capacitors and a normal
mode Metal Oxide Varistor (MOV) to protect the channels against fast transients and surges.
The normal mode MOV also provides protection against inductive kicks associated from
inductive loads, which are driven by the field contacts.
Monitoring Circuit State Definitions
MONITOR CIRCUIT MONITORING RELAY LOGIC STATE
EQPF Monitor Relay Closed = Equipment Power Present

Monitor Relay Open = Equipment Power Present , (<20 V)
CMON Monitor Relay Closed = Field Contact Open
Monitor Relay Open = Field Contact Closed
The channel off state is determined by the voltage drop of the monitor relay coil. The voltage drop
resistance is specified at 6V or less for the drop out state. The lower operating limit for the
channel monitoring circuits is 100 VAC or 100 VDC and the upper operating limit is 140VAC or
140 VDC.
Monitoring Circuit Operating Ranges
MONITOR CIRCUIT THRESHOLD VALUE CONDITION
EQPF Voltage < 6VAC, VDC Guaranteed Drop Off
OW350_R1150 445
CMON 100 < Voltage < or = Proper operating range

140 VAC, VDC
When the Relay output is the de-energized state, the field contact monitor circuit generates a
small leakage current through the load device. The operational load threshold value should be
greater than the maximum value of the monitor circuit leakage. This condition should be verified
before using the device to ensure proper operation.
Contact Monitoring Leakage Current
CMON I leakage = 8mA @ Maximum

140Vrms
I leakage = 5mA @
140VDC Maximum
The field contact monitor circuit detects current flow through the field device in its OFF state.
Therefore, a small voltage drop occurs across the field device when this current flows. The field
device is normally a low impedance device and there is a small impact on the voltage threshold to
the monitor circuitry. However, there is a maximum allowable device loading specification to
ensure proper monitor operation over the assembly operational parameters.
Contact Monitoring Load Specification
CMON Load Impedance = 500 Maximum

ohms @ 100Vrms
Load Resistance = 3.5

Kohms @ 100VDC Maximum
446 OW350_R1150
7.5 Fused Relay Output modules - (FRO)
7.5 Fused Rela y Output modules - (FRO)
The Ovation Fused Relay Output Assembly provides a means to switch high current and voltage
devices located in the field. You have a choice between a fused low power relay output assembly
and a fused high power relay output assembly for differing applications. The Fused Low Power
Relay Output Assembly employs a 1 FORM C contact arrangement for driving field devices. The
Fused High Power Relay Output Assembly allows a choice between a 1 FORM C or a 1 FORM X
relay contact arrangement depending upon which KUEP form factor relay is installed.
The Fused Relay Output Bases provide the capability to provide contact wetting power from a
common external wetting source or optionally isolate contact wetting on an individual channel
basis. Additionally, the Fused Relay Output Bases incorporate individual channel fusing
eliminating the need for additional external fusing. The Fused Relay Output Bases incorporate
headers which accept pluggable terminal blocks in either right angle screw compression or
vertical crimp pin styles.
A Ovation Fused Relay Output module consists of an Electronics module, a base assembly
containing fuses and relays. The module provides a means to switch high AC voltages at high
currents to field devices. There are two versions of the Fused Relay Output base assembly which
contain either 12 or 16 relays within each base. The 12 Fused Relay Output base assembly
provides the additional advantage of being able to switch DC voltages at high currents.
Each Fused Relay Output base assembly incorporates an integral Fused Relay Output
Electronics module to interface between the relays and the Ovation I/O Controller. The Fused
Relay Output Electronics module provides configurable communication timeout periods and LEDs
to indicate the status of each output.
The Fused Relay Output Assembly incorporates a backward compatible addressing scheme so
that it is compatible with existing I/O bases.
Integral fusing elements are provided for the protection of the Fused Relay Output module
assembly. The project shall ensure proper application of the panel with respect to applied
powering scheme and integral fusing. Any additional components required for the installation
shall be provided at the project level.
7.5.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - (RO)

OW350_R1150 447
7.5.2 Base assemblies - (FRO)
There are several different styles of Relay Output base assemblies:

 5X00430G01 Fused High Power Relay Base Assembly, 12 Form C Relays included, No
Output Termination Blocks Pre-Installed.
 5X00430G02 Fused High Power Relay Base Assembly, 12 Form X Relays included, No
 5X00430G03 Fused High Power Relay Base Assembly, 12 Form C Relays included, Output
Termination Blocks Pre-Installed.
 5X00430G04 Fused High Power Relay Base Assembly, 12 Form X Relays included, Output
 5X00431G01 Fused Low Power Relay Base Assembly, 16 Form C Relays included, No
 5X00431G02 Fused Low Power Relay Base Assembly, 16 Form C Relays included, Output
1
Fused Relay Output module Subsystem
DESCRIPTION RELAYS ELECTRONICS 1

BASE UNIT
MODULE
Low power, Marshaling 16 1C31219G01 5X00431G01

Low power, blocks installed 16 1C31219G01 5X00431G02
High power, Form C, Marshaling 12 1C31219G01 5X00430G01
High power, Form X, Marshaling 12 1C31219G01 5X00430G02
High power, Form C, blocks installed 12 1C31219G01 5X00430G03
High power, Form X, blocks installed 12 1C31219G01 5X00430G04
1
Relay Outputs do not use standard Ovation I/O bases. Use the listed base units for Relay Output applications.
Also note that the Relay Output module does not use a Personality module.
7.5.3 External power supply information - (FRO)
It is recommended that the Relay Output base assembly obtain relay coil voltage from the internal
Ovation auxiliary power supplies. These supplies distribute power through the Controller
backplane and ROP panel to base assemblies. Use of external power supplies for relay coil
power is NOT recommended.
448 OW350_R1150
7.5.4 Using bases - (FRO)

cabinets with Relay Output bases.
Controller 0 to 50 C (32 to 122 F) G2R

Extended I/O 0 to 60 C (32 to 140 F) G2R
Remote I/O (Ventilated) 0 to 60 C (32 to 140 F) G2R
Controller 0 to 50 C (32 to 122 F) KUEP Form X

Extended I/O 0 to 60 C (32 to 140 F) KUEP Form X
Remote I/O (Ventilated) 0 to 60 C (32 to 140 F) KUEP Form X
Controller 0 to 40 C (32 to 104 F) KUEP Form C

Extended I/O 0 to 45 C (32 to 113 F) KUEP Form C
Remote I/O (Ventilated) 0 to 45 C (32 to 113 F) KUEP Form C
OW350_R1150 449
7.5.5 Terminal block wiring information - (FRO)
information.
The terminal block markings for the G2R style Relay Output base assembly and for the KUEP
style Relay Output base assemblies are illustrated below. The following table lists and defines the
abbreviations used in those diagrams.
Figure 117: Terminal Block Connections for the Fixed Low Power Relay Output Base
Assembly
Figure 118: Terminal Block Connections for the Fixed High Power Relay Output Base
Assembly
N
1 Normally Closed contact connection

NC
NO Normally Open contact connection
C Common contact connection
1
Do NOT use the NC terminal position when using the KUEP style base assembly with a Form
X style relay inserted. The terminal position should remain unconnected.
450 OW350_R1150
7.5.6 Base unit layouts - (FRO)
G2R Style KUEP Style
OW350_R1150 451
7.5.7 Field connection wiring diagrams - (FRO)
Figure 119: Fused high power relay output field wiring
Figure 120: Fused low power relay output field wiring
452 OW350_R1150
7.5.8 Register configuration/address information - (FRO)
User Guide.)


2-4 1 1
1 0 0 500 1 0 0 500
1 0 1 250 1 0 1 250
1 1 0 125 1 1 0 125
1 1 1 62.5 1 1 1 62.5
8 Not used 2
9 Not used 2
10 Not used 2
1
2
clears.
OW350_R1150 453
but not read.
Bits 8-10: The Base Assembly (KUEP or G2R style) straps three bits in hardware which
identify which type of base the ROE is plugged into. The type of base can therefore be
determined from reading these bits.
Fused Relay Output Base ID Bits
ID0)
0 1 0 RBHF
0 1 1 RBLF
454 OW350_R1150
7.5.9 Blown fuse detection circuit - (FRO)
it gives a visual indication of the status via the EXTERNAL ERROR LED.
status register.

desired.
7.5.10 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (FRO)
LED
DESCRIPTION

7.5.11 Specifications - (FRO)

 Base Assembly (5X00431G01-G02, 5X00430G01-G04)
DESCRIPTION VALUE
1
OW350_R1150 455
DESCRIPTION VALUE


1
Fused Low Power Relay Output Base Specifications (5X00431G01 - G02) (G2R)
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Number of relays 16
Relay Type Form C
Relay base auxiliary power 9.1 W typical, 11.68 W Maximum
3 3.15A @ 150VAC
Channel ratings
4 10A @ 150 VAC
Bus power ratings
2 0 to 60 C (32 F to 140 F)
1
Use of the internal Ovation auxiliary power supply is recommended for relay output modules.
2
3
Channel rating is limited to 3.15A by the internal channel fuse. Standard fuse carry current derating
apply. (0.5%/ C above 30 C)
4
Bus rating is limited to 10A by the internal channel fuse. Standard fuse carry current derating apply.
(0.5%/ C above 30 C)
Fused High Power Relay Output Base Assembly Specifications (5X00430G01 - G04) (KUEP)
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Relay Type 5X00430G02-G04 - Form C
5X00430G01-G03 - Form X
Typical propagation time Operate time: 15 mSec, excluding bounce
Release time: 10 mSec, excluding bounce
456 OW350_R1150
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Relay base auxiliary power Auxiliary power:
23.45 W typical, 30.1 W Maximum (Form C relays)
15.9 W typical, 20.41 W Maximum (Form X relays)
auxiliary power supply)
25.5V Maximum @42 C (108 F) (Form C relays)
25.5V Maximum @60 C (140 F) (Form X relays)
2 0 to 45 C (32 F to 113 F) (Form C relays)
0 to 60 C (32 F to 140 F) (Form X relays)
3 5
Channel ratings 3.15A @ 150VAC
4 5
Bus power ratings 10A @ 150 VAC
Storage temperature range KUEP C: -40 to 50 C (-40 F to 122 F)
KUEP X: -40 to 70 C (-40 F to 158 F)
1
Use of internal Ovation auxiliary power supply is recommended for Relay Output modules.
2
See additional application derating information contained in Using Relay Output Bases (see page
449).
3
Channel rating is limited to 3.15A by the internal channel fuse. Standard fuse carry current derating
apply. (0.5%/ C above 30 C)
4
Bus rating is limited to 10A by the internal channel fuse. Standard fuse carry current derating apply.
(0.5%/ C above 30 C)
5
The panel is designed to 150VDC. However, the power source must have the return ("-") lead
referenced to earth. Projects must review the power scheme to determine applicability.
OW350_R1150 457
7.6 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Output module (Windows Ovation 3.4 and above)
7.6 32 Channel 24V DC Single -Ended Digital Output module

(Window s Ovation 3.4 and above)
The Ovation 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Output module contains 32 24-volt single-
ended digital output channels. Each digital output channel is capable of sourcing up to 500 mA of
output current with a 2A maximum total output current limit per module.
Note: The Ovation 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Output module is only available for
Ovation software releases 3.4 and later.
The digital output module switches high-side 24V DC power to 32 external loads. Switched power
for all 32 digital output channels is derived from the Ovation 24V DC Auxiliary Power Supply. All
32 digital output channels share a common return with the Auxiliary 24V DC power supply.
Note: The 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Output requires the use of an Ovation 4-
slot I/O base (5X00497G01) which provides additional wire terminations to support the 32
channels. The 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Output cannot be used with the
standard I/O Bases (1B30035H01, 1X00014H01, or 5X00334G01).
The I/O Module General Information (see page 25) section contains environmental, installation,
wiring, and fuse information for I/O modules.
7.6.1 Electronics modules (Emod) - 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital

Output
5X00500G01 - providing 32 Channels of 24V DC High-Side, Single-Ended Digital Output

switching
7.6.2 Personality modules (Pmod) - 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital

Output
1X00691H01 - The 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Output module does not require a
Pmod for any electrical connections to field terminals. A cavity insert is used in the Pmod location
to cover the unused Pmod connector and provide terminal wiring information.
7.6.3 Subsystems - 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Output
32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Output subsystems
DESCRIPTION CHANNELS ELECTRONICS MODULE PERSONALITY

OR PANEL KIT MODULE
32 Channel 24V DC High-Side, Single-Ended 32 5X00500G01 1X00691H01

Digital Output
Note: The 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Output requires the use of an Ovation 4-
slot I/O Base (5X00497G01) which provides additional wire terminations to support the 32
channels.
The 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Output cannot be used with the standard I/O
Bases (1B30035H01, 1X00014H01, or 5X00334G01).
458 OW350_R1150
7.6.4 Terminal block wiring information - 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended

Digital Output
The terminal block wiring diagram for the 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Output
module is illustrated in the following figure. The following table lists and defines abbreviations
used in the diagram.
Figure 121: Terminal block connections for the 32 Channel Single-Ended Digital Output
module
+1 through +32 Digital Output Positive terminal connection

PS- Auxiliary 24V DC Power Supply Return. All PS- terminals are tied together
internally on the Digital Output module/base. Two (2) terminal connections
per terminal strip screw are used to support 32 channels.
PS+ / PS- Auxiliary 24V DC Power Supply Terminals. No external connections are
required when using Ovation +24V DC Auxiliary Power Supply. Ovation
Aux Supply provided to module through branch.
Reserved terminal. No connection allowed on these unmarked terminals.
+24V DC Auxiliary power enters module through an internal branch connection or terminal block
connection (PS+/PS-). Power is fused on the module then delivered to each channel's power
switch. The high-side power is switched to each channels' positive output terminal (+1 through
+32) for connection to the field device positive terminal. Each field device return signal is tied to
the PS- connection on the base terminal strip. All PS- connections are tied together at the base
terminal strip and connected to PS- of the Auxiliary Power Supply.
OW350_R1150 459
7.6.5 Field connection wiring diagram - 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital

Output
Figure 122: Wiring diagram - 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Output module
7.6.6 Register configuration/status information - 32 Channel 24V DC Single-

Ended Digital Output
The Module Configuration / Status Register is module I/O register 13 (0xD) and is a write register.
32 Channel Single-Ended Digital Output Configuration/Status (Address 13 or D in Hex)

0 1 = configured 1 = configured*
0 = not configured 0 = not configured
1 1 = forced error 1 = forced error set by Controller
0 = no forced error 0 = no forced error*
2-4 Timer Bit 0 - 2 Timer Bit 0 - 2
460 OW350_R1150

5 1 = Hold Outputs on Timeout 1 = Outputs held on Timeout

0 = Reset Outputs on Timeout 0 = Outputs reset on Timeout
6 Not defined Not defined. 0 = permanent value
7 Not defined 1 = Blown fuse detected
0 = Fuse OK*
8 - 14 Not defined Not defined. 0 = permanent value
15 Not defined 1 = Channel fault exists

(see registers 0xB and 0xC for fault)
0 = No channel faults exist
* Default value
Channel Status Register - 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Output
Word addresses 11 (0xB in Hex) and 12 (0xC in Hex) are used to report fault status of the
individual digital output channels. A reported fault may indicate channel short-circuit, overload
condition, or switch IC case temperature above limit.
Channel Status Register (Address 11 - 0xB in Hex)
0 1 = Channel 1 Fault Exists

OW350_R1150 461

Channel Status Register (Address 12 - 0xC in Hex)

462 OW350_R1150

7.6.7 Diagnostics - 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Output
LED DESCRIPTION
P (green) The Power OK LED is lit when the module main power is OK.
C (green) The Communication OK LED is lit when the Ovation Controller is communicating with the
module.
E (Red) External Fault LED is lit to indicate Auxiliary 24V DC field power is not present, is below
threshold, or the Auxiliary 24V DC fuse is blown.
I (Red) The Internal Fault LED is lit under the following conditions:
 The Ovation Controller is not communicating with the module.
 A Channel Fault exists.
1 - 32 (Green) Each of the 32 channel LEDs represent the states of the Channel 1 through Channel 32
power switches.
Note: 24V Auxiliary Fuse Rating: 2.5A, 250V Fast-acting Fuse 5X20 mm
7.6.8 Specifications - 32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Output
32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Output module specifications
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Output Type IEC 61131-2 - protected output
current sourcing DC output
Output Current per Channel 500 mA Max, but not more than 2A max. for total 32 channels.
Output Short Circuit to Supply 1.2 typ - 1.7A max per channel
Common Current Limit
Maximum On Voltage 20V
Maximum Off Leakage Current 5uA per channel

Output Delay Time 29.2us Typ, 40us Max (Off to On) - no load
336us Typ, 400us Max (On to Off) - no load
OW350_R1150 463
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Bus I/O Communications Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Time Out Period

Watchdog Timer 0 0 0 16.777 seconds +/- 10%
0 0 1 4.194 seconds +/- 10%
0 1 0 2.097 seconds +/- 10%
0 1 1 1.049 seconds +/- 10%
1 0 0 524 milliseconds +/- 10%
Diagnostics Blown fuse detection
Module power Drawn from Main: 2.35W typ; 2.7W max. (all channels on)
Drawn from Auxiliary: 1.2W typ; 1.4W max. (all channels on)
47.6W typ; 57.5W max (all channels on @ 2A limit)
Power Dissipation within module: 3.53W typ; 4.05W max. (all channels on)
Inductive Kick Protection Zener Diode
-14V max. for 16.5ms with KUEP-3D15-24 relay
464 OW350_R1150
S E C T I O N 8
8 Features of the Ovation Bus modules
IN THIS SECTION
Types of the Ovation bus module ................................................................................... 465

Logic card block diagram for the Ovation bus modules .................................................. 465
DeviceNet module ........................................................................................................... 466
Foundation Fieldbus module ........................................................................................... 474
Profibus DP module (DP) ................................................................................................ 482
Ethernet Link Controller .................................................................................................. 489
8.1 Types of the Ovation bus module
8.2 Logic card block diagram for the Ovation bus modules
OW350_R1150 465
8.3 DeviceNet module
8.3.1 Subsystems - DeviceNet
DeviceNet subsystems
2 5X00376G01 5X00375G01
8.3.2 Logic card side connector pin assignments - Ovation bus modules (DP)
ROW A, PIN NO. SIGNAL NAME ROW A, PIN NO. SIGNAL NAME
1 CONNECT2/* 1 NO CONNECTION
9 24V RETURN 9 24V RETURN
11 ADDRESSPWR 11 ADDRESS0/**
12 CAL/EEPROM PE 12 ADDRESS3/
13 ADDRESS2/ 13 ADDRESS1/
15 SYNC- *** 15 SYNC+ ***
16 24V RETURN*** 16 24V RETURN***
17 CLOCK- * 17 CLOCK+ ***
19 DATA- * 19 DATA+ *
21 +24VOLTS (B)* 21 +24VOLTS (B)*
22 +24VOLTS (A)* 22 +24VOLTS (A)*
32 CONNECT1/ * 32 NO CONNECTION
* Short Pin.
** 24V Return for module installed in B-side of base, open for module installed in A-side of base.
*** Backplane signal not used by module.
Note: Rows A and B pins 2 through 8, and 25 through 31 are not used and, therefore, are not
shown.
466 OW350_R1150
8.3.3 Interface - DeviceNet
Two DeviceNet Interfaces are provided on the Profibus/DeviceNet field card. Each Interface is
based on a communication processor with a communication interface for the DeviceNet network
and an integral dual port memory for communication with the host processor.
Communication between the dual port memory and the host processor on the logic card is
through an 8-bit parallel interface mapped into the memory space of the host processor. The
circuitry includes a galvanically isolated CAN interface for connection to the DeviceNet network.
Each connection to the network is through a female 5-pin connector or through the Ovation base.
These two connectors (one for each interface) are available on a personality module. Line
termination and biasing are part of the network mating connector per standard.
The EC1 processor provides an RS232 port for troubleshooting purposes. These ports (one for
each interface) are made available through a 5-pin header and can only be accessed with the
module cap removed.
MAIN FEATURES
1. DeviceNet field cards provide 2 independent galvanically isolated DeviceNet channels. Each
channel uses a galvanically isolated 5W switching regulator to convert 24 VDC DeviceNet
network power to 5VDC to power DeviceNet field side components. This provides galvanic
isolation between the DeviceNet field network and the Ovation module. Additionally, the
personality card uses individual channel isolated ground and power planes to achieve channel
to channel isolation.
2. Each DeviceNet channel uses an EC-1 ASIC microcontroller, to act as a DeviceNet master
Controller.
3. Each EC-1 provides CMOS level CAN differential signals to and from the galvanically isolated
DeviceNet transceiver chip PCA82C251. The PCA82C251 then translates them to CAN level
differential signal for DeviceNet communication.
4. Two DeviceNet standard 5-pin Combicon connectors are located on the DeviceNet
personality module and require standardized DeviceNet cabling.
OW350_R1150 467
5. The DeviceNet personality also routes the 5 standard DeviceNet signals from the Combicon
connectors to the Ovation base to provide Maximum DeviceNet cabling flexibility.
468 OW350_R1150
8.3.4 Module block - DeviceNet
OW350_R1150 469
8.3.5 Terminal block pin assignments - DeviceNet
The terminal block is a 53-position compression-style terminal block arranged in 3 rows. The "A"
row, highest relative to the base, has 18 positions. The middle, or "B" row has 17 positions. The
"C" row, nearest to the base, has 18 positions.
information.
Maximum working voltage is 150 V peak DC or RMS AC.
Current rating is 5 amps.
Maximum wire size: 12 AWG single wire or two 14 AWG wires/terminal.
The base unit termination block assignments are shown in the following table.
Base unit termination block assignments
ROW C SIGNAL NAME ROW B SIGNAL NAME ROW A SIGNAL NAME

PIN NO. PIN NO. PIN NO.
1-3 RSV 1-3 RSV 1-3 RSV

4 CROSS CONNECT TX 4 CROSS CONNECT RX 4 RSV
5 RSV 5 CROSS CONNECT GND 5 CH1 V+
6 RSV 6 RSV 6 CH1 Can H
7 RSV 7 RSV 7 CH1 Drain
8 RSV 8 RSV 8 CH1 Can L
9 RSV 9 RSV 9 CH1 V-
10 RSV 10 RSV 10 CH2 V+

11 RSV 11 RSV 11 CH2 Can H
12 RSV 12 RSV 12 CH2 Drain
13 RSV 13 RSV 13 CH2 Can L
14 RSV 14 RSV 14 CH2 V-
16 RSV 16 RSV 16 RSV
17 EARTH GROUND 17 PS+ 17 PS+
18 EARTH GROUND 18 PS-
Note: PS+ and PS- are not used. The cross connect redundancy signals are the same as those accessed with the
RS232 redundancy connector on the PMOD. No connections are permitted to terminals marked RSV.
Note: Connection to the DeviceNet is made through a 9-pin female "D subminiature" connector
on the PMOD. There is one connector for each channel.
470 OW350_R1150
8.3.6 EMOD backplane connectors - DeviceNet
This connector is located on the DeviceNet field card and interfaces to the base unit.
Connector Type: 152 position male High-Density Interconnect (HDI) arranged in 4 rows of 38
pins. The actual connector is selectively loaded so that only 64 positions are available for use.
ROW A SIGNAL NAME ROW B SIGNAL NAME ROW D SIGNAL NAME

1 NOT USED 1 NOT USED 1 NOT USED

13 NOT USED 14 CH2 CAN PF 13 NOT USED
15 CH2 CAN RX 16 CH2 CAN TX 15 NOT USED
19 CH1 CAN PF 20 CH1 CAN TX 19 NOT USED
21 CH1 CAN RX 22 CH2 PB RX 21 NOT USED
23 CH2 PB TX 24 CH2 PB ENAB 23 NOT USED
25 RPTR CTL* 26 CH1 PB RX 25 NOT USED
29 DGND 30 +5V 29 NOT USED
31 ARM9 RS232 RXDXD 32 ARM9 RS232 TXD 31 NOT USED
33 EC1 CH2 RS232 RXD 34 EC1 CH2 RS232 TXD 33 NOT USED
35 NOT USED 36 +3.3V 35 NOT USED
8.3.7 PMOD backplane connectors - DeviceNet
This connector is located on the DeviceNet personality card and interfaces to the base unit.

1 EARTH GROUND* 1 NOT USED 1 NOT USED
OW350_R1150 471


9 NOT USED 10 NOT USED 9 DGND
11 CH2 V+ 12 +3.3V 11 NOT USED
13 CH2 CAN H 14 CH2 CAN PF 13 NOT USED
15 CH2 DRAIN 16 CH2 CAN TX 15 CH2 CAN RX
17 CH2 CAN L 18 NOT USED 17 NOT USED
19 CH2 V- 20 CH1 CAN TX 19 CH1 CAN PF
21 CH1 V+ 22 NOT USED 21 NOT USED
23 CH2 PB TX 24 NOT USED 23 NOT USED
25 RPTR CTL* 26 NOT USED 25 NOT USED
27 CH1 PB TX 28 NOT USED 27 NOT USED
29 CH1 V- 30 +5V 29 NOT USED
31 NOT USED 32 ARM9 RS232 TXD 31 ARM9 RS232 RDXD
33 NOT USED 34 EC1 CH2 RS232 TXD 33 EC1 CH2 RS232 RXD
* EARTH GROUND is connected to pin B1 as well.
8.3.8 Diagnostic LEDs - DeviceNet
LED DESCRIPTION
P (green) Power OK LED. Lit when the logic board's +5V and +3.3V digital supply voltage level is
OK.
module.
E No LED.
I (red) Internal Fault LED. Lit when the forced error bit (bit 1) of the configuration register is set,
or when the Ovation Controller is not communicating with the module.
1-5 No LED.
6 ACT (green) Ethernet activity.
7 FDX (yellow) Full duplex Ethernet communication.
8-12 S4 - S0 General purpose red LEDs. Lit under firmware control of the ARM9 processor.
(red)
13 - 16 No LED.
472 OW350_R1150
Field card LED indications Channels 1 and 2
LED LED STATE ME ANING
RDY (red) ON Device is ready.

5 Hz Flashing Firmware Download in progress.
1Hz Flashing Device in Bootloader mode and is awaiting firmware download.
Non-Cyclic Flashing Hardware or runtime error.
OFF Device has no power or hardware defect.
RUN (green) ON Communication is established with at least one field device.
5 Hz Flashing If MNS LED is GREEN then Device is established, but
communication is stopped, If MNS LED is flashing RED then NO
slave has been found.
Non-Cyclic Flashing At power up it indicates configuration missing, at runtime it
indicates watchdog timeout.
OFF No Communication.
MNS OFF Device is not on-line
Module/  The device has not completed the Dup
Network Status
 MAC_ID test yet.
(Combined  The device may not be powered
red/green)
Steady Green The device is operating in a normal condition and the device is
on-line with connections in the established state.
Flashing Green The device is operating in a normal condition and the device is
on-line with no connections in the established state.
Flashing Red Any one or more of the following conditions:
 Recoverable fault
 One or more I/O connections has timed out
 No network power present.
Steady Red Device has an unrecoverable fault and may need replacing
8.3.9 Specifications - DeviceNet

 Electronics module 5X00376G01
 Personality module 5X00375G01
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Voltage Minimum Nominal Maximum

Main Primary Voltage 21.0V 24.0V 25.0V
Main Secondary 21.0V 24.0V 25.0V
Voltage
Aux. Voltage 22.8V 24.0V 25.5V
Ovation I/O Bus Current (+24V Main) 132 mA typ.*
Ovation I/O Bus Power (+24V Main) 3.168 W typ.*
Input Under-voltage Lockout 17-18.5 volts
OW350_R1150 473
8.4 Foundation Fieldbus module
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Input Over-voltage Crowbar 29-35 volts

Number of segments per module 2
Interface characteristics RS485, 12 Mbaud Max
Ethernet 10/100 MBaud, Auto-negotiation supported
MDIX not supported, Standard RJ45 connection on the EMOD
Access only with cap removed
ARM9 Diagnostic Port RS232, 57.6 Kbaud Max, 5 pin header on the logic card, Access
only with cap removed
Dielectric Isolation +/- 1,000 V DC or peak AC for one minute, channel to channel or
channel to logic
International Electromagnetic Specification
Compatibility EN55011
EN61000-4-2
EN61000-4-3
EN61000-4-4
EN61000-4-5
EN61000-4-6
Operating temperature range 0 to 60°C (32°F to 140°F)
Storage temperature range 40°C to 85°C (40°F to 185°F) per Ovation standard.
Humidity (non-condensing) range 0% to 95%
Vibration 0.15mm displacement from 10 to 57 Hz and 2G's from 57 to 500 Hz

Shock 15G's for 11 milliseconds and 1/2 sine wave.
8.4.1 Subsystems - Foundation Fieldbus
Foundation Fieldbus subsystems
2 (non-redundant) 5X00301G01 1C31238H01 (cavity insert)

2 (redundant) 5X00301G01 5X00327G01
474 OW350_R1150
15 SYNC- *** 15 SYNC+ ***
19 DATA- * 19 DATA+ *
21 +24VOLTS (B)* 21 +24VOLTS (B)*
22 +24VOLTS (A)* 22 +24VOLTS (A)*
* Short Pin.
shown.
OW350_R1150 475
8.4.3 Interface - Foundation Fieldbus
Two Foundation Fieldbus interfaces are provided on the Foundation Fieldbus field card. Each
interface provides an ARM7 processor for stack management, Fieldbus Interface Chip (FINCH)
and a Media Attachment Unit (Shortbow MAU). Communication between the ARM7 processor
and the host processor on the logic card is through an asynchronous serial interface running at up
to 38.4 Kbaud.
The connection to the Fieldbus network is via the base unit's terminal block. Foundation Fieldbus
Power conditioners and Power supplies must be provided externally. A Personality Module is
provided that includes an RJ45 jack for the redundancy cable as well as two 9-pin D connectors
(one per channel) to access a second serial port on the ARM7 processor. The second serial port
is intended for troubleshooting purposes; however, the fact that the interface is present does not
imply software support.
Additionally, a JTAG port is available to support emulation and firmware development. This port is
only available with the modules removed from the case. Note that the JTAG port is not available
for boundary scan testing.
Main features
1. Each Foundation Fieldbus Field Card contains 2 independent galvanically isolated Fieldbus
channels. Each channel provides galvanic isolation between the Fieldbus field power and the
main 24VDC power supply. Additionally, the Foundation Fieldbus Field Card employs signal
separation to achieve channel to channel isolation.
2. Foundation Fieldbus Field cards use a Foundation Fieldbus approved H1 host Controller
stack and are in compliance with IEC standard 61158.
3. Each Fieldbus channel uses an ARM7 microcontroller to control the Fieldbus data
communications. Each ARM7 uses a 38.4 kbaud UART interface to interface data with the
Ovation module logic card. This allows the logic card to have positive control over the
Fieldbus network traffic.
4. Each Fieldbus channel uses a Shortbow Media Attachment Unit (MAU) application specific
integrated circuit (ASIC) to translate CMOS level logic to current modulated (+ and - 10 mA)
Fieldbus signals. The Shortbow derives its power from the 9 - 32 VDC (typically 24VDC)
Fieldbus network.
5. Fieldbus signals coming from the MAU are optically coupled and translated to CMOS logic
prior to the FINCH and microprocessor to maintain galvanic isolation.
476 OW350_R1150
6. Each Fieldbus channel uses a Fieldbus Interface Chip ASIC or FINCH to translate
Manchester encoded CMOS logic level signals coming from the MAU into 8-bit register values
to be passed to the microcontroller.
8.4.4 Redundancy module - Foundation Fieldbus
Foundation Fieldbus solutions support redundancy. Redundant modules each sit on the same
segment, although only one is the master. The other is in backup mode and does not control the
segment. If a module is in control, it is in control over both segments available on each module.
Assume control is passive as far as the Module is concerned. That is, the decision to place a
module in control or backup is made by the Controller.
Redundant modules communicate over a private RS232 port. Logically, this port goes to USART
port 1 on the ARM 9 (where available ports are 0-3). Physically, the connection is made through
an RJ45 jack located on the respective PMOD (PPB or PFF). The pinout of the RJ45 jack is such
that a standard null modem CAT5 Ethernet cable can be used.
OW350_R1150 477
8.4.5 Module block diagram - Foundation Fieldbus
8.4.6 Terminal block pin assignments - Foundation Fieldbus
The terminal block is a 53-position compression-style terminal block arranged in 3 rows.

 The "A" row, highest relative to the base, has 18 positions.
 The middle, or "B" row, has 17 positions.
 The "C" row, nearest to the base, has 18 positions.
shells and connected to the base. Refer to: Marshaling Base Unit (see page 35) for more
information.
Maximum wire size: 12 AWG single wire or two 14 AWG wires terminal.
The base unit termination block assignments are shown in the following table.
Base unit termination block assignments
ROW C SIGNAL NAME ROW B SIGNAL NAME ROW A SIGNAL

PIN NO. PIN NO. PIN NO. NAME
1-2 RSV 1-2 RSV 1-2 RSV

3 FIELDBUS #1+ 3 FIELDBUS #1- 3 RSV
478 OW350_R1150


5 RSV 5 CROSS CONNECT GND 5 RSV
6-9 RSV 6-9 RSV 6-9 RSV
10 FIELDBUS #2+ 10 FIELDBUS #2- 10 RSV
11 - 16 RSV 11 - 16 RSV 11 - 16 RSV
Note: PS+ and PS- are not used. The cross connect redundancy signals are the same that are
accessed with the RS232 redundancy connector on the PMOD. No connections are permitted to
terminals marked RSV.
8.4.7 EMOD backplane connectors - Foundation Fieldbus
This connector is located on the Foundation Fieldbus field card and interfaces to the base unit.
Pin Assignments:
ROW A SIGNAL NAME ROW B SIGNAL NAME ROW D SIGNAL

PIN PIN NO. PIN NAME
NO. NO.

15 CH2 RXD 16 CH2 TXD 15 NOT USED
19 CH2 LOOP- 20 CH2 LOOP+ 19 NOT USED
OW350_R1150 479

PIN PIN NO. PIN NAME
NO. NO.
29 DGND 30 NOT USED 29 NOT USED

31 ARM9 RS232 RXDXD 32 NOT USED 31 NOT USED
33 CH1 LOOP- 34 CH1 LOOP+ 33 NOT USED
37 CH1 RXD 38 CH1 TXD 37 NOT USED
8.4.8 PMOD backplane connectors - Foundation Fieldbus
This connector is located on the Foundation Fieldbus personality card and interfaces to the base
unit.
Pin Assignments:
ROW A SIGNAL ROW B SIGNAL NAME ROW D SIGNAL NAME

PIN NO. NAME PIN NO. PIN NO.

15 NOT USED 16 CH2 TXD 15 CH2 RXD
19 NOT USED 20 CH2 LOOP+ 19 CH2 LOOP-
29 NOT USED 30 NOT USED 29 DGND
31 NOT USED 32 ARM9 RS232 TXD 31 ARM9 RS232 RXD
33 NOT USED 34 CH1 LOOP+ 33 CH1 LOOP-
480 OW350_R1150

PIN NO. NAME PIN NO. PIN NO.
37 NOT USED 38 CH1 TXD 37 CH1 RXD
8.4.9 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - Foundation Fieldbus
LED DESCRIPTION
P (green) Power OK LED. Lit when the logic board's +5V and +3.3V digital supply voltage
level is OK.
C (green) Communication OK LED. Lit when Ovation Controller is communicating with
module.
E, I, 1 - 5 No LED.
8 - 12 S4 - S1 (red) General purpose red LEDs. Lit under firmware control of the ARM9 processor.
13 - 16 No LED.
8.4.10 Specifications - Foundation Fieldbus
Personality module (1X00458G01)
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Voltage Min. Nominal Max

Main Primary Voltage 21.0V 24.0V 25.0V
Main Secondary 21.0V 24.0V 25.0V
Voltage
Ovation I/O Bus Current (+24V Main) 76 mA type., 90 mA Max.
Ovation I/O Bus Power (+24V Main) 1.82 W type., 2.16 W Max.
Input Undervoltage Lockout 17-18.5 volts
Input Overvoltage Crowbar 29-35 volts
Current and Power Draw from the Fieldbus 17.2 ma/channel type .4128W/channel type
Interface characteristics Current Modulation (+/- 10 ma): 31.25 Kbaud
(for diagnostics) MDIX not supported, Standard RJ45 connection on the EMOD,
ARM9 Diagnostic Port RS232, 57.6 Kbaud Max
5 pin header on the logic card, Access only with cap removed
ARM7 Diagnostic Port RS 232 , 57.6 Kbaud Max
using PMOD 5X00327601 9 pin D connector (female) on the Foundation Fieldbus PMOD
OW350_R1150 481
8.5 Profibus DP module (DP)
DESCRIPTION VALUE
channel to logic
International Electromagnetic Compatibility Specification
EN55011
EN61000-4-2
EN61000-4-3
EN61000-4-4
EN61000-4-5
EN61000-4-6
Storage temperature range per Ovation standard

Vibration 0.15mm displacement from 10 to 57 Hz and 2G's from 57 to 500

Hz
8.5.1 Subsystems - Profibus (DP)
Profibus subsystems
2 5X00300GO1 5X00321G01
15 SYNC- *** 15 SYNC+ ***
482 OW350_R1150
19 DATA- * 19 DATA+ *
21 +24VOLTS (B)* 21 +24VOLTS (B)*
22 +24VOLTS (A)* 22 +24VOLTS (A)*
* Short Pin.
shown.
8.5.3 Interface - Profibus (DP)
Two Profibus DP Interfaces are provided on the Profibus/DeviceNet field card. Each Interface is
based on the Hilscher™ EC1 communication processor. This device is an 80C186 core with
communication interface for the Profibus DP network and an integral dual port memory for
communication with the host processor. Communication between the dual port memory and the
host processor on the logic card is through an 8-bit parallel interface mapped into the memory
space of the host processor. The circuitry includes a galvanically isolated RS485 interface for
connection to the Profibus DP network. Each connection to the network is through a female 9-pin
D connector per the Profibus DP standard. These two D connectors (one for each interface) are
available on a personality module. Line termination and biasing are part of the network mating
connector per standard. The EC1 processor provides an RS232 port for troubleshooting
purposes. These ports (one for each interface) are made available through an RJ45 jack. Access
is only available with the module cap removed.
The personality module also provides an accessible RJ-45 Jack for the redundancy cross connect
cable.
MAIN FEATURES
1. Profibus field cards provide 2 independent galvanically isolated Profibus channels. Each
channel uses a galvanically isolated 1W DC to DC converter to power the Profibus field side
components such as ADM2486 which is also isolated. This provides galvanic isolation
between the Profibus field network and the Ovation module. Additionally, the Personality card
uses individual channel isolated ground and power planes separated by 0.063 inches
minimum to achieve channel to channel isolation.
2. Each Profibus channel uses an EC-1 ASIC microcontroller, to act as a Profibus master
Controller (IEC 61784 and 61158).
3. Each EC-1 interfaces to the Ovation module logic card (LPB) via a dual port memory built in
to the ASIC. The dual port is an 8-bit bidirectional interface that allows the logic access to the
Profibus data.
OW350_R1150 483
4. Each EC-1 provides CMOS level single ended transmit and receive signals to and from the
galvanically isolated Profibus transceiver chip. The ADM2486 then translates them to an
RS485 level differential signal for Profibus communication.
5. Two Profibus mandated 9-pin d-subminiature connectors are located on the Profibus
Personality Module and require standardized Profibus cabling.
6. In the event a Profibus repeater is used in a redundant application, each Profibus channel is
equipped with a tri-state buffer driver circuit which can be enabled or disabled depending on
which channel needs to signal the repeater. This circuit is not supported by the logic card nor
recognized by Profibus standards.
8.5.4 Redundancy module - Profibus (DP)
Profibus DP solutions support redundancy. Redundant modules each sit on the same segment,
although only one is the master. The other is in backup mode and does not control the segment. If
a module is in control, it is in control over both segments available on each module. Assume
control is passive as far as the Module is concerned. That is, the decision to place a module in
control or backup is made by the Controller.
Redundant modules communicate over a private RS232 port. Logically, this port goes to USART
port 1 on the ARM 9 (where available ports are 0-3). Physically, the connection is made through
an RJ45 jack located on the respective PMOD (PPB or PFF). The pinout of the RJ45 jack is such
that a standard null modem CAT5 Ethernet cable can be used.
484 OW350_R1150
8.5.5 Module block diagram & DP field card/personality card - Profibus (DP)
8.5.6 Terminal block pin assignments - Profibus (DP)
The Profibus DP module base unit has a 53-position compression-style terminal block arranged in
3 rows. The "A" row, highest relative to the base, has 18 positions. The middle, or "B" row has 17
positions. The "C" row, nearest to the base, has 18 positions.
information.
Maximum wire size is 12 AWG single wire or two 14 AWG wires/terminal.
The base unit termination block assignments are show in the following table.

1-3 RSV 1-3 RSV 1-3 RSV
OW350_R1150 485


6 - 16 RSV 6 - 16 RSV 6 - 16 RSV
Note: PS+ and PS- are not used. The cross connect redundancy signals are the same that are accessed
with the RS232 redundancy connector on the PMOD. No connections are permitted to terminals marked
RSV.
Note: Connection to the Profibus is made through a 9 pin female "D subminiature" connector
on the PMOD. There is one connector for each channel.
8.5.7 EMOD backplane connectors - Profibus (DP)
This connector is located on the Profibus field card and interfaces to the base unit.


486 OW350_R1150


8.5.8 PMOD backplane connectors - Profibus (DP)
This connector is located on the Profibus DP personality card and interfaces to the base unit.

PIN NAME PIN NO. PIN NO.
NO.
1 Earth Ground* 1 NOT USED 1 NOT USED

21 NOT USED 22 CH2 PB RX 21 NOT USED
23 NOT USED 24 CH2 PB ENAB 23 CH2 PB TX
25 NOT USED 26 CH1 PB RX 25 RPTR CTL*
29 NOT USED 30 +5V 29 DGND
31 NOT USED 32 ARM9 RS232 TXD 31 ARM9 RS232 RXDXD
33 NOT USED 34 EC1 CH2 RS232 TXD 33 EC1 RS232 RXD
OW350_R1150 487
8.5.9 Logic card diagnostic LEDs - Profibus (DP)
LED DESCRIPTION
P (green) Power OK LED. Lit when the logic board's +5V and +3.3V digital supply voltage level
is OK.
module.
E No LED.
I (red) Internal Fault LED. Lit when the forced error bit (bit 1) of the configuration register is
set, or when the Ovation Controller is not communicating with the module.
1-5 No LED.
8-12 S4 - S0 General purpose red LEDs. Lit under firmware control of the ARM9 processor.
(red)
13 - 16 No LED.
488 OW350_R1150
8.6 Ethernet Link Controller
8.5.10 Specifications - Profibus (DP)
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Voltage Main Primary Voltage 21.0V Min. 24.0V Nominal 25.0V Max.
Main Secondary Voltage 21.0V Min. 24.0V Nominal 25.0V Max.
Ovation I/O Bus Current (+24V Main) 160 mA typ.*, 214 mA Max.
Ovation I/O Bus Power (+24V Main) 3.84 W typ.*, 5.136 W Max.
Redundancy Port RS232, 57.6 Kbaud Max, RJ45 jack on the PMOD.
ARM9 Diagnostic Port RS232, 57.6 Kbaud Max, 5 pin header on the logic card.
Access only with cap removed.
channel to logic.
EN61000-4-2
EN61000-4-3
EN61000-4-4
EN61000-4-5
EN61000-4-6
Operating temperature range 0 to 60°C (32°F to 140°F).
Storage temperature range Per Ovation standard.
Vibration 0.15mm displacement from 10 to 57 Hz and 2G's from 57 to 500 Hz.
8.6.1 Subsystems - Ethernet Link Controller
Ethernet Link Controller subsystems
2 5X00419GO1 1X000569H01
OW350_R1150 489
15 SYNC- *** 15 SYNC+ ***
19 DATA- * 19 DATA+ *
21 +24VOLTS (B)* 21 +24VOLTS (B)*
22 +24VOLTS (A)* 22 +24VOLTS (A)*
* Short Pin.
shown.
8.6.3 Interface - Ethernet Link Controller
The Ethernet Link Controller provides a single Ethernet link directly off the LPB board using an 8
position RJ45 modular connector accessible without removing Emod cap. An Ethernet CAT5e
cable with right angle RJ45 connector is required to mate to the Ethernet Link Controller module
to avoid a tight cable radius bend.
490 OW350_R1150
8.6.4 Module block diagram & field card/personality card - Ethernet Link
Controller
OW350_R1150 491
8.6.5 Terminal block pin assignments - Ethernet Link Controller
The Ethernet Link Controller module base unit has a 53-position compression-style terminal block
arranged in 3 rows. The "A" row, highest relative to the base, has 18 positions. The middle, or "B"
row has 17 positions. The "C" row, nearest to the base, has 18 positions.
information.
Maximum wire size is 12 AWG single wire or two 14 AWG wires/terminal.
The base unit termination block assignments are show in the following table.

1-3 RSV 1-3 RSV 1-3 RSV

492 OW350_R1150

1-3 RSV 1-3 RSV 1-3 RSV

6 - 16 RSV 6 - 16 RSV 6 - 16 RSV
Note: PS+ and PS- are not used. The cross connect redundancy signals are the same that are accessed
with the RS232 redundancy connector on the PMOD. No connections are permitted to terminals marked
RSV.
Note: Connection to the Ethernet Link Controller is made through a 9 pin female "D
subminiature" connector on the PMOD. There is one connector for each channel.
8.6.6 EMOD backplane connectors - Ethernet Link Controller
This connector is located on the Ethernet Link Controller field card and interfaces to the base unit.


OW350_R1150 493


8.6.7 PMOD backplane connectors - Ethernet Link Controller
This connector is located on the Ethernet Link Controller personality card and interfaces to the
base unit.

1 Earth Ground* 1 NOT USED 1 NOT USED

21 NOT USED 22 CH2 PB RX 21 NOT USED
25 NOT USED 26 CH1 PB RX 25 RPTR CTL*
29 NOT USED 30 +5V 29 DGND
31 NOT USED 32 ARM9 RS232 TXD 31 ARM9 RS232 RXDXD
33 NOT USED 34 EC1 CH2 RS232 TXD 33 EC1 RS232 RXD
494 OW350_R1150
8.6.8 Diagnostic Logic Card LEDs - Ethernet Link Controller
LED DESCRIPTION
P (green) Power OK LED. Lit when the logic board's +5V and +3.3V digital supply voltage level is OK.
E (red) Fault LED. Lit when the forced error bit (bit 1) of the configuration register is set, or when the
Ovation Controller is not communicating with the module.
I, 1 - 5 No LED.
8-12 S4 -S0 (red) General purpose red LEDs. Lit under firmware control of the ARM9 processor.
13 - 16 No LED.
8.6.9 Specifications - Ethernet Link Controller
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Ovation I/O Bus Current (+24V Main) 160 mA typ.*, 214 mA Max.
Ovation I/O Bus Power (+24V Main) 3.84 W typ.*, 5.136 W Max.
Redundancy Port RS232, 57.6 Kbaud Max, RJ45 jack on the PMOD
ARM9 Diagnostic Port RS232, 57.6 Kbaud Max, 5 pin header on the logic card
Dielectric Isolation +/- 1,000 V DC or peak AC for one minute, channel to channel or channel
to logic
EN61000-4-2
EN61000-4-3
EN61000-4-4
EN61000-4-5
EN61000-4-6
Storage temperature range Per Ovation standard
Vibration 0.15mm displacement from 10 to 57 Hz and 2G's from 57 to 500 Hz
OW350_R1150 495
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Shock 15G's for 11 milliseconds and 1/2 sine wave
496 OW350_R1150
S E C T I O N 9
9 Specialty I/O modules
IN THIS SECTION
Link Controller module - (LC) .......................................................................................... 497

Loop Interface module - (LI) ............................................................................................ 499
Pulse Accumulator module - (PA) ................................................................................... 527
Servo Driver module - (SVD) .......................................................................................... 553
Small Loop Interface module (SLIM) .............................................................................. 603
Speed Detector module - (SD) ........................................................................................ 610
Valve Positioner module - (RVP) .................................................................................... 627
Enhanced Valve Positioner module - (ERVP) ................................................................. 682
Numalogic Fast Ethernet Remote Node (Windows Ovation 3.4 and above) .................. 708
9.1 Link Controller module - (LC)
9.1.1 Overview - (LC)
The Link Controller (LC) module provides the Ovation Controller with a serial data
communications link to a third-party device or system. This communication is done via a serial
RS-232, RS-422, or RS-485 data link. Two ports (one programming and one application) are
provided.
This module is not described in this document. (See Ovation LC Module Interface User Guide.)
The Link Controller module is a CE Mark certified module.
Note: I/O Module general information (see page 25) contains environmental, installation, wiring,
9.1.2 Electronics modules (Emod) - (LC)

 1C31166G01 not for new projects. Used for spares and replacements only.
 1C31166G02 provides for communication to a third-party device or system.
9.1.3 Personality modules (Pmod) - (LC)

 1C31169G01 provides for an RS-232 serial link (in CE Mark certified systems, the application
port cable must be less than 10 meters (32.8 ft)).
 1C31169G02 provides for an RS-485 serial link (also may be used to provide for an RS-422
serial link).
OW350_R1150 497
9.1 Link Controller module - (LC)
9.1.4 Subsystems - (LC)
1
Link Controller subsystems

S MODULE MODULE
RS232 One (1) Serial Port (Able to handle many 2 1C31169G01

1C31166G01
points) or
1C31166G02
RS485/RS422 Four One (1) Serial Port (Able to handle many 2 1C31169G02
1C31166G01
wire points) or
1C31166G02
1
All module configurations listed in the table are CE Mark Certified. 1C31166G02 pending CE Mark
Certification.
2
Not for new projects. Used for spares and replacements only.
To use this module, the appropriate SLC algorithm must reside in the Ovation Controller. (See Ovation
Algorithm Reference Manual.)
498 OW350_R1150
9.2 Loop Interface module - (LI)
9.2.1 Overview - (LI)
The Ovation single-loop Controller is designed to interface to the analog and digital I/O necessary
to control a single process loop. In addition, the Ovation single-loop Controller displays this
process information and provides for manual control via a local operator interface station.
The Ovation single-loop interface module provides the following field inputs and outputs
necessary to interface to a single loop:
 Two galvanically isolated analog inputs.
 One analog output.
 Two galvanically isolated digital inputs.
 Two digital outputs (the outputs share a common ground with each other, but are galvanically
isolated from the other I/O circuits and from the logic portion of the module).
In addition, the single-loop interface module contains an RS-422 serial port for communications
with a loop interface module (SLIM) and an interface for communications over the Ovation serial
I/O bus.
The Loop Interface module is a CE Mark certified module.
9.2.2 Electronics modules (Emod) - (LI)

 1C31174G01 provides analog inputs 0 to +10V, and analog outputs 0 to +10V, digital inputs
24/48 VDC and digital outputs 60 VDC.
 1C31174G02 provides analog inputs 0 to +5V, and analog outputs 0 to +10V, digital inputs
 1C31174G03 provides analog inputs 4 to 20mA, and analog outputs 4 to 20mA, digital inputs
 1C31174G04 provides analog inputs 4 to 20mA, and no analog output (Electric Drive), digital
inputs 24/48 VDC and digital outputs 60 VDC.
9.2.3 Personality modules (Pmod) - (LI)

 1C31177G01 provides voltage analog inputs and configurable remote or local shield
grounding.
 1C31177G02 provides current analog inputs and locally powered, local shield grounding.
 1C31177G03 provides current analog inputs and field powered, remote shield grounding.
OW350_R1150 499
9.2.4 Module Groups - (LI)
There are two basic styles of single-loop interface modules, Normal (non-electric drive) and
Electric Drive:
 Normal (non-electric drive) Type - This type of module calculates the process variable for
display at the SLIM by converting analog input 1 to engineering units. The output to the field is
the analog output. This type of module may use a group 1, 2, or 3 Electronics module.
 Electric Drive Type - Two types of Electric Drive modules are supported. Electric Drive
module types are available with group 4 Electronics modules only. The mode of the Electric
Drive is controlled through software.
 Electric Drive Type (Mode 1)
This type of module calculates the process variable from analog input 1, and the output
(Demand) is calculated by the Controller as in Normal (non-electric drive) card styles.
However, the output to the field are the two digital outputs. The output (Demand) from the
Controller is compared to the process position (analog input 2), and raise and output
pulses are generated accordingly to control the process. Digital output 1 corresponds to
rise, and digital output 2 corresponds to lower. The outputs are pulsed with the duty cycle
proportional to the speed of the rise or lower action. The raise/lower ON/OFF times are
specified in the control algorithm.
 Electric Drive Type (Mode 2)
As in Electric Drive (Mode 1), this type of module calculates the process variable from
analog input 1, and its field output are two digital outputs. However, in all operating modes
except Local, a demand of zero (0) forces a hard (non-pulsing) lower. This means that
digital output 2 is forced active LOW and remains LOW until the demand is not equal to 0.
Local mode operation is unchanged.
9.2.5 Subsystems - (LI)
1, 4
Loop Interface subsystems

MODULE MODULE
Normal (Non-electric) Drive modules

0-10V Analog Inputs/Output 6 1C31174G01 1C31177G01
2 6 1C31174G21 1C31177G01
0-10V AI/AO - user defined Digital Inputs
0-5V Analog Inputs, 0-10V Analog Output 6 1C31174G02 1C31177G01
2 6 1C31174G22 1C31177G01
0-5V AI, 0-10V AO - user defined Digital Inputs
4-20mA AI/AO Locally powered analog inputs 6 1C31174G03 1C31177G02
4-20mA AI/AO Field powered analog inputs 6 1C31174G03 1C31177G03
2 6 1C31174G23 1C31177G02
Locally powered analog inputs
2 6 1C31174G23 1C31177G03
Field powered analog inputs
500 OW350_R1150

MODULE MODULE
When defining points for a normal (non-electric) drive Loop Interface module, the following point types are
required for each channel:
I/O NAM E TYPE INPUT SOURCE OR TERMINAL

CHNL OUTPUT BLOCK
DESTINATION CONNECTION
1 2 Input Loop Interface module DI1

Priority Raise or user-defined
Priority Lower or user-defined
3 User Defined Output Loop Interface module DO1
4 User Defined Output Loop Interface module DO2
5 Process Variable Input (dedicated) Input Loop Interface module AI1
6 Set point Input (optional) Input Loop Interface module AI2
None Output Output Loop Interface module 3
AI3
Two additional channels are used at Emod Revision 5 or higher:
6 Controller Process Variable Output Analog No Terminations
7 Controller Set Point Output Analog No Terminations
Electric Drive modules
4-20mA Inputs; No Output Locally powered 4 1C31174G04 1C31177G02

analog inputs 1C31177G03
4-20mA Inputs; No Output Field powered 4 1C31174G04 1C31177G02
analog inputs
4-20mA Inputs; No Output - user defined Digital 4 1C31174G24 1C31177G03
2
Inputs Locally powered analog inputs
4-20mA Inputs; No Output - user defined Digital 4 1C31174G24
2
Inputs Field powered analog inputs
OW350_R1150 501

MODULE MODULE
When defining points for an electric drive Loop Interface module, the following point types are required for
each channel:
I/O NAM E TYPE INPUT SOURCE OR TERMINAL

CHN OUTPUT DESTINATION BLOCK
L CONNECTION

Priority Raise or user-defined
Priority Lower or user-defined
None Output Raise Pulse (dedicated) Output Loop Interface module 3
DO1
None Output Lower Pulse (dedicated) Output Loop Interface module 3
DO2
5 Process Variable Input (dedicated) Input Loop Interface module AI1
6 Process Position (dedicated) Input Loop Interface module AI2
None Output Output Output is compared to No Terminations
Process Position.
Raise/Lower pulses
(DO1, DO2) are
generated as applicable.
Two additional channels are used at Emod Revision 5 or higher:
7 Controller Process Variable Output Analog No Terminations
8 Controller Set Point Output Analog No Terminations
1
This module controls ONE process loop. To use this module, the MASTATION algorithm must reside in
the Ovation Controller. (See the Ovation Algorithm Reference Manual.)
2
Priority Raise and Lower inputs can be disabled and used as user-defined input points. Configuration
instructions are included in Kit 1C31174G20.
3
This output may not appear on the termination list, but must be terminated for proper operation.
4
9.2.6 Modes of Operation - (LI)
There are four modes of operation for the Loop Interface module:
 Cascade
 Auto
 Manual (also supports Timed-out Manual sub-mode)
 Local (also supports Timed-out Local sub-mode)
Operation modes
MODE SOURCE FOR OUTPUT (DEMAND) SOURCE FOR SETPOINT
Cascade Controller Controller
502 OW350_R1150
MODE SOURCE FOR OUTPUT (DEMAND) SOURCE FOR SETPOINT
Auto Controller Controller or SLIM

Manual Controller or SLIM Controller or SLIM
1 SLIM SLIM
Local
1
When in Local mode, the Loop Interface module accepts mode change requests from the SLIM only.
9.2.7 Priority Raise and Lower - (LI)
For the Ovation Loop Interface module, the digital inputs perform priority raise and lower
functions. The digital inputs are used as priority raise or lower for the output. Priority action takes
precedence over any output request from the Controller or SLIM. Priority Raise and Lower may
be used with either of the two module types (Normal (non-electric) or Electric Drive).
If desired, digital inputs as priority raise and lower can be disabled and used as user-defined
digital input points. In order to disable digital inputs as priority raise and lower functions, the
module must be configured per instructions on drawing 1C31174 (Groups 21-24).
9.2.8 Manual station control - (LI)
The Single-Loop Interface module may communicate to the Small Loop Interface module (SLIM)
via its RS-422 serial port. The serial port connector is located on the personality module.
Alternatively, the serial port wiring may be connected directly at the terminal block.
A single SLIM communicates with one Loop Interface module. Multiple Loop Interface modules
per single SLIM are not supported. SLIMs are not required for the loop interface module
operation. (The loop interface module may be used without a SLIM.)
9.2.9 Normal & inverse analog output - (LI)
A wire jumper between terminals IAO and logic GND can be used to set the analog output to
Inverse Operation.
Normal (default - no wire installed) operation of the analog output means that when the output
value is 0% (as seen at the SLIM or Controller), the analog output is a minimum (0V for groups 1
and 2, or 4mA for groups 3 and 4 modules). When the output value is 100%, the actual analog
output is at its Maximum value (+10V for group 1, +5V for group 2, and 20mA for groups 3 and 4
modules).
Inverse (wire jumper installed) operation of the analog output means that when the output value is
0% (as seen at the SLIM or Controller), the analog output is a Maximum (+10V for group 1, +5V
for group 2, and 20mA for groups 3 and 4 modules). When the output value is 100%, the analog
output is its minimum value (0V for groups 1 and 2, or 4mA for groups 3 and 4 modules).
OW350_R1150 503
9.2.10 External power supply information - (LI)
If the Loop Interface subsystem uses the 1C31177G02 Personality module (configured for two 4
to 20 mA current analog inputs that are locally powered), the required voltage supply may be
obtained from the internal Ovation auxiliary power supply (available through the terminal block), or
it may be obtained from an external power supply.
steps to be undertaken before connecting the external power supply to the Loop Interface module
base unit terminal block. The Loop Interface module auxiliary supply voltage level (24 VDC or 48
VDC) depends on the external transmitter devices being interfaced to the Loop Interface module‟s
analog inputs.
504 OW350_R1150
9.2.11 Terminal block wiring information - (LI)
information.
The diagrams for the Loop Interface Personality modules are illustrated in below. The following
table lists and defines the abbreviations used in those diagrams.
Figure 123: Terminal Block Connections for the Loop Interface Personality Modules
OW350_R1150 505
Loop Interface terminal block wiring information
SECTION ABBREVIATION DEFINITION
LIM/SLIM (see 2 Shield terminal connection

SH
1
page 603)
Logic ground
ATT Attention
RX ± Receive data
TX ± Transmit data
DIGITAL OUTPUT V± Voltage source terminal connection
± 1, ± 2 Positive or negative terminal connection
2 Shield terminal connection
SH1, SH2
ANALOG ±1 Positive or negative terminal connection

3
OUTPUT 2 Shield terminal connection
SH1
IAO When connected to logic ground, results in an inverse analog

output (see page 503) operation.
DIGITAL INPUTS ± 1, ± 2 Positive or negative terminal connection
4
V- Fused voltage source terminal ground connection
Vf+ Fused voltage source terminal connection
ANALOG INPUTS ± 1, ± 2 Positive or negative terminal connection
5
2 Shield terminal connection
SH1, SH2
P1+, P2+ Positive terminal connection for current loop power
PS ± PS ± Auxiliary power supply terminals
Earth GND Earth ground terminals
RSV RSV Reserved. No connections allowed on these terminals.

1
No connections to terminals are required when using a SLIM cable (5A26166) connected to a Loop
Interface Personality module. In CE Mark systems, SLIM cable 5A26429 MUST be used and grounded at
the entry point of the cabinet using the recommended hardware (refer to the appropriate “Cable Guidelines”
information for your system).
2
Not used on CE Mark certified systems.
3
For Group 3 current Loop Interface modules, analog output MUST be connected for proper operation, or
an analog output error is reported.
4
If digital inputs as priority and raise and lower are not desired (but are enabled), a shorting wire MUST be
placed across inputs (+1 to -1 and +2 to -2) to eliminate false turn on from noise.
5
For Group 3 and 4 current Loop Interface modules, analog inputs MUST be connected for proper
operation, or an analog input error is reported.
506 OW350_R1150
Note: Do not use unmarked terminal block locations or locations marked RSV.
The analog output is not present on electric drive modules.
9.2.12 Field connection wiring diagram - (LI)
Figure 124: Voltage Analog Input Field Connections
OW350_R1150 507
Figure 125: Jumper Settings for Voltage Analog Input Personality Module
508 OW350_R1150
Figure 126: Locally Powered Current Analog Input Field Connections
OW350_R1150 509
Figure 127: Field Powered Current Analog Input Field Connections
510 OW350_R1150
Figure 128: Analog Output Field Connections
OW350_R1150 511
Figure 129: Digital Inputs (local auxiliary supply) Field Connections
512 OW350_R1150
Figure 130: Digital Inputs (field auxiliary supply) Field Connections
OW350_R1150 513
Figure 131: Digital Outputs (local aux supply) Field Connections
514 OW350_R1150
Figure 132: Digital Outputs (field aux supply) Field Connections
OW350_R1150 515
9.2.13 Field connection wiring (CE Mark) - (LI)
Figure 133: Voltage Analog Input Field Connections (CE Mark)
516 OW350_R1150
Figure 134: Locally Powered Current Analog input Field Connections (CE Mark)
OW350_R1150 517
Figure 135: Field Powered Current Analog Input Field Connections (CE Mark)
Figure 136: Analog Output Field Connections (CE Mark)
518 OW350_R1150
Terminal Block
DI section Pmod (PLIV, PLIL, PLIF) Emod (FLI)
DI
Vf+
DI1
Rsv VIN
+1
Field
Contact -1 RTN1 RTN1
SeeNOTE
SEE Note 1 1
Vfs-
V-
Vfs+
Vf+
DI2
Rsv VIN
+2
Field RTN2
Contact -2 RTN2
See Note 1 Vfs-
V-
DO+2
DO+1
Rsv
Vfs+ Fuse
VW+
Mon
V+
Auxiliary Fuse
Wetting Supply Input
(same as for Digital Outputs) Vfs- Supply
V-
gnd
If Aux. supply = wettting
If auxiliary supply is the
supply: connect PS+, PS- to
internal auxiliary supply,
V+, V-
connect PS+, PS- to V+, V-
Note
1. All field wiring must be braid-shielded and grounded at the entry point of the cabinet using the
recommended hardware (refer to Cable Guidelines in the applicablePlanning
" Your Ovation System
").
Figure 137: Digital Inputs (local auxiliary supply) Field Connections (CE Mark)
OW350_R1150 519
Terminal Block
DI section Pmod (PLIV, PLIL, PLIF) Emod (FLI)
Field Vf+
DI1
Contact Rsv VIN
+1
Fuse -1 RTN1 RTN1
External Vfs-
SEE NOTE V-
Auxiliary
W etting See Note 11
Supply Vfs+
Vf+
DI2
Field Rsv VIN
Contact +2
RTN2
-2 RTN2
Fuse Vfs-
V-
External DO+2
W etting
Auxiliary See Note 1 DO+1
Supply Rsv
Vfs+ Fuse
Fuse
Mon
External VW+
auxiliary
Wetting supply V+
not monitored or
Vfs- Supply
fused on LLI. V-
gnd
Note
recommended hardware (refer to Cable Guidelines in the applicablePlanning
" Your Ovation System
").
Figure 138: Digital Inputs (field auxiliary supply) Field Connections (CE Mark)
520 OW350_R1150
Terminal Block
Emod (FLI) Pmod (PLIV, PLIL, PLIF) DO section
Vfs+
+1
LOAD
D DO1- DO1-
-1
G
S
DO1SHLD
SH1
SEE NOTE
See Note 1 1
Vfs+
+2
LOAD
D
DO2- DO2-
-2
G
S
DO2SHLD
SH2 See Note 1
Vf
Fuse Vf
Mon Rsv
Vfs+ VW+
V+
Fuse Auxiliary
Wetting Supply
Rtn Vfs-
Input
V-
If Aux supply = wetting supply:
If auxiliary supply is the
connect PS+, PS- to V+,V-
internal auxiliary supply,
connect PS+, PS- to V+, V-
Note
recommended hardware (refer to Cable Guidelines in the applicable"Planning Your Ovation System" ).
Figure 139: Digital Outputs (local auxiliary supply) Field Connections (CE Mark)
OW350_R1150 521
Terminal Block
Emod (FLI) Pmod (PLIV, PLIL, PLIF) DO section
DO
Vfs+
+1
D DO1- DO1-
-1 LOAD
Fuse
G
DO1SHLD
S SH1
Vfs+
+2
D
DO2- DO2-
-2 LOAD
Fuse
G
DO2SHLD
S SH2 External Wetting
auxiliary
supply not monitored
or fused on LLI.
Vf
Fuse Vf
Mon Rsv
Vfs+ VW+
V+
Fuse
Rtn Vfs-
V-
See Note 1
SEE NOTE 1
Note
recommended hardware (refer to Cable Guidelines in the applicable"Planning Your Ovation System ").
Figure 140: Digital Outputs (field auxiliary supply) Field Connections (CE Mark)
9.2.14 SLIM serial port connector - (LI)
The Personality module SLIM connector is used to connect the Loop Interface module to a SLIM
module.
SLIM Connector (J1 RS-485) Pin Assignments
PIN NUMBER SIGNAL NAME (FUNCTION ) SIGNAL DIRECTION
1 SP-COMMON NA
2 RX - (Receive Data) Input
3 Shd (Cable Shield) NA
4 RX+ (Receive Data) Input
5 1 Input
SLIM-ATT/(SLIM Cable Connector Attached)
6 TX+ (Transmit Data) Output
7 No connection NA
8 TX- (Transmit Data) Output
9 SP-COMMON NA
522 OW350_R1150
9.2.15 Register configuration/address information - (LI)
Guide.)
Loop interface configuration/status register (address 13 or D in Hex)

0 Configure module (1=configure) module is configured (1=configured;

0=unconfigured)
1 Force Error (1=error; 0=no error) Internal or Forced Error (1=error; 0=no error)
2-4 Communications Timeout Setting Communications Timeout Setting
1 0 0 500 millisecs. 1 0 0 500 millisecs.
1 1 1 62.5 millisecs. 1 1 1 62.5 millisecs.
OW350_R1150 523

5 For non-Electric Drive modules: For non-Electric Drive modules:

1 = Digital outputs hold state on Controller 1 = Digital outputs hold their state on Controller
timeout Timeout.
0 = Digital outputs shut off on Controller 0 = Digital Outputs are shut off on Controller
timeout. timeout.
6 Not used. 1 = LIM connector not attached.
7 Not used. 1 = LIM communications error.
8 Not used. 1 = Inverse analog output operation.
9 Not used. 1 = Digital inputs as priority and raise and lower
are disabled.
0 = Digital inputs as priority and raise and lower
are enabled.
10 Not used. 1 = Electric module (Beck) Drive.
11 Not used. 1 = EEPROM program enabled.
12 Not used. Not used.
13 1 = Enable blown fuse detection for digital input. 1 = Blown fuse detection for digital inputs
enabled.
14 1 = 50 Hz system, 0 = 60 Hz system. 1 = 50 Hz system, 0 = 60 Hz system.
15 Not used. 1 = One of the bits in register C is set.
524 OW350_R1150
Word address 14 (E in Hex) serves the purpose of the Secondary Configuration/Status Register.
Secondary configuration/status register (address 14 or E in Hex)

0 For Electric Drive modules: For Electric Drive modules:

1 = Mode 2 Electric Drive 1 = Mode 2 Electric Drive
0 = Normal (Mode 1) Electric Drive 0 = Normal (Mode 1) Electric Drive
1 For Electric Drive modules: For Electric Drive modules:
1 = Digital output pulses start with the ON time. 1 = Digital output pulses start with the ON time.
0 = Digital output pulses start with the OFF time. 0 = Digital output pulses start with the OFF time.
2 Enable blown fuse detection for digital outputs. Blown fuse detection for digital outputs is enabled.
3-8 Not Used. Not Used.

9* 1 = Controller defined setpoint 1 = Controller defined setpoint enabled
0 = Normal setpoint 0 = Normal setpoint
10* 1 = Controller defined process variable. 1 = Controller defined process variable enabled.
0 = Normal PV operation. 0 = Normal process variable operation.
11 - Not Used. Not Used.
15*
* Software supported only for Rev 5 and higher Emod.
Word address 12 (C in Hex) serves the purpose of reporting the point quality.
Point quality register (address 12 or C in Hex)
BIT WRITE READ DEFINITION

DEFINITION
0 Not used 1 = Analog Input 1 auto calibration reasonability check failed.

1 Not used 1 = Analog Input 1 over-range, blown fuse or open loop.
2 Not used 1 = Analog Input 1 auto calibration reasonability check failed.
OW350_R1150 525
BIT WRITE READ DEFINITION

DEFINITION
3 Not used 1 = Analog Input 1 over-range, blown fuse or open loop.

4 Not used 1 = Analog Input auxiliary supply blown fuse monitored and detected.
5 Not used 1 = Analog Output over current.
6 Not used 1 = Analog Output undercurrent.
7 Not used 1 = Priority Raise or Lower error (both raise and lower inputs are active).
8 - 15 Not used Internal (Initialization) Error Codes.
9.2.16 Diagnostic Logic Card LEDs - (LI)
LED DESCRIPTION
P (Green) Power OK LED. Lit when the +5V power is OK.

C (Green) Communications OK LED. Lit when the Controller is communicating with the module.
I (Red) Internal Error LED. Lit whenever there is any type of error with the module. Possible
causes are:
 I/O bus communications watchdog timeout.
 Forced error issued by the Controller.
 Initialization error (SRAM error, invalid group, and so forth).
 Microcontroller watchdog timer timeout or module reset.
1 AO (Red) Analog Output Error. Lit whenever there is an over current or undercurrent condition on
the analog output section (Group 3 and 4 only).
2 AI1,(Red) Analog Input Error. Lit whenever there is an input error. Possible causes are:
 Input voltage over-range for 10 seconds.
 Broken current loop input/blown fuse for module configured as current input.
 Offset calibration voltage out of range for five consecutive calibrations (40 seconds).
3 AI2 (Red) same as LED # 2.
4 Fuse (Red) Blown Fuse Error. Lit if the auxiliary supply voltage for either the digital inputs or digital
outputs is not present and blown fuse detection is enabled for either the digital outputs or
the digital inputs.
5 SLIM (Red) SLIM Communication Error. Lit if there is a SLIM serial port communications error.
6 DO1 (Green) Digital Output Status. Lit when digital output 1 is active.
7 DO2 (Green) Digital Output Status. Lit when digital output 2 is active.
8 DI1 (Green) Digital Input Status. Lit when digital input 1 is active.
9 DI2 (Green) Digital Input Status. Lit when digital input 2 is active.
10 No LED.
11 No LED.
12 No LED.
13 No LED.
14 No LED.
526 OW350_R1150
9.3 Pulse Accumulator module - (PA)
LED DESCRIPTION
15 No LED.
16 No LED.
9.3 Pulse Accumulator module - (P A)
9.3.1 Overview - (PA)
The Pulse Accumulator module accumulates pulses for two input channels and provides the
information to the Controller. There are three possible configurations:
 Counting pulses over a defined period of time allows the module to measure the speed of the
input pulses (frequency).
 Counting pulses until instructed to stop counting either by the Ovation Controller or by an
external field control input.
 Measuring the time duration of a pulse.
The Pulse Accumulator module is a CE Mark certified module.
9.3.2 Electronics modules (Emod) - (PA)

 1C31147G01 provides for pulse accumulation at one of three possible pulse input levels:
 24/48 V (CT+ and CT- inputs). May be referenced to either negative or positive field
signal power supply common. Applicable for CE Mark.
 12 V medium speed (MC+ and HM- inputs). Not applicable for CE Mark.
 5 V medium speed (HC+ and HM-). Not applicable for CE Mark.
 1C31147G02 provides for pulse accumulation at 5 V high speed (HC+ and
HM-). Not applicable for CE Mark certified systems.
OW350_R1150 527
9.3.3 Personality modules (Pmod) - (PA)

 1C31150G01 accepts 24/48 V count and control inputs from dry contacts or from solid-state
low-side switch drivers. The input signals are low-true and are referenced to the branch
internal auxiliary power supply return (common negative).
 1C31150G02 accepts 24/48 V count and control inputs from dry contacts or from solid-state
high-side switch drivers. The input signals are high-true and are referenced to the branch
internal auxiliary power supply positive rail (common positive).
 1C31150G03 provides dedicated 24/48 V count and control field input power for just this
Pulse Accumulator Electronics module. The field input power is obtained from an external DC
power supply that is connected to two base unit terminal block terminals (DSA and DSB).
1
Pulse Accumulator Subsystem
COUNT CONTROL (ENABLE AND CHANNELS ELECTRONICS PERSONALITY

INPUT SNAPSHOT) INPUT LEVEL MODULE MODULE
LEVEL
24/48 V 24/48 V Medium Speed

Medium Local field pwr. common neg. 2 1C31147G01 1C31150G01
Speed Local field pwr. common pos. 2 1C31147G01 1C31150G02
Ext. field pwr. common pos. or neg. 2 1C31147G01 1C31150G03
5/12 V 24/48 V Medium Speed
Medium Local field pwr. common neg. 2 1C31147G01 1C31150G01
Speed Local field pwr. common pos. 2 1C31147G01 1C31150G02
5 V High 24/48 V Medium Speed
Speed Local field pwr. common neg. 2 1C31147G02 1C31150G01
Local field pwr. common pos. 2 1C31147G02 1C31150G02
1
To use this module, the algorithm RPACNT or RPAWIDTH must reside in the Ovation Controller. Refer to
the appropriate Algorithm Reference Manual for your system for detailed information about the RPACNT
and RPAWIDTH algorithms.
9.3.4 Subsystems - (PA)
1
Pulse Accumulator subsystems
RANGE CHANNELS ELECTRONICS PERSONALITY MODULE

MODULE

528 OW350_R1150
RANGE CHANNELS ELECTRONICS PERSONALITY MODULE

MODULE

1
+24/48V medium-speed configurations are CE Mark Certified.
OW350_R1150 529
9.3.5 Terminal block wiring information - (PA)
the terminal block. This diagram indicates how to connect the field wiring to the terminal block in
the base unit.
information.
Do not use unmarked terminal block locations.
Figure 141: Terminal Block Connections for the Pulse Accumulator Pmod
530 OW350_R1150
The following table lists and defines the diagram abbreviations.
Earth ground terminal.
CTX 1
24/48V count terminal connection using external power.
CTY 1
24/48V count terminal connection using external power.
CT+ 1
24/48V positive count terminal connection.
CT- 1
24/48V negative count terminal connection.
DSA Dedicated external supply.

DSB Dedicated external supply.
ENX 24/48V external enable connection using external power.
ENY 24/48V external enable connection using external power.
EN+ 24/48V positive external enable connection.
EN- 24/48V negative external enable connection.
HC+ +5V high/medium speed count connection.
HM- 5/12V high/medium speed count reference.
MC+ 1
+12V medium speed count connection.
RSV Reserved terminal. No connections allowed on these terminals, except when
specified for terminals C4 or C12.
SSX 24/48V snapshot connection using external power.
SSY 24/48V snapshot connection using external power.
SS+ 24/48V positive snapshot connection.
SS- 24/48V negative snapshot connection.
1
1C31147G01 Electronics module only
OW350_R1150 531
9.3.6 Field connection wiring diagrams - (PA)
Figure 142: 5 V High Speed Count Field Connections - All Pmods
532 OW350_R1150
Figure 143: 24V/48V Pmod 1C31150G01 - Common Negative
OW350_R1150 533
Figure 144: 24V/48V Pmod 1C31150G02 - Common Positive
534 OW350_R1150
9.3.7 Medium speed count field connections - (PA)
Figure 145: +5V/+12V Medium Speed - All Pmods - Low Side Switch Pulse Source
Figure 146: +5V/+12V Medium Speed - All Pmods - Active Pulse Source
OW350_R1150 535
9.3.8 Active pulse source count field connections - (PA)
Figure 147: 24V/48V Active Pulse Source - Pmod 1C31150G01 - Common Negative
536 OW350_R1150
Figure 148: 24V/48V Active Pulse Source - Pmod 1C31150G02 - Common Positive
OW350_R1150 537
9.3.9 Three wire sensor field connections - (PA)
538 OW350_R1150
OW350_R1150 539
9.3.10 Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark) - (PA)
Figure 149: 24V/48V Common Negative - Pmod 1C31150G01 (CE Mark)
540 OW350_R1150
Figure 150: 24V/48V Common Positive - Pmod 1C31150G02 (CE Mark)
OW350_R1150 541
9.3.11 Active pulse source count field connections (CE Mark) - (PA)
(refer to applicable "Cable Guidelines" information for your system).
Figure 151: 24V/48V Active Pulse Source - Pmod 1C31147G01 - Common Negative (CE
Mark)
542 OW350_R1150
(refer to applicable "Cable Guidelines" information for your system).
Figure 152: 24V/48V Active Pulse Source - Pmod 1C31147G02 - Common Positive (CE
Mark)
OW350_R1150 543
9.3.12 Three wire sensor field connections (CE Mark) - (PA)
544 OW350_R1150
OW350_R1150 545
9.3.13 Register configuration/address information - (PA)
Controller. Bits 2 through 15 are for Channel 1. The status register can be read by using the Point
Information window at an Operator Station (see the Bit Pattern field on the Hardware tab). (see
Ovation Operator Station User Guide.)
Channel 1 pulse accumulator configuration/status register (address 13 or D in Hex)


1 = configure module so all module 1 = module is configured and all module registers can
registers can be written to. be read from.
0 = unconfigure module, registers that are 0 = module is not configured, registers that are
assigned offset addresses below 12 (C in assigned offset addresses below 12 (C in Hex)
Hex) cannot be written to, disables both cannot be read from, both pulse counters are
pulse counters. disabled.
1 Forced Internal Error Forced Internal Error
1 = force an attention status to be read by 1 = forced error set by the Ovation Controller.
the Ovation Controller when it accesses
registers with offset addresses less than 12
(C Hex) 0 = no forced error.
0 = no forced error The logic card's ERROR signal is the logical OR of
The logic card's ERROR signal is the the Internal Error and External Error (Blown Fuse)
logical OR of the Internal Error and status signals.
External Error (Blown Fuse) status signals.
2 Enable pulse counter Enable pulse counter configuration bit status.
1 = enable pulse counter.
3 Reset on Snapshot Reset on Snapshot configuration bit status.
1 = reset pulse counter if a counter
snapshot occurs.
0 = do not reset pulse counter if a counter
snapshot occurs.
4 Compare and Snapshot Compare and Snapshot configuration bit status.
1 = if the Compare register contents match
the pulse counter contents, snapshot the
pulse counter contents.
5 De-bounce count input De-bounce count input configuration bit status.
1 = Enable the external COUNT input de-
bounce circuit.
0 = Bypass the external COUNT input de-
bounce circuit.
6 Not Used Blown Fuse
1 = Blown Personality module field input power
supply fuse.
7 Reset on read Reset on read configuration bit status.
1 = Reset the pulse counter upon a
Controller read of the Channel 1 Count
register.
0 = Do not reset the pulse counter upon a
register.
546 OW350_R1150

8 Increment count upon trailing edge of pulse Increment count upon trailing edge of pulse
1 = Increment the pulse counter upon the configuration bit status.
trailing edge of the external input COUNT
pulse.
0 = Increment the pulse counter upon the
leading edge of the external input COUNT
pulse.
9 Snapshot on trailing edge of external signal Snapshot on trailing edge of external signal
1 = Snapshot the pulse counter contents configuration bit status.
upon the trailing edge of the external
SNAPSHOT input.
0 = Snapshot the pulse counter contents
upon the leading edge of the external
SNAPSHOT input.
10 ENABLE for counter OFF input ENABLE for counter OFF input configuration bit
1 = The assertion of the external ENABLE status.
input disables the pulse counter.
0 = The assertion of the external ENABLE
input enables the pulse counter.
11 Disable de-bounce on ENABLE and Disable de-bounce on ENABLE and SNAPSHOT
SNAPSHOT inputs. inputs configuration bit status.
1 = Bypass the external ENABLE and
SNAPSHOT inputs de-bounce circuits.
0 = Enable the external ENABLE and
12 Not Used 1 = The external ENABLE input is asserted.
0 = The external ENABLE input is not asserted.
13 Not Used Not Used.
14 - 00 = Pulse counter input is the external
COUNT input.
15 01 = Pulse counter input is the 1 KHz
internal timebase.
10 = Pulse counter input is the 10 KHz
internal timebase.
internal timebase.
Count Select Bits. Count Select Bit configuration bits status.
Word address 14 (E in Hex) provides Channel 2 configuration and status.
Channel 2 Pulse Accumulator configuration/status register (address 14 or E in Hex)

0 Not Used Not Used

1 Not Used Not Used
2 Enable pulse counter Enable pulse counter configuration bit status.
1 = enable pulse counter.
OW350_R1150 547

3 Reset on Snapshot Reset on Snapshot configuration bit status.

1 = reset pulse counter if a counter
snapshot occurs.
0 = do not reset pulse counter if a counter
snapshot occurs.
4 Compare and Snapshot Compare and Snapshot configuration bit status.
1 = if the Compare register contents match
the pulse counter contents, snapshot the
pulse counter contents.
5 De-bounce count input De-bounce count input configuration bit status.
1 = Enable the external COUNT input de-
bounce circuit.
0 = Bypass the external COUNT input de-
bounce circuit.
6 Not Used Blown Fuse
1 = Blown Personality module field input power
supply fuse.
7 Reset on read Reset on read configuration bit status.
1 = Reset the pulse counter upon a
register.
0 = Do not reset the pulse counter upon a
register.
8 Increment count upon trailing edge of pulse Increment count upon trailing edge of pulse
1 = Increment the pulse counter upon the configuration bit status.
trailing edge of the external input COUNT
pulse.
0 = Increment the pulse counter upon the
leading edge of the external input COUNT
pulse.
9 Snapshot on trailing edge of external signal Snapshot on trailing edge of external signal
1 = Snapshot the pulse counter contents configuration bit status.
upon the trailing edge of the external
SNAPSHOT input.
0 = Snapshot the pulse counter contents
upon the leading edge of the external
SNAPSHOT input.
10 ENABLE for counter OFF input ENABLE for counter OFF input configuration bit
1 = The assertion of the external ENABLE status.
input disables the pulse counter.
0 = The assertion of the external ENABLE
input enables the pulse counter.
11 Disable de-bounce on ENABLE and Disable de-bounce on ENABLE and SNAPSHOT
SNAPSHOT inputs inputs configuration bit status.
1 = Bypass the external ENABLE and
0 = Enable the external ENABLE and
12 Not Used 1 = The external ENABLE input is asserted.
0 = The external ENABLE input is not asserted.
548 OW350_R1150

13 Not Used Not Used

14 - 00 = Pulse counter input is the external Count Select Bit configuration bits status
15 COUNT input.
internal timebase.
internal timebase.
internal timebase.
Count Select Bits.
9.3.14 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (PA)
LED DESCRIPTION

module.
E (Red) 1
External Fault LED. Lit when the field supply fuse is blown. (Bit 6) of the Status Register is
set.
I (Red) 1
Internal Fault LED. Lit whenever the Force Error bit (Bit 1) of the Configuration Register is
set or when a timeout of the watchdog timer occurs when the Controller stops
1 (Green) Lit when the Channel external ENABLE input is active.
2 (Green) Lit when the Channel external ENABLE input is active.
3 - 16 No LED.
1
The logical OR of the Internal Fault LED and External Fault LED indication is input to the I/O Slave
Controller as an ERROR flag. This forces an attention status.
9.3.15 Specifications - (PA)

Pulse Accumulator Specifications
DESCRIPTION VALUE
OW350_R1150 549
DESCRIPTION VALUE
1 Field count: +5V (high speed)
Field input voltage range
+ 24/48V
Note: See Cable characteristics tables below for more information.
2 Common positive (1C31150G02)

24/48 V field input power
Common negative (1C31150G01)
Dedicated (user-defined) contact power (1C31150G03)
Configurable functions Count pulses
Measure pulse width
Measure period
Measure speed
Counter output 15 bit count (bits 14 - 0)
Bit 15 (MSB) is an update bit indicating new data available
Counter overflow status
Field inputs External count input (leading or trailing edge) OR
Selectable internal timebase: 100 KHz, 10 KHz, 1 KHz
See the table below for more information.
Input filter +5V High Speed Count: 1 Sec. to 5 Sec.
+5/12V Medium Speed Count: 16 Sec. to 38 Sec.
+24/48V Count:150 Sec to 450 Sec
+24/48V Controls: 150 Sec to 450 Sec
Contact debounce Configurable:

(24/48 V field inputs) Minimum: 1.4 mSec, Maximum: 2.0 mSec
Channel to channel
1000V AC/DC
Module power from logic supply Main: 1.6 W typical: 2.0 W Maximum
Aux: When used, both count inputs = 50% duty cycle
1
All field inputs must be in a shielded cable.
2
Open loop/blown fuse detection for 24/48V power.
Field Input Pulse Accumulator Specifications
COUNT INPUTS ON TIME OFF TIME COUNT RATE DESCRIPTION

MSEC. MIN. MSEC. MIN. MAX.
Count Outputs
550 OW350_R1150
COUNT INPUTS ON TIME OFF TIME COUNT RATE DESCRIPTION

MSEC. MIN. MSEC. MIN. MAX.
(MC+/HM-) 12V 0.03 0.03 20 KHz Medium speed without de-bounce

(HC+/HM-) 5V circuit enabled (1C31147G01)
(MC+/HM-) 12V 2.5 2.5 200 Hz Medium speed with de-bounce
(HC+/HM-) 5V circuit enabled (1C31147G01)
(HC+/HM-) 5V 0.007 0.007 70 KHz High speed without de-bounce circuit
enabled (1C31147G02)
(HC+/HM-) 5V 2.5 2.5 200 Hz High speed with de-bounce circuit
enabled (1C31147G02)
(CT+/CT-) 1 1 500 Hz Without de-bounce circuit enabled
24V/48V (1C31147G01)
(CT+/CT-) 2.5 2.5 200 Hz With de-bounce circuit enabled
24V/48V (1C31147G01)
Control Inputs
24V/48V 1 1 500 Hz Without de-bounce circuit enabled
24V/48V 2.5 2.5 200 Hz With de-bounce circuit enabled
Cable characteristics for 5V/12V medium speed
C O N D U C T O R AW G MAXIMUM LENGTH
16 2200 ft.
18 1400 ft.
20 900 ft.
22 600 ft.
24 370 ft.
25 300 ft.
Cable type: Shielded twisted pair
Cable characteristics for 5V high speed
C O N D U C T O R AW G MAXIMUM LENGTH
16 1100 ft.
18 700 ft.
20 450 ft.
22 300 ft.
24 185 ft.
25 150 ft.
Cable type: Shielded twisted pair, 110 - 140 ohm impedance
OW350_R1150 551
Cable characteristics for 24/48V: cable type is shielded twisted pair.
5/12 volt medium speed COUNT input signals
VOLTAG VIN OFF VIN ON IIN OFF MA IIN ON MA

E
V Max. V Min. V Nom. V Max. Max. Min. Nom. Max

5V Input 0.8 3.9 -- 5.0 1.5 12.0 -- 21.0
12V Input 0.8 9.75 -- 12.5 1.5 12.0 -- 21.0
The 5V medium speed COUNT input impedance is typically 250 ohms. This is a two-leaded input
signal.
5 volt high speed COUNT input signals
VIN OFF VIN ON IIN OFF MA IIN ON MA
V Max. V Min. V Nom. V Max. Max. Min. Nom. Max

0.8 3.9 -- 5.0 3.0 25.0 -- 42.0
The 5V high speed COUNT input impedance is typically 125 ohms. This is a two-leaded input
signal
24/48 volt medium speed COUNT input signals
INPUT ON INPUT VOLTS OFF INPUT ON INPUT MA OFF INPUT MA

LEVEL VOLTS
Min. Max. Max. Min. Max. Max.
Control Signals
24 VDC 18 60 9 2.0 5.1 0.6
48 VDC 18 60 9 2.0 5.1 0.6

Count Signals
24 VDC 18 60 9 3.0 7.7 0.9
48 VDC 18 60 9 3.0 7.7 0.9
This signal level applies to the control inputs and to the 24/48 Volt COUNT input depending upon
the group and the wiring.
This input accepts either a 24V or 48V input. The Electronics module accepts a positive or a
negative field signal common. The Personality module determines if the field signal common is
positive or negative.
552 OW350_R1150
9.4 Servo Driver module - (SVD)
9.4.1 Overview - (SVD)
The Ovation Servo Driver module, also referred to as the RSR module, provides an interface
between an Ovation Controller and an electro-hydraulic servo valve actuator. Each controlled
turbine valve is connected to an electro-hydraulic actuator (servo-motor). A servo-motor is a fluid
operated piston. Admission of high pressure hydraulic fluid to the piston cylinder is regulated by a
smaller pilot valve. The pilot valve passes hydraulic fluid underneath the piston to raise it and the
controlled valve, or it diverts hydraulic fluid to the upper side of the piston to lower it and the
controlled valve.
Steam turbines are used in many electrical power generation plants. The electrical load on a
steam turbine's electric generator fluctuates as the electric power consumption increases or
decreases. The Digital Electro-Hydraulic (DEH) control system provides turbine control to adjust
steam turbine shaft rotational speed in response to varying electric generator loads. Very large
amounts of force are required to move valves on large turbines. Therefore, an interposing device
is required between the DEH control system and the controlled valves.
A valve position set point is maintained by the Ovation Servo Driver Electronics module. The set
point is normally altered by the Ovation Controller via the I/O bus. Inside the Electronics module,
a microcontroller provides closed loop proportional-plus-integral (PI) control for real time valve
position control.
The valve position set point causes the Servo Driver module to generate an output control signal
that drives the electro-hydraulic servo valve actuator coil. The feedback loop is closed with the
valve's position measurement being obtained from a DC-LVDT or an AC-LVT that is mounted on
the valve stem.
The Electronics module interfaces two Electro-Hydraulic (EH) actuators in the field. The module
provides two independent channels that are galvanically isolated from each other.
The Servo Driver is a CE Mark certified module.
9.4.2 Electronics modules (Emod) - (SVD)

 1C31199G01 provides +/- 16 Volts DC to a DC LVDT.
 1C31199G02 provides 19 Volts AC peak-to-peak 1 KHz to an LVT.
 1C31199G03 provides 19 Volts AC peak-to-peak 3 KHz to an LVT.
 1C31199G04 w/Readback DC LVDT Output
 1C31199G05 w/Readback 1kHz Output
 1C31199G06 w/Readback 3kHz Output
OW350_R1150 553
9.4.3 Personality modules (Pmod) - (SVD)

 1C31201G01 has an RJ-45 modular jack to provide access to a local RS-232 serial port. Both
field interface channels contain three resistors connected in series that are used to provide a
single coil drive output.
 1C31201G02 has an RJ-45 modular jack to provide access to a local RS-232 serial port. Both
field interface channels contain two coil drive outputs, each output with its own series resistor.
9.4.4 Subsystems - (SVD)
1
Servo Driver subsystems
RANGE CHANNEL ELECTRONIC PERSONALITY

S S MODULE MODULE
±16 Volts DC to a DC LVDT 6 1C31199G01 1C31201G01

±16 Volts DC to a DC LVDT (Firmware) 6 1C31199G04 1C31201G01
(Firmware)
(Firmware)
When using the Point Builder to define points for a Servo Driver module, only the following point types are
valid for each channel:
I/O Name Type Input Source or Terminal Block
Channel Output Destination 2
Connection
1 Position Feedback (Device 1) Input Servo Driver N/A
2 Position Feedback (Device 2) Input Servo Driver N/A
3 Raw Demodulator Voltage (Device 1) Input Servo Driver N/A
4 Raw Demodulator Voltage (Device 2) Input Servo Driver N/A
5 Demand (Device 1) Output N/A N/A
6 Demand (Device 2) Output N/A N/A
1
This module interfaces to, and provides position control for two Electro-Hydraulic (EH) actuators in the
field.
2
The terminal block connection depends upon the application being used. Refer to wiring diagrams.
554 OW350_R1150
9.4.5 Operation - (SVD)
The Servo Driver module operates as a two-channel closed-loop servo card or as a single-
channel closed loop servo card that accommodates dual LVDTs. A configuration flag is set/reset
to select the option.
The dual-channel option uses a single sine-wave or DC feedback to detect valve position for each
channel. The feedback signal‟s amplitude is proportional to valve position. A programmable gain
amplifier is used to increase the resolution of the feedback signal and is adjusted for optimum
performance during a calibration sequence.
Starting with revision 0C, RSR firmware supports a cascaded PI configuration in which the output
of PI 1 is used as the target position input for PI 2. Additional features to support cascading
operation are flags to select direct/indirect PI operation, and an anti-windup feature called
“retreat.” Some of these new features are actually independent of cascading, but all are described
in detail in this document.
When a sine-wave input is used as the feedback, it is assumed that the feedback signal provided
is proportional to valve position and linear. The sine-wave input is rectified and the result is uni-
polar. The input can accommodate a signal of increasing or decreasing amplitude as the valve is
stroked from 0 to 100%. Depending on the customer mechanical hookup, a failed signal would
then appear to the card as a valve flying open, or a valve flying closed, and the resulting control
action would be to close the valve or to open the valve.
The single channel option executes only one PI loop in the microcontroller firmware. Prior to
executing the PI loop, the feedback positions from each channel are high selected.
Another option is the “failInPlaceFlag” option. If the option is set and the Controller stops updating
the module, the target position remains at the most recent position. If the “failInPlaceFlag” option
is not set, the target position is set to -5%.
Another important option is the proportional output option. If this option is selected, the output
voltage is set equal to demand position. The result is that 0 to 105% demand gives 0 to 10.2 volts
on the output.
The proportional output, failInPlaceFlag, and redundant LVDT options are single flags that affect
both channels.
9.4.6 AD/DA Conversion and Timing - (SVD)
The Servo Driver operates on a basic five millisecond period. During the five millisecond period,
four interrupts occur. During each of the first three interrupts, AD readings of position feedback
are recorded for each channel. After the third AD reading is taken, the three values are middle-
selected and the PI algorithm is called.
The fourth interrupt in the five millisecond period handles watchdog timing, contingency timing,
and sequencing of diagnostics.
OW350_R1150 555
9.4.7 Module modes - (SVD)
The Servo Driver operates in the following modes:

 Start mode
 Normal mode
 Local-Manual mode
 Calibrate mode
9.4.8 Start mode - (SVD)
In start mode, the following occurs:

 Feedback position is determined.
 Diagnostics are executed.
 The module typically transitions into normal mode immediately.
If the module does not transition to normal mode, you can determine the reason by examining
register E, which contains SFEs, or by using a laptop to enter the “diag” command and print
diagnostic information.
When the Servo Driver starts or restarts, its primary objective is to avoid an indeterminate output
that would result in valve movement and possible damage to the valve or turbine. There are a
number of hardware and software features that prevent an indeterminate output.
The hardware is designed so that when the Servo Driver starts, the power supply to the servo
output is turned off. With no current flow to the servo valve, it is left under the influence of its
mechanical bias adjustment, the assumed state prior to starting. In addition, the coil drive D/A
converter is not turned on until it receives the first output pattern.
As part of the microcontroller‟s start sequence, the power supply is turned on, and then a pattern
is written to the coil drive D/A converter representing 0 volts. The result is that the servo output is
under software control, no current flows between the Servo Driver and the servo valve, and no
valve movement occurs.
The Servo Driver does not remain in Start mode unless a diagnostic error is detected. The Servo
Driver transitions from Start to Local mode if all of the following functions execute and return
“normal” or “ok” status codes:
 Program the FPGA.
 Initialize default PI constants.
 EPROM checksum check.
 Read out configuration constants from EEPROM.
 Go to Factory Configure Mode if PE pin is 1.
 EEPROM checksum check.
 RAM read/write test.
 UART scratchpad read/write test.
 Shared memory readback check.
The Servo Driver sets target valve demand equal to demand feedback before transferring to Local
mode.
556 OW350_R1150
9.4.9 Normal mode - (SVD)
In normal mode, the following occurs:

 Servo Driver moves the valve to the position requested by the Controller.
Note: Normal is the preferred mode of the Servo Driver card.
9.4.10 Local-manual mode - (SVD)
Local-manual mode is a transition mode used if the Controller is required to track valve position
on startup. In the Servo Driver module, there is no requirement for tracking. Local-manual mode is
a transition mode with no restrictions to normal mode.
Local-manual mode is also used for calibration sequences.
9.4.11 Calibrate mode - (SVD)
Calibrate mode is a submode of local-manual mode. Calibration sequences are commanded

from the Controller or through the local serial port.
The Servo Driver is calibrated by entering a command through a personal computer connected to
the local serial port.
The following calibrate sequences are supported:

 Zero Hot Cal - CALBOT
This calibration sequence is executed to re-establish the 0% position. It is useful after the
valve has been fully calibrated and the mechanical assembly has been heated and expanded.
It avoids fully opening the valve.
Feedback gain is not adjusted during the hot cal sequence.
 Top Hot Cal - CALTOP
It avoids fully closing the valve.
Feedback gain (demodgain) is not adjusted during the hot cal sequence.
 Full Calibration - CALFULL
This calibration sequence is executed to re-establish 0% position, 100% position, and
feedback gain.
Arbitrary limits are established for the full calibrate sequence. A valve with an 8 inch stroke
that can expand by 1/8 inch is envisioned. For this valve, thermal expansion is 1/64 or 1.5%.
Since the A/D converter range limit is +/- 10.4 volts the limit at 100% is arbitrarily set at 10.0
volts, or 2% of the electrical range from the end of the converter range. The target range for
100% when adjusting gain is 9.9 volts to 10.0 volts.
When full calibration is requested, the valve first travels to 0%. At 0%, demodulator gain is
adjusted until the feedback voltage is near 10 volts. The demodulator gain at this point is the
Maximum possible demodulator gain.
Then, the valve travels to 100%. If the voltage is greater than 10 volts, or off-scale,
demodulator gain is reduced, and a reading of the voltage is taken. This reading is the 100%
calibration valve.
OW350_R1150 557
Then, the valve travels to 0% and a voltage reading is taken. This reading is the 0%
calibration value.
After the 0% calibration valve is determined, the new values are written to EE memory.
9.4.12 Using the serial port for calibration and settings - (SVD)
The local serial port is used in the field to calibrate and diagnose Servo Driver problems. It is used
in the factory to cause the Servo Driver to perform necessary testing prior to shipment. This
interface is implemented using the external UART.
The settings of the local serial port are:

 Baud rate = 19200
 Bits = 8 bits
 Stop Bits = One stop bit
 Parity = No parity
Any of the commands in Calibration Procedure (see page 560), and Tuning Constant Commands
(see page 573) can be entered through the local serial port.
Commands to change constants and initiate calibration sequences always refer to channel 1 or
channel 2. The command V.1 or V.2 selects the channel.
Once the channel is selected, it is indicated by a prompt character sequence, such as:
*1*>
OR
*2*>
Status messages are printed during calibration sequences and indicate the channel number (or
valve number), such as:
„V1-Calibrate - Go to 100%‟
OR
„V2-Calibrate - Reduce feedback gain‟
9.4.13 Using the serial port for calibration connections - (SVD)
The Personality module RS-232 connector connects the Servo Driver module to the COM1 or
COM2 serial port of a personal computer.
Use cable 5A26448 or make a cable using the information.
RS-232 Connector (RJ45) Pin Assignments
1 Not used Not used

2 Not used Not used
558 OW350_R1150
3 TXD2 (Transmit Data) Output

4 Not used Not used
5 RXD2 (Receive Data) Input
6 GND (Logic Common) 1 Not used
7 Not used Not used
8 Not used Not used
Front View of RJ45 Connector (Modular Jack)
1 ... 8
1 This serial port is not electrically isolated from logic common.
9.4.14 Performing calibration - (SVD)
Calibration is performed by connecting a PC (running terminal emulation software) or a dumb

terminal to the Servo Driver, then typing commands on the PC keyboard or terminal. Using a PC
is recommended because you can record/reload tuning constants to/from a disk.
The goals of calibration are:

 Determine the endpoints of mechanical stroke.
 Help the plant set up the LVDT for optimum performance.
 Perform the calibration quickly to avoid startup delay.
Calibration required - (SVD)
Calibration is required after the following:

 After a mechanical overhaul.
If the mechanical stroke remains the same after the overhaul, and the same LVDT is installed,
simply adjust the LVDT so the position feedback on the Ovation system indicates 0% (with
the valve fully closed), then tighten down the LVDT assembly (that is, return to its former
position).
 After the LVDT is changed.
Calibration is required to find the null point and proper demodulator gain adjustment.
However, if it is the same model you can save time by entering the same constants before
running the calibration sequence.
OW350_R1150 559
 If a secondary wire pair is swapped.

The valve positioner is not affected because the demodulator is a diode rectifying type. Also,
you can swap secondary pairs (A and B). The result is a change in sign of the calibration
values. Arithmetic in valve positioner firmware yields the correct result. However, you should
follow the recommended hookup that yields negative values at 0% and positive values at
100%, and avoid confusion.
Calibration procedure - (SVD)

1. Use a standard cable to make the connection (see page 558) between the PC (or dumb
terminal) and the Servo Driver.
2. Configure the serial port on the PC as described in “Settings (see page 558).”
3. To run a calibration sequence, perform the following:
a) Connect a serial cable between the COM port and the user port on the Servo Driver.
b) Start the terminal emulation software.
c) Ensure the settings are correct.
d) Type HELP<return> at the prompt to see a list of commands (described in the following
table).
Note the following:
 Commands are case sensitive.
 Syntax is strict.
 There is no line buffering.
 Backspace invalidates any typed command.
4. Type CALFULL<return> to run the full calibration sequence.
5. If any constants are entered manually, type SC<return> to save the new constants to the
EEPROM.
6. Use the command CALFULL after an overhaul, to fully calibrate the valve.
7. Use the command CALBOT just prior to starting, to re-establish the 0% calibration value if
thermal expansion is detected.
Calibration Commands
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
CALBOT<return> Calibrate zero%

CALTOP<return> Calibrate 100%
CALFULL<return> Full Calibration
RAISE<return> Raise (automatically switches card to local mode)
(Hit <return> to repeat.)
LOWER<return> Lower (automatically switches card to local mode)
(Hit <return> to repeat.)
DC<return> Dump configuration constants from EEPROM.
SC<return> Save configuration constants to EEPROM.
560 OW350_R1150
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
DG<return> Display group 1 data - This function would repeatedly display important operating
parameters such as demand, feedback, gain, and so forth.
DFSC<return> Sets all parameters constants to default values and save configuration constants to
EEPROM.
HELP<return> Displays a command list.
EXIT<return> Exits test mode. raise/lower function, or calibration sequence. Causes a soft reset of
the valve positioner.
Calibration ideal - (SVD)
During the calibration sequence, observe the valve to ensure it is moving, and that it is moving in
the proper direction. Also, review the calibration constants and compare them with the ideal setup
described below:
 The range of calibration values corresponds to the hexadecimal range of the AD converter,
and is presented to the user in decimal, ranging from 0 to 65535.
 When an LVDT is properly adjusted and calibrated, the calibration constants (0% and 100%)
is equal in amplitude and opposite in sign. The amplitudes for this ideal setup would be
approximately 30,000. This result suggests the following:
 The LVDT is adjusted so that its electrical null point (where secondary A amplitude =
secondary B) matches the midpoint of the mechanical stroke.
 The programmable gain amplifier on the demodulator is adjusted so that the electrical
“stroke” stays within the input range of the AD converter. Thus, the valve positioner can
detect incremental movement for all valve positions.
 If thermal expansion occurs, the valve positioner continues to detect incremental
movement because the calibration is not to the extreme end of the AD converter range,
and because the magnitude of thermal expansion is small.
Simplify diagnostics - (SVD)
Rolled servo wires can cause the valve to move in the opposite direction. Be sure to observe and
verify the correct movement of the valve. If only one pair is rolled, then the two pairs compete with
each other. Use the following procedure to simplify diagnosis:
1. Disconnect one pair of wires.

2. Calibrate the valve, verifying the correct movement of the valve.
3. Reconnect the first pair of wires.
4. Disconnect the other pair of wires.
6. Reconnect all the servo wires.
OW350_R1150 561
On-Board diagnostics - (SVD)
The mechanical bias adjustment of the servo valve can affect the results of on-board diagnostics.
A set-screw on the servo valve causes a deflection from center position of the servo valve spool.
This allows hydraulic fluid to escape the actuator, and the valve to close at a controlled rate, in the
absence of an electrical signal.
For a typical hookup, a small negative voltage on the servo valve is required to center the spool,
and hold the valve in a steady position. This voltage is typically from -100 to -300 mV. Servo
valves are delivered from the factory with this adjustment. On board diagnostics assume that the
servo valve is set up in this way. If another setup is used, program the Ovation Controller to
ignore the results of diagnostic bits.
Setting up redundant LVTs - (SVD)
During redundant LVT operation, only one software PI executes. The output voltage writes to both
DACs. Therefore, there are four identical servo output voltages. By connecting one coil to channel
1 and the other to channel 2, you can take advantage of duplicate DAC and output driver
hardware.
1. In order to configure the Servo Driver for redundant LVT operation, enter the command
RDNDNT=1
2. Save the configuration flag to EEPROM by using the command:
SC <return>
3. Once the wires are hooked up properly, calculate the valve by typing:
CALFULL <return>
During the calibration, the channel undergoing calibration displays on the terminal screen.
Calibrating redundant LVTs - (SVD)
Calibrating redundant LVTs on the Serve Driver is difficult because improper setup can create a
situation where the feedbacks from the LVTs indicate that the valve should be moved in the
opposite direction. Then, during the calibration sequence, the valve does not move to the
endpoint properly and record valid data. Another complicating factor is that in the redundant
configuration, the position feedbacks are high-selected.
The servo driver is a two-channel Controller. Each channel is calibrated independently. The
channel to be calibrated is selected by typing one of the following:
V1 to select valve 1
OR
V2 to select valve 2.
During the calibration, all the printed messages indicate the valve number.
562 OW350_R1150
Once all the wiring is properly connected, it is possible to calibrate the Servo Driver with the
redundant flag set to 1. In this situation, the channel not being calibrated simply follows along with
the channel under calibration.
For initial calibration, after an overhaul, or for a new installation, it is recommended that you clear
the redundant flag and calibrate each LVT independently. During this process only one servo coil
would be connected. The calibration process follows:
1. Clear the redundant flag by typing RDNDNT=0<return>, then save the setting to EEPROM.
2. Disconnect the second servo coil, leaving one servo coil connected to channel 1.
3. Calibrate channel 1.
4. Disconnect the servo coil connected to channel 1.
5. Connect the other servo coil to channel 2 servo coil output.
6. Calibrate channel 2.
7. Connect servo coil to channel 1.
8. Set the redundant flag and save setting to EEPROM.
9.4.15 Valve position control - (SVD)
In normal, local, and calibrate modes, the Servo Driver always controls valve position. The PI
routine runs unconditionally every 10 milliseconds. Typically, it executes the PI equation. The PI
routine has some conditionally executed parts to handle seating and backseating which are
described in the next section Seating, Backseating, and Retreat for the Servo Driver module (see
page 564).
OW350_R1150 563
9.4.16 Seating, backseating, and retreat - (SVD)
Seating and BackSeating are similar functions, with the exception that Seating closes the valve,
and BackSeating opens it. Therefore, only Seating is described.
Retreat is an anti-windup function. It is important to remember that when the RSR servo output is
near 0 volts, the valve is stationary. When the servo output moves away from the midpoint, the
valve moves to the desired position, and the servo output goes back to near 0 volts.
Retreat is a feature that occurs after Seating. It is highly programmable.
When the target position is less than seat limit, the RSR goes into a seating mode. In this mode
the RSR wants to close the valve as fast as possible. It accomplishes this by driving the output
hard to the rail in the direction of valve closure.
Retreat occurs after a timer has expired (retreatHoldT), and once the valve position is close to
where the RSR wants it to be (ABS|Target-Feedback| < posErrorRetreat). When a valve retreats,
the servo output goes from the rail to a programmed value (exitSeatVal) at a predefined rate
(retreatRate).
In a typical scenario, you would determine the voltage required to null the servo spool; that is,
overcome the mechanical bias adjustment. Let‟s assume the value is –200 mV. Then you would
set exitSeatVal to –200 mV plus an arbitrary amount in the direction of valve closure, 100 mV
perhaps. So, the user would set exitSeatVal to –100 mV. Also, assume the user leaves the other
associated constants to their default values. When seating is entered, the servo output goes to
+10 volts and remains there for at least 10 seconds. When the 10 second timer expires, and when
position feedback is within 2 percent of the target position (probably 0), the servo output ramps
from 10 volts to –100 mV at 10% per second. Ten volts is about 50% of output range, so the
servo output would return to –100 mV after 5 seconds. At –100 mV, the servo spool is letting a
small amount of fluid escape, thus closing the valve.
If the target position went higher, thus removing the RSR from seating, the servo output would be
readily available to begin to move the valve, and would not rely on integral action to bring it from
10 volts back to 0.
When the RSR is moving between these various modes, the PI tracks the output when it is begin
driven by one of the non-normal modes such as seating. Therefore, the transition back to normal
operation is bumpless.
If the system is not properly tuned, the valve could start to go open when the servo output
reaches the retreat value. If this occurs and ABS|Target-Feedback| > posErrorRetreat, a bit is set
in register D to announce the condition. The RSR sends the output back to the rail and does not
allow the channel to retreat again until seating is exited. You should ensure that the bits in register
D generate alarms to notify the operator should this occur.
9.4.17 PI position control - (SVD)
The equation for PI position control is:
1
K p
e(t )
ki
e(t )dt
564 OW350_R1150
where:
p
K = Proportional gain
I
K = Integral time
e(t) = Position error
Offset = Offset constant
Integral action can be limited by IntLim tuning constant to ±IntLim. And output can be scaled
for different span of mV by providing different then default outputMin (default -10200mV) and
outputMax (default 10200mV) tuning coefficients.
OW350_R1150 565
If seating or backseating is in effect, normal PI Controller calculation is halted.
Cascading of the PI controllers can be selected by entering “CASCADE = 1” and saving the
setting by typing “SC”.
When cascading is selected, the -10V to +10 output of PI 1 is converted to 0% to 100% target
position. This target position value is then used as the target position, or demand, for PI 2.
Cascade Close in Seat can be selected by entering “CCS = 1” and saving the setting by typing
“SC”.
When cascading is selected and Cascade Close in Seat is selected, if PI 1 is in seat, output of PI
2 is set to casSeatVal.
In addition, Cascade Close function can be implemented in Cascade mode. Cascade Close
function allows transferring PI 2 hardware output to demanded voltage value and keeping it at this
that value as long as demand exists. Cascade Close demand is send to the card by position
demand register of PI 2 in Cascaded mode as this card register is freed in Cascade configuration
due to the fact that in Cascade mode demand to PI 2 is sent from PI 1 output. There are two sub
modes for Cascade Close mode. One allows keeping controller output frozen while second one
allows tracking of an output value. Diagram bellow shows SAMA diagram for Cascade mode.
Figure 153: General structure of Cascade mode
566 OW350_R1150
Release constant can be used to perform function equivalent to the process of exiting from
Seating. Release is Equivalent to exitSeatVal tuning Constance but is related to exit from
Cascade close. Ramp for Release is defined in retreatRat constant, ramp is the same as for
exitSeatVal.
Cascaded mode allows executing Cascade Close on V2 when there is Seat performed on V1 and
CasCloseInSeat flag is set. Output will be driven to CasCloseInSeatVal in such case, Exit
procedure will be executed based on Release tuning constant.
9.4.18 Controller interface - (SVD)
The following topics define direct-access Ovation shared memory registers from the Controller
point-of-view. The Servo Driver configuration allows I/O points to be defined. These I/O points are
configured as standard Ovation hardware points. There is a special algorithm to interface with the
Servo Driver.
The RSRSTATUS algorithm performs the following:

 Displays the status registers and command register for the Ovation Servo driver (RSR) card.
 Calibrates channel 1 and channel 2 of the RSR card using a standard graphic (diagram 8757)
instead of using the RSR serial port.
 Uploads and downloads configurable parameters used by the RSR card.
If a point assigned to the ENBL input and point is TRUE, then the STAT1, STAT2 and CMD
outputs updated. If ENBL is FALSE, then the last value of the STAT, STAT2 and CMD is retained.
Note: Controller interface and RSRSTATUS algorithm are supported by rev. 0G or above of
RSR firmware.
9.4.19 Serial bus watchdog timer - (SVD)
The timeout value for the Servo Driver module for Solaris applications is selected in the I/O
Builder Servo Driver configuration dialog box (described in the Ovation Init and AdMin User Guide
or for Windows applications in the Ovation Developer Studio User Guide). Make sure this time
period value is greater than the value of the Control Task time period that defines the points
associated with this module.
Bits 2, 3, and 4 of the configuration register (register D) determine the length of a watchdog timer.
The 3-bit codes and associated times are standard for Ovation I/O.
Initially, the timer is set to the Maximum time, which is 16 seconds. The microcontroller
periodically reads the configuration register and determines the timeout time.
If the timer expires, the Internal Error LED bit sets, and the LED turns on. The Communications
OK LED extinguishes. As long as the timer does not expire, the Communications OK LED
illuminates and the Internal Error LED bit clears.
OW350_R1150 567
9.4.20 Memory map - (SVD)
The following table describes the Controller register for the Servo Driver module and defines the
I/O Channel Number that must be selected in the Point Builder Hardware tab (shown below) when
configuring points associated with this module (refer to the Ovation Init and AdMin User Guide or
Ovation Developers Studio User Guide for your Ovation system).
Figure 154: Example of Hardware Tab in Point Builder
Operating mode memory map
SERVO I/O CHANNE L R/W DEFINITION

DRIVER NUMBER IN THE
CARD POINT BUILDER
REGISTER
0 N/A N/A Indirect ram pointer (Output FIFO Put Pointer).

1 N/A N/A Indirect ram data register.
2 5 W Demand - Channel 1 (-1560 to 32760 equals -5.0 to 105.0%).
3 6 W Demand - Channel 2 (-1560 to 32760 equals -5.0 to 105.0%).
4 1 R Position feedback - Channel 1 (-1560 to 32760 equals -5.0 to
105%).
5 2 R Position feedback - Channel 2 (-1560 to 32760 equals -5.0 to
105%).
568 OW350_R1150

CARD POINT BUILDER
REGISTER
6 3 R If bit 7 reg. D = 0 then: Raw demodulator voltage - channel 1

(standard format where +/-0xFFF (bit 12 is sign, +0xC000)
equals +/- 10.235 volts)
If bit 7 reg. D = 1 then: registers 6 and 7 contain output DAC
setting.
7 4 R If bit 7 reg. D = 0 then: Raw demodulator voltage - Channel 2 -
same format as Channel 1
If bit 7 reg. D = 1 then: registers 6 and 7 contain output DAC
setting.
8 N/A R STATUS
Channel 1 REGISTER
1
Bits 0-7 modes apply for Channel 1

Bits 0-1 0 = START Mode
1 = LOCAL Mode
2 = Normal Mode
Bits 2-4 0 = not calibrating
1 = CAL_0
2 = CAL_100
3 = CAL_FULL
4 = CAL_NULL
7 = CAL_FINISHED (channel 1)
8 N/A R STATUS
Channel 2 REGISTER
1
Bits 8-F modes apply for Channel 2

Bits 8-9 0 = START Mode
1 = LOCAL Mode
2 = Normal Mode
Bits 10-12 0 = not calibrating
1 = CAL_0
2 = CAL_100
3 = CAL_FULL
4 = CAL_NULL
7 = CAL_FINISHED (channel 2)
OW350_R1150 569

CARD POINT BUILDER
REGISTER
9 N/A R STATUS
Channel 1 REGISTER
2

0 = Retreat in Progress
1 = Retreat Disabled
2 = Contingency (immediate)
3 = Contingency (filtered)
9 N/A R STATUS
Channel 2 REGISTER
2
Bits 8-F modes apply for Channel 2

8 = Retreat in Progress
9 = Retreat Disabled
10 = Contingency (immediate)
11 = Contingency (filtered)
12 = (0x1000) is set if cascade flag is set, 0
otherwise
13 = (0x2000) is set if DAC output is selected
for register 6 and 7, 0 otherwise
570 OW350_R1150

CARD POINT BUILDER
REGISTER
A N/A W COMMAND
Channel 1 REGISTER
1

Bits 0-2 Control calibration requests for Channel 1
000 - No calibration
001 - Travel to 0%, record endpoint
(CAL 0 Hot).
(CAL 100 Hot).
011 - Full calibration, travel to 0, then 100,
then back to 0. Demodulator gain is adjusted
if necessary.
100 Go to NULL point.
Bits 3-5 Control raise and lower functions for Channel
1
000 - No Command. (RSR will try to go to
normal mode.)
100 - Local mode (stay in place).
101 - Raise 0.5% (module will clear bit 3 to
acknowledge).
110 - Lower 0.5% (module will clear bit 4 to
acknowledge).
Bit 7 Selects channel number for register 6 and 7
point data.
0 - Feedback voltage (default).
1 DAC setting.
OW350_R1150 571

CARD POINT BUILDER
REGISTER
A N/A W COMMAND
Channel 2 REGISTER
1
Bits 8-10 Control calibration requests for Channel 2.

000 - No calibration.
(CAL 0 Hot).
(CAL 100 Hot).
011 - Full calibration, travel to 0, then 100,
then back to 0. Demodulator gain is adjusted
if necessary.
100 - Go to NULL point.
Bits 11-13 Control raise and lower functions for Channel
2.
000 - No command. (RSR will try to go to
normal mode).
100 - Local Mode (stay in place).
101 - Raise 0.5% (module will clear bit 11 to
acknowledge).
110 - Lower 0.5% (module will clear bit 12 to
acknowledge).
B N/A Not used
C N/A Reserved
D N/A R/W Module Configuration Status Register (see page 598)
E N/A R Severe Errors Status Register (see page 594)
F N/A Electronic ID
572 OW350_R1150
9.4.21 Tuning constant commands - (SVD)
The following commands are used to set the values of important tuning constants. The syntax of
each command is indicated and must be followed.
Tuning Constant Commands
COMMAND UNITS & DESCRIPTION

RANGE
piGain = 9.20 0-255 PI Controller gain outside of deadband. This value is the
higher of two gain values used in the position PI loop. This
value is used when the valve is moving. When the valve is in
a stable position, a lower value is used to avoid noise-induced
control action.
piResetT = 1000 0-65535 [ms] PI Controller reset time outside of deadband. Used in PI
equation along with the gain value described previously. This
value is one of two used in the PI equation. This one is used
when the valve is in motion, and causes faster wind-up. It is
given in milliseconds.
piGainDb = 1.40 0-255 PI Controller gain inside of deadband. When the valve is in a
steady position, the PI gain is reduced to this value. This
helps avoid noise-induced control action.
piResetTDb = 10000 0-65535 [ms] PI Controller reset time inside of deadband. This is one of two
values used, and causes slower control action. It is given in
milliseconds.
retreatRate 0-100 [% per % per second rate of output retreat.
sec.]
DIRECT =1 0 or 1 PI mode. In direct mode (DIRECT=1), the output goes in a
direction with respect to target position. In indirect mode
(DIRECT=0), the output goes negative when the target
position moves negative with respect to position feedback.
posErrorRetreat =2.0 0-105.01 The output does not retreat until ABS| posFB - TargetPos|
<posErrorRetreat
exitSeatVal=5000 -10200 to +10200 When the RSR is seating the valve, then decides to retreat,
[mV] this is the output in mV to which the output goes.
exitBkSeatVal =-5000 -10200 to +10200 When the RSR is backseating the valve, then decides to
[mV] retreat, this is the output in mV to which the output goes.
CASCADE=0 0 or 1 If this flag is set to 1, the two PI's are cascaded.
intgrlLimit=100 0-100 [%] Limits the windup of integral part of the PI.
outputOffset=0.0 -99.9 to 100 Offset value added to result of the PI connection.
OutputMin=-10200 -10200 to +10200 Minimum tuning constant for output – voltage [mV} on output
[mV] equivalent to 0%.
OutputMax=10200 -10200 to +10200 Maximum tuning constant for output – voltage [mV] on output
[mV] equivalent to 100%.
CALrate=6.4 0-100 [% per Calibration demand change rate in %per second.
sec.]
Release=-10000 -10200 to +10200 The retreat value to get back from cascade close – put lower
[mV] then cascade close if you do not want this feature.
OW350_R1150 573

RANGE
CCS 0 or 1 A flag to determine behavior of V2 (and output) in cascade

mode when main (V1) PI goes to seat. If CCS is set then
cascade Close to CasCloseInSeatVal followed by Retreat is
executed on V2 if seat is executed on V1. No further action
on V2 after seat in V1 if flag is cleared.
CasCloseInSeatVal=1 -10200 to +10200 Value for output when CasCloseInSeat is executed (see
0000 [mV] above description for CCS).
reheatHoldT= 0-65535 [ms] mSec that output is saturated before reheat begins.
10,000
demodGain = 12345 1.01-4096 The LVDT secondary feedback sum is multiplied by this value
to achieve a voltage range representing 0 to 100% position
that is close to the input range of the A/D converter. The
value prints as a raw decimal value. The hexadecimal
equivalent is written to the feedback D/A converter to adjust
feedback gain. This value can be entered by the customer,
but it is also modified automatically during the full calibration
sequence. Feedback gain can be calculated by the following
formula:
gain = 4096 / D/A converter input word (decimal value)
Examples of some gain values are as follows:
DAC word Decimal value Gain
0 0 1
Infinity
1 1 4096
. . .
8 8 512
. . .
100H 256 16
. . .
800H 2048 2
. . .
FFFH 4095 1.00024
1
Feedback gain D/A converter output saturates.
errorDbF = 1.0 0 -100 When the absolute value of the difference between target
position and actual position is greater that this value, the
valve is considered to be in motion. Gain and reset values are
selected to cause rapid control action. When the difference is
less than this value, control action is softened.
errorDbS = 0.2 0-100 When the absolute value of the difference between target
position and actual position is less than this value, the valve is
considered to be stable. Gain and reset values are selected
to soften control action. When the difference is greater than
this value, gain is increased to yield sharper control action.
seatLimit = 0.0 -5 to 105 When target valve position is equal to or less than this value,
seating action controls the output.
574 OW350_R1150

RANGE
backSeatLimit -5 to 105 When the target valve position is equal to or greater than this
=100.0 value, backseating action controls the output.
contingency =10.0 0-65535 If the absolute value of the difference between Servo Driver
target position and actual position is greater than this value, a
contingency condition may exist. The condition must exist
until a timer expires for it to be reported. The timer is
described below:
A situation could arise where the Servo Driver target position
and the Controller‟s target are not equal. One example would
be if the shutdown input were true, the Servo Driver set the
target position to 0, but the Controller did not track. In this
situation, contingency would not be reported if the valve went
to 0% position.
contingencyTime 0-65535 [ms] If the error between target position and actual position
exceeds contingency for this amount of time, then the
=10000 condition is reported to the Controller. This number is given in
milliseconds.
calhndrd = 30000 0-65535 This value is displayed in decimal. It is the converted
hexadecimal A/D converter reading for the 100% position. It
can be entered by the customer; however, it is normally
determined automatically by the calibration sequence.
calzero = 0 0-65535 This value is displayed in decimal. It is the converted
hexadecimal A/D converter reading for the 0% position. It can
be entered by the customer; however, it is normally
Configuration Commands
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
FIP = Fail-in-place flag. If the fail-in-place flag is set, the valve holds its last position when
1<return> switching from normal mode to local mode. If the fail-in-place flag is clear (FIP = 0), the
valve‟s target position is forced to -5% when switching from normal to local mode.
RDNDNT = Redundant LVDT option. If the redundant LVDT option is selected, the Servo Driver
1<return> executes only one PI control loop. However, it continues to process both position
feedback channels, middle-selects each to reject some noise, then high-selects between
the two feedback values.
If the option is not selected (RDNDNT = 0), the Servo Driver behaves as a two-
independent-channel closed loop servo control.
Note: This command has a different meaning for the Valve Positioner module.
PROP = Proportional output option. If the proportional output option is selected, the PI routine is
1<return> not called. Instead, the position target in percent is copied directly to the output, in which
case 0 to 100% demand would yield 0 to 10 volts at the output.
Normally the proportional output is not selected (PROP = 0), resulting in a closed loop PI
control subsystem.
CASCADE=0 If this flag is set to 1, the two PI's are cascaded.
OW350_R1150 575
Miscellaneous Commands
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
V1<return> Selects valve 1. The valve selected is indicated by the prompt character sequence.
Subsequent commands affect only the selected channel.
V2<return> Selects valve 2. The valve selected is indicated by the prompt character sequence.
Subsequent commands affect only the selected channel.
EXIT<return> Permits test and calibrate modes to be exited by executing a soft reset.
DG<return> Display group data - This function repeatedly displays important operating parameters
such as demand, feedback, and feedback voltage.
HELP<return> Print command list
diag<return> This command displays important status information in hexadecimal format. Included is
the operating mode for each channel, SFE register, signal register, and restriction
register as follows:
mod1=0xmm mod2=0xnn restricts=0xrrrrrrrr sgnls=0xssss sfe‟s=0xeeee
where mm = Hex value for channel 1 mode:
0 through 5 are start modes
0x14 through 0x19 are local modes
0x28 through 0x2B are normal modes
0x3C through 0x3F are test modes
nn = Mode for channel 2
rrrrrrrr = Restriction bit set as follows:
bit 0 - PROM checksum error
bit 1 - Memory diagnostic error
bit 2 - Channel 1 contingency
bit 4 - Ovation serial bus not configured
bit 5 - Mismatch of tuning constants between module and Controller
bit 6 - Controller is not updating module
bit 7 - Channel 1 - Controller is not tracking
bit 8 - Channel 2 - Controller is not tracking
bit 9 - EEPROM checksum error
bit 10 - Hold until oscillator is stable
bit 11 - Channel 1 - valve is under serial port control or calibrating
bit 12 - Channel 2 - valve is under serial port control or calibrating
ssss = Signal bits as follows:
bit 12 - Display group is on
bit 13 - Display group is turned on, display needs initialized
eeee = Severe fatal error bits as follows:
bit 0 - EEPROM checksum
bit 1 - PROM checksum
bit 2 - Shared memory readback error
bit 3 - Processor memory readback error
bit 4 - FPGA error on startup
bit 5 - UART readback error
bit 6 - Processor diagnostic error
bit 7 - Not used
bit 8 - PSD302 memory readback error
576 OW350_R1150
9.4.22 RSR calibration diagrams - (SVD)
Two diagrams are linked to the Servo Driver module:
There are two calibration diagrams linked to an RSR module:

 Example Diagram 8579 = Read-only information diagram.
 Example Diagram 8799 = Actual tuning diagram.
Note: The actual graphics are specific for each system. The graphics shown here are used as
examples only.
Diagram 8579
Diagram 8579 is provided in the standard Ovation release and is used to display current values
for configuration parameters and PI controller tuning. You cannot perform any tuning through this
diagram since it is a read-only diagram. You can access diagram 8579 from a control sheet that
contains an RSRSTATUS algorithm.
The following diagram is an example of a sample control sheet containing an RSRSTATUS

algorithm.
Figure 155: Project specific example of RSR Control Sheet
OW350_R1150 577
Select the RSRSTATUS diagram from the control sheet and the 8579 diagram appears. Use this
diagram to view current values for RSR module settings.
Some of the values that are displayed in the 8579 diagram are:
 contingencyTime
 posErrorRetreat
 retreatRate
 retreatHoldT
 Channel 1 and Channel 2 values
Figure 156: Project specific example of RSR Information Diagram 8579
578 OW350_R1150
Accessing Diagram 8799
In order to perform tuning calibrations on the RSR module, you need to use a tuning diagram
such as diagram 8799. This diagram is accessed from a custom graphic. You can use the
Ovation Graphics Builder to create code that will call the 8799 calibration diagram.
The following is an example of calling the 8799 diagram from diagram 1000 by using a standard
OL_BUTTON command in Ovation Graphics Builder:
OL_BUTTON 6300 8916 HORZ SQUARED TEXT_LABEL VECTOR 363 1313 1 "RSR TUNING
8799" EXEC_POKE 7 2 6 0 5 \OCB0005017\ ID \OCB0005017\ ID 3 83 3 117 8799 18 0 0 0 0 13
\RSR-DMD3\ ID \RSR-POS3\ ID \RSR-FBK3\ ID \RSR-DMD4\ ID \RSR-POS4\ ID \RSR-FBK4\ ID
\RSRSTA1\ ID \RSRSTA2\ ID \RSRCMD\ ID \OCB0005013\ ID \OCB0005012-MODE\ ID
\OCB0005002\ ID \OCB0005001-MODE\ ID
OL_BUTTON 938 1860 HORZ SQUARED TEXT_LABEL VECTOR 416 1707 1 "RSR TUNING"
EXEC_POKE 7 2 6 0 5 \OCBRSR50\ ID \OCBRSR50\ ID 3 83 3 117 8799 20 0 0 0 0 15 \RSR-
DMD1\ ID \RSR-POS1\ ID \RSR-FBK1\ ID \RSR-DMD2\ ID \RSR-POS2\ ID \RSR-FBK2\ ID
\RSRSTA1\ ID \RSRSTA2\ ID \RSRCMD\ ID \RSR1H1A\ ID \RSR1H1A-MODE\ ID \RSR1H1B\ ID
\RSR1H1B-MODE\ ID \RSR-ODMD1\ ID \RSR-ODMD2\
where:
OCBRSR50 – RSRSTATUS algorithm number

RSRSTA1 – RSRSTATUS point
RSRSTA2 – RSRSTATUS point
RSRCMD – RSRSTATUS point
RSR1H1A – channel 1 MASTATION algorithm number
RSR1H1A-MODE – channel 1 MAMODE algorithm number
RSR1H1B – channel 2 MASTATION algorithm number
RSR1H1B-MODE – channel 2 MAMODE algorithm number
RSR-POS1 – channel 1 Position Feedback
RSR-POS2 – channel 2 Position Feedback
RSR-FBK1 – channel 1 Raw Demodulator Voltage
RSR-FBK2 – channel 2 Raw Demodulator Voltage
RSR-DMD1 – channel 1 Demand
RSR-DMD2 – channel 2 Demand
RSR-ODMD1 – output 1 from RSR alg.(output PI 1)
RSR-ODMD2 - output 1 from RSR alg. (output PI 2)
Diagram 8799
Diagram 8799 consists of three main sections: Common, Channel 1 and Channel 2:
 Common section contains configuration pushbuttons and tuning constant entry fields common
for both channels.
 Channel 1 section contains configuration pushbuttons, tuning constant entry fields and
message lines used only for Channel 1.
 The Channel 2 section contains configuration pushbuttons, tuning constant entry fields and
message lines used only for Channel 2.
OW350_R1150 579
Figure 157: Project specific example of RSR Tuning Diagram 8799
Using the Graphic Interface for Calibration (Common) - (SVD)
Calibration is performed by using command buttons and by entering tuning constants in the entry
fields. Some pushbuttons are accompanied with rectangular confirmation boxes and when the
function is selected the color of the selection changes from black to yellow.
The following command pushbuttons are used to set configuration values:
Command Pushbuttons
PUSH - DESCRIPTION COMMENTS

BUTTON
Download Write data command given to RSR.

Upload Read data command given to RSR.
ClearEF's Clear Diagram entry field command.
Integral Integration Value is displayed in InteglationV for
both channels - the yellow rectangle confirms
selection.
LVDT Feedback voltage is displayed in RawVoltage
and OutputValue for both Channels - the yellow
rectangle confirms selection.
CASCADE Cascade flag to 1 - the yellow rectangle confirms Refer to Valve Position Control for
selection. the Servo Driver module (see page
563)
580 OW350_R1150

BUTTON
NORMAL Cascade flag to 0 (normal configuration) - the Refer to Valve Position Control for
yellow rectangle confirms selection. the Servo Driver module (see page
563)
CASCLOSE A flag to determine behavior of V2 (and output) in
cascade mode when main (V1) PI goes to seat. If
selected then cascade Close to
CasCloseInSeatVal followed by Retreat is
executed on V2
CASCLOSEIN- A flag to determine behavior of V2 (and output) in
SEAT cascade mode when main (V1) PI goes to seat. If
selected then seat is executed on V1. No further
action on V2 after seat in V1 if flag is cleared.
REGUL Proportional output option flag to 0 - the yellow Refer to Tuning Constant
rectangle confirms selection. Commands for the Servo Driver
module (see page 573)
REDUND Redundant LVDT option flag to 1 - the yellow Refer to Tuning Constant
SINGLE Redundant LVDT option flag to 0 - the yellow Refer to Tuning Constant
INPLACE Fail-in-place flag to 1 - the yellow rectangle Refer to Tuning Constant
confirms selection. Commands for the Servo Driver
TOZERO Fail-in-place flag to 0 - the yellow rectangle Refer to Tuning Constant
confirms selection. Commands for the Servo Driver
Tuning Constants Entry Fields
COMMAND DESCRIPTION COMMENTS
contingencyTime The time in milliseconds - if the error between Refer to Valve Position Control for
the target position and actual position exceeds the Servo Driver module (see page
contingency for this amount of time, then the 563)
condition is reported to the controller.
posErrorRetreat The output does not retreat until ABS| posFB - Refer to Valve Position Control for
TargetPos| <posErrorRetreat). the Servo Driver module (see page
563)
retreatRate Volts per second rate of output reheat. Refer to Valve Position Control for
the Servo Driver module (see page
563)
retreatHoldT The time in milliseconds - reheat occurs after Refer to Valve Position Control for
this time has expired, and (ABS|Target- the Servo Driver module (see page
Feedback| <posErrorRetreat). 563)
CasCloseIn- Value for output when CasCloseInSeat is Refer to: Tuning Constant
SeatVal executed (see above description for CCS) Commands for the Servo Driver
Module (see Tuning constant
commands for the Servo Driver
module (see page 573) )
OW350_R1150 581
Using the Graphic Interface for Calibration (Channel 1 and 2) - (SVD)
Calibration is performed by using command pushbuttons and entering tuning constants in the
entry fields. Some pushbuttons are accompanied with rectangular confirmation boxes and when
the function is selected the box color changes. The full, hot and top hot calibration sequences can
be started by selecting the appropriate pushbuttons.
The calibration sequence can be stopped at any time throughout the process and it is not possible
to start calibration for both channels at the same time. When the calibration of any channel is in
progress the following pushbuttons are disabled: DOWNLOAD, UPLOAD, CLEAR EF's,
OUTPUT, LVDT.
When calibration is finished, the tuning of the PI position control should be performed. This can be
performed in RSR local or normal mode. When local mode is selected the only way to change the
valve position demand is to press the UP or DOWN pushbuttons. Normal mode is selected by
pressing the DPU pushbutton, the valve position demand is changed by pressing the raise or
lower pushbuttons or by entering demand in the DEO entry field.
The following command pushbuttons are used to set the configuration values.
Command Pushbuttons

BUTTON
0% Calibrate zero% - the yellow rectangle confirms selection. Refer to Performing Calibration for
559)
100% Calibrate 100% - the yellow rectangle confirms selection. Refer to Performing Calibration for
559)
FULL Full calibration - the yellow rectangle confirms selection. Refer to Performing Calibration for
559)
STOP Stop Calibration - the yellow rectangle confirms selection.
UP Raise - The yellow rectangle confirms selection. Refer to Performing Calibration for
559)
DOWN Lower - The yellow rectangle confirms selection. Refer to Performing Calibration for
559)
DPU RSR channel 1or 2 to normal mode - the green rectangle
confirms selection.
LOC RSR channel 1or 2 to local mode - the yellow rectangle
confirms selection.
AUT MA station channel 1 or 2 - the blue rectangle confirms
selection.
MAN The red rectangle confirms selection.
Raise MA station channel 1 or 2 output.
582 OW350_R1150

BUTTON
Lower MA station channel 1 or 2 output.
DEO MA station channel 1 or 2 output digital entries. 20s ramp is assigned to this button.
SLO MA station channel 1 or 2 output digital entries. 255s ramp is assigned to this
button.
FAS MA station channel 1 or 2 output digital entries. 1s ramp is assigned to this button.
Tuning Constants Entry Fields
piGain PI Controller gain outside deadband. Refer to Tuning Constant

Commands for the Servo Driver
piResetT PI Controller reset time outside deadband. Refer to Tuning Constant
demodGain The A/D converter gain to achieve a voltage range Refer to Tuning Constant
representing 0 to 100% Commands for the Servo Driver
errorDbs When the absolute value of the difference Refer to Tuning Constant
between target position and actual position is less Commands for the Servo Driver
than this value, the valve is considered to be in module (see page 573)
stable.
errorDbF When the absolute value of the difference Refer to Tuning Constant
between target position and actual position is less Commands for the Servo Driver
than this value, the valve is considered to be in module (see page 573)
motion.
piGainDb PI Controller gain inside deadband. Refer to Tuning Constant
piResetDb PI Controller reset time inside deadband. Refer to Tuning Constant
outoffset RSR output offset for the proportional mode. You should only use outoffset if I
limit is reduced or equal 0, if I Limit
is 100% outoffset should be 0.
Outoffset is a working point of P
regulator.
ilimit Integration limit - 100% no limit 0% no integration.
calRateCh1(2) Automatic calibration demand change rate -
Channel 1 or channel2.
contingency The difference between Servo Driver target Refer to Tuning Constant
position and actual position. Commands for the Servo Driver
Release The retreat value to get back from cascade close
– put lower then cascade close and exitSeatValue
if you do not want this feature.
OW350_R1150 583
DIRECT PI mode. Refer to Tuning Constant

seatLimit When the target valve position is equal to or less Refer to Tuning Constant
than this value, seating action controls the output. Commands for the Servo Driver
backSeatLimit When the target valve position is equal to or Refer to Tuning Constant
greater than this value, backseating action Commands for the Servo Driver
controls the output. module (see page 573)
exitSeatVal When the RSR is seating the valve, then decides Refer to Tuning Constant
to retreat, this is the output in mV to which the Commands for the Servo Driver
output goes. module (see page 573)
exitBkSeatVal When the RSR is backseating the valve, then Refer to Tuning Constant
decides to retreat, this is the output in mV to which Commands for the Servo Driver
the output goes. module (see page 573)
calzero The converted to decimal hexadecimal A/D Refer to Tuning Constant
converter reading for the 0%. Commands for the Servo Driver
calhndrd The converted to decimal hexadecimal A/D Refer to Tuning Constant
converter reading for the 100%. Commands for the Servo Driver
OutputMin Minimum tuning constant for output – voltage [mV}
on output equivalent to 0%
OutputMax Maximum tuning constant for output – voltage
[mV] on output equivalent to 100%
Message and Status Lines
FIGURE 2 DESCRIPTION
REFERENCE
1 RSR status:
 LOCAL mode
 normal MANUAL
 normal AUTO
2 Three message lines:
 Retreat in progress
 Retreat is disabled
 Contingency
3 Calibration status:
 Not in calibration
 CAL0 in Progress
 CAL100 in Progress
 FULL Calibration in Progress
 Calibration is Finished
4 General Messages.
584 OW350_R1150
9.4.23 Terminal Block Wiring Information - (SVD)
information.
DC LVDT I/O Modules (for use with Group 1 Electronic and Personality Modules)
CH1 CH2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
A RSV RSV POS CD1 CD2 CD3 RSV RSV POS CD1 CD2 CD3 RSV RSV PS+ PS-
B -HI -LI +16 -16 CDV -HI -LI +16 -16 CDV RSV CAL PS+
C +HI +LI POS RSV +HI +LI POS RSV RSV CAL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
DC Position DC Servo DC Position DC Servo
LVDT Feedback LVDT valve LVDT Feedback LVDT valve
Input Testpoint Power coil drive Input Testpoint Power coil drive
Supply output Supply output
AC LVT I/O Modules (for use with Group 2 and 3 Electronic Modules
and Group 2 Personality Modules)
CH1 CH2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
A RSV RSV POS CDA RSV CDB RSV RSV POS CDA RSV CDB RSV RSV PS+ PS-
B -HI -LI LVT RSV CDV -HI -LI LVT RSV CDV RSV CAL PS+
C +HI +LI POS RSV +HI +LI POS RSV RSV CAL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
AC Position AC Servo AC Position AC Servo
LVT Feedback LVT valve LVT Feedback LVT valve
Input Testpoint Excitation coil drive Input Testpoint Excitation coil drive
outputs outputs
Notes
1. Do not make connections to RSV termination blocks.
2. Do not make connections to CDV termination blocks (they are outputs of the FSR field board's Coil
Drive buffers).
3. All of the field interface signals must use twisted-pair copper wire conductors inside a shielded
cable assembly. The cable assembly shield must be tied to earth ground via one or more of the
following termination block earth ground terminals: C5, C6, C12, or C13.
Figure 158: Terminal Block Connections for the Servo Driver Personality Modules
OW350_R1150 585
Isolated circuit common ground.
+16, -16 DC LVDT Power Supply voltages, +16 VDC and -16 VDC.
CAL A jumper may be installed across the two CAL inputs in order to force the module
to enter factory test mode.
CDA Primary 1000 ohm servo-valve coil drive output (AC LVT modules).
CDB Secondary 1000 ohm servo-valve coil drive output (AC LVT modules).
CDV Output of FSR field brand coil drive buffer (no connections allowed).
CD1 - CD3 CD1 = 60 ohm, 60 mA servo-valve coil drive output (DC LVDT modules).
CD2 = 80 ohm, 40 mA servo-valve coil drive output (DC LVDT modules).
CD3 = 40 ohm, 40 mA servo-valve coil drive output (DC LVDT modules).
+HI, -HI Position feedback inputs - high range (DC LVDTs only).
+LI, -LI Position feedback inputs - low range (DC LVDTs or AC LVTs).
LVT AC LVT primary winding sinusoidal excitation output.

POS Demodulated and amplified position feedback DC voltage (0.0 to 7.5 VDC)
PS+, PS- Auxiliary power supply terminals (not used).
RSV Reserved terminals. No connections allowed on these terminals.
586 OW350_R1150
9.4.24 Field Connection Wiring Diagrams DC LVDT Channel 1 - (SVD)
Figure 159: Analog Input/Output Connection DC LVDT Channel 1 Servo Driver
OW350_R1150 587
Analog I/O Connection DC LVDT Channel 2 - (SVD)
Figure 160: Analog Input/Output Connection DC LVDT Channel 2 Servo Driver
588 OW350_R1150
Analog I/O Connection AC LVT Channel 1 - (SVD)
Figure 161: Analog Input/Output Connection AC LVT Channel 1 Servo Driver
OW350_R1150 589
Analog I/O Connection AC LVT Channel 2 - (SVD)
Figure 162: Analog Input/Output Connection AC LVT Channel 2 Servo Driver
590 OW350_R1150
9.4.25 Field Connection Wiring Diagrams, DC LVDT Channel 1 (CE Mark) - (SVD)
Figure 163: Analog Input/Output Connection DC LVDT Channel 1 (CE Mark)
Note: All field wiring must be braid shielded and grounded at the entry point of the cabinet using
the recommended hardware. (Refer to the applicable "Cable Guideline" information for your
system.)
OW350_R1150 591
Analog I/O Connection DC LVDT Channel 2 (CE Mark) - (SVD)
Figure 164: Analog Input/Output Connection DC LVDT Channel 2 (CE Mark)
system.)
592 OW350_R1150
Analog I/O Connection AC LVT Channel 1 (CE Mark) - (SVD)
Figure 165: Analog Input/Output Connection AC LVT Channel 1 Servo Driver (CE Mark)
system.)
OW350_R1150 593
Analog I/O Connection AC LVT Channel 2 (CE Mark) - (SVD)
Figure 166: Analog Input/Output Connection AC LVT Channel 2 Servo Driver (CE Mark)
system.)
9.4.26 Severe Errors Status Register - (SVD)
Word address 14 (E in Hex) provides for additional module configuration and module status. The
bit definitions for this register are encoded.
Severe Error Status Register (Address 14 or E in Hex)

0 Not applicable EEPROM checksum error

1 Not applicable PROM checksum error
2 Not applicable Shared memory readback error
3 Not applicable Processor memory readback error
594 OW350_R1150

4 Not applicable FPGA error

5 Not applicable UART error
6 Not applicable Processor diagnostic error
7 Not used Not used
8 Not applicable PSD 302 memory readback error
9 Not used Not used
10 Not used Not used
11 File transfer bit - Reserved File transfer bit - Reserved
12 Controller-to-Servo Driver buffer control bit. Not applicable
If Bit 12 and Bit 14 of register D are equal, then
the buffer is not busy, and the Controller can
write into the buffer.
If the two bits differ, then the Servo Driver should
be in the process of unloading the buffer and will
toggle Bit 14 when all data is removed.
The Controller should not write into the buffer if
the two bits are unequal. When the Controller
has data to be transferred to the Servo Driver,
and the two bits are equal, it first writes the data,
then toggles this bit. (The buffer occupies indirect
registers 80 to BF inclusive. This buffer is
accessed by the Controller using addresses 0
through 3F.)
13 Servo Driver-to-Controller buffer status bit. Not applicable
the buffer is not busy (empty).
When this bit and Bit 15 become unequal, there
is data in the buffer. The bits being unequal
signals the Controller to remove all data from the
buffer.
When all the data is removed, this bit should be
toggled by the Controller. The buffer occupies
indirect registers C0 to FF inclusive. This buffer is
through 7F.)
OW350_R1150 595

14 Not applicable Controller-to- Servo Driver buffer status bit.

If Bit 14 and Bit 12 are equal, then the buffer is
not busy (empty).
signals the Servo Driver to remove all data from
the buffer.
toggled by the Servo Driver. (The buffer
occupies indirect registers 80 to BF inclusive.
This buffer is accessed by the Controller using
addresses 0 through 3F.)
15 Not applicable Servo Driver -to-Controller buffer control bit
If Bit F15 and Bit 13 are equal, then the buffer is
not busy, and the Servo Driver can write into the
buffer.
If the two bits differ, then the Controller should
be in the process of unloading the buffer and
will toggle bit 13 when all data is removed.
The Servo Driver should not write into the buffer
if the two bits are unequal. When the Servo
Driver has data to be transferred to the
Controller, and the two bits are equal, it first
writes the data, then toggles this bit. (The buffer
occupies indirect registers C0 to FF inclusive.
9.4.27 Diagnostics - (SVD)
The Servo Driver runs diagnostics to ensure that the circuit is operating properly. When a problem
is detected, a number of things may occur. If the error is considered to be a severe fatal error, the
card will dive. This means that the output circuit will de-power, and the on-board processor will
idle. For some fatal errors, the processor will be reset. Word register E in the serial bus shared
memory contains important severe fatal error bits.
Other problems may cause a restriction bit to be set. Restriction bits prevent the module from
changing modes. During startup, each mode uses a bit mask to determine if errors exist that
would prevent the mode change. As the mode advances from start, to local, then to normal, the
restriction mask has fewer and fewer bits set.
During restart, there is a 20 second time delay to allow the oscillator to stabilize. Diagnostics are
run during this delay. The EPROM checksum is fully calculated.
596 OW350_R1150
EPROM Checksum Error - (SVD)
The EPROM checksum is calculated completely on restart. After restart, the checksum program is
called during idle time. Each call to the checksum adds one word to the sum.
Memory Read/Write Check - (SVD)
A failure of any memory to read back correctly is considered a severe fatal error. The memory
check routine accesses memory in the PSD302 chip, on-chip memory, and serial bus shared
memory.
EEPROM Checksum - (SVD)
On restart, tuning constants are read out of a 64x16 EE memory. If the checksum calculation
indicates an error, an SFE bit is set and all modes are restricted. This error occurs in the factory
during manufacturing, but should never occur in the field.
UART Check - (SVD)
A byte is written to the UART scratchpad register and read back. If the data does not read back
correctly, an SFE bit is set and all modes are restricted.
FPGA Error - (SVD)
During restart, the FPGA is loaded by the 80196 Controller. Control and status lines connected to
the FPGA must conform to the defined; sequence, otherwise an SFE bit is set and all modes are
restricted.
Controller Watchdog Timer - (SVD)
Microcontroller Firmware maintains a timer that is reset every time the Controller updates the
Servo Driver with a new demand position. If the timer expires and the Servo Driver is in the
normal operating mode, the module reverts back to the local operating mode.
The duration of the timer is set by three bits located in register D.
The microcontroller assumes an update has occurred when two conditions exist. First, it tests the
CYCLEOK bit, which is an indication that a serial bus cycle to the module has occurred.
In addition to changing modes when the timer expires, a restriction bit is set to prevent return to
normal mode. Updating demand clears the restriction bit.
When the module switches to local mode, demand value is set to -5% if the “failInPlaceFlag” is
cleared. If the “failInPlaceFlag” bit is set, demand value remains where it was when the mode
change occurred.
OW350_R1150 597
9.4.28 Register configuration/address information - (SVD)
Station (see the Bit Pattern Field on the Hardware tab). Refer to the applicable Operator Station
User Guide for information about the Point Information window.
Servo Driver Configuration/Status Register (Address 13 or D in Hex)

0 Configure module Module is configured

(1 = configure) (1 = configured; 0 = unconfigured)
1 Force Error Internal or Forced Error

(1 = error; 0 = no error) (1 = error; 0 = no error)
2-4 1 1
1 0 0 500 millisec 1 0 0 500 millisec
1 1 1 62.5 millisec 1 1 1 62.5
millisec
7 Severe fatal error (SFE) bit Severe fatal error (SFE) bit
Look at register E for more specific error Look at register E for more specific error
information (error bits 0 through 6 in register E information (error bits 0 through 6 in register E
are OR‟d to calculate this bit). are OR‟d to calculate this bit).
9 Not used. Ch1 - Retreat in progress.
10 Not used. Ch2 - Retreat in progress.
11 Not used. Ch1 - Retreat is disabled.
12 Not used. Ch2 - Retreat is disabled.
13 Channel 1 contingency. Channel 1 contingency.
14 Channel 2 contingency. Channel 2 contingency.

15 EEPROM constants download request. EEPROM constants download request.
598 OW350_R1150

1
bit definitions for this register are encoded.
Severe Error Status Register (Address 14 or E in Hex)

0 Not applicable. EEPROM checksum error.

1 Not applicable. PROM checksum error.
2 Not applicable. Shared memory readback error.
3 Not applicable. Processor memory readback error.
4 Not applicable. FPGA error.
5 Not applicable. UART error.
6 Not applicable. Processor diagnostic error.
8 Not applicable. PSD 302 memory readback error.
11 File transfer bit - Reserved. File transfer bit - Reserved.
OW350_R1150 599

12 Controller-to-Servo Driver buffer control bit. Not applicable.

the buffer is not busy, and the Controller can
write into the buffer.
If the two bits differ, then the Servo Driver should
be in the process of unloading the buffer and will
toggle Bit 14 when all data is removed.
The Controller should not write into the buffer if
the two bits are unequal. When the Controller
has data to be transferred to the Servo Driver,
and the two bits are equal, it first writes the data,
then toggles this bit. (The buffer occupies indirect
registers 80 to BF inclusive. This buffer is
through 3F.)
13 Servo Driver-to-Controller buffer status bit. Not applicable.
the buffer is not busy (empty).
signals the Controller to remove all data from the
buffer.
toggled by the Controller. The buffer occupies
indirect registers C0 to FF inclusive. This buffer is
through 7F.)
14 Not applicable. Controller-to- Servo Driver buffer status bit.
If Bit 14 and Bit 12 are equal, then the buffer is
not busy (empty).
signals the Servo Driver to remove all data from
the buffer.
toggled by the Servo Driver. (The buffer
occupies indirect registers 80 to BF inclusive.
600 OW350_R1150

15 Not applicable. Servo Driver -to-Controller buffer control bit

If Bit F15 and Bit 13 are equal, then the buffer is
not busy, and the Servo Driver can write into the
buffer.
If the two bits differ, then the Controller should
be in the process of unloading the buffer and
will toggle bit 13 when all data is removed.
The Servo Driver should not write into the buffer
if the two bits are unequal. When the Servo
Driver has data to be transferred to the
Controller, and the two bits are equal, it first
writes the data, then toggles this bit. (The buffer
occupies indirect registers C0 to FF inclusive.
9.4.29 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (SVD)
LED DESCRIPTION

C (green) Communications OK LED. Lit when the Controller is
communicating with the module. Successful completion of
sequence resets the watchdog timer.
E (Red) External Fault LED.
I (Red) Internal Fault LED. Possible causes:
 Force Error bit (Bit 1) of the Configuration Register is set.
 Also lit when a timeout of the watchdog timer occurs when
Controller stops communicating with module.
1 MODE (Green) Channel 1 Lit whenever the module is operating in Normal mode.
Not lit whenever the module is operating in local manual mode.
2 CONTINGCY (Red) Channel 1 Lit to indicate Contingency Condition.
3 BACKSEAT (Green) Channel 1 Lit whenever seating or backseating is in effect.
4 PI DETUNE (Green) Channel 1 Lit whenever PI is detuned.
5 MODE (Green) Channel 2 Lit whenever the module is operating in Normal mode.
Not lit whenever the module is operating in local manual mode.
6 CONTINGCY (Red) Channel 2 Lit to indicate Contingency Condition.
7 BACKSEAT (Green) Channel 2 Lit whenever seating or backseating is in effect.
8 PI DETUNE (Green) Channel 2 Lit whenever PI is detuned.
9 - 16 No LED.
OW350_R1150 601
9.4.30 Specifications - (SVD)

DESCRIPTION VALUE
Servo driver field interface channels. Two

DC LVDT position feedback input range. Low Range Input
0 to 7.4 V DC (Maximum range)
(1C31199G01) 0 to 1.5 V DC (minimum range)
High Range Input
0 to 15 V DC (Maximum range)
0 to 5.0 V DC (minimum range)
AC LVT position feedback input range. Low Range Input
(1C31199G02, 1C31199G03) 0.2 to 20 V AC peak-to-peak (Maximum range)
0.2 to 5.0 V AC peak-to-peak (minimum range)
DC LVDT position feedback input Low Range Input
impedance. 40 K ohms differential input with floating source
20 K ohms one input line referenced to common
(1C31199G01)
High Range Input
80 K ohms differential input with floating source
AC LVT position feedback input impedance. Low Range Input
(1C31199G02, 1C31199G03) 20 K ohms differential input with floating source
DC LVDT supply output voltages. +16 V dc 5%, 30 mA Max. load current
(-)16 V dc 5%, 30 mA Max. load current
(1C31199G01)
Supply output voltage matching: 1.5% over temperature
range
AC LVT excitation output voltage. 19 V AC peak-to-peak 11% @ 1.0 KHz 10%
(1C31199G02)
(1C31199G02, 1C31199G03)
19 V AC peak-to-peak 11% @ 3.0 KHz 10%
(1C31199G03)
500 Ohms minimum load impedance
Peak servo valve coil output voltage. CD1 100 Ohms output, 60 Ohms coil, 3.85 V or
CD2 162 Ohms output, 80 Ohms coil, 3.4 V or
(1C31199G01 DC LVDT)
CD3 210 Ohms output, 40 Ohms coil, 1.65 V
Peak servo valve coil output voltages. CDA output, 1000 Ohms coil, 8.55 V and
(1C31199G02, 1C31199G03 AC LVT) CDB output, 1000 Ohms coil, 8.55 V
Servo valve coil output voltage accuracy. 0.4% of full scale output
(1C31199G01-G03)
Servo driver field interface dielectric 1000 V dc (for both channels)
isolation. Both channels' field interface circuits have 50 V and 150 V
short term isolation from the logic common/Ovation I/O bus.
Each channel's field interface circuit has 50 V and 150 V short
term isolation from the other channel's field interface circuit.
Serial port. RS-232, non-isolated
Serial port baud rate. 9600
602 OW350_R1150
9.5 Small Loop Interface module (SLIM)
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Module power. 6.7 W typ. (1C31199G01 DC LVDT)

9.8 W Max. (1C31199G01 DC LVDT)
5.3 W typ. (1C31199G02-G03 AC LVT)
6.3 W Max. (1C31199G02-G03 AC LVT)
Logic board processor. 80C196KB (16-bit microcontroller)
Operating temperature range. 0 to 60°C (32°F to 140°F)
Storage temperature range. -40°C to 85°C (-40°F to 185°F)
Humidity (non-condensing). 0 to 95%
9.5.1 Overview - SLIM
The Small Loop Interface module (SLIM) provides the displays, keyboards inputs, and
accompanying logic needed for the operator to monitor and control the I/O functions of an Ovation
Loop Interface module - (LI) (see page 499) or an Ovation Valve Positioner module - (RVP) (see
page 627).
Information is presented to the operator by various bar-graphs, LEDs, numeric displays and
alphanumeric displays on the front panel of the SLIM. The keyboard allows the operator to send
control information to the Ovation Loop Interface module to control the process.
The SLIM module is a CE Mark certified module.
OW350_R1150 603
9.5.2 Features - SLIM
Using keys on the front of the SLIM panel, the operator has the following capabilities:
 Raise output.
 Lower output.
 Raise set point.
 Lower set point.
 Change SLIM mode (Group 1 only).
 Group 1 SLIMs operate in four modes: CONTROL, MONITOR, TUNING, LOOP. Group 2
operates in CONTROL mode only.
 Change alphanumeric and numeric displays.
 Change Loop Interface mode to Auto, Manual, Local (all groups) or Cascade (Group 1 only).
 Change tuning constants (Group 1 only).
 Runs bar-graphs, LEDs, and alphanumeric and numeric displays to monitor Loop Interface
I/O activities.
 Scans keypad to control Loop Interface.
 Sends and receives information to and from the Loop Interface through a serial port.
 Flags a break in the communication link with the Ovation Loop Interface.
 Allows loop control even if the Ovation Controller is down.
 Displays:
 Two 40-segment bar-graph (for process variable and setpoint).
 One 30-segment bar-graph (for output).
 One 4-digit numeric (for setpoint, output, process variable or analog input).
 One 4-digit alphanumeric (for engineering units, status or SLIM mode information).
 Thirteen status LEDs (for SLIM modes, Loop Interface modes as well as high and low
limit conditions output).
 Control keys:
 Four keys to raise and lower set point and outputs.
 Seven function keys.
9.5.3 Groups and Modes - SLIM
The SLIM card is packaged in one of two possible assemblies. The keyboards are the same,
except Group 2 does not have the LOOP, CASC, and MODE buttons.
Group 1 Allows the operator to choose from among four modes of operation for the SLIM and
four for the Loop Interface.
Group 2 Offers no choice of modes for the SLIM; it always operates in the CONTROL mode.
Offers three choices of operation of the Ovation Loop Interface.
604 OW350_R1150
The four modes of operation for the SLIM are as follows:

CONTROL MODE: Allows the operator to send control information to the
Ovation Loop Interface through a keyboard; displays the
process variable, the setpoint, and output value for the
Ovation Loop Interface on a bar-graph, and displays PV, SP,
or OUT with proper engineering units on an alphanumeric
display.
MONITOR MODE: Displays the process variable, the set point, and output
(Group 1 only) values for the Ovation Loop Interface on a bar-graph and
displays the analog input values on an alphanumeric display.
Note that the Loop Interface does not contain an AI3 input.
TUNING MODE: Displays the gain, reset, rate, and derivative gain values for
(Group 1 only) the Ovation Loop Interface it is communicating with and
enables the operator to change the values. Requires a
password.
LOOP MODE: Displays the Loop Number of the Loop Interface to which the
(Group 1 only) SLIM is currently communicating.
Note: Only one Ovation Loop Interface may be connected

to a SLIM.
OW350_R1150 605
AI1 AI2 AI3

PV SP Out Reject PV SP Out Reject
100 to 100 to
Local Local
Disp Loop Disp
80 M 80
Mode C Casc
T
60 60
Auto Auto
SP/Bias SP/Bias
40 Man 40 Man
20 Loc 20 Loc
Out Out
0 0
0 20 40 60 80 100 0 20 40 60 80 100
Figure 167: Keyboards for Group 1 and Group 2 SLIMs
606 OW350_R1150
POS DMD SRVO

PV SP Out Reject
100 to
Local
Disp Loop
80
60
Auto
40 Man
20
Dec Inc
0
-100 -60 -20 20 60 100
Figure 168: Keyboards for Group 3 and Group 4
OW350_R1150 607
9.5.4 Wiring - SLIM
Power cables to the SLIM must be single stranded #16 AWG copper conductors with ring lugs on
both ends. Power required at the terminal block of the SLIM is 0.5A at +12 VDC. No shielding is
required. A backup power supply is optional.
information.
+12A
+12B
RTN
RTN
Serial
Port
Figure 169: Wiring
In installations with more than one SLIM, each SLIM should have its own pair of conductors
directly from the power supply. If SLIMs are connected in parallel, conductors must be able to
accommodate the total current requirement for all SLIMs; voltage must measure +12 VDC at the
last SLIM in the line.
608 OW350_R1150
9.5.5 Serial Port - SLIM
The Serial Port receives display and status data from the Loop Interface and also sends operator
inputs from the keyboard to the Loop Interface. The port can communicate with only one Loop
Interface.
Serial Port Card-Edge Connector
COMPONENT SIDE PIN DESCRIPTION
1 Transmit +
2 Transmit -
3 Shield (Signal Ground)
4 Receive +
5 Receive -
6 through 10 Not Used
9.5.6 Assemblies - SLIM

 Cable assembly 5A26166 is used to connect the Ovation Loop Interface module to the SLIM.
 Cable assembly 5A26429 is used to connect the Ovation Loop Interface module to the SLIM
in CE Mark certified systems.
 SLIM Power Supply Tray 4D33743Gxx is used to power the SLIM.
9.5.7 Specifications - SLIM

 Current input
 0.30 A typical @ 12 V +5%, -10%
0.50 A Maximum
 Isolation
 500 VDC output to chassis ground
 Humidity (non-condensing)
 0 to 95%
OW350_R1150 609
9.6 Speed Detector module - (SD)
9.6.1 Overview - (SD)
The Speed Detector module determines the speed of a piece of equipment by measuring the
frequency of the output signal from a tachometer. The tachometer output can be sinusoidal or a
pulse train.
The G01 Speed Detector provides a 16-bit output at an update rate of 5 milliseconds for over-
speed detection, and a 32-bit output at a variable update rate for speed regulation.
The G03 Speed Detector provides a 32-bit speed output and a 16-bit acceleration output. The
G03 Speed Detector measures partial rotation and maintains a buffer of samples to achieve a 200
Hz (5-msec) update rate at normal sync speed. The G03 can issue a relay closure upon excess
acceleration, excess speed, or excess summation of speed and acceleration. The Ovation
Controller can also have control of the relay output. When there is an event that causes the relay
to be energized, the coil is latched and is not un-latched until a handshake pulse is received from
the Ovation controller to acknowledge the event. Limit values for speed and acceleration can be
loaded onto the module via Ovation IO points. Since the limits are movable by the Ovation
control sheet, it is then possible to incorporate test features into the Ovation control system such
as 2-of-3 speed channel testing, and mechanical overspeed limit testing.
The G01 and G03 are not plug compatible. The Ovation configuration and programming are
different. The G01 and G03 are compatible with respect to the terminal block wiring assignments.
9.6.2 Electronics modules (Emod) - (SD)

 1C31189G01 uses tachometer to determine speed.
 1C31189G03 uses tachometer to determine speed (Enhanced).
9.6.3 Personality modules (Pmod) - (SD)

 1C31192G01 required personality card for Speed Detector.
9.6.4 Subsystems - (SD)
Speed Detector subsystems -- G01
1, 2
Speed Detector subsystems (G01)
RANGE CHANNELS ELECTRONICS M ODULE PERSONALITY MODULE
16 bit speed (Low Res) 1 1C31189G01 1C31192G01

200 Hz Min - 51200 Hz Max
32 bit speed (High Res) 1 1C31189G01 1C31192G01

0.72 Hz Min - 65535 Hz Max
When using the Point Builder to define points for a Speed Detector module, only the following point types are
610 OW350_R1150
RANGE CHANNELS ELECTRONICS M ODULE PERSONALITY MODULE
I/O Channel Name Type Terminal Block

Connection
1 High Resolution (speed value) Input (can select I/O 1 or 3) In
3 Low Resolution (speed value) Input (can select I/O 1 or 3) In
5 Open Wire Input Not applicable
11 Overspeed Input Not applicable
12 Latched Overspeed Input Not applicable
13 Trip Relay Status Input Not applicable
1 Trip Relay Output Relay
2 Reset Calculations Output Not applicable
1
2
This module interfaces to ONE speed sensor to determine the rotation speed of a field device.
Ch. 11--This channel is the instantaneous status of the overspeed calculation. If it is true (=1), the
most recent overspeed calculation result is that the machine is in an overspeed condition. This bit
comes from bit 10 in the module status record and clears ( = 0 ) as soon as the overspeed
condition disappears.
Ch 12--This channel is a latched version of Ch. 11 and is located at bit 11 of the status register.
Once set true it remains true until the Ovation controller reads the status register. When the
Ovation controller reads the status register, this bit will be cleared if there is no overspeed
condition.
Ch. 13--This channel reports the instantaneous status of the relay coil drive circuit. This bit is
located in the module status register at bit 12. If it is true ( = 1 ) the relay coil is driven to actuate
the output relay.
Note: The Ovation controller will read the status register and clear bit 11 both for scanning the
module record, and for IO scanning if any of IO channels 11, 12, or 13 are defined. If channel
11 is used on a control sheet, then the logic must accommodate the possibility that the IO scan
will miss the overspeed condition in a case where the condition is coming in and out quickly, and
is cleared when the module record is scanned.
Speed Detector subsystems -- G03
1, 2 (
Speed Detector subsystems (G03) (Applies to 1C31189G03 EMOD and 1C31189G01
PMOD
16 bit acceleration (Low Res) 1 1C31189G03 1C31192G01

+/-31767 RPM/min
32 bit speed (High Res) 1 1C31189G03 1C31192G01

0.72 Hz Min - 65535 Hz Max
When using the Point Builder to define points for a Speed Detector module, only the following point types are
OW350_R1150 611
I/O Channel Name Type Terminal Block

Connection
1 High Resolution (speed value) Input In
4 Low Resolution (acceleration value) Input In
5 Open Wire Input Not applicable
11 Overspeed Input Not applicable
12 Overspeed Latched Input Not applicable
13 Relay Activated Input Not applicable
6 SpeedLimit or 0 - 65535 rpm Output Relay
5 AccellLimit or (Acell+Speed Limit +/- 32767) Output Not applicable
3 SimulateSpeed Output Not applicable
4 AckRelay Output Not applicable
1
2
This module interfaces to ONE speed sensor to determine the rotation speed of a field device.
Ch. 11--This channel is the instantaneous status of the overspeed calculation. If it is true (=1), the
most recent overspeed calculation result is that the machine is in an overspeed condition. This
includes both the overspeed calculation, or the over-acceleration or over-speed+acceleration
calculation. This bit comes from bit 10 in the module status record and clears ( = 0 ) as soon as
the overspeed condition disappears. The overspeed condition is reflected by the overspeed LED
as well.
Ch. 12--This channel is a latched version of Ch. 11 and is located at bit 11 of the status register.
Once set true, it remains true until the Ovation Controller acknowledges the event by pulsing
channel 4.
Ch. 13--This channel reports the status of the relay coil drive circuit. This bit is located in the
module status register at bit 12. If it is true ( = 1 ) the relay coil is driven to actuate the output
relay. Relay activation from overspeed conditions are latched in firmware and are not released
until the Ovation Controller acknowledges the condition by pulsing channel 4, as described above.
The relay can also be activated by the Ovation Controller.
Note: If the Controller is updating the speed limit IO point, the configured limit is ignored.
The acceleration limit IO can be positive or negative. Positive values indicate the customer
preference for relay action on high acceleration, whereas negative values are for high
amplitudes of deceleration. i.e. Positive acceleration will not cause relay action if the limit is
negative.
612 OW350_R1150
9.6.5 Terminal Block Wiring Information - (SD)
information.
Figure 170: Terminal Block Connections for the Speed Detector Personality Module
Earth ground terminals used to connect to input signal‟s shield (see the following
figure for field connections).
COM Common terminal of relay‟s contact.

IN+, IN- Positive and negative terminal connections of input signal.
NC Normally closed terminal of relay‟s contact.
NO Normally open terminal of relay‟s contact.
SHD Shield (see page 614) of input signal‟s cable.
All field signals leaving/entering the cabinet should be in shielded cables. The frequency input
signal from the signal source must be in twisted-pair shielded cables. The shield must be
grounded (see page 614).
OW350_R1150 613
9.6.6 Field Connection Wiring Diagrams - (SD)
Figure 171: Passive Probe Field Connections for the Speed Detector PMod
614 OW350_R1150
Figure 172: Active Probe Field Connections for the Speed Detector PMod
WARNING! Active speed probes that employ internal clocks for hysteresis, internal oscillation
for proximity detection, or chopper stabilization may result in a noisy acceleration
measurement vs. a passive probe because the sensor output transitions will jitter in the time
domain according to the sensor's internal clocking.
OW350_R1150 615
9.6.7 Field Connection Wiring Diagram (Passive Probe) (CE Mark) - (SD)
Figure 173: Passive Probe Field Connections for the Speed Detector Pmod (CE Mark)
9.6.8 Field Connection Wiring Diagram (Active Probe) (CE Mark) - (SD)
Figure 174: Active Probe Field Connections for the Speed Detector Pmod (CE Mark)
616 OW350_R1150
WARNING! Active speed probes that employ internal clocks for hysteresis, internal oscillation
9.6.9 Update rate and settings for G01 - (SD)
Update Rate
The update rate of the 16 bit speed output is 5 milliseconds. Input frequencies less than 200 Hz
result in a 16 bit speed output of 0x0000. Input frequencies greater than 51,200 Hz result in a 16
bit speed output of 0xFFFF.
The update rate of the 32 bit speed output is variable. It is a function of the speed sensor output
frequency (FREQ) and the user specified Pulse Count per Update (PULSES).
Update Rate = PULSES/FREQ
Example: Input frequency is 10 KHz, User specified pulse count per update is 60 (due to 60 teeth
in the sensor gear). The 32 bit speed output update rate equals 60/10,000 or 6 milliseconds.
The maximum update rate of the 32 bit speed output is 1.39 seconds. The 1.39 second limit is
set by the Speed Detector module hardware. If the user specified pulse count per update setting
and speed sensor input frequency requires an update rate longer than 1.39 seconds, the Speed
Detector module will still complete the 32 bit speed output update within 1.39 seconds.
Speed sensor input frequencies less than 0.72 Hz result in a 32 bit speed output that equals
0x0000 0000.
Speed sensor input frequencies greater than 65,535 Hz result in a 32 bit speed output that equals
0xFFFF FFFF.
Update Settings
Determine the update period of the 32-Bit speed output. Normally, this is used to control the
speed of equipment where accuracy is important. A longer update period permits a higher
accuracy output. Therefore, the Maximum update period allowed by the control loop should be
used to update the Speed Detector module‟s 32-Bit speed output.
Example: The Ovation control system runs at a 50 millisecond loop time. The equipment
operates at 10,000 Hz. The largest Pulse Count per Update setting that should be written to
register 0EH = 10,000 Hz x 0.050 seconds) = 500
Another factor that should be considered is the number of teeth in the speed sensor‟s gear. The
Speed Detector module provides the speed sensor output signal frequency. The Ovation control
system regulates equipment speed in revolutions per minute (rpm) using the measured Speed
Detector module speed sensor output frequency (Hz) as follows:
Equipment speed (rpm) = 60 x frequency (Hz) / number of teeth in the gear.
OW350_R1150 617
To eliminate errors due to mechanical differences of teeth in the gear, complete revolutions of the
speed sensor‟s gear must be counted when measuring frequency. To implement this requirement,
the Pulse Count per Update setting written to Speed Detector module register 0EH should be
specified as an integer multiple of the speed sensor gear teeth quantity.
Example: There are 60 teeth in the speed sensor‟s gear. With a 50 millisecond loop time and with
the equipment operating at 10,000 Hz, the largest speed a Speed Detector module Pulse Count
per Update setting (written to register 0EH) is 500. The largest integer multiple of 60 teeth that is
less than the Maximum pulse count per update setting of 500 is 8. Therefore, a Pulse Count per
Update value of 8 x 60 = 480 should be written to register 0EH as the Pulse Count per Update.
The Pulse Count per Update is set to 480 in order to be a multiple of the number of teeth in the
gear. The Pulse Count per Update setting of 480 provides an update every (480/10,000 = 48
milliseconds) which is fast enough for a 50 millisecond control loop.
For this example, a value of 01EOH (480) should be written to the Speed Detector.
618 OW350_R1150
9.6.10 Speed Calculations
On the G03 module there is no 16-bit speed reading. There is a 32-bit speed reading in RPM and
a 16-bit acceleration reading in RPM/min. The speed reading update rate exceeds 200 Hz at sync
speed using the recommended configuration settings. At lower speeds, the recalculation of speed
occurs every 4.6 msec or at the sample rate, whichever is slower.
Each rotation is subdivided by configuration into an integral number of partial rotations. Each
partial rotation is sampled. An interrupt to the onboard microcontroller occurs per each sample
and provides pulses ( teeth ) and ticks of the 24 Mhz clock.
Note: If the machine is equipped with a toothed wheel with a prime number of teeth, the G03
must be configured with that number of teeth, and updates-per-rev equal to 1.
The samples are buffered. Upon each update the pulses and time are accumulated to form a
fraction based on a full rotation, as follows:
( pulses ) / ( 24 Mhz ticks )
The fraction is then rescaled in order to convert it to RPM.
Speed calculations are buffered, then are used as an input to the acceleration calculation. When
8 msec worth of speed readings are accumulated, acceleration is recalculated. The acceleration
calculation uses the difference between the newest speed calculation and an older speed
calculation from 45 msec of previous history. Typically, acceleration is updated for every other
update of speed.
Example 1: Machine with 60-tooth wheel operating at 1000 rpm.
For this example, there are six samples of 10 pulses (teeth) per rotation. The sample rate is 6000
samples per minute, or 100 samples per second. The sample period is 10 msec. In this case, the
sample period exceeds the sample period of 4.6 msec (see additional info below), so the sample
rate and update rate (recalculation) would be equal to 100 hz or every 10 msec. The sample
period is greater than 8 msec, so acceleration is also recalculated every 10 msec.
Example 2: Machine with 60-tooth wheel operating at 3000 rpm.
If the machine is rotating at 3000 rpm there are 18000 samples per minute or 300 samples per
second, or a sample ever 3.3 msec. However, firmware limits the update period to 4.6 msec, or
218 updates per second. This scheme allows ample time to calculate speed and acceleration
while providing updates to the Ovation Controller at a rate exceeding 200 updates per second.
Recommended settings for machines equipped with a 60-tooth wheel
SPEED - RPM CONFIGURATION SAMP LE PE RIOD
3600 10 teeth x 6 2.8 msec

6000 (BFP) 15 teeth x 4 2.5 msec
3000 10 teeth x 6 3.3 msec
1800 6 teeth x 10 3.3 msec
1500 6 teeth x 10 4 msec
OW350_R1150 619
9.6.11 Acceleration Calculations
Acceleration is the derivative of speed, and derivative calculations are inherently noisy. Noise is
reduced on the G03 because the speed sampling starts and stops at the same tooth edge, and by
extending the sample time of the acceleration calculation. Calculated speed values are buffered
to maintain approximately 45 msec worth of samples for the acceleration calculation.
Acceleration is recalculated at ½ the rate that speed is recalculated at sync speed, or every 8
msec, whichever is slower.
The equation for the new acceleration measurement is:
Accel = ( newspeed – oldspeed ) / ( ~45 msec )
Once a new acceleration value is calculated, a smoothing algorithm is applied. The algorithm is
called SES, or Simple Exponential Smoothing, and works according to this equation:
newAccel = ( newAccelCalculated * 1/N ) + ( previousAccel *( 1 – 1/N ) )
where N = 8 or 16 depending on customer configuration.
A rule of thumb for SES is that 86% of a step change would be seen after N samples for 1/N
sampling.
Warning! Active speed probes that employ internal clocks for hysteresis, internal oscillation
9.6.12 Relay activation for G03
Relay function on the G03 is the same as the G01 except there are a number of events logically
OR‟d that will activate the relay. In addition, any Relay activation is latched until acknowledged by
the controller.
G03 firmware will activate the relay if:
1. Excess acceleration if acceleration I/O point is continually written to the G03 module.
2. Excess summation of speed and acceleration if acceleration I/O point is continually written to
the G03 module.
3. Speed exceeding I/O point limit if speed limit I/O point is continually written to the G03, or
speed exceeding configured limit if no I/O update.
The G03 also has a mode where the Ovation Controller can activate the relay. Acknowledge from
the Ovation Controller is not required for this mode.
620 OW350_R1150
9.6.13 G03 Acceleration Limit and Response
The acceleration limit is an IO point. If the Controller is continuously updating this value and the
value of this I/O point is exceeded, the relay is activated. The limit can be an acceleration-only
value in rpm/Min.
The smoothing algorithm causes a delay in relay activation. The delay differs based on whether
1/8 or 1/16 smoothing is selected.
The table below shows the amount of a step change in acceleration as seen by the Ovation
controller after certain specific times. The value seen by the Ovation Controller is the value used
when deciding to activate the relay.
PERCENT ACCELERATION 1/8 SMOOTHING 1/16 SMOOTHING

REPORTED
2.5% 28 to 37 msec 37 to 46 msec

5% 37 to 46 msec 46 to 55 msec
10% 46 to 55 msec 55 to 64 msec
20% 64 to 73 msec 83 to 92 msec
50% 101 to 110 msec 147 to 156 msec
75% 147 to 156 msec 248 to 257 msec
For example if the machine suddenly accelerates at 1000 rpm/min, 100 rpm/minute will be
reported within 55 msec if 1/8 smoothing is selected. If 1/16 smoothing is selected, 50
rpm/minute is reported within 55 msec. For response within 55 msec at 1000 rpm/minute
acceleration, the I/O point value would be 100 or 50 rpm respectively.
The G03 can be configured for a speed+acceleration limit. In this case, the module calculates a
predicted speed that would occur 1 minute into the future, then actuates the relay if (speed +
(acceleration * 1 minute)) is exceeded. The delay in the acceleration calculation in this case is
the same as described above. The IO point limit value is then in RPM. This method allows for
higher acceleration values at lower speed without activating the relay.
The comparable speed-only limit of 103% would be reached after 6.5 seconds at 1000 rpm/min
acceleration.
OW350_R1150 621
9.6.14 G03 Relay Closure Times
All relay activations from the module microcontroller cause the relay to be latched. The control
sheet must then issue a pulse to the G03 by setting AckRelay (channel 4, digital output) true for at
least 50 msec.
For the G01 and G03, elapsed time from coil excitation to contact closure is 2 msec or greater
and is listed in the specification section.
For the G01 and G03, the 32-bit calculation of speed requires 1.8 to 2.2 msec. Likewise, the
acceleration calculation requires 1.8 to 2.2 msec.
For the G03, the full amplitude of a step change in speed is seen by the module after a full
rotation. A portion of the step change is seen by the module after each sample subsequent to the
event. A machine running at 3600 rpm rotates once every 16.7 msec.
Relay closure upon excess acceleration is affected by the sampling scheme and by smoothing.
The sampling scheme uses 45 msec worth of speed readings.Therefore, based on the sampling
scheme alone, 50% of an acceleration step change would be seen 45 msec after the event, and
the full value would require 90 msec. This is because the oldest samples show no acceleration,
but the newest samples show 100% of the value, but are averaged across the 45 msec sampling
period. Delay due to smoothing continues to apply as sampling progresses.
The actual response also depends on the relationship between the actual start time of the event
and the sampling of pulses and time which is implemented in hardware, those events being
asynchronous.
This 2 msec delay from the relay, the calculation delay, and the smoothing delay described herein
are incorporated in the dated provided in the table in G03 Acceleration Limit and Response (see
page 621).
9.6.15 Speed Simulation
The G03 module will provide a simulated speed value if simulateSpeed, the digital output at
channel 3, is active.
Upon activation of simulateSpeed, the present speed value is recorded, and then is subsequently
increased at 300 RPM/minute. During this time, acceleration calculations are suspended and the
acceleration value is set to 0. The overspeed limit calculations and relay operation remain intact.
This feature allows the speed channel to be tested against programmed speed limits, relay
closure, and for testing of equipment downstream of the relay.
Once simulateSpeed is deactivated, the output value to the Ovation Controller immediately goes
to the value as calculated from the field input.
622 OW350_R1150
9.6.16 Register configuration/address information for G01 - (SD)
Station (see the Bit Pattern field on the Hardware tab). Refer to the applicable Ovation Operator
Station User Guide for information about the Point Information window.
Speed Detector Configuration/Status Register (Address 13 or D in Hex)


(1 = configure; 0 = unconfigure, causing (1 = configured; 0 = unconfigured causing a stoppage
a stoppage of both output of both output measurements)
measurements)
1 Force Internal Error Forced Internal error
(1 = force an attention status to be read (1 = forced error set by Controller;
by Controller; 0 = no forced error) 0 = no forced error)
2-3 Not used Not used
4 Not used Bit 4 = 1, Open wire condition detected.
5 1 = enable open wire test Bit 5 = 1, Open wire test enabled.
6-9 Not used Not used
10 Not used Bit 10 = 1, currently in overspeed condition.
11 Not used Bit 11 = 1, an overspeed condition detected since last
read of register D. Reading register D clears this bit.
12 Not used Bit 12 = 0, relay open.
Bit 12 = 1, relay energized.
13 Not used Not used.
14 Relay control 1 Relay control 0
15 Relay control 2 Relay control 1
Word address 14 (E in Hex) provides the Pulse Count per update setting for the secondary
Configuration/status register.
Word address 12 (C in Hex) provides the Overspeed Condition setting.
9.6.17 Register configuration/address information for G03 - (SD)
BIT DEFINITIONS
0 0 = The Speed Detector module is not configured.

1 = The Speed Detector module is configured.
1 0 = A Forced Internal Error command has not been issued by the Controller.
1 = A Forced Internal Error command has been issued by the Controller.
2 not used – Group One Modules, SPD_FILT_CTL – Group Three Modules
1 = speed filtering enabled
0 = speed filtering disabled
3 not used – Group One Modules, ACC_FILT_SEL – Group Three Modules
0 = 1/8 Accel filtering
1 = 1/16 Accel filtering
OW350_R1150 623
BIT DEFINITIONS
4 This is a Digital Input point bit, OpenWire

0 = No speed sensor open wire condition has been detected.
1 = A speed sensor open wire condition has been detected.
5 0 = The Speed Detector module's speed sensor input open wire test has not been enabled.
1 = The Speed Detector module's speed sensor input open wire test has been enabled.
6 not used – Group One Modules, DIS_ALL_FILT – Group Three Modules
0 = normal filtering
1 = disable all filtering (may be set for slow machines that rotate at speeds less than 100 rpm)
7 not used – Group One Modules, ACCEL_ONLY_LIM – Group Three Modules
0 = The module I/O register 0xB contents specify a trip limit in expressed in rpm and compared to
the calculated sum of the current machine speed + current machine acceleration * 1 minute
1 = The module I/O register 0xB contents specify a trip limit expressed in rpm/Min and compared
to the current machine acceleration
8 0 = The latest 5 ms speed loop sample period speed sensor pulse count is < 128 (Group One
modules)
1 = The latest 5 ms speed loop sample period speed sensor pulse count is > 127 (Group One
modules)
0 – Group Three modules
9 0
10 This is a Digital Input point bit, Overspeed
0 = There is currently no input over-speed, predicted over-speed (current speed + current
acceleration * 1 minute) (bit 7 = 0) or over-acceleration (bit 7 = 1) condition detected.
1 = An input over-speed, predicted over-speed (current speed + current acceleration * 1 minute)
(bit 7 = 0) or over-acceleration (bit 7 = 1) condition is currently detected.
11 This is a Digital Input point bit, OverSpdLatched
0 = No input over-speed, predicted over-speed (current speed + current acceleration * 1 minute)
(bit 7 = 0) or over-acceleration (bit 7 = 1) condition has been detected since the Ovation
Controller last read the contents of the Speed Detector module's Module Status register.
1 = An input over-speed, predicted over-speed (current speed + current acceleration * 1 minute)
(bit 7 = 0) or over-acceleration (bit 7 = 1) has been detected since the Ovation Controller last
read the contents of the Speed Detector module's Module Status register.
The act of reading the Module Status register will clear bit 11.
12 This is a Digital Input point bit, RelayStatus
0 = The FSD field board's relay coil has not been commanded to energize.
1 = The FSD field board's relay coil has been commanded to energize.
13 0
14-15 00 - Mode 1. The FSD relay coil is energized by one or both of these conditions:
1) The Ovation Controller sets Register 0xA bit 0.
2) The Speed Detector module microcontroller detects an over-speed condition, a predicted
future over-speed condition (bit 7 = 0) or an over-acceleration condition (bit 7 = 1)
01 - Mode 2. The FSD relay coil is energized by one condition:
The Speed Detector module microcontroller detects an over-speed condition, a
predicted future over-speed condition (bit 7 = 0) or an over-acceleration condition (bit 7 = 1)
10 - Mode 3. The FSD relay coil is energized by one condition:Z
The Ovation Controller sets Register 0xA bit 0.
11 - Mode 4. Same as Mode 3, except in the event of an Ovation Controller time-out condition
(where the Ovation Controller Watchdog timer has timed out). In this situation, the Speed
Detector module microcontroller will energize the FSD board relay coil if an over-speed condition,
a predicted future over-speed condition (bit 7 = 0) or an over-acceleration condition (bit 7 = 1)
Note: If the tooth count on the toothed wheel is a prime number, set updates per rev to 1, and
the tooth count equal to the number of teeth on the wheel.
624 OW350_R1150
9.6.18 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (SD)
LED DESCRIPTION
P (green) Power OK LED. Lit when the +5V power is OK (above min required operating level).
module at least once every two seconds.
E (Red) External Error LED. Lit when the Open Wire (Bit 6 of module reply status register) is
detected.
I (Red) Internal Error LED. Lit when the Force Error bit (Bit 1 of register D) is detected.
communicating with module for two seconds.
1 (Green) Lit when overspeed is detected.
2 (Green) Lit when relays are energized.
3 - 16 No LED.
9.6.19 Specifications - (SD)

1
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Number of Channels 1
Input Frequency Range G01
0.72 Hz to 5 kHz for the 32-Bit Speed Output
200 Hz to 51,200 Hz for the 16-Bit Speed Output
G03
The sampling rate is limited to 1KHz, resulting in a limit to the Input
Frequency range.
0.89 Hz to 65,535 Hz for 32-bit speed reading ( 10 pulses per update)
Speed Measurement 1/65535 Hz for the 32-Bit Speed Output
Resolution 1 Hz for the 16-Bit Speed Output (G01)
G03 – 1 rpm/Min for acceleration measurement.
Guaranteed Speed Maximum error for the 16-Bit Speed Output is 0.0033% of Sensor
Measurement Accuracy Frequency Speed Input
(@25×C) Max. error for the 32-Bit Speed Output is the greater of 0.0025% or
6 6
[(25/10 ) + (2/(24 x 10 x Update Period))] x 100% of Speed Sensor
Frequency Input
Update Period = PULSES/FREQ (in seconds)
FREQ = Speed Sensor output frequency
Acceleration accuracy PULSES = User specified Speed Sensor Pulse Count per 32-Bit Speed
Output value update
+- 2 rpm/Min for 1/16 filtering, or +-4 rpm/Min for 1/8 filtering
Speed Output Update Rate Update Rate = 5 milliseconds for the 16-Bit Speed Output (G01)
Also see Update rate and Update Rate = PULSES/FREQ (in seconds) for the 32-Bit Speed Output
settings for G01 - (SD) (see FREQ = Speed Sensor output frequency
page 617) and Update rate for G01 - PULSES = User specified Speed Sensor Pulse Count per 32-Bit
G03 - (SD) (see page 619) Speed Output value update
G03 - PULSES = User specified tooth count per update.
OW350_R1150 625
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Relay Type - 2 form C

Switching Time - 2 millisec. typical, 4 millisec. Max.
Contact Load Current - 0.5 A Max. @ 125 VAC, 2 A Max @ 30 VDC
Contact Switching Capacity - 62.5 VA or 60 Max.
G03 functions are the same a G01, except for how they are activated.
Differential Input Impedance 50 K OHM
Diagnostics Open Speed Sensor Wires Detection (Speed Sensor source resistance
must be </= 5000 ohms). Over-speed detection.
Dielectric Isolation: 1000 VAC/DC or 500 VAC RMS for one minute, field to logic.
Field Circuit to Logic Common
Max. Input Withstand Voltage 140 VAC rms or 150 VDC
Max. Usable Input Voltage 200 V peak-to-peak
Max. Off-State Input Voltage 0.2 V peak-to-peak
Input Duty Cycle 20% Min. - 80% Max.
Max. Input DC Offset 150 VDC -0.5 x Max. Input Voltage (peak-to-peak)
Normal Mode Rejection Maximum 140 VAC or 150 VDC
Module Power 4.8 W typical, 6.25 W Maximum
Operating Temp. Range 0×C to 60×C (32×F to 140×F)
Storage Temperature Range -40×C to 85×C (-40×F to 185×F)
Humidity (Non-Condensing) 0 to 95%
1
Refer to the following table for information about different revisions of 1C31189.
Minimum Input Voltage (Peak-to Peak)
1C31189G0 1C31189G01 1C31189G01 1C31189G03 INPUT SIGNAL

1 REVISION 1 REVISIONS 2 /3 REVISION 4 OR FREQUENCY RANGE
LATER
n/a n/a n/a 1 volt From 0.089 Hz up to 0.72

Hz
5 volts 1 volt 1 volt 1 volt From 0.72 Hz up to 5 Hz
5 volts 1 volt 0.5 volt 0.5 volt From 5 Hz up to 1 KHz
5 volts 1 volt 1 volt 1 volt From 1 KHz up to 10 KHz
5 volts 1 volt 2 volts 2 volt From 10 KHz up to 20
KHz
10 volts 10 volts 10 volts 10 volt From 20 KHz up to 40
KHz
KHz
Hz
626 OW350_R1150
9.7 Valve Positioner module - (RVP)
9.7.1 Overview - (RVP)
The Digital Electro-Hydraulic (DEH) system controls steam turbine valve positions in order to
adjust steam flow for turbine speed control, or to change generator load when connected to the
grid. The Ovation Valve Positioner I/O module provides an interface between the DEH Ovation
Controller and an electro-hydraulic servo valve actuator. Valve styles controlled by the Ovation
Valve Positioner I/O module include throttle valves, governor valves, interceptor valves, extraction
valves, and bypass valves. The Ovation Valve Positioner module provides closed-loop valve
positioning control.
A valve position set point is maintained by the module. The set point is normally altered by the
Ovation Controller via the Ovation I/O bus. If the Ovation Valve Positioner module operates in
Local Manual mode, the set point is controlled by a SLIM operator interface station. Inside the
Electronics module, an 80C196 micro-controller provides real-time closed loop proportional-plus-
integral (PI) control.
The Ovation Valve Positioner I/O module generates redundant output control signals which drive
the electro-hydraulic servo valve actuator coils. The feedback loop is closed with the valve‟s
position measurement being obtained from a Linear Variable Differential Transformer (LVDT) that
is mounted on the valve stem.
The Valve Positioner module can perform the following:

 Calibration
 Diagnostics
 10 millisecond loop time
 SLIM interface for local control
 Local serial interface for testing and calibration
 Shutdown input
 Seating and backseating logic
The Valve Positioner module is a CE Mark certified module.
9.7.2 Electronics modules (Emod) - (RVP)

 1C31194G01 17 V ac p-p 1 kHz LVDT primary winding excitation output., ±10.24 V dc servo
valve actuator coil drive output voltage. RVP design.
 1C31194G02 23.75 V ac p-p 3 kHz LVDT primary winding excitation output., ±10.24 V dc
servo valve actuator coil drive output voltage. RVP design.
Note: For Solaris applications, when using the I/O Builder to configure the Valve Positioner (VP)
module, note that whatever voltage/current description is displayed in the Slot position at the top
of the window does NOT impact the configuration of the VP module.
OW350_R1150 627
9.7.3 Personality modules (Pmod) - (RVP)

 1C31197G01 has 330 ohm resistors that provide up to ±24 mA into 82 ohm servo coils. Use
with any Valve Positioner Electronics module.
 1C31197G04 has 160 ohm resistors that provide up to ±36 mA into 125 ohm servo coils. Only
two coils may be driven by 1C31197G04. Use with any Valve Positioner Electronics module.
The C3+ and C3- coil outputs are not available.
The C3+ and C3- coil outputs are not available. 1C31197G05 Accommodates 4-20 mA
feedback input at terminals B9/C9. See VP personality module 1C31197G05
recommendations for tuning constant suggestions.
Note: When using the I/O Builder to configure the Valve Positioner (VP) module for Solaris
applications, note that whatever voltage/current description displays in the Slot position at the
top of the window does NOT impact the configuration of the VP module.
9.7.4 Subsystems - (RVP)
1

MODULE MODULE


628 OW350_R1150

MODULE MODULE

When using the Point Builder to define points for a Valve Positioner module, only the following point
types are valid for each channel:
I/O Name Type Input Source or Terminal Block
Channel Output Destination 2
Connection
1 Shutdown Status Input Valve Positioner DI1
2 Auxiliary (wetting) Voltage Sense Input Valve Positioner DI2
3 SLIM ON Signal Input Valve Positioner DI3
4 Position Feedback Input Valve Positioner
5 Coil 1 Voltage (Read-back) Input Valve Positioner Coil 1
8 Raw Demodulator Voltage Input Valve Positioner
9 VP Status Input Valve Positioner
10 Demand Feedback Input Valve Positioner
11 VP Command Output Valve Positioner
12 VP Demand Output Valve Positioner
13 Partner Position Feedback Output Valve Positioner
1
This module provides an interface between an Ovation Controller and ONE Electro-Hydraulic (EH)
servo-valve actuator in the field. To use this module, the MASTATION algorithm must reside in the
Ovation Controller. (See the Ovation Algorithm Reference Manual.)
2
The terminal block connection depends upon the application being used. Refer to wiring diagram.
OW350_R1150 629
9.7.5 Guidelines (Redundant) - (RVP)
Two Ovation Valve Positioner (VP) cards operate as a Primary/Backup pair to control a single
steam valve. The steam valve is fitted with two LVDTs, one connected to each Valve Positioner.
Each VP then drives one coil in a high pressure hydraulic servo valve. The coils are completely
isolated. Under normal conditions current through each coil is equal and the effect on the servo
valve spool is additive.
The Valve Positioners communicate serially to determine which VP should be Primary, and which
should be Backup. Critical parameters of the redundant subsystem are exchanged over the serial
link. These critical parameters are also exchanged over the Ovation bus, thus providing a
redundant data path.
The Backup VP suspends its software PI routine, and replicates the servo output of the Primary. It
then takes over control if the Primary fails. There are three types of failures that the subsystem
detects and responds to:
 Hardware Failures - Each VP continuously runs internal diagnostics and ceases operation if a
diagnostic fails. A failure is indicated when both the serial communications and Ovation line
watchdog timers expire. The VP card continuously executes these diagnostics:
 Micro-controller RAM
 Ovation RAM
 EPROM Checksum
 DA Converter Readback
 Ovation Watchdog Timer
 Redundant Communications Watchdog Timer
630 OW350_R1150
 Coil Drive - If the Primary VP detects a shorted or open servo coil, it transfers control to the
Backup VP. Refer to, Coil Setup.
 LVDT Failures - LVDT failures are detected by measuring the derivative of position feedback.
As with the servo coil, there are setup requirements that enable the detection of LVDT
problems. Refer to, LVDT Setup (see page 636).
The VP pair utilizes the SLIM serial port for VP-to-VP communications. The serial link is a VP-to-
VP connection, not the “party-line” bus utilized with the SLIM.
Because the effect on the servo spool from the servo coils is additive, a failover event is NOT
bumpless (that is, the valve dips, or moves in the direction indicated by the mechanical bias
setting, during the failover period). Catastrophic hardware failures, or removal of the Primary VP,
are the worst failures because the Backup must wait for various timers to expire and then engage
the PI loop.
If, for example, the failover required one second to complete (determined by the Controller loop
time), and the valve was programmed to drift shut in 30 seconds under control of the mechanical
bias-setting, the valve could drift 3% (=1/30).
OW350_R1150 631
632 OW350_R1150
Figure 175: Typical Redundant Ovation Valve Positioner Subsystem
In the example above, the valve is controlled by RVPs in branch 1, slot 3 and branch 2, slot 6.
Each RVP reads the valve position from a six-wire LVDT. The RVPs communicate across the
SLIM port to cooperate in driving the servo valve. The servo valve admits/releases hydraulic fluid
from the actuator.
9.7.6 Module Serial Connection - (RVP)
Figure 176: Redundant VP to VP Serial Connections
9.7.7 Firmware levels - (RVP)
The following table lists all VP module firmware releases that added functionality to
the VP.
VP FIRMWARE VP FIRMWARE FEATURES

LEVEL REVISION
(E MOD) LEVEL
(E MOD)
0B 5 First full production firmware release.

0C 6 Added support for VP Redundancy.
0D Obsolete
0E Obsolete
OW350_R1150 633

LEVEL REVISION
(E MOD) LEVEL
(E MOD)
0F 9 Added support for the following:

 Calibration from the Controller using graphics.
 Upload/download of calibration constants to and from the
Controller.
 New tuning constants kServo and kServoDb to replace hard-
coded constants. They add flexibility in dealing with differing coil
impedances.
 Reduction of valve calibration time.
0G 11 Redundancy support changed so that multiple failovers are
precluded.
Improvements to calibration.
Improved coil diagnostics for “coilCount = 0”.
Math calculation for position feedback endpoint improved.
0H 13 Added “priority Demand” tuning constant to support Rockport
project.
0I 15 Corrected communications error in redundancy link.
0J 16 Added anti-windup feature, changed default values of piGain, pi
ResetTDb, and errorDbs, and calibration sequence improvements.
0K 18 Improved Serial Communications.
0L Added the following enhancements:

 Added 3 control bits to override primary/backup modes and reset
of the redundant RVP pair.
 Corrected problem of calibration at full open endpoint.
 Fixed startup sequence to avoid contest for primary status of
redundant RVP.
 Increased startup wait time for oscillator settling from 10 seconds
to 20 seconds.
 Use servo output to predict direction of motion as arbiter for
redundant RVP when position feedbacks become unequal.
0M This version includes the following:
 Made changes to seating and backseating.
 Cleaned up LED display for backup RVP in redundant RVP pair.
 Made a slight adjustment of the AD converter schedule.
634 OW350_R1150
9.7.8 Primary to Backup status transition - (RVP)
The firmware for the Valve Positioner module allows for Primary to Backup and Backup to
Primary status transitions.
If the VP is in the Primary mode, it transitions to Backup mode if:
Note: Prior to a decision to fail to the backup, the following conditions are tested, and if OK, the
primary determines its own health is good and the subsequent tests are not executed:
1. During calibration failovers are precluded.

2. If there was a recent failover a timer operates to preclude additional failovers for at least ½
second.
Then the failover conditions are checked:
1. The serial line status is OK and the partner is the primary.

2. The serial line status is OK, the backup is OK and armed, and a high derivative is detected on
the position feedback. (See description of min2ndry tuning constant and LVDT setup
requirements.)
3. The serial line status is OK, the backup is OK and armed, and excessive motion is seen for
10 subsequent position feedback scans. (See description of MaxDelta tuning constant.)
4. The serial line status is OK, the backup is OK and armed, and a failed servo coil is detected.
5. The serial line status is OK, the backup is OK and armed, the primary sees a difference
between target position and actual position that exceeds tuning constant posErrDelta, and the
position feedback and partner position feedback differ by more than LVDT Tracking. This
condition is a “last choice” situation. The redundancy state machine is restarted to allow the
other RVP to take over.
9.7.9 Backup to Primary status transition - (RVP)
If the VP is in the Backup mode, it transitions to Primary mode if:
1. The serial line status and partner alive status both indicate the partner is not alive.
2. The serial line status is OK, the partner is in the backup mode, and the RVP is armed.
3. The serial line status is OK, the partner has an error condition, and the RVP is armed. Error
conditions include coil problem, a severe fatal error bit ( hardware ), or an excessive derivative
of position feedback is detected.
4. The RVP is armed, the difference between the detected position feedbacks exceeds LVDT
Tracking, and one of the following combinations of conditions is true:
 The servo output is ramping, and in a direction to open the valve, the backup is moving
toward the open position, and the primary is not moving, or is moving in the opposite
direction.
 The servo output is ramping, and in a direction to close the valve, the backup is moving
toward the closed position, and the primary is not moving, or is moving in the opposite
direction.
OW350_R1150 635
9.7.10 Disarm during Backup mode - (RVP)
If the VP is in the Backup mode, it will disarm if:
The difference between the detected position feedbacks exceeds LVDT Tracking, and one of the
following combinations of conditions is true:
 The servo output is ramping, and in a direction to open the valve, the primary is moving
toward the open position, and the backup is moving toward the closed position.
 The servo output is ramping, and in a direction to close the valve, the primary is moving
toward the closed position, and the backup is moving in the opposite direction.
9.7.11 LVDT and coil setup requirements - (RVP)
The following items must be set up before operating redundant Ovation Valve Positioner modules:
LVDT setup requirements for a redundant subsystem:

 First, the linear range of the LVDT must exceed the mechanical range. This means that when
the valve is at either endpoint, one of the secondary voltages is at its minimum. The
secondary voltage must be large enough at the endpoint so that if a wire breaks and the
secondary voltage goes to zero, the change of voltage is large enough to be readily detected.
A good guideline is to ensure that each secondary always contributes at least 10%, positive
or negative, to the demodulated voltage. That is,
Min (|A|, |B|) / (|A| + |B|) > 10%
This minimum secondary value is expressed in percentage, is tunable, and is called

MIN2NDRY.
 Second, the LVDTs must be calibrated prior to being placed into redundant service, and for all
possible positions, the feedback signal of the Primary should be near the feedback signal of
the backup. This value is called LVDTTRACKING, and its default value is 1%.
Coil Setup Requirements
Coil diagnostics rely on a steady voltage across the coil. This voltage will be present if you adjust
the servo valve per the Emerson recommendation.
The servo valve has a mechanical bias set-screw that pushes the spool to one side, allowing fluid
to escape the actuator and slowly close the valve in the absence of electrical excitation.
In the standard setup approximately 200 mV across both coils opposes the mechanical bias
adjustment and holds the spool in the center position, trapping the fluid in the actuator, and
holding the valve in a fixed position.
Adjusting coil current changes spool position so that fluid can flow into or escape from the
actuator. (Technically, the operation of the servo valve is dependent on current through the coil
and the mechanical bias adjustment. However, the VP is set up to measure voltage across the
coil and at the amplifier output, so voltage measurements are typically referenced in this
description.)
636 OW350_R1150
9.7.12 Modes - (RVP)
Rapid or erratic valve movement can damage the turbine. The Valve Positioner enforces a set of
rules to accomplish bumpless transfer between modes. The description of each mode includes
mode transfer.
Start mode - (RVP)
When the Valve Positioner starts or is restarted, its primary objective is to avoid an indeterminate
output that would result in valve movement, and possible damage to the valve or turbine. There
are a number of hardware and software features that prevent an indeterminate output.
The hardware is designed so that when the Valve Positioner starts, the power supply to the servo
mechanical bias adjustment, the assumed state prior to power-up. In addition, the coil drive D/A
As part of the micro-controller‟s start sequence, the power supply is turned on, and then a pattern
under software control, no current flows between the Valve Positioner and the servo valve, and no
valve movement has occurred.
The Valve Positioner does not remain in Start mode unless a diagnostic error is detected. The
Valve Positioner transitions from Start to Local mode if all of the following functions execute and
return “normal” or “ok” status codes:
 Check PE pin. Go to Factory Test Mode, if required.
 D/A converter readback diagnostic.
The Valve Positioner sets target valve demand equal to demand feedback before transferring to
Local mode.
Control mode - (RVP)
In normal, local, and calibrate modes, the Valve Positioner is always controlling valve position.
The PI routine runs unconditionally every 10 msec. Typically, it executes the PI equation as
described below. The PI routine has some conditionally executed parts to handle seating and
back-seating.
OW350_R1150 637
SLIM Modes - (RVP)
The SLIM has four modes:

 Local
 Auto
 Cascade
 Manual
Only two of the four (local and auto) correspond to Valve Positioner modes. Local mode
corresponds to Valve Positioner local-manual mode. However, the operator does not request
“local‟ mode.” It is only entered when the Controller stops or fails to update the Valve Positioner
card.
SLIM auto mode corresponds to Valve Positioner normal mode. In this mode, the Controller is
writing its desired position to the Valve Positioner. In normal mode, the valves‟ position and set
point can be viewed on the SLIM, but the SLIM has no control over the Valve Positioner.
These modes should not be confused with auto and manual modes of software loops within the
Controller. Remember that the Valve Positioner is always in normal mode, receiving its position
from the Controller, unless the Controller fails, in which case the Valve Positioner switches to
local mode.
When raise and lower on the SLIM are pressed, all Valve Positioners respond to the key action.
This means that all valves move together as a group. It also suggests that no other devices (Loop
Interfaces) should be connected on the serial bus with a group of Valve Positioners.
In abnormal situations, such as during maintenance, some valves may be in normal mode, and
some may be in local mode. In this situation the valve in local mode responds to raise/lower
action, but the valves in normal mode do not. The Controller application warns or notifies the
operator of the mode of each valve.
Since the SLIM is connected to a group of Valve Positioners, each Valve Positioner must control
its own transmit enable. Each SLIM enables its transmitter when placing a response into the
transmit buffer. It also starts a 25 mSec timer, which, when expired, disables the transmitter.
SLIM Pushbuttons - (RVP)
The SLIM operation differs from normal operation when connected to the Ovation Loop Interface.
A standard SLIM (see page 603) is used to control a group of valves on a common serial bus.
The actions that occur when a SLIM push-button is used are described in the following table.
SLIM Pushbutton Actions
BUTTON DESCRIPTION
Loop The next Valve Positioner on the serial bus is selected. Set point and target
position display on the vertical bar-graphs.
Display Display cycles the top left hex display from target position, actual position,
and servo voltage output.
638 OW350_R1150
BUTTON DESCRIPTION
Up Up increases target valve position for the valve group. Only the valves in local
mode respond to the Up button.
Down Down decreases target valve position for the valve group. Only the valves in
local mode respond to the Down button.
Manual, Auto, Cascade, Not used.
Mode, Left, Right
The SLIM indicators and LEDs provide information about the operation of the Valve Positioner.
SLIM Indicators and LEDs
INDICATOR DESCRIPTION
PV Bar-graph Indicates actual valve position
SP Bar-graph Indicates target valve position of the selected valve

Output Bar-graph The horizontal output bar-graph on the bottom of the SLIM indicates servo
output voltage ranging from -10 volts to +10 volts, mapped to 0 to 100%
available on the bar-graph. For a stable valve in a controlled position,
approximately 50% (+/- mechanical bias adjustment) would be indicated.
Top Left digits Indicators for set point, actual, or output voltage.
Top Right digits Indicate engineering units of the value being displayed.
LEDs: In local manual mode, C (control) is indicated. In normal mode, M is indicated
(monitor). The operator does not have any control over the „M‟ „C‟ or „T‟
M, C, and T function.
LEDs: Not used.
Casc and Man
Auto LED Illuminated if the valve is in normal mode.
Loc LED Illuminated if the valve is in local mode.
OW350_R1150 639
Local-Manual mode - (RVP)
The purpose of local-manual mode is:

 Maintain stable valve position when the Controller fails or is reset.
 Smooth operation using manual raise/lower function.
 Bumpless transfer to normal mode. (Tracking by the Controller is required, and is enforced by
the Valve Positioner in local-manual mode.)
In local-manual mode, the Valve Positioner controls the valve using a set point that is only
changed through the SLIM interface, or through the local serial interface.
Local-manual mode will be entered from normal mode if the Controller fails or stops updating the
Valve Positioner card. When the Valve Positioner is powered up, local-manual mode is always
entered as long as there are no diagnostic failures.
The preferred mode of Valve Positioner operation is normal mode. The Valve Positioner transfers
from local-manual to normal if the following conditions are met: (1) Controller is updating the set
point, thus keeping the watchdog timer from expiring. (2) Controller is tracking.
In local-manual mode, the following functions are performed:

 PI position control loop.
 Writes current valve position to Ovation memory.
 Writes coil voltages to Ovation memory.
 Open coil diagnostic.
 Shorted coil diagnostic.
 EPROM checksum diagnostic.
 RAM diagnostic.
 Watchdog timing.
 SLIM interface (Raise, Lower, and update SLIM values.)
 Valve contingency diagnostic.
Normal mode - (RVP)
Normal is the preferred mode of the Valve Positioner card. In normal mode, the Valve Positioner
is receiving a position set point from the Controller and controlling valve position.
In normal mode, the following functions are performed:

 PI position control loop (Demand position comes from the Controller via the Ovation memory).
 Writes current valve position to Ovation I/O memory.
 Writes coil voltages to Ovation I/O memory.
 RAM diagnostic.
 SLIM interface (Updates SLIM values, no raise/lower function.)
640 OW350_R1150
Calibrate mode - (RVP)
Calibrate mode is a sub-mode of local-manual mode. Calibration sequences are commanded

through the local serial port.
The Valve Positioner is commanded to calibrate when the appropriate bit in the command word is
set. This causes the Valve Positioner to enter the calibrate mode and begin its travel sequence.
During the travel sequence, the Valve Positioner reports a position feedback calculated using the
most recent calibration numbers. The controlling MASTATION enters manual mode and track the
position demand feedback. The Valve Positioner moves the valve at a programmable rate during
the travel sequence.
The Valve Positioner can exit calibrate mode without enforcing a bumpless transfer rule.

 Zero Hot Cal
 Top Hot Cal
 Null-Point Cal
This calibration sequence causes the valve to travel to the electrical null point of the LVDT.
Null point calibration can be requested at the same time as full calibration, in which case the
movement sequence is the full calibration sequence. However, the valve stops at the null
point when it is encountered.
 Full Calibration
feedback gain.
When full calibration is requested the module enters local mode, requiring the Controller to
track. The module then moves the valve to the 0% position. The firmware checks for position
feedback between the arbitrary limits of –9.7 volts and –7.8 volts. If the voltage is less (more
negative) than –9.7 volts, the firmware reduces gain to make the voltage more positive than –
9.7. If the voltage is more positive than –7.8 volts, the gain is increased until the voltage is
more negative than -7.8 volts. During this sequence the gain is tested to ensure it does not go
out of allowable range.
At this point in the sequence, the demodulator gain has been set to a value that is a Maximum
allowable value. The gain may be reduced at the other end of the stroke, but will not be
increased.
Now the valve moves to the 100% position. The feedback voltage is examined, and if it
exceeds 9.7 volts, feedback gain is reduced. Once feedback voltage is less than +9.7 volts, it
is recorded as the 100% calibration value.
The valve moves back to 0% and the voltage at 0% is recorded. Feedback gain is not
adjusted.
The last step is to write 0% position, 100% position, and feedback gain to the EE memory.
OW350_R1150 641
Once the data is recorded in EE memory, the firmware clears a restriction flag, allowing the
module to transfer from local mode back to normal mode.
9.7.13 Memory map - (RVP)
The following table describes the Controller registers for the Valve Positioner module, and also
defines the I/O Channel Number that must be selected in the Point Builder Hardware tab (shown
below) when configuring points associated with this module (See the Ovation Init and Admin
Tools User Guide or Ovation Developer Studio User Guide.)
Figure 177: Point Builder Hardware Tab
Use the information in the following table to determine how to scan the card and retrieve card
status bits. Status bits will influence your control strategy.
Operating Mode Memory Map
V. P. CARD I/O CHANNE L NUMBE R R/W DEFINITION

REGISTER IN THE POINT BUILDER
0 N/A N/A Indirect ram pointer (Output FIFO Put Pointer).

1 N/A N/A Indirect ram data register.
2 4 R Position feedback (-1560 to 32760 equals -5.0 to
105%).
3 5 R Coil voltage 1 (traditionally called S1).
4 6, 13 R, W Coil voltage 2 (traditionally called S2) (non-redundant
configuration only).
642 OW350_R1150

5 7 R Coil voltage 3 (non-redundant configuration only).

6 8 R Raw demodulator voltage.
7 N/A R Status Word 2
8 9 R Status Word 1
Bits 0 - 3; modes
0000 - not used
0001 - PE mode
0010 - start mode
0011 - test mode
0100 through 0111 - not used
1000 through 1011 - local modes
1000 - local mode
1001 - calibrating in local - seated
1010 - calibrating in local - backseated
1011 - calibrating in local
1100 through 1111 - normal modes
1100 - normal mode
1101 - calibrating in normal - seated
1110 - calibrating in normal - backseated
1111 - calibrating in normal mode
1 Bit 4: Shutdown input status, 0 = inactive, 1 =
2 activated.
3 Bit 5: Auxiliary voltage sense.
Bit 6: SLIM-ON signal.
Bit 7: VP alive flag. The VP toggles this bit to indicate
that it is running.
Bit 8: At null point.
Bits 9 - 14: for redundant configuration
Bit 9: Quality- Used by redundant VP configuration. If
Bit 9 of the command register is set, the RVP will
extinguish field-card power and enter a continuous
reset loop.
Bit 10: Primary/Backup status for redundancy:
0 = Primary
1 = Backup
If Bit 10 of the command register is set the RVP will
operate as primary. In this condition the
primary/backup negotiation between the primary and
backup is not executed.
Bit 11: LVDT Trouble - LVDT problem indicator for
redundant configuration. Held True for five seconds. If
Bit 11 of the command register is set the RVP will
operate as backup. In this condition the
primary/backup negotiation between the primary and
backup is not executed.
Bit 12: RVP disarmed.
Bit 13: Data Validation Error - The position demand
over the Ovation and redundancy link do not match.
Bit 14: Mode mismatch - In a redundant pair, one VP
is in Normal mode and the other VP is in Local mode.
Bit 15: poor quality calibration.
OW350_R1150 643

9 10 R Demand feedback (-1560 to 32760 equals -5.0 to

105%)
= (Position feedback - bfpB / bfpM) (bfpM and bfpB
are described below)
For non-boiler feed pump applications, bfpM = 1.0 and
bfpB = 0.0, therefore “Demand feedback” and “Position
feedback” are exactly equal.
A 11 W Command Register
Bits 1 - 2: calibration requests
000 = no request
001 = zero hot cal request
010 = top hot cal
011 = full calibration
100 = go to null point
101 = invalid
110 = invalid
111 = full calibration and stop at null point.
Bit 3: Not used.
Bit 4: Partner Quality (redundant VP configuration)
0=OK, 1=BAD.
Bit 5: Partner Alive Bit (redundant VP configuration)
from register 8, bit 7 or Partner VP.
Bit 6: Redundant VP‟s Partner‟s Primary/Backup
Status.
The Controller copies Bit 10 from the partner‟s status
register 1 to inform the VP that the partner is a
Primary or Backup drop.
Bit 7: Not used.
Bit 8: Arm RVP. When this bit is set, the backup RVP
is
re-armed and can take over control if the primary fails.
When a backup RVP is disarmed, it does not take
over control for certain types of failures.
Bits 9: If set, the RVP will extinguish field-card power
and enter a continuous reset loop.
Bit 10: If set the RVP will operate as primary. In this
condition the primary/backup negotiation between the
primary and backup is not executed.
Bit 11: If set the RVP will operate as backup. In this
condition the primary/backup negotiation between the
primary and backup is not executed.
B 12 W Demand (-1560 to 32760 equals -5.0 to 105.0%).
C Point Status Register.
D R/W Module Configuration Status Register (see page 672).
E R Secondary module Configuration Status Register.
F Electronic ID.
644 OW350_R1150
Controller Primary/Backup Status Override - (RVP)
If Bit 9 of the command register is set, the ERVP will extinguish field-card power and enter a
continuous reset loop.
If Bit 10 of the command register is set, the ERVP will operate as primary. In this condition, the
primary/backup negotiation between the primary and backup is not executed.
If Bit 11 of the command register is set, the ERVP will operate as backup. In this condition, the
primary/backup negotiation between the primary and backup is not executed.
The following is a control sheet showing how the bits are manually set/cleared during firmware
testing.
Figure 178: Sample control sheet showing how the bits are manually set/cleared during
firmware testing
OW350_R1150 645
9.7.14 Configuration parameters - (RVP)
The following commands are used to set the values of important tuning constants. The format of
each command is indicated and must be followed. The values shown for each command are
default values.
Configuration commands
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
piGain = 10.0 PI Controller gain outside of deadband. This value is the higher of two gain values
used in the position PI loop. This value is used when the valve is moving. When the
valve is in a stable position, a lower value is used to avoid noise-induced control
action.
piResetT = 1000 PI Controller reset time outside of deadband. Used in PI equation along with the gain
value described previously. This value is one of two used in the PI equation. This one
is used when the valve is in motion, and causes faster wind-up. It is given in
milliseconds.
piGainDb = 1.0 PI Controller gain inside of deadband. When the valve is in a steady position, the PI
gain is reduced to this value. This helps avoid noise-induced control action.
piResetTDb = PI Controller reset time inside of deadband. This is one of two values used, and
10000 causes slower control action. It is given in units of milliseconds.
demodGain = 2048 The LVDT secondary feedback sum is multiplied by this value to achieve a voltage
range representing 0 to 100% position that is close to the input range of the A/D
converter. The value is printed as a raw decimal value. The hexadecimal equivalent is
written to the feedback D/A converter to adjust feedback gain. This value can be
entered by the customer, but it is also modified automatically during the full calibration
sequence. Feedback gain can be calculated by the following formula:
gain = 4096 / D/A converter input word (decimal value)
Examples of some gain values are as follows:
DAC word Decimal value Gain
0 0 1
Infinity
1 1 4096
. . .
8 8 512
. . .
100H 256 16
. . .
800H 2048 2
. . .
FFH 4095 1.00024
1
Feedback gain D/A converter output saturates.
errorDbF = 0.5 When the absolute value of the difference between target position and actual position
is greater that this value, the valve is considered to be in motion. Gain and reset
values are selected to cause rapid control action. When the difference is less than
this value, control action is softened.
646 OW350_R1150
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
errorDbS = 0.05 When the absolute value of the difference between target position and actual position
is less than this value, the valve is considered to be stable. Gain and reset values are
selected to soften control action. When the difference is greater than this value, gain
is increased to yield sharper control.
seatLimit = 0.0 When target valve position is equal to or less than this value, seating action controls
the output.
backSeatLimit = When the target valve position is equal to or greater than this value, backseating
100.0 action controls the output.
contingency = 5.0 If the absolute value of the difference between Valve Positioner target position and
actual position is greater than this value, then a contingency condition may exist. The
condition must exist until a timer expires for it to be reported. The timer is described
below.
A situation could arise where the Valve Positioner target position and the Controllers‟
target are not equal. One example would be if the shutdown input was true, the Valve
Positioner set the target position to 0, but the Controller did not track. In this situation
contingency would not be reported if the valve went to 0% position.
contingencyTime = If the error between target position and actual position exceeds contingency for this
10000 amount of time, then the condition is reported to the Controller. This number is given
in milliseconds.
manualRate = 300 This value selects the magnitude of adjustment when target position is controlled by
the SLIM. This value is given in percent per minute.
bfpM = 1.0 Gain in the equation y = bfpM * x + bfpB
where: y = actual demand; x = demand written by the Controller
The purpose of this is to create staggered valve operation in the boiler feed-pump
application. This value is normally set to 1.0.
bfpB = 0.0 Zero intercept in the equation y = bfpM * x + bfpB
where: y = actual demand; x = demand written by the Controller
The purpose of this is to create staggered valve operation in the boiler feed-pump
application. This value is normally set to 0.0.
SlimAddr = 0 Each device on the SLIM serial bus has an address. This provides a method for the
SLIM to talk individually to each card.
The SLIM serial port is used for redundancy serial communications. Setting the
address to zero (0) disables SLIM transmit/receive code.
calhndrd = 31200 This value is displayed in decimal. It is the converted hexadecimal A/D converter
reading for the 100% position. It can be entered by the customer; however, it is
normally determined automatically by the calibration sequence.
calzero = -31200 This value is displayed in decimal. It is the converted hexadecimal A/D converter
reading for the 0% position. It can be entered by the customer; however, it is normally
calrateF = 200 This value is given in percent per minute and is the movement rate used when
calibrating from the laptop computer via the serial port. It is typically the Faster rate.
Calibration rates are given in target-demand-counts per 200 mSec loop time of the
calibration procedure. Some example settings are:
200 3.2 % per second, about 30 seconds for full stroke. Since the calibration
procedure strokes the valve twice, the entire process will take a minute.
100 1.6 % per second
500 8 % per second
The calibration process adjusts target demand when the valve is uncalibrated. The
actual time will vary depending on the accuracy of whatever leftover value constants
are presently recorded for the calibration.
OW350_R1150 647
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
calrateS = 40 This value is given in percent per minute and is the movement rate used when
calibrating via a command from the Ovation I/O interface. It is typically the Slower
rate.
Note: When the raise/lower button is pressed, the Valve Positioner responds to the
keystroke if the address is 1 through 8 inclusive. This means that all valves will move
together.
posErrDelta = 5.0 A tunable parameter which sets a limit for the difference between target and actual
position. When the difference is greater than this limit, POSITION ERROR FLAG is
set TRUE; otherwise it is FALSE. This variable is similar to contingency except that
it is devoted to the redundant calculations.
posErrDelta is a contingency deadband but is used only by the redundancy
calculation. If the primary and backup VPs differ by this amount for a time period
exceeding coilDiagTime, a “last resort” decision is made to fail over.
To disable failover based on the comparison of two feedbacks only, set posErrDelta
as follows: posErrDelta = 99
Maxdelta = 5.0 A tunable parameter which sets a limit for the difference between position feedback
and previous position feedback. The default value is 5%. Expressing the value as a
derivative would yield 5% per 10 msec (= looptime) or 500% per second. This value
is intended to represent the Maximum rate of movement of the valve. This value has
a function similar to MIN2NDRY. It is assumed that MAXDELTA will always be the
smaller of the two.
The purpose of this parameter is to establish a Maximum rate of motion under normal
control. If the derivative of position feedback exceeds this value for 10 scans in a row
(100 msec ) the motion is deemed excessive and a failover occurs. This parameter
should be greater than the most rapid motion as designated by controller ramp rates.
The same restrictions for trip and fast-acting hydraulics apply to this parameter.
Failover action due to this tuning constant can be disabled as follows: Maxdelta = 99
min2ndry = 10.0 The primary VP calculates the derivative of position feedback and if it exceeds this
value from 1 scan to the next ( 10 msec ), the VP determines the signal is faulty and
this may initiate a failover in a redundant pair.
Please also refer to the LVDT setup requirements for additional explanation of this
tuning constant.
Redundant VP failover due to high derivative can be disable by setting to a large
value as follows: min2ndry = 99
lvdtTrack = 1.5 lvdtTrack is the Maximum difference between LVDT readings in a redundant
configuration. This value informs the redundant VP pair when NOT to decide to
initiate a failover. When there are two position feedback readings that agree, it is
assumed that the reported position feedback is correct.
RDNDNT If RDNDNT = 0, the VP is a standalone module
If RDNDNT = 1, the VP is a redundant module
This is the MOST important constant and MUST be set prior to inserting the VP into
its mounting slot. If the VP is installed without this constant being set, and the unit is
on line, the results are unpredictable.
In some cases, such as when a VP module is being replaced by another VP from
stock, the VP should be placed into an unused slot to power it up and modify the
constant. Remember to type SC to save the constants to EEPROM memory. Setting
this constant changes the Baud Rate for COM Port 2 (SLIM port) to 25 k baud.
demand = 10.0 This command sets target value position to 10%, sets the VP made to local, and sets
a restriction bit to prevent the VP from entering Normal mode. Type “EXIT” to clear
the restriction bit.
CoilCount = 2 If CoilCount = 1, the VP is a redundant module and only coil 1 from the VP is used.
Failure to set this constant typically results in servo coil diagnostic failures, which
cause the VP to fail to its Backup.
If CoilCount = 2, coils 1 and 2 are used, and coil 3 (diagnostic) is disabled.
648 OW350_R1150
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
diagtime = 20 Timer value in 100 millisecond increments for open/shorted coil diagnostic. The value
shown here ( = 20 ) means the open or shorted condition must exist continuously for
2 seconds before the condition is reported to the controller, or is used by the
redundant RVP failover logic.
This timer also designates the time for a position error used by the redundancy
calculation. The position error deadband is set by posErrDelta and is a “last resort”
decision in the failover scheme.
diags Displays status information in hexadecimal format. Included are the operating mode,
restrictions, signals, and Severe Fatal Errors (SFE) bits. The following message is
displayed:
mode=0xmmmm restrictions=0xrrrrrrr signals=0xssss sfe‟s=0xeeee
where mmmm = Hex value of operating mode:
0 through 0x05 are start modes
0x14 through 0x19 are local modes
0x28 through 0x2B are normal modes
0x3C through 0x3F are test modes
rrrrrrr = Restriction bit array:
Bit 0 - PROM checksum error
Bit 1 - Memory diagnostic error
Bit 2 - A/D, D/A subsystem error
Bit 3 - Contingency restriction
Bit 4 - Ovation I/O not configured
Bit 5 - Constants are mismatched
Bit 6 - Controller is not updating
Bit 7 - Controller is not tracking
Bit 8 - EEPROM checksum error
Bit 9 - Hold until oscillator is stable
Bit 10 - Serial port control (local mode) restriction
Bit 11 - Redundancy restriction
Bit 12 - Calibration restriction
Bit 13 - Priority demand restriction
Bit 28 - Partner alive flag restriction
Bit 29 - Redundant RVP position feedback error restriction
Bit 30 - Redundant RVP excessive motion restriction
Bit 31 - Redundant RVP step change restriction
ssss = Signal flags:
Bit 0 - Coil 1 diagnostic
Bit 3 - DAC diagnostic
Bit 4 - Coil 1 open
Bit 5 - Coil 1 short
Bit 6 - Coil 2 open
Bit 8 - Coil 3 open
Bit A - AD/DA error
Bit B - Contingency
Bit C - Repetitive display
Bit D - Raise pushbutton on SLIM
Bit E - Lower pushbutton on SLIM
Bit F - Repetitive diag. display
eeee = Severe fatal error bits:
Bit 0 - EEPROM checksum
Bit 1 - PROM checksum
Bit 2 - Shared memory error
OW350_R1150 649
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
Bit 3 - Processor memory error
Bit 4 - FPGA won‟t program
Bit 5 - UART readback error
Bit 6 - Processor error
Bit 7 - AD/DA error
Bit 8 - PSD memory error
Bit 9 - EE write sequence error
kServo = 20.0 kServo is a parameter, given in a percentage that models the impedance relationship
of the Personality module (PMOD) and the servo coil. For example, if you have a
PMOD with an impedance of 300 ohms, and the coil impedance is 82 ohms, then
kServo should be set to 19.9 or 82 / ( 330 + 82 ) ( group 1 personality module ). VP
diagnostic firmware uses this parameter to predict coil voltage based on amplifier
output voltage.
Wire resistance is included in servo coil resistance. You can take a direct
measurement with a standard ohm-meter by first removing the VP and the personality
module from the base unit. kServo is calculated as shown above.
kServo is more easily determined by a voltage measurement method with the VP
installed. First, remove any connection from B13 and measure the voltage. This
terminal is normally unused anyway and so it is not connected. The voltage
measurement is therefore measuring the amplifier output. The amplifier output is also
applied to the series combination of the personality module resistor and the servo
coils connected to B14 and B15. Next measure B14. Calculate kServo as follows:
kServo = V_at_B14 / V_at_B13
For our example of a group 1 personality module, and 82 ohm coil, here are the
voltages seen on the terminals. If the valve is on the seat, and seating is in effect the
voltage at B13 will be 5 volts, and the voltage at B14 will be about 1 volt. If the VP is
not set up for seating the voltage at B13 will be 10 volts and B14 will be 2 volts. If the
valve is in a controlled position off the seat, and the mechanical bias screw is
adjusted in the normal fashion, and the valve is stable, B13 will show about 1 volt,
and B14 will be about 200 mV.
Also measure B15. If B15 and B14 are not equal, then there may be a loose or
intermittent connection, in which case additional diagnosis may be required.
This parameter can be used when servo coils are wired in parallel. For this example
kServo would be set to 11.7 or 40 / (300 + 40). If one of the coils burned out, the
relationship would change to 21.0. By setting kServoDb to 5.0, an alarm would be
generated when the servo coil went open circuit.
kServoDb = 5.0 Deadband value used to calculate the allowable coil voltage range when comparing
predicted voltage to actual voltage.
650 OW350_R1150
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
priorityDemand = - For firmware revisions 0H and later, “priorityDemand” is the target position used when
5.0 the shutdown input is activated. The default value is selected so that upgraded
modules are backward compatible. You can set this value to an intermediate value in
order to create your own scheme for handling of plant upsets.
While the "priority demand input" or "Shutdown" input is active, the VP is in the local
mode and the Controller must unconditionally track demand feedback.
"priorityDemand" is only changeable thru the terminal interface.
9.7.15 LVDT setup requirements, redundant subsystem - (RVP)
First, the linear range of the LVDT must exceed the mechanical range. This means that when the
valve is at either endpoint, one of the secondary voltages is at its minimum. The secondary
voltage must be large enough at the endpoint so that if a wire breaks and the secondary voltage
goes to zero, the change of voltage is large enough to be readily detected. A good guideline is to
ensure that each secondary always contributes at least 10%, positive or negative, to the
demodulated voltage. That is,
Min ( (|A| / FBVR ), (|B| / ( FBVR ) ) > 10%
where FBVR = feedback voltage range which is equal to
|A-B|at 0% + |A-B| at 100%. For the example shown below the range
is equal to
|1.0 - 4.2| + |4.5 - 0.9| = 6.8 volts
This minimum secondary value is expressed in percentage, is tunable, and is called MIN2NDRY.
This is the minimum position feedback change that will be seen when one of the 4 secondary
wires of a 6-wire LVDT breaks.
These values are determined by direct measurement, or from an LVDT spec sheet which shows
A and B secondary voltages per linear displacement.
The table below shows an example of LVDT voltages at certain valve positions, and the effects of
a failure (broken wire) of secondary.
PERCENT A VOLTS B VOLTS A FAILS B FAILS A DELTA B DELTA

POSITION
0 1.0000 4.2000 -14.71 61.76 14.71 61.76

25 1.8750 3.3750 -2.57 74.63 27.57 49.63
50 2.7500 2.5500 9.56 87.50 40.44 37.50
75 3.6250 1.7250 21.69 100.37 53.31 25.37
100 4.5000 0.9000 33.82 113.24 66.18 13.24
OW350_R1150 651
For a six-wire LVDT, it is apparent that this evaluation only needs to be performed at the endpoint
where one of the voltages is at its minimum. All the other positions show a larger change in
position feedback that is more easily detected by the derivative calculation.
For the example above, the minimum position feedback change due to secondary failure is
13.24% (0.9 / 6.8). min2ndry could be set to 12% for example.
There are two challenges associated with making the derivative calculation work effectively. The
first is rapid motion during trip, and trip testing. If the valve moves 100% in 100 msec, then the
RVP will see 10% feedback change every 10 msec scan cycle, and will work properly for the
example above. If the valve moves 15% per 10 msec, the derivative scheme will not work and the
value of min2ndry should be set to disable the function as follows:
min2ndry = 99%
The second challenge is rapid motion under normal control, but not associated with trip function.
The previously mentioned rules also apply.
When the derivative of position feedback exceeds min2ndry, the primary RVP will initiate a
failover regardless of the reason for the high derivative or the position reported by the backup
RVP.
Second, the LVDTs must be calibrated prior to being placed into redundant service, and for all
possible positions, the feedback signal of the Primary should be near the feedback signal of the
backup. This value is called LVDTTRACKING, and its default value is 1.5%.
652 OW350_R1150
9.7.16 Seating and Backseating - (RVP)
Seating and backseating are important features of valve position control. The purpose of seating
is to ensure that the hydraulic system is forcing the valve closed and admitting no steam into the
turbine. Backseating is desirable because it can affect efficiency, and because, for certain valve
assemblies, a leakoff into other steam systems is designed, assuming the valve is fully back-
seated.
The demand position from the Controller to the Valve Positioner is designed for a range of -5% to
105% and resolution exceeding 13-Bits. Seating is in effect when the position demand is equal to
or less than a programmable value, typically 0%. When seating is in effect, the output is driven to
the Maximum possible value in the direction that closes the valve. A timer is started. After 10
seconds, the output is reduced to 50% of the Maximum value in the direction that closes the
valve. A similar limit and function is provided for backseating.
For firmware revision 0M, setting and backseating operate as follows: If the target position is
equal to or less than “seatLimit”, the output is set to the maximum value in the direction of closure
and a 60-second timer is started. Once actual valve position is less than 5% the timer is checked
and will be reduced to 10 seconds if the current value is greater than 10 seconds.
Regardless of actual valve position, and upon expiration of the timer the output is reduced to ½ of
maximium in the direction of closure.
If the target position is greater than “backSeatLimit” the output is set to the maximum value in the
direction of opening. Once the actual valve position is greater than 95% the output is reduced to
½ of maximum in the direction of opening.
The remaining description applies to firmware prior to revision 0M.
With revision 0J, the behavior of back-seating has changed, and an anti-windup feature is
implemented that affects both seating and back-seating.
With revision J and beyond, when the VP is seating or back-seating, the integral accumulation is
set to 0. The result is that when the target position returns to the normal operating range
(seatLimit < targetPosition < backSeatLimit), the output voltage is 0.0 (plus proportional
adjustment). In other words, the output voltage jumps to 0.0 and not require integration to bring
the output back to a controlling value.
In conjunction with the straight line adjustment (implemented using bfpM and bfpB) of target
position (which is the manufacturers "design" stroke of the valve rather than the "physical" stroke),
a soft landing (which ramps the valve to the end to avoid the valve slamming to the backseat limit)
is implemented for back-seating. When the target position exceeds backSeatLimit, the physical
target position is ramped to the physical 100% position. At this point, the output voltage goes to
50%. The 10 seconds timing function is not implemented.
9.7.17 PI Position Control - (RVP)
The equation for PI position control is:
1
K p
e(t )
ki
e(t )dt
OW350_R1150 653
where:
Kp = Proportional gain
KI = Integral time
e(t) = Position error
If seating or backseating is in effect, normal PI Controller calculation is halted.
9.7.18 Shutdown input (Priority Demand Input) - (RVP)
Position control is affected by a shutdown input, intended to be used in emergency or abnormal

situations. It is a standard 24 volt digital input circuit.
Typically, the Valve Positioner rapidly drives the valve to the 0% position when the shutdown
input is energized. The Valve Positioner then transfers to local-manual mode for the purpose of
requiring the Controller to track position feedback. Once the Controller tracks, the Valve
Positioner transfers back to normal mode.
The state of the shutdown input is available to the Controller via a Valve Positioner module
Ovation register.
A control bit in the shared memory can cause the Valve Positioner to ignore the shutdown input
while in normal mode. This is used when the customer prefers trip logic in the Controller, not on
the card. However, in local-manual mode, the Valve Positioner drives the valve shut when the
shutdown input is energized, regardless of the state, or previous state, of the control bit.
For VP firmware revisions 0H and later, the shutdown input is redefined to “Priority Demand
Input.” When the input is activated, the target position is set to a tunable constant. For
compatibility with previous firmware revisions, the default value of priority Demand is -5%.
This allows you to rapidly move the valve to some intermediate position during upset conditions.
You have the flexibility to create your own scheme to handle an upset.
While the “priority demand input” or “Shutdown” input is active, the VP is in the local mode and
the Controller must unconditionally track demand feedback.
9.7.19 Calibration - (RVP)
Calibration is performed by connecting a PC (running terminal emulation software) or a dumb

terminal to the Valve Positioner, then typing commands on the PC keyboard or terminal. Using a
PC is recommended because you can record/reload tuning constants to/from a disk.

 To determine the endpoints of mechanical stroke.
 To help the plant set up the LVDT for optimum performance.
 To perform the calibration quickly to avoid startup delay.
654 OW350_R1150
Calibration Ideal - (RVP)
During the calibration sequence, observe the valve to ensure it is moving, and that it is moving in
the proper direction. Also, review the calibration constants and compare them with the ideal setup
described below:
 The range of calibration values corresponds to the hexadecimal range of the AD converter,
and is presented to the user in decimal, ranging from -31768 to 31767.
 When an LVDT is properly adjusted and calibrated, the calibration constants (0% and 100%)
is equal in amplitude and opposite in sign. The amplitudes for this ideal setup would be
approximately 30,000. This result suggest the following:
 The LVDT is adjusted so that its electrical null point (where secondary A amplitude =
secondary B) matches the midpoint of the mechanical stroke.
 The programmable gain amplifier on the demodulator is adjusted so that the electrical
'stroke' stays within the input range of the AD converter. Thus, the valve positioner can
detect incremental movement for all valve positions.
 If thermal expansion occurs, the valve positioner continues to detect incremental
movement, because the calibration is not to the extreme end of the AD converter range,
and because the magnitude of thermal expansion is small.
Calibration Required - (RVP)
Calibration is required after the following:

 After a mechanical overhaul.
If the mechanical stroke remains the same after the overhaul, and the same LVDT is installed,
simply adjust the LVDT so the position feedback on the Ovation system indicates 0% (with
the valve fully closed), then tighten down the LVDT assembly (that is, return to its former
position).
 After the LVDT is changed.
Calibration is required to find the null point and proper demodulator gain adjustment.
However, if it is the same model, you can save time by entering the same constants before
running the calibration sequence.
 If a secondary wire pair is swapped.
The valve positioner is not affected because the demodulator is a diode rectifying type. Also,
the secondary pairs (A and B), can be swapped. The result is a change in sign of the
calibration values. Arithmetic in valve positioner firmware yields the correct result. However,
you should follow the recommended connection that yields negative values at 0% and
positive values at 100%, and avoid confusion.
OW350_R1150 655
Using the Serial Port for Calibration Settings - (RVP)
The local serial port is used in the field to calibrate and diagnose Valve Positioner problems. It is
used in the factory to cause the Valve Positioner to perform necessary testing prior to shipment.
This interface is implemented using the external UART.
The settings of the local serial port are:

 Baud rate = 19200
 Bits = 8 bits
 Stop Bits = One stop bit
 Parity = No parity
Status messages are printed during calibration sequences, such as:
Calibrate - Go to 100%
OR
Calibrate - Reduce feedback gain
CAUTION: The EE memory can be corrupted if constants are modified during the calibration
sequence. This occurs because the checksum is recalibrated based only on new values for
0%, 100%, and feedback gain, not on the entire EE memory image.
Using the Serial Port for Calibration Connections - (RVP)
The Personality module RS-232 connector is used to connect the Valve Positioner module to the
COM1 or COM2 serial port of a personal computer. Use cable 5A26448 or make a cable using
the information in the following table:
RS-232 Connector (J2) Pin Assignments
1 Not used Not used

2 Not used Not used
3 TXD2/ (Transmit Data) Output
4 Not used Not used
5 RXD2/ (Receive Data) Input
6 1 Not used
GND (Logic Common)
7 Not used Not used
8 Not used Not used
656 OW350_R1150
To perform the calibration procedure using the serial port - (RVP)

1. Use a standard cable to make the connection (see page 656) between the PC (or dumb
terminal) and the Valve Positioner.
2. Configure the serial port on the PC as described in “Settings.”
3. To run a calibration sequence, perform the following:
a) Connect the serial cable between the COM port and the user port on the Valve
Positioner.
b) Start the terminal emulation software.
c) Ensure the settings are correct.
d) Type HELP<return> (See the following table).
Note the following:
 Commands are case sensitive.
 Syntax is strict.
 There is no line buffering.
 Backspace invalidates any typed command.
4. Type CALFULL<return> to run the full calibration sequence.
5. If any constants are entered manually, type SC<return> to save the new constants to the
EEPROM.
6. Use the command CALFULL after an overhaul, to fully calibrate the valve.
7. Use the command CALBOT just prior to startup, to reestablish the 0% calibration value if
thermal expansion is detected.
Calibration Commands
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
DC<return> Dump configuration constants from EEPROM.

SC<return> Save configuration constants to EEPROM.
DG<return> Display group 1 data - This function repeatedly displays important operating
parameters such as demand, feedback, gain, and so forth.
HELP<return> Print command list.
EXIT<return> Exits test mode, raise/lower function, or calibration sequence. Causes a soft reset of
the valve positioner.
OW350_R1150 657
Performing calibration using a graphic - (RVP)
Calibration can be performed by using the Valve Positioner Upload/Download/Calibrate graphic

(diagram 8719) to view and modify the VP tuning constants. All the constants can be modified.
The 0% and 100% calibration values, and demodulator gain, can be determined by the calibration
sequence, and can be adjusted by the user with this graphic.
The graphic has upload/download buttons so that the two sets of numbers can be synchronized
(made the same). Synchronization is initiated by the user and must also maintain responsible for
it. In addition to the constants, there are four fields that provide operator feedback.
The constants exist in two places:

 EE memory on the Valve Positioner module.
 In the VPSTATUS algorithm record (typically, the constants contained in the algorithm record
are considered as the master set).
If a VP module fails and is replaced, you simply download the constants to the new VP and it is
ready to operate. The constants are not automatically copied to the algorithm record upon
completion of a calibration sequence.
Note: Each constant shown on the graphic can also be entered through a serial port interface.
Calibration goals - (RVP)
 To determine the endpoints of mechanical stroke.

 To help the plant set up the LVDT for optimum performance.
 To perform the calibration quickly to avoid startup delay.
To perform calibration using a graphic - (RVP)

1. Access a turbine valve graphic. The turbine valve graphic shows a list of all the turbine
valves.
2. Click on the desired valve symbol to display the VP calibration graphic and show the
constants associated with that particular VP and valve. This graphic is provided with the
project graphics. Customizing of the turbine valve graphic and VP calibration graphic is not in
the scope of this document.
3. Perform the desired calibrations. All the calibration procedures cause the VP to enter local
mode. While the VP is calibrating in local mode, VP firmware adjusts target demand
accordingly. The Controller unconditionally tracks the VP when it is in local mode.
658 OW350_R1150
4. Refer to the following table for descriptions of the graphic fields.
Figure 179: VP Upload/Download/Calibrate Graphic
Calibration Graphic Fields
FIELD DESCRIPTION
CALIBRATE Buttons
0% Executes the CALZERO procedure. Demodulator gain is not adjusted during this
procedure. When this procedure completes, upload the calibration data to the algorithm.
100% Executes the CAL100 procedure. Demodulator gain is not adjusted during this procedure.
When this procedure completes, upload the calibration data to the algorithm.
FULL Executes the CALFULL procedure. Demodulator gain is adjusted during this procedure.
When the procedure completes, upload the calibration data to the algorithm.
GO TO NULL Executes the GO TO NULL POINT procedure. During this procedure, the VP enters local
POINT mode and trims target position until position feedback voltage equals 0. Select the
CANCEL button to exit this mode.
CANCEL This button exits calibration.
OW350_R1150 659
FIELD DESCRIPTION
UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD Buttons
(Upload and download are never executed automatically.)
UPLOAD Copies the data set contained in VP memory to the algorithm record in the workstation.
DOWNLOAD Copies the data set contained in the algorithm record to the VP and is written onto the VP‟s
EE memory. Some limit-checking is performed prior to the download.
ENTRY FIELDS Buttons
FILL Fills all the text editing windows with the values in the algorithm record.
CLEAR Clears all the values from the text editing windows.
Operator Feedback Fields
Algorithm Information field located on the top right of the graphic.

Record Name
Voltage Located below the algorithm name. The voltage shown is the voltage at the output of the
programmable gain stage. If the VP is properly calibrated and nulled, the electrical „stroke‟
occupies most of the +-10 volt range of the AD converter input, thus giving good resolution.
This field shows activity as the valve is traveling during calibration, and as the demodulator
gain is adjusted at the endpoint.
Mode (MA) Located to the left of the Voltage field. VP firmware is designed to stay in „normal‟ mode,
and if it is not in „normal‟ mode, to establish communications with the Controller and then
enter the „normal‟ mode. In „normal‟ mode, the VP receives its target position from the
Controller.
The MA algorithm that drives the VP target position may be in AUTO, MANUAL, or LOCAL
mode. When the VP is in „normal‟ mode, it is not aware of the MA mode. It receives target
position from the Controller in MA AUTO and MANUAL. The field usually shows AUTO
unless there is an error condition or the VP enters local mode due to a calibration
sequence.
During calibration, the VP enters local mode, which corresponds to MA local mode. The
MA unconditionally tracks the VP until the calibration sequence completes.
When the operator selects a calibration sequence, the mode is shown as local. The voltage
changes as the valve is moving. When the valve is at the endpoint and the demodulator
gain is adjusting, the voltage changes as the gain is adjusted. A calibration complete
message displays at the bottom field. In some cases in a full calibration, the results may
yield poor values. A message displays telling the operator to repeat the calibration.
Valve Located to the left of the Mode field. Usually a text string that identifies the valve that is to
Identification be calibrated (name is provided by the turbine valve graphic).
Text Messages Located under the table of values. This field displays messages about the progress of the
calibration. For example, “calibration in progress” or “calibration complete.”
To simplify diagnostics - (RVP)
Rolled servo wires can cause the valve to move in the opposite direction. Be sure to observe and
verify the correct movement of the valve. If only one pair is rolled, then the two pairs compete with
each other. Use the following procedure to simplify diagnosis:
1. Disconnect one pair of wires.

660 OW350_R1150
3. Reconnect the first pair of wires.

4. Disconnect the other pair of wires.
6. Reconnect all the servo wires.
On-Board Diagnostics - (RVP)
The mechanical bias adjustment of the servo valve can affect the results of on-board diagnostics.
A set-screw on the servo valve causes a deflection from center position of the servo valve spool.
This allows hydraulic fluid to escape the actuator, and the valve to close at a controlled rate, in the
absence of an electrical signal.
For a typical connection, a small negative voltage on the servo valve is required to center the
spool, and hold the valve in a steady position. This voltage is typically from -100 to -300 mV.
Servo valves are delivered from the factory with this adjustment. Onboard diagnostics assume
that the servo valve is configures in this way. If another configuration is used, program the
Ovation Controller to ignore the results of diagnostic bits.
WARNING - Notes for GE 4-wire and 5-wire single LVDT connections - (RVP)
WARNING! The VP can detect position if only a single LVDT feedback signal is connected.
The inputs of the unused VDT input should be grounded to avoid picking up noise.
If LVDT A is connected, the 0% and 100% calibration constants will both be positive. If B is
used, both constants are negative.
GE style 4-wire and 5-wire LVDTs with one feedback can be connected so that 0% position is the
high amplitude voltage (absolute value) and 100% is the low amplitude voltage. This is the
desired connection since, in the event of a failure or broken wire, the VP sees a low voltage,
assumes the valve went open, and responds by closing the valve.
An alternate connection can be implemented where 0% corresponds to the low amplitude voltage,
and 100% corresponds to high amplitude. There are two problems with this configuration.
1. Upon failure and loss of signal, the VP attempts to open the valve to the target position
because the valve appeared to close inappropriately.
2. During calibration the sequence starts at 0%, where the demodulator gain is raised until the
feedback reaches the limit of the AD converter. The result is a very high gain because the
voltage at 0% is so low. Then, when the valve is moved to 100%, the voltage into the AD
converter is out of range, and the degree to which it is out of range is not detectable. The
sequence takes a very long time to reduce the gain until the signal is usable, and the
customer is required to wait.
For a single LVDT configuration, you should complete the configuration, calibration, and then do
the following test:
1. Set the valve position to an intermediate position, say 20%.

2. Disconnect the oscillator wire.
3. The valve then closes.
OW350_R1150 661
Performing Redundant VP calibration - (RVP)
VPs in a redundant subsystem can be calibrated as a pair or independently. The same

commands are used to perform either calibration.
If you want to calibrate the VPs independently, the easiest method is to pull one of the VPs out of
the mounting unit. In this case, calibration is the same as for a non-redundant VP. When a VP is
calibrated and the Backup is not in service, and the RDNDNT flag is set, a warning message is
printed to inform the operator that only one VP of the pair is being calibrated.
In any case, only the Primary VP or a pair can be calibrated. If you attempt to calibrate with the
terminal connected to the Backup VP, the VP prints a message stating that the request is refused.
If you request a calibration of the Primary VP, and the Backup VP is also in service, the Backup is
calibrated unconditionally. During calibration, the Primary disables the redundancy software state
machine so failovers are eliminated.
The message packet exchange between the Primary and Backup VPs includes command/status
bits related to calibration. The following table lists those commands and descriptions.
Redundant Calibration Commands
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
RRVP_CAL_REC_TOP Primary VP is commanding the Backup VP to record the 100% endpoint

value.
RRVP_CAL_REC_BOT Primary VP is commanding the Backup VP to record the 0% endpoint value.
RRVP_CAL_IN_ Primary VP is informing the Backup VP that a calibration is in progress.

PROGRESS
RRVP_CAL_BACKUP_ Backup VP is performing a gain adjustment or is measuring the endpoint
HOLD and is informing the Primary VP to wait for the process to be completed.
RRVP_CAL_WRITE_EE Primary VP is commanding the Backup VP to commit the new calibration
data to EEPROM memory at the end of the calibration process.
RRVP_CAL_HOT Primary VP is informing the Backup VP that the calibration process is a “hot”
calibration. A “hot” calibration is performed at only one end of the
mechanical stroke. The important implication is that demodulator gain
adjustment is not allowed during “hot” calibrations.
662 OW350_R1150
9.7.20 Terminal block wiring information - (RVP)
information.
Figure 180: Terminal Block Connections for the Valve Positioner Personality Module
1. Do not use unmarked terminal block locations. Blank base unit termination block terminal
locations must not have external connections.
2. If the SLIM communications cable assembly is terminated to the base unit termination block,
a wire jumper must be installed between terminal A2 (COM) and A3 (ATT). The SLIM
communications cable assembly shield should be connected to terminal A1 (Shd).
3. If the SLIM interface is to have a line receiver parallel termination resistor, a wire jumper must
be installed between terminals C2 (RX+) and C3 (RES). This jumper is added if either the
base unit termination block or the personality module SLIM female DB9 connector is used to
interface the SLIM communications cable assembly.
4. All of the field interface signals must use twisted-pair copper wire conductors inside a
shielded cable assembly. The cable assembly shield must be tied to earth ground via one or
more of the Earth terminals.
5. In CE Mark systems, SLIM cable 5A26429 MUST be used and grounded at the entry point of
the cabinet using the recommended hardware.
6. C3+ and C3- coil drive outputs are not available for Group 4 Personality modules.
7. Terminals VP+ and VP- are intended to provide a test point voltage that is to be measured by
a high input impedance volt meter. If an external device is to be permanently connected to the
VP+ and VP- terminals, an interposing buffer is required within the cabinet that houses the VP
module. The buffer must have an input impedance greater than 100k ohms and must be able
to accommodate an input span of +/- 10 volts.
8. Module analog outputs (LVDT Primary Winding Excitation and servo-valve coil drive outputs)
should have their isolated power supply common grounded. Add a base unit terminal block
jumper between terminals C16 (isolated analog power supply common) and C17 (cabinet
earth ground).
OW350_R1150 663
Note: C16/C17 is the recommended Earth GND to Signal GND connection.
Oscillator signal coupling may occur in redundant RVP pairs where all signaling is placed in the
same multi-conductor cable, or is in close proximity.
(For mechanical redundancy, putting all LVDT and coil signal pairs in the same cable is not
recommended.)
This coupling can be eliminated by shorting Earth ground to field board reference (Signal
ground) by connecting C16 to C17.
A 3A41491H49 jumper can be used to make this connection. If this jumper is unavailable a short
piece of 18 to 22 gauge wire can be substituted to make this connection.
Abbreviations used for Wiring Diagrams
N
Earth ground terminals used to connect to input signal‟s shield.
Isolated circuit common ground.
ATT SLIM cable attached input, may have to be connected to COM.

AC+, AC- LVDT primary winding AC excitation output.
C1+, C1- Servo valve actuator coil #1 voltage output.
C2+, C2- Servo valve actuator coil #2 voltage output.
C3+, C3- Servo valve actuator coil #3 voltages output.
COM Common terminal of the SLIM interface circuit.
DI Shutdown digital input.
DO Manual digital output.
LA+, LA- LVDT secondary winding A input.
LB+, LB- LVDT secondary winding B input.
RES SLIM RS-485 receiver circuit input termination resistor. If receiver termination is desired,
RES is connected to RX+.
RTN Return for digital input. Connect to VS-.
RX+, RX- RS-485 receive data (input). SLIM interface.
SHD Shield of digital I/O signals‟ cable.
TX+, TX- RS-485 transmit data (output). SLIM interface.
VF+ Fused auxiliary voltage source terminal connection
VS+, VS- Auxiliary voltage input terminals (+24V or +48V).
VP+, VP- De-modulated scaled valve position testpoint voltage.
664 OW350_R1150
9.7.21 Field connection wiring diagram - (RVP)

Base Unit
Termination Block
Emod (FVP) Pmod (PVP) DO and DI Section
VF+ VF+
DO DO DO DO
MANUAL
field
DO-SHD SHD
load
VF+
VS+ VS+
DO-COMMON VS- VS- +24 Vdc or +48 Vdc
If Aux supply = Wetting supply;

connect PS+ (A17) to VS+ &
connect PS- (A18) to VS-
FUSE
MONITOR
VS- VS-
VF+ VF+ VF+ VF+
DI DI DI DI
SHUTDOWN
Contact
RTN RTN RTN RTN
External
jumper
must be
installed to
VS- VS- C6 use the
C28 SHUTDOWN
digital input
Note
A fault on the MANUAL digital output or on the SHUTDOWN/digital input that causes the personality
module fuse to open will disconnect the internal auxiliary supply from both the digital input and the
digital output circuit.
Figure 181: Digital Input/Output (internal aux supply) Field Connections
OW350_R1150 665
Analog I/O connection - (RVP)
Figure 182: Analog Input/Output Connection
1. Negative voltages on terminals B15, B14, and B13 cause the valve to open. Positive voltages
on these three terminals cause the valve to close.
2. The amplitude of this signal decreases as the valve opens. (LVDTA+ / LVDTA-)
3. The amplitude of this signal increases as the valve opens. (LVDTB+ / LVDTB-)
666 OW350_R1150
Analog I/O example using 3-Wire LVRT - (RVP)
Figure 183: Analog Input/Output Example Using 3-Wire LVRT
4. Node A is connected to terminals AC+ and LB+,
Node B is connected to terminals LB- and LA+,
Node C is connected to terminals AC- and LA-.
OW350_R1150 667
9.7.22 Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark) - (RVP)
Base Unit
Termination Block
Emod (FVP) Pmod (PVP) DO and DI Section
VF+ VF+
DO DO DO DO
MANUAL
field
DO-SHD SHD
See Note 1 load
VF+
VS+ VS+
DO-COMMON VS- VS- +24 Vdc or +48 Vdc
If Aux supply = Wetting supply;

connect PS+ (A17) to VS+ &
connect PS- (A18) to VS-
FUSE
MONITOR
VS- VS-
VF+ VF+ VF+ VF+
DI DI DI DI
SHUTDOWN
Contact
RTN RTN RTN RTN
External
jumper
must be
installed to
VS- VS- C6 use the
C28 SHUTDOWN
digital input
Note
recommended hardware (refer to "Cable Guidelines" in the applicable Ovation system
installation manual).
Figure 184: Digital Input/Output (internal aux supply) Field Connections (CE Mark)
668 OW350_R1150
Analog I/O connection (CE Mark) - (RVP)
Figure 185: Analog Input and Analog Output Connection (CE Mark)
recommended hardware.
OW350_R1150 669
Analog I/O example using a 3-Wire LVRT (CE Mark) - (VP)
Figure 186: Analog Input/Output Example Using 3-Wire LVRT (CE Mark)
recommended hardware.
670 OW350_R1150
9.7.23 Swapping connections to affect the output - (RVP)
Figure 187: Swapping Connections to Effect the Output
9.7.24 SLIM serial port connector - (RVP)
The Personality module SLIM connector is used to connect the Valve Positioner module to a
SLIM module (see page 603).
SLIM Connector (J1 RS-485) Pin Assignments
1 SP-COMMON NA
2 RX - (Receive Data) Input
3 Shd (Cable Shield) NA
4 RX+ (Receive Data) Input
5 SLIM-ATT/(SLIM Cable Connector Attached) 1 Input
6 TX+ (Transmit Data) Output
7 No connection NA
8 TX- (Transmit Data) Output
9 SP-COMMON NA
OW350_R1150 671
Front View of J1 Connector (Female DB 9)
5 1
FRONT
9 6 VIEW
1 The mating connector of the SLIM cable assembly must connect pin 5 to pin 9.
9.7.25 Register configuration/address information - (RVP)
Word address 13 (D in Hex) is used to write to the Module Configuration Register and to read the
Module Status Register. The status register can be read by using the Point Information window at
an Operator Station (see the Bit Pattern Field on the Hardware Tab). Refer to the applicable
Ovation Operator Station User Guide for information about the Point Information window.
Configuration/Status Register (Address 13 or D in Hex)

0 Configure module Module is configured

(1 = configure) (1 = configured; 0 = unconfigured)
1 Force Error Internal or Forced Error
(1 = error; 0 = no error) (1 = error; 0 = no error)
2-4 1 1
Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 = Timeout Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 = Timeout
0 0 0 = 16 seconds 0 0 0 = 16 seconds
0 0 1 = 4 seconds 0 0 1 = 4 seconds
0 1 0 = 2 seconds 0 1 0 = 2 seconds
0 1 1 = 1 second 0 1 1 = 1 second
1 0 0 = 500 milliseconds 1 0 0 = 500 milliseconds
1 1 1 = 62.5 milliseconds 1 1 1 = 62.5 milliseconds
5 Not applicable Ignore shutdown input
(1 = ignore input; 0 = obey input)
This function is only valid when the Controller is
running in normal mode. Otherwise, the Valve
Positioner obeys the shutdown input.
6 Redundant RVP Link Status Bit Redundant RVP Link Status Bit
(1=good; 0=bad) (1=good; 0=bad)
7 Not applicable Severe Fatal Error - Check Register E
8 Not applicable Coil 1 may be shorted
672 OW350_R1150


11 Not applicable Coil 1 may be open
14 Not applicable Contingency
(1 = contingency; 0 = no contingency)
15 Not applicable Handshake bit for download of calibration data
1
bit definitions for this register are encoded as shown in the following table.
Secondary Configuration/Status Register (Address 14 or E in Hex)

(WRITE)
0 Not applicable EEPROM checksum error

1 Not applicable PSD 302 EPROM checksum error
2 Not applicable Shared memory readback error
3 Not applicable Processor memory readback error
4 Not applicable FPGA error
5 Not applicable UART error
6 Not applicable Processor diagnostic error
7 Not applicable Coil drive D/A converter output readback error
8 Not applicable PSD 302 RAM error
9 Not applicable EEPROM write error
OW350_R1150 673
9.7.26 Diagnostics - (RVP)
One important feature of the servo valve is an adjustable mechanical bias mechanism. This
mechanism creates a slight deflection in the valve spool so that a small amount of hydraulic fluid
can escape the actuator and close the valve. Therefore, if there is no voltage applied to the servo
valve, the actuator slowly moves toward the closed position. This deflection is typically overcome
by -200 millivolts, so that when the valve is positioned and steady, this small voltage is seen on
the servo valve.
The servo valve has two voltage coils, either of which can deflect the spool when excited.
The combination of these features provide the following:

 Redundancy feature that protects against broken wires or shorted coils
 Ability to be diagnosed
 A predictable shutdown mechanism for the following:
 In the event the firmware diagnoses a catastrophic error and executes a shutdown
OR
 An error mode occurs that allows a hardware watchdog timer to expire and de-power the
Electronics module‟s FVP field card.
The Valve Positioner continuously runs diagnostics to ensure that the circuit is operating properly.
Certain conditions can cause the Valve Positioner to dive, essentially removing the output signal
and allowing the valve to drift shut.
As a general rule, the card views error conditions on start up as no-go or fatal errors. This means
that the Valve Positioner does not generate an output to the valve. See the following error
descriptions for specifics.
DA readback error - (RVP)
The Valve Positioner has the ability to read and convert the coil drive D/A converter output signal
that drives the valve. If the value readback (converted by the A/D converter) and the value that
was output do not match within a deadband, and for a pre-defined period of time, a severe fatal
error is assumed. In this case, the Valve Positioner is “flying blind.” It cannot confidently
determine valve position or control the output. The Valve Positioner removes drive power (dive)
from the entire Electronics module‟s FVP field card and go through a reset sequence. The coil
drive D/A converter readback check is a diagnostic that runs continuously.
EPROM Checksum Error - (RVP)
The EPROM checksum runs continuously as a low priority function. Failure of the checksum
diagnostic is considered a severe fatal error.
Contingency Check Error - (RVP)
Contingency is defined as the difference between a target position and the actual position, when
that difference is greater than a defined limit. In the Valve Positioner, the contingency bit is set if
the difference exceeds a programmable limit (default value is 5%) for a programmable time period
(default value is 10 seconds). Contingency is not a fatal condition.
674 OW350_R1150
Memory Read/Write Check Error - (RVP)
A failure of any memory to read back correctly is considered a severe fatal error.
Open coil diagnostic error - (RVP)
An open coil is detected by measuring voltage across the current limiting resistors on the servo
output. When zero volts are detected, either the coil is open, the servo output is at zero, or the
mechanical bias on the servo valve has been adjusted to yield that result. When an error
condition is detected, an internal “open” bit is set.
For firmware revisions prior to 0F, the diagnostic works as described below. For later revisions,
servo coil voltage is measured and compared to a model described by tuning constants “kServo”
and “kServoDb.” If the voltage does not fit into the model, due to being too large, open coil is
attributed and the internal diagnostic bit is set. Then the timing sequence described below is used
to post the error bit to the Controller.
Typically, the servo coil voltage is -200 mV when the valve is in a stable, controlled position and
the servo valve mechanical bias is properly adjusted. If the servo output amplifier voltage
amplitude falls below 100 mV, the internal bit is cleared, as though no error condition exists. If
servo output voltage is greater than 100 mV, the difference between servo output voltage and coil
voltage is compared to 50 mV, and if it is less, the „open‟ bit is set.
If the open bit stays set for five seconds, the error condition is reported to the Controller in the
module status register.
Shorted coil diagnostic - (RVP)
For each of the three coil outputs, an internal shorted bit is set if the converted value of terminal
voltage is near 0 volts. Behavior of this diagnostic changes when servo output amplifier voltage is
near zero.
For firmware revisions prior to 0F, the diagnostic works as described below. For later revisions
servo coil voltage is measured and compared to a model described by tuning constants “kServo”
and “kServoDb”. If the voltage does not fit into the model, due to being too large, open coil is
attributed and the internal diagnostic bit is set. Then the timing sequence is described in the
following section and is used to post the error bit to the Controller.
Typically, the servo output coil is -200 mV when the valve is in a stable, controlled position and
the servo valve mechanical bias is properly adjusted. If the servo output amplifier voltage falls
below 50 mV, the internal bit is cleared, as though no error condition exists.
For servo output voltages greater in amplitude than 400 mV, the module status register voltage is
compared to 50 mV, and a shorted bit is set if it is less. If the shorted coil bit remains active for
five seconds, the condition is reported to the Controller in status word 1.
For servo amplifier voltage values between 50 and 400 mV, the comparison value is calculated as
the servo amplifier voltage divided by eight. The timing described above is used. When the
shorted bit becomes inactive, the corresponding bit in status word 1 is cleared immediately.
OW350_R1150 675
Diagnostics of LVDT problems (redundant) - (RVP)
Diagnosing an LVDT failure is complex. Depending on the failure, the valve may open, close, or
go to a different intermediated position, which can be above or below the target position. If the
valve is positioned at the LVDT null point, an oscillator failure would not be detected because the
position feedback would continue to be equal to zero (0) volts.
 If (Position Feedback - Previous Position Feedback) < MAXDELTA, and
POSITIONERRORFLAG is not set, all conditions are considered normal, and the
REDUNDANCY STATE is set to NORMAL. Previous Position Feedback is set equal to
Position Feedback prior to exiting the PI routine.
 If (Position Feedback - Previous Position Feedback) > MIN2NDRY and the backup is OK, the
VP executes the failover.
 If (Position Feedback - Previous Position Feedback) > MAXDELTA, a problem is suspected.
VP firmware refuses to accept the new position feedback value, and does not update
Previous Position Feedback or run the PI loop. If REDUNDANCY STATE is NORMAL, it is
updated to POOR. If it is POOR, it is updated to BAD. If it is BAD, and the backup is OK, the
VP executes the failover. This means that it can take 30 msec for the VP to determine that it
should execute its failover.
 If POSITION ERROR FLAG is set, and the partner‟s reported position is within
LVDTTRACKING of Position Feedback, the condition is not due to a failed LVDT, but for
another reason. No action to fail over is taken.
 If POSITION ERROR FLAG is set, and both Position Feedback voltage and Previous Position
Feedback voltage are equal or close to zero volts, the problem is suspected to be a failed
oscillator, or broken oscillator wire, and the failover is executed as long as the Backup is OK.
 If POSITION ERROR FLAG is set, and Position Feedback differs from Partner‟s Position
Feedback by more than LVDTTRACKING, and the Backup is OK, an LVDT problem is
suspected and the failover is executed.
9.7.27 Troubleshooting - (RVP)
Online replacement - (RVP)
A Valve Positioner module can be replaced online when the module fails. Use the following
procedure to remove a Valve Positioner module and safely install a replacement module.
CAUTION! Observe all the precautions and then modify the procedure steps to suit your
particular situation.
1. Once the valve is closed and in a safe condition, remove the bad VP.
2. Insert the replacement VP into the base unit.
3. Download constants using the Valve Positioner Upload/Download/Calibrate graphic.
4. View the reported feedback position. It should be close to 0%. If it is, the valve can be
operated without calibration.
5. View the servo voltage at terminal screws 14B and C, and 13B and C. Note that if the servo
voltage has integrated to a few volts negative, and hydraulic fluid is applied suddenly, the
valve pops, and the onboard PI responds and bring the valve back to the target position of
0%. If the target position of 0% is less than „seatLimit‟, servo voltage is positive, thus forcing
the valve closed.
676 OW350_R1150
6. With the valve closed, you can execute the 0% calibration sequence to find the exact reading
for the 0% position. If you believe the 100% calibration is close, the valve can then be
operated without calibrating the 100% position, since there is little flow change when the valve
is fully opened.
7. Verify that the VP is in the normal operating mode as indicated by the card edge LED.
8. When you determine that it is time to operate the valve, un-isolate the valve hydraulically,
drive the target position of the MA to the desired position, and then switch the MA back to
„auto.‟
Replacement precautions - (RVP)

 If the valve is closed, isolate it hydraulically to prevent any bump when inserting the new VP.
 Switch the MA driving the VP position to manual, and move the target position to zero. This is
done to avoid jostling the valve when the new VP is inserted.
 For large machines, switch the valves to „single‟ or „full arc‟ mode from „sequential‟ or „partial
arc‟ mode.
 Keep first stage, or impulse pressure, control loops in service to respond to any upset during
the maintenance.
 If the replacement is due to a suspected or intermittent problem that can only be corrected by
replacement, but the VP is operating, first close the valve by switching the MA to manual,
driving the valve to 0%, and then isolate it hydraulically.
Demodulator gain - (RVP)
Demodulator gain directly affects the calibration values at the endpoints. Reducing demodulator
gain can be helpful in diagnosing VP problems. Note that the VP must be re-seated, or must be
reset, in order to make any new demodulator gain setting effective.
A simple test can be performed to verify correct wiring and polarity.
1. Set 0 and 100% calibration values to –31,000 and +31,000.

2. Reduce demodulator gain to a low value (2000).
3. Reseat or reset the VP to cause the new demodulator gain to take effect.
4. Set target position to 0%, 100%, then 50% and observe valve movement at all settings.
In this test, you are informing the VP that the electrical valve „stroke‟ is +/- 10 volts, but you have
adjusted demodulator gain so that the actual electrical stroke is much smaller. (Perhaps +/- 1 volt,
depending upon the LVDT.) The idea is to force the actual electrical „stroke‟ to be fully contained
within the range of the VP input system.
By setting the target position to 0% or 100%, you can verify correct wiring and polarity. If the valve
goes to the correct endpoints, then you should set the target position to 50% as an additional test.
The valve should go to the LVDT‟s midpoint and hold there.
If the valve does not go to the correct endpoint, then there is a wiring error, and you should first
remove one of the servo wire pairs, and repeat the test. The next step would be to swap the wires
of the remaining servo wire pair, followed by swapping the wire pairs of LVDT input A with input B.
When the valve moves correctly, verify that the valve operates according to the recommended
practice where negative voltage opens the valve, and positive voltage closes it.
OW350_R1150 677
Automatic calibration problems - (RVP)
Another problem with demodulator gain can occur during automatic calibration. When the value is
backseated and demodulator gain is undergoing an adjustment, it is also predicting the new
calibration value at the seated position. If the seated position goes out of range, then the value is
clipped and the user receives a message that a new calibration is necessary.
One of the underlying assumptions of the VP is that, in the worst case, the user positions the
LVDT so that the 100% position is at the end of the linear range of the LVDT (possibly non-linear
and accurate). Then during calibration, the firmware accepts a value of 100% that is higher in
magnitude than the 0% calibration value. If the LVDT is not positioned this way, then you may
receive a message that the calibration must be repeated.
If LVDT is not adjusted in this fashion, you can enter your own demodulator gain, reseat the VP,
then perform both the 0% and 100% endpoint calibration. If the results do not yield a calibration
value approaching the endpoint, then demodulator gain can be increased, and the process
repeated.
LVDT wiring problems (6-wire LVDT) - (RVP)
When an LVDT is wired incorrectly, it is typically a case where secondary pair A is swapped with
secondary pair B.
The LVDT inputs on the VP are implemented with an amplifier stage that includes diode
rectification. Therefore, the two individual wires of a secondary can be swapped and it makes no
difference to the VP.
The wires of the excitation oscillator could also be swapped with no effect. The excitation coil and
secondary coils are all isolated, so the VP can see only the AC component.
If the secondaries are wired correctly, and the LVDT is in approximately the correct position,
feedback voltage shown on the VP calibration graphic is negative when the valve is closed, and
positive when the valve is open.
The position feedback voltage is also available on terminals B12 and C12. This signal is used for
factory testing and can be used for response testing in the field. It is inverted from the signal
shown on the calibration graphic. (One way to avoid confusion is to connect voltmeter GND to
B12, and voltmeter input to C12.)
Valve wired backwards - (RVP)
If a servo valve is wired backwards (that is, the wire pair is rolled), the valve moves in the
opposite direction. This is a positive feedback situation. The movement of the valve does not cure
the position error, it increases it, thus causing the output voltage to move even faster, and drive
the valve harder in the wrong direction.
One pair of servo coil wires, wired incorrectly - (RVP)
Another problem is with dual coil servo valves when one pair is wired correctly, and the other is
rolled. Thus, the wire pairs are in opposition, and valve movement is indeterminate.
Use the following procedure to correct this problem:
1. Disconnect one of the pairs, since the valve moves with only one pair connected (typically,
the first step when diagnosing wiring problems).
678 OW350_R1150
2. Calibrate the valve with only one pair of servo wires, since it is the LVDT being calibrated, not
the servo valve.
3. After the correct direction of movement is established, reconnect the wires, and re-verify
correct valve movement and responsiveness.
For typical dual coil servos adjusted according to the recommendations, the coil voltage is a
few hundred millivolts in a steady holding position, 200 mV perhaps. If one coil is
disconnected, the valve remains in a steady position, but the coil voltage doubles to 400 mV.
Once all wiring is connected, you should observe the movement of the valve, such as during
a step change, to determine if PI gain is set properly.
9.7.28 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (RVP)
LED DESCRIPTION

C (green) Communication OK LED. Lit when the Ovation Controller is communicating
with the module at least once every two seconds.
E (Red) The "E" LED is illuminated if:
 The SLIM address is not zero AND there is no valid response from a
SLIM.
OR
 The "Ignore Shutdown" configuration bit is not set AND the wetting
voltage for the shutdown input is not present.
I (Red) Internal Error LED. Lit when the Force Error bit (Bit 1 of register D) is
detected.
communicating with module for two seconds.
1 - MANUAL (Green) Lit whenever the module is operating in Local Manual mode.
2 - SERVO OK (Green) Lit to indicate the servo coil diagnostics have passed. Only diagnostics for
the number of coils specified by “coilCount” are executed.
The coil open/short bits reported to the controller are delayed by a timer.
The value is set in 100 mSec increments by the tuning constant
“diagtime=xx”. However, the LED is extinguished immediately when the
diagnostic has failed and the timer is counting towards expiration.
Therefore, if the LED is blinking, the tuning constants kServo, kServoDb,
and/or diagtime may be too tightly defined. If the LED blinks off during rapid
valve movement, but the associated module status bit does not become
active, then those three tuning constants are properly set.
3 - NORMAL (Green) Lit whenever the module is operating in Normal mode.
Blinks if it is the Primary in a redundant configuration.
4 - PI DETUNE (Green) Lit whenever PI is detuned. The PI is detuned ( more sluggish ) when the
valve is at setpoint. Please refer to definitions of errorDbS, errorDbF,
piGainDb, and piResetTdb.
In a redundant RVP configuration this LED is unconditionally extinguished
on the backup RVP because this condition is associated with the PI loop
running on the primary RVP.
This LED will blink upon rapid valve movement or when the tuning
parameters mentioned above are not set properly.
5 - CALIBRATE (Green) Lit whenever the module is calibrating.
OW350_R1150 679
LED DESCRIPTION
6 - BACKSEAT (Green) Lit whenever seating or backseating is in effect. This LED is extinguished on
the backup RVP of a redundant RVP pair because the condition is
associated with the PI control of the primary RVP.
7 - CONTINGENCY (Red) Lit whenever the module is operating in contingency condition. This LED will
blink when the diagnostic detects position error greater than “contingency”
during rapid valve movement, or if the valve is actually oscillating around the
setpoint. The status bit reported to the controller is delayed by a timer set by
“contingencyTime”.
8 - SHUTDOWN (Red) Lit when the module is driving the valve fully closed due to the module
shutdown digital input.
9 No LED.
10 No LED.
11 No LED.
12 No LED.
13 No LED.
14 No LED.
15 No LED.
16 No LED.
9.7.29 Specifications - (ERVP)

ERVP Specifications
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Valve positioning field interface channels One

LVDT position feedback Input range 25 V AC peak to peak (LVDT A and LVDT B) Max
LVDT position feedback input impedance 20 k ohms (LVDT A and LVDT B) differential input with
floating source
10 k ohms (LVDT A and LVDT B) one input line refer to
common
LVDT excitation output voltage 17 V AC peak to peak ± 11% @ 1.0 KHz ± 10%
(1C31194G03)
23.75 V AC peak to peak ± 11% @ 3.0 KHz ± 10%
(1C31194G04)
500 Ohms minimum load impedance (1C31194G03 & G04)
Drift 0.5% Max/yr
Peak servo valve coil output voltages (1C31197G01) up to three 82 ohm coils, ±2.04 V
(1C31197G02) up to three 250 ohm coils, ±4.20 V
(1C31197G03) up to three 1000 ohm coils, ±8.26 V
(1C31197G04) up to two 125 ohm coils, ±4.5 V
680 OW350_R1150
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Servo valve coil output voltage accuracy 0.4% of full scale output
Field interface dielectric isolation ±1000 V DC
The valve positioning field interface has 50 V and 150 V
short term isolation from the logic common/Ovation I/O bus
SLIM interface serial port RS-485
SLIM interface serial port baud rate 9600
SLIM interface dielectric isolation ±1000 V DC
Local serial port RS-232, non-isolated
Local serial port baud rate 19200
SHUTDOWN digital input
Input voltage range 24 V/48 V DC nominal
18 V DC minimum
60 V DC Maximum
Propagation delay of contact change
of state 1.9 mSec minimum
25.5 mSec Maximum
Cable length 1000 feet Maximum (cable capacitance @ 50 pF/ft)
Dielectric isolation ±1000 V DC
MANUAL digital output

Output voltage
Off voltage (Maximum) 60 V DC
On voltage (Maximum) 1.0 V @ 500 mA
Output current
Off current (Maximum) 0.25 mA @ 60 V
On Current (Maximum) 500mA
Maximum propagation time 2.5 mSec for Rload = 500 ohms
Dielectric isolation ±1000 V DC
Module power Main: 4.3 2W typical, 6.5 W Maximum
Aux:
Digital Input:
Digital Output
(100mA load)
2.4 W (24V) typical
4.8 W (48V) typical
Logic board processor 80C196KB (16-bit microcontroller)
Storage temperature range -40°C to 85°C (-40°F to 185°F)
OW350_R1150 681
9.8 Enhanced Valve Positioner module - (ERVP)
9.8.1 Overview (ERVP)
The Digital Electro-Hydraulic (DEH) system controls steam turbine valve positions in order to
adjust steam flow for turbine speed control, or to change generator load when connected to the
grid. The Ovation Enhanced Valve Positioner I/O module provides an interface between the DEH
Ovation Controller and an electro-hydraulic servo valve actuator. Valve styles controlled by the
Ovation Enhanced Valve Positioner I/O module include throttle valves, governor valves,
interceptor valves, extraction valves, and bypass valves. The Ovation Valve Positioner module
provides closed-loop valve positioning control.
A valve position set point is maintained by the module. The set point is normally altered by the
Ovation Controller via the Ovation I/O bus. If the Ovation Enhanced Valve Positioner module
operates in Local Manual mode, the set point is controlled by a SLIM operator interface station.
Inside the Electronics module, an 80C196 micro-controller provides real-time closed loop
proportional-plus-integral (PI) control.
The Ovation Enhanced Valve Positioner I/O module generates redundant output control signals
which drive the electro-hydraulic servo valve actuator coils. The feedback loop is closed with the
valve‟s position measurement being obtained from a Linear Variable Differential Transformer
(LVDT) that is mounted on the valve stem.
The Enhanced Valve Positioner module can perform the following:

 Calibration
 Diagnostics
 1 (one) millisecond loop time
 SLIM interface for local control
 Local serial interface for testing and calibration
 Shutdown input
 Seating and backseating logic
The Valve Positioner module is a CE Mark certified module.
9.8.2 Electronics module (Emod) - (ERVP)

 1C31194G03 17 V ac p-p 1 kHz LVDT primary winding excitation output., ±10.0 V dc servo
valve actuator coil drive output voltage. RVP design.
 1C31194G04 23.75 V ac p-p 3 kHz LVDT primary winding excitation output., ±10.0 V dc
servo valve actuator coil drive output voltage. RVP design.
682 OW350_R1150
9.8.3 Personality module (Pmod) - (ERVP)

The C3+ and C3- coil outputs are not available.
The C3+ and C3- coil outputs are not available. 1C31197G05 Accommodates 4-20 mA
feedback input at terminals B9/C9. See VP personality module 1C31197G05
recommendations for tuning constant suggestions.
9.8.4 Subsystems - (ERVP)
1

MODULE MODULE

OW350_R1150 683

MODULE MODULE
When using the Point Builder to define points for a Valve Positioner module, only the following point
types are valid for each channel:
I/O Channel Name Type Input Source or Terminal Block
Output Destination 2
Connection
1 Shutdown Status Input Valve Positioner DI1
2 Auxiliary (wetting) Voltage Input Valve Positioner DI2
Sense
3 SLIM ON Signal Input Valve Positioner DI3
4 Position Feedback Input Valve Positioner
8 Raw Demodulator Voltage Input Valve Positioner
9 VP Status Input Valve Positioner
10 Demand Feedback Input Valve Positioner
11 VP Command Output Valve Positioner
12 VP Demand Output Valve Positioner
13 Partner Position Feedback Output Valve Positioner
1
This module provides an interface between an Ovation Controller and ONE Electro-Hydraulic (EH)
servo-valve actuator in the field. To use this module, the MASTATION algorithm must reside in the
Ovation Controller. (See the Ovation Algorithm Reference Manual.)
2
The terminal block connection depends upon the application being used. Refer to wiring diagram.
684 OW350_R1150
9.8.5 Guidelines (Redundant) - (ERVP)
Two Ovation Valve Positioner (VP) cards operate as a Primary/Backup pair to control a single
steam valve. The steam valve is fitted with two LVDTs, one connected to each Valve Positioner.
Each VP then drives one coil in a high pressure hydraulic servo valve. The coils are completely
isolated. Under normal conditions current through each coil is equal and the effect on the servo
valve spool is additive.
The Valve Positioners communicate serially to determine which VP should be Primary, and which
should be Backup. Critical parameters of the redundant subsystem are exchanged over the serial
link. These critical parameters are also exchanged over the Ovation bus, thus providing a
redundant data path.
The Backup VP suspends its software PI routine, and replicates the servo output of the Primary. It
then takes over control if the Primary fails. There are three types of failures that the subsystem
detects and responds to:
 Hardware Failures - Each VP continuously runs internal diagnostics and ceases operation if a
diagnostic fails. A failure is indicated when both the serial communications and Ovation line
watchdog timers expire. The VP card continuously executes these diagnostics:
 Micro-controller RAM
 Ovation RAM
 EPROM Checksum
 DA Converter Readback
 Ovation Watchdog Timer
 Redundant Communications Watchdog Timer
OW350_R1150 685
 Coil Drive - If the Primary VP detects a shorted or open servo coil, it transfers control to the
Backup VP. Refer to, Coil Setup.
 LVDT Failures - LVDT failures are detected by measuring the derivative of position feedback.
As with the servo coil, there are setup requirements that enable the detection of LVDT
problems. Refer to, LVDT Setup (see page 636).
The VP pair utilizes the SLIM serial port for VP-to-VP communications. The serial link is a VP-to-
VP connection, not the “party-line” bus utilized with the SLIM.
Because the effect on the servo spool from the servo coils is additive, a failover event is NOT
bumpless (that is, the valve dips, or moves in the direction indicated by the mechanical bias
setting, during the failover period). Catastrophic hardware failures, or removal of the Primary VP,
are the worst failures because the Backup must wait for various timers to expire and then engage
the PI loop.
If, for example, the failover required one second to complete (determined by the Controller loop
time), and the valve was programmed to drift shut in 30 seconds under control of the mechanical
bias-setting, the valve could drift 3% (=1/30).
686 OW350_R1150
OW350_R1150 687
Figure 188: Typical Redundant Ovation Valve Positioner Subsystem
In the example above, the valve is controlled by RVPs in branch 1, slot 3 and branch 2, slot 6.
Each RVP reads the valve position from a six-wire LVDT. The RVPs communicate across the
SLIM port to cooperate in driving the servo valve. The servo valve admits/releases hydraulic fluid
from the actuator.
9.8.6 Module Serial connection - (ERVP)
Figure 189: Redundant VP to VP Serial Connections
9.8.7 Firmware levels - (ERVP)
The following table lists all VP module firmware releases that added functionality to
the VP.

LEVEL REVISION
(E MOD) LEVEL
(E MOD)
0B 5 First full production firmware release.

0C 6 Added support for VP Redundancy.
0D Obsolete
0E Obsolete
688 OW350_R1150

LEVEL REVISION
(E MOD) LEVEL
(E MOD)
0F 9 Added support for the following:

 Calibration from the Controller using graphics.
 Upload/download of calibration constants to and from the
Controller.
 New tuning constants kServo and kServoDb to replace hard-
coded constants. They add flexibility in dealing with differing coil
impedances.
 Reduction of valve calibration time.
0G 11 Redundancy support changed so that multiple failovers are
precluded.
Improvements to calibration.
Improved coil diagnostics for “coilCount = 0”.
Math calculation for position feedback endpoint improved.
0H 13 Added “priority Demand” tuning constant to support Rockport
project.
0I 15 Corrected communications error in redundancy link.
0J 16 Added anti-windup feature, changed default values of piGain, pi
ResetTDb, and errorDbs, and calibration sequence improvements.
0K 18 Improved Serial Communications.
0L Added the following enhancements:

 Added 3 control bits to override primary/backup modes and reset
of the redundant RVP pair.
 Corrected problem of calibration at full open endpoint.
 Fixed startup sequence to avoid contest for primary status of
redundant RVP.
 Increased startup wait time for oscillator settling from 10 seconds
to 20 seconds.
 Use servo output to predict direction of motion as arbiter for
redundant RVP when position feedbacks become unequal.
0M This version includes the following:
 Made changes to seating and backseating.
 Cleaned up LED display for backup RVP in redundant RVP pair.
 Made a slight adjustment of the AD converter schedule.
OW350_R1150 689
9.8.8 Primary/backup status transitions - (ERVP)
he firmware for the Valve Positioner module allows for Primary to Backup and Backup to Primary
status transitions.
If the VP is in the Primary mode, it transitions to Backup mode if:
Note: Prior to a decision to fail to the backup, the following conditions are tested, and if OK, the
primary determines its own health is good and the subsequent tests are not executed:
1. During calibration failovers are precluded.

2. If there was a recent failover a timer operates to preclude additional failovers for at least ½
second.
Then the failover conditions are checked:
1. The serial line status is OK and the partner is the primary.

2. The serial line status is OK, the backup is OK and armed, and a high derivative is detected on
the position feedback. ( See description of min2ndry tuning constant and LVDT setup
requirements.)
3. The serial line status is OK, the backup is OK and armed, and excessive motion is seen for
10 subsequent position feedback scans. ( See description of MaxDelta tuning constant.)
4. The serial line status is OK, the backup is OK and armed, and a failed servo coil is detected.
5. The serial line status is OK, the backup is OK and armed, the primary sees a difference
between target position and actual position that exceeds tuning constant posErrDelta, and the
position feedback and partner position feedback differ by more than LVDT Tracking. This
condition is a “last choice” situation. The redundancy state machine is restarted to allow the
other RVP to take over.
9.8.9 Register configuration/address information - (ERVP)
ERVP Register configuration/address information
REGISTER READ/WRITE CHANNEL DESCRIPTION
0 Read / Write Standard Block Transfer address register.

1 Read / Write Standard Block Transfer Data register.
2 Read Receive pointer - Variable payload block.
3 Read Transmit pointer - Variable payload block.
transfer*
4 Read 1 Target position1 - -5 to 105%% = -1560 to 32760
4 Write 1 Position FB1 (same format)
5 Read 1 Target Position2 (same format as above)

5 Write 1 Position FB2 (same format)
690 OW350_R1150
REGISTER READ/WRITE CHANNEL DESCRIPTION
6 Read 1 Position FB3
7 Read 1 Coil Voltage 1

8 Read 1 Status Word 1 (packed point)
9 Read Coil Voltage 2
10 Write Command Register

11 Read Coil Voltage 3
12 Read / Write TBD
13 Read / Write Configuration / Status (see below for bit definitions).
14 Read Status Word 2 (see below)
15 Read Electronic ID (see applicable section)
Note: Registers 4 and 5 each have 2 points.
9.8.10 Modes
Rapid or erratic valve movement can damage the turbine. The Valve Positioner enforces a set of
rules to accomplish bumpless transfer between modes. The description of each mode includes
mode transfer.
OW350_R1150 691
Start mode - (ERVP)
When the Valve Positioner starts or is restarted, its primary objective is to avoid an indeterminate
output that would result in valve movement, and possible damage to the valve or turbine. There
are a number of hardware and software features that prevent an indeterminate output.
The hardware is designed so that when the Valve Positioner starts, the power supply to the servo
mechanical bias adjustment, the assumed state prior to power-up. In addition, the coil drive D/A
As part of the micro-controller‟s start sequence, the power supply is turned on, and then a pattern
under software control, no current flows between the Valve Positioner and the servo valve, and no
valve movement has occurred.
The Valve Positioner does not remain in Start mode unless a diagnostic error is detected. The
Valve Positioner transitions from Start to Local mode if all of the following functions execute and
return “normal” or “ok” status codes:
 Check PE pin. Go to Factory Test Mode, if required.
 D/A converter readback diagnostic.
The Valve Positioner sets target valve demand equal to demand feedback before transferring to
Local mode.
Control mode - (ERVP)
In normal, local, and calibrate modes, the Valve Positioner is always controlling valve position.
The PI routine runs unconditionally every 10 msec. Typically, it executes the PI equation as
described below. The PI routine has some conditionally executed parts to handle seating and
back-seating.
692 OW350_R1150
SLIM modes - (ERVP)
The SLIM has four modes:

 Local
 Auto
 Cascade
 Manual
Only two of the four (local and auto) correspond to Valve Positioner modes. Local mode
corresponds to Valve Positioner local-manual mode. However, the operator does not request
“local‟ mode.” It is only entered when the Controller stops or fails to update the Valve Positioner
card.
SLIM auto mode corresponds to Valve Positioner normal mode. In this mode, the Controller is
writing its desired position to the Valve Positioner. In normal mode, the valves‟ position and set
point can be viewed on the SLIM, but the SLIM has no control over the Valve Positioner.
These modes should not be confused with auto and manual modes of software loops within the
Controller. Remember that the Valve Positioner is always in normal mode, receiving its position
from the Controller, unless the Controller fails, in which case the Valve Positioner switches to
local mode.
When raise and lower on the SLIM are pressed, all Valve Positioners respond to the key action.
This means that all valves move together as a group. It also suggests that no other devices (Loop
Interfaces) should be connected on the serial bus with a group of Valve Positioners.
In abnormal situations, such as during maintenance, some valves may be in normal mode, and
some may be in local mode. In this situation the valve in local mode responds to raise/lower
action, but the valves in normal mode do not. The Controller application warns or notifies the
operator of the mode of each valve.
Since the SLIM is connected to a group of Valve Positioners, each Valve Positioner must control
its own transmit enable. Each SLIM enables its transmitter when placing a response into the
transmit buffer. It also starts a 25 mSec timer, which, when expired, disables the transmitter.
SLIM pushbuttons - (ERVP)
The SLIM operation differs from normal operation when connected to the Ovation Loop Interface.
A standard SLIM (see page 603) is used to control a group of valves on a common serial bus.
The actions that occur when a SLIM push-button is used are described in the following table.
SLIM Pushbutton Actions
BUTTON DESCRIPTION
Display Display cycles the top left hex display from target position, actual position,
and servo voltage output.
OW350_R1150 693
BUTTON DESCRIPTION
Up Up increases target valve position for the valve group. Only the valves in local
mode respond to the Up button.
Down Down decreases target valve position for the valve group. Only the valves in
local mode respond to the Down button.
Manual, Auto, Cascade, Not used.
Mode, Left, Right
The SLIM indicators and LEDs provide information about the operation of the Valve Positioner.
SLIM Indicators and LEDs
INDICATOR DESCRIPTION
PV Bar-graph Indicates actual valve position
SP Bar-graph Indicates target valve position of the selected valve

Output Bar-graph The horizontal output bar-graph on the bottom of the SLIM indicates servo
output voltage ranging from -10 volts to +10 volts, mapped to 0 to 100%
available on the bar-graph. For a stable valve in a controlled position,
approximately 50% (+/- mechanical bias adjustment) would be indicated.
Top Left digits Indicators for set point, actual, or output voltage.
Top Right digits Indicate engineering units of the value being displayed.
LEDs: In local manual mode, C (control) is indicated. In normal mode, M is indicated
(monitor). The operator does not have any control over the „M‟ „C‟ or „T‟
M, C, and T function.
LEDs: Not used.
Casc and Man
Auto LED Illuminated if the valve is in normal mode.
Loc LED Illuminated if the valve is in local mode.
694 OW350_R1150
Local-manual mode - (ERVP)
The purpose of local-manual mode is:

 Maintain stable valve position when the Controller fails or is reset.
 Smooth operation using manual raise/lower function.
 Bumpless transfer to normal mode. (Tracking by the Controller is required, and is enforced by
the Valve Positioner in local-manual mode.)
In local-manual mode, the Valve Positioner controls the valve using a set point that is only
changed through the SLIM interface, or through the local serial interface.
Local-manual mode will be entered from normal mode if the Controller fails or stops updating the
Valve Positioner card. When the Valve Positioner is powered up, local-manual mode is always
entered as long as there are no diagnostic failures.
The preferred mode of Valve Positioner operation is normal mode. The Valve Positioner transfers
from local-manual to normal if the following conditions are met: (1) Controller is updating the set
point, thus keeping the watchdog timer from expiring. (2) Controller is tracking.
In local-manual mode, the following functions are performed:

 PI position control loop.
 Writes current valve position to Ovation memory.
 Writes coil voltages to Ovation memory.
 RAM diagnostic.
 SLIM interface (Raise, Lower, and update SLIM values.)
OW350_R1150 695
Normal mode - (ERVP)
Normal is the preferred mode of the Valve Positioner card. In normal mode, the Valve Positioner
is receiving a position set point from the Controller and controlling valve position.
In normal mode, the following functions are performed:

 PI position control loop (Demand position comes from the Controller via the Ovation memory).
 Writes current valve position to Ovation I/O memory.
 Writes coil voltages to Ovation I/O memory.
 RAM diagnostic.
 SLIM interface (Updates SLIM values, no raise/lower function.)
Calibrate mode - (ERVP)
Calibrate mode is a sub-mode of local-manual mode. Calibration sequences are commanded

through the local serial port.
The Valve Positioner is commanded to calibrate when the appropriate bit in the command word is
set. This causes the Valve Positioner to enter the calibrate mode and begin its travel sequence.
During the travel sequence, the Valve Positioner reports a position feedback calculated using the
most recent calibration numbers. The controlling MASTATION enters manual mode and track the
position demand feedback. The Valve Positioner moves the valve at a programmable rate during
the travel sequence.
The Valve Positioner can exit calibrate mode without enforcing a bumpless transfer rule.

 Zero Hot Cal
 Top Hot Cal
696 OW350_R1150
 Null-Point Cal
This calibration sequence causes the valve to travel to the electrical null point of the LVDT.
Null point calibration can be requested at the same time as full calibration, in which case the
movement sequence is the full calibration sequence. However, the valve stops at the null
point when it is encountered.
 Full Calibration
feedback gain.
When full calibration is requested the module enters local mode, requiring the Controller to
track. The module then moves the valve to the 0% position. The firmware checks for position
feedback between the arbitrary limits of –9.7 volts and –7.8 volts. If the voltage is less (more
negative) than –9.7 volts, the firmware reduces gain to make the voltage more positive than –
9.7. If the voltage is more positive than –7.8 volts, the gain is increased until the voltage is
more negative than -7.8 volts. During this sequence the gain is tested to ensure it does not go
out of allowable range.
At this point in the sequence, the demodulator gain has been set to a value that is a Maximum
allowable value. The gain may be reduced at the other end of the stroke, but will not be
increased.
Now the valve moves to the 100% position. The feedback voltage is examined, and if it
exceeds 9.7 volts, feedback gain is reduced. Once feedback voltage is less than +9.7 volts, it
is recorded as the 100% calibration value.
The valve moves back to 0% and the voltage at 0% is recorded. Feedback gain is not
adjusted.
The last step is to write 0% position, 100% position, and feedback gain to the EE memory.
Once the data is recorded in EE memory, the firmware clears a restriction flag, allowing the
module to transfer from local mode back to normal mode.
9.8.11 Channel assignments - (ERVP)
The following table lists the I/O Channel assignments:
I/O Channel assignments
I/O NAME TYPE DETAILS NOTES

CHANNEL
1 Shutdown Status DI Digital input. Same as existing.

2 Aux Voltage Sense DI Digital input. Same as existing.
3 SLIM-ON Signal DI Digital input. Same as existing.
4 Position FBI AI Analog input. Same as existing.
5 Coil Voltage 1 AI Analog input. Same as existing.
8 Target Position 2 AO Analog output.
OW350_R1150 697
I/O NAME TYPE DETAILS NOTES

CHANNEL
9 Status Word 1 AI Analog input. Same as existing.

VP Status
10 Position FB2 AI Analog input.
11 Command Register AO Analog output. Same as existing.

VP Command
12 Target Position 1 AO Analog output. Same as existing.
VP Demand
13 Position FB3 AI Analog input.
14 Status Word 2 AI Analog input.
9.8.12 I/O Channel Fields - (ERVP)
The following table lists the I/O Channel Field values:
I/O Channel Field values
I/O CHANNEL IT FIELD HD FIELD BP FIELD YB / YS FIELDS
1 (DI) Shutdown Status 0x40000102 baseAddr + 8 4 n/a

data_type: 0x01
2 (DI) Aux Voltage Sense 0x40000102 baseAddr + 8 5 n/a
data_type: 0x01
3 (DI) SLIM-ON Signal 0x40000102 baseAddr + 8 6 n/a
data_type: 0x01
4 (AI) Position FBI 0x40000902 baseAddr + 4 n/a YB: 0.0
data_type: 0x09 YS: 105.025641
5 (AI) Coil Voltage 1 0x40000e02 baseAddr + 7 n/a YB: 0.0
data_type: 0x0e YS: 10.235
8 (AO) Target Position 2 0xc0000402 baseAddr + 5 n/a n/a
data_type: 0x04
9 (AI) Status Word 1 0x40001402 baseAddr + 8 n/a YB: 0.0
data_type: 0x14 YS: 1.0
10 (AI) Position FB2 0x40000902 baseAddr + 5 n/a YYB: 0.0
data_type: 0x09 YS: 105.025641
698 OW350_R1150
I/O CHANNEL IT FIELD HD FIELD BP FIELD YB / YS FIELDS
11(AO) Command 0xc0002902 baseAddr + 10 n/a n/a

Register
data_type: 0x29
12 (AO) Target Position 1 0xc0000402 baseAddr + 4 n/a n/a
data_type: 0x04
13 (AI) Position FB3 0x40000902 baseAddr + 6 n/a YB: 0.0
data_type: 0x09 YS: 105.025641
14 (AI) Status Word 2 0x40001402 baseAddr + 14 n/a YB: 0.0
data_type: 0x14 YS: 1.0
9.8.13 I/O Bus Communication Timeout settings - (ERVP)
The following attributes are defined for the ERVP:

 Label: I/O Bus Timeout Bits
 Type: Pull-down list
 Size: 3 Bits
 Target: Register 13, 2, 3, 4.
Timeout Settings
DISPLAY DATABASE / BIT VALUE
16 seconds 0 (000b)
4 seconds 1 (001b)
2 seconds 2 (010b)
1 second 3 (011b)
500 milliseconds 4 (100b)
250milliseconds 5 (101b)
Note: Default value is 16 seconds.
OW350_R1150 699
9.8.14 Ignore Shutdown - (ERVP)
The ignore shutdown attribute is defined for the ERVP:

 Label: Ignore Shutdown Input
 Type: Checkbox
 Size: 1 Bit
 Target: Register 13, bit 5
 Default Value: Not checked (bit value = 0)
9.8.15 Feedback "A" Configuration - (ERVP)
The Feedback "A" Configuration attribute is unique to the ERVP.

 Label: Feedback "A" Configuration
 Type: Pulldown list
 Size: 2 bits
 Target: Register 13, bits 6 and 7
Feedback "A" Configuration
6 - wire LVDT 0 (00b)

4 - 20 mA 2 (10b)
Reserved 3 (11b)
Note: Default value is 6 - wire LVDT.
9.8.16 Feedback "B" Configuration - (ERVP)
The Feedback "B" Configuration attribute is unique to the ERVP.

 Label: Feedback "B" Configuration
 Size: 2 bits
Feedback "B" Configuration

4 - 20 mA 2 (10b)
700 OW350_R1150
Reserved 3 (11b)
Note: Default value is 6 - wire LVDT.
9.8.17 RS485 Magnetostrictive sensor - (ERVP)
The RS485 Magnetostrictive sensor attribute is unique to the ERVP.

 Label: RS485 Magnetostrictive sensor
 Size: 2 bits
Magnetostrictive sensor
Not used 0 (00b)
Start / Stop protocol 1 (01b)

SSI protocol 2 (10b)
Reserved 3 (11b)
Note: Default value is not used.
9.8.18 Dual Channel / Backup Feedback Enable - (ERVP)
The Dual Channel / Backup Feedback Enable attribute is unique to the ERVP.
 Label: Dual Channel / Backup Feedback
 Size: 2 bits
Dual Channel / Backup Feedback Enable
Reserved 0 (00b)
Dual Channel 1 (01b)

Backup Feedback 2 (10b)
OW350_R1150 701
Note: Default value is Reserved.
9.8.19 Module Configuration / Status Register (0xd) Configuration - (ERVP)
The configuration of register 13 (0xd) for the ERVP is as defined in the Dual Channel / Backup
Feedback Enable (see page 701) section. The following register bits are standard for all Ovation
I/O modules and are defined as follows:
 Bit 0: Module Configured: the Engineering Tools software hard codes this bit to 1.
 Bit 1: Forced / Internal Error: The Engineering Tools software hard codes this bit to 0.
9.8.20 Module Configuration / Status Register 13 Status - (ERVP)
For diagnostic / status purposes, the only applicable bits are as follows:
 Bit 0: Module Configures. Alarm on 0.
 Bit 1: Forced / Internal Error. Alarm on 1.
The other bits provide read-back values of the configuration settings and will not be alarmed.
An Ovation module (RM) point assigned to an ERVP Controller module should have the following
alarm-related fields set by the Engineering Tools software:
 Alarm Group Bit Mask (E0): 0x0003
 Alarm Group Bit Sense (E1): 0x0001
9.8.21 Configuration Register 13 definitions - (ERVP)
Configuration Register 13 definitions
BIT NUMBER DEFINITION
0 Set by the controller to configure the module.

1 Set by the Controller to force error (see 16DS033) (module alarm on 1).
2–4 I/O bus communication timeout setting (see 16DS033).
5 Ignore Shutdown configure bit.
6 and 7 Enumerated type to configure the "A" feedback as follows:
00 – 6-wire AC
01 – Single AC feedback on "A" input
10 – 4-20 feedback on "A" input (implies G05 PVP)
11 – Not used (TBD)
8 and 9 Enumerated type to configure the "B" feedback as follows:
00 – "A" and "B" used for 6-wire AC
01 – Single AC feedback on "B" input
10 – 4-20 feedback on "B" input (implies G05 PVP)
702 OW350_R1150
10 and 11 Enumerated type to configure the RS485 magnetorestrictive sensor:

00 – Not enabled
01 – Magnetorestrictive Start/Stop device
10 – Magnetorestrictive SSI device
12 Dual channel feedback enable.
13 Backup feedback enable (bits 12 and 13 are mutually exclusive).
14 TBD
15 TBD
9.8.22 Status Register 13 definitions - (ERVP)
Status Register 13 definitions
0 Module configured
1 Internal error
2–4 Module timeout setting
5
6 Redundant Link Status bit:
0 = good
1 = bad
Module alarm on 1
7 Severe Fatal Error (Module alarm on 1)
(See reg E for specific error)
8 Coil 1 shorted (Module alarm on 1)
11 Coil 3 open (Module alarm on 1)
14 Contingency (Module alarm on 1)
15 Position Feedback trouble (Module alarm on 1)
OW350_R1150 703
Status Register 14 definitions
Bits 0 thru 15 Not Used (TBD)
Status register 1 is a packed point from the hardware standpoint and for I/O scanning. Specific bit
definitions are provided in the following table:
Status Register 1 bit numbers and definitions
0 thru 3 RVP modes are a follows:

0000 – Not used
0001 – PE kine active - factory mode
0010 – Start mode
0011 – Test mode
0100 thru 0111 – not used
1000 – Local mode
1001 – Calibrating in local mode – seated
1010 – Calibrating in local mode – backseated
1011 – Calibrating in local mode
1100 – Normal mode
1101 – Calibrating in normal mode – seated
1110 – Calibrating in normal mode – backseated
1111 – Calibrating in normal mode
4 Shutdown input status.
5 Auxiliary voltage sense.
6 SLIM-ON signal.
7 RVP alive flag in redundant configuration.
8 At NULL point during calibration (this bit is not valid for 4-20 feedbacks, single winding
feedbacks, or magnetorestrictive devices.
9
10 Primary/backup status for dual RVP redundant configuration:
0 = Primary
1 = Backup
0 = Otherwise
11 Feedback "A" trouble
For 6-wire feedbacks, this bit is set if one of the two windings does not show AC
oscillation, required minimum amplitude, or exceeds the maximum amplitude as
established during calibration.
For 3 or 4 wire feedbacks, this bit is set if the signal does not show excitation, proper
amplitude, or is outside the calibration values.
704 OW350_R1150
12 RVP disarmed (redundant only)

13 Feedback "B" trouble
For 6-wire feedbacks, this bit is 0.
For 3 or 4 wire feedbacks, this bit is set if the signal does not show excitation, proper
amplitude, or is outside the calibration values.
For 4-20 feedbacks, this bit is set if the feedback is less than 3 mA, or is greater than
21mA.
14 Magnetorestrictive sensor trouble
For magnetorestrictive feedbacks, this bit is set if the response does not return in the
designated timeframe, or is outside of the calibrated value.
for the SSI device the data packet should arrive on a fixed schedule.
For the Start/Stop device, the Stop response should return according to fixed timing,
typically within 1.5 msec.
15 Are not used.
9.8.25 Register 4, 5, and 6 format (read) - (ERVP)
16 - bit integer, -1560 to 32760 equals -5 to 105%.
Valves operate between 0 and 100%. However, due to thermal expansion of the valve assembly,
the position may indicate a value below 0 or above 100. The value is considered valid and good
quality during those ranges. Likewise, the target position may range beyond 0 and 100 in order to
influence the PI equation to saturate the output in one direction or the other.
9.8.26 Register 7, 9, and 11 format - (ERVP)
Standard AI format. Amplitude is in bits 0 through 11.
0 thru ~ 10.3 volts represented as 0xC000 thru 0xCFFF

-0 (count negative) thru ~ -10.3 volts represented as 0xFFFF thru 0xF000
This format is the same as the legacy RVP format.
OW350_R1150 705
9.8.27 Register 10 format, command register - (ERVP)
Register 10 is a packed point from the hardware and I/O scanning viewpoint. The following table
list the bit number and definitions:
Register 10
BIT DEFINITION
NUMBER
0 , 1 and 2 Calibration requests are as follows:

000 – No request
001 – Zero hot cal
010 – Top hot cal
011 – Full Calibration
100 – go to null point (This command is ignored for non-6 wire feedback devices.)
101 – Invalid
110 – Invalid
111 – Invalid
3 Not used.
4 Not used.
5 Partner active flag used in dual RVP redundant configurations.
6 Partner primary/backup status in dual RVP redundant configurations.
7 Not used.
8 Arm PVP command.
9 Extinguish field power command.
10 Primary mode command.
11 Backup mode command.
12 Not used.
13 Not used.
14 Not used.
15 Not used.
706 OW350_R1150
9.8.28 Diagnostics - (ERVP)
One important feature of the servo valve is an adjustable mechanical bias mechanism. This
mechanism creates a slight deflection in the valve spool so that a small amount of hydraulic fluid
can escape the actuator and close the valve. Therefore, if there is no voltage applied to the servo
valve, the actuator slowly moves toward the closed position. This deflection is typically overcome
by -200 millivolts, so that when the valve is positioned and steady, this small voltage is seen on
the servo valve.
The servo valve has two voltage coils, either of which can deflect the spool when excited.
The combination of these features provides the following:

 Redundancy feature that protects against broken wires or shorted coils.
 Ability to be diagnosed.
 A predictable shutdown mechanism for the following:
 In the event the firmware diagnoses a catastrophic error and executes a shutdown.
OR
 An error mode occurs that allows a hardware watchdog timer to expire and de-power the
Electronics module‟s FVP field card.
The Valve Positioner continuously runs diagnostics to ensure that the circuit is operating properly.
Certain conditions can cause the Valve Positioner to dive, essentially removing the output signal
and allowing the valve to drift shut.
As a general rule, the card views error conditions on start up as no-go or fatal errors. This means
that the Valve Positioner does not generate an output to the valve. See the following error
descriptions for specifics.
OW350_R1150 707
9.9 Numalogic Fast Ethernet Remote Node (Windows Ovation 3.4 and above)
9.9 Numalogic Fast Ethernet Remote Node (Window s Ovation 3.4

and above)
9.9.1 Overview
The Numalogic Fast Ethernet Remote Node (NFE-RN) is a remote I/O subsystem which provides
an interface to the Numalogic PC700 series Remote I/O. The NFE-RN is comprised of a base
assembly, power supplies, and redundant Numalogic Fast Ethernet Remote Node Controllers
(NFE-RNCs). The NFE-RNCs contain four Ethernet ports.
Note: The Numalogic Fast Ethernet Remote I/O subsystem is only available for Ovation
software releases 3.4 and later.
The Ovation to Numalogic Fast Ethernet Remote Node controller provides 100MBps Ethernet
connectivity between the existing OCR400 Controller and remotely located Numalogic P700 I/O
systems. This controller provides four external ports available from an integral switch – a single
100BaseFX fiber optic connection and three 10/100BaseTX Fast Ethernet ports. One of these
ports (typically the fiber port) can be used for connection to the OCR400 Controller. The other
ports can be used for connection of up to two additional Remote Node Controllers.
The fundamental architecture incorporates a backplane with an associated plastic carrier for the
redundant Remote Node Controllers. The backplane incorporates necessary power supply
connectors, power supply status connectors, and Numalogic I/O bus ribbon cable connector.
Additionally, the backplane provides a connector for the required redundant 8V Power supply that
provides I/O power to the Numalogic modules.
Additionally, the system requires redundant 24V and 12V power supplies. The backplane
distributes this power and power supply status information. A standard solution for providing
power distribution as well as the backplane, 8V power supply and associated wiring is provided by
drawing 5X00512.
Note: Two Numalogic Fast Ethernet Remote Node controllers will be required for each remote
node to permit redundancy.
9.9.2 Supported Numalogic modules
The supported Numalogic modules are the PC700 I/O modules:

 NL 710 120 VAC/DC Input module (accepts 16 discrete 120V AC/DC signals).
 NL 736 120 VAC Output module (provides 8 isolated outputs).
 NL 737 Relay Output module (provides 8 outputs).
 NL 752 4 Channel Digital to Analog Converter.
 NL 742E 1-5V 8 Channel Analog to Digital Converter.
 NL 742A 0-5V 8 Channel Analog to Digital Converter.
708 OW350_R1150
9.9.3 Subsystems - Numalogic Fast Ethernet
Numalogic Fast Ethernet Remote Node part numbers
PART NAME PART NUMBE R
Ovation Remote Node Numalogic I/O Interface Kit 5X00512

Ovation Remote Node Numalogic Controller Module 5X00467
Ovation Remote Node Numalogic Power Supply Module 5X00522
Ovation Remote Node Numalogic Base Unit 5X00468
9.9.4 Power Supply - Numalogic Fast Ethernet
Features:
 12 V to 8 Volt non Isolated DC-DC converter
 Enable/Disable control from the RNC
 Voltage OK monitor
Numalogic I/O modules require 12 volt power to interface to the I/O bus. This power is supplied
from the backplane from a redundant set of off the shelf power supplies. Additionally, a redundant
set of 8 volt power supplies is required for the Numalogic Output cards. The Numalogic output
cards use 8 volts to drive the output opto-isolators. This power supply must has the ability to be
turned on and off under control of the RNC. This allows the RNC to turn off the outputs by a single
command if a fault (or communication timeout) has occurred. Also, it allows the outputs to be
initialized prior to enabling the outputs since Numalogic modules do not have a power on reset
capability.
OW350_R1150 709
9.9.5 Electronics module connectors - Numalogic Fast Ethernet
There are four external ports available from the switch:

 A single 100BaseFX fiber optic connection.
 Three 10/100BaseTX Fast Ethernet ports.
One of the external ports (typically the fiber port) can be used for connection to the OCR400
Controller. The other external ports can be used for connection of up to two additional Remote
Node Controllers.
Note: Only three of the four external ports can be utilized at one time.
9.9.6 Diagnostics - Numalogic Fast Ethernet
Numalogic Remote Node Controller LED Diagnostics
LED DESCRIPTION
P (green) Power OK LED. This LED is lit when the logic board‟s +5V and +3.3V digital supply
voltage level is OK.
710 OW350_R1150
LED DESCRIPTION
C (green) Communication OK LED. This LED is lit when the Ovation Controller is communicating
with the node.
E (red) Fault LED. This LED is lit when the Ovation Controller is not communicating with the
node.
ACT (green) Ethernet Activity LED. This LED indicates Ethernet activity on the internal diagnostic port.
FDX (yellow) Full-duplex Communications LED. This LED indicates full-duplex Ethernet
communications on the internal diagnostic port.
MAC (green) MAC LED. This LED indicates Ethernet activity between the onboard Ethernet switch and
the MAC.
UTP1 (green) Interface 1 Activity LED. This LED indicates Ethernet activity on interface 1.
FIBER Fiber LED. This LED indicates Ethernet activity on the fiber port.
(green)
IO (green) IO LED. This LED is on when the 8V is enabled and the node is in control.
E5, E4, E3, Not in control: Single bouncing LED.
E2, E1 In control: Multiple bouncing LEDs.
9.9.7 Specifications - Numalogic Fast Ethernet
DESCRIPTION VALUE
24V Main Power Supply Fast Ethernet Remote Electronics module +24V Main Current: 179 mA typ.
200 mA max.
Fast Ethernet Remote Electronics module +24V Main Power:
4.3 W typ.
4.8 W max.
12V Power Supply Fast Ethernet Remote Electronics module +12V Current:
17 mA typ.
Backplane (transient - during I/O cycle):
156 mA Typ
Total current from power supply Including power for Numalogic I/O: 6A
Power supply must be equipped with a closed contact VOK status.
8V Power Supply Vin range: 11.75V – 12.25V
Vout: 7.8V min 8.3V max
Load: 0 to 3.2A
Remote I/O UTP Ethernet 10/100Mbps UTP ports: 3
Ports Distance: 100m max
IEEE 802.3 Compliant
Auto negotiation support Configurable
MDIX support Configurable
Remote I/O Fiber Optic 100Mbps Fiber Optic ports: 1
Ethernet Ports Distance: 2km
Fiber Type: Multi Mode, 1300nm
Connector: LC
Operating Temperature Range 0°C to 60°C
OW350_R1150 711
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Humidity (non-condensing) 0% to 95% relative humidity, non-condensing, through an ambient air

temperature range of 0°C through 60°C, but with a maximum wet bulb
temperature not over 35°C (95°F).
Vibration The module shall remain operational while subject to testing defined in IEC 68-2-
6 over the following curve: 0.15mm displacement from 10 to 57 Hz and 2G's from
57 to 500 Hz, when attached to a properly mounted DIN rail.
Shock The module will remain operational and reliable after being subjected to testing
defined in IEC 68-2-27 over the following curve: 15 G's for 11 milliseconds and
1/2 sine wave.
712 OW350_R1150
S E C T I O N 10
10 Noise minimization and causes
IN THIS SECTION
Electrical noise and causes ............................................................................................. 713

Noise Discrimination ....................................................................................................... 714
Noise energy level ........................................................................................................... 714
Noise frequency .............................................................................................................. 715
Sources (Signal and Noise) ............................................................................................ 715
Noise sources.................................................................................................................. 716
Noise classes .................................................................................................................. 716
What types of digital signal noise rejection are used? .................................................... 717
Analog Signal Noise Rejection ........................................................................................ 717
Output Signal Noise Rejection ........................................................................................ 717
Noise-Sensitive Circuit Noise Rejection .......................................................................... 718
Analog Signal Shielding Techniques .............................................................................. 720
What are some Common Input Considerations? ............................................................ 722
10.1 Electrical noise and causes
A wide variety of analog and/or digital circuits are associated with the Ovation System‟s
installation. There are low-level voltage circuits, high-level voltage circuits, circuits that transfer
information, and circuits that transfer power. These circuits are placed into two categories: noise-
producing circuits and noise-sensitive circuits.
Noise problems typically occur when transmitting analog (voltage, current, and other measured
values) or digital information (on/off conditions, pulse trains or similar data) via inter-connected or
wired circuits. The information carried by signals in such circuits may become distorted during
transfer and errors may result from this distortion.
The difference between the signal of transmitted information and the signal of that information as
received is called noise (see the figures in Energy Level (see page 714) and Frequency (see
page 715)). The noise minimization techniques briefly described in this section focus on
preventing errors by either eliminating the noise, or when elimination is not possible, performing
steps to lessen its impact.
The following topics discuss the causes of electrical noise in your Ovation system and the
recommended techniques for eliminating or reducing that noise.
 Noise Discrimination (see page 714).
 Noise Sources (see page 715).
 Noise Classes (see page 716).
 Noise Rejection.
 Analog Signal Shielding Techniques (see page 720).
 Common Input Considerations (see page 722).
OW350_R1150 713
10.2 Noise Discrimination
10.2 Noise Discrimination
Natural signal properties (such as the peaks of a digital signal) or conditions created during signal
transmission (such as the voltage of the analog signal) are used to make the desired information
in the signal appear different from the noise. The recovery of correct information from a noisy
signal therefore depends upon the ability to subtract the noise from the desired information.
Three components of a signal that can be used to separate the desired information from a noisy
signal are:
 Energy Level (see page 714).
 Frequency (see page 715).
 Noise Sources (see page 715) (of both Signal and Noise).
The following information explains how each of these components can be applied to minimize
errors that may occur because of a noisy signal.
10.3 Noise energy level
The energy level is the total energy for the signal plus any induced noise. If there is a significant
difference between the signal and the noise, then the noise is rejected easily by thresholding
techniques (as identified as Desirable in the following figure). If there is not a significant difference
between the signal and the noise, then the noise is not easily rejected (as identified as
Undesirable in the following figure).
Desirable Undesirable
1 threshold
0 threshold
Ideal Signal Ideal Severe

Signal plus Signal Noise
Noise Imposed
Threshold discrimination is possible because The noise and signal have insufficient
of sufficient contrast between noise and amplitude contrast to permit simple
signal amplitude. threshold discrimination.
Figure 190: Amplitude Discrimination Example
714 OW350_R1150
10.4 Noise frequency
10.4 Noise frequenc y

Most of the noise commonly encountered in industrial plants is related either to the power line
frequency and its low harmonics, or to switching transients. The analog signals are usually
lower in frequency than one cycle per second, while the digital signals between plant and
Controller appear from zero to millions of cycles per second.
Both analog and digital signals can be discriminated easily by eliminating frequency content from
external noise sources, such as switching transients, since the transients do not contain
appreciable energy below 0.5 MHz frequency. Low pass filtering is useful in recovering analog
signals from either power line or transient noise and for recovering digital signals from transient
noise. The following figure shows an example of these two types of noise.
mV
Power Line
60 Frequency Noise
50
40 Transient
Noise
30
20
Desired Signal
10
-10 0 Volt Reference
The signal above is shown at a 30mV level with both

14 mV RMS (60 Hz) and transient noise.
Figure 191: Typical Noisy Signal
10.5 Sources (Signal and Noise)
When signals are originally generated, most are relatively noise-free. The bulk of the noise
present on a received signal has been added to the signal during its transmission. Isolation and
segregation of signal sources and wiring from noise sources is highly effective as a recovery
means. This technique, as well as the low-pass filtering previously mentioned, serves to reduce
the recovery problem to one of amplitude or energy level discrimination.
OW350_R1150 715
10.6 Noise sources
10.6 Noise sources
The following devices and circuits are common sources of noise:

 Inductive devices, such as relays and solenoids.
 AC and DC power circuits, and wiring.
 Switch-gear.
 Fast-rise-time sources: thyristors and certain solid-state switching circuits.
 Variable-frequency or variable current devices.
10.7 Noise classes
Signal and power circuits, wiring, and cables are classified as high-level or low-level sources of
noise and interference. See Planning Your Ovation System. A definition of each class of noise is
given in the following table.
Noise class definitions
NOISE CLASS LEVEL DEFINITION
H High Includes AC/DC signals:

a. 110VAC, 115VAC under 15A except brakes and fields.
b. Up to 100A, 500VDC or 440VAC including brakes and fields.
c. Over 100A, 500VDC, 440VAC.
d. 2.3kV and over.
M Medium Includes digital I/O signals greater than 48V.
L Low Includes 24/48V digital I/O signals, and contact input.
Q Very Low Includes analog I/O signals as well as digital pulse inputs to high-speed
counting circuits and data links.
716 OW350_R1150
10.8 What types of digital signal noise rejection are used?
10.8 What types of digital signal noise rejection are used?
The Ovation system employs three specific noise rejection measures for digital signal plant
interconnections:
 Low pass filtering.
 Substantial signal levels (48 VDC or 115 VAC).
 Galvanically isolated.
Low pass filtering and the use of large signal level techniques provide frequency and energy level
discrimination, respectively.
Galvanic isolation of the digital signal receiver from ground is important as a means for rejecting
noise which causes both wires in a signal pair to change voltage-to-ground potentials. An
example of this type of isolation is a signal source (transmitter) which is grounded at a point
remote from the receiver, where transmitter and receiver grounds are not at the same voltage. In
this case, ground potential difference appears as a voltage on both wires of the corresponding
signal pair.
Another example in which galvanic isolation may be required to reject ground potential difference
noise would be in circuits where coupling exists between signal wires, inducing a potential in both
wires. Induced potentials can occur when signal wires are present in environments with changing
electromagnetic or electrostatic fields. Isolation may be required in this case.
An optical isolator (also known as an opto-isolator) may be used to bring digital signals into the
receiver. No receiver response to noise can occur unless signal line noise current flows. Low
frequency current, which may flow as a result of equal noise voltage-to-ground potentials on both
wires of the signal pair, is eliminated if the signal wires are not grounded at more than one point.
This is called the common-mode voltage.
Note: High frequency noise currents can flow using stray capacitance as part of their path. This
requires the use of low pass filtering in addition to the galvanic isolation.
10.9 Analog Signal Noise Rejection
Analog signal isolation is provided for the same reasons that are discussed for digital signals (see
page 717). However, since analog signals are typically low level, filtering and isolation noise
rejection techniques are more critical for analog signals than for digital signals.
Analog signal filtering is achieved by averaging applied signals for one cycle (or an integer
multiple of cycles) of the AC power line frequency. Power line related noise, at the power line
frequency and its harmonics, has exactly zero average value when the average is taken over
exactly one cycle and is filtered out of the signal by this technique.
Transient noise (high frequency damped ringing) has zero average value for averages taken over
time periods much longer than the duration of the transients.
10.10 Output Signal Noise Rejection
Digital output signals from the Ovation System to the plant are electromechanical or
semiconductor outputs which are galvanically isolated from the Controller. Analog output signals
from the Ovation system to the plant are either voltage or current outputs which are also
galvanically isolated from the Controller.
OW350_R1150 717
10.11 Noise-Sensitive Circuit Noise Rejection
All transmitting, low-level analog and digital circuits must be assumed to be noise-sensitive and to
require special protection against noise. Field signals from process transducers (thermocouples,
RTDs, and so forth) are especially susceptible to noise. Noise can be coupled into these sensitive
circuits in three ways:
 Electrostatic coupling via distributed capacitances.
 Electromagnetic coupling via distributed inductances.
 Conductive coupling, such as circuits sharing a common return.
Noise suppression for these noise sensitive circuits involves one or more of the following basic
measures:
 Physical separation (see page 718) between noise-producing and noise-sensitive circuits.
 Twisted-pair wiring (see page 718) for signal connection within plant.
 Proper grounding (see page 719), especially avoiding multiple grounding of cable shields and
proper shielding, especially cable shielding.
 Surge protection (see page 719) to IEEE and ANSI standards.
10.11.1 Physical Circuit Separation
Circuit separation is a simple and effective means of electrostatic and electromagnetic field
induced noise control. This is because electrostatic and electromagnetic fields decay with
increasing distance, producing lower amplitude noise and maintaining a good signal-to-noise
ratio.
10.11.2 Twisted-Pair Wiring
Twisted-pair wiring suppresses noise by acting to eliminate circuit loops which are sensitive to
stray electromagnetic fields. For this reason, it is recommended that all analog signal circuit
connections should be made with twisted-pair wire. Digital signal connections should carry a
group return (or common) wired in the same cable as the signal wires.
Twisted pairs are also recommended in digital circuits where unusually noisy environments exist.
Twisting of the signal wire and its return conductor becomes increasingly important as the length
of the two becomes greater, and as the distance from noise sources becomes less. In twisted
pairs or small cables (less than 1/2 inch outer conductor circle diameter), a twist rate of at least
one to two twists per foot is recommended.
718 OW350_R1150
10.11.3 Proper Grounding and Shielding
Proper grounding, along with shielding, causes noise-induced currents to flow in the shield, and
from the shield to ground, rather than in the corresponding signal conductors. Shielding itself is
useful in avoiding capacitively coupled noise. The shield‟s sole function is to decrease effective
capacitance from conductors inside the shield to conductors outside. To accomplish this, the
shield should be as continuous as possible and equipped with a “drain wire” for secure
single-point grounding.
Conductors and corresponding returns may be grouped within a shield only if capacitive coupling
between them is acceptable. Avoid the grouping of low-level and high-level analog inputs, contact
inputs, and contact outputs within a single shield. Shields are used as current-carrying conductors
on some systems. To be effective, shields are grounded at the same point as the signals within,
except as otherwise noted within this document.
10.11.4 Surge protection
Surge protection to IEEE C37.90.1 -1989 (Reference ANSI C37.90.1-1989) standards is provided
on most Ovation I/O modules. Check individual module descriptions for availability or possible
additional conditions.
Ovation I/O modules, designated as being CE Mark compliant, have surge protection as shown in
the following table when installed in CE Mark certified cabinets:
Surge Protection Levels
SPECIFICATION LEVEL
EN 61000-4-3 (Radiated Field Immunity) 10 V/m

EN 61000-4-4 (Electrical Fast Transient Immunity) 1 Kv
EN 61000-4-5 (Surge Immunity) 1 Kv
EN 61000-4-6 (Conducted Radio Frequency Immunity) *10 V rms
*The HART Analog Input and HART Analog Output modules meet a reduced level of 3V rms.
OW350_R1150 719
10.12 Analog Signal Shielding Techniques
For noise suppression purposes, analog signals of less than one volt is considered low-level and
(as is the case with all analog signals), require shielding. Individually twisted and shielded pairs
should be used for all analog input signal wiring. Multi-pair cable can be used if each twisted pair
in the cable has its own insulated shield. Use the following guidelines to shield signals:
 Ground the analog signal shield.
 Ground the shield at one end only, preferably to a single point at the signal source, except as
otherwise noted in this document.
 Connect the low side of the signal to the shield at the signal source. If the shield cannot be
conveniently grounded at or near the signal source, ground it at the Controller. An ideal
analog signal field connection is shown in the following figure
 Run the shield (unbroken) from the transducer to the shield terminal of the Analog to Digital
(A/D) front-end at the Analog Input module. (See Planning Your Ovation System.) Maintain
shield continuity at junction boxes when they are used.
Unbroken A/D Guard

Cable Shield
ES A/D
Drain Wire
Twisted Pair
Single Point
Ground
Figure 192: Ideal Analog Signal Field Connection
720 OW350_R1150
The following figure shows the typical recommended thermocouple analog signal wiring and the
next figure shows the recommended sensor analog signal wiring.
Note: See Personality Module Jumpers (see page 29) for details on how to access the jumpers.
Figure 193: Typical Thermocouple Analog Signal Wiring by User
OW350_R1150 721
10.13 What are some Common Input Considerations?
Figure 194: Typical Sensor Analog Signal Wiring by User
10.13 What are some Common Input Considerations?

4 to 20 mA Signal Considerations
When sufficient separation from noise sources exists, this standard class of control signal does
not require shielded cables. However, it is strongly recommended for surge protection. Use of
twisted-pair cables is recommended.
Digital Signal Considerations
The Ovation System‟s digital I/O circuits used in data transmission do not require individual
twisted or shielded pair conductors. A multi-conductor cable, in which one conductor serves as a
common return and with a single overall cable shield, is sufficient for most Ovation digital signal
applications.
Contact Closure Signal Considerations

 Outputs (CCO) - These circuits usually require no shielding.
 Inputs (CCI) - These circuits require no shielding if the net current in the cable is zero.
CE Mark Considerations
For CE Mark certified systems, all field wiring must be braid-shielded and grounded at the entry
point of the cabinet using the recommended hardware. (See Planning Your Ovation System.)
722 OW350_R1150
S E C T I O N 11
11 Defining and addressing the I/O for the OCR161 and

OCR400
IN THIS SECTION
What is the process for planning the I/O for your system? ............................................. 724
What are the Ovation I/O module base types? ............................................................... 725
What is an Ovation I/O module address? ....................................................................... 726
Controller interfaces, OCR400 and OCR161 .................................................................. 734
Common cabinet components (Controller, remote node, and extended cabinet) .......... 740
Common cabinet configurations ...................................................................................... 748
Local I/O .......................................................................................................................... 750
Remote I/O ...................................................................................................................... 753
Extended I/O cabinet components .................................................................................. 759
Remote node cabinet components ................................................................................. 761
Selecting the I/O interface cards ..................................................................................... 771
What changes can you make to an I/O device? ............................................................. 771
General requirements for I/O cable ................................................................................. 771
Adding OCR400 Controllers to WDPF Q-Line I/O .......................................................... 773
New power distribution scheme ...................................................................................... 774
OW350_R1150 723
11.1 What is the process for planning the I/O for your system?
11.1 What is the process for planning the I/O for your s ystem?
The Ovation Distributed Control System provides modulating control, sequential control, and data
acquisition for a variety of system applications. This system consists of a configurable mix of
functional input/output (I/O) modules that communicate on the I/O bus to the Ovation Controller.
I/O modules provide an interface between the Ovation Controller and the processes in the plant.
Ovation I/O modules are “plug-in” components with built-in fault tolerance and diagnostics. They
are able to operate on a wide range of signals and perform a multitude of functions.
The Developers Studio I/O (input/output) Devices folder contains tools used to define the I/O
modules for the Ovation system. The I/O Device folders contain Setup Wizards and dialog boxes
that provide visual representation of the I/O devices for an Ovation system.
Before the I/O devices folder can be used to define the I/O hardware, you need to secure the I/O
for your Ovation system.
After securing the plan, the information is entered into the I/O Devices portion of the system
hierarchy to define the I/O for your Ovation system. I/O Devices are defined individually for each
drop.
During configuration, the following elements are assigned point names by the system to identify
the elements to the Ovation database:
 Each remote node is assigned a Node (RN) record type point name. The RN record type is
used because it contains bits that are used to monitor the node power supply.
 Each Ovation I/O module is given a Module (RM) record type point name. The RM point is
used to configure the I/O module and to provide status/alarm information about the I/O
module. Points can then be assigned to each module by using the Hardware tab in the Points
folder. Refer to the Ovation Record Types Reference Manual for additional information.
724 OW350_R1150
11.2 What are the Ovation I/O module base types?
11.2 What are the Ovation I/O module base types?
Ovation I/O bases house the Ovation I/O modules and provide a mechanism for you to run field
wiring and connect field signals to the Ovation I/O. Series of bases can be connected together to
form a “branch” of Ovation I/O.
The Ovation system supports two different types of bases:

 Standard I/O base.
 Relay Output base.
Bases can be mixed within a given I/O branch and cabinet. There are restrictions as to how these
bases can be mixed. (See Planning Your Ovation System.)
Figure 195: Standard I/O and relay output bases
11.2.1 What is a standard I/O module base?
A standard Ovation I/O base houses up to two standard Ovation I/O modules. Standard Ovation
I/O modules are designed to fit securely into the standard I/O bases.
Each standard I/O module is assigned a logical address. Since each standard I/O base can house
two Ovation I/O modules, a standard I/O base occupies two logical module addresses.
11.2.2 What is a relay output module base?
The relay output base houses one module and requires one I/O address. Although the relay
output base only contains one module, it is 1.5 times longer than the standard I/O module base
to allow additional space to house the relays.
OW350_R1150 725
11.3 What is an Ovation I/O module address?
The System assigns an address to each Ovation module defined by the Ovation Developer
Studio. This address is based on the logical location of the module with respect to the Ovation
Controller and is used by the Ovation Developer Studio to configure the hardware information for
a point.
A standard I/O base consists of two logical modules; and a relay output base has one logical
module.
11.3.1 What are the guidelines for positioning I/O modules in cabinets?
When selecting module positions observe the following guidelines:

 The position of the module in the cabinet determines the address of the module.
 Placement of I/O modules are from top to bottom on the left side of a cabinet and from
bottom to top on the right side of a cabinet.
 If Relay Output modules are mixed with standard I/O modules on the same branch, always
start the standard I/O module base in an odd-numbered module position on the branch
(positions 1/2, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8).
Relay Output modules can be placed in odd or even numbered positions. For example,
modules can begin in 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 slots.
726 OW350_R1150
 Physical cabinet size and branch power requirements may limit the number of modules that
can be configured in a branch.
Figure 196: Examples of cabinets with standard I/O and relay modules
11.3.2 What is the addressing format for I/O modules?
The logical I/O address is composed of three numbers (four when remote I/O is used) separated
by decimals and in the following format:
 D.N.B.S where:
D = Device number assigned to the OCR1100 and OCR400 IOIC
N = Node (only used in Remote I/O; 1 through 8).
B = Branch (1 through 8).
S = Slot where module is located (1 through 8 for Ovation I/O).
(1 through 12 for Q-Line I/O).
OW350_R1150 727
 Standard I/O base assemblies

The I/O addressing for the Ovation database is determined from the positions of the bases
installed in the cabinets. Installation of standard I/O bases requires at least two I/O module
addresses on a branch. Their I/O module position must always start on odd positions.
I/O modules should be in the left-most branch of each side of a cabinet from the TOP down to the
BOTTOM. I/O modules in the right-most branch of each side of a cabinet are addressed from the
BOTTOM up to the TOP.
Emerson Process Management recommends that all bases (typically four) be installed in the right
side of a cabinet, even if the bases are not all filled with I/O modules. This prevents disruption of
the database if additional I/O modules are installed in the future.
 Relay output base assemblies
Relay Output bases can be located before or after standard I/O bases. Installation of relay output
bases requires one I/O module address on a branch and can begin on an odd or even position.
Note: Physical cabinet space may limit the Maximum number of bases in a given cabinet style.
When a relay output base is used before a standard I/O base, an even number of relay output
bases must be used so the I/O base starts at an odd position. If a standard I/O base follows an
odd number of relay output bases, the configuration is incorrect and does not work (see the
following figure for examples).
Figure 197: I/O and Relay Output module configuration examples
728 OW350_R1150
11.3.3 Examples of Controller cabinet I/O module addresses
Figure 198: I/O Address examples, modules A, B, C (Controller cabinet)
Note: PCI Cards 1 and 2 for the OCR161, IOIC module for the OCR400 and OCR1100.
 Module A address = 1.1.2.

 Module B address = 1.2.4.
 Module C address = 1.3.6.
OW350_R1150 729
11.3.4 Examples of extended I/O cabinet module addresses
Note: ROP transition panel is used when configuring cabinets (front of cabinet).
Figure 199: I/O Address examples, modules D, E, F (extended I/O cabinet)
Note: IOIC module for the OCR400 and OCR1100.
 Module D address = 1.5.6.

 Module E address = 1.6.1.
 Module F address = 1.8.8.
730 OW350_R1150
11.3.5 Examples of remote node I/O cabinet module addresses
The Node address (1 through 8) for Ovation remote I/O is determined by where the node is
connected to the MAU Attachment Unit (located in the Controller cabinet). The Node Selector
Switch in the Remote Node Cabinet is then set to match the connection position. See the Ovation
I/O module addressing (see page 726) section in the Ovation I/O Reference Manual for details
about addresses for remote nodes.
The Node is in MAU position 1 for the following examples:

 Module G address = 1.1.1.3.
 Module H address = 1.1.3.5.
OW350_R1150 731
11.3.6 Examples of Relay Output module addresses
Figure 200: I/O address examples, modules I and J (Relay Output modules)
Note: ROP transition panel is used when configuring cabinets (front of cabinet). Branch 7 (back
of cabinet) is composed solely of relay panels using RRP and RRB transition panels. (See
Ovation I/O Reference Manual.
IOIC module for the OCR1100 and OCR400.

 Module I address = 1.5.3.
 Module J address = 1.6.2.
 Module K address = 1.7.6.
Note: The back of the extended cabinet contains only one branch of Relay Output modules due
to physical limitations.
The Relay Output modules can also be used with the RRP and RRB transition panels (instead of
the ROP or TND panel). Using the RRP and RRB transition panel allows one “branch” of up to
eight relay bases to be housed in a single side of an Ovation ventilated extended cabinet in two
columns of four bases.
732 OW350_R1150
11.3.7 Q-Line I/O module addressing
The address for Ovation modules is determined by the location of the module in the I/O cabinet.
However, the address for a Q-Line card is determined by the jumper settings on the actual Q-Line
card. A visual inspection of the card should be used to determine the jumper settings. (See Q-
Line Installation Manual.)
Q-Line QBO modules are used to perform DIOB testing. The QBO card is addressed by entering
it in hexadecimal format into a dialog box. The box appears when a Q-Line module is defined and
configured through the Developer Studio.
Figure 201: Insert New QLine Module Wizard
OW350_R1150 733
11.4 Controller interfaces, OCR400 and OCR161
11.4.1 What are the Ovation Controller I/O interfaces?
Ovation Controllers provide various types of interfaces to communicate with the system and other
devices. These interfaces include:
 Ovation network.
 Dedicated backup.
 I/O devices.
Network interface ports
The Controller's processor module provides four network interface ports, labeled N1, N2, N3, and
N4. These ports are located at the top of the module housing. Port N2 is typically used for single
attached networking to the Ovation network. Port N3 provides an additional Ethernet interface for
dual attached networking. N4 is the default Ethernet interface for dedicated control
synchronization. Port N1 is an additional Ethernet interface for other uses, such as third-party
links, if necessary.
Network Ports
PORT SUPPORTS
N1 Third-party devices.
N2 Single attached network interface.
N3 Dual attached network interface or third-party device.
N4 Dedicated control synchronization or third-party device.
734 OW350_R1150
Note: When using direct connection (Port N4 to N4) control synchronization, make sure both
Controllers have control synchronization enabled and that the cable is attached before
performing a download, reboot, and load.
If a pair of redundant Controllers has been running with control synchronization enabled and
control synchronization is then disabled, disconnect the dedicated cable from the Controllers
before rebooting the Controllers with the new configuration.
Conversely, if a pair of redundant Controllers has been running with control synchronization
disabled and control synchronization is then enabled, connect the dedicated cable between the
Controllers after they have been running with the new configuration.
I/O interface ports
The Controller's I/O interface module supports up to 16 branches of local Ovation I/O, using ports
L1 and L2, physically located on the Controller Base Assembly, below the Controller. The
Controller also provides three RJ-45 interface ports to support additional local and remote I/O.
These ports are located at the top of the module housing and are labeled Q5, R4, and R3. The
port labeled Q5 supports up to four crates of local Q-Line I/O. Ports R3 and R4 are configured as
a pair. They can support three different options:
 Remote Ovation (R3/R4).
 Remote Q-Line (R3/R4).
 Local Q-Line (R4 only).
When configured for Ovation I/O, up to four nodes of remote Ovation I/O can be supported on
each port. Local Ovation I/O is not supported on either port. When ports R3/R4 are configured for
remote Q-Line, each port can support up to four nodes each with four crates per node. When
configured for local Q-Line, R4 can support up to four crates (1 node) of local Q-Line, but R3 must
be unoccupied.
Note: Ports R3 and R4 can be configured as a pair to support either Ovation I/O or Q-Line I/O,
but not a mixture of the two. Port Q5 supports only local Q-Line I/O. Ports L1 and L2 only
support local Ovation I/O.
The following list shows the configuration options:

 Port L1 supports up to 8 local branches of local Ovation I/O.
 Port L2 supports up to 8 local branches of local Ovation I/O.
 Port Q5 supports up to 4 crates of local Q-Line I/O (1 node).
 Port R3 supports one of the following:
 up to 4 nodes of remote Ovation I/O.
 up to 4 nodes of remote Q-Line I/O.
 Port R4 supports one of the following:
 up to 4 nodes of remote Ovation I/O.
 up to 4 nodes of remote Q-Line I/O.
 1 node of local Q-Line I/O.
OW350_R1150 735
(See the Q-Line Installation Manual and the Q-Line card types (see page 783) section in the
Ovation I/O Reference Manual for information about Q-Line modules.)
The following figure shows the physical locations of the interface ports and their uses:
Figure 202: Interface port locations
736 OW350_R1150
11.4.2 Controller backplane (OCR400 Controller)
11.4.3 What are the OCR161 Controller cabinet components and interfaces
The Ovation local I/O subsystem has the following features:

 Maximum number of local I/O modules per PCRL: 64 (eight branches with eight modules
each).
 Maximum number of Local I/O modules per Controller: 128 (two PCRLs)
 Modular, “plug-in” components.
 DIN Rail mounting of the I/O base units.
 Unique base unit interconnection scheme eliminates power and communications wiring.
Base unit common to all standard I/O modules and base units are available for Relay Output
modules.
The Ovation I/O Controller cabinet contains the following:

 Redundant Ovation Controller Chassis (see page 739) - Housing two separate Controllers.
Each Controller contains:
 Pentium PC Processor Board - To perform I/O control.
 Power Supply Board - Converts +24V to +5V and ±12V to power all components of the
Controller chassis.
 Network Interface Card - Provides the interface between the Ovation Controller and other
network components of the system, FDDI/CDDI and Fast Ethernet versions are
supported.
 PCRL Board - PCI to local Ovation I/O interface board, used only if controlling local I/O
modules (up to two PCRL cards per each Controller).
OW350_R1150 737
 PCQL Board - PCI to local Q-Line interface board, used only if controlling local Q-Line I/O
boards (up to two PCQL cards per each Controller). Refer to the Q-Line Installation
Manual for Q-Line I/O installation information.
 Power Supply - DIN Rail Mounted. Generates +24V to power the electronics in the I/O
Controller Cabinet, as well as +24V auxiliary power. Two are required for redundancy. An
optional separate +48V auxiliary power supply is also available.
 Power Distribution module (5X000489G01) - Provides connectors for cables used to distribute
+24V to the Redundant Controller Chassis, and +24V and auxiliary power to branches of local
I/O.
 Standard I/O modules and Bases (see page 740) - Standard Ovation I/O modules which
interface to field devices.
 Relay Output module and Bases (see page 771) - Relay module base, 1.5 times larger than a
standard I/O base unit, containing Electronics module and relays to control field devices (see
page 771).
 I/O Dual Branch Transition Panel (see page 775) (ROP - 4D33922) - Connects to two
branches of I/O, providing a point to bring in +24V redundant power, auxiliary power, and the
local I/O communications bus.
Connections are provided on the I/O Transition Panel to daisy-chain the local
I/O communications bus from one ROP to the next (up to eight I/O branches Maximum may
be daisy-chained together).
 I/O Branch Terminator (1B30023) - Connects to the A or B-side of a standard I/O base at the
end of a branch having no Attachment Unit module to terminate the local I/O bus.
Note: Refer to the Planning Your Ovation System manual for additional cabinet and cable
information.
CAUTION: The I/O addressing for the Ovation database is determined from the positions of
the bases installed in the cabinets.
Emerson recommends that all possible bases be installed in the right-most branch of each
side of a cabinet, even if they are not all filled with I/O modules. This prevents disruption of the
database if additional I/O modules are installed in the future.
I/O modules should be installed in the right-most branch of each side of a cabinet from the
BOTTOM UP. I/O modules should be installed in the left-most branch of each side of a cabinet
from the TOP DOWN.
If Relay Output modules are mixed with Standard I/O modules on the same branch, the
Standard I/O module base must always start in an odd-numbered position on the branch
(positions 1/2, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8).
738 OW350_R1150
11.4.4 Controller backplane (CBO) for the OCR161

C
Connector supplies power to PCPS Power Supplies, Controller fans, and Branches 1 and 2
Power Supply Connector Supplementary Status Connector

(Power and Status) (Status Only)
J25 J26
Fan Connectors
Controller #1 Controller #2
Reset Cable Connector
Reset Cable Connector

Left PCPS Right PCPS
Power Supply Power Supply
delivers +5V, delivers +5V,
±12V to cards ±12V to cards
in Controller 1 J25 in Controller 2
J3 J4
Local Local
Power Supply
Power Supply
Processor
Processor
IOIC Card 1
IOIC Card 2
IOIC Card 1
IOIC Card 2
NIC Card
NIC Card
I/O Cable I/O Cable

Left-side Right-side
PCPS
PCPS
Used when
IOICs are in Used when
L5 and R5. IOICs are in
Contains L4 and R4.
second I/O Bus, Slot L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 Slot R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 Contains
AUX Supply first I/O Bus,
branches Fuses branches
1 through 8 3 through 8
Branch 1 Branch 2
Left-side TWI Connector Right-side TWI Connector
(starting point of branch addressing)
Legend: Controller Backplane
Connectors on Controller Backplane
Circuit Boards plugged into Controller Backplane
Figure 203: Controller Backplane (CBO)
OW350_R1150 739
11.5 Common cabinet components (Controller, remote node, and extended cabinet)
11.5 Common cabinet components (Controller, remote node, and

extended cabinet)
The following figures illustrate components that may be contained in both Controller cabinets,
remote node cabinets and extended cabinets:
11.5.1 Ovation Power Distribution Module (PDM)
Figure 204: Ovation Power Distribution Module (PDM)
740 OW350_R1150
11.5.2 Ovation Standard I/O Modules and Base Units

A-Side TWI
Connector Personality B-Side TWI
Modules Connector
Electronics Modules
* Tightening torque:
5-7 in-lbs. (0.56-0.79 Nm)
Single wire: 22-12 AWG
Two Wire: 14 AWG max ea.
Termination Blocks *
Figure 205: Ovation Standard I/O Modules and Base Units
OW350_R1150 741
11.5.3 Relay Output Modules and Bases
A-Side TWI B-Side TWI

Connector Electronics Module
Connector
Relays
Base Unit
Field Terminations
*
* Tightening torque: 4.4-7.1 in-lbs. (0.50-0.80 Nm) Single Wire; 22-12 AWG (solid)
22-14 AWG (stranded)
12 KUEP Style Relays
A-Side TWI B-Side TWI

Connector Electronics Module Connector
Relays
Base Unit
Field Terminations
*
* Tightening torque: 4.4-5.3 in-lbs. (0.50-0.60 Nm) Single wire: 22-12 AWG
16 G2R Style Relays
Figure 206: Relay Output Modules and Bases
742 OW350_R1150
11.5.4 I/O Dual Branch Transition Panel (ROP)
Local I/O Bus Cable from Branch "n-1" +24V and AUX Power Connectors Local I/O Bus Cable to Branch "n+2"
(P7 supplies power to P8, to +24V fans, and (if existing)
to Branches "n" and "n+1")
IN OUT
AUX Supply Fuses for Branch "n" P7 P8 AUX Supply Fuses for Branch "n+1"
+24V Power Connectors
for Cabinet Fans
PGND F1 F2 F7 F8 PGND
TWI Connector to Local Branch "n" TWI Connector to Local Branch "n+1"
Figure 207: I/O Dual Branch Transition Panel (ROP)
OW350_R1150 743
11.5.5 Ovation I/O Single Branch Transition Panels
Local I/O Bus Cable from Branch "n-1" +24V and AUX Power Connectors Local I/O Bus Cable to Branch "n+1"
(P7 supplies power to P8, to +24V fans, and to (if existing)
the left side of Branch "n")
IN OUT
AUX Supply Fuses for
left side of Branch "n" P7 P8
Bus Termination for Branch "n"
for Cabinet Fans
PGND F1 F2 PGND
TWI Connector to left side of Local Branch "n" TWI Connector to right side of Local Branch "n"
Note
The RRP is typically used in conjunction with the RRB.
Transition Panel (RRP at top of branch)
TWI Connector for left side of Local Branch "n" TWI Connector for right side of Local Branch "n"
PGND PGND
+24V Power Connectors F2 F1
for Cabinet Fans
+24V and AUX Power
Connectors
(P7 supplies power to P8, P8 P7 AUX Supply Fuses
to 24V fans, and to the for right side of
right side of Branch "n") OUT IN Branch "n"
Notes
1. The RRP is typically used in conjunction with the RRB.
2. I/O module addresses continue from the left side TWI connector to the right side TWI connector.
Transition Panel (RRB at bottom of branch)
Figure 208: Ovation I/O Single Branch Transition Panels
744 OW350_R1150
11.5.6 Remote Node Controller (RNC)
Remote Node
Controller (RNC)
Personality Modules
Remote Node Controller

Electronics Modules
TWI Connector
to TND
R T R T
RS232
Remote Node Serial Ports Local I/O
Address Switch Bus Connector
Remote Node Controller Modules

(for Fiber-Optic Media)
Figure 209: Remote Node Controller (RNC)
OW350_R1150 745
11.5.7 Remote Node Transition Panel (TND)

(Future)
+24V and AUX Power Connector
Remote Node Controller TWI Connector Remote Node Power Supply TWI Connector
(P5 supplies power to Remote Node Controller,
to +24V fans, and to Branches 1 and 2)
P5
Supplementary Status Connector P6
AUX Supply Fuses for Branch 1 AUX Supply Fuses for Branch 2
for Cabinet Fans
F1 F2 F6 F7
PGND Branch Branch PGND

1 2
TWI Connectors to Local
I/O Branch
Figure 210: Remote Node Transition Panel (TND)
11.5.8 MAU with typical fiber-optic connector pairs (OCR400 Controller)
Figure 211: MAU with Typical Fiber-Optic Connector Pairs (OCR400 Controller)
746 OW350_R1150
11.5.9 MAU with typical fiber-optic connector pairs (OCR161 Controller)
Figure 212: MAU with Typical Fiber-Optic Connector Pairs (OCR400 Controller)
OW350_R1150 747
11.6 Common cabinet configurations
Controller)
Note: For the new power distribution scheme, refer to the New power distribution scheme (see
page 774) section.
Figure 213: Controller Cabinet Components and Cabling (local and remote I/O) (OCR400
Controller)
748 OW350_R1150
Controller)
page 774) section.
+24V main, +24V AUX Line Filter Primary AC Line

(CE Mark certified
(internal) system only) Input (external)
Primary Backup
Controller Controller Backup AC Line
Input (external)
PCPS Power Supply
PCPS Power Supply

PCI Processor
PCI Processor
Power
Distribution
+24V main, +24V AUX Module
+24V Backup
+24V Primary
Power Supply
Power Supply
and
PCRR
PCRR
PCRL
PCRL
AC line (internal)
NIC
NIC
+24V to DC Fans
+24V main, +24V AUX (internal)
(internal)
To extended Local
I/O Cabinet
(external)
Br 1 Br 2
Br 3 Br 4
Local I/O
Local I/O Transition Panel
Communications (ROP)
Cable (internal)
I/O
Base and
Modules
Relay Output
Network Cables Base and
to Concentrators Modules
or Ethernet switches
(external)
Primary Standard I/O
AUI Cable Base and
(internal) Modules
Backup
Remote AUI Cable
Node #1 (internal) Typical Customer
Primary Supplied Field
Fiber-Optic Wiring (external)
Cable
(external)
Typical Customer
Supplied Field Notes
Wiring (external) Internal cables
MAU * do not exit cabinet.
Attachment Unit External cables
Base * If there is no remote exit cabinet.
and Modules I/O, the MAU may be Earth ground
replaced by an I/O base. cables not shown.
If there is no MAU, a
terminator must be
Remote A placed at the end of B A
Node #1 the branch.
Backup Local I/O
Fiber-Optic Bus
Cable (external) Terminators
Cabinet Cabinet
Front Back
Figure 214: Controller Cabinet Components and Cabling (local and remote I/O) (OCR161
Controller)
OW350_R1150 749
11.7 Local I/O
11.7 Local I/O
acquisition for a variety of system applications. The local Ovation I/O consists of a mix of
functional I/O units (modules) that communicate on the I/O bus to the Controller in the Controller's
cabinet or in close proximity (9.1 meters (30 ft)).
Note: Ovation local I/O is applicable for use in CE Mark certified systems except where noted.
Ovation I/O (see page 752) also provides for remote I/O functions.
Typically, the Ovation local I/O subsystem contains:

 Controller cabinet with the redundant Ovation Controller, applicable IOIC (OCR400) or
PCQL/PCRL (OCR161), power supplies, and I/O modules,
 Extended I/O cabinet with additional I/O modules and power supplies.
 Appropriate cable and connections (see page 771) between the cabinets (See Planning Your
Ovation System.)
 Interface support of existing Q-Line I/O using the IOIC (OCR400) or a PCQL card (OCR161).
Note: Optional Ovation Marshalling cabinet configurations are also available, which provide for
halfshell wiring terminations. (See Planning Your Ovation System.)
750 OW350_R1150
11.7 Local I/O
11.7.1 Local I/O system configuration for the OCR400
The OCR400 is a second generation Ovation Controller and uses an Ovation I/O Interface Card
to communicate with Ovation I/O. Refer to the Ovation Ovation Controller (OCR400) User Guide
for additional information on the OCR400 I/O configuration.
The Ovation OCR400 Controller contains one IOIC module. This module provides ports that
connect to and support the following I/O module locations:
 Local Ovation I/O connects through ports L1 and L2.
 Remote Ovation I/O connects through IOIC ports R3 (nodes 0 through 3) and R4 (nodes 4
through 7).
 Local Q-line I/O connects through IOIC ports Q5 (DIOB 0) and R4 (DIOB 1).
 Remote Q-line I/O connects through IOIC ports R3 (nodes 0 through 3) and R4 (nodes 4
through 7).
One OCR400 Controller can support the following I/O modules in various combinations:
 Maximum of 128 local Ovation I/O modules.
 Maximum of 512 remote Ovation I/O modules.
 Maximum of 96 local Q-line I/O cards.
 Maximum of 384 remote Q-line I/O cards.
Observe the following combination rules:
 If you connect to remote Q-line I/O, you cannot connect to remote Ovation I/O. You can
connect to local Q-line through port Q5 (DIOB 0).
 If you connect to remote Ovation I/O, you cannot connect to remote Q-line I/O. You can
connect to local Q-line through port Q5 (DIOB 0).
 If you use both ports Q5 and R4 to connect to local Q-line I/O, you cannot connect to any
remote I/O.
You can always connect to local Ovation I/O.
Refer to the following diagram for possible combinations:
OW350_R1150 751
11.7 Local I/O
Figure 215: OCR400 I/O ports diagram
11.7.2 Local I/O system configuration for the OCR161
The Ovation local I/O subsystem has the following features:

 Maximum number of local I/O modules per PCRL: 64 (eight branches with eight modules
each).
 Maximum number of Local I/O modules per Controller: 128 (two PCRLs)
 Modular, “plug-in” components.
 DIN Rail mounting of the I/O base units.
 Unique base unit interconnection scheme eliminates power and communications wiring.
 Base unit common to all standard I/O modules and base units are available for Relay Output
modules.
752 OW350_R1150
11.8 Remote I/O
11.8 Remote I/O
Note: Ovation remote I/O is applicable for use in CE Mark certified systems except where
noted.
acquisition for a variety of system applications. Although using local I/O is typically the most
practical control solution, a remote process might need to be controlled.
Remote I/O is typically used where a process requires that I/O modules be located near the
process, even though the Controller is not. The remote I/O modules are connected to the
Controller through long distance, serial media, such as fiber-optic cables.
Typically, the Ovation remote I/O subsystem contains:

 Controller cabinet (see page 757) containing the redundant Ovation Controller, applicable I/O
Interface Controller (IOIC) or PCI cards, power supplies, and I/O modules.
 Remote Node cabinet(s) (see page 761) containing the redundant Remote Node Controller
module, as well as I/O cards.
 Extended I/O cabinet (see page 759) containing additional I/O modules and power supplies.
 Appropriate cable and connections between cabinets (See Planning Your Ovation System.)
Note: An optional Ovation Marshalling cabinet is also available. The rear of this 32 inch wide
cabinet provides for halfshell wiring terminations, but has the same mechanical and electrical
performance as the standard Ovation cabinet. (See Planning Your Ovation System.)
OW350_R1150 753
11.8 Remote I/O
11.8.1 Remote I/O features (OCR400 Controller)
The Ovation remote I/O subsystem has the following features:

 Maximum number of Remote Nodes: 8 nodes, redundant Controller.
1
 Maximum number of I/O modules per remote node: 64 (eight branches with eight modules
for each branch).
1
 Maximum number of I/O modules per Controller: 512 .
 Remote I/O Bus configuration: 10 BASE-FL Ethernet physical layer with a proprietary
protocol.
2
 Remote I/O cycle time: <100 microseconds (no repeaters ), double byte word master/slave
access as seen by the IOIC.
 Cyclic redundancy checking on all outbound and inbound messages. Retries on failed
messages.
 Standard Remote communications media offered: Fiber-optic
 Maximum cable length (see page 757) for 850 nm fiber-optic media: 2 km
 Remote communication diagnostics can be performed in the Primary and Backup system
without affecting I/O modules. The diagnostics available are:
1. Simulation of all types of bus cycles (such as local I/O including statuses, bit corruption,
message length faults, collision faults, and no response).
2. Loopback of all messages from IOIC through the MAU.
3. Connection check of AUI cable and remote node link.
 Status LEDs: Available on IOIC, MAU, and RNC modules.
 Interface support of existing Q-Line I/O using Q-Line QOR card.
 Redundancy provided through independent MAU and RNC modules as well as
communication media. The primary Controller has sole access to the remote I/O. The backup
can perform diagnostic tests of the backup remote I/O link and RNC.
1
These numbers represent hardware capabilities. Controller software limitations are not implied.
2
Repeaters are third-party Ethernet devices that must be endorsed by Emerson design
engineers.
11.8.2 Controller cabinet components (Remote I/O) (OCR400 Controller)
The Ovation Remote I/O Controller cabinet (see page 749) contains the following:
 Redundant Controller Chassis - This rack in the Controller cabinet provides the backplane for
two separate Controllers. For each Controller, the backplane interconnects the following
components:
 CPU module. Includes Fast Ethernet network interface.
 IOIC module - I/O interface Controller module serving as the master of the remote I/O
bus. Refer to the Q-Line Installation Manual for remote Q-Line I/O installation information
(only 850 nm optics, with 2 km Maximum length, are available for remote Q-Line
applications).
754 OW350_R1150
11.8 Remote I/O
An IOIC module has two Attachment Unit Interface (AUI) ports each of which may
connect to an Attachment Unit module using an AUI cable. Together, the two ports
typically serve as the primary I/O bus master with another IOIC providing the redundant
pair.
The IOIC module provides local power for itself and the CPU module.
I/O.
 Standard I/O modules and bases (see page 741) - Standard Ovation I/O modules which
 Relay Output module and bases (see page 742) - Relay module base, 1.5 times larger than a
standard I/O base unit, containing Electronics module and relays to control field devices).
 I/O Branch Terminator (see page 744) (1B30023) - Connects to the A or B-side of a standard
I/O base at the end of a branch having no Attachment Unit module to terminate the local I/O
bus.
Emerson recommends that all possible bases (typically four) be installed in the right-most
branch of each side of a cabinet, even if they are not all filled with I/O modules. This prevents
disruption of the database if additional I/O modules are installed in the future.
from the TOP DOWN.
(positions 1/2, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8).
 Media Attachment Unit (see page 747) (MAU) - This module provides a point of attachment
for fiber optic cables used to transfer messages over long distances between the IOIC and up
to four remote nodes (see page 770). The module directs messages between the IOIC and
one of the four remote nodes at a time as selected, converting signals readable by the IOIC to
signals compatible with the fiber optic media and vice versa. The following components
comprise the MAU:
 Electronics module (1C31179) - Houses the Attachment Unit Logic Board (LAU) which
provides power for the module and displays LED indication that the fiber optic cables are
connected and the Remote Node Controller module has power.
OW350_R1150 755
11.8 Remote I/O
 Personality module (1C31181) - Houses the Attachment Unit Personality Board (PAU)
which translates signals between the PCRR and the fiber optic media and provides
connectors for the fiber optic cables.
MAU Subsystem
ELECTRONICS PERSONALITY 1 CHANNELS OPTICS

LENGTH OF OPTICAL LINK
MODULE MODULE
1C31179G01 1C31181G01 Up to 2 kilometers (6,560 ft) 2 850 nm

1
In order not to be required to select extended IOIC time-out periods, it is recommended that you do NOT
exceed an optical length of 3.7 km.
2
An Ovation Controller cabinet MAU MUST use the same type of optics (850 nm or 1300 nm) for each of
the remote nodes that it interfaces. An MAU cannot interface both 850 nm remote nodes (using 1C1204G01
Personality modules) and 1300 nm remote nodes (using 1C31204G03 Personality modules.)
 Media Attachment Unit Base (1C31206) - This base holds a Maximum of two modules
and provides a connector for the AUI Cable which interconnects the IOIC and Attachment
Unit module. The backplane routes +24V to the Attachment Unit modules for power. It
also provides local I/O bus termination.
Therefore, I/O branch terminator boards are not required at the end of branches where Media
Attachment Unit modules are placed.
756 OW350_R1150
11.8 Remote I/O
11.8.3 Remote I/O features (OCR161 Controller)
The Ovation remote I/O subsystem has the following features:

 Maximum number of Remote Nodes: 16 nodes, redundant controlled (eight nodes for each
PCRR card).
1
 Maximum number of I/O modules per remote node: 64 (eight branches with eight modules
for each branch).
1
 Maximum number of I/O modules per PCRR card: 512 (eight nodes, eight branches for each
node, eight modules for each branch).
1
 Maximum number of I/O modules per Controller: 1024 .
 Remote I/O Bus configuration: 10 BASE-FL Ethernet physical layer with a proprietary
protocol.
 Remote I/O cycle time: <100 microseconds (typical), double byte word access as seen by
PCRR.
 Standard Remote communications media offered: Fiber-optic
 Remote communication diagnostics can be performed in the Primary and Backup system
without affecting I/O modules. The diagnostics available are:
1. Simulation of all types of bus cycles (such as local I/O including statuses, bit corruption,
message length faults, collision faults, and no response).
2. Loopback of all messages from PCRR through the MAU.
3. Connection check of AUI cable and remote node link.
 Status LEDs: Available on PCRR, MAU, and RNC modules.
 Interface support of existing Q-Line I/O using Q-Line QOR card.
1
These numbers represent hardware capabilities. Controller software limitations are not implied.
11.8.4 Controller cabinet components (Remote I/O) (OCR161 Controller)
The Ovation Remote I/O Controller cabinet (see page 749) contains the following:
 Redundant Controller Chassis - This rack in the Controller cabinet provides the backplane for
two separate Controllers. For each Controller, the backplane interconnects the following
components:
 Pentium PC Processor Board - Third-party functional processor for the Controller.
 Power Supply Board Kit - Contains a PCPS power supply converting +24V to +5V and
±12V to power all components in the Controller chassis.
 Network Interface Card (NIC) - Provides the interface between the Ovation Controller,
and the other network components of the system. FDDI/CDDI and Fast Ethernet versions
are supported.
 PCRR Board - IOIC (PCI) to remote Ovation or Q-Line I/O interface board, serving as the
master of the remote I/O bus. Refer to the Q-Line Installation Manual for remote Q-Line
I/O installation information (only 850 nm optics, with 2 km Maximum length, are available
for remote Q-Line applications).
OW350_R1150 757
11.8 Remote I/O
A PCRR board has two Attachment Unit Interface (AUI) ports each of which may connect
to an Attachment Unit module using an AUI cable. Together, the two ports typically serve
as the primary I/O bus master with another PCRR card providing the redundant pair (up
to two PCRR cards per each Controller).
I/O.
 Standard I/O modules and bases (see page 741) - Standard Ovation I/O modules which
 Relay Output module and bases (see page 742) - Relay module base, 1.5 times larger than a
standard I/O base unit, containing Electronics module and relays to control field devices).
 I/O Branch Terminator (see page 744) (1B30023) - Connects to the A or B-side of a standard
I/O base at the end of a branch having no Attachment Unit module to terminate the local I/O
bus.
We recommend that all possible bases (typically four) be installed in the right-most branch of
each side of a cabinet, even if they are not all filled with I/O modules. This prevents disruption
of the database if additional I/O modules are installed in the future.
from the TOP DOWN.
(positions 1/2, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8).
 Media Attachment Unit (see page 747) (MAU) - This module provides a point of attachment
for fiber optic cables used to transfer messages over long distances between the PCRR and
up to four remote nodes (see page 770). The module directs messages between the PCRR
and one of the four remote nodes at a time as selected, converting signals readable by the
PCRR to signals compatible with the fiber optic media and vice versa. The following
components comprise the MAU:
 Electronics module (1C31179) - Houses the Attachment Unit Logic Board (LAU) which
provides power for the module and displays LED indication that the fiber optic cables are
connected and the Remote Node Controller module has power.
 Personality module (1C31181) - Houses the Attachment Unit Personality Board (PAU)
which translates signals between the PCRR and the fiber optic media and provides
connectors for the fiber optic cables.
758 OW350_R1150
11.9 Extended I/O cabinet components
MAU Subsystem
ELECTRONICS PERSONALITY 1 CHANNELS OPTICS

LENGTH OF OPTICAL LINK
MODULE MODULE

1
In order not to be required to select extended PCRR time-out periods, it is recommended that you do
NOT exceed an optical length of 3.7 km.
2
An Ovation Controller cabinet MAU MUST use the same type of optics (850 nm or 1300 nm) for each of
the remote nodes that it interfaces. An MAU cannot interface both 850 nm remote nodes (using
1C1204G01 Personality modules) and 1300 nm remote nodes (using 1C31204G03 Personality modules.)
 Media Attachment Unit Base (1C31206) - This base holds a Maximum of two modules
and provides a connector for the AUI Cable which interconnects the PCRR and
Attachment Unit module. The backplane routes +24V to the Attachment Unit modules for
power. It also provides local I/O bus termination.
Therefore, I/O branch terminator boards are not required at the end of branches where Media
Attachment Unit modules are placed.
The Ovation I/O Extended cabinet contains the following:
Note: Refer to the Planning Your Ovation System manual for additional cabinet and cable
information.
Controller Cabinet, as well as +24V auxiliary power. Two are required for redundancy.
+24V to branches of local I/O, and in the Redundant RNC in remote cabinets.
 Standard I/O modules and Base (see page 741) - Standard Ovation I/O modules which
 Relay Output module and Base (see page 742) - Relay module base, 1.5 times larger than a
standard I/O base unit, containing Electronics module and relays to control field devices.
branches of I/O, providing a point to bring in +24V redundant power, auxiliary supplies, and
the local I/O communications bus.
Connections are provided on the I/O Transition Panel to daisy-chain the local I/O
communications bus from one ROP to the next (up to eight I/O branches Maximum may be
daisy-chained together).
 I/O Single Branch Transition Panels (see page 744) (Top - RRP 3A99252; Bottom - RRB
3A99253) - Used with Relay Output modules for a single I/O branch of up to eight relay
bases.
Supplies +24V redundant power, auxiliary power, and local communications bus to the
branch. Mounted at the top/bottom of the extended cabinet. Only one I/O branch is used and
remaining branches are passed on.
OW350_R1150 759
page 774) section.
Line Filter Primary AC/DC Line*

(CE Mark certified
system only) Input (external)
+24V main, +24V
AUX (internal)
Backup AC/DC Line
Input (external)
Power
Local I/O Communications Distribution
Cable from Controller or Remote +24V main, +24V Module
Power Supply
Power Supply
Node Cabinet (external) Br "n-1" AUX, and
Backup
Primary
AC/DC line (internal)
+24V to Cabinet Fans

+24V main, +24V (internal)
AUX (internal)
To extended Local
I/O Cabinet
(external) Br "n+4"
Local I/O
Transition Panel
Local I/O (ROP)
Transition Panel Local I/O
(ROP) Communications
Cable (internal)
I/O
Base and
Modules
I/O
Base and
Modules
Typical Customer
Supplied Field
Wiring (external)
Notes
Internal cables
do not exit cabinet.
External cables
exit cabinet.
Earth ground
cables not shown.
Br "n" Br "n + 1" Br "n + 2" Br "n + 3" Local I/O

Bus
Terminators
Cabinet Cabinet
Front Back
* DC Power Supplies are not applicable to CE Mark Certified systems.
Figure 216: Ovation Extended I/O Cabinet (illustrating cables and Standard I/O)
760 OW350_R1150
11.10 Remote node cabinet components
The Ovation Remote Node (see page 763) cabinet, located remotely from the Controller cabinet
contains the following:
 Power Supply - DIN Rail Mounted. Generates +24V to power the electronics in the Remote
Node Cabinet, as well as +24V auxiliary power. Two are required for redundancy.
 Remote Node Controller (RNC) module (see page 745) - Provides a point of attachment for
remote I/O media used to transfer messages between the remote node and the MAU. There
are only two Remote Node Controller modules per remote node (one primary, one backup),
regardless of the number of cabinets at the node. The module translates messages from the
remote I/O bus into local I/O bus cycles that can be directed to as many as eight branches of
local I/O modules.
The following components comprise the Remote Node Controller module:
 Remote Node Electronics module (1C31203) - Prepares messages received from the
remote I/O Controller for the local I/O modules at the remote node. When an
I/O module responds to the message, the module prepares the response to be sent back
to the Controller over the fiber-optic media.
 Remote Node Personality module (1C31204G01 for 850 nm optics/1C31204G03 for
1300 nm optics) - Houses the Remote Node Personality Board (PAU) which provides
connectors for the media used to transmit and receive remote messages between the
Controller and remote node. Group 1 modules provide fiber-optic connections; (future
plans are that group 2 modules provide an AUI port used to connect to third-party
transceivers). Power supply monitoring circuitry of the +24V redundant supplies is located
on this module and is reported back to the Electronics module to flag failure of the primary
or backup supply.
 Remote Node Controller Base (1C31205) - This unique base holds a Maximum of two
Remote Node modules and interfaces directly to two I/O branches. It provides a rotary
switch for node addressing and a D-connector for interfacing to as many as six additional
I/O branches using a local I/O communications cable. The RNC base unit is connected to
the Remote Node Transition Panel described below.
 Remote Node Transition Panel (see page 746) (TND - 4D33924) - Interconnects the RNC
base, Remote Power Supply module (if used), and the branches of local I/O in a single
Remote Node cabinet. The Remote Node Transition Panel (TND) also provides connectors
for DIN Rail Mounted +24V Supplies or auxiliary supplies to be wired into the remote node.
 Power Distribution module (PDM - 5A26304) - Provides connectors for cables used to
distribute +24V to the Redundant RNC, and +24V and auxiliary power to the branches of I/O.
 Standard I/O modules and Base (see page 741) - Standard Ovation I/O modules which
interface to remote field devices when placed in the Remote Node cabinet.
 Relay Output module and Base (see page 742) - Relay Output I/O modules which interface to
remote field devices when placed in the Remote Node cabinet.
be daisy-chained (see page 766) together.
OW350_R1150 761
 I/O Single Branch Transition Panels (see page 744) (Top - RRP 3A99252; Bottom - RRB
3A99253) - Used with Relay Output modules for a single I/O branch of up to eight relay
bases.
Supplies +24V redundant power, auxiliary power, and local communications bus to the
branch. Mounted at the top/bottom of the extended cabinet (see page 744). Only one I/O
branch is used and branches 2 through 8 are passed on.
 I/O Branch Terminator Board A or B (1B30023) - Connects to the A/B-side of a standard I/O
base (see page 763) at the end of a branch to terminate the I/O bus.
762 OW350_R1150
11.10.1 Typical Remote Node Cabinet
page 774) section.
Line Filter
(CE Mark certified Primary AC Line
system only) Input (external)
Backup AC Line
Power Cable
Input (external)
Remote Node Controller (RNC) Power

Base and Modules Distribution
Module
+24V Backup
+24V Primary
Power Supply
Power Supply
Primary
Fiber-Optic
Cable
Backup To Branches 5,6,7,8

Fiber-Optic
Cable
TND Br 1 Br 2
Br 3 Br 4 ROP
Local I/O
Communications
Cable
I/O
Base and
Modules
Cabinet Cabinet
Front Back
Terminator Board Terminator Board Terminator Board Terminator Board

B-Side A-Side B-Side A-Side
Figure 217: Typical Remote Node Cabinet
OW350_R1150 763
11.10.2 Placing the MAU module
The MAU module is located in an Ovation Controller cabinet or in a migrated WDPF DPU cabinet.
The MAU plugs into a special base unit which can accommodate up to two modules per base.
The base unit clamps onto the DIN rail, like standard I/O module bases.
MAU 1 and MAU 2 are two separate MAU modules which may be located anywhere in the
Controller cabinet. One AUI cable connects (see page 765) MAU 1 to P1 on the PCRR, and a
second AUI cable connects MAU 2 to P2 on the PCRR.
Note: If you migrate a WDPF Q-Line remote I/O system to Ovation, a QOR card replaces the
QRC card in the WDPF Remote Node. Be sure to connect the MAU TX ports to the QOR RX
ports, and connect the MAU RX ports to the QOR TX ports.
Refer to the applicable Remote Q-Line Installation Manual for your system for information on
remote Q-Line and the QOR card (only 850 nm optics, with 2 km Maximum length, are available
for remote Q-Line applications).
The A-side and B-side of the MAU base unit terminates the local I/O bus, so the base must
always be at the end of a branch when local I/O modules are located on the same branch.
The B-side of the MAU base also initiates base addressing for a branch of local
I/O. If desired, multiple MAU base units may be connected together on a single branch. Since the
MAU base unit terminates the local I/O bus, I/O Bus Termination cards are not required on the
end of a branch that has an MAU.
Duplex fiber optic cables (see page 766) must be hooked between the MAU channels and their
corresponding remote nodes with specific switch settings.
764 OW350_R1150
11.10.3 Connecting the AUI Cable
The Attachment Unit Interface (AUI) cable in the Controller cabinet is used to connect P1 and P2
on the PCRR card to an MAU transceiver. This transceiver translates signals between the PCRR
and the fiber-optic media that is used to connect remote nodes to the Controller.
P1 is the 15-pin D-connector on the PCRR closest to the front edge of the card where the LEDs
are displayed. Controls and communication signals for nodes 1-4 are accessible through P1 on
the PCRR.
P2 is the 15-pin D-connector closest to the back edge of the card. Control and communication
signals for nodes 5-8 are accessible through P2 on the PCRR.
One PCRR provides two ports for AUI cables. The AUI cable connects the PCRR to the MAU
which provides the reception and transmission for the fiber-optic cables. Both AUI ports are used
on a single PCRR if the PCRR is to control more than four remote nodes. This configuration
requires two AUI cables per PCRR card.
is ler
ss ol f
ha tr o
C on nt
C ro
F
LEDs on Front of
PCRR Card
(with cover)
is
ss
ha
rC
le
ol
AUI cable connects P1 to

tr
on
fC
an MAU module. This controls

ro
Remote Nodes 1 - 4. AUI cable connects P2 to

ea
R
an MAU module. This controls

P1 Remote Nodes 5 - 8.
P2 is located behind P1
Figure 218: MAU Connections on PCRR Card
OW350_R1150 765
11.10.4 Remote node addressing switch
A Controller PCRR card can control up to eight remote nodes. A 10-position rotary switch (located
on an RNC backplane or on a QOR card) is used to assign a node address to the remote node.
Note: Each remote Q-Line node is assigned all 244 possible DIOB addresses (08H through
FBH).
Positions 0-7 on the switch assign the lowest-to-highest order remote node from an addressing
standpoint. Selecting position 8 or 9 on the switch is the same as assigning position 0 or 1,
respectively, to a remote node.
The remote node must be connected to a specific channel of the Controller cabinet‟s MAU so that
the PCRR communication signals can be directed to the proper node. Similarly, the AUI cable
connecting the MAU to the PCRR must be connected to a specific port on the PCRR. The
following table lists the control path for a PCRR controlling eight remote nodes through two
MAUs.
Remote Node Addressing Switch
REMOTE NODE PCRR PORT FOR MAU CHANNEL REMOTE NODE‟S

AUI CABLE ROTARY SWITCH
SETTING
1 P1 MAU 1 - channel 1 0
5
6
7
8
Do not use. 8 or 9
1
Optional for migration projects.
11.10.5 Daisy-Chain Control of I/O Branches
Only one cabinet at a remote node contains redundant RNC modules which connect to two
branches of I/O through the TND.
To control additional branches of I/O (up to six more branches), the local I/O bus (beginning at the
RNC transition panel) is daisy chained to up to three ROPs. The ROPs may or may not be
located in the same cabinet as the RNC. Note that each branch of I/O must be terminated with the
proper I/O Branch Terminator Board (A or B). See Power Supply (see page 767) for a typical
configuration of a remote node cabinet using daisy-chain control.
766 OW350_R1150
11.10.6 Power Supply
A +24V Power Supply is used to supply power to the Remote Node cabinet. The Power Supply is
mounted on DIN Rails in the Remote Node cabinet. It is wired to the TND to provide power to the
RNC and to the local I/O branches that are connected to the TND.
page 774) section.
OW350_R1150 767
Primary Backup
Controlle r Controlle r
PCPS Converter
PCPS Converter
Powe r
PCI Processor
PCI Processor
+24V Primary
Power Supply
+24V Backup
Power Supply
Distribution
PCRR Card
PCRR Card
PCRL Card
PCRL Card
M odule RNC
+24V Backup
Power Supply
Power Supply
+24V Primary
NIC
NIC
TND
ROP
ROP
Br 1 Br 2
Br 3 Br 4
Local Local
Comm. Comm.
Cable Cable
Backup
Primary AUI Cable
AUI Cable
Primary
Re mote
Comm.
Cable
BackupRe mote
Communications
Cable
MAU
+24V Primary
+24V Primary
Power Supply
Power Supply
Remote Node Cabinet #1
Controller Cabinet (front and back)
(front and back)
ROP
Remote Node Limits

Up to 8 Remote Nodes per PCRR
Up to 64 modules per Node
Up to 512 modules per PCRR
Up to 2 PCRRs per Controller
Up to 1024 modules per Controller Extended Cabinet
(front and back)
Figure 219: Example of Remote I/O Daisy-Chain Connections
768 OW350_R1150
11.10.7 Example of typical MAU cable connections to Remote Nodes

(OCR400 Controller)
page 774) section.
Figure 220: Example of Typical MAU Cable Connections to Remote Nodes (OCR400
Controller)
OW350_R1150 769
11.10.8 Example of typical MAU cable connections to Remote Nodes

(OCR161 Controller)
page 774) section.
Primary Backup
Controller Controller
PCPS Power Supply

PCPS Power Supply
PCI Processor
PCI Processor
+24V Backup
Power Supply
+24V Primary
Power Supply
PCRR
PCRR
PCRR
PCRR
NIC
NIC
Br 1 Br 2
Br 3 Br 4
Local
Comm.
Cable
+24V Primary
Power Supply
Power Supply
+24V Backup
RNC
Remote Node #4
(front and back)
Controller Cabinet
MAU
(front and back)
+24V Primary
Power Supply
Power Supply
+24V Backup
+24V Primary
+24V Primary
Power Supply
Power Supply
Power Supply
Power Supply
+24V Backup
+24V Backup
RNC RNC RNC
Remote Node #1 Remote Node #2 Remote Node #3

(front and back) (front and back) (front and back)
Figure 221: Example of Typical MAU Cable Connections to Remote Nodes
770 OW350_R1150
11.11 Selecting the I/O interface cards
11.11 Selecting the I/O interface cards

1. For the OCR400, the IOIC module handles interface for all of the I/O cards (see What are the
OCR400 Controller I/O interfaces? (see page 734)).
2. For the OCR161 there are two slots available for I/O interface cards for each functional
processor in the redundant Controller cabinet (see page 737). The following interface must be
used:
 Use a PCRL card for local Ovation I/O.
Up to eight branches of Ovation modules can be supported by one PCRL. Use a second
PCRL in the Controller if more branches are used.
 Use a PCQL card for local Q-Line I/O.
One PCQL card supports one DIOB. Use a second PCQL card in the Controller if a second
DIOB is used.
11.12 What changes can you make to an I/O device?
After an I/O device has been created and loaded to the target drop, it may be necessary to make
changes.
You can make changes to the following:

 I/O devices (see page 771).
 External network devices (see page 771).
11.12.1 To modify an I/O device
After an I/O device has been created and loaded to the target drop, it may be necessary to make
changes.
1. Launch the Ovation Developer Studio.

2. Use the system tree to navigate to the I/O Devices folder:
Systems
Networks
Units
Drops
I/O Devices
3. Right-click the appropriate item.
4. Select Open.
5. Make necessary changes in the dialog box and select Ok or Apply.
11.12.2 To modify an external Ovation networks device
For external networks modification information, see Ovation Multiple Networks User Guide.
11.13 General requirements for I/O cable

The following cables are used for various I/O cable requirements:
OW350_R1150 771
11.13 General requirements for I/O cable
11.13.1 I/O communications cable (5A26141)
This cable allows you to expand local I/O to additional branches by daisy-chaining connections
between either the Controller backplane or Remote Node Controller Transition panel and
additional local I/O Transition panels.
Length: 9.1 meters Maximum (30 ft).
11.13.2 AUI Cable (5A26147)
The PCRR and Media Attachment module are connected via an AUI cable. This cable meets the
electrical specifications stated in the ANSI/IEEE 802.3 standard for local area networks. The
cable should be long enough to reach the length of the cabinet.
Length: Approximately 1.5 meters (5 ft).
11.13.3 Fiber-Optic Cable (3A98763 - Green) (3A98764 - Yellow)
The standard configuration of the Ovation Remote I/O Subsystem requires fiber-optic cables (with
ST connectors) to connect the MAU to a remote node.
For 850 nm optics, distances of up to 2 km are supported between the remote node and the
Controller.
For 1300 nm optics, distances of up to 4 km are supported between the remote node and the
Controller.
772 OW350_R1150
11.14 Adding OCR400 Controllers to WDPF Q-Line I/O
11.14 Adding OCR400 Controllers to WDPF Q -Line I/O
When OCR400 Controllers are added to a WDPF control system using Q-Line I/O, two QOL
cards, one connected to each Controller are necessary to provide the connections previously
done by the QBE or the QOR card. QOLs typically occupy the QBE slot or the 13th slot in the
upper and lower Q-crates in a WDPF A or extended A cabinet.
QOL cards are typically used when OCR400 Controllers are installed and utilize Q-line I/O. Refer
to drawing number 5X00252 for additional information.
The OCR400 treats local Q-Line as if it were remote Q-Line without the conversion to fiber-optic
media. The 13V power supply voltages are not directly connected to the OCR400 Controller. QOL
cards replace the first and last QBE cards in the Q-Crates.
The QOL monitors the 13V power supplies and provides a status bit to the Controller. This is
similar to the way Remote Q-Line and the QOR card provide status for remote Q-Line. Both
provide status bits in board registers which are read by the Controller.
Remember that the QOL is really making local Q-Line into remote Q-Line but only providing a
short distance copper connection instead of fiber optic so the Controller does not notice this minor
difference.
The migration kit wiring diagram 4D33960 shows a 2-connector cable connected to the PCQL
module which was where the 13V power was monitored and status provided for the Controller.
The I/O interface on the OCR400 Controller does not have this 13V connection capability so
instead the status is read from the QOL.
Two QOL cards 5X00230 are used for local Q Line I/O.
 QOL combines MAU and QOR functionality while eliminating the FO cable that is “Local
Remote” Q-Line.
 Replaces QBEs in Q1 and Q4 Q-Crate 13th slots.
 For single Q-crate applications, both QOL's are housed in the same Q-crate.
OW350_R1150 773
11.15 New power distribution scheme
11.15 New pow er distribution scheme
Figure 222: New Power Distribution Scheme
774 OW350_R1150
S E C T I O N 12
12 I/O system status and diagnostic LEDs
IN THIS SECTION
What do the OCR161 PCQL card status LEDs indicate? ............................................... 775
What do the OCR161 PCRL card status LEDs indicate? ............................................... 776
What do the OCR161 PCRR card status LEDs indicate? .............................................. 777
What are the processor module status LEDs for the OCR400 and OCR1100 Controllers?778
Diagnostic LEDs .............................................................................................................. 779
MAU Module.................................................................................................................... 780
RNC Module .................................................................................................................... 781
12.1 What do the OCR161 PCQL card status LEDs indicate?
Figure 223: PCQL card used with Q-Line I/O
The following PCQL card LED's illuminate and indicate the following:
 POWER and ALIVE indicates that the Controller is on.

 CTL indicates that the Controller is in control.
OW350_R1150 775
12.2 What do the OCR161 PCRL card status LEDs indicate?
 ACT indicates that the Controller is accessing the I/O database.

 The Hexadecimal displays show the status and error codes. (Refer to the Ovation fault
information tool on the Emerson user site for more information.) Currently, they cycle
through the hexadecimal characters.
12.2 What do the OCR161 PCRL card status LEDs indicate?
The following PCRL card LED's illuminate and indicate the following:
 POWER indicates that the Controller is on.
 The eight lights indicate the status of the I/O branches.
 The Hexadecimal displays show status and error codes. (Refer to the Ovation fault
information tool on the Emerson user site for more information.)
Figure 224: PCRL Card used with Ovation Local I/O
776 OW350_R1150
12.3 What do the OCR161 PCRR card status LEDs indicate?
12.3 What do the OCR161 PCRR card status LEDs indicate?
The following PCRR card LED's illuminate and indicate the following:
 POWER indicates that the Controller is on.
 The eight lights indicate the status of the eight nodes of the Controller Remote I/O.
 The Hexadecimal displays show status and error codes. (Refer to the Ovation fault
information tool on the Emerson user site for more information.)
Figure 225: PCRR card for Ovation or Q-Line remote I/O
OW350_R1150 777
12.4 What are the processor module status LEDs for the OCR400 and OCR1100 Controllers?
12.4 What are the processo r module status LEDs for the OCR400 and
OCR1100 Controllers?
The Controller processor module provides nine indicator LEDs that display status information
about the interface between the Controller and the Ovation network.
There is a green power indicator (labeled P) and a pair of green and amber LEDs for each
Ethernet port (labeled N1, N2, N3, and N4). The green power indicator lights when the Processor
module is powered. Each Ethernet network port has two indicator LEDs (green and amber). The
green indicator is the Link Integrity/Power LED. It lights when the port is receiving power and
flashes slowly when the module is linked with the network through that port. The amber indicator
displays Link Activity status and flashes when the module is receiving or transmitting data on that
port.
Figure 226: Processor module status LEDs
Processor module status LEDs
LED ME ANING ON OFF BLINKING
P Power Lights green when Unlit when module N/A

module is powered is not powered
N1 Ethernet port Port is receiving Port is not receiving Module is linked to
green LED power power network through the
(Link Integrity/Power LED) port
Ethernet port N/A N/A Module is receiving or
amber LED transmitting data on
(Link activity status) the port
778 OW350_R1150
12.5 Diagnostic LEDs
LED ME ANING ON OFF BLINKING
Ethernet port Port is receiving Port is not receiving Module is linked to

N2
12.5 Diagnostic LEDs
Three Controller modules used in the Ovation Remote I/O subsystem are equipped with LEDs
that provide diagnostic displays. The modules are the PCRR, MAU, and the RNC.
OW350_R1150 779
12.6 MAU Module
12.6 MAU Module
The MAU Electronics Module front panel has LEDs to display the status of the MAU on-board
power supply and the fiber-optic links between the MAU and each remote node.
The four LINK OK LEDs correspond with the four remote nodes connected to the MAU.
Note: G01 MAU contains only two remote node connections and does have Link 3 and Link 4
LEDs.
Figure 227: MAU LED Indicators
A healthy link between an MAU channel and a remote node is established when the transmitter of
a powered-up remote node Controller is connected through a fiber-optic link to the receiver of its
corresponding channel on the MAU. The transmitted signal received by the MAU must be strong
enough to overcome low-light conditions to be seen as healthy by the MAU.
780 OW350_R1150
12.7 RNC Module
12.7 RNC Module
The RNC Electronics Module front panel has four LEDs to display statuses specific to the RNC
and 16 LEDs to display statuses specific to the eight branches controlled by the RNC.
The LED states are defined in the following figure and table.
P C E I 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B B B B B B B B
R R R R R R R R
A A A A A A A A
N N N N N N N N
C C C C C C C C
H H H H H H H H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
RNC Branch status LEDs (see Table 30-3)

I (Internal) is red when "C" LED is off, if PCRR forces an
internal error state, or in RNC detects an internal error.
E (External) is red when RNC does not detect a healthy

link to the MAU.
C (Communications) is green when PCRR is communicating with the node

at a frequency greater than 1 second.
P (Power) is green when the VCC, monitored on the RNC logic board, is above
the minimum acceptable threshold.
Figure 228: RNC LED Indicators
RNC Branch Status LED States
GREEN LED RED LED REMOTE NODE BRANCH STATUS
On Off All I/O cycles to the branch are succeeding.

On On Mixture of failing and succeeding I/O cycles to the branch.
Off On All I/O cycles to the branch are failing.
Off Off Branch is not being accessed.
OW350_R1150 781
S E C T I O N 13
13 Q-Line card types
IN THIS SECTION
Analog card types............................................................................................................ 783

Digital card types ............................................................................................................. 786
Packed point card types .................................................................................................. 788
13.1 Analog card types
Analog Data Types
DATA DESCRIPTION
TYPE
0 Not applicable
1 Not applicable
2 Not applicable
3 16 bit signed analog input card, card status =15, confide = 14, sign = 13, signed over range = 12,
value = 11 to 0
4 16 bit unsigned analog input card, card status =15, unsigned over range = 13, value = 12 to 0
5 16 bit unsigned analog input card, value = 15 to 0
6 16 bit signed analog input card, card status = 0, sign = 15, unsigned over range = 1, value = 13 to
3
7 16 bit unsigned analog input card, card status =15 and 0, unsigned over range = 1, value = 13 to
3
8 16 bit unsigned analog input card, card status = 15, value = 11 to 0
9 16 bit unsigned analog output card, value = 15 to 0
10 16 bit signed analog output card, sign = 15, value = 14 to 4
11 16 bit unsigned analog output card, value = 15 to 4
12 16 bit unsigned analog output card, clamped at 16, value = 15 to 4
13 16 bit unsigned analog output card, scaled by.6 and biases + 800, value = 15 to 4
22 16 bit unsigned analog input card, card status = 15, value = 14 to 0
OW350_R1150 783
Analog Card Types
CARD GROU WDPF II RANGE DATA

P CARD TYPE TYPE
QAA G01 NA -16 to +16mA (Position) +4 to +20 mA (Velocity) 0

QAA G02 NA +4 to +20 mA (Velocity) -10 to +10 VDC (Voltage) Optional 0
QAH G01 17 -10.24 to +10.235 V 6
QAH G02 18 -5.12 to + 5.117 V 6
QAH G03 19 0 to +10.237 V 7
QAH G04 20 0 to 5.119 V 7
QAI G01 1 -20 to +20 mV 3
QAI G02 2 -50 to +50 mV 3
QAI G03 3 -100 to +100 mV 3
QAI G04 4 -500 to +500 mV 3
QAI G05 5 -1 to +1 V 3
QAI G06 6 -10 to + 10 V 3
QAI G07 7 or 9 0 to 20 mA 3
QAI G07A NA 4 to 20 mA 3
QAI G08 8 -50 to +50 mV 3
QAM G01 31 0 to 10 VDC (Output) 0
QAM G02 31 0 to 10 mA, 0 to +5 VDC (Output) 0
QAO G01 21 0 to + 20.475 mA 12
QAO G01A 29 4.00 to + 20.475 mA 13
QAO G02 22 -0 to +10.2375 V 11
QAO G03 23 -10.24 to +10.235 V 10
QAO G04 24 0 to +5.1187 V 11
QAO G05 25 -5.12 1 to +5.1175 V 10
QAO G06 26 -10.24 to + 10.235 V 10
QAO G07 27 0 to + 20.475 mA 12
QAO G07A NA +4 to +20 mA 12
QAO G08 28 -10.24 to + 10.235 V 10
QUA G01 1 or 54 -20 to +20 mV 3
QUA G02 2 or 55 -50 to +50 mV 3
QUA G03 3 or 56 -100 to +100 mV 3
QUA G04 2 -50 to +50 mV 3
QUA G05 3 -100 to +100 mV 3
QUA G06 NA -50 to +50 mV 3
QUA G07 NA -20 to +20 mV (with temperature compensation) 3
784 OW350_R1150
CARD GROU WDPF II RANGE DATA

P CARD TYPE TYPE

QUA G01 13 or 34 0 to +1 V 3
QUA G02 14 or 35 0 to +5 V 3
QUA G03 15 0 to +10 V 3
QUA G04 16 0 to +20 mA 3
QUA G04A NA +4 to +20 mA 3
QUA G05 NA 0 to +20 mA (self-powered) 3
QUA G05A 16 +4 to +20 mA 3
QUA G06 32 0 to +50 mA 3
QUA G06A NA +4 to +50 mA 3
QAX G01 68 or 71 -20 to +20 mV 3
QAX G02 69 or 72 -50 to +50 mV 3
QAX G03 70 or 71 -100 to +100 mV 3
QAX G04 74 0 to +1 V 3
QAX G05 75 0 to +5 V 3
QAX G06 76 0 to +10 V 3
QFD G01 88 -118.75 to +5000.625 mA 4
QLI G01 51 0 to 10VDC (Analog Input/Output) 3
QLI G02 52 0 to 5 VDC (Analog Input) 0 to 10 VDC (Analog Output) 3
QLI G03 53 0 to 20mA (Analog Input) 4 to 20 mA (Analog Output) 3
QPA G01 36 Pulses 5
QPA G02 36 Pulses 5
QPA G03 36 Pulses 5
QPA G04 36 Pulses 5
QRT G01 NA 0 to + 10 mV 3
QRT G02 NA 0 to + 33 1/3 mV 3
QSD G01 NA Input: 20 V peak-to-peak, 1 KHz sine wave (LVDT) Output: 0
+/- 24 mA
QSR G01 NA 0 to 100 8
QSR G02 NA NA 8
QSR G03 NA NA 8
QSR G04 NA NA 8
QSS G01 66 1.5, 1.8, 3.0, 3.6, 6.0, or 7.2 KHz 22
OW350_R1150 785
13.2 Digital card types
Digital data types
DATA TYPE DESCRIPTION DATA TYPE DESCRIPTION
1 Standard digital input card 8 Not applicable

2 Standard digital output card 9 Not applicable
3 Not applicable 10 Not applicable
7 Not applicable NA Not applicable
Digital card types
CARD GROUP DATA TYPE
QBI G01 1
QBI G02 1
QBI G03 1
QBI G04 1
QBI G05 1
QBI G06 1
QBI G07 1
QBI G08 1
QBI G09 1
QBI G10 1
QBI G11 1
QBO G01 2
QBO G02 2
QBO G03 2
QBO G04 2
QBO G05 2
QCI G02 1
QDI G01 1
QDI G02 1
QDI G03 1
QDI G04 1
QDI G05 1
QDI G06 1
786 OW350_R1150
QDI G07 1
QDI G08 1
QDI G09 1
QDI G10 1
QDI G11 1
QID G01 1
QID G02 (Low) 1
QID G02H (High) 1
QID G03 1
QID G04 (Low) 1
QID G04H (High) 1
QID G05 1
QID G06 (Low) 1
QID G06H (High) 1
QID G07 1
QID G08 1
QID G09 1
QID G10 1
QID G11 (Low) 1
QID G11H (High) 1
QID G12 1
QID G13 (Low) 1
QID G13H (High) 1
QID G14 1
QID G15 (Low) 1
QID G15H (High) 1
QID G16 1
QID G17 1
QSE G01 1
QSE G02 1
QRO G01 (Low) 2
QRO G01H (High) 2
QRO G02 (Low) 2
QRO G02H (High) 2
QRO G03 (Low) 2
QRO G03H (High) 2
OW350_R1150 787
13.3 Packed point card types
QRO G04 (Low) 2

QRO G04H (High) 2
Packed Data Types
DATA TYPE DESCRIPTION
1 Standard 16 bit digital input card

2 Standard 16 bit digital output card
3 Not applicable
4 Not applicable
5 Not applicable
6 Not applicable
7 Not applicable
8 Not applicable
9 Not applicable
10 Not applicable
11 Not applicable
12 Not applicable
13 Not applicable
Digital Card Types
QBI G01 1
G02 1
G03 1
G04 1
G05 1
G06 1
G07 1
G08 1
G09 1
G10 1
G11 1
788 OW350_R1150
QBO G01 2
G02 2
G03 2
G04 2
G05 2
QDI G01 1
G02 1
G03 1
G04 1
G05 1
G06 1
G07 1
G08 1
G09 1
G10 1
G11 1
QID G01 1
G02 1
G03 1
G04 1
G05 1
G06 1
G07 1
G08 1
G09 1
G10 1
G11 1
G12 1
G13 1
G14 1
G15 1
G16 1
G17 1
QSE G01 1
G02 1
OW350_R1150 789
790 OW350_R1150
S E C T I O N 14
14 CE Mark specifications
IN THIS SECTION
What is a CE Mark Certified system? ............................................................................. 792

CE Mark accuracy considerations ................................................................................... 793
OW350_R1150 791
14.1 What is a CE Mark Certified system?
14.1 What is a CE Mark Certified s ystem?
CE Mark certification on a product is a manufacturer's declaration that the product complies with
the essential requirements of the relevant European health, safety, and environmental protection
legislation. CE Mark on a product indicates to governmental officials that the product may be
legally placed on the market in their country and ensures the free movement of the product within
the European Free Trade Association (EFTA) & European Union (EU) single market (total of 28
countries).
Ovation has two methods of achieving a CE Mark system:

 EMC cabinet.
 Non-EMC cabinet.
EMC cabinet approach
A CE Mark Certified Ovation system can use special EMC cabinets, supplementary internal
filtering, and exacting requirements on field wiring and grounding to ensure compliance with the
specific European Electromagnetic Emissions/Immunity and low voltage safety.
The CE Mark Certified Ovation Controller cabinet assembly, Extended I/O cabinet assembly, and
Remote I/O cabinet assembly are certified for operation in the Industrial Environment as
documented in the EMC Technical Construction File for Ovation (5A26444) and the Low Voltage
Safety Technical File for Ovation (5A26443).
The CE Mark Certified Controller cabinet assembly drawing for the OCR400 Controller is
5X00293.
The CE Mark Certified Controller cabinet assembly drawing for the OCR161 Controller is
4D33953.
The specific requirements for the CE Mark Certified Systems are discussed throughout this
document and also in the following:
 Drawing 5A26418 - This drawing contains a baseline listing of all components applicable for
the CE Mark Certified System.
 Drawing 5A26370 - This drawing contains a baseline listing of workstation and peripheral
components applicable for the CE Mark Certified System.
Non-EMC cabinet approach
A CE Mark Certified system can also use non-EMC cabinets. This is accomplished by utilizing a
Non-EMC cabinet approach in which baseline testing was performed on the standard Ovation
cabinet style 5X00127H02.
This approach utilizes requirements on field wiring shield termination and internal cabinet cable
ferrites in specific locations to ensure compliance with the specific European Electromagnetic
Emissions/Immunity and low voltage safety.
The baseline cabinet assemblies utilized for the Non EMC Cabinet approach testing are
5X00127H02 (ventilated cabinet assembly) or 5X00046H03 (sealed cabinet assembly). Alternate
models shall be considered ongoing based upon equivalency and may include criteria such as
welded steel frame construction, gauge of metal side panels, overlapping door seams, internal
ground straps connecting all panels to the mounting plate, and a grounding stud for tying the EMC
ground.
792 OW350_R1150
14.2 CE Mark accuracy considerations
The specific requirements for the Non EMC Cabinet CE Mark approach are discussed throughout
this document and are also in the following:
 Drawing 5X00424 – This drawing contains a baseline listing of all components applicable for
the Non EMC Cabinet CE Mark Certified System approach.
 Drawing 5A26370 – This drawing contains a baseline listing of workstation and peripheral
components applicable for the CE Mark Certified System.
14.2 CE Mark accurac y considerations
EMC Technical Construction Files 5A26444 and 5X00423 reference various temporary
electromagnetic interferences that the Ovation system must operate through. During these
conditions, the accuracy of all Ovation analog points shall be derated to 2.5%.
OW350_R1150 793
S E C T I O N 15
15 Replacing power supplies
IN THIS SECTION
Power supply replacement cautions ............................................................................... 795

Power supply front view .................................................................................................. 797
Power supply locking mechanism ................................................................................... 798
15.1 Pow er supply replacement cautions
CAUTION! It is recommended that a certified electrical technician perform the replacement

procedure when you are replacing power supplies while your system is powered and on-line.
When replacing both primary and secondary power supply units, begin by replacing the
secondary power supplies first. After the secondary unit is re-installed and turned ON, indicator
lights illuminate indicating that you have power on the secondary power supplies. Make sure the
secondary power supply units are on-line before removal of the primary units.
Proceed by turning the power OFF of the primary power supplies. The primary power supplies fail
over to the secondary power supplies allowing replacement of both power supplies to be
accomplished without taking the system off-line. Install the replacement power supplies and
reapply power to the primary power supply unit.
Both primary and secondary power supply units can be replaced by using the following
procedure.
15.1.1 To replace redundant power supplies

1. Turn the power OFF at the power supply by switching the circuit breaker on the DIN rail to the
OFF position.
2. Remove the power cable from the bottom of the power supply by releasing the terminal block
levers, then pull the cable downward from the power supply terminal block. Repeat this Step
for the output cable.
3. Loosen the power supply locking mechanism which is located at the bottom of the power
supply (see Power Supply Locking Mechanism (see page 798)).
Note: A medium size slotted head screwdriver is necessary to loosen the locking mechanism.
4. After the locking mechanism has been loosened, lift the power supply from the rail assembly.
5. Install the replacement power supply on the power supply DIN rail.
6. Make sure the replacement power supply is fitted securely on the DIN rail assembly by
checking that the locking mechanism is engaged.
OW350_R1150 795
15.1 Power supply replacement cautions
7. Make sure the circuit breaker is in the OFF position before attaching power cabling to the
power supply.
8. Re-attach the power cables by inserting the power supply cables into the connector terminals
of the power supply.
Note: Ensure that the color coding is maintained on the power supplies. Refer to the redundant
power supplies for the color coding.
9. Make sure that the cable connector secures the cables from falling out of the terminals. Also,
make sure that lever arms are engaged.
10. If all wires are tight, you can re-apply power by switching the circuit breaker of the power
supply to the ON position. This completes the power supply replacement process.
796 OW350_R1150
15.2 Power supply front view
15.2 Pow er supply front view
The following figure illustrates the front view of the power supply:
Figure 229: Power Supply Front View
OW350_R1150 797
15.3 Power supply locking mechanism
15.3 Pow er supply locking mechanism
A locking mechanism, located at the bottom on the power supply, holds the power supply firmly to
the DIN rail. Using a slotted head screwdriver to pull down the lever arm to release the power
supply from the rail assembly. Lift the unit from the rail assembly while the lever arm is pulled
down.
To re-attach the power supply, engage the top the power supply to the rail and push the bottom of
the power supply onto the rail.
798 OW350_R1150
S E C T I O N 16
16 Using an external power supply
IN THIS SECTION
What is an external supply? ............................................................................................ 799

To prepare for connecting an external power supply ...................................................... 800
16.1 What is an external su pply?
Some Ovation I/O modules require an auxiliary power supply. Auxiliary power may be obtained
either from the internal auxiliary power supply (backplane), or from an external power supply.
The auxiliary power is bussed along an entire branch of I/O modules. All I/O modules within a
branch MUST use the same auxiliary power voltage for proper operation. External auxiliary power
can be applied to each branch individually.
If an Ovation I/O module is to be connected to an external power supply, perform the following
procedure BEFORE connecting the power supply to the Ovation module and powering it up.
Note: Using external auxiliary power with the Relay Output module is not recommend. Instead,
use the Ovation internal auxiliary supply for relay coil power.
OW350_R1150 799
16.2 To prepare for connecting an external power supply
16.2 To prepare for connecting an external pow er suppl y
CAUTION! Using an external power supply may introduce dangerous voltages to an I/O
cabinet. Do NOT apply external power to a cabinet until the appropriate internal auxiliary
power supply fuses have been removed and the required fuse covers have been installed.
1. Identify the specific I/O branch to which the Ovation I/O module is assigned and the back
panel (CBO) or transition panel (ROP or TND) associated with the I/O branch (see the
following figures for panel locations).
Figure 230: Locations of CBO, ROP, and TND Cabinet Panels
800 OW350_R1150
Figure 231: Location of ROP Panel in Cabinet Backs
1. If the I/O branch is associated with a transition panel, perform the following:
a) If the transition panel has a cover, remove it in order to expose the fuses.
b) Remove the pair of round plug-in fuses located nearest the I/O branch that you identified
in Step 1.
c) Replace the transition panel cover (where applicable) after the fuses are removed. A fuse
cover kit is not required for transition panels that have a cover. However, if the transition
panel does not have a cover, then fuse cover caps (5A26371H20) are required.
OW350_R1150 801
Note: Fuse cover caps are required only if the external power supply output voltage is greater
than 60 VDC, 42 VAC peak or 30 VAC rms.
Figure 232: Auxiliary Power Supply Fuse Locations for ROP and TND Panels
2. If the I/O branch is associated with a back-plane (CBO), perform the following:
a) Identify the artwork level of the backplane.
802 OW350_R1150
b) Determine what fuse cover kit is needed for the backplane:

 1C31213G01 for artwork level 3CBO and earlier.
 1C31213G02 for artwork level 5CBO and later.
a) Remove the pair of round plug-in fuses located nearest the I/O branch that
you identified in Step 1.
b) Install the appropriate fuse cover kit over the fuse sockets from where the
fuses were removed.
Note: The fuse cover kit is required only if the external power supply output voltage is greater
than 60 VDC, 42 VAC peak or 30 VAC rms.
3. After the fuse covers are securely installed, connect the external voltage power supply
positive (+) and negative (-) outputs to the Ovation I/O module base unit terminal block PS+
(A17 or B17) and PS- (A18) terminals. Once the external power supply is connected to the
base unit terminal block and is powered up, the entire I/O branch has access to the external
power supply voltage.
Note: Base unit terminal block locations A17 (PS+) and B17 (PS+) are connected to the same
potential within the base unit.
OW350_R1150 803
Index
AUI Cable (5A26147) • 772

1 Automatic calibration problems - (RVP) • 678
16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input module
B
(Windows Ovation 3.4 and above) • 133
Backup to Primary status transition - (RVP) •
3 635
32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Base assemblies - (FRO) • 448
Input module (Windows Ovation 3.4 and Base assemblies - (RO) • 424
above) • 375 Base assemblies - (ROCM) • 437
32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital Base unit layouts - (FRO) • 451
Output module (Windows Ovation 3.4 and Base unit layouts - (RO) • 428
above) • 458 Base unit layouts - (ROCM) • 441
Blown Fuse Detection - (RDI) • 204
A Blown Fuse Detection Circuit - (DO) • 392
Blown fuse detection circuit - (FRO) • 455
Acceleration Calculations • 620
Blown fuse detection circuit - (ROCM) • 442
Active pulse source count field connections -
Blown fuse detection circuit (RO) • 434
(PA) • 536
Bus interface modules • 18
Active pulse source count field connections
(CE Mark) - (PA) • 542 C
AD/DA Conversion and Timing - (SVD) • 555
Adding OCR400 Controllers to WDPF Q- Cable assembly routing - (RDI) • 195
Line I/O • 773 Cable assembly routing configuration
Analog card types • 783 (Redundant) - (AO) • 151
Analog I/O connection - (RVP) • 666 Cable impedances in field wiring - (CCDI) •
Analog I/O connection (CE Mark) - (RVP) • 244
669 Cable impedances in field wiring -
Analog I/O Connection AC LVT Channel 1 - (ContactDI) • 234
(SVD) • 589 Calibrate mode - (ERVP) • 696
Analog I/O Connection AC LVT Channel 1 Calibrate mode - (RVP) • 641
(CE Mark) - (SVD) • 593 Calibrate mode - (SVD) • 557
Analog I/O Connection AC LVT Channel 2 - Calibrating redundant LVTs - (SVD) • 562
(SVD) • 590 Calibration - (ERVP) • 654
Analog I/O Connection AC LVT Channel 2 Calibration goals - (ERVP) • 658
(CE Mark) - (SVD) • 594 Calibration Ideal - (ERVP) • 655
Analog I/O Connection DC LVDT Channel 2 Calibration ideal - (SVD) • 561
- (SVD) • 588 Calibration procedure - (SVD) • 560
Analog I/O Connection DC LVDT Channel 2 Calibration Required - (ERVP) • 655
(CE Mark) - (SVD) • 592 Calibration required - (SVD) • 559
Analog I/O example using 3-Wire LVRT - CE Mark accuracy considerations • 793
(RVP) • 667 CE Mark Certified system definition • 792
Analog I/O example using a 3-Wire LVRT CE Mark specifications • 791
(CE Mark) - (VP) • 670 Channel assignments - (ERVP) • 697
Analog Input module (13-Bit) - (AI-13) • 39 Channel Enable/Mask Register - 16 Channel
Analog Input module (14-Bit) - (AI-14) • 53 4-20mA Analog Input • 140
Analog Input modules • 7, 39 Channel Status Register - 16 Channel 4-
Analog Output module - (AO) • 145 20mA Analog Input • 141
Analog Output modules • 11, 145 Channel Status Register - 32 Channel 24V
Analog Signal Noise Rejection • 717 DC Single-Ended Digital Output • 461
Analog Signal Shielding Techniques • 720 Common cabinet components (Controller,
Assemblies - SLIM • 609 remote node, and extended cabinet) • 740
Common cabinet configurations • 748
OW350_R1150 805
Index
Compact Contact Digital Input module - Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (ContactDI) •
(CCDI) • 240 238
Compact Digital Input module - (CompactDI) Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (DI) • 190
• 207 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (DO) • 408
Configuration parameters - (RVP) • 646 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (ECSOEDI) •
Configuration Register 13 definitions - 372
(ERVP) • 702 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (FRO) • 455
Connecting the AUI Cable • 765 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (HAI) • 97
Contact Digital Input module - (ContactDI) • Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (HAO) • 165
229 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (HHPAI) • 113
Contact input monitoring circuits - (ROCM) • Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (HHPAO) •
445 179
Contingency Check Error - (RVP) • 674 Diagnostic Logic Card LEDs - (LI) • 526
Control mode - (ERVP) • 692 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (PA) • 549
Control mode - (RVP) • 637 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (RDI) • 205
Controller backplane (CBO) for the OCR161 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (ROCM) • 443
• 739 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (RTD-4) • 123
Controller backplane (OCR400 Controller) • Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (RTD-8) • 131
737 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (RVP) • 679
Controller cabinet components (Remote I/O) Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (SD) • 625
(OCR161 Controller) • 757 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs -
Controller cabinet components (Remote I/O) (SECompactDI) • 300
(OCR400 Controller) • 754 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (SEDI) -
Controller cabinet components and cabling (SECompactDI) • 262, 270
(local and remote I/O) (OCR161 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (SVD) • 601
Controller) • 749 Diagnostic Logic Card LEDs - Ethernet Link
Controller cabinet components and cabling Controller • 495
(local and remote I/O) (OCR400 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - Foundation
Controller) • 748 Fieldbus • 481
Controller interface - (SVD) • 567 Diagnostic Logic card LEDs (RO) • 434
Controller interfaces, OCR400 and OCR161 Diagnostics - (ERVP) • 707
• 734 Diagnostics - (HSDO) • 420
Controller Primary/Backup Status Override - Diagnostics - (RVP) • 674
(RVP) • 645 Diagnostics - (SVD) • 596
Controller Watchdog Timer - (SVD) • 597 Diagnostics - 32 Channel 24V DC Single-
Copyright Notice • 2 Ended Digital Output • 463
Cross Cable in Place Circuit - (RDI) • 205 Diagnostics - Numalogic Fast Ethernet • 710
Diagnostics of LVDT problems (redundant) -
D (RVP) • 676
DA readback error - (RVP) • 674 Digital card types • 786
Daisy-Chain Control of I/O Branches • 766 Digital Input module - (DI) • 182
Defining and addressing the I/O for the Digital Input modules • 12, 181
OCR161 and OCR400 • 723 Digital Output module - (DO) • 382
Demodulator gain - (RVP) • 677 Digital Output modules • 17, 381
DeviceNet module • 466 Disarm during Backup mode - (RVP) • 636
Diagnostic LEDs • 779 Dual Channel / Backup Feedback Enable -
Diagnostic LEDs - 16 Channel 4-20mA (ERVP) • 701
Analog Input • 142
E
Diagnostic LEDs - 32 Channel 24V DC
Single-Ended Digital Input • 378 EEPROM Checksum - (SVD) • 597
Diagnostic LEDs - DeviceNet • 472 Electrical noise and causes • 713
Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (AI-13, AI-14 & Electronic Module (Emod) and Personality
HSAI) • 51, 61, 84 Module (Pmod) I/O combinations • 5
Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (AO) • 153 Electronics module (Emod) - (ERVP) • 682
Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (CCDI) • 250 Electronics module connectors - Numalogic
Diagnostic Logic card LEDs - (CompactDI) • Fast Ethernet • 710
227 Electronics Module Fuses • 27
806 OW350_R1150
Index
Electronics modules (Emod) - (AI-13) • 39 Enhanced Compact Sequence of Events

Electronics modules (Emod) - (AI-14) • 53 Digital Input module (5X00357G01) (FDJ)
Electronics modules (Emod) - (AO) • 146 - (ECSOEDI) • 307
Electronics modules (Emod) - (CCDI) • 241 Enhanced Compact Sequence of Events
Electronics modules (Emod) - (CompactDI) • Digital Input module (5X00357G02) (FDI) -
207 (ECSOEDI) • 317
Electronics modules (Emod) - (ContactDI) • Enhanced Compact Sequence of Events
230 Digital Input module (5X00357G03) (FDI) -
Electronics modules (Emod) - (DI) • 182 (ECSOEDI) • 331
Electronics modules (Emod) - (DO) • 382 Enhanced Compact Sequence of Events
Electronics modules (Emod) - (ECSOEDI) • Digital Input module (5X00357G04) (FCI) -
305 (ECSOEDI) • 344
Electronics modules (Emod) - (HAI) • 86 Enhanced Compact Sequence of Events
Electronics modules (Emod) - (HAO) • 156 Digital Input module (5X00357G05)
Electronics modules (Emod) - (HHPAI) • 99 (FDW) - (ECSOEDI) • 355
Electronics modules (Emod) - (HHPAO) • Enhanced Valve Positioner module - (ERVP)
168 • 682
Electronics modules (Emod) - (HSAI) • 63 Environmental Specifications - (ECSOEDI) •
Electronics modules (Emod) - (HSDO) • 410 374
Electronics modules (Emod) - (LC) • 497 EPROM Checksum Error - (RVP) • 674
Electronics modules (Emod) - (LI) • 499 EPROM Checksum Error - (SVD) • 597
Electronics modules (Emod) - (PA) • 527 Ethernet Link Controller • 489
Electronics modules (Emod) - (RDI) • 193 Event buffer read procedure - (ECSOEDI) •
Electronics modules (Emod) - (RO) • 424, 367
447 Example of typical MAU cable connections
Electronics modules (Emod) - (ROCM) • 437 to Remote Nodes (OCR161 Controller) •
Electronics modules (Emod) - (RTD-4) • 114 770
Electronics modules (Emod) - (RTD-8) • 124 Example of typical MAU cable connections
Electronics modules (Emod) - (RVP) • 627 to Remote Nodes (OCR400 Controller) •
Electronics modules (Emod) - (SD) • 610 769
Electronics modules (Emod) - Examples of Controller cabinet I/O module
(SECompactDI) • 273 addresses • 729
Electronics modules (Emod) - (SEContactDI) Examples of extended I/O cabinet module
• 264 addresses • 730
Electronics modules (Emod) - (SEDI) • 253 Examples of Relay Output module
Electronics modules (Emod) - (SVD) • 553 addresses • 732
Electronics modules (Emod) - 16 Channel 4- Examples of remote node I/O cabinet
20mA Analog Input • 133 module addresses • 731
Electronics modules (Emod) - 32 Channel Extended I/O cabinet components • 759
24V DC Single-Ended Digital Input • 375 External power supplies - (AI-14) • 54
Electronics modules (Emod) - 32 Channel External power supply information - (AI-13) •
24V DC Single-Ended Digital Output • 458 41
Emod - Pmod Combinations • 23 External Power Supply Information -
Emod and base assembly combinations - (CompactDI) • 208
(ROCM) • 438 External power supply information - (DO) •
EMOD backplane connectors - DeviceNet • 383
471 External power supply information - (FRO) •
EMOD backplane connectors - Ethernet Link 448
Controller • 493 External power supply information - (HAI) •
EMOD backplane connectors - Foundation 89
Fieldbus • 479 External power supply information - (HAO) •
EMOD backplane connectors - Profibus 158
(DP) • 486 External power supply information - (HSAI) •
Enhanced Compact Sequence of Events 64
Digital Input module - (ECSOEDI) • 304 External power supply information - (LI) •
504
OW350_R1150 807
Index
External power supply information - (ROCM) Field connection wiring diagrams - (AI-13) •
• 438 44
External power supply information - Field connection wiring diagrams - (AI-14) •
(SECompactDI) • 274 57
External power supply information - (SEDI) • Field connection wiring diagrams -
253 (CompactDI) • 211
External power supply information Field connection wiring diagrams -
(5X00357G01 - G05) - (ECSOEDIG01, (ContactDI) • 235
G02, G03, G05) • 314, 329, 341, 364 Field connection wiring diagrams - (DI) • 187
External power supply information (RO) • Field connection wiring diagrams - (FRO) •
425 452
External power supply information Field connection wiring diagrams - (HAI) • 91
differential (front end) - (DI) • 185 Field connection wiring diagrams - (HHPAI) •
External power supply information single- 106
ended (front end) - (DI) • 184 Field connection wiring diagrams - (PA) •
External power supply usage • 799 532
Field connection wiring diagrams - (RDI) •
F 194
Features - SLIM • 604 Field Connection Wiring Diagrams - (SD) •
Features of the Ovation Bus modules • 465 614
Feedback • 700 Field connection wiring diagrams -
Fiber-Optic Cable (3A98763 - Green) (SEContactDI) • 269
(3A98764 - Yellow) • 772 Field connection wiring diagrams - (SEDI) •
Field connection diagrams - (HSAI) • 71 259
Field connection wiring - 5X00357G01 • 310 Field connection wiring diagrams - 16
Field connection wiring (5X00357G02) - Channel 4-20mA Analog Input (2-Wire) •
(ECSOEDI) • 321 137
Field connection wiring (5X00357G03) - Field connection wiring diagrams - 16
(ECSOEDI) • 335 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input (4-Wire) •
Field connection wiring (5X00357G04) - 138
(ECSOEDI) • 349 Field connection wiring diagrams - 32
Field connection wiring (5X00357G05) - Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital
(ECSOEDI) • 359 Input • 377
Field connection wiring (CE Mark) - (LI) • Field connection wiring diagrams
516 (1C31129G01/G02) (simplex) - (AO) • 148
Field connection wiring diagram - 32 Field connection wiring diagrams
Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital (1C31129G02) (Redundant) - (AO) • 150
Output • 460 Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark)
Field connection wiring diagram - (DO) • 398 - (AI-13) • 45
Field connection wiring diagram - (LI) • 507 Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark)
Field connection wiring diagram - (ROCM) • - (AI-14) • 58
443 Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark)
Field connection wiring diagram - (RVP) • - (AO) • 149
Field Connection Wiring Diagram (Active - (CCDI) • 247
Probe) (CE Mark) - (SD) • 616 Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark)
Field connection wiring diagram (CE Mark) - (CompactDI) • 219
(G04) - (SECompactDI) • 296 Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark)
Field connection wiring diagram (G04) - - (ContactDI) • 236
(SECompactDI) • 294 Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark)
Field connection wiring diagram (Group 1) - (DI) • 188
(CE Mark) - (DO) • 399 Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark)
Field Connection Wiring Diagram (Passive - (HAI) • 92
Probe) (CE Mark) - (SD) • 616 Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark)
Field connection wiring diagrams - (HAO) • - (HAO) • 161
- (HHPAI) • 108
808 OW350_R1150
Index
Field Connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark) Field wiring (5X00357G04) - (ECSOEDI) •
- (HHPAO) • 173 346
Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark) Field wiring (5X00357G04) (contact) -
- (PA) • 540 (ECSOEDI) • 347
Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark) Field wiring (5X00357G05) - (ECSOEDI) •
- (RO) • 431 358
Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark) Field Wiring (Pmod 1C31164G02) - (RTD-4)
- (RVP) • 668 • 119
Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark) Field wiring cable lengths - (CCDI) • 243
- (SEContactDI) • 270 Field wiring cable lengths - (ContactDI) • 232
Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark) Field wiring cable lengths - (SEContactDI) •
- (SEDI) • 260 267
Field connection wiring diagrams (CE Mark) Field wiring cable lengths (G04) -
(G01-3) - (SECompactDI) • 287 (SECompactDI) • 276
Field Connection wiring diagrams (Emod) - Field wiring cable requirements - (HAI) • 93
(HHPAO) • 172 Field wiring cable requirements - (HAO) •
Field connection wiring diagrams (front end) 162
- (ContactDI) • 233 Field wiring cable requirements - (HHPAI) •
Field connection wiring diagrams (Pmod 106
1C31116) - (HSAI) • 74 Field wiring cable requirements - (HHPAO) •
Field connection wiring diagrams (Pmod 176
1C31227) - (HSAI) • 72 Field wiring configuration considerations -
Field connection wiring diagrams (Pmod (DI) • 187
1C31227) (CE Mark) - (HSAI) • 73 Field wiring configuration considerations -
Field Connection wiring diagrams (Pmod (SEDI) • 256
5X00211G03) - (HHPAO) • 174 Field wiring considerations - (CompactDI) •
Field Connection wiring diagrams (Pmod 210
5X00211G03) (CE Mark) - (HHPAO) • 175 Field wiring diagram - (HHPAI) • 101
Field Connection Wiring Diagrams DC LVDT Field wiring diagram (CE Mark) - (HHPAI) •
Channel 1 - (SVD) • 587 103
Field connection wiring diagrams Field Field wiring diagrams - (CCDI) • 245
Interface module (G01-3) - Field Wiring Diagrams - (SEContactDI) • 266
(SECompactDI) • 280 Field wiring diagrams (Pmod 1C31164G02)
Field connection wiring diagrams for the (CE Mark) - (RTD-4) • 120
Relay Output module • 430 Field wiring diagrams configuration - (SEDI)
Field Connection Wiring Diagrams, DC • 257
LVDT Channel 1 (CE Mark) - (SVD) • 591 Field wiring diagrams configuration (Front
Field connection wiring diagrams, Pmod end) (G04) - (SECompactDI) • 275
(Pmod 1C31116) (CE Mark) - (HSAI) • 75 Field wiring field interface restrictions (G01-
Field connection wiring Individually Fused G03) - (SECompactDI) • 276
(5X00357G02) - (ECSOEDI) • 324 Field wiring restrictions - (CCDI) • 242
Field connection wiring Individually Fused Field wiring restrictions - (ContactDI) • 231
(5X00357G03) - (ECSOEDI) • 338 Field wiring restrictions - (SEContactDI) •
Field interface - (SECompactDI) • 276 265
Field interface - (SEDI) • 254 Field Wiring Restrictions (G04) -
Field power shutoff - (HSDO) • 416 (SECompactDI) • 277
Field power wiring information for module Firmware levels - (ERVP) • 688
base unit terminal blocks - (HSDO) • 414 Firmware levels - (RVP) • 633
Field signal wiring information - (HSDO) • Foundation Fieldbus module • 474
413 FPGA Error - (SVD) • 597
Field wiring (5X00357G01) - (ECSOEDI) • Functional block diagram - (RDI) • 197
309 Fused Relay Output modules - (FRO) • 447
Field wiring (5X00357G02) - (ECSOEDI) •
320 G
Field wiring (5X00357G03) - (ECSOEDI) • G03 Acceleration Limit and Response • 621
334 G03 Relay Closure Times • 622
OW350_R1150 809
Index
G2R Style Relay module for DIN Rail Layout

(5A22411H01) - (DO) • 391 K
G2R Style Relay module terminations KUEP (2 Form C) Relay module
(5A22411H01) - (DO) • 393 Terminations (5A22412G01) - (DO) • 395
General requirements for I/O cable • 771 KUEP (Form X) Relay module terminations
Groups and Modes - SLIM • 604 (5A22412G02) - (DO) • 396
Guidelines (Redundant) - (ERVP) • 685 KUEP Style Relay module for DIN Rail
Guidelines (Redundant) - (RVP) • 630 Layout (5A22412G01 / 5A22412G02) -
(DO) • 394
H
HART Analog Input module - (HAI) • 86 L
HART Analog Output module - (HAO) • 156 Link Controller module - (LC) • 497
HART High Performance Analog Input Local I/O • 750
module - (HHPAI) • 99 Local I/O system configuration for the
HART High Performance Analog Output OCR161 • 752
module - (HHPAO) • 168 Local I/O system configuration for the
High Side Digital Output (24 VDC) module OCR400 • 751
(for Windows Ovation 3.0.4 and above) - Local-manual mode - (ERVP) • 695
(HSDO) • 410 Local-Manual mode - (RVP) • 640
High Speed Analog Input Module (14-Bit) - Local-manual mode - (SVD) • 557
(HSAI) • 63 Logic card block diagram for the Ovation bus
HSDO to HSDO Cable Assembly Routing modules • 465
Information Redundant Configuration - Logic card diagnostic LEDs - Profibus (DP) •
(HSDO) • 415 488
I Logic Card Digital Debounce Filter
Propagation Delay - (RDI) • 202
I/O Bus Communication Timeout settings - Logic card side connector pin assignments -
(ERVP) • 699 Ovation bus modules (DP) • 466, 474,
I/O Channel Fields - (ERVP) • 698 482, 490
I/O communications cable (5A26141) • 772 Loop Interface module - (LI) • 499
I/O Dual Branch Transition Panel (ROP) • LVDT and coil setup requirements - (RVP) •
743 636
I/O environmental specifications • 30 LVDT setup requirements, redundant
I/O module features • 25 subsystem - (RVP) • 651
I/O Module general information • 25 LVDT wiring problems (6-wire LVDT) -
I/O module types • 6 (RVP) • 678
I/O reference terminology • 1
I/O system status and diagnostic LEDs • 775 M
Ignore Shutdown - (ERVP) • 700 Manual station control - (LI) • 503
Input address locations (Group 1) - (HSAI) • Marshalling Base Unit • 35
76 MAU Module • 780
Input address locations (Group 2) - (HSAI) • MAU with typical fiber-optic connector pairs
78 (OCR161 Controller) • 747
Input address locations (Group 3) - (HSAI) • MAU with typical fiber-optic connector pairs
80 (OCR400 Controller) • 746
Input address locations (Group 4) - (HSAI) • Medium speed count field connections -
82 (PA) • 535
Installing Ovation modules • 26 Memory map - (RVP) • 642
Interface - DeviceNet • 467 Memory map - (SVD) • 568
Interface - Ethernet Link Controller • 490 Memory Read/Write Check - (SVD) • 597
Interface - Foundation Fieldbus • 476 Memory Read/Write Check Error - (RVP) •
Interface - Profibus (DP) • 483 675
Introduction to the Ovation Input/Output (I/O) Modes • 691
Reference Manual • 1 Modes - (RVP) • 637
Modes of Operation - (LI) • 502
810 OW350_R1150
Index
Module and field connection wiring - (RTD-8) Noise frequency • 715

• 126 Noise minimization and causes • 713
Module and field connection wiring (CE Noise sources • 716
Mark) - (RTD-8) • 128 Noise-Sensitive Circuit Noise Rejection •
Module block - DeviceNet • 469 718
Module block diagram - (AI-14) • 59 Normal & inverse analog output - (LI) • 503
Module block diagram - (HSAI) • 69 Normal mode - (ERVP) • 696
Module block diagram - (HSDO) • 411 Normal mode - (RVP) • 640
Module block diagram - Foundation Fieldbus Normal mode - (SVD) • 557
• 478 Numalogic Fast Ethernet Remote Node
Module block diagram & DP field (Windows Ovation 3.4 and above) • 708
card/personality card - Profibus (DP) • 485
Module block diagram & field O
card/personality card - Ethernet Link On-Board Diagnostics - (ERVP) • 661
Controller • 491 On-Board diagnostics - (SVD) • 562
Module block diagram information - (HAI) • One pair of servo coil wires, wired incorrectly
88 - (RVP) • 678
Module block diagrams - (HAO) • 157 One shot function - (ECSOEDI) • 306
Module Block Diagrams - (HHPAO) • 169 Online replacement - (RVP) • 676
Module block diagrams - (RDI) • 196 Open coil diagnostic error - (RVP) • 675
Module cables for High Side Digital Output Open loop detect register - (HAO) • 162
24VDC - (HSDO) • 415 Operating Temperature - (ROCM) • 438
Module channel fault register - (HSDO) • 416 Operation - (SVD) • 555
Module Configuration / Status Register 13 Output Signal Noise Rejection • 717
Status - (ERVP) • 702 Ovation Cabinet Fuses • 29
Module Configuration / Status Register (0xd) Ovation I/O Single Branch Transition Panels
Configuration - (ERVP) • 702 • 744
Module Groups - (LI) • 500 Ovation Module Configuration and Status •
Module modes - (SVD) • 556 26
Module register information - (HSAI) • 84 Ovation Module Diagnostic LEDs • 27
Module Serial connection - (ERVP) • 688 Ovation Power Distribution Module (PDM) •
Module Serial Connection - (RVP) • 633 740
Module-base unit interconnection Ovation Standard I/O Modules and Base
(5X00357G02) - (ECSOEDI) • 318 Units • 741
Module-base unit interconnection Overview • 708
(5X00357G03) - (ECSOEDI) • 332 Overview - (LC) • 497
Module-base unit interconnection Overview - (LI) • 499
(5X00357G04) - (ECSOEDI) • 345 Overview - (PA) • 527
Module-base unit interconnection Overview - (RVP) • 627
(5X00357G05) - (ECSOEDI) • 356 Overview - (SD) • 610
Module-base unit interconnection Overview - (SVD) • 553
(5X00357G05) (individually fused) - Overview - SLIM • 603
(ECSOEDI) • 357 Overview (ERVP) • 682
Module-base unit interconnection
(Individually Fused) (5X00357G02) - P
(ECSOEDI) • 319
Packed point card types • 788
Module-base unit interconnection diagram
Panel kits - (RO) • 425
(5X00357G01) - (ECSOEDI) • 308
Performing calibration - (SVD) • 559
Module-base unit interconnection
Performing calibration using a graphic -
individually Fused (5X00357G03) -
(ERVP) • 658
(ECSOEDI) • 333
Performing Redundant VP calibration -
N (ERVP) • 662
Personality Jumper Information - (HHPAI) •
New power distribution scheme • 774 109
Noise classes • 716 Personality Module (Pmod) - (CCDI) • 241
Noise Discrimination • 714 Personality module (Pmod) - (ERVP) • 683
Noise energy level • 714 Personality module fuses • 28
OW350_R1150 811
Index
Personality Module Jumpers • 29 Power supply front view • 797

Personality modules (Emod) - Power supply information - (HHPAI) • 104
(SEContactDI) • 264 Power supply locking mechanism • 798
Personality modules (Pmod) - (AI-14) • 54 Power supply replacement cautions • 795
Personality modules (Pmod) - (AO) • 146 Primary to Backup status transition - (RVP) •
Personality modules (Pmod) - (CompactDI) • 635
207 Primary/backup status transitions - (ERVP) •
Personality modules (Pmod) - (ContactDI) • 690
230 Priority Raise and Lower - (LI) • 503
Personality modules (Pmod) - (DI) • 182 Profibus DP module (DP) • 482
Personality modules (Pmod) - (DO) • 382 Proper Grounding and Shielding • 719
Personality modules (Pmod) - (ECSOEDI) • Pulse Accumulator module - (PA) • 527
305
Personality modules (Pmod) - (HAI) • 87 Q
Personality modules (Pmod) - (HAO) • 156 Q-Line card types • 783
Personality modules (Pmod) - (HHPAI) • 100 Q-Line I/O module addressing • 733
Personality modules (Pmod) - (HHPAO) •
168 R
Personality modules (Pmod) - (HSAI) • 63
Ranges - (RTD-8) • 129
Personality modules (Pmod) - (HSDO) • 410
Redundancy module - Foundation Fieldbus •
Personality modules (Pmod) - (LC) • 497
477
Personality modules (Pmod) - (LI) • 499
Redundancy module - Profibus (DP) • 484
Personality modules (Pmod) - (PA) • 528
Redundant Digital Input module (Windows
Personality modules (Pmod) - (RDI) • 193
Ovation 3.2 and above) - (RDI) • 192
Personality modules (Pmod) - (RTD-4) • 115
Redundant module interconnection -
Personality modules (Pmod) - (RTD-8) • 124
(HSDO) • 412
Personality modules (Pmod) - (RVP) • 628
Register 10 format, command register -
Personality modules (Pmod) - (SD) • 610
(ERVP) • 706
Personality modules (Pmod) -
Register 4, 5, and 6 format (read) - (ERVP) •
(SECompactDI) • 273
705
Personality modules (Pmod) - (SEDI) • 253
Register 7, 9, and 11 format - (ERVP) • 705
Personality modules (Pmod) - (SVD) • 554
Register configuration/address information -
Personality modules (Pmod) - 16 Channel 4-
(HAO) • 163
20mA Analog Input • 134
Personality modules (Pmod) - 32 Channel
(AI-13) • 49
24V DC Single-Ended Digital Input • 375
Personality modules (Pmod) - 32 Channel
(AI-14) • 59
24V DC Single-Ended Digital Output • 458
Personality modules and jumper settings
(AO) • 151
(Pmod) - (AI-13) • 40
Physical Circuit Separation • 718
(CompactDI) • 226
PI Position Control - (RVP) • 653
PI position control - (SVD) • 564
(ContactDI) & (CCDI) • 237, 249
Placing the MAU module • 764
PMOD backplane connectors - DeviceNet •
(DI) • 189
471
PMOD backplane connectors - Ethernet Link
(DO) • 407
Controller • 494
PMOD backplane connectors - Foundation
(ECSOEDI) • 368
Fieldbus • 480
PMOD backplane connectors - Profibus
(ERVP) • 690
(DP) • 487
Power Checking (ContactDI - CCDI) • 238,
(FRO) • 453
250
Power Supply • 767
(HAI) • 96
Power Supply - Numalogic Fast Ethernet •
709
(HHPAI) • 110
812 OW350_R1150
Index
Register configuration/address information - Replacing power supplies • 795

(HHPAO) • 176 RNC Module • 781
Register configuration/address information - RS485 Magnetostrictive sensor - (ERVP) •
(HSDO) • 417 701
Register configuration/address information - RSR calibration diagrams - (SVD) • 577
(LI) • 523 RTD module (4 Channel) - (RTD-4) • 114
Register configuration/address information - RTD module (8-Channel) - (RTD-8) • 124
(PA) • 546 RTD ranges - (RTD-4) • 121
(RDI) • 202 S
Register configuration/address information - Seating and Backseating - (RVP) • 653
(RO) • 432 Seating, backseating, and retreat - (SVD) •
Register configuration/address information - 564
(ROCM) • 439 Selecting the I/O interface cards • 771
Register configuration/address information - Sequence of Events Compact Digital Input
(RTD-4) • 122 Field Interface module - (SECompactDI) •
Register configuration/address information - 272
(RTD-8) • 130 Sequence of Events Contact Digital Input
Register configuration/address information - Field Interface module - (SEContactDI) •
(RVP) • 672 264
Register configuration/address information - Sequence of Events Digital Input module -
(SECompactDI) • 298 (SEDI) • 252
Register configuration/address information - Serial bus watchdog timer - (SVD) • 567
(SEDI) • 261 Serial Port - SLIM • 609
Register configuration/address information - Servo Driver module - (SVD) • 553
(SVD) • 598 Setting up redundant LVTs - (SVD) • 562
Register configuration/address information Severe Errors Status Register - (SVD) • 594
for G01 - (SD) • 623 Shorted coil diagnostic - (RVP) • 675
Register configuration/address information Shutdown input (Priority Demand Input) -
for G03 - (SD) • 623 (RVP) • 654
Register configuration/status information - Signal propagation delay - (RDI) • 199
16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input • 138 Simplify diagnostics - (SVD) • 561
Register configuration/status information - SLIM modes - (ERVP) • 693
32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital SLIM Modes - (RVP) • 638
Input • 377 SLIM pushbuttons - (ERVP) • 693
Register configuration/status information - SLIM Pushbuttons - (RVP) • 638
32 Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital SLIM serial port connector - (LI) • 522
Output • 460 SLIM serial port connector - (RVP) • 671
Relay activation for G03 • 620 Small Loop Interface module (SLIM) • 603
Relay module components • 36 Solid State Relay module for DIN Rail
Relay Output - (RO) • 424 Layout (5A22410H01 / 5A22410H02) -
Relay Output Modules and Bases • 742 (DO) • 385
Relay Output with Contact Monitoring - Solid State Relay module Terminations
(ROCM) • 437 (5A22410H01 / 5A22410H02) - (DO) • 386
Relay panel application diagrams - (DO) • Sources (Signal and Noise) • 715
404 Specialty I/O modules • 497
Relay Panels - (DO) • 383 Specialty Modules • 20
Remote I/O • 753 Specifications - (AI-13) • 52
Remote I/O features (OCR161 Controller) • Specifications - (AI-14) • 62
757 Specifications - (AO) • 154
Remote I/O features (OCR400 Controller) • Specifications - (CCDI) • 251
754 Specifications - (CompactDI) • 227
Remote node addressing switch • 766 Specifications - (ContactDI) • 239
Remote node cabinet components • 761 Specifications - (DI) • 190
Remote Node Controller (RNC) • 745 Specifications - (DO) • 408
Remote Node Transition Panel (TND) • 746 Specifications - (ERVP) • 680
Replacement precautions - (RVP) • 677 Specifications - (FRO) • 455
OW350_R1150 813
Index
Specifications - (HAI) • 98 Subsystems - (AI-14) • 54

Specifications - (HAO) • 166 Subsystems - (AO) • 146
Specifications - (HHPAI) • 113 Subsystems - (CCDI) • 241
Specifications - (HHPAO) • 180 Subsystems - (CompactDI) • 208
Specifications - (HSAI) • 85 Subsystems - (ContactDI) • 230
Specifications - (HSDO) • 422 Subsystems - (DI) • 182
Specifications - (LI) • 387 Subsystems - (DO) • 382
Specifications - (PA) • 549 Subsystems - (ECSOEDI) • 306
Specifications - (RO) • 434 Subsystems - (ERVP) • 683
Specifications - (ROCM) • 444 Subsystems - (HAI) • 87
Specifications - (RTD-4) • 123 Subsystems - (HAO) • 156
Specifications - (RTD-8) • 132 Subsystems - (HHPAI) • 100
Specifications - (SD) • 625 Subsystems - (HHPAO) • 168
Specifications - (SEContactDI) • 271 Subsystems - (HSAI) • 64
Specifications - (SEDI) • 262 Subsystems - (LC) • 498
Specifications - (SVD) • 602 Subsystems - (LI) • 500
Specifications - 16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Subsystems - (PA) • 528
Input • 142 Subsystems - (RDI) • 193
Specifications - 32 Channel 24V DC Single- Subsystems - (RTD-4) • 115
Ended Digital Input • 379 Subsystems - (RTD-8) • 124
Specifications - 32 Channel 24V DC Single- Subsystems - (RVP) • 628
Ended Digital Output • 463 Subsystems - (SD) • 610
Specifications - DeviceNet • 473 Subsystems - (SECompactDI) • 274
Specifications - Ethernet Link Controller • Subsystems - (SEContactDI) • 264
495 Subsystems - (SEDI) • 253
Specifications - Foundation Fieldbus • 481 Subsystems - (SVD) • 554
Specifications - Numalogic Fast Ethernet • Subsystems - 16 Channel 4-20mA Analog
711 Input • 134
Specifications - Profibus (DP) • 489 Subsystems - 32 Channel 24V DC Single-
Specifications - SLIM • 609 Ended Digital Input • 375
Specifications (5X00357G01) - (ECSOEDI) • Subsystems - 32 Channel 24V DC Single-
315 Ended Digital Output • 458
Specifications (5X00357G02) - (ECSOEDI) • Subsystems - DeviceNet • 466
330 Subsystems - Ethernet Link Controller • 489
Specifications (5X00357G03) - (ECSOEDI) • Subsystems - Foundation Fieldbus • 474
342 Subsystems - Numalogic Fast Ethernet •
Specifications (5X00357G04) - (ECSOEDI) • 709
354 Subsystems - Profibus (DP) • 482
Specifications (5X00357G05) - (ECSOEDI) • Supported Numalogic modules • 708
365 Surge protection • 719
Specifications -(RDI) • 205 Swapping connections to affect the output -
Specifications and ranges (G01-3) - (RVP) • 671
(SECompactDI) • 301 Switching Input Voltage Current Curve -
Specifications and ranges (G04) - (RDI) • 201
(SECompactDI) • 302 Systems using (Pmod 1C31164G01) -
Speed Calculations • 619 (RTD-4) • 118
Speed Detector module - (SD) • 610
Speed Simulation • 622 T
Standard module components • 32 Temperature sensor Personality module
Start mode - (ERVP) • 692 (1C31116G04) - (HSAI) • 68
Start mode - (RVP) • 637 Terminal block pin assignments - DeviceNet
Start mode - (SVD) • 556 • 470
Status Register 1 definitions - (ERVP) • 704 Terminal block pin assignments - Ethernet
Status Register 13 definitions - (ERVP) • 703 Link Controller • 492
Status Register 14 definitions - (ERVP) • 704 Terminal block pin assignments -
Subsystem - (HSDO) • 410 Foundation Fieldbus • 478
Subsystems - (AI-13) • 40
814 OW350_R1150
Index
Terminal block pin assignments - Profibus Terminal block wiring information (Pmod
(DP) • 485 1C31164G01) - (RTD-4) • 115
Terminal block wiring information - (AI-13) • Terminal block wiring information (Pmod
42 1C31164G02) - (RTD-4) • 116
Terminal block wiring information - (AI-14) • Terminal block wiring information (Pmod
55 5X00121G01) - (RTD-8) • 125
Terminal block wiring information - (AO) • Terminal block wiring information (RO) • 427
147 Terminal block wiring information 16
Terminal block wiring information - (CCDI) • Channel 4-20mA Analog Input (2-Wire) •
241 134
Terminal block wiring information - Thermocouple Personality module
(CompactDI) • 209 functionality & coefficients - (AI-13) &
Terminal block wiring information - (HSAI) • 46, 65
(ContactDI) • 230 Three wire sensor field connections - (PA) •
Terminal block wiring information - (DI) • 186 538
Terminal block wiring information - (DO) • Three wire sensor field connections (CE
397 Mark) - (PA) • 544
Terminal block wiring information - (FRO) • To modify an external Ovation networks
450 device • 771
Terminal block wiring information - (HAI) • 90 To modify an I/O device • 771
Terminal block wiring information - (HAO) • To perform calibration using a graphic -
159 (ERVP) • 658
Terminal block wiring information - (HHPAI) • To perform the calibration procedure using
105 the serial port - (ERVP) • 657
Terminal block wiring information - (HHPAO) To prepare for connecting an external power
• 171 supply • 800
Terminal block wiring information - (HSAI) • To replace redundant power supplies • 795
70 To simplify diagnostics - (ERVP) • 660
Terminal block wiring information - (LI) • 505 Troubleshooting - (RVP) • 676
Terminal block wiring information - (PA) • Tuning constant commands - (SVD) • 573
530 Twisted-Pair Wiring • 718
Terminal block wiring information - (RDI) • Types of the Ovation bus module • 465
193 Typical Remote Node Cabinet • 763
Terminal block wiring information - (ROCM) •
442 U
Terminal block wiring information - (RVP) • UART Check - (SVD) • 597
663 Update rate and settings for G01 - (SD) •
Terminal Block Wiring Information - (SD) • 617
613 Using bases - (FRO) • 449
Terminal block wiring information - Using bases (RO) • 426
(SECompactDI) • 279 Using the Graphic Interface for Calibration
Terminal block wiring information - (Channel 1 and 2) - (SVD) • 582
(SEContactDI) • 268 Using the Graphic Interface for Calibration
Terminal block wiring information - (SEDI) • (Common) - (SVD) • 580
255 Using the serial port for calibration and
Terminal Block Wiring Information - (SVD) • settings - (SVD) • 558
585 Using the Serial Port for Calibration
Terminal block wiring information - 16 Connections - (ERVP) • 656
Channel Analog Input 4-20mA (4-Wire) • Using the serial port for calibration
135 connections - (SVD) • 558
Terminal block wiring information - 32 Using the Serial Port for Calibration Settings
Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital - (ERVP) • 656
Input • 376
Terminal block wiring information - 32 V
Channel 24V DC Single-Ended Digital
Valve position control - (SVD) • 563
Output • 459
Valve Positioner module - (RVP) • 627
Valve wired backwards - (RVP) • 678
OW350_R1150 815
Index
Voltage-current curve - (RDI) • 200 Wiring diagram to relay module (KUEP style
Voltage-current curve (5X00357G01) - remotely powered (CE Mark) - (DO) • 403
(ECSOEDI) • 315 Wiring diagram to relay module (KUEP
Voltage-current curve (5X00357G02) - Style) locally powered (CE Mark) - (DO) •
(ECSOEDI) • 329 402
Voltage-current curve (5X00357G03) - Wiring information - (SECompactDI) • 274
(ECSOEDI) • 341 Wiring information - (SEDI) • 253
Voltage-current curve (5X00357G05) -
(ECSOEDI) • 365
W
WARNING - Notes for GE 4-wire and 5-wire
single LVDT connections - (ERVP) • 661
What are some Common Input
Considerations? • 722
What are the guidelines for positioning I/O
modules in cabinets? • 726
What are the OCR161 Controller cabinet
components and interfaces • 737
What are the Ovation Controller I/O
interfaces? • 734
What are the Ovation I/O module base
types? • 725
What are the processor module status LEDs
for the OCR400 and OCR1100
Controllers? • 778
What changes can you make to an I/O
device? • 771
What do the OCR161 PCQL card status
LEDs indicate? • 775
What do the OCR161 PCRL card status
What do the OCR161 PCRR card status
What is a relay output module base? • 725
What is a standard I/O module base? • 725
What is an external supply? • 799
What is an Ovation I/O module address? •
726
What is involved in the Replacement of User
Serviceable Fuses? • 27
What is the addressing format for I/O
modules? • 727
What is the process for planning the I/O for
your system? • 724
What is the purpose of Ovation I/O
modules? • 1
What types of digital signal noise rejection
are used? • 717
Wire break detect function - (ECSOEDI) •
306
Wiring - SLIM • 608
Wiring diagram to relay module (G2R or
Solid State) - (DO) • 401
Wiring diagram to relay module (G2R or
Solid State) locally powered - (DO) • 400
816 OW350_R1150

Ow350 R1150 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Ow350 R1150 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Ovation I/O Reference Manual

(For use with Ovation 3.5 systems)

1 Introduction to the Ovation Input/Output (I/O) Reference Manual 1

2 Electronic Module (Emod) and Personality Module (Pmod) I/O

3 I/O Module general information 25

4 Analog Input modules 39

4.1.9 Register configuration/address information - (AI-13) ........................................... 49

4.5.5 Field wiring diagram (CE Mark) - (HHPAI) ......................................................... 103

5 Analog Output modules 145

6 Digital Input modules 181

6.2.6 Cable assembly routing - (RDI) .......................................................................... 195

6.6.2 Personality modules (Pmod) - (SEDI) ................................................................ 253

6.9.7 Enhanced Compact Sequence of Events Digital Input module (5X00357G02)

7 Digital Output modules 381

7.1.23 Register configuration/address information - (DO) ............................................ 407

7.5.7 Field connection wiring diagrams - (FRO) ......................................................... 452

8 Features of the Ovation Bus modules 465

8.5.8 PMOD backplane connectors - Profibus (DP) ................................................... 487

9 Specialty I/O modules 497

9.4 Servo Driver module - (SVD) .......................................................................................... 553

9.6.16 Register configuration/address information for G01 - (SD) ................................ 623

9.8.22 Status Register 13 definitions - (ERVP) ............................................................. 703

10 Noise minimization and causes 713

11.4 Controller interfaces, OCR400 and OCR161 .................................................................. 734

11.14 Adding OCR400 Controllers to WDPF Q-Line I/O .......................................................... 773

12 I/O system status and diagnostic LEDs 775

13 Q-Line card types 783

14 CE Mark specifications 791

15 Replacing power supplies 795

16 Using an external power supply 799

1 Introduction to the Ovation Input/Output (I/O)

What is the purpose of Ovation I/O modules? .................................................................... 1

1.1 What is the purpose of Ovation I/O modules?

The standard modular components typically consist of the following:

1.2 I/O reference terminology

2 Electronic Module (Emod) and Personality Module

What are the I/O module types? ......................................................................................... 6

2.1 What are the I/O module types?

Analog Input modules (see page 7)

2.1.1 Analog Input modules

RANGE CHNLS ELECTRONICS PERSONALITY

± 50mV Compensated (Thermocouple) 3 1 1C31116G04

Analog Input subsystems (14-bit)

RANGE CHANNELS ELECTRONICS PERSONALITY

High Speed Analog Input subsystems (14-bit )

RANGE CHANNELS ELECTRONICS PERSONALITY

4 - 20mA, Field or Locally powered 8 1,2 1C31227G01

± 1mA 4wire field powered 8 1,2 1C31116G02

± 20mV, 50mV, 100 (Thermocouple) 8 1 1C31116G04

± 20mV, 50mV, 100 (Thermocouple) 8 2 1C31116G04

RANGE CHANNELS ELECTRONICS PERSONALITY

4-20 mA loop powered (2 wire) or active source 8 1 5X00059G01

HART High Performance Analog Input subsystems (16-bit)

RANGE CHANNELS ELECTRONICS PERSONALITY

RTD (4 Channel) module subsystems

RANGE CHANNELS ELECTRONICS PERSONALITY

All 4 1C31161G01 1C31164G01

CHANNELS ELECTRONICS MODULE PERSONALITY MODULE

16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input subsystems

DESCRIPTION CHANNELS ELECTRONICS PERSONALITY MODULE

16 Channel 4-20mA Analog Input, 2- 16 5X00501G01 5X00502G01

2.1.2 Analog Output modules

Analog Output subsystems